Dell Command Line

Reference Guide for

the S60 System
8.3.3.10
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings
NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of
your computer.
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of
data and tells you how to avoid the problem.
WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or
death.

Information in this publication is subject to change without notice.

© 2014 Dell Force10. All rights reserved.
Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is
strictly forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell™, the Dell logo, Dell Boomi™, Dell Precision™ , OptiPlex™,
Latitude™, PowerEdge™, PowerVault™, PowerConnect™, OpenManage™, EqualLogic™,
Compellent™, KACE™, FlexAddress™, Force10™ and Vostro™ are trademarks of Dell Inc. Intel®,
Pentium®, Xeon®, Core® and Celeron® are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and
other countries. AMD®is a registered trademark and AMD Opteron™, AMD Phenom™ and AMD
Sempron™ are trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows Server®,
Internet Explorer®, MS-DOS®, Windows Vista® and Active Directory® are either trademarks or
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Red Hat® and
Red Hat®Enterprise Linux® are registered trademarks of Red Hat, Inc. in the United States and/or other
countries. Novell® and SUSE® are registered trademarks of Novell Inc. in the United States and other
countries. Oracle® is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Citrix®, Xen®,
XenServer® and XenMotion® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc. in the
United States and/or other countries. VMware®, Virtual SMP®, vMotion®, vCenter® and vSphere® are
registered trademarks or trademarks of VMware, Inc. in the United States or other countries. IBM® is a
registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this publication to refer to either the entities claiming
the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade
names other than its own.

November 2014

| 3
 www.dell.com | dell.com/support

4
|
3 About this Guide13
Objectives 13
Audience 13
Conventions 13
Information Symbols 14
Related Documents 14

4 CLI Basics15
Accessing the Command Line 15
Multiple Configuration Users 16
Navigating the Command Line Interface 16
Obtaining Help 17
Using the Keyword No 19
Filtering show Commands 19
Displaying All Output 20
Filtering Command Output Multiple Times 20
Command Modes 20
EXEC Mode 21
EXEC Privilege Mode 21
CONFIGURATION Mode 21
INTERFACE Mode 21
LINE Mode 22
TRACE-LIST Mode 22
MAC ACCESS LIST Mode 22
IP ACCESS LIST Mode 23
ROUTE-MAP Mode 23
PREFIX-LIST Mode 23
AS-PATH ACL Mode 23
IP COMMUNITY LIST Mode 24
REDIRECT-LIST Mode 24
SPANNING TREE Mode 24
Per-VLAN SPANNING TREE Plus Mode 24
RAPID SPANNING TREE Mode 25
MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE Mode 25
PROTOCOL GVRP Mode 25
ROUTER OSPF Mode 25
ROUTER RIP Mode 26
ROUTER ISIS Mode 26
ROUTER BGP Mode 26
Determining the Chassis Mode 26

| 5
 5 File Management27
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Overview 27
Basic File Management Commands 27

6 Control and Monitoring67

Overview 67
Commands 67

7 802.1ag159
Overview 159
Commands 159

8 802.1X171
Important Points to Remember 171

9 Access Control Lists (ACL)187

Overview 187
Commands Common to all ACL Types 187
Common IP ACL Commands 190
Standard IP ACL Commands 193
Extended IP ACL Commands 201
Common MAC Access List Commands 232
Standard MAC ACL Commands 234
Extended MAC ACL Commands 239
IP Prefix List Commands 244
Route Map Commands 250
AS-Path Commands 269
IP Community List Commands 272

10 Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)277

Overview 277
BGPv4 Commands 278
MBGP Commands 354
BGP Extended Communities (RFC 4360) 379

11 Bare Metal Provisioning389

Overview 389
Commands 389

12 Content Addressable Memory (CAM)397

Overview 397

6 |
 CAM Profile Commands 397
Important Points to Remember 398

13 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)411

Overview 411
Commands to Configure the System to be a DHCP Server 411
Commands to Configure Secure DHCP 419

14 Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP)425

Overview 425
Commands 425
Important Points to Remember 425

15 GARP VLAN Registration (GVRP)433

Overview 433
Commands 433
Important Points to Remember 434

16 Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)443

Overview 443
IGMP Commands 443
Important Points to Remember 443
IGMP Snooping Commands 453
Important Points to Remember for IGMP Snooping 453
Important Points to Remember for IGMP Querier 454

17 Interfaces459
Overview 459
Basic Interface Commands 459
Port Channel Commands 515
UDP Broadcast 525
Important Points to Remember 525

18 IPv4 Routing529
Overview 529
Commands 529

19 IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs)581

Overview 581
Important Points to Remember 581
IPv6 ACL Commands 581

| 7
 IPv6 Route Map Commands 606
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

20 IPv6 Basics611
Overview 611
Commands 611

21 iSCSI Optimization623
Overview 623

22 Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)631

Overview 631
Commands 631

23 Layer 2639
Overview 639
MAC Addressing Commands 639
Virtual LAN (VLAN) Commands 656

24 Link Layer Detection Protocol (LLDP)667

Overview 667
Commands 667
LLDP-MED Commands 677

25 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)687

Overview 687
Commands 687

26 Multicast701
Overview 701
IPv4 Multicast Commands 701
IPv6 Multicast Commands 710

27 Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP)715

Overview 715
Commands 715

28 Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3)723

Overview 723
OSPFv2 Commands 723

8 |
29 PIM-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM)781
Overview 781
IPv4 PIM-Sparse Mode Commands 781

30 PIM-Source Specific Mode (PIM-SSM)797

Overview 797
IPv4 PIM Commands 797
IPv4 PIM-Source Specific Mode COmmands 797

31 Port Monitoring801
Overview 801
Commands 801
Important Points to Remember 801

32 Private VLAN (PVLAN)807

Overview 807
Commands 807
Private VLAN Concepts 807

33 Per-VLAN Spanning Tree plus (PVST+)817

Overview 817
Commands 817

34 Quality of Service (QoS)829

Overview 829
Global Configuration Commands 829
Per-Port QoS Commands 830
Policy-Based QoS Commands 839
Important Points to Remember—multicast-bandwidth option 853
Queue-Level Debugging 875

35 Router Information Protocol (RIP)887

Overview 887
Commands 887

36 Remote Monitoring (RMON)907

Overview 907
Commands 907

37 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)919

Overview 919

| 9
 Commands 919
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

38 Security929
Overview 929
Commands 929
AAA Accounting Commands 929
Authorization and Privilege Commands 932
Authentication and Password Commands 936
RADIUS Commands 948
TACACS+ Commands 953
Port Authentication (802.1X) Commands 956
Important Points to Remember 957
SSH Server and SCP Commands 964
Secure DHCP Commands 976

39 Service Provider Bridging981

Overview 981
Commands 981
Important Points to Remember 981

40 sFlow987
Overview 987
Important Points to Remember 987
Commands 988

41 SNMP and Syslog997

Overview 997
SNMP Commands 997
Important Points to Remember 998
Syslog Commands 1013

42 S-Series Stacking Commands1027

Overview 1027
Commands 1027

43 Storm Control1037
Overview 1037
Commands 1037
Important Points to Remember 1037

10 |
44 Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)1047
Overview 1047
Commands 1047

45 Time and Network Time Protocol (NTP)1057

Overview 1057
Commands 1057

46 S60 u-Boot1073
Overview 1073
Commands 1073

47 Uplink Failure Detection (UFD)1077

Overview 1077
Commands 1077

48 VLAN Stacking1087
Overview 1087
Commands 1087
Important Points to Remember 1087

49 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP)1097

Overview 1097
Commands 1097

50 S-Series Debugging and Diagnostics1109

Diagnostics and Monitoring Commands 1109
Offline Diagnostic Commands 1110
Important Points to Remember 1110
Buffer Tuning Commands 1112
Hardware Commands 1117

SNMP Traps 1129

| 11
 www.dell.com | dell.com/support

12
|
 3
About this Guide
This book provides information on the FTOS Command Line Interface (CLI). It includes some
information on the protocols and features found in FTOS and on the Dell Networking systems
supported by FTOS (C-Series c, E-Series e, and S-Series s).

This chapter includes:

• Objectives
• Audience
• Conventions
• Related Documents

Objectives
This document is intended as a reference guide for the FTOS command line interface (CLI) commands
used with the S60 system.

Audience
This document is intended for system administrators who are responsible for configuring or
maintaining networks. This guide assumes you are knowledgeable in Layer 2 and Layer 3 networking
technologies.

Conventions
This document uses the following conventions to describe command syntax:

Convention Description
keyword Keywords are in bold and should be entered in the CLI as listed.
parameter Parameters are in italics and require a number or word to be entered in the CLI.
{X} Keywords and parameters within braces must be entered in the CLI.
[X] Keywords and parameters within brackets are optional.
x|y Keywords and parameters separated by bar require you to choose one.
x||y Keywords and parameters separated by a double bar enables you to choose any or all of them.

About this Guide | 13

 Information Symbols
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Table 3-1 describes symbols contained in this guide.

Table 3-1. Information Symbols

Symbol Brief Description

c C-Series This symbol indicates that the selected feature is supported on the C-Series.

e E-Series This symbol indicates that the selected feature is supported on the E-Series TeraScale AND
E-Series ExaScale.

et E-Series This symbol indicates that the selected feature is supported on the E-Series TeraScale platform
TeraScale only.

ex E-Series This symbol indicates that the selected feature is supported on the E-Series ExaScale platform
ExaScale only.

s S-Series This symbol indicates that the selected feature is supported on the S-Series. Note that when a
feature is supported on all the S-Series systems, including the S60, this symbol is used.

S60 This symbol indicates that the selected feature is supported on the S60 but not on other S-Series systems.

Related Documents
For more information about the system, refer to the following documents:
• FTOS Configuration Guide for the S60
• S60 Installation Guide
• Release Notes for FTOS

14 | About this Guide

 4
CLI Basics
This chapter describes the command structure and command modes. FTOS commands are in a
text-based interface that allows you to use launch commands, change the command modes, and
configure interfaces and protocols.

This chapter covers the following topics:

• Accessing the Command Line
• Multiple Configuration Users
• Navigating the Command Line Interface
• Obtaining Help
• Using the Keyword No
• Filtering show Commands
• Command Modes

Accessing the Command Line

When the system boots successfully, you are positioned on the command line in the EXEC mode and
not prompted to log in. You can access the commands through a serial console port or a Telnet session.
When you Telnet into the switch, you are prompted to enter a login name and password.

Figure 4-1 is an example of a successful Telnet login session.

Figure 4-1. Login Example

telnet 172.31.1.53
Trying 172.31.1.53...
Connected to 172.31.1.53.
Escape character is '^]'.
Login: username
Password:
FTOS>

Once you log into the switch, the prompt provides you with current command-level information (refer
to Table 4-1).

CLI Basics | 15
 Multiple Configuration Users
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

When a user enters the CONFIGURATION mode and another user(s) is already in that configuration
mode, FTOS generates an alert warning message similar to the following:
Figure 4-2. Configuration Mode User Alert
FTOS#conf

% Warning: The following users are currently configuring the system:

User "" on line console0

User "admin" on line vty0 ( 123.12.1.123 )
User "admin" on line vty1 ( 123.12.1.123 )
User "Irene" on line vty3 ( 123.12.1.321 )

FTOS(conf)#FTOS#

When another user enters the CONFIGURATION mode, FTOS sends a message similar to the
following, where the user in this case is “admin” on vty2:

% Warning: User "admin" on line vty2 "172.16.1.210" is in configuration

Navigating the Command Line Interface

The Command Line Interface (CLI) prompt displayed by FTOS is comprised of:
• “hostname”— the initial part of the prompt, “FTOS” by default. You can change it with the
hostname command, as described in hostname.
• The second part of the prompt, reflecting the current CLI mode, as shown in Table 4-1.
The CLI prompt changes as you move up and down the levels of the command structure. Table 4-1 lists
the prompts and their corresponding command levels, called modes. Starting with the
CONFIGURATION mode, the command prompt adds modifiers to further identify the mode. The
command modes are explained in Command Modes.

Note: Some of the following modes are not available on C-Series or S-Series.

Table 4-1. Command Prompt and Corresponding Command Mode

Prompt CLI Command Mode

FTOS> EXEC
FTOS# EXEC Privilege
FTOS(conf)# CONFIGURATION

16 | CLI Basics
 Table 4-1. Command Prompt and Corresponding Command Mode

Prompt CLI Command Mode

FTOS(conf-if)# INTERFACE
FTOS(conf-if-gi-0/0)#
FTOS(conf-if-te-0/0)#
FTOS(conf-if-lo-0)#
FTOS(conf-if-nu-0)#
FTOS(conf-if-po-0)#
FTOS(conf-if-vl-0)#
FTOS(conf-if-so-0/0)#
FTOS(conf-if-ma-0/0)#
FTOS(conf-if-range)#
FTOS(config-ext-nacl)# IP ACCESS LIST
FTOS(config-std-nacl)#
FTOS(config-line-aux)# LINE
FTOS(config-line-console)#
FTOS(config-line-vty)#
FTOS(config-ext-macl)# MAC ACCESS LIST
FTOS(config-std-macl)#
FTOS(config-mon-sess)# MONITOR SESSION
FTOS(config-span)# STP
FTOS(config-mstp)# MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE
FTOS(config-pvst)# Per-VLAN SPANNING TREE Plus
FTOS(config-rstp)# RAPID SPANNING TREE
FTOS(config-gvrp)# PROTOCOL GVRP
FTOS(config-route-map)# ROUTE-MAP
FTOS(conf-nprefixl)# PREFIX-LIST
FTOS(conf-router_rip)# ROUTER RIP
FTOS(conf-redirect-list)# REDIRECT
FTOS(conf-router_bgp)# ROUTER BGP
FTOS(conf-router_ospf)# ROUTER OSPF
FTOS(conf-router_isis)# ROUTER ISIS
FTOS(conf-trace-acl)# TRACE-LIST

Obtaining Help
As soon as you are in a command mode there are several ways to access help.
• To obtain a list of keywords at any command mode, do the following:
— Enter a ? at the prompt or after a keyword. There must always be a space before the ?.
• To obtain a list of keywords with a brief functional description, do the following:
— Enter help at the prompt.

CLI Basics | 17
 • To obtain a list of available options, do the following:
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

— Type a keyword followed by a space and a ?

• Type a partial keyword followed by a ?
— A display of keywords beginning with the partial keyword is listed.
Figure 4-3 illustrates the results of entering ip ? at the prompt.

Figure 4-3. Partial Keyword Example

FTOS(conf)#ip ?
access-list Named access-list
as-path BGP autonomous system path filter
community-list Add a community list entry
domain-list Domain name to complete unqualified host name
domain-lookup Enable IP Domain Name System hostname translation
domain-name Define the default domain name
fib FIB configuration commands
ftp FTP configuration commands
host Add an entry to the ip hostname table
max-frag-count Max. fragmented packets allowed in IP re-assembly
multicast-routing Enable IP multicast forwarding
name-server Specify addess of name server to use
pim Protocol Independent Multicast
prefix-list Build a prefix list
radius Interface configuration for RADIUS
redirect-list Named redirect-list
route Establish static routes
scp SCP configuration commands
source-route Process packets with source routing header options
ssh SSH configuration commands
tacacs Interface configuration for TACACS+
telnet Specify telnet options
tftp TFTP configuration commands
trace-group Named trace-list
trace-list Named trace-list
FTOS(conf)#ip

When entering commands, you can take advantage of the following timesaving features:
• The commands are not case sensitive.
• You can enter partial (truncated) command keywords. For example, you can enter int gig int
interface for the interface gigabitethernet interface command.
• Use the TAB key to complete keywords in commands.
• Use the up arrow key to display the last enabled command.
• Use either the Backspace key or the Delete key to erase the previous character.

18 | CLI Basics
 Use the left and right arrow keys to navigate left or right in the FTOS command line. Table 4-2
defines the key combinations valid at the FTOS command line.
Table 4-2. Short-cut Keys and their Actions

Key
Combination Action
CNTL-A Moves the cursor to the beginning of the command line.
CNTL-B Moves the cursor back one character.
CNTL-D Deletes character at cursor.
CNTL-E Moves the cursor to the end of the line.
CNTL-F Moves the cursor forward one character.
CNTL-I Completes a keyword.
CNTL-K Deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the command line.
CNTL-L Re-enters the previous command.
CNTL-N Return to more recent commands in the history buffer after recalling commands with Ctrl-P
or the up arrow key
CNTL-P Recalls commands, beginning with the last command
CNTL-R Re-enters the previous command.
CNTL-U Deletes the line.
CNTL-W Deletes the previous word.
CNTL-X Deletes the line.
CNTL-Z Ends continuous scrolling of command outputs.
Esc B Moves the cursor back one word.
Esc F Moves the cursor forward one word.
Esc D Deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the word.

Using the Keyword No

To disable, delete, or return to default values, use the no form of the commands. For most commands,
if you type the keyword no in front of the command, you will disable that command or delete it from
the running configuration. In this document, the no form of the command is discussed in the Command
Syntax portion of the command description.

Filtering show Commands

You can filter the display output of a show command to find specific information, to display certain
information only, or to begin the command output at the first instance of a regular expression or phrase.

When you execute a show command, followed by a pipe ( | ) and one of the parameters listed below
and a regular expression, the resulting output either excludes or includes those parameters, as defined
by the parameter:
• display — display additional configuration information

CLI Basics | 19
 • except— display only text that does not match the pattern (or regular expression)
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

• find — search for the first occurrence of a pattern

• grep — display text that matches a pattern
• no-more — do not paginate the display output
• save - copy output to a file for future use

Note: FTOS accepts a space before or after the pipe, no space before or after the pipe, or any
combination. For example:
FTOS#command | grep gigabit |except regular-expression | find
regular-expression

The grep command option has an ignore-case sub-option that makes the search case-insensitive. For
example, the commands:

• show run | grep Ethernet would return a search result with instances containing a capitalized
“Ethernet,” such as interface GigabitEthernet 0/0.
• show run | grep ethernet would not return the search result, above, because it only searches for
instances containing a non-capitalized “ethernet.”
Executing the command show run | grep Ethernet ignore-case would return instances containing
both “Ethernet” and “ethernet.”

Displaying All Output

To display the output all at once (not one screen at a time), use the no-more after the pipe. This is
similar to the terminal length screen-length command except that the no-more option affects the
output of just the specified command.For example:
FTOS#show running-config|no-more

Filtering Command Output Multiple Times

You can filter a single command output multiple times. Place the save option as the last filter. For
example:

FTOS# command | grep regular-expression | except regular-expression | grep

other-regular-expression | find regular-expression | no-more | save

Command Modes
To navigate to various CLI modes, you need to use specific commands to launch each mode.
Navigation to these modes is discussed in the following sections.

Note: Some of the following modes are not available on C-Series or S-Series.

20 | CLI Basics
EXEC Mode
When you initially log in to the switch, by default, you are logged into the EXEC mode. This mode
allows you to view settings and to enter the EXEC Privilege mode to configure the device. While you
are in the EXEC mode, the > prompt is displayed following the “hostname” prompt, as described
above. which is “FTOS” by default. You can change it with the hostname command. See the
command hostname. Each mode prompt is preceded by the hostname.

EXEC Privilege Mode

The enable command accesses the EXEC Privilege mode. If an administrator has configured an
“Enable” password, you will be prompted to enter it here.

The EXEC Privilege mode allows you to access all commands accessible in EXEC mode, plus other
commands, such as to clear ARP entries and IP addresses. In addition, you can access the
CONFIGURATION mode to configure interfaces, routes, and protocols on the switch. While you are
logged in to the EXEC Privilege mode, the # prompt is displayed.

CONFIGURATION Mode
In the EXEC Privilege mode, use the configure command to enter the CONFIGURATION mode and
configure routing protocols and access interfaces.

To enter the CONFIGURATION mode:

1. Verify that you are logged in to the EXEC Privilege mode.
2. Enter the configure command. The prompt changes to include (conf).
From this mode, you can enter INTERFACE by using the interface command.

INTERFACE Mode
Use the INTERFACE mode to configure interfaces or IP services on those interfaces. An interface can
be physical (for example, a Gigabit Ethernet port) or virtual (for example, the Null interface).

To enter INTERFACE mode:

1. Verify that you are logged into the CONFIGURATION mode.
2. Enter the interface command followed by an interface type and interface number that is available
on the switch.
3. The prompt changes to include the designated interface and slot/port number, as outlined in
Table 4-3.

Table 4-3. Interface prompts

Prompt Interface Type

FTOS(conf-if)# INTERFACE mode
FTOS(conf-if-gi-0/0)# Gigabit Ethernet interface followed by slot/port information
FTOS(conf-if-te-0/0)# Ten Gigabit Ethernet interface followed by slot/port information
FTOS(conf-if-lo-0)# Loopback interface number.

CLI Basics | 21
 Table 4-3. Interface prompts
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Prompt Interface Type

FTOS(conf-if-nu-0)# Null Interface followed by zero
FTOS(conf-if-po-0)# Port-channel interface number
FTOS(conf-if-vl-0)# VLAN Interface followed by VLAN number (range 1 to 4094)
FTOS(conf-if-so-0/0)# SONET interface followed by slot/port information.
FTOS(conf-if-ma-0/0)# Management Ethernet interface followed by slot/port information
FTOS(conf-if-range)# Designated interface range (used for bulk configuration; see interface range).

LINE Mode
Use the LINE mode to configure console or virtual terminal parameters.

To enter LINE mode:

1. Verify that you are logged in to the CONFIGURATION mode.
2. Enter the line command. You must include the keywords console or vty and their line number
available on the switch.The prompt changes to include (config-line-console) or (config-line-vty).
You can exit this mode by using the exit command.

TRACE-LIST Mode
When in the CONFIGURATION mode, use the trace-list command to enter the TRACE-LIST mode
and configure a Trace list.
1. Verify that you are logged in to the CONFIGURATION mode.
2. Enter the ip trace-list command. You must include the name of the Trace list. The prompt change
to include (conf-trace-acl).
You can exit this mode by using the exit command.

MAC ACCESS LIST Mode

While in the CONFIGURATION mode, use the mac access-list standard or mac access-list
extended command to enter the MAC ACCESS LIST mode and configure either standard or extended
access control lists (ACL).

To enter MAC ACCESS LIST mode:

1. Verify that you are logged in to the CONFIGURATION mode.
2. Use the mac access-list standard or mac access-list extended command. You must include
a name for the ACL.The prompt changes to include (conf-std-macl) or (conf-ext-macl).
You can return to the CONFIGURATION mode by entering the exit command.

22 | CLI Basics
IP ACCESS LIST Mode
While in the CONFIGURATION mode, use the ip access-list standard or ip access-list extended
command to enter the IP ACCESS LIST mode and configure either standard or extended access
control lists (ACL).

To enter IP ACCESS LIST mode:

1. Verify that you are logged in to the CONFIGURATION mode.
2. Use the ip access-list standard or ip access-list extended command. You must include a
name for the ACL.The prompt changes to include (conf-std-nacl) or (conf-ext-nacl).
You can return to the CONFIGURATION mode by entering the exit command.

ROUTE-MAP Mode
While in the CONFIGURATION mode, use the route-map command to enter the ROUTE-MAP
mode and configure a route map.

To enter ROUTE-MAP mode:

1. Verify that you are logged in to the CONFIGURATION mode.
2. Use the route-map map-name [permit | deny] [sequence-number] command. The prompt
changes to include (route-map).
You can return to the CONFIGURATION mode by entering the exit command.

PREFIX-LIST Mode
While in the CONFIGURATION mode, use the ip prefix-list command to enter the PREFIX-LIST
mode and configure a prefix list.

To enter PREFIX-LIST mode:

1. Verify that you are logged in to the CONFIGURATION mode.
2. Enter the ip prefix-list command. You must include a name for the prefix list.The prompt changes
to include (conf-nprefixl).
You can return to the CONFIGURATION mode by entering the exit command.

AS-PATH ACL Mode

Use the AS-PATH ACL mode to configure an AS-PATH Access Control List (ACL) on the E-Series.
See Chapter 9, Access Control Lists (ACL).

To enter AS-PATH ACL mode:

1. Verify that you are logged in to the CONFIGURATION mode.
2. Enter the ip as-path access-list command. You must include a name for the AS-PATH ACL.The
prompt changes to include (config-as-path).
You can return to the CONFIGURATION mode by entering the exit command.

CLI Basics | 23
 IP COMMUNITY LIST Mode
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Use the IP COMMUNITY LIST mode to configure an IP Community ACL on the E-Series. See
Chapter 9, Access Control Lists (ACL).

To enter IP COMMUNITY LIST mode:

1. Verify that you are logged in to the CONFIGURATION mode.
2. Enter the ip community-list command. You must include a name for the Community list.The
prompt changes to include (config-community-list).
You can return to the CONFIGURATION mode by entering the exit command.

REDIRECT-LIST Mode
Use the REDIRECT-LIST mode to configure a Redirect list on the E-Series, as described in the
E-Series FTOS Command Reference Guide chapter on Policy-based Routing

To enter REDIRECT-LIST mode:

1. Verify that you are logged in to the CONFIGURATION mode.
2. Use the ip redirect-list command. You must include a name for the Redirect-list.The prompt
changes to include (conf-redirect-list).
You can return to the CONFIGURATION mode by entering the exit command.

SPANNING TREE Mode

Use the STP mode to enable and configure the Spanning Tree protocol, as described in Chapter 44,
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP).

To enter STP mode:

1. Verify that you are logged into the CONFIGURATION mode.
2. Enter the protocol spanning-tree stp-id command.
You can return to the CONFIGURATION mode by entering the exit command.

Per-VLAN SPANNING TREE Plus Mode

Use PVST+ mode to enable and configure the Per-VLAN Spanning Tree (PVST+) protocol, as
described in Chapter 33, Per-VLAN Spanning Tree plus (PVST+).

Note: The protocol is PVST+, but the plus sign is dropped at the CLI prompt

To enter PVST+ mode:

1. Verify that you are logged into the CONFIGURATION mode.
2. Enter the protocol spanning-tree pvst command.
You can return to the CONFIGURATION mode by entering the exit command.

24 | CLI Basics
RAPID SPANNING TREE Mode
Use PVST+ mode to enable and configure the RSTP protocol, as described in Chapter 37, Rapid
Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP).

To enter RSTP mode:

1. Verify that you are logged into the CONFIGURATION mode.
2. Enter the protocol spanning-tree rstp command.
You can return to the CONFIGURATION mode by entering the exit command.

MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE Mode

Use MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE mode to enable and configure the Multiple Spanning Tree
protocol, as described in Chapter 25, Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP).

To enter MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE mode:

1. Verify that you are logged into the CONFIGURATION mode.
2. Enter the protocol spanning-tree mstp command.
You can return to the CONFIGURATION mode by entering the exit command.

PROTOCOL GVRP Mode

Use the PROTOCOL GVRP mode to enable and configure GARP VLAN Registration Protocol
(GVRP), as described in Chapter 15, GARP VLAN Registration (GVRP).

To enter PROTOCOL GVRP mode:

1. Verify that you are logged into the CONFIGURATION mode.
2. Enter the protocol gvrp command syntax.
You can return to the CONFIGURATION mode by entering the exit command.

ROUTER OSPF Mode

Use the ROUTER OSPF mode to configure OSPF, as described in Chapter 28, Open Shortest Path
First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3).

To enter ROUTER OSPF mode:

1. Verify that you are logged into the CONFIGURATION mode.
2. Use the router ospf {process-id} command.The prompt changes to include (conf-rout-
er_ospf-id).
You can switch to the INTERFACE mode by using the interface command or you can switch to the
ROUTER RIP mode by using the router rip command.

CLI Basics | 25
 ROUTER RIP Mode
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Use the ROUTER RIP mode to configure RIP on the C-Series or E-Series, as described in Chapter 35,
Router Information Protocol (RIP).

To enter ROUTER RIP mode:

1. Verify that you are logged into the CONFIGURATION mode.
2. Enter the router rip command.The prompt changes to include (conf-router_rip).
You can switch to the INTERFACE mode by using the interface command or you can switch to the
ROUTER OSPF mode by using the router ospf command.

ROUTER ISIS Mode

Use the ROUTER ISIS mode to configure ISIS on the E-Series, as described in the E-Series FTOS
Command Reference Guide chapter on Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS).

To enter ROUTER ISIS mode:

1. Verify that you are logged into the CONFIGURATION mode.
2. Enter the router isis [tag] command.The prompt changes to include (conf-router_isis).
You can switch to the INTERFACE mode by using the interface command or you can switch to the
ROUTER RIP mode by using the router rip command.

ROUTER BGP Mode

Use the ROUTER BGP mode to configure BGP on the C-Series or E-Series, as described in
Chapter 10, Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4).

To enter ROUTER BGP mode:

1. Verify that you are logged into the CONFIGURATION mode.
2. Enter the router bgp as-number command.The prompt changes to include (conf-router_bgp).
You can return to the CONFIGURATION mode by entering the exit command.

Determining the Chassis Mode

The chassis mode in FTOS determines which hardware is being supported in an E-Series chassis. The
chassis mode is programmed into an EEPROM on the backplane of the chassis and the change takes
place only after the chassis is rebooted. Configuring the appropriate chassis mode enables the system
to use all the ports on the card and recognize all software features.

26 | CLI Basics
 5
File Management

Overview

This chapter contains commands needed to manage the configuration files and includes other file
management commands found in FTOS. This chapter contains these sections:
• Basic File Management Commands

Basic File Management Commands

The commands included in this chapter are:
• boot config
• boot host
• boot network
• boot system (S60)
• boot system (S60)
• boot system gateway
• cd
• change bootflash-image
• copy
• copy (Streamline Upgrade)
• copy running-config startup-config
• delete
• dir
• download alt-boot-image
• download alt-full-image
• download alt-system-image
• format (C-Series and E-Series)
• format flash (S-Series)
• logging coredump
• logging coredump server
• pwd
• rename
• restore factory-defaults
• restore fpga-image
• show boot system

File Management | 27
 • show bootvar
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

• show file
• show file-systems
• show linecard
• show os-version
• show running-config
• show sfm
• show startup-config
• show version
• upgrade (E-Series version)
• upgrade (C-Series version)
• upgrade (S-Series management unit)
• upgrade fpga-image (E-Series)
• upgrade fpga-image (C-Series)
• upgrade fpga-image (S60)

boot config
ce Set the location and name of the configuration file that is loaded at system start-up (or reload) instead
of the default startup-configuration.

Syntax boot config {remote-first | rpm0 file-url | rpm1 file-url}

To return to the default setting, enter no boot config {remote-first | rpm0 | rpm1}.

Parameters
remote-first Enter the keywords remote-first to attempt to load the boot configuration files from a
remote location.
rpm0 Enter the keywords rpm0 first to specify the local boot configuration file for RPM 0.
rpm1 Enter the keywords rpm1 first to specify the local boot configuration file for RPM 1.
file-url Enter the location information:
• For a file on the internal Flash, enter flash:// followed by the filename.
• For a file on the external Flash, enter slot0:// followed by the filename.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
History
E-Series original Command

Usage To display these changes in the show bootvar command output, you must save the running
Information configuration to the startup configuration (copy running-config startup-config or write).

Dell Networking strongly recommends using local files for configuration (RPM0 or RPM1 flash or
slot0).

28 | File Management
 When you specify a file as the boot config file, it is listed in the boot variables (bootvar) as LOCAL
CONFIG FILE. If you do not specify a boot config file, then the startup-configuration is used, although
the bootvar shows LOCAL CONFIG FILE = variable does not exist. When you specify a boot
config file, the switch reloads with that config file, rather than the startup-config. Note that if you
specify a local config file which is not present in the specified location, then the startup-configuration
is loaded.

The write memory command always saves the running-configuration to the file labeled
startup-configuration. When using a LOCAL CONFIG FILE other than the startup-config, use the copy
command to save any running-configuration changes to that local file.

Output for show bootvar with no boot configuration configured

FTOS#show bootvar
PRIMARY IMAGE FILE = flash://FTOS-EF-8.2.1.0.bin
SECONDARY IMAGE FILE = flash://FTOS-EF-7.6.1.0.bin
DEFAULT IMAGE FILE = flash://FTOS-EF-7.5.1.0.bin
LOCAL CONFIG FILE = variable does not exist
PRIMARY HOST CONFIG FILE = variable does not exist
SECONDARY HOST CONFIG FILE = variable does not exist
PRIMARY NETWORK CONFIG FILE = variable does not exist
SECONDARY NETWORK CONFIG FILE = variable does not exist
CURRENT IMAGE FILE = flash://FTOS-EF-8.2.1.0.bin
CURRENT CONFIG FILE 1 = flash://startup-config
CURRENT CONFIG FILE 2 = variable does not exist
CONFIG LOAD PREFERENCE = local first
BOOT INTERFACE GATEWAY IP ADDRESS = variable does not exist

Output for show bootvar with boot configuration configured

FTOS#show bootvar
PRIMARY IMAGE FILE = flash://FTOS-EF-8.2.1.0.bin
SECONDARY IMAGE FILE = flash://FTOS-EF-7.6.1.0.bin
DEFAULT IMAGE FILE = flash://FTOS-EF-7.5.1.0.bin
LOCAL CONFIG FILE = variable does not exist
PRIMARY HOST CONFIG FILE = variable does not exist
SECONDARY HOST CONFIG FILE = variable does not exist
PRIMARY NETWORK CONFIG FILE = variable does not exist
SECONDARY NETWORK CONFIG FILE = variable does not exist
CURRENT IMAGE FILE = flash://FTOS-EF-8.2.1.0.bin
CURRENT CONFIG FILE 1 = flash://CustomerA.cfg
CURRENT CONFIG FILE 2 = variable does not exist
CONFIG LOAD PREFERENCE = local first
BOOT INTERFACE GATEWAY IP ADDRESS = variable does not exist

Related
Commands
show bootvar Display the variable settings for the E-Series boot parameters.

boot host
ce Set the location of the configuration file from a remote host.

Syntax boot host {primary | secondary} remote-url

To return to the default settings, enter no boot host {primary | secondary} command.

Parameters
primary Enter the keywords primary to attempt to load the primary host configuration files.

File Management | 29
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

secondary Enter the keywords secondary to attempt to load the secondary host configuration files.
remote-url Enter the following location keywords and information:
• For a file on an FTP server, enter ftp://user:password@hostip/filepath
• For a file on a TFTP server, enter tftp://hostip/filepath

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
History
E-Series original Command

Usage To display these changes in the show bootvar command output, you must save the running
Information configuration to the startup configuration (using the copy command).

Related
Commands
show bootvar Display the variable settings for the E-Series boot parameters.

boot network
ce Set the location of the configuration file in a remote network.

Syntax boot network {primary | secondary} remote-url

To return to the default settings, enter no boot network {primary | secondary} command.

Parameters
primary Enter the keywords primary to attempt to load the primary network configuration files.
secondary Enter the keywords secondary to attempt to load the secondary network configuration
files.
remote-url Enter the following location keywords and information:
• For a file on an FTP server, enter ftp://user:password@hostip/filepath
• For a file on a TFTP server, enter tftp://hostip/filepath

Defaults None

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
History
E-Series original Command

Usage To display these changes in the show bootvar command output, you must save the running
Information configuration to the startup configuration (using the copy command).

Related
Commands
show bootvar Display the variable settings for the E-Series boot parameters.

30 | File Management
boot system (C-Series and E-Series)
ce Tell the system where to access the FTOS image used to boot the system.

Syntax boot system {rpm0 | rpm1} (default | primary | secondary} file-url

To return to the default boot sequence, use the no boot system {rpm0 | rpm1} {primary |
secondary} command.

Parameters
rpm0 Enter the keyword rpm0 to configure boot parameters for RPM0.
rpm1 Enter the keyword rpm1 to configure boot parameters for RPM1.
default After entering rpm0 or rpm1, enter the keyword default to specify the parameters to be
used if those specified by primary or secondary fail. The default location should
always be the internal flash device (flash:), so that you can be sure that a verified image is
available there.
primary After entering rpm0 or rpm1, enter the keyword primary to configure the boot
parameters used in the first attempt to boot FTOS.
secondary After entering rpm0 or rpm1, enter the keyword secondary to configure boot
parameters used if the primary operating system boot selection is not available.
file-url To boot from a file:
• on the internal Flash, enter flash:// followed by the filename.
• on an FTP server, enter ftp://user:password@hostip/filepath
• on the external Flash, enter slot0:// followed by the filename.
• on a TFTP server, enter tftp://hostip/filepath

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
History
E-Series original Command

Usage To display these changes in the show bootvar command output, you must save the running
Information configuration to the startup configuration (using the copy command) and reload system.

Related
change bootflash-image Change the primary, secondary, or default boot image configuration.
Commands
boot system gateway Specify the IP address of the default next-hop gateway for the management
subnet.

boot system (S60)

Tell the system where to access the FTOS image used to boot the system.

Syntax boot system {gateway ip address| stack-unit [0-11 | all] [default | primary {system {A: |
B:} | tftp: | | secondary]}
To return to the default boot sequence, use the no boot system command.

File Management | 31
 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

gateway Enter the IP address of the default next-hop gateway for the management subnet
stack-unit Enter the stack-unit number for the master switch.
ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format.
0-11, all Stack-unit number
default Enter the default keyword to use the primary FTOS image.
primary Enter the primary keyword to use the primary FTOS image.
secondary Enter the secondary keyword to use the primary FTOS image.
tftp: Enter TFTP: to retrieve the image from a TFTP server.
tftp://hostip/filepath
A: | B: Enter A: or B: to boot one of the system partitions.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60
History

Usage To display these changes in the show bootvar command output, you must save the running
Information configuration to the startup configuration (using the copy command) and reload system.

Related
boot system gateway Specify the IP address of the default next-hop gateway for the management
Commands
subnet.

boot system gateway

ce Specify the IP address of the default next-hop gateway for the management subnet.

Syntax boot system gateway ip-address

To delete a gateway configuration, enter no boot system gateway.

Parameters
ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Usage Saving the address to the startup configuration file preserves the address in NVRAM in case the startup
Information configuration file is deleted.

Command
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
History
E-Series original Command

Related
change bootflash-image Change the primary, secondary, or default boot image configuration.
Commands

32 | File Management
cd
ces Change to a different working directory.

Syntax cd directory

Parameters
directory (OPTONAL) Enter one of the following:
• flash: (internal Flash) or any sub-directory
• slot0: (external Flash) or any sub-directory (C-Series and E-Series only)

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
History
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

change bootflash-image
ce Change boot flash image from which to boot.

Syntax change bootflash-image {cp | linecard linecard-slot | rp}

Parameters
cp Enter the keyword cp to change the bootflash image on the Control Processor
on the RPM.
linecard linecard-slot Enter the keyword linecard followed by the slot number to change the
bootflash image on a specific line card.
C-Series Range: 0-7
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on the E1200; 0 on 6 on the E600, and 0 to 5 on the
E300.
rp Enter the keyword rp to change the bootflash image on the RPM Route
Processor.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
History
E-Series original Command

Usage A system message appears stating that the bootflash image has been changed. You must reload the
Information system before the system can switch to the new bootflash image.

copy
ces Copy one file to another location.

Syntax copy source-file-url destination-file-url

File Management | 33
 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

file-url Enter the following location keywords and information:

• To copy a file from the internal FLASH, enter flash:// followed by the filename.
• To copy a file on an FTP server, enter ftp://user:password@hostip/filepath
• To copy a file from the internal FLASH on RPM0, enter rpm0flash://filepath
• To copy a file from the external FLASH on RPM0, enter rpm0slot0://filepath
• To copy a file from the internal FLASH on RPM1, enter rpm1flash://filepath
• To copy a file from the external FLASH on RPM1, enter rpm1slot0://filepath
• To copy the running configuration, enter the keyword running-config.
• To copy the startup configuration, enter the keyword startup-config.
• To copy using Secure Copy (SCP), enter the keyword scp: (If scp: is entered in the
source position, then enter the target URL;
If scp: is entered in the target position, first enter the source URL; see below for
examples.)
• To copy a file on the external FLASH, enter slot0:// followed by the filename.
• To copy a file on a TFTP server, enter tftp://hostip/filepath
ExaScale only
• To copy a file from a USB drive on RPM0, enter rpm0usbflash://filepath
ExaScale and S60
• To copy a file from an external USB drive, enter usbflash://filepath

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Added usbflash and rpm0usbflash commands on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series and added SSH port number to SCP prompt sequence on all
systems.
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

Usage FTOS supports a maximum of 100 files, at the root directory level, on both the internal and external
Information Flash.

The usbflash and rpm0usbflash commands are supported on E-Series ExaScale platform only.
Refer to the FTOS Release Notes for a list of approved USB vendors.

When copying a file to a remote location (for example, using Secure Copy (SCP)), enter only the
keywords and FTOS prompts you for the rest of the information.

For example, when using SCP, you can enter copy running-config scp:
The running-config is the source, and the target is specified in the ensuing prompts. FTOS prompts
you to enter any required information, as needed for the named destination—remote destination,
destination filename, user ID and password, etc.

When you use the copy running-config startup-config command to copy the running
configuration (the startup configuration file amended by any configuration changes made since the
system was started) to the startup configuration file, FTOS creates a backup file on the internal flash of
the startup configuration.

FTOS supports copying the running-configuration to a TFTP server or to an FTP server:

34 | File Management
 copy running-config tftp:

copy running-config ftp:

Command Example: copy running-config scp:

FTOS#copy running-config scp:/
Address or name of remote host []: 10.10.10.1
Destination file name [startup-config]? old_running
User name to login remote host? home
Password to login remote host? home

In this example — copy scp: flash: — specifying SCP in the first position indicates that the target is
to be specified in the ensuing prompts. Entering flash: in the second position means that the target is
the internal Flash. In this example the source is on a secure server running SSH, so the user is prompted
for the UDP port of the SSH server on the remote host.

Using scp to copy from an SSH Server

FTOS#copy scp: flash:
Address or name of remote host []: 10.11.199.134
Port number of the server [22]: 99
Source file name []: test.cfg
User name to login remote host: admin
Password to login remote host:
Destination file name [test.cfg]: test1.cfg

Related
cd Change working directory.
Commands

copy (Streamline Upgrade)

ce Copy a system image to a local file and update the boot profile.

Syntax copy source-url target-url [boot-image [synchronize-rpm [external]]]

Parameters
source-url Enter the source file in url format. The source file is a valid Dell Networking release
image. Image validation is automatic.
target-url Enter the local target file in url format.
boot-image Enter the keyword boot-image to designate this copy command as a streamline
update.
synchronize-rpm Enter the keyword synchronize-rpm to copy the new image file to the peer
RPM.
external Enter the keyword external to designate the target device on the peer RPM as
external flash (instead of the default internal flash).
Default: Internal Flash

Defaults No default behavior

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
History
Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced

File Management | 35
 Usage In this streamline copy command, the source image is copied to the primary RPM and then, if
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Information specified, to the standby RPM. After the copy is complete, the new image file path on each RPM is
automatically configured as the primary image path for the next boot. The current system image (the
one from which the RPM booted) is automatically configured as the secondary image path.

Note: The keywords boot-image, synchronize-rpm, and external can be used on the
Primary RPM only.

copy running-config startup-config

Copy running configuration to the startup configuration.
ce

Syntax copy running-config startup-config {duplicate}

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60.
History
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.3.1.0 Introduced

Usage This command is useful for quickly making a changed configuration on one chassis available on
Information external flash in order to move it to another chassis.

When you use the copy running-config startup-config duplicate command to copy the running
configuration to the startup configuration, FTOS creates a backup file on the internal flash of the
startup configuration.

delete
ces Delete a file from the flash. Once deleted, files cannot be restored.

Syntax delete flash-url [no-confirm]

Parameters
flash-url Enter the following location and keywords:
• For a file or directory on the internal Flash, enter flash:// followed by the filename or
directory name.
• For a file or directory on the external Flash, enter slot0:// followed by the filename or
directory name.
no-confirm (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword no-confirm to specify that FTOS does not require user
input for each file prior to deletion.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
History
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

36 | File Management
dir
ces Display the files in a filesystem. The default is the current directory.

Syntax dir [filename | directory name:]

Parameters
filename | directory name: (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following:
• For a file or directory on the internal Flash, enter flash://
followed by the filename or directory name.
• For a file or directory on the external Flash, enter slot0://
followed by the filename or directory name:

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

Example Command Example dir for the Internal Flash

FTOS#dir
Directory of flash:

1 -rwx 6478482 May 13 101 16:54:34 E1200.BIN

flash: 64077824 bytes total (57454592 bytes free)

FTOS#

Related
Commands cd Change working directory.

download alt-boot-image
ce Download an alternate boot image to the chassis.

Syntax download alt-boot-image file-url

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.7.1.0 Removed from E-Series and C-Series
History
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

Usage Starting with FTOS 7.7.1.0, the functions of this command are incorporated into the upgrade
Information command.

For software upgrade details, see the FTOS Release Notes.

Related
Commands upgrade (E-Series version) Upgrade the bootflash or boot selector versions.
upgrade (C-Series version) Upgrade the bootflash or boot selector versions.

File Management | 37
 download alt-full-image
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

e Download an alternate FTOS image to the chassis.

Syntax download alt-full-image file-url

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.7.1.0 Removed form E-Series
History
Version 6.5.1.0 Introduced

Usage Starting with FTOS 7.7.1.0, the functions of this command are incorporated into the upgrade
Information command.

For software upgrade details, see the FTOS Release Notes.

Related
upgrade (E-Series version) Upgrade the bootflash or boot selector versions
Commands

download alt-system-image
e Download an alternate system image (not the boot flash or boot selector image) to the chassis.

Syntax download alt-system-image file-url

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.7.1.0 Removed from E-Series
History
Version 6.5.1.0 Introduced

Usage Starting with FTOS 7.7.1.0, the functions of this command are incorporated into the upgrade
Information command.

For software upgrade details, see the FTOS Release Notes.

Related
upgrade (E-Series version) Upgrade the bootflash or boot selector versions
Commands

format (C-Series and E-Series)

ce Erase all existing files and reformat a filesystem. Once the filesystem is formatted, files cannot be
restored.

Syntax format filesystem: [dosFs1.0 | dosFs2.0]

Parameters
filesystem: Enter one of the following:
• To reformat the internal Flash, enter flash:
• To reformat the external Flash, enter slot0:

38 | File Management
 dosFs1.0 Enter the keyword dosFs1.0 to format in DOS 1.0 (the default)
dosFs2.0 Enter the keyword dosFs2.0 to format in DOS 2.0

Default DOS 1.0 (dosFs1.0)

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
History
E-Series original Command

Usage When you format flash:

Information
1 The startup-config is erased.
2 All cacheboot data files are erased and you must reconfigure cacheboot to regain it.
3 All generated SSH keys are erased and you must recreate them.
4 All archived configuration files are erased.
5 All trace logs, crash logs, core dumps, and call-home logs are erased.
6 In-service Process patches are erased.
After reformatting is complete, three empty directories are automatically created on flash:
CRASH_LOG_DIR, TRACE_LOG_DIR and NVTRACE_LOG_DIR.

Note: Version option is available on LC-ED-RPM only. LC-EE3-RPM, LC-EF-RPM, and

LC-EF3-RPM supports DOS 2.0 only.

Related
Commands show file Display contents of a text file in the local filesystem.
show file-systems Display information about the file systems on the system.

format flash (S-Series)

s Erase all existing files and reformat the filesystem in the internal flash memory. Once the filesystem is
formatted, files cannot be restored.

Syntax format flash:

Default flash memory

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
History

Usage You must include the colon (:) when entering this command.
Information
Caution: This command deletes all files, including the startup configuration file. So, after executing
this command, consider saving the running config as the startup config (use the write memory
command or copy run start).

File Management | 39
 Related
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Commands copy Copy the current configuration to either the startup-configuration file or the
terminal.
show file Display contents of a text file in the local filesystem.
show file-systems Display information about the file systems on the system.

format flash (S60)

Erase all existing files and reformat the filesystem in the internal flash memory or the USB drive. Once
the filesystem is formatted, files cannot be restored.

Syntax format [flash: | usbflash:]

Parameters
flash: Reformat the filesystem in the internal flash memory
usbflash: Reformat the filesystem in the connected USB drive memory

Default flash memory

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History

Usage You must include the colon (:) when entering this command.
Information
Caution: This command deletes all files, including the startup configuration file. So, after executing
this command, consider saving the running config as the startup config (use the write memory
command or copy run start).

logging coredump
ces Enable coredump.

Syntax logging coredump {cp | linecard {number | all} | rps | stack-unit {id | all}}

Disable coredump using the command no logging coredump {cp | linecard {number | all} | rps}

Parameters
cp Enable coredump for the CP.
linecard Enable coredump for a linecard.
rps Enable coredump for RP 1 and 2.
stack-unit Enable coredump for the stack-unit.
Range: S60 0-11
All other S-Series 0-7

Defaults The kernel coredump is enabled by default for RP 1 and 2 on E-Series. The kernel coredump for CP
and application coredump are disabled on all systems by default.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

40 | File Management
 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Restructured command to accommodate coredumps for CP. Introduced on C-Series and
S-Series
Version 6.5.1.0 Application coredump naming convention enhanced to include application.
Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced

Usage The Kernel core dump can be large and may take up to 5 to 30 minutes to upload. FTOS does not
Information overwrite application coredumps so you should delete them as necessary to conserve space on the
flash; if the flash is out of memory, the coredump is aborted. On the S-Series, if the FTP server is not
reachable, the application coredump is aborted. FTOS completes the coredump process and wait until
the upload is complete before rebooting the system.

Related
Commands logging coredump server Designate a sever to upload kernel core-dumps.

logging coredump server

ces Designate a server to upload coredumps.

Syntax logging coredump server address username name password [type] password

Disable logging coredumps to a server using the command no logging coredump server address
username name password [type] password

Parameters
address Enter the server IP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D) or hostname.
name Enter a username to access the target server.
type Enter the password type:
• Enter 0 to enter an unencrypted password.
• Enter 7 to enter a password that has already been encrypted using a Type
7 hashing algorithm.
password Enter a password to access the target server.

Defaults Crash kernel files are uploaded to flash by default.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 7.7.1.0 Restructured command to accommodate coredumps for CP. Introduced on C-Series and
History
S-Series.
Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced

Usage Since flash space may be limited, using this command ensures your entire crash kernel files are
Information uploaded successfully and completely.

Note: You must disable logging coredump before you designate a new server destination for
your coredumps.

Related
Commands logging coredump Disable the kernel coredump

File Management | 41
 pwd
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Display the current working directory.

Syntax pwd

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

Example Command Example: pwd

FTOS#pwd
flash:
FTOS#

Related
cd Change directory.
Commands

rename
ces Rename a file in the local file system.

Syntax rename url url

Parameters
url Enter the following keywords and a filename:
• For a file on the internal Flash, enter flash:// followed by the filename.
• For a file on the external Flash, enter slot0:// followed by the filename.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

restore factory-defaults
Restore factory defaults.

Syntax restore factory-defaults stack-unit {0-11 | all} {clear-all | nvram}

Parameters
factory-defaults Return the system to its factory default mode.
0-11 Enter this keyword to restore only the mentioned stack-unit.
all Enter this keyword to restore all units in the stack.

42 | File Management
 clear-all Enter this keyword to reset the NvRAM and to delete the system startup configuration.
nvram Enter this keyword to reset the NvRAM only.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.9 Introduced on the S60
History
Version 8.3.5.4 Introduced on the S55
Version 8.3.17.1 Supported on M I/O Aggregator

Usage Restoring factory defaults deletes the existing startup configuration and all persistent settings
Information (stacking, fanout, etc.).

Dell Networking recommends backing up the startup configuration before using this command.

[[delete? this contradicts the statement below]]When restoring all S55 and S60 units in a stack, all the
units in the stack are placed into stand-alone mode.

When restoring a single unit in a stack, that unit is placed in stand-alone mode. No other units in the
stack are affected.

When S55 and S60 units in a stack are restored, the S55 and S60 units will still form a stack.

After the restore is complete, the units power cycle immediately.

Caution: There is no undo for this command

Example Figure 5-1. restore factory-defaults (all units in a stack) Command Example
FTOS#restore factory-defaults stack-unit all clear-all

***********************************************************************
* Warning - Restoring factory defaults will delete the existing *
* persistent settings (stacking, fanout, etc.) *
* After restoration the unit(s) will be powercycled immediately. *
* Proceed with caution ! *
***********************************************************************
Proceed with factory settings? Confirm [yes/no]:yes

-- Restore status --
Unit Nvram Config
------------------------
0 Success Success
1 Success Success
2 Success Success
3 Not present
4 Not present
5 Not present
6 Not present
7 Not present
8 Not present
9 Not present
10 Not present
11 Not present

Power-cycling the unit(s)

FTOS#

File Management | 43
 Figure 5-2. restore factory-defaults (single unit in a stack) Command Example
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#restore factory-defaults stack-unit 0 clear-all

***********************************************************************
* Warning - Restoring factory defaults will delete the existing *
* startup-config and all persistent settings (stacking, fanout, etc.)*
* After restoration the unit(s) will be powercycled immediately. *
* Proceed with caution ! *
***********************************************************************

Proceed with factory settings? Confirm [yes/no]:yes

-- Restore status --
Unit Nvram Config
------------------------
0 Success Success

Power-cycling the unit(s).

FTOS#

Figure 5-3. restore factory-defaults (NvRAM only, all units in a stack) Command
Example
FTOS#restore factory-defaults stack-unit all nvram

***********************************************************************
* Warning - Restoring factory defaults will delete the existing *
* persistent settings (stacking, fanout, etc.) *
* After restoration the unit(s) will be powercycled immediately. *
* Proceed with caution ! *
***********************************************************************
Proceed with factory settings? Confirm [yes/no]:yes

-- Restore status --
Unit Nvram Config
------------------------
0 Success
1 Success
2 Success
3 Not present
4 Not present
5 Not present
6 Not present
7 Not present
8 Not present
9 Not present
10 Not present
11 Not present

Power-cycling the unit(s)

FTOS#

44 | File Management
 Figure 5-4. restore factory-defaults (NvRAM only, single unit in a stack) Command
Example
FTOS#restore factory-defaults stack-unit 1nvram

***********************************************************************
* Warning - Restoring factory defaults will delete the existing *
* persistent settings (stacking, fanout, etc.) *
* After restoration the unit(s) will be powercycled immediately. *
* Proceed with caution ! *
***********************************************************************

Proceed with factory settings? Confirm [yes/no]:yes

-- Restore status --
Unit Nvram Config
------------------------
1Success

Power-cycling the unit(s).

FTOS#

restore fpga-image
c Copy the backup C-Series FPGA image to the primary FPGA image.

Syntax restore fpga-image {rpm | linecard} number

Parameters
rpm Enter rpm to upgrade an RPM FPGA.
linecard Enter linecard to upgrade a line card FPGA.
number Enter the line card or RPM slot number.
C-Series Line Card Range: 0-7, RPM Range: 0-1

Defaults None.

Command Mode EXEC Privilege

Command
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Renamed keyword primary-fpga-flash to fpga-image.
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series

File Management | 45
 Example Command example: restore fpga-image
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#restore fpga-image linecard 4

Current FPGA information in the system:

=======================================

Card FPGA Name Current Version New Version

------------------------------------------------------------------------
LC4 48 Port 1G LCM FPGA A: 3.6 restore

***********************************************************************
* Warning - Upgrading FPGA is inherently risky and should *
* only be attempted when necessary. A failure at this upgrade may *
* cause a board RMA. Proceed with caution ! *
***********************************************************************

Restore fpga image for linecard 4 [yes/no]: yes

FPGA restore in progress. Please do NOT power off the card.

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Upgrade result :
================
Linecard 4 FPGA restore successful.

Usage Reset the card using the power-cycle option after restoring the FPGA command.
Information

Related
reset Reset a card.
Commands

show boot system

Displays information about boot images currently configured on the system.
ce

Syntax show boot system {all | linecard [slot | all] | rpm | stack-unit [0-11 | all]}

Parameters
all Enter this keyword to display boot image information for all linecards and
rpms.
linecard Enter this keyword to display boot image information for the specified
linecard(s) on the system.
rpm Enter this keyword to display boot image information for all rpms on the
system.
stack-unit Enter this keyword to display boot image information for one or all the S60
units.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and E-Series

46 | File Management
 Example

FTOS#show boot system all

Current system image information in the system:

=============================================

Type Boot Type A B

----------------------------------------------------------------
CP DOWNLOAD BOOT invalid invalid
RP1 DOWNLOAD BOOT invalid invalid
RP2 DOWNLOAD BOOT invalid invalid
linecard 0 is not present.
linecard 1 DOWNLOAD BOOT invalid invalid
linecard 2 DOWNLOAD BOOT 4.7.5.387 6.5.1.8
linecard 3 DOWNLOAD BOOT invalid invalid
linecard 4 DOWNLOAD BOOT invalid invalid
linecard 5 is not present.

Peer RPM:
=============================================

Type Boot Type A B

----------------------------------------------------------------
CP DOWNLOAD BOOT invalid invalid
RP1 DOWNLOAD BOOT invalid invalid
RP2 DOWNLOAD BOOT invalid invalid

show bootvar
Display the variable settings for the system boot parameters.
ce

Syntax show bootvar

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

Example Command Output example: show bootvar

FTOS#show bootvar
PRIMARY IMAGE FILE = ftp://box:[email protected]//home/5.3.1/5.3.1.0/FTOS-ED-RPM1-5.3.1.0.bin
SECONDARY IMAGE FILE = variable does not exist
DEFAULT IMAGE FILE = flash://FTOS-ED-5.3.1.0.bin
LOCAL CONFIG FILE = variable does not exist
PRIMARY HOST CONFIG FILE = variable does not exist
SECONDARY HOST CONFIG FILE = variable does not exist
PRIMARY NETWORK CONFIG FILE = variable does not exist
SECONDARY NETWORK CONFIG FILE = variable does not exist
CURRENT IMAGE FILE = ftp://box:[email protected]//home/5.3.1/5.3.1.0/FTOS-ED-RPM1-5.3.1.0.bin
CURRENT CONFIG FILE 1 = flash://startup-config
CURRENT CONFIG FILE 2 = variable does not exist
CONFIG LOAD PREFERENCE = local first
BOOT INTERFACE GATEWAY IP ADDRESS = variable does not exist
FTOS#

File Management | 47
 Related
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

boot config Set the location of configuration files on local devices.

Commands
boot host Set the location of configuration files from the remote host.
boot network Set the location of configuration files from a remote network.
boot system (S60) Set the location of FTOS image files.
boot system gateway Specify the IP address of the default next-hop gateway for the management subnet.

show file
ces Display contents of a text file in the local filesystem.

Syntax show file filesystem

Parameters
filesystem Enter one of the following:
• flash: for the internal Flash
• slot0: for the external Flash

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

Example Command output example (Partial): show file

FTOS#show file flash://startup-config

!
boot system rpm0 primary ftp://test:[email protected]//home/images/
E1200_405-3.1.2b1.86.bin
boot system rpm0 secondary flash://FTOS-ED-6.1.1.0.bin
boot system rpm0 default ftp://:@/\
!
redundancy auto-synchronize persistent-data
redundancy primary rpm0
!
hostname E1200-20
!
enable password 7 94849d8482d5c3
!
username test password 7 93e1e7e2ef
!
enable restricted 7 948a9d848cd5c3
!
protocol spanning-tree 0
bridge-priority 8192
rapid-root-failover enable
!
interface GigabitEthernet 0/0
no ip address
shutdown

Related
Commands format (C-Series and E-Series) Erase all existing files and reformat a filesystem on the E-Series or
C-Series platform.

48 | File Management
 format flash (S-Series) Erase all existing files and reformat the filesystem in the internal
flash memory on and S-Series.
show file-systems Display information about the file systems on the system.

show file-systems
ces Display information about the file systems on the system.

Syntax show file-systems

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

Example Command Output example: show file-system

FTOS#show file-systems
Size(b) Free(b) Feature Type Flags Prefixes
63938560 51646464 dosFs2.0 MMC rw flash:
63938560 18092032 dosFs1.0 MMC rw slot0:
- - - network rw ftp:
- - - network rw tftp:
- - - network rw scp:
FTOS#

show file-systems Command Output Fields

Field Description
size(b) Lists the size in bytes of the storage location. If the location is remote, no
size is listed.
Free(b) Lists the available size in bytes of the storage location. If the location is
remote, no size is listed.
Feature Displays the formatted DOS version of the device.
Type Displays the type of storage. If the location is remote, the word
network is listed.
Flags Displays the access available to the storage location. The following letters
indicate the level of access:
• r = read access
• w = write access
Prefixes Displays the name of the storage location.

Related
Commands format (C-Series and E-Series) Erase all existing files and reformat a filesystem.
format flash (S-Series) Erase all existing files and reformat the filesystem in the internal
flash memory.

File Management | 49
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

show file Display contents of a text file in the local filesystem.

show sfm Display the current SFM status.

show linecard
ce View the current linecard status.

Syntax show linecard [number | all | boot-information]

Parameters
number Enter a number to view information on that linecard.
Range: 0 to 6.
all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to view a table with information on all
present linecards.
boot-information (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword boot-information to view cache boot
information of all line cards in table format.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
History
E-Series original Command

Example Command output example (E-Series): show linecard boot-information

FTOS#show linecard boot-information

-- Line cards --
Serial Booted Next Cache
Boot
# Status CurType number from boot boot
flash
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------
0 -
1 -
2 -
3 online E48TF FX000032632 4.7.7.171 4.7.7.171 A: invalid B:
invalid A: 2.3.2.1 [b] B: 2.3.2.1
4 -
5 -
6 -
FTOS#

50 | File Management
show os-version
ces Display the release and software image version information of the image file specified or, optionally,
the image loaded on the RPM (C-Series and E-Series only).

Syntax show os-version [file-url]

Parameters
file-url (OPTIONAL) Enter the following location keywords and information:
• For a file on the internal Flash, enter flash:// followed by the filename.
• For a file on an FTP server, enter ftp://user:password@hostip/filepath
• For a file on the external Flash, enter slot0:// followed by the filename.
• For a file on a TFTP server, enter tftp://hostip/filepath
Note: ftp and tftp are the only S-Series options.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

Usage
Information Note: A filepath that contains a dot ( . ) is not supported.

Example Command output example (E-Series): show os-version

FTOS#show os-version

RELEASE IMAGE INFORMATION :

---------------------------------------------------------------------
Platform Version Size ReleaseTime
E-series: EF 7.5.1.0 27676168 Aug 15 2007 10:06:21

TARGET IMAGE INFORMATION :

---------------------------------------------------------------------
Type Version Target checksum
runtime 7.5.1.0 control processor passed
runtime 7.5.1.0 route processor passed
runtime 7.5.1.0 terascale linecard passed
boot flash 2.4.1.1 control processor passed
boot flash 2.4.1.1 route processor passed
boot flash 2.3.1.3 terascale linecard passed
boot selector 2.4.1.1 control processor passed
boot selector 2.4.1.1 route processor passed
boot selector 2.3.1.3 terascale linecard passed

FTOS#

File Management | 51
 Example Command output example (C-Series): show os-version
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show os-version

RELEASE IMAGE INFORMATION :

---------------------------------------------------------------------
Platform Version Size ReleaseTime
C-series: CB 7.5.1.0 23734363 Aug 18 2007 11:49:51

TARGET IMAGE INFORMATION :

---------------------------------------------------------------------
Type Version Target checksum
runtime 7.5.1.0 control processor passed
runtime 7.5.1.0 linecard passed
boot flash 2.7.0.1 control processor passed
boot flash 1.0.0.40 linecard passed
boot selector 2.7.0.1 control processor passed
boot selector 1.0.0.40 linecard passed

FPGA IMAGE INFORMATION :

---------------------------------------------------------------------
Card Version Release Date
Primary RPM 4.1 May 02 2007
Secondary RPM 4.1 May 02 2007
LC0 3.2 May 02 2007
LC5 3.2 May 02 2007
LC6 2.2 May 02 2007
FTOS#

show running-config
ces Display the current configuration and display changes from the default values.

Syntax show running-config [entity] [configured] [status]

Parameters
entity (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the keywords listed below to display that entity’s
current (non-default) configuration. Note that, if nothing is configured for
that entity, nothing is displayed and the prompt returns:
• aaa for the current AAA configuration
• acl for the current ACL configuration
• arp for the current static ARP configuration
• as-path for the current AS-path configuration
• bgp for the current BGP configuration
• boot for the current boot configuration
• cam-profile for the current CAM profile in the configuration.
• class-map for the current class-map configuration
• community-list for the current community-list configuration
• fefd for the current FEFD configuration
• ftp for the current FTP configuration
• fvrp for the current FVRP configuration
• host for the current host configuration
• hardware-monitor for hardware-monitor action-on-error settings
• igmp for the current IGMP configuration
• interface for the current interface configuration
• isis for the current ISIS configuration
• line for the current line configuration
• load-balance for the current port-channel load-balance configuration
• logging for the current logging configuration

52 | File Management
 • mac for the current MAC ACL configuration
• mac-address-table for the current MAC configuration
• management-route for the current Management port forwarding
configuration
• mroute for the current Mroutes configuration
• ntp for the current NTP configuration
• ospf for the current OSPF configuration
• pim for the current PIM configuration
• policy-map-input for the current input policy map configuration
• policy-map-output for the current output policy map configuration
• prefix-list for the current prefix-list configuration
• privilege for the current privilege configuration
• radius for the current RADIUS configuration
• redirect-list for the current redirect-list configuration
• redundancy for the current RPM redundancy configuration
• resolve for the current DNS configuration
• rip for the current RIP configuration
• route-map for the current route map configuration
• snmp for the current SNMP configuration
• spanning-tree for the current spanning tree configuration
• static for the current static route configuration
• tacacs+ for the current TACACS+ configuration
• tftp for the current TFTP configuration
• trace-group for the current trace-group configuration
• trace-list for the current trace-list configuration
• users for the current users configuration
• wred-profile for the current wred-profile configuration
configured (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword configuration to display line card
interfaces with non-default configurations only.
status (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword status to display the checksum for the
running configuration and the start-up configuration.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Added hardware-monitor option
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Expanded to include last configuration change and start-up last updated (date and time)
and who made the change
Version 6.5.4.0 Added status option

File Management | 53
 Example Command output example (partial): show running-config
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show running-config
Current Configuration ...
! Version 7.4.1.0
! Last configuration change at Tue Apr 10 17:43:38 2007 by admin
! Startup-config last updated at Thu Mar 29 02:35:08 2007 by default
!
boot system rpm0 primary flash://FTOS-EF-7.4.1.0.bin
boot system rpm0 secondary flash://FTOS-EF-6.3.1.2.bin
boot system rpm0 default flash://FTOS-EF-6.5.1.8.bin
!
...

Example Command output example: show running-config

FTOS#show running-config status

running-config checksum 0xB4B9BF03

startup-config checksum 0x8803620F
FTOS#

Usage The status option enables you to display the size and checksum of the running configuration and the
Information startup configuration.

show sfm
ce View the current SFM status.

Syntax show sfm [number [brief] | all]

Parameters
number Enter a number to view information on that SFM.
Range: 0 to 8.
all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to view a table with information on all present SFMs.
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to view a list with SFM status.
Note: The brief option is not available on C-Series.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.8 Updated to support PPID on the S60
History
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

54 | File Management
E-Series Example Command output example (Partial) on E-Series: show sfm
FTOS#show sfm

Switch Fabric State: up

Switch Mode: SFM3

-- SFM card 0 --
Status : active (Older version of SFM for Exascale)
Card Type : SFM3 - Switch Fabric Module
Up Time : 18 hr, 40 min
Last Restart : remote-off
Temperature : 42C
Power Status : AC
Serial Number : VC074300030
Part Number : 7520020001 Rev 03
Vendor Id : 04
Date Code : 01402006
Country Code : 01
Piece Part ID : CN-0RVY43-75412-123-0030
PPID Revision : 003
Service Tag : SVCTG00
Expr Svc Code : 628 458 860 16
FPGA : 0x0.0.3
Booting from : EEPROM0

-- SFM card 1 --
Status : active (Older version of SFM for Exascale)
Card Type : SFM3 - Switch Fabric Module
Up Time : 18 hr, 40 min
Last Restart : remote-off
Temperature : 42C
Power Status : AC
Serial Number : VC074300032
Part Number : 7520020001 Rev 03
Vendor Id : 04
Date Code : 01402006
Country Code : 01
Piece Part ID : CN-0RVY43-75412-82B-0456
PPID Revision : 1B2
Service Tag : SVCTG01
Expr Svc Code : 628 458 860 17
FPGA : 0x0.0.3
Booting from : EEPROM0
!-------- output truncated -------------!

Command output example: show sfm all

FTOS#show sfm all

Switch Fabric State: up

Switch Mode: SFM3
-- Switch Fabric Modules --
Slot Status
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 active (Older version of SFM for Exascale)
1 active (Older version of SFM for Exascale)
2 active (Older version of SFM for Exascale)
3 active (Older version of SFM for Exascale)
4 not present

FTOS#

Table 5-1. show sfm Command Output Fields

Field Description
Switch Fabric State: States that the Switch Fabric is up (8 SFMs are online and operating).
Status Displays the SFM’s active status.
Card Type States the type of SFM.

File Management | 55
 Table 5-1. show sfm Command Output Fields
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Field Description
Up Time Displays the number of hours and minutes since the RPM’s last reboot.
Temperature Displays the temperature of the RPM.
Minor alarm status if temperature is over 65° C.
Power Status Displays power status: absent, down, or up
Serial Num Displays the line card serial number.
Part Num Displays the line card part number.
Vendor ID Displays an internal code, which specifies the manufacturing vendor.
Date Code Displays the line card’s manufacturing date.
Country Code Displays the country of origin.
01 = USA

show startup-config
ces Display the startup configuration.

Syntax show startup-config

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Expanded to include last configuration change and start-up last updated (date and time)
and who made the change.

Example Command output example (partial): show startup-config

FTOS#show startup-config

! Version 7.4.1.0
! Last configuration change at Thu Mar 29 02:16:07 2007 by default
! Startup-config last updated at Thu Mar 29 02:35:08 2007 by default
!
boot system rpm0 primary flash://FTOS-EF-7.4.1.0.bin
boot system rpm0 secondary flash://FTOS-EF-6.3.1.2.bin
boot system rpm0 default flash://FTOS-EF-6.5.1.8.bin
!
...

Related
show running-config Display current (running) configuration.
Commands

56 | File Management
show version
cesz Display the current FTOS version information on the system.

Syntax show version

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 9.0.0.0 Introduced on Z9000.
History
Version 8.3.12.0 Introduced on S4810.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series.
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series.
E-Series original Command

Example FTOS#show version

(E-Series) Dell Force10 Networks Real Time Operating System SoftwareDe
Dell Force10 Operating System Version: 1.0
Dell Force10 Application Software Version: 5.3.1.0
Copyright (c) 1999-2004 by Dell Force10 Networks, Inc.
Build Time: Sun May 9 00:57:03 PT 2004
Build Path: /local/local0/Release/5-4-1/SW/Bsp/Diag
Dell Force10 uptime is 1 days, 3 hours, 16 minutes

System image file is "/home/5.3.1/5.3.1.0/FTOS-ED-RPM1-5.3.1.0.bin"

Chassis Type: E1200

Control Processor: IBM PowerPC 405GP (Rev D) with 268435456 bytes of memory.
Route Processor 1: IBM PowerPC 405GP (Rev D) with 536870912 bytes of memory.
Route Processor 2: IBM PowerPC 405GP (Rev D) with 536870912 bytes of memory.

128K bytes of non-volatile configuration memory.

1 Route Processor Module

9 Switch Fabric Module
1 24-port GE line card with SFP optics (EE)
1 12-port GE Flex line card with SFP optics (EE)
1 2-port OC48c line card with SR optics (EC)
2 24-port GE line card with SX optics (EB)
1 2-port 10GE WAN PHY line card with 10Km (1310nm) optics (EE)
1 12-port GE Flex line card with SFP optics (EC)
1 2-port 10GE LAN PHY line card with 10Km (1310nm) optics (ED)
1 12-port OC12c/3c PoS line card with IR optics (EC)
1 24-port GE line card with SFP optics (ED)
1 FastEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s)
120 GigabitEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s)
14 SONET network interface(s)
4 Ten GigabitEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s)
FTOS#

Example FTOS#show version

(S-Series) Dell Force10 Networks Real Time Operating System Software
Dell Force10 Operating System Version: 1.0
Dell Force10 Application Software Version: E7-8-1-13
Copyright (c) 1999-2008 by Dell Force10 Networks, Inc.
Build Time: Mon Nov 24 18:59:27 2008
Build Path: /local/local/sw/build/build2/Release/7-8-1/SW/SRC
Dell Force10 uptime is 1 minute(s)

File Management | 57
 System Type: S50V
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Control Processor: MPC8451E with 252739584 bytes of memory.

32M bytes of boot flash memory.

1 48-port E/FE/GE with POE (SB)

48 GigabitEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s)
4 Ten GigabitEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s)
FTOS#

Example FTOS#
(S4810) FTOS#show version
Dell Force10 Real Time Operating System Software
Dell Force10 Operating System Version: 1.0
Dell Force10 Application Software Version: Z9K-ICC-PRIM-SYNC-8-3-11-173
Copyright (c) 1999-2012 by Dell Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Build Time: Mon Jul 16 22:19:01 PDT 2012
Build Path: /local/local/build/build15/8.3.12.0/SW/SRC/Radius
FTOS uptime is 1 minute(s)

System image file is "s4810-14"

System Type: S4810

Control Processor: Freescale QorIQ P2020 with 2147483648 bytes of memory.

128M bytes of boot flash memory.

1 52-port GE/TE/FG (SE)

52 Ten GigabitEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s)
FTOS#
FTOS#
FTOS#
FTOS#config t
FTOS(conf)#int te 0/5
FTOS(conf-if-te-0/5)#no shut
FTOS(conf-if-te-0/5)#
FTOS(conf-if-te-0/5)#
FTOS(conf-if-te-0/5)#
FTOS(conf-if-te-0/5)#ipv6 nd prefix FEC0::/10
FTOS(conf-if-te-0/5)#
FTOS(conf-if-te-0/5)#show conf
!
interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/5
ip address 78.21.1.3/24
ipv6 nd prefix fec0::/10
flowcontrol rx on tx on
no shutdown
FTOS(conf-if-te-0/5)#
FTOS#

58 | File Management
Example (Z9000) st-pet-z9k-6#show version
Dell Force10 Real Time Operating System Software
Dell Force10 Operating System Version: 2.1
Dell Force10 Application Software Version: 9.0(0.0)
Copyright (c) 1999-2012 by Dell Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Build Time: Mon Oct 22 00:52:30 PDT 2012
Build Path: /sites/sjc/work/build/buildSpaces/build04/E9-0-0/SW/SRC
st-pet-z9k-6 uptime is 23 hour(s), 23 minute(s)

System image file is "system://A"

System Type: Z9000

Control Processor: Intel Jasper Forest with 3474911232 bytes of memory.

8G bytes of boot flash memory.

1 32-port TE/FG (ZB)

24 Ten GigabitEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s)
26 Forty GigabitEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s)

Table 5-2. show version Command Fields

Lines beginning with Description

Dell Force10 Network... Name of the operating system
Dell Force10 Operating... OS version number
Dell Force10 Application... Software version
Copyright (c)... Copyright information
Build Time... Software build’s date stamp
Build Path... Location of the software build files loaded on the system
Dell Force10 uptime is... Amount of time the system has been up
System image... Image file name
Chassis Type: Chassis type (E1200, E600, E600i, E300, C300, C150)
Control Processor:... Control processor information and amount of memory on processor.
Route Processor 1:... E-Series route processor 1 information and the amount of memory
on that processor.
Route Processor 2:... E-Series route processor 2 information and the amount of memory
on that processor.
128K bytes... Amount and type of memory on system.
1 Route Processor... Hardware configuration of the system, including the number and
type of physical interfaces available.

File Management | 59
 upgrade (E-Series version)
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

e Upgrade the bootflash, boot selector, or system image on a processor.

Syntax upgrade {bootflash-image | bootselector-image | system-image} {all | linecard linecard-slot

| rpm} {booted | file-url}

Parameters
bootflash-image Enter the keyword bootflash-image to upgrade the bootflash image.
bootselector-image Enter the keyword bootselector-image to upgrade the boot selector
image.
Use with TAC supervision only.
system-image Enter the keyword system-image to upgrade the cache boot image.
all Enter the keyword all to upgrade the bootflash/boot selector image on all
processors in the E-Series. This keyword does not upgrade the bootflash on
the standby RPM.
linecard linecard-slot Enter the keyword linecard followed by the slot number to change the
bootflash image on a specific line card.
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on the E1200; 0 to 6 for the E600; 0 to 5 on the
E300
rpm Enter the keyword rpm to upgrade the bootflash/boot selector image on all
processors on the RPM.
booted Enter this keyword to upgrade using the image packed with the currently
running FTOS image.
file-url Enter the following location keywords and information to upgrade using an
FTOS image other than the one currently running:
Enter the transfer method and file location:
flash://filename
ftp://userid:password@hostip/filepath
slot0://filename
tftp://hostip/filepath

Defaults No configuration or default values

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.7.1.0 Removed alt-bootflash-image, alt-bootselector-image, alt-system-image
History
options, rp1, rp2, and cp options.
E-Series original Command

Usage A system message appears stating the Bootflash upgrade status. Reload the system to boot from the
Information upgraded boot images.
Once the URL is specified, the same downloaded image can be used for upgrading an individual RPM,
line cards, SFM FPGA, and system-image for cache-boot without specifying the file-url again using the
command upgrade {bootflash-image | bootselector-image | system-image} {all | linecard
linecard-slot | rpm}. After 20 minutes, the cached memory is released and returned for general use, but
the URL is maintained and you do not have to specify it for subsequent upgrades.

Related
Commands upgrade fpga-image (E-Series) Upgrade the FPGA version in the specified E-Series SFM.
boot system (S60) Display configured boot image information

60 | File Management
upgrade (C-Series version)
c Upgrade the bootflash or boot selector image on a processor.

Syntax upgrade {bootflash-image | bootselector-image | system-image}

{all | linecard {number | all} | rpm} [booted | file-url | repair]

Parameters
bootflash-image Enter the keyword bootflash-image to upgrade the bootflash image.
bootselector-image Enter the keyword bootselector-image to upgrade the boot selector
image. Use with TAC supervision only.
system-image Enter the keyword system-image to upgrade the system image. Use
with TAC supervision only.
all Enter the keyword all to upgrade the bootflash or boot selector image on
all processors. This keyword does not upgrade the bootflash on the standby
RPM.
Enter the keyword all after the keyword linecard to upgrade the
bootflash or boot selector image on all linecards.
linecard number Enter the keyword linecard followed by the line card slot number.
Range:
E1200, E1200i AC/DC: 0-13
E600, E600i: 0-6
E300: 0-5
C300: 0-7
C150: 0-3
rpm Enter the keyword rpm to upgrade the system image of a selector image
on all processors on the RPM.
repair Enter this keyword to upgrade a line card newly inserted into an already
upgraded chassis. This option is only available with the system-image
keyword.
booted Upgrade the bootflash or bootselector image using the currently running
FTOS image.
file-url Enter the following location keywords and information to upgrade using an
FTOS image other than the one currently running:
• To specify an FTOS image on the internal flash, enter flash://
file-path/filename.
• To specify an FTOS image on an FTP server, enter ftp://
user:password@hostip/filepath
• To specify an FTOS image on the external flash on the primary RPM,
slot0://file-path/filename
• To copy a file on a TFTP server, enter tftp://hostip/filepath/
filename

Defaults FTOS uses the boot flash image that was packed with it if no URL is specified.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced system-image option
History
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

File Management | 61
 Usage A system message appears stating the Bootflash upgrade status. Reload the system to boot from the
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Information upgraded boot images.

Once the URL is specified, the same downloaded image can be used for upgrading an individual RPM,
line cards, SFM FPGA, and system-image for cache-boot without specifying the file-url again using the
command upgrade {bootflash-image | bootselector-image | system-image} {all | linecard
linecard-slot | rpm}. After 20 minutes, the cached memory is released and returned for general use, but
the URL is maintained and you do not have to specify it for subsequent upgrades.

Related
Commands upgrade fpga-image (E-Series) Upgrade the FPGA version in the specified E-Series SFM.
boot system (S60) Display configured boot image information

upgrade (S-Series management unit)

s Upgrade the bootflash image or system image of the S-Series management unit.

Syntax upgrade {boot | system} {ftp: | scp: | tftp: | flash: {A: |B:} | stack-unit | usbflash:} file-url

Parameters
boot Enter this keyword to change the boot image.
system Enter this keyword to change the system image.
ftp: After entering this keyword you can either follow it with the location of the source file in
this form: //userid:password@hostip/filepath, or press Enter to launch a prompt
sequence.
scp: After entering this keyword you can either follow it with the location of the source file in
this form: //userid:password@hostip/filepath, or press Enter to launch a prompt
sequence.
tftp: After entering this keyword you can either follow it with the location of the source file in
this form: //hostlocation/filepath, or press Enter to launch a prompt sequence.
flash: After entering this keyword you can either follow it with the location of the source file in
this form: flash//filepath,or press Enter to launch a prompt sequence.
S60 only
A: | B: Enter the partition to upgrade from the flash.
S60 only
stack-unit: After entering this keyword to synch the image to the stack-unit.
usbflash: After entering this keyword you can either follow it with the location of the source file in
this form: usbflash://filepath, or press Enter to launch a prompt sequence.
S60 only

Defaults No configuration or default values

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Added support for TFTP and SCP.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

62 | File Management
 Usage You must reload FTOS after executing this command. Use the command upgrade system stack-unit
Information (S-Series stack member) on page 242 to copy FTOS from the management unit to one or more stack
members.

FTOS#upgrade system ?
ftp: Copy from remote file system (ftp://userid:password@hostip/filepath)
scp: Copy from remote file system (scp://userid:password@hostip/filepath)
tftp: Copy from remote file system (tftp://hostip/filepath)
FTOS#$pgrade system ftp://username:[email protected]/FTOS-SB-7.7.1.0.bin
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
Erasing Sseries ImageUpgrade Table of Contents, please wait
.!..................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................!
12946259 bytes successfully copied
FTOS#reload

upgrade fpga-image (E-Series)

e Upgrade the FPGA version in the specified E-Series SFM and automatically initiate an automatic reset
to complete the version upgrade.

Syntax upgrade fpga-image {sfm} {all | id} [booted | flash:// | ftp: |slot0: | tftp]

Parameters
sfm Enter the keyword sfm to upgrade the FPGA on the SFMs.
rpm Enter the keyword rpm to upgrade all processors on the RPM.
all Enter the keyword all to upgrade the FPGA on all the SFMs.
id Enter the keyword id to upgrade the FPGA on all a specific SFM.
Enter the path to the upgrade source. Entering <CR> updates the FPGA from the flash.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.1.0 Added rpm option
History
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Example Command example: upgrade sfm autoreset

FTOS#upgrade sfm 1 autoreset
SFM1: upgrade in progress
!!! !!! !!!
SFM1: upgrade complete
SFM1 is active. Resetting it might temporarily impact traffic.
Proceed with reset [confirm yes/no]: yes
FTOS#

File Management | 63
 Related
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

show sfm Display the SFM status.

Commands
upgrade (E-Series version) Upgrade the E-Series.

Usage
0 On E-Series ExaScale, you cannot upgrade SFMs using this command when Cache Boot is configured.
Information If you attempt an upgrade, you must reload the chassis to recover.

upgrade fpga-image (C-Series)

c Upgrade the primary FPGA image.

Syntax upgrade fpga-image {rpm {number | all}| linecard {number | all} [system-fpga | link-fpga] |
all} {booted | file-url}

Parameters
rpm number Enter rpm followed by the RPM slot number to upgrade an RPM FPGA
Range: 0-1
linecard number Enter linecard followed by the line card slot number to upgrade a
linecard FPGA.
Range: 0-7 on the C300, 0-3 on the C150
all Enter the keyword all to upgrade all RPM and linecard FPGAs. Enter the
keyword all after the keyword rpm to upgrade all FPGAs on all RPMs.
Enter the keyword all after the keyword linecard to upgrade all FPGAs
on all linecards.
system-fpga (OPTIONAL) Enter system-fpga to upgrade only the system FPGA on
a fiber line card. Contact the Dell Networking TAC before using this
keyword.
link-fpga (OPTIONAL) Enter link-fpga to upgrade only the link FPGA on a fiber
line card. Contact the Dell Networking TAC before using this keyword.
booted Upgrade the FPGA image using the currently running FTOS image.
file-url Enter the following location keywords and information to upgrade the
FPGA using an FTOS image other than the one currently running:
• To specify an FTOS image on the internal flash, enter flash://
file-path/filename.
• To specify an FTOS image on an FTP server, enter ftp://
user:password@hostip/filepath
• To specify an FTOS image on the external flash on the primary RPM,
slot0://file-path/filename
• To copy a file on a TFTP server, enter tftp://hostip/filepath/
filename

Defaults None.

Command Mode EXEC Privilege

Command
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Renamed the primary-fpga-flash keyword to fpga-image. Added support for
upgrading using a remote FTOS image.
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for the all keyword
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series

64 | File Management
 Example Command example: upgrade fpga-image
FTOS#conf
FTOS(conf)# upgrade primary-fpga-flash rpm
Proceed to upgrade primary fpga flash for rpm 0 [confirm yes/no]: yes
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
FTOS#

Usage Reset the card using the power-cycle option after restoring the FPGA command.
Information

Related
Commands
reset Reset a line card or RPM.
restore fpga-image This command copies the backup FPGA image to the primary FPGA image.

upgrade fpga-image (S60)

Upgrade the FPGA version on the S60.

Syntax upgrade fpga-image stack-unit {0-11} booted

Parameters
stack-unit Enter the keyword stack-unit to upgrade the FPGA on the specified S60 chassis.
booted Upgrade the FPGA image using the currently running FTOS image.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60
History

Example Command example: upgrade fpga-image

FTOS#upgrade fpga-image stack-unit 0 booted

Current FPGA information in the system:

=======================================

Card FPGA Name Current Version New Version

------------------------------------------------------------------------
Unit0 S60 SYSTEM FPGA 15 16

***********************************************************************
* Warning - Upgrading FPGA is inherently risky and should *
* only be attempted when necessary. A failure at this upgrade may *
* cause a board RMA. Proceed with caution ! *
***********************************************************************

Upgrade fpga image for stack-unit 0 [yes/no]: yes

FPGA upgrade in progress. Please do NOT power off the card.

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Upgrade result :
================
Unit 0 FPGA upgrade successful. Power cycle the stack-unit to complete the
upgrade.

FTOS#

File Management | 65
 www.dell.com | dell.com/support

66
|
File Management
 6
Control and Monitoring

Overview
This chapter contains the following commands to configure and monitor the system, including Telnet,
FTP, and TFTP as they apply to platforms c e s.

Commands

audible cut-off show command-history

banner exec show command-tree
banner login show console lp
banner motd show cpu-traffic-stats
cam-audit linecard show debugging
clear alarms show environment (C-Series and E-Series)
clear command history show environment (S-Series)
clear line show inventory (C-Series and E-Series)
configure show inventory (S-Series)
debug cpu-traffic-stats show linecard
debug ftpserver show linecard boot-information
disable show memory (C-Series and E-Series)
do show memory (S-Series)
enable show processes cpu (C-Series and E-Series)
enable xfp-power-updates show processes cpu (S-Series)
end show processes ipc flow-control
epoch show processes memory (C-Series and E-Series)
exec-banner show processes memory (S-Series)
exec-timeout show rpm
exit show software ifm
ftp-server topdir show switch links
ftp-server username show system (S-Series)
hostname show tech-support (C-Series and E-Series)
ip ftp password show tech-support (S-Series)

Control and Monitoring | 67

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ip ftp source-interface show chassis

ip ftp username ssh-peer-rpm
ip telnet server enable ssh-peer-stack-unit
ip telnet source-interface telnet
ip tftp source-interface telnet-peer-stack-unit
line telnet-peer-stack-unit
linecard terminal length
module power-off terminal xml
motd-banner traceroute
ping undebug all
power-off util-threshold cpu (C- and E-Series)
power-on util-threshold cpu (S-Series)
reload util-threshold mem (C- and E-Series)
reset util-threshold mem (S-Series)
rpm <slot> location-led upload trace-log
send virtual-ip
service timestamps write
show alarms

audible cut-off
e Turn off an audible alarm.

Syntax audible cut-off

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

banner exec
ces Configure a message that is displayed when a user enters the EXEC mode.

Syntax banner exec c line c

To delete a banner, enter no banner exec.

Parameters
c Enter the keywords banner exec, and then enter a character delineator, represented here
by the letter c, and press ENTER.
line Enter a text string for your banner message ending the message with your delineator.
In the example below, the delineator is a percent character (%); the banner message is
“testing, testing”.

Defaults No banner is displayed.

68 | Control and Monitoring

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

Usage Optionally, use the banner exec command to create a text string that is displayed when the user
Information accesses the EXEC mode. The exec-banner command toggles that display.

Example

FTOS(conf)#banner exec ?
LINE c banner-text c, where 'c' is a delimiting character
FTOS(conf)#banner exec %
Enter TEXT message. End with the character '%'.
This is the banner%
FTOS(conf)#end
FTOS#exit
4d21h5m: %RPM0-P:CP %SEC-5-LOGOUT: Exec session is terminated for user on line
console

This is the banner

FTOS con0 now available

Press RETURN to get started.

4d21h6m: %RPM0-P:CP %SEC-5-LOGIN_SUCCESS: Login successful for user on line
console

This is the banner

FTOS>

Related
banner login Sets a banner for login connections to the system.
Commands
banner motd Sets a Message of the Day banner.
exec-banner Enable the display of a text string when the user enters the EXEC mode.
line Enable and configure console and virtual terminal lines to the system.

banner login
ces Set a banner to be displayed when logging on to the system.

Syntax banner login {keyboard-interactive | no keyboard-interactive} [c line c]

Enter no banner login to delete the banner text.

Enter no banner login keyboard-interactive to automatically go to the banner message prompt

(does not require a carriage return).

Parameters
keyboard-interactive Enter this keyword to require a carriage return (CR) to get the message banner
prompt.

Control and Monitoring | 69

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

c Enter a delineator character to specify the limits of the text banner. In Figure 6-1,
the % character is the delineator character.
line Enter a text string for your text banner message ending the message with your
delineator.
In the example in Figure 6-1, the delineator is a percent character (%).
Ranges:
• maximum of 50 lines
• up to 255 characters per line

Defaults No banner is configured and the CR is required when creating a banner.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced keyboard-interactive keyword
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

Usage A login banner message is displayed only in EXEC Privilege mode after entering the enable
Information command followed by the password. These banners are not displayed to users in EXEC mode.

Related
banner exec Sets a banner to be displayed when you enter EXEC Privilege mode.
Commands
banner motd Sets a Message of the Day banner.

Example Figure 6-1. Command Example: banner login

FTOS(conf)#banner login ?
keyboard-interactive Press enter key to get prompt
LINE c banner-text c, where 'c' is a delimiting character
FTOS(conf)#no banner login ?
keyboard-interactive Prompt will be displayed by default
<cr>
FTOS(conf)#banner login keyboard-interactive

Enter TEXT message. End with the character '%'.

This is the banner%
FTOS(conf)#end
FTOS#exit
13d21h9m: %RPM0-P:CP %SEC-5-LOGOUT: Exec session is terminated for user on line
console

This is the banner

FTOS con0 now available

Press RETURN to get started.

13d21h10m: %RPM0-P:CP %SEC-5-LOGIN_SUCCESS: Login successful for user on line
console

This is the banner

FTOS>

70 | Control and Monitoring

banner motd
ces Set a Message of the Day (MOTD) banner.

Syntax banner motd c line c

To delete a Message of the Day banner, enter no banner motd.

Parameters
c Enter a delineator character to specify the limits of the text banner. In the above figures, the %
character is the delineator character.
line Enter a text string for your message of the day banner message ending the message with your
delineator.
In the example figures above, the delineator is a percent character (%).

Defaults No banner is configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

Usage A MOTD banner message is displayed only in EXEC Privilege mode after entering the enable
Information command followed by the password. These banners are not displayed to users in EXEC (non-privilege)
mode.

Related
banner exec Sets a banner to be displayed when you enter the EXEC Privilege mode.
Commands
banner login Sets a banner to be displayed after successful login to the system.

cam-audit linecard
e Enable audit of the IPv4 forwarding table on all line cards.

Syntax cam-audit linecard all ipv4-fib interval time-in-minutes

To disable audit, use the no cam-audit linecard all ipv4-fib command

Parameters
all Enter the keyword all to enable CAM audit on all line cards.
ipv4-fib Enter the keyword ipv4-fib to designate the CAM audit on the IPv4
forwarding entries.
interval time-in-minutes Enter the keyword interval followed by the frequency in minutes of the
CAM audit.
Range: 5 to 1440 minutes (24 hours)
Default: 60 minutes

Defaults Disabled

Control and Monitoring | 71

 Command Modes CONFIGURATION
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Command
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series
History

Usage Enables periodic audits of software and hardware copies of the IPv4 forwarding table.
Information

clear alarms
ces Clear alarms on the system.

Syntax clear alarms

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

Usage This command clear alarms that are no longer active. If an alarm situation is still active, it is seen in the
Information system output.

clear command history

ces Clear the command history log.

Syntax clear command history

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

Related
Commands
show command-history Display a buffered log of all commands entered by all users along with a
time stamp.

clear line
ces Reset a terminal line.

Syntax clear line {line-number | aux 0 | console 0 | vty number}

72 | Control and Monitoring

 Parameters
line-number Enter a number for one of the 12 terminal lines on the system.
Range: 0 to 11.
aux 0 Enter the keywords aux 0 to reset the Auxiliary port.
Note: This option is supported on E-Series only.
console 0 Enter the keyword console 0 to reset the Console port.
vty number Enter the keyword vty followed by a number to clear a Terminal line.
Range: 0 to 9

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

configure
ces Enter the CONFIGURATION mode from the EXEC Privilege mode.

Syntax configure [terminal]

Parameters
terminal (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword terminal to specify that you are configuring from the
terminal.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

Example Figure 6-2. Command Example: configure

FTOS#configure
FTOS(conf)#

debug cpu-traffic-stats
ces Enable the collection of CPU traffic statistics.

Syntax debug cpu-traffic-stats

To disable the debugging, execute the no debug cpu-traffic-stats command.

Defaults Disabled

Control and Monitoring | 73

 Command Modes EXEC Privilege
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage This command enables (and disables) the collection of CPU traffic statistics from the time this
Information command is executed (not from system boot). However, excessive traffic received by a CPU will
automatically trigger (turn on) the collection of CPU traffic statics. The following message is an
indication that collection of CPU traffic is automatically turned on. Use the show cpu-traffic-stats to
view the traffic statistics.
Excessive traffic is received by CPU and traffic will be rate controlled

Note: This command must be enabled before the show cpu-traffic-stats command will
display traffic statistics. Dell Networking recommends that you disable debugging (no
debug cpu-traffic-stats) once troubleshooting is complete.

Related
show cpu-traffic-stats Display cpu traffic statistics
Commands

debug ftpserver
ces View transactions during an FTP session when a user is logged into the FTP server.

Syntax debug ftpserver

To stop debugging, enter no debug ftpserver.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

disable
ce Return to the EXEC mode.

Syntax disable [level]

Parameters
level (OPTIONAL) Enter a number for a privilege level of the FTOS.
Range: 0 to 15.
Default: 1

Defaults 1

74 | Control and Monitoring

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

do
ces Allows the execution of most EXEC-level commands from all CONFIGURATION levels without
returning to the EXEC level.

Syntax do command

Parameters
command Enter an EXEC-level command.

Defaults No default behavior

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Usage The following commands are not supported by the do command:

Information
• enable
• disable
• exit
• config

Example Figure 6-3. Command Example: do

FTOS(conf-if-te-5/0)#do clear counters
Clear counters on all interfaces [confirm]
FTOS(conf-if-te-5/0)#
FTOS(conf-if-te-5/0)#do clear logging
Clear logging buffer [confirm]
FTOS(conf-if-te-5/0)#
FTOS(conf-if-te-5/0)#do reload
System configuration has been modified. Save? [yes/no]: n
Proceed with reload [confirm yes/no]: n
FTOS(conf-if-te-5/0)#

Control and Monitoring | 75

 enable
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Enter the EXEC Privilege mode or any other privilege level configured. After entering this command,
you may need to enter a password.

Syntax enable [level]

Parameters
level (OPTIONAL) Enter a number for a privilege level of FTOS.
Range: 0 to 15.
Default: 15

Defaults 15

Command Modes EXEC

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

Usage Users entering the EXEC Privilege mode or any other configured privilege level can access
Information configuration commands. To protect against unauthorized access, use the enable password command to
configure a password for the enable command at a specific privilege level. If no privilege level is
specified, the default is privilege level 15.

Related
enable password Configure a password for the enable command and to access a privilege level.
Commands

enable xfp-power-updates
ces Enable XFP power updates for SNMP.

Syntax enable xfp-power-updates interval seconds

To disable XFP power updates, use the no enable xfp-power-updates command.

Parameters
interval seconds Enter the keyword interval followed by the polling interval in seconds.
Range: 120 to 6000 seconds
Default: 300 seconds (5 minutes)

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and E-Series

76 | Control and Monitoring

 Usage The chassis MIB contain the entry chSysXfpRecvPower in the chSysPortTable table. Periodically, IFA
Information polls the XFP power for each of the ports, and sends the values to IFM where it is cached. The default
interval for the polling is 300 seconds (5 minutes). Use this command to enable the polling and to
configure the polling frequency.

end
ces Return to the EXEC Privilege mode from other command modes (for example, the
CONFIGURATION or ROUTER OSPF modes).

Syntax end

Command Modes CONFIGURATION, SPANNING TREE, MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE, LINE, INTERFACE,
TRACE-LIST, VRRP, ACCESS-LIST, PREFIX-LIST, AS-PATH ACL, COMMUNITY-LIST,
ROUTER OSPF, ROUTER RIP, ROUTER ISIS, ROUTER BGP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

Related
exit Return to the lower command mode.
Commands

epoch
e Set the epoch scheduling time for the chassis.

Syntax epoch {2.4 |3.2 | 10.4}

To return to the default setting, enter no epoch.

Parameters
2.4 Enter the keyword 2.4 to set the epoch to 2.4 micro-seconds and lower the latency.
This option is available on the E600i and E1200i E-Series ExaScale systems only.
3.2 Enter the keyword 3.2 to set the epoch to 3.2 micro-seconds and lower the latency.
This option is available on the E600/E600i and E1200/E1200i only. ExaScale does not supports
this setting with FTOS 8.3.1.0 and later.
10.4 Enter the keyword 10.4 to set the epoch to 10.4 micro-seconds.
This is the default setting and is available on the E300, E600/E600i, and E1200.

Defaults 10.4

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.1.0 Added 2.4 micro-seconds option. ExaScale supports only 10.4 microseconds and 2.4
History
microseconds with FTOS 8.3.1.0 and later.
Version 8.1.1.2 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale E600i

Control and Monitoring | 77

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale E1200i

Version 6.2.1.1 Support for E300 introduced (10.4 only)
Version 6.1.1.0 Values changed as described above

Usage You save the configuration and reload the chassis for the changes to the epoch command setting to
Information take affect.

When using 10 SFMs in an ExaScale chassis, the 10.4 and 2.4 settings are both linerate. Additionally,
the 2.4 setting has a lower latency.

When using 9 SFMs in an ExaScale chassis, the 10.4 setting is linerate; the 2.4 setting reduces
throughput. Dell Networking recommends using the 10.4 setting when the system has 9 SFMs.

Using 8 SFMs in an ExaScale chassis reduces throughput at any epoch setting.

Note: The E300 supports only the 10.4 epoch setting. The E-Series TeraScale E600/E600i
and the E1200/E1200i systems support the 10.4 and the 3.2 epoch settings.

Note: For E-Series ExaScale, the 2.4 setting is supported on FTOS version 8.3.1.0 and later.
The 10.4 setting is supported on all ExaScale FTOS versions. The 3.2 setting is only
supported on FTOS versions 8.2.1.0 and earlier.

exec-banner
ces Enable the display of a text string when the user enters the EXEC mode.

Syntax exec-banner

To disable the banner on terminal lines, enter no exec-banner.

Defaults Enabled on all lines (if configured, the banner appears).

Command Modes LINE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

Usage Optionally, use the banner exec command to create a text string that is displayed when the user
accesses the EXEC mode. This command toggles that display.

Related
banner exec Configure a banner to display when entering the EXEC mode.
Commands
line Enable and configure console and virtual terminal lines to the system.

78 | Control and Monitoring

exec-timeout
ce s Set a time interval the system will wait for input on a line before disconnecting the session.

Syntax exec-timeout minutes [seconds]

To return to default settings, enter no exec-timeout.

Parameters
minutes Enter the number of minutes of inactivity on the system before disconnecting the current
session.
Range: 0 to 35791
Default: 10 minutes for console line; 30 minutes for VTY line.
seconds (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of seconds
Range: 0 to 2147483
Default: 0 seconds

Defaults 10 minutes for console line; 30 minutes for VTY lines; 0 seconds

Command Modes LINE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

Usage To remove the time interval, enter exec-timeout 0 0.

Information

Example Figure 6-4. FTOS time-out display

FTOS con0 is now available

Press RETURN to get started.

FTOS>

exit
ce s Return to the lower command mode.

Syntax exit

Command Modes EXEC Privilege, CONFIGURATION, LINE, INTERFACE, TRACE-LIST, PROTOCOL GVRP,
SPANNING TREE, MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE, MAC ACCESS LIST, ACCESS-LIST,
AS-PATH ACL, COMMUNITY-LIST, PREFIX-LIST, ROUTER OSPF, ROUTER RIP, ROUTER
ISIS, ROUTER BGP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Control and Monitoring | 79

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series

E-Series original Command

Related
end Return to the EXEC Privilege command mode.
Commands

ftp-server enable
ces Enable FTP server functions on the system.

Syntax ftp-server enable

To disable FTP server on the system, enter no ftp-server enable.

Defaults Disabled.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

Example Figure 6-5. Example of Logging on to an FTP Server

morpheus% ftp 10.31.1.111
Connected to 10.31.1.111.
220 FTOS (1.0) FTP server ready
Name (10.31.1.111:dch): dch
331 Password required
Password:
230 User logged in
ftp> pwd
257 Current directory is "flash:"
ftp> dir
200 Port set okay
150 Opening ASCII mode data connection
size date time name
-------- ------ ------ --------
512 Jul-20-2004 18:15:00 tgtimg
512 Jul-20-2004 18:15:00 diagnostic
512 Jul-20-2004 18:15:00 other
512 Jul-20-2004 18:15:00 tgt
226 Transfer complete
329 bytes received in 0.018 seconds (17.95 Kbytes/s)
ftp>

Related
ftp-server topdir Set the directory to be used for incoming FTP connections to the E-Series.
Commands
ftp-server username Set a username and password for incoming FTP connections to the E-Series.

80 | Control and Monitoring

ftp-server topdir
ces Specify the top-level directory to be accessed when an incoming FTP connection request is made.

Syntax ftp-server topdir directory

To return to the default settings, enter no ftp-server topdir.

Parameters
directory Enter the directory path.

Defaults The internal flash is the default directory.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

Usage After you enable FTP server functions with the ftp-server enable command, Dell Networking
Information recommends that you specify a top-level directory path. Without a top-level directory path specified,
the FTOS directs users to the flash directory when they log in to the FTP server.

Related
ftp-server enable Enables FTP server functions on the E-Series.
Commands
ftp-server username Set a username and password for incoming FTP connections to the E-Series.

ftp-server username
ces Create a user name and associated password for incoming FTP server sessions.

Syntax ftp-server username username password [encryption-type] password

To delete a user name and its password, use the no ftp-server username username command.

Parameters
username Enter a text string up to 40 characters long as the user name.
password password Enter the keyword password followed by a string up to 40 characters long as
the password.
Without specifying an encryption type, the password is unencrypted.
encryption-type (OPTIONAL) After the keyword password enter one of the following
numbers:
• 0 (zero) for an unecrypted (clear text) password
• 7 (seven) for hidden text password.

Defaults Not enabled.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Control and Monitoring | 81

 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.

History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

hostname
ces Set the host name of the system.

Syntax hostname name

To delete a hostname assigned, enter no hostname.

Parameters
name Enter a text string, up to 32 characters long.

Defaults FTOS

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.9 Default changed to FTOS.
History
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

Usage The hostname is used in the prompt.

Information

ip ftp password
ces Specify a password for outgoing FTP connections.

Syntax ip ftp password [encryption-type] password

To remove a password and return to the default setting, use the no ip ftp password [password]
command.

Parameters
encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following numbers:
• 0 (zero) for an unecrypted (clear text) password
• 7 (seven) for hidden text password
password Enter a string up to 40 characters as the password.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

82 | Control and Monitoring

 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

Usage The password is listed in the configuration file; you can view the password by entering the show
Information running-config ftp command.

The password configured by the ip ftp password command is used when you use the ftp: parameter in
the copy command.

Related
copy Copy files.
Commands
ip ftp username Set the user name for FTP sessions.

ip ftp source-interface
ces Specify an interface’s IP address as the source IP address for FTP connections.

Syntax ip ftp source-interface interface

To delete an interface, use the no ip ftp source-interface interface command.

Parameters
interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For an 100/1000 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed
by the slot/port information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by
the slot/port information.
• For Loopback interfaces, enter the keyword loopback followed by a number from
zero (0) to 16383.
• For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a
number:
C-Series and S-Series: 1-128
E-Series: 1 to 255 for TeraScale and ExaScale
• For SONET interface types, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.

Defaults The IP address on the system that is closest to the Telnet address is used in the outgoing packets.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Increased number of VLANs on ExaScale to 4094 (was 2094)
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series

Control and Monitoring | 83

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series

E-Series original Command

Related
copy Copy files from and to the switch.
Commands

ip ftp username
ces Assign a user name for outgoing FTP connection requests.

Syntax ip ftp username username

To return to anonymous FTP connections, use the no ip ftp username [username] command.

Parameters
username Enter a text string as the user name up to 40 characters long.

Defaults No user name is configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

Usage You must also configure a password with the ip ftp password command.
Information

Related
ip ftp password Set the password for FTP connections.
Commands

ip telnet server enable

ces Enable the Telnet server on the switch.

Syntax ip telnet server enable

To disable the Telnet server, execute the no ip telnet server enable command.

Defaults Enabled

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

84 | Control and Monitoring

 Related
Commands
ip ssh server Enable SSH server on the system.

ip telnet source-interface
ces Set an interface’s IP address as the source address in outgoing packets for Telnet sessions.

Syntax ip telnet source-interface interface

To return to the default setting, use the no ip telnet source-interface [interface] command.

Parameters
interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For an 100/1000 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by the
slot/port information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by the
slot/port information.
• For Loopback interfaces, enter the keyword loopback followed by a number from zero
(0) to 16383.
• For the SONET interfaces, enter the keyword sonet followed by slot/port information.
• For a Port Channel, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a number:
C-Series and S-Series: 1-128
E-Series: 1 to 255 for TeraScale and ExaScale
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet followed
by the slot/port information.
• For VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.

Defaults The IP address on the system that is closest to the Telnet address is used in the outgoing packets.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Increased number of VLANs on ExaScale to 4094 (was 2094)
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

Related
telnet Telnet to another device.
Commands

ip tftp source-interface
ces Assign an interface’s IP address in outgoing packets for TFTP traffic.

Syntax ip tftp source-interface interface

To return to the default setting, use the no ip tftp source-interface interface command.

Control and Monitoring | 85

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:

• For an 100/1000 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by
the slot/port information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by the
slot/port information.
• For Loopback interfaces, enter the keyword loopback followed by a number from zero
(0) to 16383.
• For a Port Channel, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a number:
C-Series and S-Series: 1-128
E-Series: 1 to 255 for TeraScale and ExaScale
• For the SONET interfaces, enter the keyword sonet followed by slot/port information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet followed
by the slot/port information.
• For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.

Defaults The IP address on the system that is closest to the Telnet address is used in the outgoing packets.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Increased number of VLANs on ExaScale to 4094 (was 2094)
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

line
ces Enable and configure console and virtual terminal lines to the system. This command accesses LINE
mode, where you can set the access conditions for the designated line.

Syntax line {aux 0 | console 0 | vty number [end-number]}

Parameters
aux 0 Enter the keyword aux 0 to configure the auxiliary terminal connection.
Note: This option is supported on E-Series only.
console 0 Enter the keyword console 0 to configure the console port.
The console option for the S-Series is <0-0>.
vty number Enter the keyword vty followed by a number from 0 to 9 to configure a virtual terminal
line for Telnet sessions.
The system supports 10 Telnet sessions.
end-number (OPTIONAL) Enter a number from 1 to 9 as the last virtual terminal line to configure.
You can configure multiple lines at one time.

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

86 | Control and Monitoring

 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

Usage You cannot delete a terminal connection.

Information

Related
access-class Restrict incoming connections to a particular IP address in an IP access control list (ACL).
Commands
password Specify a password for users on terminal lines.
show linecard Display the line card(s) status.

linecard
ce Pre-configure a line card in a currently empty slot of the system or a different line card type for the slot.

Syntax linecard number card-type

To delete a card setting, use the no linecard number command.

Parameters
number Enter the number of the slot.
C-Series Range: 0-7
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on a E1200/E1200i, 0 to 6 on a E600/E6001, and 0 to 5 on a
E300.
card-type Enter the line card ID (see the Supported Hardware section in the Release Notes).

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.1.1.2 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale E600i
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale E1200i
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

Usage Use this command only for empty slots or a slot where you have hot-swapped a different line card type.
Information Before inserting a card of a different type into the pre-configured slot, execute the no linecard
number command. The following screenshot shows the current supported C-Series line cards, along
with their “card types” (card-type IDs).

Control and Monitoring | 87

 Figure 6-6. Command Example: show linecard on Empty C300 Slot
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show linecard 3

-- Line card 11 --
Status : not present

FTOS#linecard 3 ?
E46TB 36-port GE 10/100/1000Base-T with RJ45 - 8-port FE/GE with SFP - 2-port 10GE
with SFP+
E46VB 36-port GE 10/100/1000Base-T with RJ45 and PoE - 8-port FE/GE with SFP -
2-port 10GE with SFP+
E48PB 48-port FE/GE line card with SFP optics (CB)
E48TB 48-port GE 10/100/1000Base-T line card with RJ45 interfaces (CB)
E48VB 48-port GE 10/100/1000Base-T line card with RJ45 interfaces and PoE (CB)
EX4PB 4-port 10GE LAN PHY line card with XFP optics (CB)
EX8PB 8-port 10GE LAN PHY line card with XFP optics (CB)
FTOS#linecard 3 EX4PB
FTOS#show linecard 3

-- Line card 11 --
Status : not present
Required Type : EX4PB - 4-port 10GE LAN PHY line card with XFP optics (CB)
FTOS#

Note: It is advisable to shut down interfaces on a line card that you are hot-swapping.

Related
show linecard Display the line card(s) status.
Commands

module power-off
ce Turn off power to a line card at next reboot.

Syntax module power-off linecard number

To remove the command from the running configuration, use the no module power-off linecard
number command.

Parameters
linecard number Enter the keyword line card followed by the line card slot number
C-Series Range: 0-7
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on a E1200/1200i, 0 to 6 on a E600/E600i, and 0 to 5 on a
E300.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.1.1.2 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale E600i
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale E1200i
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

88 | Control and Monitoring

motd-banner
ces Enable a Message of the Day (MOTD) banner to appear when you log in to the system.

Syntax motd-banner
To disable the MOTD banner, enter no motd-banner.

Defaults Enabled on all lines.

Command Modes LINE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

ping
ces Test connectivity between the system and another device by sending echo requests and waiting for
replies.

Syntax ping [vrf <id>] [host | ip-address | ipv6-address] [count {number | continuous}] [datagram-size]
[timeout] [source (ip src-ipv4-address) | interface] [tos] [df-bit (y|n)] [validate-reply(y|n)] [pattern
pattern] [sweep-min-size] [sweep-max-size] [sweep-interval] [ointerface (ip src-ipv4-address) |
interface]

Parameter
vrf (OPTIONAL) E-Series Only: Enter the VRF Instance name of the device to which
you are testing connectivity.
host (OPTIONAL) Enter the host name of the devices to which you are testing
connectivity.
ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IPv4 address of the device to which you are testing
connectivity. The address must be in the dotted decimal format.
ipv6-address (OPTIONAL) E-Series only Enter the IPv6 address, in the x:x:x:x::x format, to
which you are testing connectivity.
Note: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros
count Enter the number of echo packets to be sent.
number: 1- 2147483647
Continuous: transmit echo request continuously
Default: 5
datagram size Enter the ICMP datagram size.
Range: 36 - 15360 bytes
Default: 100
timeout Enter the interval to wait for an echo reply before timing out.
Range: 0 -3600 seconds
Default: 2 seconds

Control and Monitoring | 89

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

source (IPv4 only) Enter the IPv4 source ip address or the source interface.
• Enter the IP address in A.B.C.D format
• For an 100/1000 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Port Channel, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a number:
C-Series and S-Series: 1-128
E-Series: 1 to 255 for TeraScale and ExaScale
• E-Series only For the SONET interfaces, enter the keyword sonet followed
by slot/port information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to
4094.
tos (IPv4 only) Enter the type of service required.
Range: 0-255
Default: 0
df-bit (IPv4 only) Enter Y or N for the “don't fragment” bit in IPv4 header
N: Do not set the “don't fragment” bit
Y: Do set “don't fragment” bit
Default is No.
validate-reply (IPv4 only) Enter Y or N for reply validation.
N: Do not validate reply data
Y: Do validate reply data
Default is No.
pattern pattern (IPv4 only) Enter the IPv4 data pattern.
Range: 0-FFFF
Default: 0xABCD
sweep-min-size Enter the minimum size of datagram in sweep range.
Range: 52-15359 bytes
sweep-max-size Enter the maximum size of datagram in sweep range.
Range: 53-15359 bytes
sweep-interval Enter the incremental value for sweep size.
1-15308 seconds
ointerface (IPv4 only) Enter the outgoing interface for multicast packets.
• Enter the IP address in A.B.C.D format
• For an 100/1000 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Port Channel, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a number:
C-Series and S-Series: 1-128
E-Series: 1 to 255 for TeraScale and ExaScale
• E-Series only For the SONET interfaces, enter the keyword sonet followed
by slot/port information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to
4094.

90 | Control and Monitoring

 Defaults See parameters above.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced extended ping options.
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale (IPv6)
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale (IPv4)
Version 7.9.1.0 Introduced VRF
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced support for C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Added support for IPv6 address on E-Series

Usage When you enter the ping command without specifying an IP/IPv6 address (Extended Ping), you are
Information prompted for a target IP/IPv6 address, a repeat count, a datagram size (up to 1500 bytes), a timeout in
seconds, and for Extended Commands. See Appendix A, ICMP Message Types for information on the
ICMP message codes that return from a ping command.
Figure 6-7. Command Example: ping (IPv4)
FTOS#ping 172.31.1.255

Type Ctrl-C to abort.

Sending 5, 100-byte ICMP Echos to 172.31.1.255, timeout is 2 seconds:

Reply to request 1 from 172.31.1.208 0 ms
Reply to request 1 from 172.31.1.216 0 ms
Reply to request 1 from 172.31.1.205 16 ms
:
:
Reply to request 5 from 172.31.1.209 0 ms
Reply to request 5 from 172.31.1.66 0 ms
Reply to request 5 from 172.31.1.87 0 ms

FTOS#

Figure 6-8. Command Example: ping (IPv6)

FTOS#ping 100::1

Type Ctrl-C to abort.

Sending 5, 100-byte ICMP Echos to 100::1, timeout is 2 seconds:

!!!!!
Success rate is 100.0 percent (5/5), round-trip min/avg/max = 0/0/0 (ms)
FTOS#

Control and Monitoring | 91

 power-off
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ce Turn off power to a selected line card or the standby (extra) Switch Fabric Module (SFM).

Syntax power-off {linecard number | sfm sfm-slot-id}

Parameters
linecard number Enter the keyword linecard and a number for the line card slot number.
C-Series Range: 0-7
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on a E1200/E1200i, 0 to 6 on a E600/E600i, and 0 to 5 on a
E300.
sfm sfm-slot-id Enter the keyword sfm by the slot number of the SFM to which you want to turn
off power.
Note: This option is supported on E-Series only.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.1.1.2 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale E600i
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale E1200i
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

Related
power-on Power on a line card or standby SFM.
Commands

power-on
ce Turn on power to a line card or the standby (extra) Switch Fabric Module (SFM).

Syntax power-on {linecard number | sfm sfm-slot-id}

Parameters
linecard number Enter the keyword linecard and a number for the line card slot number.
C-Series Range: 0-7
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on a E1200/E1200i, 0 to 6 on a E600/E600i, and 0 to 5 on a
E300.
sfm standby Enter the keyword sfm followed by the slot number of the SFM to power on.
Note: This option is supported on E-Series only.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.1.1.2 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale E600i
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale E1200i
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

92 | Control and Monitoring

 Related
power-off Power off a line card or standby SFM.
Commands

reload
ces Reboot FTOS.

Syntax reload

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

Usage If there is a change in the configuration, FTOS will prompt you to save the new configuration. Or you
Information can save your running configuration with the copy running-config command.

Refer to Chapter 11, Bare Metal Provisioning for information related to the BMP reload options.

Related
reset Reset a line card, RPM, or a failed SFM (TeraScale and ExaScale).
Commands
reset stack-unit Reset any designated stack member except the management unit
reload-type Configure a switch to reload in normal mode or as a DHCP client with all ports
configured for Layer 3 traffic.

reset
ce Reset a line card, RPM, or a failed SFM (TeraScale only).

Syntax reset {linecard number [hard | power-cycle] | rpm number [hard | power-cycle ] | sfm slot
number}

Parameters
linecard number Enter the keyword linecard and a number for the line card slot number.
(Optional) Add the keyword hard or power-cycle (power-cycle is C-Series
only) to power cycle the line card.
C-Series Range: 0-7
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on E1200/E1200i, 0 to 6 on E600/E600i, and 0 to 5 on E300
hard Enter the keyword hard to power cycle the line card.
power-cycle Enter the keyword power-cycle after upgrading a C-Series FPGA to cause the
FPGA to be reprogrammed based on the contents of the FPGA PROM.
Note: This option is supported on C-Series only.

Control and Monitoring | 93

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

rpm number Enter the keyword rpm followed by a number for the RPM slot number.
(Optional) Add the keyword hard or power-cycle (C-Series only) to power
cycle the RPM.
Range: 0 to 1
sfm slot number Enter the keyword sfm followed by the failed or powered-off SFM slot number.
Note: Supported on E-Series only

Defaults Disabled.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
History
E-Series original Command

Usage The command reset without any options is a soft reset, which means FTOS boots the line card from its
Information runtime image. The hard option reloads the FTOS image on the line card. Use the power-cycle after
upgrading an FPGA.

When a soft reset is issued on a line card (reset linecard number), FTOS boots the line card from its
runtime image. Only when you enter reset linecard number hard is the software image reloaded on
the line card.

Related
reload Reboots the system.
Commands
restore fpga-image Copy the backup C-Series FPGA image to the primary FPGA image.

rpm <slot> location-led

ex Toggle the location LED on/off on the E-Series ExaScale RPM (LC-EH-RPM).

Syntax rpm slot number location-led [on | off]

Parameters
rpm slot number Enter the slot number
E1200i: 0-13
E600i: 0-6
on |off Toggles the LED on the RPM on or off.

Defaults OFF

Command Modes EXEC

Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series ExaScale
History

Usage The LED setting is not saved through power cycles.

Information

94 | Control and Monitoring

send
ces Send messages to one or all terminal line users.

Syntax send [*] | [line ] | [aux] | [console] | [vty]

Parameters
* Enter the asterisk character * to send a message to all tty lines.
line Send a message to a specific line.
Range: 0 to 11
aux Enter the keyword aux to send a message to an Auxiliary line.
Note: This option is supported on E-Series only.
console Enter the keyword console to send a message to the Primary terminal line.
vty Enter the keyword vty to send a message to the Virtual terminal

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes EXEC

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.5.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Usage Messages can contain an unlimited number of lines, however each line is limited to 255 characters. To
Information move to the next line, use the <CR>. To send the message use CTR-Z, to abort a message use CTR-C.

service timestamps
ces Add time stamps to debug and log messages. This command adds either the uptime or the current time
and date.

Syntax service timestamps [debug | log] [datetime [localtime] [msec] [show-timezone] | uptime]
To disable timestamping, use the no service timestamps [debug | log] command.

Parameters
debug (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword debug to add timestamps to debug messages.
log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to add timestamps to log messages with
severity 0 to 6.
datetime (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword datetime to have the current time and date added
to the message.
localtime (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword localtime to include the localtime in the
timestamp.
msec (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword msec to include milliseconds in the timestamp.
show-timezone (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword show-timezone to include the time zone
information in the timestamp.
uptime (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword uptime to have the timestamp based on time
elapsed since system reboot.

Control and Monitoring | 95

 Defaults Not configured.
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

Usage If you do not specify parameters and enter service timestamps, it appears as service timestamps
Information debug uptime in the running-configuration.

Use the show running-config command to view the current options set for the service timestamps
command.

show alarms
ces View alarms for the RPM, SFMs, line cards and fan trays.

Syntax show alarms [threshold]

Parameters
threshold (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword threshold to display the temperature thresholds set for
the line cards, RPM, and SFMs.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

96 | Control and Monitoring

E-Series Example Figure 6-9. Command Example: show alarms on E-Series
FTOS# show alarms

-- Minor Alarms --
Alarm Type Duration
----------------------------------------------------
RPM 0 PEM A failed or rmvd 7 hr, 37 min
SFM 0 PEM A failed or rmvd 7 hr, 37 min
SFM 1 PEM A failed or rmvd 7 hr, 37 min
SFM 2 PEM A failed or rmvd 7 hr, 37 min
SFM 3 PEM A failed or rmvd 7 hr, 37 min
SFM 4 PEM A failed or rmvd 7 hr, 37 min
SFM 5 PEM A failed or rmvd 7 hr, 37 min
SFM 6 PEM A failed or rmvd 7 hr, 37 min
SFM 7 PEM A failed or rmvd 7 hr, 36 min
line card 1 PEM A failed or rmvd 7 hr, 36 min
line card 4 PEM A failed or rmvd 7 hr, 36 min
only 8 SFMs in chassis 7 hr, 35 min

-- Major Alarms --
Alarm Type Duration
----------------------------------------------------
No major alarms

FTOS#

show chassis
ce View the configuration and status of modules in the system. Use this command to determine the
chassis mode.

Syntax show chassis [brief]

Parameters
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to view a summary of the show chassis output.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

Control and Monitoring | 97

 Example Figure 6-10. Command Example: show chassis brief on E-Series
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show chassis brief

Chassis Type : E1200
Chassis Mode : TeraScale
Chassis Epoch : 3.2 micro-seconds

-- Line cards --
Slot Status NxtBoot ReqTyp CurTyp Version Ports
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 not present
1 not present
2 not present
3 not present
4 not present
5 not present
6 not present
7 not present
8 not present
9 not present
10 not present
11 online online E48PF E48PF 6.1.1.0 48
12 not present E48PF
13 not present E48PF
-- Route Processor Modules --
Slot Status NxtBoot Version
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 active online 6.1.1.0
1 not present

Switch Fabric State: up

-- Switch Fabric Modules --

Slot Status
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 active
1 active
2 active
3 active
4 active
5 active
6 active
7 active
8 active

-- Power Entry Modules --

Bay Status
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 up
1 up

-- Fan Status --
Tray Status Temp Volt Speed PEM0 PEM1 Fan1 Fan2 Fan3
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 up < 50C 12-16V low/2100-2700 RPM up up up up up
1 up < 50C 12-16V low/2100-2700 RPM up up up up up
2 up < 50C 12-16V low/2100-2700 RPM up up up up up
3 up < 50C 12-16V low/2100-2700 RPM up up up up up
4 up < 50C 16-20V med/2700-3200 RPM up up up up up
5 up < 50C 12-16V low/2100-2700 RPM up up up up up

Related
Commands show linecard View line card status
show rpm View Route Processor Module status.
show sfm View Switch Fabric Module status.

98 | Control and Monitoring

show command-history
ces Display a buffered log of all commands entered by all users along with a time stamp.

Syntax show command-history

Defaults None.

Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
H

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.

History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and E-Series

Usage One trace log message is generated for each command. No password information is saved to this file. A
Information command-history trace log is saved to a file upon an RPM failover. This file can be analyzed by the
Dell Networking TAC to help identify the root cause of an RPM failover.

Example Figure 6-11. Command Example: show command-history

FTOS#show command-history
[11/20 15:47:22]: CMD-(CLI):[service password-encryption]by default from console
[11/20 15:47:22]: CMD-(CLI):[service password-encryption hostname FTOS]by default
from console
- Repeated 3 times.
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[service timestamps log datetime]by default from
console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[hostname FTOS]by default from console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[enable password 7 ******]by default from console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[username admin password 7 ******]by default from
console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[enable restricted 7 ******]by default from console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[protocol spanning-tree rstp]by default from console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[protocol spanning-tree pvst]by default from console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[no disable]by default from console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[interface gigabitethernet 0/1]by default from console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[ip address 1.1.1.1 /24]by default from console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[ip access-group abc in]by default from console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[no shutdown]by default from console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[interface gigabitethernet 0/2]by default from console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[no ip address]by default from console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[shutdown]by default from console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[interface gigabitethernet 0/3]by default from console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[ip address 5.5.5.1 /24]by default from console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[no shutdown]by default from console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[interface gigabitethernet 0/4]by default from console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[no ip address]by default from console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[shutdown]by default from console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[interface gigabitethernet 0/5]by default from console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[no ip address]by default from console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[shutdown]by default from console
[11/20 21:17:35]: CMD-(CLI):[line console 0]by default from console
[11/20 21:17:36]: CMD-(CLI):[exec-timeout 0]by default from console
[11/20 21:17:36]: CMD-(CLI):[exit]by default from console
[11/20 21:19:25]: CMD-(CLI):[show command-history]by default from console
FTOS#

Related
Commands clear command history Clear the command history log.

Control and Monitoring | 99

 show command-tree
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Display the entire CLI command tree, and optionally, display the utilization count for each commands
and its options.

Syntax show command-tree [count | no]

Parameters
count Display the command tree with a usage counter for each command.
no Display all of the commands that may be preceded by the keyword no, which is the
keyword used to remove a command from the running-configuration.

Defaults None

Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
H

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.

History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced

Usage Reload the system to reset the command-tree counters.

Information

Example FTOS#show command-tree count

!
Enable privilege mode:

enable command usage:3

<0-15> option usage: 0

exit command usage:1

show command-tree command usage:9

count option usage: 3

show version command usage:1

!
Global configuration mode:

aaa authentication enable command usage:1

WORD option usage: 1
default option usage: 0
enable option usage: 0
line option usage: 0
none option usage: 0
radius option usage: 1
tacacs+ option usage: 0

100 | Control and Monitoring

show console lp
ce View the buffered boot-up log of a line card.

Syntax show console lp number

Parameters
number Enter the line card slot number.
Range: 0–7 for the C300
Range: 0–13 for the E1200
Range: 0–6 for the E600
Range: 0–5 for the E300

Defaults None

Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
History
E-Series original Command

Usage
Information
Caution: Use this command only when you are working directly with a technical support
representative to troubleshoot a problem. Do not use this command unless a technical support
representative instructs you to do so.

show cpu-traffic-stats
ces View the CPU traffic statistics.

Syntax show cpu-traffic-stats [port number | all | cp | linecard {all | slot# } | rp1 | rp2 ]

Parameters
port number (OPTIONAL) Enter the port number to display traffic statistics on that port only.
Range: 1 to 1568
all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to display traffic statistics on all the interfaces
receiving traffic, sorted based on traffic.
cp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword cp to display traffic statistics on the specified
CPU.
Note: This option is supported on E-Series only.
linecard (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword linecard followed by either all or the slot
number to display traffic statistics on the designated line card.
Note: This option is supported on C-Series only.
rp1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp1 to display traffic statistics on the RP1.
Note: This option is supported on E-Series only.
rp2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp2 to display traffic statistics on the RP2.
Note: This option is supported on E-Series only.

Defaults all

Control and Monitoring | 101

 Command Modes EXEC
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

E-Series Example Figure 6-12. Command Example: show cpu-traffic-stats on the E-Series
FTOS#show cpu-traffic-stats
Processor : CP
--------------
Received 100% traffic on GigabitEthernet 8/2 Total packets:100
LLC:0, SNAP:0, IP:100, ARP:0, other:0
Unicast:100, Multicast:0, Broadcast:0

Processor : RP1
---------------
Received 62% traffic on GigabitEthernet 8/2 Total packets:500
LLC:0, SNAP:0, IP:500, ARP:0, other:0
Unicast:500, Multicast:0, Broadcast:0

Received 37% traffic on GigabitEthernet 8/1 Total packets:300

LLC:0, SNAP:0, IP:300, ARP:0, other:0
Unicast:300, Multicast:0, Broadcast:0

Processor : RP2
---------------
No CPU traffic statistics.
FTOS#

Usage Traffic statistics are sorted on a per-interface basis; the interface receiving the most traffic is displayed
Information first. All CPU and port information is displayed unless a specific port or CPU is specified. Traffic
information is displayed for router ports only; not for management interfaces. The traffic statistics are
collected only after the debug cpu-traffic-stats command is executed; not from the system bootup.

Note: After debugging is complete, use the no debug cpu-traffic-stats command to shut off
traffic statistics collection.

Related
debug cpu-traffic-stats Enable CPU traffic statistics for debugging
Commands

show debugging
ces View a list of all enabled debugging processes.

Syntax show debugging

Command Mode EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

102 | Control and Monitoring

 Example Figure 6-13. Command Example: show debugging
FTOS#show debug
Generic IP:
IP packet debugging is on for
ManagementEthernet 0/0
Port-channel 1-2
Port-channel 5
GigabitEthernet 4/0-3,5-6,10-11,20
GigabitEthernet 5/0-1,5-6,10-11,15,17,19,21
ICMP packet debugging is on for
GigabitEthernet 5/0,2,4,6,8,10,12,14,16
FTOS#

show environment (C-Series and E-Series)

ce View the system component status (for example, temperature, voltage).

Syntax show environment [all | fan | linecard | linecard-voltage | PEM | RPM | SFM]

Parameters
all Enter the keyword all to view all components.
fan Enter the keyword fan to view information on the fans. The output of this
command is chassis dependent. See Figure 6-10, Figure 6-11, and Figure 6-12 for
a comparison of output.
linecard Enter the keyword linecard to view only information on line cards
linecard-voltage Enter the keyword linecard-voltage to view line card voltage information.
PEM Enter the keyword pem to view only information on power entry modules.
RPM Enter the keyword rpm to view only information on RPMs.
SFM Enter the keyword sfm to view only information on SFMs.
Note: This option is supported on E-Series only.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version8.3.3.8 Updated to support PPID on the S60
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Added temperature information for C-Series fans
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

Usage Fan speed is controlled by temperatures measured at the sensor located on the fan itself. The fan
Information temperatures shown with this command may not accurately reflect the temperature and fan speed.
Refer to your hardware installation guide for fan speed and temperature information.

Control and Monitoring | 103

 Examples Figure 6-14. Command Example: show environment
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show environment

-- Fan Status --
Status Temp Fan1 Fan2 Fan3 Serial Num Version
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
up 32C 6000 RPM 6000 RPM 7500 RPM FX000040889 3.2

-- Power Supplies --
Bay Status
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 absent
1 up
2 up
3 up

-- Line Card Environment Status --

Slot Status Temp Voltage
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 not present
1 online 66C ok
2 not present
3 online 59C ok
4 online 64C ok
5 not present
6 online 59C ok

-- RPM Environment Status --

Slot Status Temp Voltage
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 active 36C ok
1 not present

-- SFM Environment Status --

FTOS#

Figure 6-15. Command Example: show environment fan

FTOS#show environment fan

-- Fan Status --
Status Temp Fan1 Fan2 Fan3 Serial Num Version
----------------------------------------------------------------------
up 32C 6000 RPM 6000 RPM 6000 RPM FX000040889 3.2

show environment (S-Series)

s View S-Series system component status (for example, temperature, voltage).

Syntax show environment [all | fan | stack-unit unit-id | pem | thermal-sensor]

Parameters
all Enter the keyword all to view all components.
fan Enter the keyword fan to view information on the fans. The output of this
command is chassis dependent.
stack-unit unit-id Enter the keyword stack-unit followed by the unit-id to display information on
a specific stack member.
Unit ID range:
S60: 0-11
all other S-Series: 0-7

104 | Control and Monitoring

 pem Enter the keyword pem to view only information on power entry modules.
thermal-sensor Enter the keyword thermal-sensor to view only information on the thermal
sensors.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 The output of the show environment fan command for S-Series is changed to
display fan speeds instead of just showing the fan status as up or down.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series. S-Series options and output differ from the
C-Series/E-Series version.

Example Figure 6-16. Command Example: show environment on the S60

FTOS#show environment

-- Fan Status --
Status Temp Fan1 Fan2 Fan3 Serial Num Version
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
up 32C 6000 RPM 6000 RPM 7500 RPM FX000040889 3.2

-- Power Supplies --
Bay Status
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 absent
1 up
2 up
3 up

-- Line Card Environment Status --

Slot Status Temp Voltage
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 not present
1 online 66C ok
2 not present
3 online 59C ok
4 online 64C ok
5 not present
6 online 59C ok

-- RPM Environment Status --

Slot Status Temp Voltage
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 active 36C ok
1 not present

-- SFM Environment Status --

FTOS#

Example Figure 6-17. Command Example: show environment fan

FTOS#show environment fan

-- Fan Status --
Status Temp Fan1 Fan2 Fan3 Serial Num Version
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
up 32C 6000 RPM 6000 RPM 6000 RPM FX000040889 3.2

Control and Monitoring | 105

 Example Figure 6-18. Command Example: show environment pem
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show environment pem

-- Power Supplies --
Unit Bay Status Type
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 0 up AC
0 1 absent

Example Figure 6-19. Command Example: show environment stack-unit

FTOS#show environment stack-unit 0

-- Unit Environment Status --

Unit Status Temp Voltage
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0* online 49C ok

* Management Unit

Example Figure 6-20. Command Example: show environment thermal-sensor

FTOS#show environment thermal-sensor

-- Thermal Sensor Readings (deg C) --

Unit Sensor0 Sensor1 Sensor2 Sensor3 Sensor4 Sensor5
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 30 33 36 30 30 32

FTOS#

show inventory (C-Series and E-Series)

ce Display the chassis type, components (including media), FTOS version including hardware
identification numbers and configured protocols.

Syntax show inventory [media slot]

Parameters
media slot (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword media followed by the slot number.
C-Series Range: 0-7
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on a E1200, 0 to 6 on a E600/E600i, and 0 to 5 on a E300

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.8 Updated to support PPID on the S60
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Output expanded to include SFP+ media in C-Series.
Version 7.7.1.0 Vendor field removed from output of show inventory media.
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and expanded to include transceiver media
Version 6.2.1.0 Expanded to include Software Protocol Configured field on E-Series
Version 5.3.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

106 | Control and Monitoring

 Usage The show inventory media command provides some details about installed pluggable media (SFP,
Information XFP), as shown in Figure 6-23. Use the show interfaces command to get more details about
installed pluggable media.
The display output might include a double asterisk (**) next to the SFMs, for example:
...
0 CC-E-SFM ** 0004875 7490007411 A
1 CC-E-SFM ** 0004889 7490007411 A
...
The double asterisk generally indicates the SFM’s frequency capabilities, indicating either that they are
operating at 125 MHz or that the frequency capability, which is stored in an EPROM, cannot be
determined.

If there are no fiber ports in the line card, then just the header under show inventory media will be
displayed. If there are fiber ports but no optics inserted, then the output will display "Media not present
or accessible".

C300 Example Figure 6-21. Example output of show inventory for C300 (C-Series)
FTOS# show inventory
Chassis Type : C300
Chassis Mode : 1.0
Software Version : FTOS-EF-7.6.1.0

Slot Item Serial Number Part Number Revision

--------------------------------------------------------------
C300 TY000001400 7520029999 04
3 LC-CB-GE-48T FX000020075 7520036700 01
0 LC-CB-RPM 0060361 7520029300 02
0 CC-C-1200W-AC N/A N/A N/A
1 CC-C-1200W-AC N/A N/A N/A
0 CC-C300-FAN

* - standby

Software Protocol Configured

--------------------------------------------------------------
OSPF

FTOS#

Control and Monitoring | 107

 E-Series Example Figure 6-22. Example output of show inventory for E-Series
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show inventory

Chassis Type : E600i

Chassis Mode : ExaScale
Software Version : E8-4-1-317

Slot Item Serial Number Part Number Rev Piece Part ID Rev Svc Tag Exprs Svc Code
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
E600i TY000002693 7520023900 03 US-0RVY43-76991-82B-0456 1B2 SVCTGCH 628 458 864 65
1 LC-EH-10GE-10S FX000049121 7520042807 03 N/A N/A N/A N/A
1 LC-PIC0 FX000049647 7490105800 01 N/A N/A N/A N/A
1 LC-PIC1 FX000049650 7490105800 01 N/A N/A N/A N/A
3 LC-EJ-10GE-10S FX000097669 7520047602 A N/A N/A N/A N/A
3 LC-PIC0 FX000047055 7490105800 01 N/A N/A N/A N/A
3 LC-PIC1 FX000048680 7490105800 02 N/A N/A N/A N/A
4 LC-EH-GE-90M FX000046835 7520041702 01 N/A N/A N/A N/A
4 LC-PIC0 FX000046905 7490102401 02 N/A N/A N/A N/A
6 LC-EH-GE-90M FX000044725 7520041702 01 N/A N/A N/A N/A
6 LC-PIC0 FX000044256 7490102401 02 N/A N/A N/A N/A
0 LC-EH-RPM FX000056234 7520043401 05 N/A N/A N/A N/A
0 CC-E-SFM3 VC074300030 7520020001 03 CN-0RVY43-75412-123-0030 003 SVCTG00 628 458 860 16
1 CC-E-SFM3 VC074300032 7520020001 03 CN-0RVY43-75412-82B-0456 1B2 SVCTG01 628 458 860 17
2 CC-E-SFM3 VC074300032 7520020001 03 CN-0RVY43-75412-82B-0456 1B2 SVCTG02 628 458 860 18
3 CC-E-SFM3 0068166 7520020001 03 N/A N/A N/A N/A
1 CC-E600-2500W-AC VC074300032 7520026400 02 N/A N/A N/A N/A
2 CC-E600-2500W-AC VC074300087 7520026400 02 N/A N/A N/A N/A
3 CC-E600-2500W-AC VC073700046 7520026400 02 N/A N/A N/A N/A
0 CC-E600-FAN FX000040889 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
0 slot0: 110613B1304M2737 - HDX 2.15 N/A N/A N/A N/A

* - standby

Software Protocol Configured

--------------------------------------------------------------
BGP
MCAST
OSPF
PIM
SNMP

Example Figure 6-23. Example output of show inventory media slot (partial)
FTOS#show inventory media 3
Slot Port Type Media Serial Number F10Qualified
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
...
3 11 SFP 1000BASE-SX U9600L0 Yes
...

Example Figure 6-24. Example Output of show inventory media

FTOS#show inventory media
Slot Port Type Media Serial Number F10Qualified
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 0 Media not present or accessible
1 1 Media not present or accessible
1 2 Media not present or accessible
1 3 Media not present or accessible
1 4 Media not present or accessible
1 5 SFP+ 10GBASE-SR AM70PXW Yes
1 6 Media not present or accessible
1 7 Media not present or accessible
1 8 SFP+ 10GBASE-SR AM70W84 Yes
1 9 Media not present or accessible

3 0 Media not present or accessible

3 1 Media not present or accessible
3 2 Media not present or accessible
3 3 Media not present or accessible
3 4 Media not present or accessible
3 5 Media not present or accessible
3 6 Media not present or accessible
3 7 Media not present or accessible
3 8 Media not present or accessible

108 | Control and Monitoring

 Related
Commands
show interfaces Display a specific interface configuration.
show interfaces Display the physical status and operational status of an installed transceiver. The
transceiver output also displays the transceiver’s serial number.

show inventory (S-Series)

s Display the S-Series switch type, components (including media), FTOS version including hardware
identification numbers and configured protocols.

Syntax show inventory [media slot]

Parameters
media slot (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword media followed by the stack ID of the stack member
for which you want to display pluggable media inventory.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.8 Updated to support PPID on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced this version of the command for S-Series. S-Series output differs from
E-Series.

Usage If there are no fiber ports in the unit, then just the header under show inventory media will be
displayed. If there are fiber ports but no optics inserted, then the output will display "Media not present
or accessible". Example 1

Figure 6-25. Example output of show inventory for S-Series

FTOS>show inventory
System Type : S4810
System Mode : 1.0
Software Version : 8.3.12.0

Unit Type Serial Number Part Number Rev Piece Part ID Rev Svc Tag Exprs Svc Code
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
* 0 S4810-01-64F HADL111220134 7590009601 A N/A N/A N/A N/A
0 S4810-PWR-AC H6DL111220150 7590008501 C N/A N/A N/A N/A
0 S4810-FAN N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
0 S4810-FAN N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
* - Management Unit

Software Protocol Configured

--------------------------------------------------------------
iSCSI
LLDP
MCAST
OSPF
PIM
SNMP
===============================================

Control and Monitoring | 109

 Example 2 Figure 6-26. Example Output of show inventory media (S-Series)(partial)
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show inventory media ?

Slot Port Type Media Serial Number F10Qualified
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 0 SFP 1000BASE-SX P681WK0 Yes
0 1 SFP 1000BASE-SX PGF3T36 Yes
0 2 SFP 1000BASE-SX PGF420E Yes
0 3 SFP 1000BASE-SX P118HQ2 Yes
0 4 SFP 1000BASE-SX PGF4244 Yes
0 5 SFP 1000BASE-SX P5N1BN6 Yes
0 6 SFP 1000BASE-SX P7529KV Yes
0 7 SFP 1000BASE-SX PGC514G Yes
0 8 SFP 1000BASE-SX PLE71GD Yes
0 9 SFP 1000BASE-SX PLE71N0 Yes
0 10 SFP 1000BASE-SX PLE71M7 Yes
0 11 SFP 1000BASE-SX PLE71LL Yes
0 12 SFP 1000BASE-SX B320210110 Yes
0 13 SFP 1000BASE-SX B322237357 Yes
0 14 SFP 1000BASE-SX P118PGB Yes
0 15 SFP 1000BASE-SX PGF425R Yes
0 16 SFP 1000BASE-SX PLE71MF Yes
0 17 SFP 1000BASE-SX AMEH367 Yes
0 18 SFP 1000BASE-SX PLE71LZ Yes
0 19 SFP 1000BASE-SX PGA531L Yes
0 20 SFP 1000BASE-SX PLE71M8 Yes
0 21 SFP 1000BASE-SX PGC51EM Yes
0 22 SFP 1000BASE-SX PLP32BP Yes
0 23 SFP 1000BASE-SX AJHG367 Yes
0 24 SFP 1000BASE-SX P11BWUJ Yes
0 25 SFP 1000BASE-SX P741RVM Yes
0 26 SFP 1000BASE-SX PGF3T9H Yes
0 27 SFP 1000BASE-SX PGC51ZE Yes
0 28 SFP 1000BASE-SX PGC525W Yes
!-------- output truncated -------------!

Related
show interfaces interface configuration.
Commands
show interfaces Display the physical status and operational status of an installed transceiver. The
transceiver output also displays the transceiver’s serial number.

show linecard
ce Display the line card(s) status.

Syntax show linecard [number [brief] | all]

Parameters
number (OPTIONAL) Enter a slot number to view information on the line card in that slot.
C-Series Range: 0-7
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on a E1200, 0 to 6 on a E600, and 0 to 5 on a E300.
all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to view a table with information on all present line
cards.
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to view an abbreviated list of line card
information.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

110 | Control and Monitoring

 Command
Version 8.3.3.8 Updated to support PPID on the S60
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

E-Series Example Figure 6-27. Command Example: show linecard on E-Series

-- Line card 0 --
Status : not present

-- Line card 1 --
Status : online
Next Boot : online
Required Type : EXW10SH - 10-port 10GE LAN/WAN PHY line card with
SFP+ options 10M CAM (EH)
Current Type : EXW10SH - 10-port 10GE LAN/WAN PHY line card with
SFP+ options 10M CAM (EH)
Hardware Rev : Base - 1.4 PP0 - 02 PP1 - 02
Num Ports : 10
Up Time : 18 hr, 42 min
FTOS Version : 8-4-1-317
Jumbo Capable : yes
Boot Flash : A: 2.9.1.1c B: 2.9.2.0E0 [booted]
Memory Size : 1073741824 bytes
Temperature : 65C
Power Status : AC
Voltage : ok
Serial Number : FX000049121
Part Number : 7520042807 Rev 03
Vendor Id : 04
Date Code : 01212010
Country Code : 01
Piece Part ID : N/A
PPID Revision : N/A
Service Tag : N/A
Expr Svc Code : N/A
Last Restart : soft reset
Auto Reboot : enabled

-- Line card 2 --
Status : not present

-- Line card 3 --
Status : online
Next Boot : online
Required Type : EXW10SJ - 10-port 10GE LAN/WAN PHY line card with
!-------- output truncated -------------!

C-Series Figure 6-28. Command Example: show linecard on C-Series

Example
FTOS#show linecard 11

-- Line card 11 --
Status : online
Next Boot : online
Required Type : E48PF - 48-port GE line card with SFP optics (EF)
Current Type : E48PF - 48-port GE line card with SFP optics (EF)
Hardware Rev : Base - 1.0 PP0 - n/a PP1 - n/a
Num Ports : 48
Up Time : 12 hr, 37 min
FTOS Version : 6.2.1.x
Jumbo Capable : yes
Boot Flash : A: 2.0.3.4 B: 2.0.3.4 [booted]
Memory Size : 268435456 bytes
Temperature : 49C
Power Status : PEM0: absent or down PEM1: up
Voltage : ok
Serial Number :
Part Number : Rev
Vendor Id :
Date Code :
Country Code :
FTOS#

Control and Monitoring | 111

 Table 6-1 list the definitions of the fields shown in Figure 6-27.
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Table 6-1. Descriptions for show linecard output

Field Description
Line card Displays the line card slot number (only listed in show linecard all
command output).
Status Displays the line card’s status.
Next Boot Displays whether the line card is to be brought online at the next system
reload.
Required Type Displays the line card type configured for the slot.
The Required Type and Current Type must match. Use the linecard
command to reconfigure the line card type if they do not match.
Current Type Displays the line card type installed in the slot.
The Required Type and Current Type must match. Use the linecard
command to reconfigure the line card type if they do not match.
Hardware Rev Displays the chip set revision.
Num Ports Displays the number of ports in the line card.
Up Time Displays the number of hours and minutes the card is online.
FTOS Version Displays the operating software version.
Jumbo Capable Displays Yes or No indicating if the line card can support Jumbo frames.
Boot Flash Ver Displays the two possible Bootflash versions. The [Booted] keyword next
to the version states which version was used at system boot.
Memory Size List the memory of the line card processor.
Temperature Displays the temperature of the line card.
Minor alarm status if temperature is over 65° C.
Power Status Lists the type of power modules used in the chassis:
• AC = AC power supply
• DC = DC Power Entry Module (PEM)
Voltage Displays OK if the line voltage is within range.
Serial Number Displays the line card serial number.
Part Num Displays the line card part number.
Vendor ID Displays an internal code, which specifies the manufacturing vendor.
Date Code Displays the line card’s manufacturing date.

Figure 6-29. Command Example: show linecard brief

FTOS#show linecard 11 brief

-- Line card 11 --
Status : online
Next Boot : online
Required Type : E48PF - 48-port GE line card with SFP optics (EF)
Current Type : E48PF - 48-port GE line card with SFP optics (EF)
Hardware Rev : Base - 1.0 PP0 - n/a PP1 - n/a
Num Ports : 48
Up Time : 11 hr, 24 min
FTOS Version : 6.1.1.0
Jumbo Capable : yes
FTOS#

112 | Control and Monitoring

 Related
Commands linecard Pre-configure a line card in a currently empty slot of the system or a different line card
type for the slot.
show interfaces Display information on all interfaces on a specific line card.
linecard
show chassis View information on all elements of the system.
show rpm View information on the RPM.
show sfm View information on the SFM.

show linecard boot-information

e View the line card status and boot information.

Syntax show linecard boot-information

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.8 Updated to support PPID on the S60
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 6.5.1.4 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 6-30. Command Example: show linecard boot-information

FTOS#show linecard boot-information

Serial Booted Next Cache Boot

# Status CurType number from boot boot flash
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 -
1 online EXW10SH FX000049121 8-4-1-317 8-4-1-317 A: 8-4-1-213 B: A: 2.9.1.1c B: 2.9.2.0E0 [b]
2 -
3 online EXW10SJ FX000097669 8-4-1-317 8-4-1-317 A: 8-4-1-305 B: invalid A: 2.9.1.1 [b] B: 2.9.1.1
4 online E90MH FX000046835 8-4-1-317 8-4-1-317 A: 8-4-1-213 B: invalid A: 2.9.1.1 B: 2.9.1.1 [b]
5 -
6 online E90MH FX000044725 8-4-1-317 8-4-1-317 A: 8-4-1-213 B: invalid A: 2.9.1.1 [b] B: 2.9.1.1

FTOS#

Control and Monitoring | 113

 Table 6-2 defines the fields in Figure 6-30.
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Table 6-2. Descriptions for show linecard boot-information output

Field Description
# Displays the line card slot numbers, beginning with slot 0. The
number of slots listed is dependent on your chassis:
E-Series: 0 to 13 on a E1200, 0 to 6 on a E600/E600i, and 0 to 5 on
a E300.
Status Indicates if a line card is online, offline, or booting. If a line card is
not detected in the slot, a hyphen ( - ) is displayed.
CurType Displays the line card identification number, for example
EXW4PF.
Serial number Displays the line card serial number.
Booted from Indicates whether the line card cache booted or system booted. In
addition, the image with which the line card booted is also
displayed. If the line card cache booted, then the output is A: or B:
followed by the image in the flash partition (A: 6.5.1.4 or B:
6.5.1.4).
If the line card system booted, then display is the current FTOS
version number (6.5.1.4).
Next boot Indicates if the next line card boot is a cache boot or system boot
and which image will be used in the boot.
Cache boot Displays the system image in cache boot flash partition A: and B:
for the line card. If the cache boot does not contain a valid image,
“invalid” is displayed.
Boot flash Displays the two possible Boot flash versions. The [b] next to the
version number is the current boot flash, that is the image used in
the last boot.

Usage The display area of this command uses the maximum 80 character length. If your display area is not set
Information to 80 characters, the display will wrap.

Related
Commands show linecard View the line card status
upgrade (E-Series version) Upgrade the boot flash, boot selector, or system image
download alt-boot-image Download an alternate boot image to the chassis
download alt-full-image Download an alternate FTOS image to the chassis
download alt-system-image Download an alternate system image to the chassis

114 | Control and Monitoring

show memory (C-Series and E-Series)
ce View current memory usage on the system.

Syntax show memory [cp | lp slot-number | rp1 | rp2]

Parameters
cp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword cp to view information on the Control Processor on
the RPM.
lp slot-number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword lp and the slot number to view information on the
line-card processor in that slot.
C-Series Range: 0-7
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on a E1200/E1200i, 0 to 6 on a E600/E600i, and 0 to 5 on a
E300.
rp1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp1 to view information on Route Processor 1 on
the RPM.
Note: This option is supported on the E-Series only.
rp2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp2 to view information on Route Processor 2 on the
RPM.
Note: This option is supported on the E-Series only.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
History
E-Series original Command

Usage The output for show memory displays the memory usage of LP part (sysdlp) of the system. The Sysdlp
Information is an aggregate task that handles all the tasks running on C-Series’ and E-Series' LP.
In FTOS Release 7.4.1.0 and higher, the total counter size (for all 3 CPUs) in show memory (C-Series
and E-Series) and show processes memory (C-Series and E-Series) will differ based on which FTOS
processes are counted.
• In the show memory (C-Series and E-Series) display output, the memory size is equal to the size
of the application processes.
• In the show processes memory (C-Series and E-Series) display output, the memory size is equal to
the size of the application processes plus the size of the system processes.

E-Series Example Figure 6-31. Command Example: show memory on E-Series

FTOS#show memory
Statistics On CP Processor
===========================
Total(b) Used(b) Free(b) Lowest(b) Largest(b)
452689184 64837834 387851350 387805590 371426976
Statistics On RP1 Processor
===========================
Total(b) Used(b) Free(b) Lowest(b) Largest(b)
629145600 4079544 625066056 625066056 0
Statistics On RP2 Processor
===========================
Total(b) Used(b) Free(b) Lowest(b) Largest(b)
510209568 47294716 462914852 462617968 446275376
FTOS#

Control and Monitoring | 115

 Table 6-3 defines the fields displayed in Figure 6-31.
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Table 6-3. Descriptions for show memory output

Field Description
Lowest Displays the memory usage the system went to in the lifetime of the system. Indirectly, it
indicates the maximum usage in the lifetime of the system: Total minus Lowest.
Largest The current largest available. This relates to block size and is not related to the amount of
memory on the system.

show memory (S-Series)

s View current memory usage on the S-Series switch.

Syntax show memory [stack-unit id]

Parameters
stack-unit id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword stack-unit followed by the stack unit ID of the
S-Series stack member to display memory information on the designated stack
member.
Unit ID range:
S60: 0-11
all other S-Series: 0-7

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced this version of the command for the S-Series

Usage The output for show memory displays the memory usage of LP part (sysdlp) of the system. The Sysdlp
Information is an aggregate task that handles all the tasks running on the S-Series’ CPU.

Example Figure 6-32. Command Example: show memory on S-Series

FTOS#show memory stack-unit 0
Statistics On Unit 0 Processor
===========================
Total(b) Used(b) Free(b) Lowest(b) Largest(b)
268435456 4010354 264425102 264375410 264425102

116 | Control and Monitoring

show processes cpu (C-Series and E-Series)
ce View CPU usage information based on processes running in the system.

Syntax show processes cpu [cp | rp1 | rp2] [lp [linecard-number [1-99] | all | summary]

Parameters
cp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword cp to view CPU usage of the Control
Processor.
rp1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp1 to view CPU usage of the Route
Processor 1.
Note: This option is supported on the E-Series only.
rp2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp2 to view CPU usage of the Route
Processor 2.
Note: This option is supported on the E-Series only.
lp linecard [1-99] (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword lp followed by the line card number to
display the CPU usage of that line card.
The optional 1-99 variable sets the number of tasks to display in order of
the highest CPU usage in the past five (5) seconds.
lp all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword lp all to view CPU utilization on all
active line cards.
lp summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword lp summary to view a summary of the
line card CPU utilization.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
History
Version 7.4.1.0 Modified: Added the lp all option
Version 6.5.1.0 Modified: The granularity of the output for rp1 and rp2 is changed. The the output is
now at the process level, so process-specific statistics are displayed.

Example 1 Figure 6-33. Command Example: show processes cpu (Partial)

FTOS#show processes cpu

CPU Statistics On CP Processor
===============================

CPU utilization for five seconds: 4%/2%; one minute: 2%; five minutes: 2%
PID Runtime(ms) Invoked uSecs 5Sec 1Min 5Min TTY Process
0xd02e4e8 1498633 89918 16666 3.00% 2.67% 2.67% 0 KP
0xd9d4c70 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 tLogTask
0xd9cd200 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 soc_dpc
0xd9bf588 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 tARL
0xd9bd2f8 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 tBCMlink
0xd9bb0e0 700 42 16666 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 tBcmTask
0xd9798d0 106683 6401 16666 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 tNetTask
0xd3368a0 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 tWdbTask
0xd3329b0 166 10 16600 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 tWdtTask
0xd32a8c8 102500 6150 16666 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 tme
0xd16b1d8 12050 723 16666 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 ipc
0xd1680c8 33 2 16500 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 irc
0xd156008 116 7 16571 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 RpmAvailMgr
0xd153ab0 216 13 16615 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 ev
-more-

Control and Monitoring | 117

 Example 2 Figure 6-34. Command Example: show processes cpu rp1
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show processes cpu rp1

CPU utilization for five seconds: 0%/0%; one minute: 0%; five minutes: 0%
PID Runtime(ms) Invoked uSecs 5Sec 1Min 5Min TTY Process

0x0000007c 60 6 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 ospf

0x00000077 460 46 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 dsm
0x00000074 100 10 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 ipm1
0x0000006e 180 18 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 rtm
0x0000006b 100 10 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 rip
0x00000068 120 12 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 acl
0x00000064 690 69 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 sysd1
0x00000062 20 2 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 sysmon
0x00000024 880 88 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 sshd
0x00000022 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 inetd
0x00000020 2580 258 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 mount_mfs
0x00000013 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 mount_mfs
0x00000006 80 8 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 sh
0x00000005 30 3 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 aiodoned
0x00000004 840 84 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 ioflush
0x00000003 250 25 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 reaper
0x00000002 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 pagedaemon
0x00000001 160 16 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 init
0x00000000 700 70 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 swapper
0x00000088 260 26 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 bgp

Example 3 Figure 6-35. Command Example: show processes cpu rp2

FTOS#show processes cpu rp2

CPU utilization for five seconds: 0%/0%; one minute: 0%; five minutes: 0%

PID Runtime(ms) Invoked uSecs 5Sec 1Min 5Min TTY Process

0x00000090 140 14 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 vrrp

0x0000008d 120 12 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 fvrp
0x00000088 360 36 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 xstp
0x00000084 60 6 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 span
0x00000083 180 18 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 pim
0x00000080 80 8 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 igmp
0x0000007b 130 13 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 ipm2
0x00000078 700 70 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 mrtm
0x00000074 100 10 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 l2mgr
0x00000070 80 8 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 l2pm
0x0000006c 80 8 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 arpm
0x00000068 60 6 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 acl2
0x00000064 750 75 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 sysd2
0x00000062 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 sysmon
0x00000024 880 88 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 sshd
0x00000022 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 inetd
0x00000020 2250 225 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 mount_mfs
0x00000013 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 mount_mfs
0x00000006 100 10 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 sh
0x00000005 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 aiodoned
0x00000004 960 96 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 ioflush
0x00000003 140 14 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 reaper
0x00000002 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 pagedaemon
0x00000001 160 16 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 init
0x00000000 700 70 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 swapper
0x00000098 140 14 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 msdp

Usage The CPU utilization for the last five seconds as shown in Figure 6-33 is 4%/2%. The first number (4%)
Information is the CPU utilization for the last five seconds. The second number (2%) indicates the percent of CPU
time spent at the interrupt level.

118 | Control and Monitoring

show processes cpu (S-Series)
s Display CPU usage information based on processes running in an S-Series.

Syntax show processes cpu [management-unit 1-99 [details] | stack-unit id | summary | ipc |
memory [stack-unit id]]

Parameters
management-unit1-99 (OPTIONAL) Display processes running in the control processor. The
[details] 1-99 variable sets the number of tasks to display in order of the highest
CPU usage in the past five (5) seconds. Add the details keyword to
display all running processes (except sysdlp). See Example 3.
stack-unit id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword stack-unit followed by the stack
member ID.
As an option of show processes cpu, this option displays CPU usage
for the designated stack member. See Example 2.
Or, as an option of memory, this option limits the output of memory
statistics to the designated stack member. See Example 5.
Unit ID range:
S60: 0-11
all other S-Series: 0-7
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view a summary view of
CPU usage for all members of the stack. See Example 1.
ipc (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ipc to display inter-process
communication statistics.
memory (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword memory to display memory statistics.
See Example 4.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Modified: Added management-unit [details] keywords.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series

Example 1 Figure 6-36. Command Example: show processes cpu summary on S-Series
FTOS#show processes cpu summary
CPU utilization 5Sec 1Min 5Min
-------------------------------------------
Unit0 0% 0% 0%

CPU utilization 5Sec 1Min 5Min

-------------------------------------------
Unit1* 1% 0% 0%
Unit2 0% 0% 0%
Unit3 0% 0% 0%

* Mgmt Unit

Control and Monitoring | 119

 Example 2 Figure 6-37. Command Example: show processes cpu management-unit on S-Series
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show processes cpu management-unit 0

CPU utilization for five seconds: 1%/0%; one minute: 10%; five minutes: 2%
PID Runtime(ms) Invoked uSecs 5Sec 1Min 5Min TTY
Process
272 20 2 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
topoDPC
271 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
bcmNHOP
270 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
bcmDISC
269 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
bcmATP-RX
268 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
bcmATP-TX
267 30 3 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
bcmSTACK
266 380 38 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.08% 0
bcmRX
265 30 3 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
bcmLINK.0
264 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
bcmXGS3AsyncTX
263 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
bcmTX
262 160 16 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
bcmCNTR.0
260 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
bcmDPC
253 10690 1069 10000 0.00% 10.00% 2.97% 0
sysd
251 2380 238 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.50% 0
kfldintr
58 30 3 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
sh
36 50 5 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 13 5 3 1
!-------- output truncated -------------!

120 | Control and Monitoring

Example 3 Figure 6-38. Command Example: show processes cpu stack-unit on S-Series
FTOS#show processes cpu stack-unit 0

CPU Statistics On Unit0 Processor

===============================

CPU utilization for five seconds: 0%/0%; one minute: 0%; five minutes: 0%
PID Runtime(ms) Invoked uSecs 5Sec 1Min 5Min TTY
Process
52 8260 826 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.22% 0
sysd
124 1160 116 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.12% 0
KernLrnAgMv
116 70 7 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
xstp
109 50 5 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
span
108 60 6 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
pim
103 70 7 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
igmp
100 70 7 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
mrtm
96 70 7 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
l2mgr
92 100 10 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
l2pm
86 30 3 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
arpm
83 40 4 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
ospf
80 100 10 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
dsm
74 60 6 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
rtm
70 30 3 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
rip
68 120 12 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
ipm1
64 70 7 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
acl
63 30 3 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
bcmLINK.1
62 290 29 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
bcmCNTR.1
61 50 5 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
bcmRX
60 40 4 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
bcmLINK.0
59 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
bcmXGS3AsyncTX
58 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
bcmTX
57 340 34 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
bcmCNTR.0
55 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
bcmDPC
117 60 6 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
frrp
28 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
inetd
21 450 45 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
mount_mfs
18 130 13 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
mount_mfs
11 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
syslogd
6 30 3 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
sh
5 10 1 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
aiodoned
4 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
ioflush
3 20 2 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
reaper
2 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
pagedaemon
1 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
init
0 10 1 10000 0 00% 0 00% 0 00% 0

Control and Monitoring | 121

 Example 4 Figure 6-39. Command Example: show processes memory on S-Series
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show processes memory

Memory Statistics On Unit 0 Processor (bytes)

==========================================
start
Total : 160231424, MaxUsed : 130596864 [09/19/2007 03:11:17]
CurrentUsed: 130596864, CurrentFree: 29634560
SharedUsed : 14261872, SharedFree : 6709672
PID Process ResSize Size Allocs Frees Max
Current
124 KernLrnAgMv 140410880 0 0 0 0
0
117 frrp 5677056 217088 87650 0 87650
87650
116 xstp 7585792 1536000 551812 49692 518684
502120
109 span 5709824 221184 55386 0 55386
55386
108 pim 5869568 720896 12300 0 12300
12300
103 igmp 5513216 327680 18236 16564 18236
1672
100 mrtm 6905856 516096 72846 0 72846
72846
96 l2mgr 6107136 491520 254858 115948 172038
138910
92 l2pm 5607424 221184 667578 579740 120966
87838
86 arpm 5353472 208896 54528 16564 54528
37964
83 ospf 4210688 475136 0 0 0
0
80 dsm 6057984 552960 22838 0 22838
22838
74 rtm 6311936 577536 574792 298152 376024 276640
70 rip 5001216 249856 528 0 528
528
68 ipm1 5292032 339968 67224 0 67224
67224
64 acl 5607424 544768 140086 66256 123522
73830
63 bcmLINK.1 40410880 0 0 0 0 0
62 bcmCNTR.1 140410880 0 0 0 0 0
61 bcmRX 140410880 0 0 0 0
0
60 bcmLINK.0 140410880 0 0 0 0 0
59 bcmXGS3AsyncTX 140410880 0 0 0 0 0
58 bcmTX 140410880 0 0 0 0
0
57 bcmCNTR.0 140410880 0 0 0 0 0
55 bcmDPC 140410880 0 0 0 0 0
52 sysd 44650496 22876160 3930856 1358248 2589172
2572608
28 inetd 876544 69632 0 0 0
0
21 mount_mfs 22642688 1953792 0 0 0
0
!----output truncated ------------------!

122 | Control and Monitoring

 Example 5 Figure 6-40. Command Example: show processes memory stack-unit on S-Series
FTOS#show processes memory stack-unit 0

Memory Statistics On Unit 0 Processor (bytes)

==========================================
start
Total : 160231424, MaxUsed : 130596864 [09/19/2007 03:11:17]
CurrentUsed: 130560000, CurrentFree: 29671424
SharedUsed : 14261872, SharedFree : 6709672
PID Process ResSize Size Allocs Frees Max
Current
124 KernLrnAgMv 140410880 0 0 0 0
0
117 frrp 5677056 217088 87650 0 87650
87650
116 xstp 7585792 1536000 551812 49692 518684
502120
109 span 5709824 221184 55386 0 55386
55386
108 pim 5869568 720896 12300 0 12300
12300
103 igmp 5513216 327680 18236 16564 18236
1672
100 mrtm 6905856 516096 72846 0 72846
72846
96 l2mgr 6107136 491520 254858 115948 172038
138910
92 l2pm 5607424 221184 667578 579740 120966
87838
86 arpm 5353472 208896 54528 16564 54528
37964
83 ospf 4210688 475136 0 0 0
0
80 dsm 6057984 552960 22838 0 22838
22838
74 rtm 6311936 577536 574792 298152 376024
276640
70 rip 5001216 249856 528 0 528
528
68 ipm1 5292032 339968 67224 0 67224
67224
!----output truncated ------------------!

Related
Commands show hardware layer2 acl Display Layer 2 ACL data for the selected stack member and stack
member port-pipe.
show hardware layer3 Display Layer 3 ACL or QoS data for the selected stack member and stack
member port-pipe.
show hardware stack-unit Display the data plane or management plane input and output statistics of
the designated component of the designated stack member.
show hardware system-flow Display Layer 3 ACL or QoS data for the selected stack member and stack
member port-pipe.
show interfaces stack-unit Display information on all interfaces on a specific S-Series stack member.
show processes memory Display CPU usage information based on processes running in an S-Series
(S-Series)

show processes ipc flow-control

ces Display the Single Window Protocol Queue (SWPQ) statistics.

Syntax show processes ipc flow-control [cp | rp1 | rp2 | lp linecard-number]

Control and Monitoring | 123

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

cp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword cp to view the Control Processor’s SWPQ

statistics.
rp1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp1 to view the Control Processor’s SWPQ
statistics on Route Processor 1.*
rp2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp2 to view the Control Processor’s SWPQ
statistics on Route Processor 2.*
lp linecard-number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword lp followed by the line card number to view the
Control Processor’s SWPQ statistics on the specified line card.*
* In the S-Series, this command supports only the cp keyword, not the rp1, rp2, and lp options. See
Figure 6-45.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and E-Series

Example 1 Figure 6-41. Command Example: show processes ipc flow-control from C-Series

FTOS# show processes ipc flow-control cp

Q Statistics on CP Processor
TxProcess RxProcess Cur
High Time Retr Msg Ack Aval Max
LenMark Out ies Sent Rcvd Retra Retra
ACL0 RTM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 10
ACL0 DIFFSERV0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 10
ACL0 IGMP0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 10
ACL0 PIM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 10
ACL0 ACL20 0 1 0 0 2 2 50 50
CFG0 CFGDATASYNC0 0 2 0 0 7 7 255 255
DHCP0 ACL0 0 1 0 0 9 9 25 25
DHCP0 IFMGR0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
RTM0 ARPMGR0 0 1 0 0 1 1 136 136
ACL20 IGMP0 0 0 0 0 0 0 50 50
LACP0 IFMGR0 0 2 0 0 4 4 25 25
ARPMGR0 MRTM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100
ACL20 PIM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 50 50
MACMGR0 ACL0 0 1 0 0 1 1 25 25
TCLASSMGR0 ARPMGR0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100
IFMGR0 IPMGR2 0 6 0 0 44 44 8 8
!--------------------------output truncated ---------------------------------!

124 | Control and Monitoring

Example 2 Figure 6-42. Command Example: show processes ipc flow-control rp from E-Series

FTOS# show processes ipc flow-control cp

Q Statistics on CP Processor
TxProcess RxProcess Cur High Time Retr Msg Ack Aval Max
Len Mark Out ies Sent Rcvd Retra Retra
DHCP0 ACL0 0 1 0 0 6 6 25 25
DHCP0 IFMGR0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
IFMGR0 FEFD0 0 3 0 0 27 27 8 8
IFMGR0 IPMGR0 0 6 0 0 44 44 8 8
IFMGR0 SNMP0 0 1 0 0 16 16 8 8
IFMGR0 SFL_CP0 0 4 0 0 31 31 8 8
IFMGR0 EVENTTERMLOG0 0 1 0 0 6 6 8 8
IFMGR0 PORTMIRR0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 8
IFMGR0 DHCP0 0 1 0 0 6 6 8 8
IFMGR0 TCLASSMGR0 0 2 0 0 13 13 8 8
IFMGR0 VRRP0 0 3 0 0 25 25 8 8
IFMGR0 MRTM0 0 2 0 0 21 21 8 8
TCLASSMGR0 ARPMGR0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100
IFMGR0 IPMGR2 0 6 0 0 44 44 8 8
!--------------------------output truncated ---------------------------------!

Table 6-4 list the definitions of the fields shown in Figure 6-41 and Figure 6-42.
Table 6-4. Description of show processes ipc flow-control cp output

Field Description
Source QID /Tx Process Source Service Identifier
Destination QID/Rx Process Destination Service Identifier
Cur Len Current number of messages enqueued
High Mark Highest number of packets in the queue at any point of time
#of to / Timeout Timeout count
#of Retr /Retries Number of retransmissions
#msg Sent/Msg Sent/ Number of messages sent
#msg Ackd/Ack Rcvd Number of messages acknowledged
Retr /Available Retra Number of retries left
Total/ Max Retra Number of retries allowed

Example 2 Figure 6-43. Command Example: show processes ipc flow-control rp

FTOS# show processes ipc flow-control rp2

[qid] Source->Dest Cur High #of #of #msg #msg Retr total
Len Mark to Retr Sent Ackd
--------------------------------------------------------------------
[1] unknown2->unknown2 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 3
[2] l2pm0->spanMgr0 0 2 0 0 2298 2298 25 25
[3] fvrp0->macMgr0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
[4] l2pm0->fvrp0 0 2 0 0 1905 1905 25 25
[5] fvrp0->l2pm0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
[6] stp0->l2pm0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
[7] spanMgr0->macMgr0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
[8] spanMgr0->ipMgr0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
FTOS#

Control and Monitoring | 125

 Example 3 Figure 6-44. Command Example: show processes ipc flow-control lp
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show processes ipc flow-control lp 10

Q Statistics on LP 10
TxProcess RxProcess Cur High Time Retries Msg Ack Aval Max
Len Mark Out Sent Rcvd Retra Retra
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ACL_AGENT10 PIM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 20
ACL_AGENT10 PIM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 20
FRRPAGT10 FRRP0 0 0 0 0 0 0 30 30
IFAGT10 IFMGR0 0 1 0 0 1 1 8 8
LPDMACAGENT10 MACMGR0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
FTOS#

Example 4 Figure 6-45. Command Example: show processes ipc flow-control on S-Series

FTOS#show processes ipc flow-control

Q Statistics on CP Processor
TxProcess RxProcess Cur High Time Retr Msg Ack Aval Max
Len Mark Out ies Sent Rcvd Retra Retra
ACL0 RTM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 10
ACL0 DIFFSERV0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 10
ACL0 IGMP0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 10
ACL0 PIM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 10
LACP0 IFMGR0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
RTM0 ARPMGR0 0 0 0 0 0 0 136 136
MACMGR0 ACL0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
ARPMGR0 MRTM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100
DHCP0 ACL0 0 1 0 0 1 1 25 25
DHCP0 IFMGR0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
L2PM0 SPANMGR0 0 2 0 0 14 14 25 25
ARPMGR0 FIBAGT0 0 1 0 0 1 1 100 100
SPANMGR0 MACMGR0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
SPANMGR0 IPMGR0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
SPANMGR0 L2PM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
STP0 L2PM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
RTM0 FIBAGT0 0 2 0 0 4 4 255 255
L2PM0 STP0 0 5 0 0 5 5 25 25
ACL_AGENT0 PIM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 20
ACL_AGENT0 PIM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 20
FRRP0 L2PM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
L2PM0 FRRP0 0 1 0 0 13 13 25 25
ACL0 ACL_AGENT0 0 4 0 0 7 7 90 90
ACL0 MACAGENT0 0 0 0 0 0 0 90 90
IFMGR0 EVENTTERMLOG0 0 1 0 0 1 1 8 8
IFMGR0 SNMP0 0 1 0 0 1 1 8 8
IFMGR0 IPMGR0 0 7 0 0 9 9 8 8
IFMGR0 DIFFSERV0 0 2 0 0 3 3 8 8
DIFFSERV0 ACL_AGENT0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100
!---------------output truncated --------------------------!

Usage The Single Window Protocol (SWP) provides flow control-based reliable communication between the
Information sending and receiving software tasks.

Important Points to Remember

• A sending task enqueues messages into the SWP queue3 for a receiving task and waits for an
acknowledgement.
• If no response is received within a defined period of time, the SWP timeout mechanism resubmits
the message at the head of the FIFO queue.
• After retrying a defined number of times, the following timeout message is generated:
SWP-2-NOMORETIMEOUT
• In the display output in Figure 6-45, a retry (Retries) value of zero indicates that the SWP
mechanism reached the maximum number of retransmissions without an acknowledgement.

126 | Control and Monitoring

show processes memory (C-Series and E-Series)
ce View memory usage information based on processes running in the system.

Syntax show processes memory [cp | lp slot-number {lp all | lp summary} | rp1 | rp2]

Parameters
cp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword cp to view memory usage of the Control Processor.
lp slot-number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword lp and the slot number to view information on the
line-card processor in that slot.
C-Series Range: 0-7
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on a E1200/E1200i, 0 to 6 on a E600/E600i, and 0 to 5 on a
E300.
lp all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword lp all to view CP memory usage on all active line
cards.
lp summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword lp summary to view a summary of the line card
CP memory usage.
rp1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp1 to view memory usage of the Route Processor
1.
Note: This option is supported on the E-Series only.
rp2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp2 to view memory usage of the Route Processor
2.
Note: This option is supported on the E-Series only.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.1.1.2 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale E600i
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale E1200i
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Added lp all and lp summary options
Version 6.5.1.0 For rp1 and rp2 only, the output displays memory consumption of all the processes
including a summary (see Figure 6-47 and Figure 6-48.

Usage The output for show process memory displays the memory usage statistics running on CP part (sysd) of
Information the system. The Sysd is an aggregate task that handles all the tasks running on C-Series’ and E-Series'
CP.
In FTOS Release 7.4.1.0 and higher, the total counter size (for all 3 CPUs) in show memory and
show processes memory will differ based on which FTOS processes are counted.
• In the show memory (C-Series and E-Series) display output, the memory size is equal to the size
of the application processes.
• In the show processes memory (C-Series and E-Series) display output, the memory size is equal to
the size of the application processes plus the size of the system processes.

Control and Monitoring | 127

 Example Figure 6-46. Command Example: show processes memory (partial)
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show processes memory

Memory Statistics On CP Processor (bytes)
==========================================
Total: 452689184, MaxUsed: 64886986, CurrentUsed: 64873866, Current
TaskName TotalAllocated TotalFreed MaxHeld CurrentHolding
tRootTask 39083408 1395840 38143920 37687568
tARL 64 0 64 64
tBcmTask 256 0 256 256
tPortmapd 18560 0 18560 18560
tShell 3440 0 3440 3440
tPingTmo0 0 1088 0 0
tExcTask 0 592864 0 0
tme 4002494 192 4002302 4002302
ipc 34060 192 34060 33868
irc 943436 0 943436 943436
RpmAvailMgr 9376 32 9344 9344
ev 133188 0 133188 133188
evterm 26752 0 26752 26752
evhdlr 2528 8064 2528 0
dlm 7556256 7366960 1239104 189296
dla 416 0 416 416
tsm 15136 0 15136 15136
fmg 766560 0 766560 766560
fileProc 416 0 416 416
sysAdmTsk 42028 0 42028 42028

Example Figure 6-47. Command Example: show processes memory rp1

FTOS#show processes memory rp1

Total : 954650624, MaxUsed : 114135040 [3/8/2006 15:1:42]

CurrentUsed: 114135040, CurrentFree: 840515584
SharedUsed : 7849096, SharedFree : 13122448

PID Process ResSize Size Allocs Frees Max Current

124 ospf 3215360 425984 0 0 0 0

119 dsm 7749632 1859584 797026 0 797026 797026
114 ipm1 3821568 229376 297324 0 297324 297324
112 rtm 4722688 421888 925008 0 925008 925008
107 rip 3731456 253952 198216 0 198216 198216
104 acl 4734976 430080 1127524 0 1127524 1127524
100 sysd1 11636736 2019328 965798 0 965798 965798
98 sysmon 528384 94208 0 0 0 0
36 sshd 1286144 430080 0 0 0 0
34 inetd 663552 98304 0 0 0 0
32 mount_mfs 42397696 2514944 0 0 0 0
19 mount_mfs 364544 2449408 0 0 0 0
6 sh 446464 737280 0 0 0 0
5 aiodoned 76529664 0 0 0 0 0
4 ioflush 76529664 0 0 0 0 0
3 reaper 76529664 0 0 0 0 0
2 pagedaemon 76529664 0 0 0 0 0
1 init 139264 2375680 0 0 0 0
0 swapper 76529664 0 0 0 0 0

128 | Control and Monitoring

Example Figure 6-48. Command Example: show processes memory rp2

FTOS#show processes memory rp2

Total : 953700352, MaxUsed : 149417984 [3/8/2006 12:33:6]

CurrentUsed: 149417984, CurrentFree: 804282368
SharedUsed : 7847200, SharedFree : 13124344

PID Process ResSize Size Allocs Frees Max Current

145 vrrp 3870720 266240 297324 0 297324 297324

141 fvrp 4472832 204800 797010 0 797010 797010
138 xstp 10764288 7155712 367534 0 367534 367534
133 span 4136960 167936 565810 0 565810 565810
132 pim 6664192 516096 2812528 0 2812528 2812528
128 igmp 4112384 344064 627684 0 627684 627684
124 ipm2 3923968 237568 363396 0 363396 363396
120 mrtm 25567232 593920 697790 0 697790 697790
116 l2mgr 4579328 520192 830098 0 830098 830098
112 l2pm 3874816 225280 367446 32948 367446 334498
108 arpm 3702784 208896 268420 0 268420 268420
104 acl2 3485696 94208 132144 0 132144 132144
100 sysd2 11657216 1679360 998834 0 998834 998834
98 sysmon 528384 94208 0 0 0 0
36 sshd 1286144 430080 0 0 0 0
34 inetd 663552 98304 0 0 0 0
32 mount_mfs 41791488 2514944 0 0 0 0
19 mount_mfs 364544 2449408 0 0 0 0
6 sh 446464 737280 0 0 0 0
5 aiodoned 76967936 0 0 0 0 0
4 ioflush 76967936 0 0 0 0 0
3 reaper 76967936 0 0 0 0 0
2 pagedaemon 76967936 0 0 0 0 0
1 init 139264 2375680 0 0 0 0
0 swapper 76967936 0 0 0 0 0
FTOS#

Table 6-5 defines the fields that appear in the show processes memory output.

Table 6-5. Descriptions of show processes memory rp1/rp2 output

Field Description
Total: Total system memory available
MaxUsed: Total maximum memory used ever (history indicated with time stamp)
CurrentUsed: Total memory currently in use
CurrentFree: Total system memory available
SharedUsed: Total used shared memory
SharedFree: Total free shared memory
PID Process ID
Process Process Name
ResSize Actual resident size of the process in memory
Size Process test, stack, and data size
Allocs Total dynamic memory allocated
Frees Total dynamic memory freed
Max Maximum dynamic memory allocated
Current Current dynamic memory in use

Control and Monitoring | 129

 show processes memory (S-Series)
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

s Display memory usage information based on processes running in the S-Series system.

Syntax show processes memory {management-unit | stack unit {0–7 | all | summary}}

Parameters
management-unit Enter the keyword management-unit for CPU memory usage of the stack
management unit.
stack unit 0–7 Enter the keyword stack unit followed by a stack unit ID of the member unit
for which to display memory usage on the forwarding processor.
all Enter the keyword all for detailed memory usage on all stack members.
summary Enter the keyword summary for a brief summary of memory availability and
usage on all stack members.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Modified: Added management-unit option
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Usage The output for show process memory displays the memory usage statistics running on CP part (sysd) of
Information the system. The Sysd is an aggregate task that handles all the tasks running on S-Series’ CP.
For S-Series, the output of show memory and this command will differ based on which FTOS
processes are counted.
• In the show memory display output, the memory size is equal to the size of the application
processes.
• In the output of this command, the memory size is equal to the size of the application processes
plus the size of the system processes.

Example Figure 6-49. Command Example: show processes memory on S-Series

FTOS#show processes memory stack-unit 0

Total: 268435456, MaxUsed: 2420244, CurrentUsed: 2420244, CurrentFree:
266015212
TaskName TotalAllocated TotalFreed MaxHeld CurrentHolding
tme 435406 397536 54434 37870
ipc 16652 0 16652 16652
timerMgr 33304 0 33304 33304
sysAdmTsk 33216 0 33216 33216
tFib4 1943960 0 1943960 1943960
aclAgent 90770 16564 74206 74206
ifagt_1 21318 16564 21318 4754
dsagt 6504 0 6504 6504
MacAgent 269778 0 269778 269778

130 | Control and Monitoring

Example Figure 6-50. Command Example: show processes memory management-unit

FTOS#show processes management-unit

Total : 151937024, MaxUsed : 111800320 [2/25/2008 4:18:53]

CurrentUsed: 98848768, CurrentFree: 53088256
SharedUsed : 13007848, SharedFree : 7963696

PID Process ResSize Size Allocs Frees Max Current

337 KernLrnAgMv 117927936 0 0 0 0 0
331 vrrp 5189632 249856 50572 0 50572 50572
323 frrp 5206016 241664 369238 0 369238 369238
322 xstp 7430144 2928640 38328 0 38328 38328
321 pim 5267456 823296 62168 0 62168 62168
314 igmp 4960256 380928 18588 16564 18588 2024
313 mrtm 6742016 1130496 72758 0 72758 72758
308 l2mgr 5607424 552960 735214 380972 619266 354242
301 l2pm 5001216 167936 1429522 1176044 286606 253478
298 arpm 4628480 217088 71092 33128 71092 37964
294 ospf 5468160 503808 724204 662560 78208 61644
288 dsm 6778880 1159168 39490 16564 39490 22926
287 rtm 5713920 602112 442280 198768 376024 243512
284 rip 4562944 258048 528 0 528 528
281 lacp 4673536 266240 221060 0 221060 221060
277 ipm1 4837376 380928 83788 0 83788 83788
273 acl 5005312 512000 239564 149076 123616 90488
272 topoDPC 117927936 0 0 0 0 0
271 bcmNHOP 117927936 0 0 0 0 0
270 bcmDISC 117927936 0 0 0 0 0
269 bcmATP-RX 117927936 0 0 0 0 0
268 bcmATP-TX 117927936 0 0 0 0 0
267 bcmSTACK 117927936 0 0 0 0 0
266 bcmRX 117927936 0 0 0 0 0
265 bcmLINK.0 117927936 0 0 0 0 0
!----------- output truncated --------------!

Table 6-6 defines the fields that appear in the show processes memory output. .:

Table 6-6. Descriptions of show processes memory output

Field Description
Total: Total system memory available
MaxUsed: Total maximum memory used ever (history indicated with time stamp)
CurrentUsed: Total memory currently in use
CurrentFree: Total system memory available
SharedUsed: Total used shared memory
SharedFree: Total free shared memory
PID Process ID
Process Process Name
ResSize Actual resident size of the process in memory
Size Process test, stack, and data size
Allocs Total dynamic memory allocated
Frees Total dynamic memory freed
Max Maximum dynamic memory allocated
Current Current dynamic memory in use

Control and Monitoring | 131

 show processes switch-utilization
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

e Show switch fabric utilization.

Syntax show processes switch-utilization

Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
History
E-Series original Command

Example Figure 6-51. Command Example: show processes switch-utilization

FTOS#show processes switch-utilization
Switch fabric utilization 5Sec 1Min 5Min
------------------------------------------------------
3% 3% 3%

Usage An asterisk ( * ) in the output indicates a legacy card that is not support by the show processes
Information switch-utilization command.

show rpm
ce Show the current RPM status.

Syntax show rpm [number [brief] | all]

Parameters
number (OPTIONAL) Enter either zero (0) or 1 for the RPM.
all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to view a table with information on all present RPMs.
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to view an abbreviated list of RPM information.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.8 Updated to support PPID on the S60
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

132 | Control and Monitoring

E-Series Example Figure 6-52. Command Example: show rpm on E-Series
FTOS#show rpm
-- RPM card 0 --
Status : active
Next Boot : online
Card Type : RPM - Route Processor Module (LC-EH-RPM)
Hardware Rev : 3.1
Num Ports : 1
Up Time : 18 hr, 48 min
Last Restart : reset by user
FTOS Version : 8-4-1-317
Jumbo Capable : yes
CP Boot Flash : A: 2.5.1.0 [booted] B: 2.5.1.0
RP1 Boot Flash: A: 2.5.1.0 [booted] B: 2.5.1.0
RP2 Boot Flash: A: 2.5.1.0 [booted] B: 2.5.1.0
CP Mem Size : 1073741824 bytes
RP1 Mem Size : 1073741824 bytes
RP2 Mem Size : 1073741824 bytes
MMC Mem Size : 3566329856 bytes
External MMC : 128180224 bytes
USB Mem Size : n/a
Temperature : 36C
Power Status : AC
Voltage : ok
Serial Number : FX000056234
Part Number : 7520043401 Rev 05
Vendor Id : 04
Date Code : 01072010
Country Code : 01
Piece Part ID : N/A
PPID Revision : N/A
Service Tag : N/A
Expr Svc Code : N/A

-- RPM card 1 --
Status : not present
FTOS#

Table 6-7 defines the fields displayed in Figure 6-52.

Table 6-7. Descriptions of show rpm output

Field Description
Status Displays the RPM’s status.
Next Boot Displays whether the RPM is to be brought online at the next system reload.
Card Type Displays the RPM catalog number.
Hardware Rev Displays theE-Series chipset hardware revision level: 1.0 (non-Jumbo); 1.5
(Jumbo-enabled); 2.0 (or above is TeraScale).
Num Ports Displays the number of active ports.
Up Time Displays the number of hours and minutes since the RPM’s last reboot.
Last Restart States the reason for the last RPM reboot.
C-Series possible values:
• “normal power-cycle” (reset power-cycle command)
• “reset by master” (peer RPM reset by master RPM)
• “over temperature shutdown”
• “power supply failed”
E-Series possible values:
• “normal power-cycle” (insufficient power, normal power cycle)
• “reset by user” (automatic failover, software reload of both RPMs, or
master RPM resetting peer)
• “force-failover” (redundancy force-failover command)

Control and Monitoring | 133

 Table 6-7. Descriptions of show rpm output
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Field Description
FTOS Version Displays the operating software version.
Jumbo Capable Displays a Yes or No indicating if the RPM is capable of sending and receiving
Jumbo frames.
This field does not indicate if the chassis is in Jumbo mode; for that
determination, use the show chassis brief command.
CP Boot Flash Displays the two possible Boot Flash versions for the Control Processor. The
[Booted] keyword next to the version states which version was used at system
boot.
RP1 Boot Flash Displays the two possible Boot Flash versions for the Routing Processor 1. The
[Booted] keyword next to the version states which version was used at system
boot.
RP2 Boot Flash Displays the two possible Boot Flash versions for the Routing Processor 2. The
[Booted] keyword next to the version states which version was used at system
boot.
CP Mem Size Displays the memory of the Control Processor.
RP1 Mem Size Displays the memory of the Routing Processor 1.
PR2 Mem Size Displays the memory of the Routing Processor 2.
Temperature Displays the temperature of the RPM.
Minor alarm status if temperature is over 65° C.
Power Status Lists the status of the power modules in the chassis.
Voltage Displays the power rails for the line card.
Serial Num Displays the line card serial number.
Part Num Displays the line card part number.
Vendor ID Displays an internal code, which specifies the manufacturing vendor.
Date Code Displays the line card’s manufacturing date.
Country Code Displays the country of origin.
01 = USA

Related
Commands show chassis View information on all elements of the system.
show linecard View information on a line card.
show sfm View information on the SFM.

134 | Control and Monitoring

show software ifm
cs Display interface management (IFM) data.

Syntax show software ifm {clients [summary] | ifagt number | ifcb interface | stack-unit unit-ID |
trace-flags}

Parameters
clients Enter the keyword clients to display IFM client information.
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to display brief information about IFM
clients.
ifagt number Enter the keyword ifagt followed by the number of an interface agent to display
software pipe and IPC statistics.
ifcb interface Enter the keyword ifcb followed by one of the following interface IDs followed by the
slot/port information to display interface control block information for that interface:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet.
• For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel.
(Range:1– 128)
• For a 10G Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet.
C-Series options also include:
• fastethernet for a Fast Ethernet interface
• loopback for a Loopback interface
• managementethernet for a Management Ethernet interface
• null for a Null interface
• vlan for a VLAN interface (Range: 1–4094, 1-2094 for ExaScale)
stack-unit Enter the keyword stack-unit followed by the stack member number to display IFM
unit-ID information for that unit.
Unit ID range:
S60: 0-11
all other S-Series: 0-7
Note: This option is only available on S-Series.
trace-flags Enter the keyword trace-flags to display IFM information for internal trace
flags.

Defaults None

Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for C-Series and S-Series

Control and Monitoring | 135

 S-Series Example Figure 6-53. Command Example: show software ifm clients summary on S-Series
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show software ifm clients summary

ClntType Inst svcMask subSvcMask tlvSvcMask tlvSubSvc swp
IPM 0 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x90ff71f3 0x021e0e81 31
RTM 0 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x800010ff 0x01930000 43
VRRP 0 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x803330f3 0x00400000 39
L2PM 0 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x87ff79ff 0x0e032200 45
ACL 0 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x867f50c3 0x000f0218 44
OSPF 0 0x00000dfa 0x00400098 0x00000000 0x00000000 0
PIM 0 0x000000f3 0x00030000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0
IGMP 0 0x000e027f 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0
SNMP 0 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x800302c0 0x00000002 30
EVTTERM 0 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x800002c0 0x00000000 29
MRTM 0 0x00000000 0x00000200 0x81f7103f 0x00000000 38
DSM 0 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x80771003 0x00000000 32
LACP 0 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x8000383f 0x00000000 35
DHCP 0 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x800000c2 0x0000c000 37
V6RAD 0 0x00000433 0x00030000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0
Unidentified Client0 0x006e0002 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0

FTOS#

show switch links

c View the switch fabric backplane or internal status.

Syntax show switch links {backplane | internal}

Parameters
backplane Enter the keyword backplane to view a table with information on the link
status of the switch fabric backplane for both SFMs.
internal Enter the keyword internal to view a table with information on the internal
status of the switch fabric modules.

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC

Command
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
History

Example Figure 6-54. Command Example: show switch links backplane

FTOS# show switch links backplane
Switch fabric backplane link status:

SFM0 Links Status SFM1 Links Status

LC SlotID Port0 | Port1 | Port2 | Port3 | Port4 | Port5 | Port6 |
Port7

0 up up up up down down down down

1 not present
2 not present
3 not present
4 not present
5 not present
6 up up up up down down down down
7 not present
up - Both ends of the link are up
down - Both ends of the link are down
up / down - SFM side up and LC side down
down / up - SFM side down and LC side up
FTOS#

136 | Control and Monitoring

show system (S-Series)
s Display the current status of all stack members or a specific member.

Syntax show system [brief | stack-unit unit-id | stack-ports {status | topology}]

Parameters
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to view an abbreviated list of system
information.
stack-unit unit-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword stack-unit followed by the stack
member ID for information on that stack member.
Unit ID range:
S60: 0-11
all other S-Series: 0-7
stack-ports status | (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword stack-ports for information on the
topology status or topology of the S60 stack ports.
Note: THis option applies to the S60 only.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Modified output: Boot Flash field will display code level for boot code 2.8.1.1 and newer,
while older boot codes are displayed as "Present".
Version 7.7.1.0 Modified output: Added Master Priority field.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series switches

Usage Figure 6-57 shows the output from the show system brief command.

Figure 6-56 shows the output from the show system stack-unit command on a non-S60 system.

Figure 6-57shows the output from the show system stack-unit command on an S60.

Control and Monitoring | 137

 Example Figure 6-55. Command Example: show system brief
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show system brief

Stack MAC : 0:1:e8:d6:4:70

-- Stack Info --
Unit UnitType Status ReqTyp CurTyp Version Ports
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 Member not present
1 Standby online S50V S50V 7.7.1.0 52
2 Mgmt online S50V S50V 7.7.1.0 52
3 Member not present
4 Member not present
5 Member not present
6 Member not present
7 Member not present

-- Module Info --
Unit Module No Status Module Type Ports
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 0 online S50-01-10GE-2P 2
1 1 online S50-01-24G-2S 1
2 0 online S50-01-10GE-2P 2
2 1 online S50-01-24G-2S 1

-- Power Supplies --
Unit Bay Status Type
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 0 up AC
1 1 absent
2 0 up AC
2 1 absent

-- Fan Status --
Unit TrayStatus Fan0 Fan1 Fan2 Fan3 Fan4 Fan5
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 up up up up up up up
2 up up up up up up up

FTOS#

138 | Control and Monitoring

Example Figure 6-56. Command Example: show system stack-unit
FTOS#show system stack-unit 0

-- Unit 0 --
Unit Type : Management Unit
Status : online
Next Boot : online
Required Type : S4810 - 52-port GE/TE/FG (SE)
Current Type : S4810 - 52-port GE/TE/FG (SE)
Master priority : 0
Hardware Rev : 3.0
Num Ports : 64
Up Time : 3 day, 21 hr, 37 min
FTOS Version : 8.3.12.0
Jumbo Capable : yes
POE Capable : no
FIPS Mode : disabled
Boot Flash : 1.2.0.0
Memory Size : 2147483648 bytes
Temperature : 55C
Voltage : ok
Serial Number : HADL111220134
Part Number : 7590009601 Rev A
Vendor Id : 07
Date Code : 01122011
Country Code : 02
Piece Part ID : N/A
PPID Revision : N/A
Service Tag : N/A
Expr Svc Code : N/A
Auto Reboot : disabled
Burned In MAC : 00:01:e8:8a:e1:ab
No Of MACs : 3

-- Power Supplies --
Unit Bay Status Type FanStatus
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 0 up AC up
0 1 absent absent

-- Fan Status --
Unit Bay TrayStatus Fan0 Speed Fan1 Speed
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 0 up up 11280 up 11520
0 1 up up 11520 up 11280
FTOS#

Control and Monitoring | 139

 Example Figure 6-57. Command Example: show system stack-unit (S60)
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show system stack-unit 0

-- Unit 0 --
Unit Type : Management Unit
Status : online
Next Boot : online
Required Type : S60 - 48-port E/FE/GE (SC)
Current Type : S60 - 48-port E/FE/GE (SC)
Master priority : 0
Hardware Rev : 2.0
Num Ports : 52
Up Time : 2 hr, 16 min
FTOS Version : 1-2-0-205
Jumbo Capable : yes
POE Capable : no
Boot Flash : 1.0.0.2
Memory Size : 2147483648 bytes
Temperature : 50C
Voltage : ok
Serial Number : 00AS101900013
Part Number : 7520044101 Rev 02
Vendor Id : 11
Date Code : 01192010
Country Code : 01
Last Restart : soft reset
Auto Reboot : disabled
Burned In MAC : 00:01:e8:81:e1:b9
No Of MACs : 3

-- Module 0 --
Status : not present

-- Module 1 --
Status : not present

-- Power Supplies --
Unit Bay Status Type
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 0 up AC
0 1 up AC

-- Fan Status --
Unit Bay TrayStatus Fan0 Speed Fan1 Speed Fan2 Speed Temp
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 0 up up 7200 up 7200 up 7200 20
0 1 up up 7200 up 7200 up 7200 21

Speed in RPM

FTOS#

Related
show version Display the FTOS version.
Commands
show processes memory Display memory usage based on running processes.
(S-Series)
show system stack-ports Display information about the stack ports on all switches in the S-Series
stack.
show hardware stack-unit Display the data plane and management plane input and output statistics of
a particular stack member.
stack-unit priority Configure the ability of an S-Series switch to become the management unit
of a stack.

140 | Control and Monitoring

show tech-support (C-Series and E-Series)
ce Display, or save to a file, a collection of data from other show commands, the information necessary
for Dell Networking technical support to perform troubleshooting.

Syntax show tech-support [linecard 0-6 | page] | {display | except | find | grep | no-more | save}

Parameters
linecard 0-6 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword linecard followed by the linecard number to view
information relating to a specific linecard.
page (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword page to view 24 lines of text at a time.
Press the SPACE BAR to view the next 24 lines.
Press the ENTER key to view the next line of text.
display, except, If you use the pipe command ( | ), then enter one of these keywords to filter command
find, grep, output. Refer to Chapter 4, CLI Basics for details on filtering commands.
no-more
save Enter the save keyword (following the pipe) to save the command output.
flash: Save to local flash drive (flash://filename (max 20 chars) )
slot0: Save to local file system (slot0://filename (max 20 chars) )

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced save to file options
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.5.4.0 Show clock included in display on E-Series

Control and Monitoring | 141

 C-Series Figure 6-58. Command Example: show tech-support (partial) on C-Series
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Example FTOS#show tech-support page

----------------------------------- show version -------------------------------

Dell Force10 Networks Real Time Operating System Software
Dell Force10 Operating System Version: 1.0
Dell Force10 Application Software Version: FTOS 7.5.1.0
Copyright (c) 1999-2007 by Dell, Inc.
Build Time: Tue Sep 12 15:39:17 IST 2006
Build Path: /sites/maa/work/sw//C-SERIES/SW/SRC
FTOS uptime is 18 minutes

System image file is "/work/sw/IMAGES/Chassis/C300-ODC-2/FTOS-CS.bin"

Chassis Type: C300

Control Processor: IBM PowerPC 750FX (Rev D2.2) with 1073741824 bytes of memory.
128K bytes of non-volatile configuration memory.

1 Route Processor/Switch Fabric Module

2 48-port GE 10/100/1000Base-T line card with RJ45 interface (CB)
1 FastEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s)
96 GigabitEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s)

----------------------------------- show HA information -------------------

-- RPM Status --
------------------------------------------------
RPM Slot ID: 0
RPM Redundancy Role: Primary
RPM State: Active
RPM SW Version: CS-1-1-317
Link to Peer: Down
Peer RPM: not present

-- RPM Redundancy Configuration --

------------------------------------------------
Primary RPM: rpm0
Auto Data Sync: Full
Failover Type: Hot Failover
Auto reboot RPM: Disabled
Auto failover limit: 3 times in 60 minutes

...more----

142 | Control and Monitoring

E-Series Example Figure 6-59. Command Example: show tech-support save (partial) on E-Series
FTOS#show tech-support ?
linecard Line card
page Page through output
| Pipe through a command
<cr>

FTOS#show tech-support linecard 3 | ?

display Display additional information
except Show only text that does not match a pattern
find Search for the first occurrence of a pattern
grep Show only text that matches a pattern
no-more Don't paginate output
save Save output to a file

FTOS#show tech-support linecard 3 | save ?

flash: Save to local file system (flash://filename (max 20 chars) )
slot0: Save to local file system (slot0://filename (max 20 chars) )

FTOS#show tech-support linecard 3 | save flash://LauraSave

Start saving show command report .......

FTOS#dir
Directory of flash:

1 drwx 32768 Jan 01 1980 00:00:00 +00:00 .

2 drwx 512 Aug 22 2008 14:21:13 +00:00 ..
3 drwx 8192 Mar 30 1919 10:31:04 +00:00 TRACE_LOG_DIR
4 drwx 8192 Mar 30 1919 10:31:04 +00:00 CRASH_LOG_DIR
5 drwx 8192 Mar 30 1919 10:31:04 +00:00 NVTRACE_LOG_DIR
6 drwx 8192 Mar 30 1919 10:31:04 +00:00 CORE_DUMP_DIR
7 d--- 8192 Mar 30 1919 10:31:04 +00:00 ADMIN_DIR
8 -rwx 33059550 Jul 11 2007 17:49:46 +00:00 FTOS-EF-7.4.2.0.bin
9 drwx 8192 Jan 01 1980 00:18:28 +00:00 diag
10 -rwx 29555751 May 12 2008 17:29:42 +00:00 FTOS-EF-4.7.6.0.bin
11 -rwx 27959813 Apr 04 2008 15:05:12 +00:00 FTOS-EF-7.5.1.0.bin
12 -rwx 4693 May 12 2008 17:24:36 +00:00 config051508
13 -rwx 29922288 Jan 11 2008 14:58:36 +00:00 FTOS-EF-7.6.1.0.bin
14 -rwx 6497 Aug 22 2008 14:18:56 +00:00 startup-config
15 -rwx 5832 Jul 25 2008 11:13:36 +00:00 startup-config.bak
16 -rwx 29947358 Jul 25 2008 11:04:26 +00:00 FTOS-EF-7.6.1.2.bin
17 -rwx 10375 Aug 25 2008 10:55:18 +00:00 LauraSave

flash: 520962048 bytes total (40189952 bytes free)

FTOS#

Usage Without the linecard or page option, the command output is continuous, use CNTL-z to interrupt the
Information command output.

The save option works with other filtering commands. This allows you to save specific information of
a show command. The save entry should always be the last option.

For example: FTOS#show tech-support |grep regular-expression |except regular-expression | find

regular-expression | save flash://result

This display output is an accumulation of the same information that is displayed when you execute one
of the following show commands:
• show cam-profile
• show cam-ipv4flow
• show chassis
• show clock
• show environment
• show file-system
• show interface
• show inventory

Control and Monitoring | 143

 • show ip management-route
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

• show ip protocols
• show ip route summary
• show processes cpu
• show processes memory
• show redundancy
• show rpm
• show running-conf
• show sfm
• show version

Related
show version Display the FTOS version.
Commands
show linecard Display the line card(s) status.
show environment (C-Series Display system component status.
and E-Series)
show processes memory Display memory usage based on running processes.
(C-Series and E-Series)

show tech-support (S-Series)

s Display a collection of data from other show commands, necessary for Dell Networking technical
support to perform troubleshooting on S-Series switches.

Syntax show tech-support [stack-unit unit-id | page]

Parameters
stack-unit (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword stack-unit to view CPU memory usage for the stack
member designated by unit-id.
Unit ID range:
S60: 0-11
all other S-Series: 0-7
page (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword page to view 24 lines of text at a time.
Press the SPACE BAR to view the next 24 lines.
Press the ENTER key to view the next line of text.
When using the pipe command ( | ), enter one of these keywords to filter command output.
Refer to Chapter 4, CLI Basics for details on filtering commands.
save Enter the save keyword to save the command output.
flash: Save to local flash drive (flash://filename (max 20 chars) )

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced save to file options
Version 7.6.1.0 Expanded to support S-Series switches

144 | Control and Monitoring

 S-Series Figure 6-60. Command Example: show tech-support save (partial) on S-Series
Examples
FTOS#show tech-support ?
page Page through output
stack-unit Unit Number
| Pipe through a command
<cr>
FTOS#show tech-support stack-unit 1 ?
| Pipe through a command
<cr>
FTOS#show tech-support stack-unit 1 | ?
except Show only text that does not match a pattern
find Search for the first occurrence of a pattern
grep Show only text that matches a pattern
no-more Don't paginate output
save Save output to a file

FTOS#show tech-support stack-unit 1 | save ?

flash: Save to local file system (flash://filename (max 20 chars) )
FTOS#show tech-support stack-unit 1 | save flash://LauraSave
Start saving show command report .......
FTOS#
FTOS#dir
Directory of flash:

1 drw- 16384 Jan 01 1980 00:00:00 +00:00 .

2 drwx 1536 Jul 13 1996 02:38:06 +00:00 ..
3 d--- 512 Nov 20 2007 15:46:44 +00:00 ADMIN_DIR
4 -rw- 7124 Jul 13 1996 02:33:04 +00:00 startup-config
5 -rw- 3303 Feb 14 2008 22:01:16 +00:00 startup-config.oldChassis
6 -rw- 6561 May 17 1996 04:10:54 +00:00 startup-config.bak
7 -rw- 6539 May 29 1996 10:35:42 +00:00 test.cfg
8 -rw- 276 Jul 15 1996 23:11:14 +00:00 LauraSave
flash: 3104256 bytes total (3072512 bytes free)
FTOS#

Figure 6-61. Command Example: show tech-support (partial) on S-Series

FTOS#show tech-support stack-unit 0
----------------------------------- show version -------------------------------
Dell Force10 Networks Real Time Operating System Software
Dell Force10 Operating System Version: 1.0
Dell Force10 Application Software Version: FTOS 7.6.1.0
Copyright (c) 1999-2007 by Dell, Inc.
Build Time: Tue Sep 12 15:39:17 IST 2006
Build Path: /sites/maa/work/sw/purushothaman/cser-latest/depot/main/Dev/Cyclone/
FTOS uptime is 18 minutes
System Type: S50N
Control Processor: MPC8451E with 255545344 bytes of memory.
32M bytes of Boot-Flash memory.

1 48-port E/FE/GE (SB)

48 GigabitEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s)
4 Ten GigabitEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s)
------------------------------------ show clock -------------------------------
12:03:01.695 UTC Wed Nov 21 2007
----------------------------------- show running-config ------------------------
Current Configuration ...
! Version E_MAIN4.7.5.414
! Last configuration change at Wed Nov 21 11:42:19 2007 by default
!
service timestamps log datetime
!
hostname FTOS
!
enable password 7 xxxxxxxx
!
username admin password 7 xxxxxxxx
!
enable restricted 7 xxxxxxxx
!
interface GigabitEthernet 0/1
no ip address
shutdown
!
interface GigabitEthernet 0/2
no ip address
shutdown
!------------- output truncated -----------------!

Control and Monitoring | 145

 Usage Without the page or stack-unit option, the command output is continuous, use Ctrl-z to interrupt the
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Information command output.

The save option works with other filtering commands. This allows you to save specific information of
a show command. The save entry should always be the last option.

For example: FTOS#show tech-support |grep regular-expression |except regular-expression | find

regular-expression | save flash://result

This display output is an accumulation of the same information that is displayed when you execute one
of the following show commands:
• show cam
• show clock
• show environment
• show file
• show interfaces
• show inventory
• show ip protocols
• show ip route summary
• show processes cpu
• show processes memory
• show redundancy
• show running-conf
• show version

Related
Commands show version Display the FTOS version.
show system (S-Series) Display the current switch status.
show environment (S-Series) Display system component status.
show processes memory (S-Series) Display memory usage based on running processes.

ssh-peer-rpm
ce Open an SSH connection to the peer RPM.

Syntax ssh-peer-rpm [-l username]

Parameters
-l username (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword -l followed by your user name.
Default: The user name associated with the terminal

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.3.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

146 | Control and Monitoring

 Usage This command is not available when the peer RPMs are running different FTOS releases.
Information

ssh-peer-stack-unit
Open an SSH connection to the peer RPM.

Syntax ssh-peer-stack-unit [-l username]

Parameters
-l username (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword -l followed by your user name.
Default: The user name associated with the terminal

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.4 Introduced on S60
History

telnet
ces Connect through Telnet to a server.

Syntax telnet {host | ip-address | ipv6-address prefix-length | vrf vrf instance name } [/source-interface]

Parameters
host Enter the name of a server.
ip-address Enter the IPv4 address in dotted decimal format of the server.
ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the prefix length in
prefix-length the /x format.
Range: /0 to /128
Note: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros

Control and Monitoring | 147

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

vrf instance (Optional) E-Series Only: Enter the keyword vrf followed by the VRF Instance
name.
source-interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords /source-interface followed by the interface
information to include the interface’s IP address.
Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a 100/1000 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback followed by a
number from zero (0) to 16383.
• For the Null interface, enter the keyword null followed by 0.
• For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a
number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale
• For SONET interface types, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/
port information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1
to 4094.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
History Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale (IPv6)
Increased number of VLANs on ExaScale to 4094 (was 2094)
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale (IPv4)
Version 7.9.1.0 Introduced VRF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and added support for IPv6 address on E-Series only

telnet-peer-rpm
ce Open a Telnet connection to the peer RPM.

Syntax telnet-peer-rpm

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

148 | Control and Monitoring

 Command
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage Opening a telnet connection from the Standby RPM to an Active RPM follows the authentication
Information procedure configured in the chassis. However, opening a telnet connection from the Active RPM into
the Standby RPM requires local authentication.

Configuring an ACL on a VTY line will block a Telnet session using the telnet-peer-rpm command
in the standby to active RPM direction only. Such an ACL will not block an internal Telnet session in
the active RPM to standby RPM direction.

telnet-peer-stack-unit
Open a Telnet connection to the peer stack unit.

Syntax telnet-peer-stack-unit

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.4 Introduced on S60
History

terminal length
ces Configure the number of lines displayed on the terminal screen.

Syntax terminal length screen-length

To return to the default values, enter terminal no length.

Parameters
screen-length Enter a number of lines. Entering zero will cause the terminal to display without
pausing.
Range: 0 to 512.
Default: 24 lines.

Defaults 24 lines

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Control and Monitoring | 149

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series

E-Series original Command

terminal xml
ce Enable XML mode in Telnet and SSH client sessions.

Syntax terminal xml

To exit the XML mode, enter terminal no xml.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.5.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage This command enables the XML input mode where you can either cut and paste XML requests or enter
Information the XML requests line-by-line. For more information on using the XML feature, refer to the XML
chapter in the FTOS Configuration Guide.

traceroute
ces View a packet’s path to a specific device.

Syntax traceroute {host | vrf instance | ip-address | ipv6-address}

Parameters
host Enter the name of device.
vrf instance (Optional) E-Series Only: Enter the keyword vrf followed by the VRF Instance name.
ip-address Enter the IP address of the device in dotted decimal format.
ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address, in the x:x:x:x::x format, to which you are testing connectivity.
Note: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros

Defaults Timeout = 5 seconds; Probe count = 3; 30 hops max; 40 byte packet size; UDP port = 33434

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale with IPv6
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale (IPv4 only)
Version 7.9.1.0 Introduced VRF.

150 | Control and Monitoring

 Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Added support for IPv6 address on E-Series
E-Series original Command

Usage When you enter the traceroute command without specifying an IP address (Extended Traceroute),
Information you are prompted for a target and source IP address, timeout in seconds (default is 5), a probe count
(default is 3), minimum TTL (default is 1), maximum TTL (default is 30), and port number (default is
33434). To keep the default setting for those parameters, press the ENTER key.

For IPv6, you are prompted for a minimum hop count (default is 1) and a maximum hop count (default
is 64).

Example Figure 6-62. Command Example: traceroute (IPv4)

FTOS#traceroute www.force10networks.com

Translating "www.force10networks.com"...domain server (10.11.0.1) [OK]

Type Ctrl-C to abort.

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Tracing the route to www.force10networks.com (10.11.84.18), 30 hops max, 40 byte packets
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

TTL Hostname Probe1 Probe2 Probe3

1 10.11.199.190 001.000 ms 001.000 ms 002.000 ms
2 gwegress-sjc-02.force10networks.com (10.11.30.126) 005.000 ms 001.000 ms 001.000 ms
3 fw-sjc-01.force10networks.com (10.11.127.254) 000.000 ms 000.000 ms 000.000 ms
4 www.force10networks.com (10.11.84.18) 000.000 ms 000.000 ms 000.000 ms
FTOS#

Figure 6-63 contains examples of the IPv6 traceroute command with both a compressed IPv6 address
and uncompressed address.

Example Figure 6-63. Command Example: traceroute (IPv6)

FTOS#traceroute 100::1

Type Ctrl-C to abort.

-----------------------------------------------------------
Tracing the route to 100::1, 64 hops max, 60 byte packets
-----------------------------------------------------------
Hops Hostname Probe1 Probe2 Probe3
1 100::1 000.000 ms 000.000 ms 000.000 ms

FTOS#traceroute 3ffe:501:ffff:100:201:e8ff:fe00:4c8b

Type Ctrl-C to abort.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Tracing the route to 3ffe:501:ffff:100:201:e8ff:fe00:4c8b, 64 hops max, 60 byte packets
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hops Hostname Probe1 Probe2 Probe3
1 3ffe:501:ffff:100:201:e8ff:fe00:4c8b
000.000 ms 000.000 ms 000.000 ms
FTOS#

Related
Commands ping Test connectivity to a device.

Control and Monitoring | 151

 undebug all
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Disable all debug operations on the system.

Syntax undebug all

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

upload trace-log
ce Upload trace log files from the three CPUs (cp, rp1, and rp2)

Syntax upload trace-log {cp {cmd-history | hw-trace | sw-trace}| rp1 {cmd-history | hw-trace |
sw-trace}| rp2 {cmd-history | hw-trace | sw-trace}}

Parameters
cp | rp1 | rp2 Enter the keyword cp | rp1 | rp2 to upload the trace log from that CPU.
cmd-history (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword cmd-history to upload the CPU’s
command history.
hw-trace (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword hw-trace to upload the CPU’s hardware
trace.
sw-trace (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword sw-trace to upload the CPU’s software
trace.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and expanded to support command history, hardware trace, and
software trace logs
Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Usage The log information is uploaded to flash:/TRACE_LOG_DIR

Information

152 | Control and Monitoring

util-threshold cpu (C- and E-Series)
ce Configure the high or low CPU utilization thresholds for SNMP traps.

Syntax util-threshold cpu {5sec | 1min | 5min} {rp1 | rp2 | cp | lp slot-id | all} {high {0-100} | {low [0-100}}

To return to the default settings, use the no util-threshold cpu command syntax.

Parameters
cpu Indicate the length of time in which the cpu has been busy.
utilization • 5sec
time • 1min
• 5min
processor type Indicate the type of processor to be used to configure the CPU utilization information.
• rp1 = route processor1
• rp2 = route processor2
• cp = control processor
• lp slot-id = the line card slot-id
• all = use all of the processors to configure the CPU utilization information.
utilization Indicate the high or low values for the CPU utilization thresholds in percentage format.
threshold in % • high. Range: 0 - 100
• low. Range: 0 - 100
Note: A threshold level of 0 will disable the syslog and SNMP trap.

Example util-threshold cpu 5sec cp high 50

In this example, the low threshold value is not specified so it will take the value set for the high
threshold value.In all other instances, the low threshold value must be equal to or less than that of the
high threshold value.

Defaults High CPU utilization threshold: 1min = 85%, 5min = 80%

Low CPU utilization threshold: 1min = 75%, 5min = 70%

Command Modes CONFIG

Command
Version 8.4.2.3 Introduced on C-Series, S25 and S50
History
Version 8.4.2.0 Introduced on E-Series TeraScale
Version 8.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale

Usage When the total CPU utilization exceeds the configured threshold for a given time, a threshold
Information notification is sent as a SNMP trap. If a low threshold value is not specified, the low threshold value is
set to the same value as the high threshold value. The system will generate a SYSLOG and SNMP Trap
each time the configured threshold is crossed.

Note: The 5sec util-threshold cpu command is disabled by default on all platforms. To enable the command,
enter util-threshold cpu 5sec all high {value greater than zero}. To disable the SYSLOG and traps for the 5sec
cpu utilization thresholds, enter util-threshold cpu 5sec all high 0 or no util-threshold cpu 5sec {rp1 | rp2 | cp | lp
slot-id | all}

Control and Monitoring | 153

 util-threshold cpu (S-Series)
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

s Configure the high or low CPU utilization thresholds for SNMP traps.

Syntax util-threshold cpu {5sec | 1min | 5min} {Management-unit | standby | stack-unit unit-number | all}
{high {0-100} | {low [0-100}}}

To return to the default setting, enter no util-threshold cpu.

Parameters
cpu utilization time Enter the keyword that indicates the amount of threshold time to configure the CPU
utilization thresholds.
• 5sec
• 1min
• 5min
unit Indicate the unit where you want to configure the CPU utilization thresholds.
• Management-unit
• standby
• stack-unit unit-number = select the number of the unit in the stack
• all = use all of the units to configure the cpu utilization information.
utilization threshold in % Indicate the high or low values for the CPU utilization threshold in percentage format.
• high. Range: 0 - 100
• low. Range: 0 - 100
Note: A threshold level of 0 will disable the syslog and SNMP trap.

Defaults High threshold cpu default = 92%

Low threshold cpu default = 82%

Command Modes CONFIG

Command
Version 8.3.3.8 Introduced on S60.
History
Version 8.3.5.3 Introduced on S55.
Version 8.4.2.2 Introduced on C-Series, S25 and S50.
Version 8.4.2.0 Introduced on E-Series TeraScale.
Version 8.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale.

Usage When the total CPU utilization exceeds the configured threshold for a given time, a threshold
Information notification is sent as a SNMP trap. If a low threshold value is not specified, the low threshold value is
set to the same value as the high threshold value. The system will generate a SYSLOG and SNMP Trap
each time the configured threshold is crossed.

154 | Control and Monitoring

util-threshold mem (C- and E-Series)
ce Configure the high or low memory utilization thresholds for SNMP traps.

Syntax util-threshold mem {rp1 | rp2 | cp | lp slot-id | all} {high {0-100} | {low [0-100}}

To return to the default setting, use the no util-threshold mem command syntax.

Parameters
processor type Indicate the type of processor that will be used to configure the memory
utilization information.
• rp1 = route processor1
• rp2 = route processor2
• cp = control processor
• lp slot-id = the line card slot-id
• all = use all of the processors to configure the memory utilization
information.
utilization threshold in % Indicate the high or low values for the memory utilization threshold in
percentage format.
• high. Range: 0 - 100
• low. Range: 0 - 100
Note: A threshold level of 0 will disable the syslog and SNMP trap.

Defaults High threshold default = 92%

Low threshold default = 82%

Command Modes CONFIG

Command
Version 8.4.2.2 Introduced on C-Series, S25 and S50
History
Version 8.4.2.0 Introduced on E-Series TeraScale
Version 8.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale

Usage When the total memory utilization exceeds the configured threshold for a given time, a threshold
Information notification is sent as a SNMP trap. If a low threshold value is not specified, the low threshold value is
set to the same value as the high threshold value.

To return the memory thresholds to the default values, enter no util-threshold mem rp1 | rp2 | cp | lp
number | all

Control and Monitoring | 155

 util-threshold mem (S-Series)
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

s Configure the high or low memory utilization thresholds for SNMP traps.

Syntax util-threshold mem {Management-unit | standby | stack-unit unit-number | all} {high {0-100} | {low
[0-100}}}

To return to the default setting, enter the no util-threshold mem command syntax.

Parameters
unit Indicate the unit where you want to configure the memory utilization thresholds.
• Management-unit
• standby
• stack-unit unit-number = select the number of the unit in the stack
• all = use all of the units to configure the memory utilization information.
utilization Indicate the high or low values for the memory utilization in percentage format.
threshold in % • high. Range: 0 - 100
• low. Range: 0 - 100
Note: A threshold level of0 will disable the syslog and SNMP trap.

Defaults High threshold default = 92%

Low threshold default = 82%

Command Modes CONFIG

Command
Version 8.3.3.8 Introduced on S60.
History
Version 8.3.5.3 Introduced on S55.
Version 8.4.2.2 Introduced on C-Series, S25 and S50
Version 8.4.2.0 Introduced on E-Series TeraScale
Version 8.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale

Usage When the total memory utilization exceeds the configured threshold for a given time, a threshold
Information notification is sent as a SNMP trap. If a low threshold value is not specified, the low threshold value is
set to the same value as the high threshold value.

156 | Control and Monitoring

virtual-ip
ce Configure a virtual IP for the active management interface.

Syntax virtual-ip ip address

To return to the default, use the no virtual-ip ip address command.

Parameters
ip address Enter the IP address of the active management interface in a dotted decimal format
(A.B.C.D.)

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

Related
Commands ip address Assign a primary and secondary IP address to the interface.

write
ces Copy the current configuration to either the startup-configuration file or the terminal.

Syntax write {memory | terminal}

Parameters
memory Enter the keyword memory to copy the current running configuration to the startup
configuration file. This command is similar to the copy running-config
startup-config command.
terminal Enter the keyword terminal to copy the current running configuration to the terminal. This
command is similar to the show running-config command.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series original Command

Related
Commands
save Save configurations created in uBoot.

Usage The write memory command saves the running-configuration to the file labeled
Information startup-configuration. When using a LOCAL CONFIG FILE other than the startup-config not named
“startup-configuration” (for example, you used a specific file during the boot config command) the
running-config is not saved to that file; use the copy command to save any running-configuration
changes to that local file.

Control and Monitoring | 157

 www.dell.com | dell.com/support

158
|
Control and Monitoring
 7
802.1ag

Overview
802.1ag is available only on platform: s

Commands
This chapter contains the following commands:

• ccm disable
• ccm transmit-interval
• clear ethernet cfm traceroute-cache
• database hold-time
• disable
• domain
• ethernet cfm
• ethernet cfm mep
• ethernet cfm mip
• mep cross-check
• mep cross-check enable
• mep cross-check start-delay
• ping ethernet
• show ethernet cfm domain
• show ethernet cfm maintenance-points local
• show ethernet cfm maintenance-points remote
• show ethernet cfm mipdb
• show ethernet cfm statistics
• show ethernet cfm port-statistics
• show ethernet cfm traceroute-cache
• service
• traceroute cache hold-time
• traceroute cache size
• traceroute ethernet

802.1ag | 159
 ccm disable
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

s Disable CCM.

Syntax ccm disable

Enter no ccm disable to enable CCM.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes ECFM DOMAIN

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

ccm transmit-interval
s Configure the transmit interval (mandatory). The interval specified applies to all MEPs in the domain.

Syntax ccm transmit-interval seconds

Parameters
seconds Enter a transmit interval.
Range: 1,10,60,600

Defaults 10 seconds

Command Modes ECFM DOMAIN

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

clear ethernet cfm traceroute-cache

s Delete all Link Trace Cache entries.

Syntax clear ethernet cfm traceroute-cache

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

160 | 802.1ag
database hold-time
s Set the amount of time that data from a missing MEP is kept in the Continuity Check Database.

Syntax database hold-time minutes

Parameters
minutes Enter a hold-time.
Range: 100-65535 minutes

Defaults 100 minutes

Command Modes ECFM DOMAIN

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

disable
s Disable Ethernet CFM without stopping the CFM process.

Syntax disable

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes ETHERNET CFM

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

domain
s Create maintenance domain.

Syntax domain name md-level number

Parameters
name Name the maintenance domain.
md-level number Enter a maintenance domain level.
Range: 0-7

Defaults None

Command Modes ETHERNET CFM

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

802.1ag | 161
 ethernet cfm
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

s Spawn the CFM process. No CFM configuration is allowed until the CFM process is spawned.

Syntax ethernet cfm

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

ethernet cfm mep

s Create an MEP.

Syntax ethernet cfm mep {up-mep | down-mep} domain {name | level} ma-name name mepid mep-id

Parameters
[up-mep | down-mep] Specify whether the MEP is up or down facing.
Up-MEP: monitors the forwarding path internal to an bridge on the
customer or provider edge; on Dell Networking systems the internal
forwarding path is effectively the switch fabric and forwarding engine.
Down-MEP: monitors the forwarding path external another bridge.
domain [name | level] Enter this keyword followed by the domain name or domain level.
ma-name name Enter this keyword followed by the name of the maintenance association.
mepid mep-id Enter an MEP ID.
Range: 1-8191

Defaults None

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

ethernet cfm mip

s Create an MIP.

Syntax ethernet cfm mip domain {name | level} ma-name name

Parameters
domain [name | level] Enter this keyword followed by the domain name or domain level.
ma-name name Enter this keyword followed by the name of the maintenance association.

Defaults None

Command Modes INTERFACE

162 | 802.1ag
 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

mep cross-check
s Enable cross-checking for an MEP.

Syntax mep cross-check mep-id

Parameters
mep-id Enter the MEP ID
Range: 1-8191

Defaults None

Command Modes ECFM DOMAIN

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

mep cross-check enable

s Enable cross-checking.

Syntax mep cross-check enable {port | vlan-id}

Parameters
port Down service with no VLAN association.
vlan-id Enter the VLAN to apply the cross-check.

Defaults None

Command Modes ECFM DOMAIN

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

mep cross-check start-delay

s Configure the amount of time the system waits for a remote MEP to come up before the cross-check
operation is started.

Syntax mep cross-check start-delay number

Parameters
start-delay number Enter a start-delay in seconds.
Range: 3-100 seconds

Defaults 3 ccms

802.1ag | 163
 Command Modes ETHERNET CFM
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

ping ethernet
s Send a Loopback message.

Syntax ping ethernet domain [name l level] ma-name ma-name remote {dest-mep-id | mac-addr
mac-address} source {src-mep-id | port interface}

Parameters
name | level Enter the domain name or level.
ma-name ma-name Enter the keyword followed by the maintenance association name.
dest-mep-id Enter the MEP ID that will be the target of the ping.
mac-addr mac-address Enter the keyword followed by the MAC address that will be the
target of the ping.
src-mep-id Enter the MEP ID that will originate the ping.
port interface Enter the keyword followed by the interface that will originate the
ping.

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

show ethernet cfm domain

s Display maintenance domain information.

Syntax show ethernet cfm domain [name | level | brief]

Parameters
name | level Enter the maintenance domain name or level.
brief Enter this keyword to display a summary output.

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

164 | 802.1ag
 Example FTOS# show ethernet cfm domain

Domain Name: customer

Level: 7
Total Service: 1
Services
MA-Name VLAN CC-Int X-CHK Status

My_MA 200 10s enabled

Domain Name: My_Domain

Level: 6
Total Service: 1
Services
MA-Name VLAN CC-Int X-CHK Status

Your_MA 100 10s enabled

show ethernet cfm maintenance-points local

s Display configured MEPs and MIPs.

Syntax show ethernet cfm maintenance-points local [mep | mip]

Parameters
mep Enter this keyword to display configured MEPs.
mip Enter this keyword to display configured MIPs.

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Example FTOS#show ethernet cfm maintenance-points local mip

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MPID Domain Name Level Type Port CCM-Status
MA Name VLAN Dir MAC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

0 service1 4 MIP Gi 0/5 Disabled

My_MA 3333 DOWN 00:01:e8:0b:c6:36

0 service1 4 MIP Gi 0/5 Disabled

Your_MA 3333 UP 00:01:e8:0b:c6:36

show ethernet cfm maintenance-points remote

s Display the MEP Database.

Syntax show ethernet cfm maintenance-points remote detail [active | domain {level | name} |
expired | waiting]

Parameters
active Enter this keyword to display only the MEPs in active state.
domain [name | level] Enter this keyword followed by the domain name or domain level.

802.1ag | 165
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

expired Enter this keyword to view MEP entries that have expired due to
connectivity failure.
waiting Enter this keyword to display MEP entries waiting for response.

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Example FTOS#show ethernet cfm maintenance-points remote detail

MAC Address: 00:01:e8:58:68:78

Domain Name: cfm0
MA Name: test0
Level: 7
VLAN: 10
MP ID: 900
Sender Chassis ID: FTOS
MEP Interface status: Up
MEP Port status: Forwarding
Receive RDI: FALSE
MP Status: Active

show ethernet cfm mipdb

s Display the MIP Database.

Syntax show ethernet cfm mipdb

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

show ethernet cfm statistics

s Display MEP statistics.

Syntax show ethernet cfm statistics [domain {name | level} vlan-id vlan-id mpid mpid]

Parameters
domain Enter this keyword to display statistics for a particular domain.
name | level Enter the domain name or level.
vlan-id vlan-id Enter this keyword followed by a VLAN ID.
mpid mpid Enter this keyword followed by a maintenance point ID.

Defaults None

166 | 802.1ag
Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Example FTOS# show ethernet cfm statistics

Domain Name: Customer

Domain Level: 7
MA Name: My_MA
MPID: 300

CCMs:
Transmitted: 1503 RcvdSeqErrors: 0
LTRs:
Unexpected Rcvd: 0
LBRs:
Received: 0 Rcvd Out Of Order: 0
Received Bad MSDU: 0
Transmitted: 0

show ethernet cfm port-statistics

s Display CFM statistics by port.

Syntax show ethernet cfm port-statistics [interface type slot/port]

Parameters
interface type Enter this keyword followed by the interface type.
slot/port Enter the slot and port numbers for the port.

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Example FTOS#show ethernet cfm port-statistics interface gigabitethernet 0/5

Port statistics for port: Gi 0/5
==================================

RX Statistics
=============
Total CFM Pkts 75394 CCM Pkts 75394
LBM Pkts 0 LTM Pkts 0
LBR Pkts 0 LTR Pkts 0
Bad CFM Pkts 0 CFM Pkts Discarded 0
CFM Pkts forwarded 102417

TX Statistics
=============
Total CFM Pkts 10303 CCM Pkts 0
LBM Pkts 0 LTM Pkts 3
LBR Pkts 0 LTR Pkts 0

show ethernet cfm traceroute-cache

s Display the Link Trace Cache.

802.1ag | 167
 Syntax show ethernet cfm traceroute-cache
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Example FTOS#show ethernet cfm traceroute-cache

Traceroute to 00:01:e8:52:4a:f8 on Domain Customer2, Level 7, MA name Test2 with VLAN

2

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hops Host IngressMAC Ingr Action Relay Action
Next Host Egress MAC Egress Action FWD Status
------------------------------------------------------------------------------

4 00:00:00:01:e8:53:4a:f8 00:01:e8:52:4a:f8 IngOK RlyHit

00:00:00:01:e8:52:4a:f8 Terminal MEP

service
s Create maintenance association.

Syntax service name vlan vlan-id

Parameters
name Enter a maintenance association name.
vlan vlan-id Enter this keyword followed by the VLAN ID.
Range: 1-4094

Defaults None

Command Modes ECFM DOMAIN

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

traceroute cache hold-time

s Set the amount of time a trace result is cached.

Syntax traceroute cache hold-time minutes

Parameters
minutes Enter a hold-time.
Range: 10-65535 minutes

Defaults 100 minutes

Command Modes ETHERNET CFM

168 | 802.1ag
 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

traceroute cache size

s Set the size of the Link Trace Cache.

Syntax traceroute cache size entries

Parameters
entries Enter the number of entries the Link Trace Cache can hold.
Range: 1 - 4095 entries

Defaults 100 entries

Command Modes ETHERNET CFM

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

traceroute ethernet
s Send a Linktrace message to an MEP.

Syntax traceroute ethernet domain [name | level] ma-name ma-name remote {mep-id mep-id | mac-addr
mac-address}

Parameters
domain name | Enter the keyword followed by the domain name or level.
level
ma-name ma-name Enter the keyword followed by the maintenance association name.
mepid mep-id Enter the MEP ID that will be the trace target.
mac-addr Enter the MAC address of the trace target.
mac-address

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

802.1ag | 169
 www.dell.com | dell.com/support

170
|
802.1ag
 8
802.1X
The 802.1X Port Authentication commands are:
• debug dot1x
• dot1x auth-type mab-only
• dot1x authentication (Interface)
• dot1x auth-fail-vlan
• dot1x auth-server
• dot1x guest-vlan
• dot1x host-mode
• dot1x mac-auth-bypass
• dot1x max-eap-req
• dot1x max-supplicants
• dot1x port-control
• dot1x quiet-period
• dot1x reauthentication
• dot1x reauth-max
• dot1x server-timeout
• dot1x supplicant-timeout
• dot1x tx-period
• show dot1x cos-mapping interface
• show dot1x interface
An authentication server must authenticate a client connected to an 802.1X switch port. Until the
authentication, only EAPOL (Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN) traffic is allowed through
the port to which a client is connected. Once authentication is successful, normal traffic passes through
the port.

FTOS supports RADIUS and Active Directory environments using 802.1X Port Authentication.

Important Points to Remember

FTOS limits network access for certain users by using VLAN assignments. 802.1X with VLAN
assignment has these characteristics when configured on the switch and the RADIUS server.
• 802.1X is supported on C-Series, E-Series, and S-Series.
• 802.1X is not supported on the LAG or the channel members of a LAG.
• If no VLAN is supplied by the RADIUS server or if 802.1X authorization is disabled, the port is
configured in its access VLAN after successful authentication.
• If 802.1X authorization is enabled but the VLAN information from the RADIUS server is not
valid, the port returns to the unauthorized state and remains in the configured access VLAN. This
prevents ports from appearing unexpectedly in an inappropriate VLAN due to a configuration
error. Configuration errors create an entry in Syslog.

802.1X | 171
 • If 802.1X authorization is enabled and all information from the RADIUS server is valid, the port is
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

placed in the specified VLAN after authentication.

• If port security is enabled on an 802.1X port with VLAN assignment, the port is placed in the
RADIUS server assigned VLAN.
• If 802.1X is disabled on the port, it is returned to the configured access VLAN.
• When the port is in the force authorized, force unauthorized, or shutdown state, it is placed in the
configured access VLAN.
• If an 802.1X port is authenticated and put in the RADIUS server assigned VLAN, any change to
the port access VLAN configuration will not take effect.
• The 802.1X with VLAN assignment feature is not supported on trunk ports, dynamic ports, or
with dynamic-access port assignment through a VLAN membership.

debug dot1x
cs Display 802.1X debugging information.

Syntax debug dot1x [all | errors | packets | state-machine] [interface interface]

Parameters
all Enable all 802.1X debug messages.
errors Display information about all 802.1X errors.
packets Display information about all 802.1X packets.
state-machine Display information about all 802.1X packets.
interface interface Restricts the debugging information to an interface.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.4.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
History

172 | 802.1X
dot1x auth-type mab-only
cs Use only the host MAC address to authenticate a device with MAC authentication bypass (MAB).

Syntax dot1x auth-type mab-only

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series
History
Version 8.4.2.1 Introduced on S55 and S60 platforms
Version 8.3.3.10 Introduced on S55 and S60 platforms

Usage The prerequisites for enabling MAB-only authentication on a port are:

Information
• 802.1X authentication must be enabled globally on the switch and on the port (dot1x
authentication command).
• MAC authentication bypass must be enabled on the port (dot1x mac-auth-bypass command).
In MAB-only authentication mode, a port authenticates using the host MAC address even though
802.1xauthentication is enabled. If the MAB-only authentication fails, the host is placed in the guest
VLAN (if configured).

To disable MAB-only authentication on a port, enter the no dot1x auth-type mab-only command.

Related
dot1x mac-auth-bypass
Commands

dot1x authentication (Configuration)

ces Enable dot1x globally; dot1x must be enabled both globally and at the interface level.

Syntax dot1x authentication

To disable dot1x on an globally, use the no dot1x authentication command.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
History
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Related
dot1x authentication (Interface)
Commands

802.1X | 173
 dot1x authentication (Interface)
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Enable dot1x on an interface; dot1x must be enabled both globally and at the interface level.

Syntax dot1x authentication

To disable dot1x on an interface, use the no dot1x authentication command.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
History
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Related
dot1x authentication (Configuration)
Commands

dot1x auth-fail-vlan
ces Configure a authentication failure VLAN for users and devices that fail 802.1X authentication.

Syntax dot1x auth-fail-vlan vlan-id [max-attempts number]

To delete the authentication failure VLAN, use the no dot1x auth-fail-vlan vlan-id
[max-attempts number] command.

Parameters
vlan-id Enter the VLAN Identifier.
Range: 1 to 4094
max-attempts number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword max-attempts followed number of
attempts desired before authentication fails.
Range: 1 to 5
Default: 3

Defaults 3 attempts

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-if-interface-slot/port)

Command
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series, E-Series and S-Series
History

Usage If the host responds to 802.1X with an incorrect login/password, the login fails. The switch will
Information attempt to authenticate again until the maximum attempts configured is reached. If the authentication
fails after all allowed attempts, the interface is moved to the authentication failed VLAN.

Once the authentication VLAN is assigned, the port-state must be toggled to restart authentication.
Authentication will occur at the next re-authentication interval (dot1x reauthentication).

Related
dot1x port-control
Commands
dot1x guest-vlan
show dot1x interface

174 | 802.1X
dot1x auth-server
ces Configure the authentication server to RADIUS.

Syntax dot1x auth-server radius

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
History
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

dot1x guest-vlan
ces Configure a guest VLAN for limited access users or for devices that are not 802.1X capable.

Syntax dot1x guest-vlan vlan-id

To disable the guest VLAN, use the no dot1x guest-vlan vlan-id command.

Parameters
vlan-id Enter the VLAN Identifier.
Range: 1 to 4094

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-if-interface-slot/port)

Command
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series, E-Series, and S-Series
History

Usage 802.1X authentication is enabled when an interface is connected to the switch. If the host fails to
Information respond within a designated amount of time, the authenticator places the port in the guest VLAN.

If a device does not respond within 30 seconds, it is assumed that the device is not 802.1X capable.
Therefore, a guest VLAN is allocated to the interface and authentication, for the device, will occur at
the next re-authentication interval (dot1x reauthentication).

If the host fails authentication for the designated amount of times, the authenticator places the port in
authentication failed VLAN (dot1x auth-fail-vlan).

Note: Layer 3 portion of guest VLAN and authentication fail VLANs can be created
regardless if the VLAN is assigned to an interface or not. Once an interface is assigned a guest
VLAN (which has an IP address), then routing through the guest VLAN is the same as any
other traffic. However, interface may join/leave a VLAN dynamically.

Related
dot1x auth-fail-vlan
Commands
dot1x reauthentication
show dot1x interface

802.1X | 175
 dot1x host-mode
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

c e ts Enable single-host or multi-host authentication.

Syntax dot1x host-mode {single-host | multi-host | multi-auth}

Parameters
single-host Enable single-host authentication.
multi-host Enable multi-host authentication.
multi-auth Enable multi-supplicant authentication.

Defaults single-host

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.4.1.0 The multi-auth option was introduced on the C-Series and S-Series.
History
Version 8.3.2.0 The single-host and multi-host options were introduced on the C-Series,
E-Series TeraScale, and S-Series
Version 8.3.3.10 Introduced on S55 and S60 platforms

Usage • Single-host mode authenticates only one host per authenticator port, and drops all other traffic on
Information the port.
• Multi-host mode authenticates the first host to respond to an Identity Request, and then permits all
other traffic on the port.
• Multi-supplicant mode authenticates every device attempting to connect to the network on through
the authenticator port.

Related
show dot1x interface
Commands

dot1x mac-auth-bypass
cs Enable MAC authentication bypass. If 802.1X times out because the host did not respond to the
Identity Request frame, FTOS attempts to authenticate the host based on its MAC address.

Syntax dot1x mac-auth-bypass

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.4.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
History
Version 8.3.3.10 Introduced on S55 and S60 platforms

Usage To disable MAC authentication bypass on a port, enter the no dot1x mac-auth-bypass command.
Information

Related
dot1x auth-type
Commands
mab-only

176 | 802.1X
dot1x max-eap-req
ces Configure the maximum number of times an EAP (Extensive Authentication Protocol) request is
transmitted before the session times out.

Syntax dot1x max-eap-req number

To return to the default, use the no dot1x max-eap-req command.

Parameters
number Enter the number of times an EAP request is transmitted before a session time-out.
Range: 1 to 10
Default: 2

Defaults 2

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
History
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

dot1x max-supplicants
c e ts Restrict the number of supplicants that can be authenticated and permitted to access the network
through the port. This configuration is only takes effect in multi-auth mode.

Syntax dot1x max-supplicants number

Parameters
number Enter the number of supplicants that can be authenticated on a single port in
multi-auth mode.
Range: 1-128
Default: 128

Defaults 128 hosts can be authenticated on a single authenticator port.

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.4.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
History
Version 8.3.3.10 Introduced on S55 and S60 platforms

Related
dot1x host-mode
Commands

dot1x port-control
ces Enable port control on an interface.

Syntax dot1x port-control {force-authorized | auto | force-unauthorized}

802.1X | 177
 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

force-authorized Enter the keyword force-authorized to forcibly authorize a port.

auto Enter the keyword auto to authorize a port based on the 802.1X operation
result.
force-unauthorized Enter the keyword force-unauthorized to forcibly de-authorize a port.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
History
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Usage The authenticator performs authentication only when port-control is set to auto.
Information

dot1x quiet-period
ces Set the number of seconds that the authenticator remains quiet after a failed authentication with a
client.

Syntax dot1x quiet-period seconds

To disable quiet time, use the no dot1x quiet-time command.

Parameters
seconds Enter the number of seconds.
Range: 1 to 65535
Default: 30

Defaults 30 seconds

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
History
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

dot1x reauthentication
ces Enable periodic re-authentication of the client.

Syntax dot1x reauthentication [interval seconds]

To disable periodic re-authentication, use the no dot1x reauthentication command.

178 | 802.1X
 Parameters
interval seconds (Optional) Enter the keyword interval followed by the interval time, in seconds,
after which re-authentication will be initiated.
Range: 1 to 31536000 (1 year)
Default: 3600 (1 hour)

Defaults 3600 seconds (1 hour)

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
History
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

dot1x reauth-max
ces Configure the maximum number of times a port can re-authenticate before the port becomes
unauthorized.

Syntax dot1x reauth-max number

To return to the default, use the no dot1x reauth-max command.

Parameters
number Enter the permitted number of re-authentications.
Range: 1 - 10
Default: 2

Defaults 2

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
History
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

802.1X | 179
 dot1x server-timeout
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Configure the amount of time after which exchanges with the server time out.

Syntax dot1x server-timeout seconds

To return to the default, use the no dot1x server-timeout command.

Parameters
seconds Enter a time-out value in seconds.
Range: 1 to 300, where 300 is implementation dependant. Default: 30

Defaults 30 seconds

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
History
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Usage When you configure the dot1x server-timeout value, you must take into account the communication
Information medium used to communicate with an authentication server and the number of RADIUS servers
configured. Ideally, the dot1x server-timeout value (in seconds) is based on the configured
RADIUS-server timeout and retransmit values and calculated according to the following formula:
dot1x server-timeout seconds > (radius-server retransmit seconds + 1) * radius-server timeout seconds

Where the default values are as follows: dot1x server-timeout (30 seconds), radius-server retransmit
(3 seconds), and radius-server timeout (5 seconds).

For example:
FTOS(conf)#radius-server host 10.11.197.105 timeout 6
FTOS(conf)#radius-server host 10.11.197.105 retransmit 4
FTOS(conf)#interface gigabitethernet 2/23
FTOS(conf-if-gi-2/23)#dot1x server-timeout 40

180 | 802.1X
dot1x supplicant-timeout
ces Configure the amount of time after which exchanges with the supplicant time out.

Syntax dot1x supplicant-timeout seconds

To return to the default, use the no dot1x supplicant-timeout command.

Parameters
seconds Enter a time-out value in seconds.
Range: 1 to 300, where 300 is implementation dependant.
Default: 30

Defaults 30 seconds

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
History
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

dot1x tx-period
ces Configure the intervals at which EAPOL PDUs are transmitted by the Authenticator PAE.

Syntax dot1x tx-period seconds

To return to the default, use the no dot1x tx-period command.

Parameters
seconds Enter the interval time, in seconds, that EAPOL PDUs are transmitted.
Range: 1 to 31536000 (1 year)
Default: 30

Defaults 30 seconds

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
History
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

802.1X | 181
 show dot1x cos-mapping interface
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

cs Display the CoS priority-mapping table provided by the RADIUS server and applied to authenticated
supplicants on an 802.1X-enabled port.

Syntax show dot1x cos-mapping interface interface [mac-address mac-address]

Parameters
interface Enter one of the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword FastEthernet followed by the
slot/port information.
• For a Ten Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
mac-address (Optional) MAC address of an 802.1X-authenticated supplicant.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC privilege

Command
Version 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series
History

Usage Enter a supplicant’s MAC address using the mac-address option to display CoS mapping
Information information only for the specified supplicant.

You can display the CoS mapping information applied to traffic from authenticated supplicants on
802.1X-enabled ports that are in single-host, multi-host, and multi-supplicant authentication modes.

Example Figure 8-1. show dot1x cos-mapping interface Command Example

FTOS#show dot1x cos-mapping interface gigabitehternet 2/21

802.1p CoS re-map table on Gi 2/21:

----------------------------------
Dot1p Remapped Dot1p
0 7
1 6
2 5
3 4
4 3
5 2
6 1
7 0

FTOS#show dot1x cos-mapping int g 2/21 mac-address 00:00:01:00:07:00

802.1p CoS re-map table on Gi 2/21:

----------------------------------

802.1p CoS re-map table for Supplicant: 00:00:01:00:07:00

Dot1p Remapped Dot1p

0 7
1 6
2 5
3 4
4 3
5 2
6 1
7 0

182 | 802.1X
show dot1x interface
ces Display the 802.1X configuration of an interface.

Syntax show dot1x interface interface [mac-address mac-address]

Parameters
interface Enter one of the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword FastEthernet followed by the
slot/port information.
• For a Ten Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
mac-address (Optional) MAC address of a supplicant.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC privilege

Command
History
Version 8.4.2.1 Introduced mac-address option on the C-Series and S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series, E-Series, and S-Series

Usage C-Series and S-Series only: Enter a supplicant’s MAC address using the mac-address option to
Information display information only on the 802.1X-enabled port to which the supplicant is connected.

If 802.1X multi-supplicant authentication is enabled on a port, additional 802.1X configuration details

(port authentication status, untagged VLAN ID, authentication PAE state, and backend state) are
displayed for each supplicant as shown in Figure 8-4.

Example Figure 8-2. show dot1x interface Command Example

FTOS#show dot1x int Gi 2/32

802.1x information on Gi 2/32:

-----------------------------
Dot1x Status: Enable
Port Control: AUTO
Port Auth Status: UNAUTHORIZED
Re-Authentication: Disable
Untagged VLAN id: None
Guest VLAN: Enable
Guest VLAN id: 10
Auth-Fail VLAN: Enable
Auth-Fail VLAN id: 11
Auth-Fail Max-Attempts: 3
Tx Period: 30 seconds
Quiet Period: 60 seconds
ReAuth Max: 2
Supplicant Timeout: 30 seconds
Server Timeout: 30 seconds
Re-Auth Interval: 3600 seconds
Max-EAP-Req: 2
Auth Type: SINGLE_HOST

Auth PAE State: Initialize

Backend State: Initialize

FTOS#

802.1X | 183
 Figure 8-3. show dot1x interface mac-address Command Example
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show dot1x interface gig 2/21 mac-address 00:00:01:00:07:00

802.1x information on Gi 2/21:

-----------------------------
Dot1x Status: Enable
Port Control: AUTO
Re-Authentication: Disable
Guest VLAN: Disable
Guest VLAN id: NONE
Auth-Fail VLAN: Disable
Auth-Fail VLAN id: NONE
Auth-Fail Max-Attempts: NONE
Mac-Auth-Bypass: Enable
Mac-Auth-Bypass Only: Disable
Tx Period: 5 seconds
Quiet Period: 60 seconds
ReAuth Max: 1
Supplicant Timeout: 30 seconds
Server Timeout: 30 seconds
Re-Auth Interval: 60 seconds
Max-EAP-Req: 2
Host Mode: MULTI_AUTH
Max-Supplicants: 128

Port status and State info for Supplicant: 00:00:01:00:07:00

Port Auth Status: AUTHORIZED(MAC-AUTH-BYPASS)

Untagged VLAN id: 4094
Auth PAE State: Authenticated
Backend State: Idle
FTOS#

184 | 802.1X
Figure 8-4. show dot1x interface (with Multi-Supplicant Authentication enabled)
Example
FTOS#show dot1x interface g 0/21

802.1x information on Gi 0/21:

-----------------------------
Dot1x Status: Enable
Port Control: AUTO
Re-Authentication: Disable
Guest VLAN: Enable
Guest VLAN id: 100
Auth-Fail VLAN: Disable
Auth-Fail VLAN id: NONE
Auth-Fail Max-Attempts: NONE
Mac-Auth-Bypass: Disable
Mac-Auth-Bypass Only: Disable
Tx Period: 30 seconds
Quiet Period: 60 seconds
ReAuth Max: 3
Supplicant Timeout: 30 seconds
Server Timeout: 30 seconds
Re-Auth Interval: 60 seconds
Max-EAP-Req: 2
Host Mode: MULTI_AUTH
Max-Supplicants: 128

Port status and State info for Supplicant: 00:00:00:00:00:10

Port Auth Status: AUTHORIZED

Untagged VLAN id: 400
Auth PAE State: Authenticated
Backend State: Idle

Port status and State info for Supplicant: 00:00:00:00:00:11

Port Auth Status: AUTHORIZED

Untagged VLAN id: 300
Auth PAE State: Authenticated
Backend State: Idle

Port status and State info for Supplicant: 00:00:00:00:00:15

Port Auth Status: AUTHORIZED(GUEST-VLAN)

Untagged VLAN id: 100
Auth PAE State: Authenticated
Backend State: Idle

802.1X | 185
 www.dell.com | dell.com/support

186
|
802.1X
 9
Access Control Lists (ACL)

Overview
Access Control Lists (ACLs) are supported on platforms c e s

FTOS supports the following types of Access Control List (ACL), IP prefix list, and route map:
• Commands Common to all ACL Types
• Common IP ACL Commands
• Standard IP ACL Commands
• Extended IP ACL Commands
• Common MAC Access List Commands
• Standard MAC ACL Commands
• Extended MAC ACL Commands
• IP Prefix List Commands
• Route Map Commands
• AS-Path Commands
• IP Community List Commands

Note: For IPv6 ACL commands, see Chapter 19, IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs).

Commands Common to all ACL Types

The following commands are available within each ACL mode and do not have mode-specific options.
Some commands may use similar names, but require different options to support the different ACL
types (for example, deny).

• description
• remark
• show config

description
ces Configure a short text string describing the ACL.

Syntax description text

To delete the ACL description, enter no description.

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 187

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

text Enter a text string up to 80 characters long.

Defaults Not enabled.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION-STANDARD-ACCESS-LIST

CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST
CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-STANDARD
CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-EXTENDED

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

remark
ces Enter a description for an ACL entry.

Syntax remark [remark-number] [description]

To delete the description, use the no remark [remark number] command. Note that it is not necessary
to include the remark description that you are deleting.

Parameters
remark-number Enter the remark number. Note that the same sequence number can be used
for the remark and an ACL rule.
Range: 0 to 4294967290
description Enter a description of up to 80 characters.

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes CONFIGURATION-STANDARD-ACCESS-LIST

CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST
CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-STANDARD
CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-EXTENDED

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
pre-Version 6.4.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage The remark command is available in each ACL mode. You can configure up to 4294967290 remarks
Information in a given ACL.

188 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

 The following example shows the use of the remark command twice within the
CONFIGURATION-STANDARD-ACCESS-LIST mode. Here, the same sequence number was used
for the remark and for an associated ACL rule. The remark will precede the rule in the running-config
because it is assumed that the remark is for the rule with the same sequence number, or the group of
rules that follow the remark.

Example Figure 9-1. Command Example: remark

FTOS(config-std-nacl)#remark 10 Deny rest of the traffic
FTOS(config-std-nacl)#remark 5 Permit traffic from XYZ Inc.
FTOS(config-std-nacl)#show config
!
ip access-list standard test
remark 5 Permit traffic from XYZ Inc.
seq 5 permit 1.1.1.0/24
remark 10 Deny rest of the traffic
seq 10 Deny any
FTOS(config-std-nacl)#

Related
show config Display the current ACL configuration.
Commands

show config
ces Display the current ACL configuration.

Syntax show config

Command Modes CONFIGURATION-STANDARD-ACCESS-LIST

CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST
CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-STANDARD
CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-EXTENDED

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced

Example Figure 9-2. Command Example: show config

FTOS(config-ext-nacl)#show conf
!
ip access-list extended patches
FTOS(config-ext-nacl)#

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 189

 Common IP ACL Commands
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

The following commands are available within both IP ACL modes (Standard and Extended) and do not
have mode-specific options. When an access-list (ACL) is created without any rule and then applied to
an interface, ACL behavior reflects an implicit permit.

c and s (non-S60) platforms support Ingress IP ACLs only.

The supports both Ingress and Egress IP ACLs.

The following commands allow you to clear, display, and assign IP ACL configurations.
• access-class
• clear counters ip access-group
• ip access-group
• ip control-plane egress-filter
• show ip accounting access-list
Note: See also Commands Common to all ACL Types.

access-class
ces Apply a standard ACL to a terminal line.

Syntax access-class access-list-name

To remove an ACL, use the no access-class access-list-name command.

Parameters
access-list-name Enter the name of a configured Standard ACL, up to 140 characters.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes LINE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up
to 16 characters long.
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced

clear counters ip access-group

ces
Erase all counters maintained for access lists.

Syntax clear counters ip access-group [access-list-name]

190 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

 Parameters
access-list-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of a configured access-list, up to 140 characters.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up
to 16 characters long.
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced

ip access-group
ces Assign an IP access list (IP ACL) to an interface.

Syntax ip access-group access-list-name {in | out} [implicit-permit] [vlan vlan-id]

To delete an IP access-group configuration, use the no ip access-group access-list-name {in | out}
[implicit-permit] [vlan vlan-id] command.

Parameters
access-list-name Enter the name of a configured access list, up to 140 characters.
in Enter the keyword in to apply the ACL to incoming traffic.
out Enter the keyword out to apply the ACL to outgoing traffic.
Note: Available only on 12-port 1-Gigabit Ethernet FLEX line card. Refer to your
line card documentation for specifications. Not available on S-Series.
implicit-permit (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword implicit-permit to change the default action
of the ACL from implicit-deny to implicit-permit (that is, if the traffic does not
match the filters in the ACL, the traffic is permitted instead of dropped).
vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan followed by the ID numbers of the
VLANs.
Range: 1 to 4094, 1-2094 for ExaScale (can used IDs 1-4094)

Defaults Not enabled.

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up
to 16 characters long.
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 191

 Usage You can assign one ACL (standard or extended ACL) to an interface.
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Information

Note: This command is supported on the loopback interfaces of EE3, and EF series RPMs. It
is not supported on loopback interfaces ED series RPM, or on C-Series or S-Series loopback
interfaces.

When you apply an ACL that filters IGMP traffic, all IGMP traffic is redirected to the CPUs and
soft-forwarded, if required, in the following scenarios:
• on a Layer 2 interface - if a Layer 3 ACL is applied to the interface.
• on a Layer 3 port or on a Layer 2/Layer 3 port

Related
ip access-list standard Configure a standard ACL.
Commands
ip access-list extended Configure an extended ACL.

ip control-plane egress-filter
Enable egress Layer 3 ACL lookup for IPv4 CPU traffic

Syntax ip control-plane egress-filter

Defaults Not enabled.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.4 Introduced on the S60.
History

show ip accounting access-list

ces Display the IP access-lists created on the switch and the sequence of filters.

Syntax show ip accounting {access-list access-list-name | cam_count} interface interface

Parameters
access-list-name Enter the name of the ACL to be displayed.
cam_count List the count of the CAM rules for this ACL.
interface interface Enter the keyword interface followed by the interface type and slot/port or
number information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by
a number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale and ExaScale.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.

192 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced

Example Figure 9-3. Command Example: show ip accounting access-lists

FTOS#show ip accounting access FILTER1 interface gig 1/6
Extended IP access list FILTER1
seq 5 deny ip any 191.1.0.0 /16 count (0x00 packets)
seq 10 deny ip any 191.2.0.0 /16 order 4
seq 15 deny ip any 191.3.0.0 /16
seq 20 deny ip any 191.4.0.0 /16
seq 25 deny ip any 191.5.0.0 /16

Table 9-1 defines the information in Figure 9-3.

Table 9-1. show ip accounting access-lists Command Example Field

Field Description
“Extended IP...” Displays the name of the IP ACL.
“seq 5...” Displays the filter. If the keywords count or byte were configured in the
filter, the number of packets or bytes processed by the filter is displayed at
the end of the line.
“order 4” Displays the QoS order of priority for the ACL entry.

Standard IP ACL Commands

When an ACL is created without any rule and then applied to an interface, ACL behavior reflects an
implicit permit.

c and s platforms (except the S60) support Ingress IP ACLs only.

The supports both Ingress and Egress IP ACLs.

The commands needed to configure a Standard IP ACL are:

• deny
• ip access-list standard
• permit
• resequence access-list
• resequence prefix-list ipv4
• seq
Note: See also Commands Common to all ACL Types and Common IP ACL Commands.

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 193

 deny
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Configure a filter to drop packets with a certain IP address.

Syntax deny {source [mask] | any | host ip-address} [count [byte] | log] [dscp value] [order]
[monitor] [fragments]

To remove this filter, you have two choices:

• Use the no seq sequence-number command syntax if you know the filter’s sequence number or
• Use the no deny {source [mask] | any | host ip-address} command.

Parameters
source Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format of the network from which the
packet was sent.
mask (OPTIONAL) Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask,
when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous
(discontiguous).
any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter.
host ip-address Enter the keyword host followed by the IP address to specify a host IP address
only.
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter.
log (OPTIONAL, E-Series only) Enter the keyword log to enter ACL matches in the
log.
dscp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dcsp to match to the IP DCSCP values.
order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS order of priority for
the ACL entry.
Range: 0-254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower order
numbers have a higher priority)
Default: If the order keyword is not used, the ACLs have the lowest order by
default(255).
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic
that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule will be
applied to the monitored interface. For details, see the section “Flow-based
Monitoring” in the Port Monitoring chapter of the FTOS Configuration Guide.
fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION-STANDARD-ACCESS-LIST

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Add DSCP value for ACL matching.
Version 8.2.1.0 Allows ACL control of fragmented packets for IP (Layer 3) ACLs.
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Added support for non-contiguous mask and added the monitor option.
Version 6.5.1.0 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry.

194 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

 Usage The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. See the “Quality of Service”
Information chapter of the FTOS Configuration Guide for more information.

When you use the log option, CP processor logs details about the packets that match. Depending on
how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these
packets’ details.

The monitor option is relevant in the context of flow-based monitoring only. See the Chapter 31, Port
Monitoring.

The C-Series and S-Series cannot count both packets and bytes, so when you enter the count byte
options, only bytes are incremented.

Note: When ACL logging and byte counters are configured simultaneously, byte counters
may display an incorrect value. Configure packet counters with logging instead.

Related
ip access-list standard Configure a standard ACL.
Commands
permit Configure a permit filter.

ip access-list standard
ces Create a standard IP access list (IP ACL) to filter based on IP address.

Syntax ip access-list standard access-list-name

To delete an access list, use the no ip access-list standard access-list-name command.

Parameters
access-list-name Enter a string up to 140 characters long as the ACL name.

Defaults All IP access lists contain an implicit “deny any,” that is, if no match occurs, the packet is dropped.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16
characters long.
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Added support for non-contiguous mask and added the monitor option.
Version 6.5.1.0 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry.

Usage FTOS supports one ingress and one egress IP ACL per interface.
Information
Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16 characters long.

The number of entries allowed per ACL is hardware-dependent. Refer to your line card documentation
for detailed specification on entries allowed per ACL.

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 195

 Example Figure 9-4. Command Example: ip access-list standard
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS(conf)#ip access-list standard TestList

FTOS(config-std-nacl)#

Related
ip access-list extended Create an extended access list.
Commands
show config Display the current configuration.

permit
ces Configure a filter to permit packets from a specific source IP address to leave the switch.

Syntax permit {source [mask] | any | host ip-address} [count [byte] | log] [dscp value] [order]
[monitor]

To remove this filter, you have two choices:

• Use the no seq sequence-number command syntax if you know the filter’s sequence number or
• Use the no permit {source [mask] | any | host ip-address} command.

Parameters
source Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format of the network from which the
packet was sent.
mask (OPTIONAL) Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask,
when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous.
any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter.
host ip-address Enter the keyword host followed by the IP address to specify a host IP address
or hostname.
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter.
dscp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dcsp to match to the IP DCSCP values.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter.
log (OPTIONAL, E-Series only) Enter the keyword log to enter ACL matches in the
log.
order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL
entry.
Range: 0-254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower
order numbers have a higher priority)
Default: If the order keyword is not used, the ACLs have the lowest order by
default (255).
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the
traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule
will be applied to the monitored interface. For details, see the section
“Flow-based Monitoring” in the Port Monitoring chapter of the FTOS
Configuration Guide.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION-STANDARD-ACCESS-LIST

196 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Add DSCP value for ACL matching.
Version 8.2.1.0 Allows ACL control of fragmented packets for IP (Layer 3) ACLs.
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Added support for non-contiguous mask and added the monitor option.
Version 6.5.10 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry.

Usage The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. See the “Quality of Service”
Information chapter of the FTOS Configuration Guide for more information.

When you use the log option, CP processor logs details about the packets that match. Depending on
how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these
packets’ details.

The monitor option is relevant in the context of flow-based monitoring only. See Chapter 31, Port
Monitoring.

The C-Series and S-Series cannot count both packets and bytes, so when you enter the count byte
options, only bytes are incremented.

Note: When ACL logging and byte counters are configured simultaneously, byte counters
may display an incorrect value. Configure packet counters with logging instead.

Related
deny Assign a IP ACL filter to deny IP packets.
Commands
ip access-list standard Create a standard ACL.

resequence access-list
ces Re-assign sequence numbers to entries of an existing access-list.

Syntax resequence access-list {ipv4 | ipv6 | mac} {access-list-name StartingSeqNum

Step-to-Increment}

Parameters
ipv4 | ipv6 | mac Enter the keyword ipv4, or mac to identify the access list type to
resequence.
access-list-name Enter the name of a configured IP access list.
StartingSeqNum Enter the starting sequence number to resequence.
Range: 0 - 4294967290
Step-to-Increment Enter the step to increment the sequence number.
Range: 1 - 4294967290

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 197

 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.

History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale (IPv6)
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale (IPv4)
Version 7.8.1.0 Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names
are up to 16 characters long.
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced

Usage When all sequence numbers have been exhausted, this feature permits re-assigning new sequence
Information number to entries of an existing access-list.

Related
resequence prefix-list ipv4 Resequence a prefix list
Commands

resequence prefix-list ipv4

ces Re-assign sequence numbers to entries of an existing prefix list.

Syntax resequence prefix-list ipv4 {prefix-list-name StartingSeqNum Step-to-increment}

Parameters
prefix-list-name Enter the name of configured prefix list, up to 140 characters long.
StartingSeqNum Enter the starting sequence number to resequence.
Range: 0 – 65535
Step-to-Increment Enter the step to increment the sequence number.
Range: 1 – 65535

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names
are up to 16 characters long.
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced

Usage When all sequence numbers have been exhausted, this feature permits re-assigning new sequence
Information number to entries of an existing prefix list.

Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16 characters long.

Related
resequence access-list Resequence an access-list
Commands

198 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

seq
ces Assign a sequence number to a deny or permit filter in an IP access list while creating the filter.

Syntax seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {source [mask] | any | host ip-address}} [count [byte] |
log] [dscp value] [order] [monitor] [fragments]
To delete a filter, use the no seq sequence-number command.

Parameters
sequence-number Enter a number from 0 to 4294967290.
deny Enter the keyword deny to configure a filter to drop packets meeting this
condition.
permit Enter the keyword permit to configure a filter to forward packets meeting this
criteria.
source Enter a IP address in dotted decimal format of the network from which the
packet was received.
mask (OPTIONAL) Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The
mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or
non-contiguous.
any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter.
host ip-address Enter the keyword host followed by the IP address to specify a host IP address
or hostname.
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the
filter.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter.
log (OPTIONAL, E-Series only) Enter the keyword log to enter ACL matches in
the log.
dscp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dcsp to match to the IP DCSCP values.
order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS order for the ACL
entry.
Range: 0-254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower
order numbers have a higher priority)
Default: If the order keyword is not used, the ACLs have the lowest order by
default (255).
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the
traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule
will be applied to the monitored interface. For details, see the section
“Flow-based Monitoring” in the Port Monitoring chapter of the FTOS
Configuration Guide.
fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments.

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes CONFIGURATION-STANDARD-ACCESS-LIST

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Add DSCP value for ACL matching.
Version 8.2.1.0 Allows ACL control of fragmented packets for IP (Layer 3) ACLs.
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 199

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series

Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Added support for non-contiguous mask and added the monitor option.
Version 6.5.10 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry.

Usage The monitor option is relevant in the context of flow-based monitoring only. See Chapter 31, Port
Information Monitoring.

The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. The following applies:
• The seq sequence-number is applicable only in an ACL group.
• The order option works across ACL groups that have been applied on an interface via QoS policy
framework.
• The order option takes precedence over the seq sequence-number.
• If sequence-number is not configured, then rules with the same order value are ordered
according to their configuration order.
• If the sequence-number is configured, then the sequence-number is used as a tie breaker for
rules with the same order.
When you use the log option, CP processor logs details about the packets that match. Depending on
how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these
packets’ details.

Note: When ACL logging and byte counters are configured simultaneously, byte counters
may display an incorrect value. Configure packet counters with logging instead.

Related
deny Configure a filter to drop packets.
Commands
permit Configure a filter to forward packets.
seq Assign a sequence number to a deny or permit filter in an IP access list while creating the
filter.

200 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

Extended IP ACL Commands
When an ACL is created without any rule and then applied to an interface, ACL behavior reflects an
implicit permit.

The following commands configure extended IP ACLs, which in addition to the IP address also
examine the packet’s protocol type.

c and s platforms (except the S60) support Ingress IP ACLs only.

The supports both Ingress and Egress IP ACLs.

• deny
• deny arp
• deny ether-type
• deny icmp
• deny tcp
• deny udp
• ip access-list extended
• permit
• permit arp
• permit ether-type
• permit icmp
• permit tcp
• permit udp
• resequence access-list
• resequence prefix-list ipv4
• seq arp
• seq ether-type
• seq
Note: See also Commands Common to all ACL Types and Common IP ACL Commands.

deny
ces Configure a filter that drops IP packets meeting the filter criteria.

Syntax deny {ip | ip-protocol-number} {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any |
host ip-address} [count [byte] | log] [dscp value] [order] [monitor] [fragments]

To remove this filter, you have two choices:

• Use the no seq sequence-number command syntax if you know the filter’s sequence number or
• Use the no deny {ip | ip-protocol-number} {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination
mask | any | host ip-address} command.

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 201

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ip Enter the keyword ip to configure a generic IP access list. The keyword ip

specifies that the access list will deny all IP protocols.
ip-protocol-number Enter a number from 0 to 255 to deny based on the protocol identified in the IP
protocol header.
source Enter the IP address of the network or host from which the packets were sent.
mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when
specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous.
any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter.
host ip-address Enter the keyword host followed by the IP address to specify a host IP
address.
destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent.
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the
filter.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter.
log (OPTIONAL, E-Series only) Enter the keyword log to enter ACL matches in
the log.
dscp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dcsp to match to the IP DCSCP values.
order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the
ACL entry.
Range: 0-254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower
order numbers have a higher priority)
Default: If the order keyword is not used, the ACLs have the lowest order by
default (255).
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the
traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule
will be applied to the monitored interface. For details, see the section
“Flow-based Monitoring” in the Port Monitoring chapter of the FTOS
Configuration Guide.
fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Add DSCP value for ACL matching.
Version 8.2.1.0 Allows ACL control of fragmented packets for IP (Layer 3) ACLs.
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Added support for non-contiguous mask and added the monitor option.
Version 6.5.10 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry.

Usage The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. See the “Quality of Service”
Information chapter of the FTOS Configuration Guide for more information.

202 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

 When you use the log option, CP processor logs details about the packets that match. Depending on
how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these
packets’ details.

The C-Series and S-Series cannot count both packets and bytes, so when you enter the count byte
options, only bytes are incremented.

The monitor option is relevant in the context of flow-based monitoring only. See the Chapter 31, Port
Monitoring.

Note: When ACL logging and byte counters are configured simultaneously, byte counters
may display an incorrect value. Configure packet counters with logging instead.

Related
deny tcp Assign a filter to deny TCP packets.
Commands
deny udp Assign a filter to deny UDP packets.
ip access-list extended Create an extended ACL.

deny arp
e Configure an egress filter that drops ARP packets on egress ACL supported line cards (see your line
card documentation).

Syntax deny arp {destination-mac-address mac-address-mask | any} vlan vlan-id {ip-address | any |
opcode code-number} [count [byte] | log] [order] [monitor]

To remove this filter, use one of the following:

• Use the no seq sequence-number command syntax if you know the filter’s sequence number or
• Use the no deny arp {destination-mac-address mac-address-mask | any} vlan vlan-id
{ip-address | any | opcode code-number} command.

Parameters
destination-mac-address Enter a MAC address and mask in the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
mac-address-mask For the MAC address mask, specify which bits in the MAC address must
match.
The MAC ACL supports an inverse mask, therefore, a mask of
ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff allows entries that do not match and a mask of
00:00:00:00:00:00 only allows entries that match exactly.
any Enter the keyword any to match and drop any ARP traffic on the
interface.
vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID to filter traffic
associated with a specific VLAN.
Range: 1 to 4094, 1-2094 for ExaScale (can used IDs 1-4094)
To filter all VLAN traffic specify VLAN 1.
ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D) as the target IP
address of the ARP.
opcode code-number Enter the keyword opcode followed by the number of the ARP opcode.
Range: 1 to 23.
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by
the filter.

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 203

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the
filter.
log (OPTIONAL, E-Series only) Enter the keyword log to have the
information kept in an ACL log file.
order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for
the ACL entry.
Range: 0-254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest;
lower order numbers have a higher priority)
Default: If the order keyword is not used, the ACLs have the lowest
order by default (255).
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing
the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating
the rule will be applied to the monitored interface. For details, see the
section “Flow-based Monitoring” in the Port Monitoring chapter of the
FTOS Configuration Guide.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST

Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Allows ACL control of fragmented packets for IP (Layer 3) ACLs.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.4.1.0 Added monitor option
Version 6.5.10 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry.

Usage The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. See the “Quality of Service”
Information chapter of the FTOS Configuration Guide for more information.

The monitor option is relevant in the context of flow-based monitoring only. See Chapter 31, Port
Monitoring.

When you use the log option, CP processor logs details about the packets that match. Depending on
how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these
packets’ details.

You cannot include IP, TCP or UDP (Layer 3) filters in an ACL configured with ARP or Ether-type
(Layer 2) filters. Apply Layer 2 ACLs (ARP and Ether-type) to Layer 2 interfaces only.

Note: When ACL logging and byte counters are configured simultaneously, byte counters
may display an incorrect value. Configure packet counters with logging instead.

deny ether-type
e Configure an egress filter that drops specified types of Ethernet packets on egress ACL supported line
cards (see your line card documentation).

Syntax deny ether-type protocol-type-number {destination-mac-address mac-address-mask | any} vlan

vlan-id {source-mac-address mac-address-mask | any} [count [byte] | log] [order] [monitor]

204 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

 To remove this filter, use one of the following:
• Use the no seq sequence-number command syntax if you know the filter’s sequence number or
• Use the no deny ether-type protocol-type-number {destination-mac-address
mac-address-mask | any} vlan vlan-id {source-mac-address mac-address-mask | any}
command.

Parameters
protocol-type-number Enter a number from 600 to FFFF as the specific Ethernet type traffic to
drop.
destination-mac-address Enter a MAC address and mask in the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
mac-address-mask For the MAC address mask, specify which bits in the MAC address must
match.
The MAC ACL supports an inverse mask, therefore, a mask of
ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff allows entries that do not match and a mask of
00:00:00:00:00:00 only allows entries that match exactly.
any Enter the keyword any to match and drop specific Ethernet traffic on the
interface.
vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID to filter traffic
associated with a specific VLAN.
Range: 1 to 4094, 1-2094 for ExaScale (can used IDs 1-4094)
To filter all VLAN traffic specify VLAN 1.
source-mac-address Enter a MAC address and mask in the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
mac-address-mask For the MAC address mask, specify which bits in the MAC address must
match.
The MAC ACL supports an inverse mask, therefore, a mask of
ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff allows entries that do not match and a mask of
00:00:00:00:00:00 only allows entries that match exactly.
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by
the filter.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the
filter.
log (OPTIONAL, E-Series only) Enter the keyword log to have the
information kept in an ACL log file.
order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for
the ACL entry.
Range: 0-254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest;
lower order numbers have a higher priority)
Default: If the order keyword is not used, the ACLs have the lowest
order by default (255).
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing
the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating
the rule will be applied to the monitored interface. For details, see the
section “Flow-based Monitoring” in the Port Monitoring chapter of the
FTOS Configuration Guide.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST

Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Allows ACL control of fragmented packets for IP (Layer 3) ACLs.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 205

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 7.4.1.0 Added monitor option

Version 6.5.10 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry.

Usage The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. See the “Quality of Service”
Information chapter of the FTOS Configuration Guide for more information.

When you use the log option, CP processor logs details about the packets that match. Depending on
how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these
packets’ details.

The monitor option is relevant in the context of flow-based monitoring only. See Chapter 31, Port
Monitoring.

You cannot include IP, TCP or UDP (Layer 3) filters in an ACL configured with ARP or Ether-type
(Layer 2) filters. Apply Layer 2 ACLs (ARP and Ether-type) to Layer 2 interfaces only.

Note: When ACL logging and byte counters are configured simultaneously, byte counters
may display an incorrect value. Configure packet counters with logging instead.

deny icmp
e Configure a filter to drop all or specific ICMP messages.

Syntax deny icmp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address}
[dscp] [message-type] [count [byte] | log] [order] [monitor] [fragments]

To remove this filter, you have two choices:

• Use the no seq sequence-number command syntax if you know the filter’s sequence number or
• Use the no deny icmp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host
ip-address} command.

Parameters
source Enter the IP address of the network or host from which the packets were sent.
mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in
A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous.
any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter.
host ip-address Enter the keyword host followed by the IP address to specify a host IP address.
destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent.
dscp Enter this keyword to deny a packet based on DSCP value.
Range: 0-63
message-type (OPTIONAL) Enter an ICMP message type, either with the type (and code, if
necessary) numbers or with the name of the message type (ICMP message types are
listed in Table 9-2).
Range: 0 to 255 for ICMP type; 0 to 255 for ICMP code
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter.
log (OPTIONAL, E-Series only) Enter the keyword log to have the information kept in
an ACL log file.

206 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

 order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL
entry.
Range: 0-254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower order
numbers have a higher priority)
Default: If the order keyword is not used, the ACLs have the lowest order by default
(255).
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that
you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule will be applied to
the monitored interface. For details, see the section “Flow-based Monitoring” in the
Port Monitoring chapter of the FTOS Configuration Guide.
fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments.

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST

Command
Version 8.3.1.0 Added dscp keyword.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Allows ACL control of fragmented packets for IP (Layer 3) ACLs.
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.4.1.0 Added support for non-contiguous mask and added the monitor option.
Version 6.5.10 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry.

Usage The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. See the “Quality of Service”
Information chapter of the FTOS Configuration Guide for more information.

When you use the log option, CP processor logs details about the packets that match. Depending on
how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these
packets’ details.

The monitor option is relevant in the context of flow-based monitoring only. See Chapter 31, Port
Monitoring.

Note: When ACL logging and byte counters are configured simultaneously, byte counters
may display an incorrect value. Configure packet counters with logging instead.

Table 9-2 lists the keywords displayed in the CLI help and their corresponding ICMP Message Type
Name.

Table 9-2. ICMP Message Type Keywords

Keyword ICMP Message Type Name

administratively-prohibited Administratively prohibited
alternate-address Alternate host address
conversion-error Datagram conversion error
dod-host-prohibited Host prohibited
dod-net-prohibited Net prohibited
echo Echo
echo-reply Echo reply

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 207

 Table 9-2. ICMP Message Type Keywords
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Keyword ICMP Message Type Name

general-parameter-problem Parameter problem
host-isolated Host isolated
host-precedence-unreachable Host unreachable for precedence
host-redirect Host redirect
host-tos-redirect Host redirect for TOS
host-tos-unreachable Host unreachable for TOS
host-unknown Host unknown
host-unreachable Host unreachable
information-reply Information replies
information-request Information requests
mask-reply Mask replies
mask-request Mask requests
mobile-redirect Mobile host redirect
net-redirect Network redirect
net-tos-redirect Network redirect for TOS
net-tos-unreachable Network unreachable for TOS
net-unreachable Network unreachable
network-unknown Network unknown
no-room-for-option Parameter required but no room
option-missing Parameter required but not present
packet-too-big Fragmentation needed and DF set
parameter-problem All parameter problems
port-unreachable Port unreachable
precedence-unreachable Precedence cutoff
protocol-unreachable Protocol unreachable
reassembly-timeout Reassembly timeout
redirect All redirects
router-advertisement Router discovery advertisements
router-solicitation Router discovery solicitations
source-quench Source quenches
source-route-failed Source route failed
time-exceeded All time exceeded
timestamp-reply Timestamp replies
timestamp-request Timestamp requests
traceroute Traceroute
ttl-exceeded TTL exceeded
unreachable All unreachable

208 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

deny tcp
ces Configure a filter that drops TCP packets meeting the filter criteria.

Syntax deny tcp {source mask | any | host ip-address} [bit] [operator port [port]] {destination mask |
any | host ip-address} [dscp] [bit] [operator port [port]] [count [byte] | log] [order] [monitor]
[fragments]

To remove this filter, you have two choices:

• Use the no seq sequence-number command syntax if you know the filter’s sequence number or
• Use the no deny tcp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host
ip-address} command.

Parameters
source Enter the IP address of the network or host from which the packets were sent.
mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when
specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous.
any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter.
host ip-address Enter the keyword host followed by the IP address to specify a host IP address.
dscp Enter this keyword to deny a packet based on DSCP value.
Range: 0-63
bit Enter a flag or combination of bits:
ack: acknowledgement field
fin: finish (no more data from the user)
psh: push function
rst: reset the connection
syn: synchronize sequence numbers
urg: urgent field
operator (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following logical operand:
• eq = equal to
• neq = not equal to
• gt = greater than
• lt = less than
• range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port
command parameter.
port port Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if using the
range logical operand.
Range: 0 to 65535.
The following list includes some common TCP port numbers:
• 23 = Telnet
• 20 and 21 = FTP
• 25 = SMTP
• 169 = SNMP
destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent.
mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when
specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous.
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the
filter.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter.

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 209

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

log (OPTIONAL, E-Series only) Enter the keyword log to enter ACL matches in
the log. Supported on Jumbo-enabled line cards only.
order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the
ACL entry.
Range: 0-254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower
order numbers have a higher priority)
Default: If the order keyword is not used, the ACLs have the lowest order by
default (255).
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the
traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule
will be applied to the monitored interface. For details, see the section
“Flow-based Monitoring” in the Port Monitoring chapter of the FTOS
Configuration Guide.
fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Added dscp keyword.
Version 8.2.1.0 Allows ACL control of fragmented packets for IP (Layer 3) ACLs.
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Added support for non-contiguous mask and added the monitor option. Deprecated
established keyword.
Version 6.5.10 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry.

Usage The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. See the “Quality of Service”
Information chapter of the FTOS Configuration Guide for more information.

When you use the log option, CP processor logs details about the packets that match. Depending on
how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these
packets’ details.

The C-Series and S-Series cannot count both packets and bytes, so when you enter the count byte
options, only bytes are incremented.

The monitor option is relevant in the context of flow-based monitoring only. See Chapter 31, Port
Monitoring.

Note: When ACL logging and byte counters are configured simultaneously, byte counters
may display an incorrect value. Configure packet counters with logging instead.

Most ACL rules require one entry in the CAM. However, rules with TCP and UDP port operators (gt,
lt, range) may require more than one entry. The range of ports is configured in the CAM based on
bitmask boundaries; the space required depends on exactly what ports are included in the range.

210 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

 For example, an ACL rule with TCP port range 4000 - 8000 uses 8 entries in the CAM:
Rule# Data Mask From To #Covered

1 0000111110100000 1111111111100000 4000 4031 32

2 0000111111000000 1111111111000000 4032 4095 64
3 0001000000000000 1111100000000000 4096 6143 2048
4 0001100000000000 1111110000000000 6144 7167 1024
5 0001110000000000 1111111000000000 7168 7679 512
6 0001111000000000 1111111100000000 7680 7935 256
7 0001111100000000 1111111111000000 7936 7999 64
8 0001111101000000 1111111111111111 8000 8000 1

Total Ports: 4001

But an ACL rule with TCP port lt 1023 takes only one entry in the CAM:

Rule# Data Mask From To #Covered

1 0000000000000000 1111110000000000 0 1023 1024

Total Ports: 1024

Related
deny Assign a filter to deny IP traffic.
Commands
deny udp Assign a filter to deny UDP traffic.

deny udp
ces Configure a filter to drop UDP packets meeting the filter criteria.

Syntax deny udp {source mask | any | host ip-address} [operator port [port]] {destination mask | any |
host ip-address} [dscp] [operator port [port]] [count [byte] | log] [order] [monitor]
[fragments]

To remove this filter, you have two choices:

• Use the no seq sequence-number command syntax if you know the filter’s sequence number or
• Use the no deny udp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host
ip-address} command.

Parameters
source Enter the IP address of the network or host from which the packets were sent.
mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in
A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous.
any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter.
host ip-address Enter the keyword host followed by the IP address to specify a host IP address.
dscp Enter this keyword to deny a packet based on DSCP value.
Range: 0-63

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 211

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

operator (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following logical operand:

• eq = equal to
• neq = not equal to
• gt = greater than
• lt = less than
• range = inclusive range of ports
port port (OPTIONAL) Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if
using the range logical operand.
Range: 0 to 65535
destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent.
mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in
A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous.
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter.
log (OPTIONAL, E-Series only) Enter the keyword log to enter ACL matches in the log.
Supported on Jumbo-enabled line cards only.
order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL
entry.
Range: 0-254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower order
numbers have a higher priority)
Default: If the order keyword is not used, the ACLs have the lowest order by
default (255).
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic
that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule will be
applied to the monitored interface. For details, see the section “Flow-based
Monitoring” in the Port Monitoring chapter of the FTOS Configuration Guide.
fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments.

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Added dscp keyword.
Version 8.2.1.0 Allows ACL control of fragmented packets for IP (Layer 3) ACLs.
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Added support for non-contiguous mask and added the monitor option.
Version 6.5.10 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry.

Usage The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. See the “Quality of Service”
Information chapter of the FTOS Configuration Guide for more information.

When you use the log option, CP processor logs details about the packets that match. Depending on
how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these
packets’ details.

212 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

 The C-Series and S-Series cannot count both packets and bytes, so when you enter the count byte
options, only bytes are incremented.

The monitor option is relevant in the context of flow-based monitoring only. See the Chapter 31, Port
Monitoring.

Note: When ACL logging and byte counters are configured simultaneously, byte counters
may display an incorrect value. Configure packet counters with logging instead.

Most ACL rules require one entry in the CAM. However, rules with TCP and UDP port operators (gt,
lt, range) may require more than one entry. The range of ports is configured in the CAM based on
bitmask boundaries; the space required depends on exactly what ports are included in the range.

For example, an ACL rule with TCP port range 4000 - 8000 will use 8 entries in the CAM:
Rule# Data Mask From To #Covered

1 0000111110100000 1111111111100000 4000 4031 32

2 0000111111000000 1111111111000000 4032 4095 64
3 0001000000000000 1111100000000000 4096 6143 2048
4 0001100000000000 1111110000000000 6144 7167 1024
5 0001110000000000 1111111000000000 7168 7679 512
6 0001111000000000 1111111100000000 7680 7935 256
7 0001111100000000 1111111111000000 7936 7999 64
8 0001111101000000 1111111111111111 8000 8000 1

Total Ports: 4001

But an ACL rule with TCP port lt 1023 takes only one entry in the CAM:

Rule# Data Mask From To #Covered

1 0000000000000000 1111110000000000 0 1023 1024

Total Ports: 1024

Related
deny Assign a deny filter for IP traffic.
Commands
deny tcp Assign a deny filter for TCP traffic.

ip access-list extended
ces Name (or select) an extended IP access list (IP ACL) based on IP addresses or protocols.

Syntax ip access-list extended access-list-name

To delete an access list, use the no ip access-list extended access-list-name command.

Parameters
access-list-name Enter a string up to 140 characters long as the access list name.

Defaults All access lists contain an implicit “deny any”; that is, if no match occurs, the packet is dropped.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 213

 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.

History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to
16 characters long.
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage The number of entries allowed per ACL is hardware-dependent. Refer to your line card documentation
Information for detailed specification on entries allowed per ACL.

Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16 characters long.

Example Figure 9-5. Command Example: ip access-list extended

FTOS(conf)#ip access-list extended TESTListEXTEND
FTOS(config-ext-nacl)#

Related
ip access-list standard Configure a standard IP access list.
Commands
show config Display the current configuration.

permit
ces Configure a filter to pass IP packets meeting the filter criteria.

Syntax permit {ip | ip-protocol-number} {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any |
host ip-address} [count [byte] | log] [dscp value] [order] [monitor] [fragments]

To remove this filter, you have two choices:

• Use the no seq sequence-number command syntax if you know the filter’s sequence number or
• Use the no deny {ip | ip-protocol-number} {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination
mask | any | host ip-address} command.

Parameters
ip Enter the keyword ip to configure a generic IP access list. The keyword ip
specifies that the access list will permit all IP protocols.
ip-protocol-number Enter a number from 0 to 255 to permit based on the protocol identified in the
IP protocol header.
source Enter the IP address of the network or host from which the packets were sent.
mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when
specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous.
any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter.
host ip-address Enter the keyword host followed by the IP address to specify a host IP
address.
destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent.
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the
filter.

214 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

 byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter.
log (OPTIONAL, E-Series only) Enter the keyword log to enter ACL matches in
the log.
dscp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dcsp to match to the IP DCSCP values.
order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS order of priority
for the ACL entry.
Range: 0-254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower
order numbers have a higher priority)
Default: If the order keyword is not used, the ACLs have the lowest order by
default (255).
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the
traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule
will be applied to the monitored interface. For details, see the section
“Flow-based Monitoring” in the Port Monitoring chapter of the FTOS
Configuration Guide.
fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Add DSCP value for ACL matching.
Version 8.2.1.0 Allows ACL control of fragmented packets for IP (Layer 3) ACLs.
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Added support for non-contiguous mask and added the monitor option.
Version 6.5.10 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry.

Usage The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. See the “Quality of Service”
Information chapter of the FTOS Configuration Guide for more information.

When you use the log option, CP processor logs details about the packets that match. Depending on
how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these
packets’ details.

The C-Series and S-Series cannot count both packets and bytes, so when you enter the count byte
options, only bytes are incremented.

The monitor option is relevant in the context of flow-based monitoring only. See the Chapter 31, Port
Monitoring.

Note: When ACL logging and byte counters are configured simultaneously, byte counters
may display an incorrect value. Configure packet counters with logging instead.

Related
ip access-list extended Create an extended ACL.
Commands

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 215

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

permit tcp Assign a permit filter for TCP packets.

permit udp Assign a permit filter for UDP packets.

permit arp
e Configure a filter that forwards ARP packets meeting this criteria.This command is supported only on
12-port GE line cards with SFP optics; refer to your line card documentation for specifications.

Syntax permit arp {destination-mac-address mac-address-mask | any} vlan vlan-id {ip-address | any |
opcode code-number} [count [byte] | log] [order] [monitor] [fragments]

To remove this filter, use one of the following:

• Use the no seq sequence-number command syntax if you know the filter’s sequence number or
• Use the no permit arp {destination-mac-address mac-address-mask | any} vlan vlan-id
{ip-address | any | opcode code-number} command.

Parameters
destination-mac-address Enter a MAC address and mask in the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
mac-address-mask For the MAC address mask, specify which bits in the MAC address must
match.
The MAC ACL supports an inverse mask, therefore, a mask of ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
allows entries that do not match and a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 only
allows entries that match exactly.
any Enter the keyword any to match and drop any ARP traffic on the interface.
vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID to filter traffic associated
with a specific VLAN.
Range: 1 to 4094, 1-2094 for ExaScale (can used IDs 1-4094)
To filter all VLAN traffic specify VLAN 1.
ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D) as the target IP
address of the ARP.
opcode code-number Enter the keyword opcode followed by the number of the ARP opcode.
Range: 1 to 16.
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the
filter.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter.
log (OPTIONAL, E-Series only) Enter the keyword log to have the information
kept in an ACL log file.
order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the
ACL entry.
Range: 0-254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower
order numbers have a higher priority)
Default: If the order keyword is not used, the ACLs have the lowest order
by default (255).
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the
traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the
rule will be applied to the monitored interface. For details, see the section
“Flow-based Monitoring” in the Port Monitoring chapter of the FTOS
Configuration Guide.
fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments.

216 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

 Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST

Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Allows ACL control of fragmented packets for IP (Layer 3) ACLs.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.4.1.0 Added support for non-contiguous mask and added the monitor option.
Version 6.5.10 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry.

Usage The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. See the “Quality of Service”
Information chapter of the FTOS Configuration Guide for more information.

When you use the log option, CP processor logs details about the packets that match. Depending on
how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these
packets’ details.

The monitor option is relevant in the context of flow-based monitoring only. See the Chapter 31, Port
Monitoring.

You cannot include IP, TCP or UDP filters in an ACL configured with ARP filters.

Note: When ACL logging and byte counters are configured simultaneously, byte counters
may display an incorrect value. Configure packet counters with logging instead.

permit ether-type
e Configure a filter that allows traffic with specified types of Ethernet packets. This command is
supported only on 12-port GE line cards with SFP optics; refer to your line card documentation for
specifications.

Syntax permit ether-type protocol-type-number {destination-mac-address mac-address-mask | any}

vlan vlan-id {source-mac-address mac-address-mask | any} [count [byte] | log] [order]
[monitor]

To remove this filter, use one of the following:

• Use the no seq sequence-number command syntax if you know the filter’s sequence number or
• Use the no permit ether-type protocol-type-number {destination-mac-address
mac-address-mask | any} vlan vlan-id {source-mac-address mac-address-mask | any}
command.

Parameters
protocol-type-number Enter a number from 600 to FFF as the specific Ethernet type traffic to drop.
destination-mac-address Enter a MAC address and mask in the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
mac-address-mask For the MAC address mask, specify which bits in the MAC address must
match.
The MAC ACL supports an inverse mask, therefore, a mask of ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
allows entries that do not match and a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 only allows
entries that match exactly.
any Enter the keyword any to match and drop specific Ethernet traffic on the
interface.

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 217

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID to filter traffic associated
with a specific VLAN.
Range: 1 to 4094, 1-2094 for ExaScale (can used IDs 1-4094)
To filter all VLAN traffic specify VLAN 1.
source-mac-address Enter a MAC address and mask in the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
mac-address-mask For the MAC address mask, specify which bits in the MAC address must
match.
The MAC ACL supports an inverse mask, therefore, a mask of ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
allows entries that do not match and a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 only allows
entries that match exactly.
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the
filter.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter.
log (OPTIONAL, E-Series only) Enter the keyword log to have the information
kept in an ACL log file.
order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the
ACL entry.
Range: 0-254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower
order numbers have a higher priority)
Default: If the order keyword is not used, the ACLs have the lowest order
by default (255).
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the
traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule
will be applied to the monitored interface. For details, see the section
“Flow-based Monitoring” in the Port Monitoring chapter of the FTOS
Configuration Guide.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST

Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Allows ACL control of fragmented packets for IP (Layer 3) ACLs.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.4.1.0 Added monitor option
Version 6.5.10 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry.

Usage The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. See the “Quality of Service”
Information chapter of the FTOS Configuration Guide for more information.

When you use the log option, CP processor logs details about the packets that match. Depending on
how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these
packets’ details.

The monitor option is relevant in the context of the flow-based monitoring feature only. See
Chapter 31, Port Monitoring.

You cannot include IP, TCP or UDP filters in an ACL configured with ARP filters.

Note: When ACL logging and byte counters are configured simultaneously, byte counters
may display an incorrect value. Configure packet counters with logging instead.

218 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

permit icmp
e Configure a filter to allow all or specific ICMP messages.

Syntax permit icmp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address}
[dscp] [message-type] [count [byte] | log] [order] [monitor] [fragments]
To remove this filter, you have two choices:
• Use the no seq sequence-number command syntax if you know the filter’s sequence number or
• Use the no permit icmp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host
ip-address} command.

Parameters
source Enter the IP address of the network or host from which the packets were sent.
mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in
A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous.
any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter.
host ip-address Enter the keyword host followed by the IP address to specify a host IP address.
destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent.
dscp Enter this keyword to deny a packet based on DSCP value.
Range: 0-63
message-type (OPTIONAL) Enter an ICMP message type, either with the type (and code, if
necessary) numbers or with the name of the message type (ICMP message types are
listed in Table 9-2).
Range: 0 to 255 for ICMP type; 0 to 255 for ICMP code
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter.
log (OPTIONAL, E-Series only) Enter the keyword log to have the information kept in
an ACL log file.
order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL
entry.
Range: 0-254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower order
numbers have a higher priority)
Default: If the order keyword is not used, the ACLs have the lowest order by default
(255).
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor to monitor traffic on the monitoring
interface specified in the flow-based monitoring session along with the filter
operation.
fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments.

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes CONFIGURATION-STANDARD-ACCESS-LIST

Command
Version 8.3.1.0 Added dscp keyword.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Allows ACL control of fragmented packets for IP (Layer 3) ACLs.
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.4.1.0 Added support for non-contiguous mask and added the monitor option.
Version 6.5.10 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry.

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 219

 Usage The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. See the “Quality of Service”
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Information chapter of the FTOS Configuration Guide for more information.

When you use the log option, CP processor logs details about the packets that match. Depending on
how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these
packets’ details.

The monitor option is relevant in the context of the flow-based monitoring feature only. See
Chapter 31, Port Monitoring.

Note: When ACL logging and byte counters are configured simultaneously, byte counters
may display an incorrect value. Configure packet counters with logging instead.

permit tcp
ces Configure a filter to pass TCP packets meeting the filter criteria.

Syntax permit tcp {source mask | any | host ip-address} [bit] [operator port [port]] {destination mask |
any | host ip-address} [bit] [dscp] [operator port [port]] [count [byte] | log] [order] [monitor]
[fragments]

To remove this filter, you have two choices:

• Use the no seq sequence-number command syntax if you know the filter’s sequence number or
• Use the no permit tcp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host
ip-address} command.

Parameters
source Enter the IP address of the network or host from which the packets were sent.
mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in
A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous.
any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter.
host ip-address Enter the keyword host followed by the IP address to specify a host IP address.
bit Enter a flag or combination of bits:
ack: acknowledgement field
fin: finish (no more data from the user)
psh: push function
rst: reset the connection
syn: synchronize sequence numbers
urg: urgent field
dscp Enter this keyword to deny a packet based on DSCP value.
Range: 0-63
operator (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following logical operand:
• eq = equal to
• neq = not equal to
• gt = greater than
• lt = less than
• range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two port for the port
parameter.)

220 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

 port port Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if using the range
logical operand.
Range: 0 to 65535.
The following list includes some common TCP port numbers:
23 = Telnet
20 and 21 = FTP
25 = SMTP
169 = SNMP
destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent.
mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in
A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous.
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter.
log (OPTIONAL, E-Series only) Enter the keyword log to enter ACL matches in the log.
order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL
entry.
Range: 0-254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower order
numbers have a higher priority)
Default: If the order keyword is not used, the ACLs have the lowest order by
default (255).
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic
that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule will be
applied to the monitored interface. For details, see the section “Flow-based
Monitoring” in the Port Monitoring chapter of the FTOS Configuration Guide.
fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Added dscp keyword.
Version 8.2.1.0 Allows ACL control of fragmented packets for IP (Layer 3) ACLs.
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Added support for non-contiguous mask and added the monitor option. Deprecated
established keyword.
Version 6.5.10 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry.

Usage The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. See the Quality of Service
Information chapter of the FTOS Configuration Guide for more information.

Note: When ACL logging and byte counters are configured simultaneously, byte counters
may display an incorrect value. Configure packet counters with logging instead.

The monitor option is relevant in the context of the flow-based monitoring feature only. See
Chapter 31, Port Monitoring.

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 221

 When you use the log option, CP processor logs details about the packets that match. Depending on
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these
packets’ details.

The C-Series and S-Series cannot count both packets and bytes, so when you enter the count byte
options, only bytes are incremented.

Most ACL rules require one entry in the CAM. However, rules with TCP and UDP port operators (gt,
lt, range) may require more than one entry. The range of ports is configured in the CAM based on
bitmask boundaries; the space required depends on exactly what ports are included in the range.

For example, an ACL rule with TCP port range 4000 - 8000 uses 8 entries in the CAM:
Rule# Data Mask From To #Covered

1 0000111110100000 1111111111100000 4000 4031 32

2 0000111111000000 1111111111000000 4032 4095 64
3 0001000000000000 1111100000000000 4096 6143 2048
4 0001100000000000 1111110000000000 6144 7167 1024
5 0001110000000000 1111111000000000 7168 7679 512
6 0001111000000000 1111111100000000 7680 7935 256
7 0001111100000000 1111111111000000 7936 7999 64
8 0001111101000000 1111111111111111 8000 8000 1

Total Ports: 4001

But an ACL rule with TCP port lt 1023 takes only one entry in the CAM:

Rule# Data Mask From To #Covered

1 0000000000000000 1111110000000000 0 1023 1024

Total Ports: 1024

Related
ip access-list extended Create an extended ACL.
Commands
permit Assign a permit filter for IP packets.
permit udp Assign a permit filter for UDP packets.

permit udp
ces Configure a filter to pass UDP packets meeting the filter criteria.

Syntax permit udp {source mask | any | host ip-address} [operator port [port]] {destination mask | any |
host ip-address} [dscp] [operator port [port]] [count [byte] | log] [order] [monitor]
[fragments]

To remove this filter, you have two choices:

• Use the no seq sequence-number command syntax if you know the filter’s sequence number or
• Use the no permit udp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host
ip-address} command.

222 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

 Parameters
source Enter the IP address of the network or host from which the packets were sent.
mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in
A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous.
any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter.
host ip-address Enter the keyword host followed by the IP address to specify a host IP address.
dscp Enter this keyword to deny a packet based on DSCP value.
Range: 0-63
operator (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following logical operand:
• eq = equal to
• neq = not equal to
• gt = greater than
• lt = less than
• range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port
parameter.)
port port (OPTIONAL) Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if
using the range logical operand.
Range: 0 to 65535
destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent.
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter.
log (OPTIONAL, E-Series only) Enter the keyword log to enter ACL matches in the log.
order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL
entry.
Range: 0-254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower order
numbers have a higher priority)
Default: If the order keyword is not used, the ACLs have the lowest order by
default (255).
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that
you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule will be applied to
the monitored interface. For details, see the section “Flow-based Monitoring” in the
Port Monitoring chapter of the FTOS Configuration Guide.
fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Added dscp keyword.
Version 8.2.1.0 Allows ACL control of fragmented packets for IP (Layer 3) ACLs.
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Added support for non-contiguous mask and added the monitor option.
Version 6.5.10 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry.

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 223

 Usage The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. See the Quality of Service
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Information chapter of the FTOS Configuration Guide for more information.

The monitor option is relevant in the context of the flow-based monitoring feature only. See
Chapter 31, Port Monitoring.

Note: When ACL logging and byte counters are configured simultaneously, byte counters
may display an incorrect value. Configure packet counters with logging instead.

When you use the log option, CP processor logs details about the packets that match. Depending on
how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these
packets’ details.

The C-Series and S-Series cannot count both packets and bytes, so when you enter the count byte
options, only bytes are incremented.

Most ACL rules require one entry in the CAM. However, rules with TCP and UDP port operators (gt,
lt, range) may require more than one entry. The range of ports is configured in the CAM based on
bitmask boundaries; the space required depends on exactly what ports are included in the range.

For example, an ACL rule with TCP port range 4000 - 8000 uses 8 entries in the CAM:
Rule# Data Mask From To #Covered

1 0000111110100000 1111111111100000 4000 4031 32

2 0000111111000000 1111111111000000 4032 4095 64
3 0001000000000000 1111100000000000 4096 6143 2048
4 0001100000000000 1111110000000000 6144 7167 1024
5 0001110000000000 1111111000000000 7168 7679 512
6 0001111000000000 1111111100000000 7680 7935 256
7 0001111100000000 1111111111000000 7936 7999 64
8 0001111101000000 1111111111111111 8000 8000 1

Total Ports: 4001

But an ACL rule with TCP port lt 1023 takes only one entry in the CAM:

Rule# Data Mask From To #Covered

1 0000000000000000 1111110000000000 0 1023 1024

Total Ports: 1024

Related
ip access-list extended Configure an extended ACL.
Commands
permit Assign a permit filter for IP packets.
permit tcp Assign a permit filter for TCP packets.

224 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

resequence access-list
ces Re-assign sequence numbers to entries of an existing access-list.

Syntax resequence access-list {ipv4 | mac} {access-list-name StartingSeqNum Step-to-Increment}

Parameters
ipv4 | mac Enter the keyword ipv4, or mac to identify the access list type to resequence.
access-list-name Enter the name of a configured IP access list, up to 140 characters.
StartingSeqNum Enter the starting sequence number to resequence.
Range: 0 - 4294967290
Step-to-Increment Enter the step to increment the sequence number.
Range: 1 - 4294967290

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names
are up to 16 characters long.
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage When all sequence numbers have been exhausted, this feature permits re-assigning new sequence
Information number to entries of an existing access-list.

Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16 characters long.

Related
resequence prefix-list ipv4 Resequence a prefix list
Commands

resequence prefix-list ipv4

ces Re-assign sequence numbers to entries of an existing prefix list.

Syntax resequence prefix-list ipv4 {prefix-list-name StartingSeqNum Step-to-increment}

Parameters
prefix-list-name Enter the name of configured prefix list, up to 140 characters long.
StartingSeqNum Enter the starting sequence number to resequence.
Range: 0 – 65535
Step-to-Increment Enter the step to increment the sequence number.
Range: 1 – 65535

Defaults No default values or behavior

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 225

 Command Modes EXEC
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names
are up to 16 characters long.
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage When all sequence numbers have been exhausted, this feature permits re-assigning new sequence
Information number to entries of an existing prefix list.

Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16 characters long.

Related
resequence access-list Resequence an access-list
Commands

seq arp
e Configure an egress filter with a sequence number that filters ARP packets meeting this criteria. This
command is supported only on 12-port GE line cards with SFP optics; refer to your line card
documentation for specifications.

Syntax seq sequence-number {deny | permit} arp {destination-mac-address mac-address-mask | any}

vlan vlan-id {ip-address | any | opcode code-number} [count [byte] | log] [order] [monitor]
To remove this filter, use the no seq sequence-number command.

Parameters
sequence-number Enter a number from 0 to 4294967290.
deny Enter the keyword deny to drop all traffic meeting the filter criteria.
permit Enter the keyword permit to forward all traffic meeting the filter criteria.
destination-mac-address Enter a MAC address and mask in the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
mac-address-mask For the MAC address mask, specify which bits in the MAC address must
match.
The MAC ACL supports an inverse mask, therefore, a mask of ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
allows entries that do not match and a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 only allows
entries that match exactly.
any Enter the keyword any to match and drop any ARP traffic on the interface.
vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID to filter traffic associated
with a specific VLAN.
Range: 1 to 4094, 1-2094 for ExaScale (can used IDs 1-4094)
To filter all VLAN traffic specify VLAN 1.
ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D) as the target IP
address of the ARP.
opcode code-number Enter the keyword opcode followed by the number of the ARP opcode.
Range: 1 to 16.
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the
filter.

226 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

 byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter.
log (OPTIONAL, E-Series only) Enter the keyword log to have the information
kept in an ACL log file.
order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the
ACL entry.
Range: 0-254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower
order numbers have a higher priority)
Default: If the order keyword is not used, the ACLs have the lowest order
by default (255).
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the
traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule
will be applied to the monitored interface. For details, see the section
“Flow-based Monitoring” in the Port Monitoring chapter of the FTOS
Configuration Guide.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST

Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Allows ACL control of fragmented packets for IP (Layer 3) ACLs.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.4.1.0 Added monitor option
Version 6.5.10 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry.

Usage The monitor option is relevant in the context of the flow-based monitoring feature only. See
Information Chapter 31, Port Monitoring.

When you use the log option, CP processor logs details about the packets that match. Depending on
how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these
packets’ details.

The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. The following applies:
• The seq sequence-number is applicable only in an ACL group.
• The order option works across ACL groups that have been applied on an interface via QoS policy
framework.
• The order option takes precedence over the seq sequence-number.
• If sequence-number is not configured, then rules with the same order value are ordered
according to their configuration order.
• If the sequence-number is configured, then the sequence-number is used as a tie breaker for
rules with the same order.
Note: When ACL logging and byte counters are configured simultaneously, byte counters
may display an incorrect value. Configure packet counters with logging instead.

You cannot include IP, TCP or UDP (Layer 3) filters in an ACL configured with ARP or Ether-type
(Layer 2) filters. Apply Layer 2 ACLs to interfaces in Layer 2 mode.

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 227

 seq ether-type
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

e Configure an egress filter with a specific sequence number that filters traffic with specified types of
Ethernet packets. This command is supported only on 12-port GE line cards with SFP optics; refer to
your line card documentation for specifications.

Syntax seq sequence-number {deny | permit} ether-type protocol-type-number

{destination-mac-address mac-address-mask | any} vlan vlan-id {source-mac-address
mac-address-mask | any} [count [byte] | log] [order] [monitor]
To remove this filter, use the no seq sequence-number command.

Parameters
sequence-number Enter a number from 0 to 4294967290.
deny Enter the keyword deny to drop all traffic meeting the filter criteria.
permit Enter the keyword permit to forward all traffic meeting the filter criteria.
protocol-type-number Enter a number from 600 to FFFF as the specific Ethernet type traffic to drop.
destination-mac-address Enter a MAC address and mask in the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
mac-address-mask For the MAC address mask, specify which bits in the MAC address must
match.
The MAC ACL supports an inverse mask, therefore, a mask of ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
allows entries that do not match and a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 only allows
entries that match exactly.
any Enter the keyword any to match and drop specific Ethernet traffic on the
interface.
vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID to filter traffic associated
with a specific VLAN.
Range: 1 to 4094, 1-2094 for ExaScale (can used IDs 1-4094)
To filter all VLAN traffic specify VLAN 1.
source-mac-address Enter a MAC address and mask in the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
mac-address-mask For the MAC address mask, specify which bits in the MAC address must
match.
The MAC ACL supports an inverse mask, therefore, a mask of ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
allows entries that do not match and a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 only allows
entries that match exactly.
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the
filter.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter.
log (OPTIONAL, E-Series only) Enter the keyword log to have the information
kept in an ACL log file.
order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the
ACL entry.
Range: 0-254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower
order numbers have a higher priority)
Default: If the order keyword is not used, the ACLs have the lowest order
by default (255).
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the
traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule
will be applied to the monitored interface. For details, see the section
“Flow-based Monitoring” in the Port Monitoring chapter of the FTOS
Configuration Guide.

228 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

 Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST

Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Allows ACL control of fragmented packets for IP (Layer 3) ACLs.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.4.1.0 Added monitor option
Version 6.5.10 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry.

Usage The monitor option is relevant in the context of the flow-based monitoring feature only. See
Information Chapter 31, Port Monitoring.

When you use the log option, CP processor logs details about the packets that match. Depending on
how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these
packets’ details.

The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. The following applies:
• The seq sequence-number is applicable only in an ACL group.
• The order option works across ACL groups that have been applied on an interface via QoS policy
framework.
• The order option takes precedence over the seq sequence-number.
• If sequence-number is not configured, then rules with the same order value are ordered
according to their configuration order.
• If the sequence-number is configured, then the sequence-number is used as a tie breaker for
rules with the same order.
Note: When ACL logging and byte counters are configured simultaneously, byte counters
may display an incorrect value. Configure packet counters with logging instead.

You cannot include IP, TCP or UDP (Layer 3) filters in an ACL configured with ARP or Ether-type
(Layer 2) filters. Apply Layer 2 filters to interfaces in Layer 2 mode.

seq
ces Assign a sequence number to a deny or permit filter in an extended IP access list while creating the
filter.

Syntax seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {ip-protocol-number | icmp | ip | tcp | udp}

{source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [operator port
[port]] [count [byte] | log] [dscp value] [order] [monitor] [fragments]
To delete a filter, use the no seq sequence-number command.

Parameters
sequence-number Enter a number from 0 to 4294967290.
deny Enter the keyword deny to configure a filter to drop packets meeting this condition.
permit Enter the keyword permit to configure a filter to forward packets meeting this
criteria.
ip-protocol-number Enter a number from 0 to 255 to filter based on the protocol identified in the IP
protocol header.
icmp Enter the keyword icmp to configure an ICMP access list filter.

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 229

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ip Enter the keyword ip to configure a generic IP access list. The keyword ip specifies
that the access list will permit all IP protocols.
tcp Enter the keyword tcp to configure a TCP access list filter.
udp Enter the keyword udp to configure a UDP access list filter.
source Enter the IP address of the network or host from which the packets were sent.
mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in
A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous.
any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter.
host ip-address Enter the keyword host followed by the IP address to specify a host IP address.
operator (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following logical operands:
• eq = equal to
• neq = not equal to
• gt = greater than
• lt = less than
• range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port
parameter.)
port port (OPTIONAL) Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if
using the range logical operand.
Range: 0 to 65535
The following list includes some common TCP port numbers:
• 23 = Telnet
• 20 and 21 = FTP
• 25 = SMTP
• 169 = SNMP
destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent.
message-type (OPTIONAL) Enter an ICMP message type, either with the type (and code, if
necessary) numbers or with the name of the message type (ICMP message types are
listed in Table 9-2).
Range: 0 to 255 for ICMP type; 0 to 255 for ICMP code
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter.
log (OPTIONAL, E-Series only) Enter the keyword log to enter ACL matches in the
log. Supported on Jumbo-enabled line cards only.
dscp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dcsp to match to the IP DCSCP values.
order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL
entry.
Range: 0-254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower order
numbers have a higher priority)
Default: If the order keyword is not used, the ACLs have the lowest order by
default (255).
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic
that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule will be
applied to the monitored interface. For details, see the section “Flow-based
Monitoring” in the Port Monitoring chapter of the FTOS Configuration Guide.
fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments.

Defaults Not configured

230 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

Command Modes CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Add DSCP value for ACL matching.
Version 8.2.1.0 Allows ACL control of fragmented packets for IP (Layer 3) ACLs.
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Added support for non-contiguous mask and added the monitor option. Deprecated
established keyword
Version 6.5.10 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry.

Usage The monitor option is relevant in the context of the flow-based monitoring feature only. See
Information Chapter 31, Port Monitoring.

When you use the log option, CP processor logs details about the packets that match. Depending on
how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these
packets’ details.

The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. The following applies:
• The seq sequence-number is applicable only in an ACL group.
• The order option works across ACL groups that have been applied on an interface via QoS policy
framework.
• The order option takes precedence over the seq sequence-number.
• If sequence-number is not configured, then rules with the same order value are ordered
according to their configuration order.
• If the sequence-number is configured, then the sequence-number is used as a tie breaker for
rules with the same order.
If the sequence-number is configured, then the sequence-number is used as a tie breaker for rules
with the same order.

Note: When ACL logging and byte counters are configured simultaneously, byte counters
may display an incorrect value. Configure packet counters with logging instead.

Related
deny Configure a filter to drop packets.
Commands
permit Configure a filter to forward packets.

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 231

 Common MAC Access List Commands
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

The following commands are available within both MAC ACL modes (Standard and Extended) and do
not have mode-specific options.
c and s platforms (except the S60) support Ingress MAC ACLs only.
The supports both Ingress and Egress MAC ACLs.

The following commands allow you to clear, display and assign MAC ACL configurations.
• clear counters mac access-group
• mac access-group
• show mac accounting access-list

clear counters mac access-group

ces Clear counters for all or a specific MAC ACL.

Syntax clear counters mac access-group [mac-list-name]

Parameters
mac-list-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of a configured MAC access list.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

mac access-group
ces Apply a MAC ACL to traffic entering or exiting an interface.

Syntax mac access-group access-list-name {in [vlan vlan-range] | out}

To delete a MAC access-group, use the no mac access-group mac-list-name command.

Parameters
access-list-name Enter the name of a configured MAC access list, up to 140 characters.
vlan vlan-range (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan followed a range of VLANs. Note that this
option is available only with the in keyword option.
Range: 1 to 4094, 1-2094 for ExaScale (can used IDs 1-4094)
in Enter the keyword in to configure the ACL to filter incoming traffic.
out Enter the keyword out to configure the ACL to filter outgoing traffic. Not
available on S-Series.

Defaults No default behavior or configuration

232 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to
16 characters long.
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage You can assign one ACL (standard or extended) to an interface.

Information
Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16 characters long.

Related
mac access-list standard Configure a standard MAC ACL.
Commands
mac access-list extended Configure an extended MAC ACL.

show mac accounting access-list

ces Display MAC access list configurations and counters (if configured).

Syntax show mac accounting access-list access-list-name interface interface in | out

Parameters
access-list-name Enter the name of a configured MAC ACL, up to 140 characters.
interface interface Enter the keyword interface followed by the one of the following keywords
and slot/port or number information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed
by a number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale and ExaScale.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/
port information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
in | out Identify whether ACL is applied ay Ingress (in) or egress (out) side.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to
16 characters long.
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 233

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series

pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 9-6. Command Example: show mac accounting access-list

FTOS#show mac accounting access-list mac-ext interface po 1

Extended mac access-list mac-ext on GigabitEthernet 0/11
seq 5 permit host 00:00:00:00:00:11 host 00:00:00:00:00:19 count (393794576 packets)
seq 10 deny host 00:00:00:00:00:21 host 00:00:00:00:00:29 count (89076777 packets)
seq 15 deny host 00:00:00:00:00:31 host 00:00:00:00:00:39 count (0 packets)
seq 20 deny host 00:00:00:00:00:41 host 00:00:00:00:00:49 count (0 packets)
seq 25 permit any any count (0 packets)
Extended mac access-list mac-ext on GigabitEthernet 0/12
seq 5 permit host 00:00:00:00:00:11 host 00:00:00:00:00:19 count (57589834 packets)
seq 10 deny host 00:00:00:00:00:21 host 00:00:00:00:00:29 count (393143077 packets)
seq 15 deny host 00:00:00:00:00:31 host 00:00:00:00:00:39 count (0 packets)
seq 20 deny host 00:00:00:00:00:41 host 00:00:00:00:00:49 count (0 packets)
seq 25 permit any any count (0 packets)
FTOS#

Related
show mac accounting destination Display destination counters for Layer 2 traffic (available on
Commands
physical interfaces only).

Standard MAC ACL Commands

When an access-list is created without any rule and then applied to an interface, ACL behavior reflects
implicit permit.
c and s platforms (except the S60 system) support Ingress MAC ACLs only.
The supports both Ingress and Egress MAC ACLs.

The following commands configure standard MAC ACLs:

• deny
• mac access-list standard
• permit
• seq
Note: See also Commands Common to all ACL Types and Common MAC Access List
Commands.

deny
ces Configure a filter to drop packets with a the MAC address specified.

Syntax deny {any | mac-source-address [mac-source-address-mask]} [count [byte]] [log] [monitor]

To remove this filter, you have two choices:
• Use the no seq sequence-number command syntax if you know the filter’s sequence number or
• Use the no deny {any | mac-source-address mac-source-address-mask} command.

234 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

 Parameters
any Enter the keyword any to specify that all traffic is subject to the
filter.
mac-source-address Enter a MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
mac-source-address-mask (OPTIONAL) Specify which bits in the MAC address must match. If
no mask is specified, a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 is applied (in
other words, the filter allows only MAC addresses that match).
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed
by the filter.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by
the filter.
log (OPTIONAL, E-Series only) Enter the keyword log to log the
packets.
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is
describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which
you are creating the rule will be applied to the monitored interface.
For details, see the section “Flow-based Monitoring” in the Port
Monitoring chapter of the FTOS Configuration Guide.

Defaults Not enabled.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-STANDARD

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Added monitor option
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Note: When ACL logging and byte counters are configured simultaneously, byte counters
may display an incorrect value. Configure packet counters with logging instead.

Usage When you use the log option, CP processor logs details about the packets that match. Depending on
Information how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these
packets’ details.

Related
permit Configure a MAC address filter to pass packets.
Commands
seq Configure a MAC address filter with a specified sequence number.

mac access-list standard

ces Name a new or existing MAC access control list (MAC ACL) and enter the MAC ACCESS LIST
mode to configure a standard MAC ACL. See Commands Common to all ACL Types and Common
MAC Access List Commands.

Syntax mac access-list standard mac-list-name

To delete a MAC access list, use the no mac access-list standard mac-list-name command.

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 235

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

mac-list-name Enter a text string as the name of the standard MAC access list (140 character
maximum).

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to
16 characters long.
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage FTOS supports one ingress and one egress MAC ACL per interface.
Information
Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16 characters long.

The number of entries allowed per ACL is hardware-dependent. Refer to your line card documentation
for detailed specification on entries allowed per ACL.

C-Series and S-Series support ingress ACLs only.

Example Figure 9-7. Command Example: mac-access-list standard

FTOS(conf)#mac-access-list access-list standard TestMAC
FTOS(config-std-macl)#?
deny Specify packets to reject
description List description
exit Exit from access-list configuration mode
no Negate a command or set its defaults
permit Specify packets to forward
remark Specify access-list entry remark
seq Sequence numbers
show Show Standard ACL configuration

permit
ces Configure a filter to forward packets from a specific source MAC address.

Syntax permit {any | mac-source-address [mac-source-address-mask]} [count [byte]] | [log]

[monitor]

To remove this filter, you have two choices:

• Use the no seq sequence-number command syntax if you know the filter’s sequence number or
• Use the no permit {any | mac-source-address mac-source-address-mask} command.

Parameters
any Enter the keyword any to forward all packets received with a MAC
address.
mac-source-address Enter a MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.

236 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

 mac-source-address-mask (OPTIONAL) Specify which bits in the MAC address must match. If
no mask is specified, a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 is applied (in other
words, the filter allows only MAC addresses that match).
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed
by the filter.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by
the filter.
log (OPTIONAL, E-Series only) Enter the keyword log to log the
packets.
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is
describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which
you are creating the rule will be applied to the monitored interface.
For details, see the section “Flow-based Monitoring” in the Port
Monitoring chapter of the FTOS Configuration Guide.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-STANDARD

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Note: When ACL logging and byte counters are configured simultaneously, byte counters
may display an incorrect value. Configure packet counters with logging instead.

Usage When you use the log option, CP processor logs details about the packets that match. Depending on
Information how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these
packets’ details.

Related
deny Configure a MAC ACL filter to drop packets.
Commands
seq Configure a MAC ACL filter with a specified sequence number.

seq
ces Assign a sequence number to a deny or permit filter in a MAC access list while creating the filter.

Syntax seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {any | mac-source-address [mac-source-address-mask]}

[count [byte]] [log] [monitor]
To remove this filter, use the no seq sequence-number command.

Parameters
sequence-number Enter a number between 0 and 65535.
deny Enter the keyword deny to configure a filter to drop packets meeting
this condition.
permit Enter the keyword permit to configure a filter to forward packets
meeting this criteria.

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 237

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

any Enter the keyword any to filter all packets.

mac-source-address Enter a MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
mac-source-address-mask (OPTIONAL) Specify which bits in the MAC address must match. If
no mask is specified, a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 is applied (in other
words, the filter allows only MAC addresses that match).
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed
by the filter.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by
the filter.
log (OPTIONAL, E-Series only) Enter the keyword log to log the
packets.
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is
describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which
you are creating the rule will be applied to the monitored interface.
For details, see the section “Flow-based Monitoring” in the Port
Monitoring chapter of the FTOS Configuration Guide.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-STANDARD

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Added monitor option
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Note: When ACL logging and byte counters are configured simultaneously, byte counters
may display an incorrect value. Configure packet counters with logging instead.

Usage When you use the log option, CP processor logs details about the packets that match. Depending on
Information how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these
packets’ details.

Related
deny Configure a filter to drop packets.
Commands
permit Configure a filter to forward packets.

238 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

Extended MAC ACL Commands
When an access-list is created without any rule and then applied to an interface, ACL behavior reflects
implicit permit.

c and s platforms (except the S60 system) support Ingress MAC ACLs only.

The supports both Ingress and Egress MAC ACLs.

The following commands configure Extended MAC ACLs.

• deny
• mac access-list extended
• permit
• seq
Note: See also Commands Common to all ACL Types and Common MAC Access List
Commands.

deny
ces Configure a filter to drop packets that match the filter criteria.

Syntax deny {any | host mac-address | mac-source-address mac-source-address-mask} {any | host

mac-address | mac-destination-address mac-destination-address-mask} [ethertype-operator]
[count [byte]] [log] [monitor]

To remove this filter, you have two choices:

• Use the no seq sequence-number command syntax if you know the filter’s sequence number or
• Use the no deny {any | host mac-address | mac-source-address mac-source-address-mask}
{any | host mac-address | mac-destination-address mac-destination-address-mask}
command.

Parameters
any Enter the keyword any to drop all packets.
host mac-address Enter the keyword host followed by a MAC address to drop
packets with that host address.
mac-source-address Enter the source MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
mac-source-address-mask Specify which bits in the MAC address must match.
The MAC ACL supports an inverse mask, therefore, a mask of
ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff allows entries that do not match and a mask of
00:00:00:00:00:00 only allows entries that match exactly.
mac-destination-address Enter the destination MAC address and mask in
nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
mac-destination-address-mask Specify which bits in the MAC address must match.
The MAC ACL supports an inverse mask, therefore, a mask of
ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff allows entries that do not match and a mask of
00:00:00:00:00:00 only allows entries that match exactly.

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 239

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ethertype operator (OPTIONAL) To filter based on protocol type, enter one of

the following Ethertypes:
• ev2 - is the Ethernet II frame format.
• llc - is the IEEE 802.3 frame format.
• snap - is the IEEE 802.3 SNAP frame format.
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets
processed by the filter.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes
processed by the filter.
log (OPTIONAL, E-Series only) Enter the keyword log to log the
packets.
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is
describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in
which you are creating the rule will be applied to the
monitored interface. For details, see the section “Flow-based
Monitoring” in the Port Monitoring chapter of the FTOS
Configuration Guide.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-EXTENDED

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Added monitor option
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Note: When ACL logging and byte counters are configured simultaneously, byte counters
may display an incorrect value. Configure packet counters with logging instead.

Usage When you use the log option, CP processor logs details about the packets that match. Depending on
Information how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these
packets’ details.

Related
permit Configure a filter to forward based on MAC addresses.
Commands
seq Configure a filter with specific sequence numbers.

mac access-list extended

ces Name a new or existing extended MAC access control list (extended MAC ACL).

Syntax mac access-list extended access-list-name

To delete a MAC access list, use the no mac access-list extended access-list-name command.

Parameters
access-list-name Enter a text string as the MAC access list name, up to 140 characters.

240 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

 Defaults No default configuration

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to
16 characters long.
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage The number of entries allowed per ACL is hardware-dependent. Refer to your line card documentation
Information for detailed specification on entries allowed per ACL.

Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16 characters long.

Example Figure 9-8. Command Example: mac-access-list extended

FTOS(conf)#mac-access-list access-list extended TestMATExt
FTOS(config-ext-macl)#remark 5 IPv4
FTOS(config-ext-macl)#seq 10 permit any any ev2 eq 800 count bytes
FTOS(config-ext-macl)#remark 15 ARP
FTOS(config-ext-macl)#seq 20 permit any any ev2 eq 806 count bytes
FTOS(config-ext-macl)#remark 25 IPv6
FTOS(config-ext-macl)#seq 30 permit any any ev2 eq 86dd count bytes
FTOS(config-ext-macl)#seq 40 permit any any count bytes
FTOS(config-ext-macl)#exit
FTOS(conf)#do show mac accounting access-list snickers interface g0/47 in

Extended mac access-list snickers on GigabitEthernet 0/47

seq 10 permit any any ev2 eq 800 count bytes (559851886 packets 191402152148
bytes)
seq 20 permit any any ev2 eq 806 count bytes (74481486 packets 5031686754
bytes)
seq 30 permit any any ev2 eq 86dd count bytes (7751519 packets 797843521 bytes)

Related
mac access-list standard Configure a standard MAC access list.
Commands
show mac accounting access-list Display MAC access list configurations and counters (if
configured).

permit
ces Configure a filter to pass packets matching the criteria specified.

Syntax permit {any | host mac-address | mac-source-address mac-source-address-mask} {any | host

mac-address | mac-destination-address mac-destination-address-mask} [ethertype operator]
[count [byte]] | [log] [monitor]

To remove this filter, you have two choices:

• Use the no seq sequence-number command syntax if you know the filter’s sequence number or
• Use the no permit {any | host mac-address | mac-source-address
mac-source-address-mask} {any | mac-destination-address mac-destination-address-mask}
command.

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 241

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

any Enter the keyword any to forward all packets.

host Enter the keyword host followed by a MAC address to
forward packets with that host address.
mac-source-address Enter the source MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
mac-source-address-mask Specify which bits in the MAC address must be matched.
The MAC ACL supports an inverse mask, therefore, a mask of
ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff allows entries that do not match and a mask of
00:00:00:00:00:00 only allows entries that match exactly.
mac-destination-address Enter the destination MAC address and mask in
nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
mac-destination-address-mask Specify which bits in the MAC address must be matched.
The MAC ACL supports an inverse mask, therefore, a mask of
ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff allows entries that do not match and a mask of
00:00:00:00:00:00 only allows entries that match exactly.
ethertype operator (OPTIONAL) To filter based on protocol type, enter one of the
following Ethertypes:
• ev2 - is the Ethernet II frame format.
• llc - is the IEEE 802.3 frame format.
• snap - is the IEEE 802.3 SNAP frame format.
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets
processed by the filter.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes
processed by the filter.
log (OPTIONAL, E-Series only) Enter the keyword log to log the
packets.
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is
describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in
which you are creating the rule will be applied to the monitored
interface. For details, see the section “Flow-based Monitoring”
in the Port Monitoring chapter of the FTOS Configuration
Guide.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-EXTENDED

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Added monitor option
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Note: When ACL logging and byte counters are configured simultaneously, byte counters
may display an incorrect value. Configure packet counters with logging instead.

Usage When you use the log option, CP processor logs details about the packets that match. Depending on
Information how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these
packets’ details.

242 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

 Related
deny Configure a filter to drop traffic based on the MAC address.
Commands
seq Configure a filter with specific sequence numbers.

seq
ces Configure a filter with a specific sequence number.

Syntax seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {any | host mac-address | mac-source-address

mac-source-address-mask} {any | host mac-address | mac-destination-address
mac-destination-address-mask} [ethertype operator] [count [byte]] [log] [monitor]
To delete a filter, use the no seq sequence-number command.

Parameters
sequence-number Enter a number as the filter sequence number.
Range: zero (0) to 65535.
deny Enter the keyword deny to drop any traffic matching this filter.
permit Enter the keyword permit to forward any traffic matching this filter.
any Enter the keyword any to filter all packets.
host mac-address Enter the keyword host followed by a MAC address to filter packets
with that host address.
mac-source-address Enter the source MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
The MAC ACL supports an inverse mask, therefore, a mask of
ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff allows entries that do not match and a mask of
00:00:00:00:00:00 only allows entries that match exactly.
mac-source-address-mask Specify which bits in the MAC address must be matched.
mac-destination-address Enter the destination MAC address and mask in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn
format.
mac-destination-address-mask Specify which bits in the MAC address must be matched.
The MAC ACL supports an inverse mask, therefore, a mask of
ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff allows entries that do not match and a mask of
00:00:00:00:00:00 only allows entries that match exactly.
ethertype operator (OPTIONAL) To filter based on protocol type, enter one of the
following Ethertypes:
• ev2 - is the Ethernet II frame format.
• llc - is the IEEE 802.3 frame format.
• snap - is the IEEE 802.3 SNAP frame format.
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed
by the filter.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the
filter.
log (OPTIONAL, E-Series only) Enter the keyword log to log the
packets.
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is
describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which
you are creating the rule will be applied to the monitored interface. For
details, see the section “Flow-based Monitoring” in the Port
Monitoring chapter of the FTOS Configuration Guide.

Defaults Not configured

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 243

 Command Modes CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-STANDARD
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Added monitor option
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Note: When ACL logging and byte counters are configured simultaneously, byte counters
may display an incorrect value. Configure packet counters with logging instead.

Usage When you use the log option, CP processor logs details about the packets that match. Depending on
Information how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these
packets’ details.

Related
deny Configure a filter to drop traffic.
Commands
permit Configure a filter to forward traffic.

IP Prefix List Commands

When an access-list is created without any rule and then applied to an interface, ACL behavior reflects
implicit permit.

Use these commands to configure or enable IP prefix lists.

• clear ip prefix-list
• deny
• ip prefix-list
• permit
• seq
• show config
• show ip prefix-list detail
• show ip prefix-list summary

clear ip prefix-list
ces Reset the number of times traffic met the conditions (“hit” counters) of the configured prefix lists.

Syntax clear ip prefix-list [prefix-name]

Parameters
prefix-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the configured prefix list to clear only counters for that
prefix list, up to 140 characters long.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

244 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to
16 characters long.
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Default Clears “hit” counters for all prefix lists unless a prefix list is specified.

Related
ip prefix-list Configure a prefix list.
Commands

deny
ces Configure a filter to drop packets meeting the criteria specified.

Syntax deny ip-prefix [ge min-prefix-length] [le max-prefix-length]

To delete a drop filter, use the no deny ip-prefix command.

Parameters
ip-prefix Specify an IP prefix in the network/length format. For example, 35.0.0.0/
8 means match the first 8 bits of address 35.0.0.0.
ge min-prefix-length (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ge followed by the minimum prefix
length, which is a number from zero (0) to 32.
le max-prefix-length (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword le followed by the maximum prefix
length, which is a number from zero (0) to 32.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes PREFIX-LIST

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage Sequence numbers for this filter are automatically assigned starting at sequence number 5.
Information
If the options ge or le are not used, only packets with an exact match to the prefix are filtered.

Related
permit Configure a filter to pass packets.
Commands
seq Configure a drop or permit filter with a specified sequence number.

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 245

 ip prefix-list
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Enter the PREFIX-LIST mode and configure a prefix list.

Syntax ip prefix-list prefix-name

To delete a prefix list, use the no ip prefix-list prefix-name command.

Parameters
prefix-name Enter a string up to 16 characters long as the name of the prefix list, up to 140 characters
long.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to
16 characters long.
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage Prefix lists redistribute OSPF and RIP routes meeting specific criteria. For related RIP commands
Information supported on C-Series and E-Series, see Chapter 35, Router Information Protocol (RIP). For related
OSPF commands supported on all three platforms, see Chapter 28, Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2
and OSPFv3).

Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16 characters long.

Related
show ip route list Display IP routes in an IP prefix list.
Commands
show ip prefix-list summary Display a summary of the configured prefix lists.

permit
ces Configure a filter that passes packets meeting the criteria specified.

Syntax permit ip-prefix [ge min-prefix-length] [le max-prefix-length]

To delete a forward filter, use the no permit ip-prefix command.

Parameters
ip-prefix Specify an IP prefix in the network/length format. For example, 35.0.0.0/8
means match the first 8 bits of address 35.0.0.0.
ge min-prefix-length (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ge followed by the minimum prefix
length, which is a number from zero (0) to 32.
le max-prefix-length (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword le followed by the maximum prefix length,
which is a number from zero (0) to 32.

Command Modes PREFIX-LIST

246 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage Sequence numbers for this filter are automatically assigned starting at sequence number 5.
Information
If the options ge or le are not used, only packets with an exact match to the prefix are filtered.

Related
deny Configure a filter to drop packets.
Commands
seq Configure a drop or permit filter with a specified sequence number.

seq
ces Assign a sequence number to a deny or permit filter in a prefix list while configuring the filter.

Syntax seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {any} | [ip-prefix /nn {ge min-prefix-length} {le
max-prefix-length}] | [bitmask number]
To delete a specific filter, use the no seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {any} | [ip-prefix {ge
min-prefix-length} {le max-prefix-length}] | [bitmask number].

Parameters
sequence-number Enter a number.
Range: 1 to 4294967294.
deny Enter the keyword deny to configure a filter to drop packets meeting this
condition.
permit Enter the keyword permit to configure a filter to forward packets meeting
this condition.
any (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword any to match any packets.
ip-prefix /nn (OPTIONAL) Specify an IP prefix in the network/length format. For example,
35.0.0.0/8 means match the first 8 bits of address 35.0.0.0.
ge min-prefix-length (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ge followed by the minimum prefix length,
which is a number from zero (0) to 32.
le max-prefix-length (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword le followed by the maximum prefix length,
which is a number from zero (0) to 32.
bitmask number Enter the keyword bitmask followed by a bitmask number in dotted decimal
format.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes PREFIX-LIST

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 247

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series

Version 6.3.1.0 Added bitmask option

Usage If the options ge or le are not used, only packets with an exact match to the prefix are filtered.
Information

Related
deny Configure a filter to drop packets.
Commands
permit Configure a filter to pass packets.

show config
ces Display the current PREFIX-LIST configurations.

Syntax show config

Command Modes PREFIX-LIST

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 9-9. Command Example: show config

FTOS(conf-nprefixl)#show config
!
ip prefix-list snickers
FTOS(conf-nprefixl)#

show ip prefix-list detail

ces Display details of the configured prefix lists.

Syntax show ip prefix-list detail [prefix-name]

Parameters
prefix-name (OPTIONAL) Enter a text string as the name of the prefix list, up to 140 characters.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to
16 characters long.
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series

248 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

 Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 9-10. Command Example: show ip prefix-list detail

FTOS#show ip prefix-list detail
Prefix-list with the last deletion/insertion: filter_ospf
ip prefix-list filter_in:
count: 3, range entries: 3, sequences: 5 - 10
seq 5 deny 1.102.0.0/16 le 32 (hit count: 0)
seq 6 deny 2.1.0.0/16 ge 23 (hit count: 0)
seq 10 permit 0.0.0.0/0 le 32 (hit count: 0)
ip prefix-list filter_ospf:
count: 4, range entries: 1, sequences: 5 - 10
seq 5 deny 100.100.1.0/24 (hit count: 5)
seq 6 deny 200.200.1.0/24 (hit count: 1)
seq 7 deny 200.200.2.0/24 (hit count: 1)
seq 10 permit 0.0.0.0/0 le 32 (hit count: 132)
FTOS#

show ip prefix-list summary

ces Display a summary of the configured prefix lists.

Syntax show ip prefix-list summary [prefix-name]

Parameters
prefix-name (OPTIONAL) Enter a text string as the name of the prefix list, up to 140 characters long.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to
16 characters long.
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 249

 Example Figure 9-11. Command Example: show ip prefix-list summary
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show ip prefix summary

Prefix-list with the last deletion/insertion: test
ip prefix-list test:
count: 3, range entries: 1, sequences: 5 - 15
ip prefix-list test1:
count: 2, range entries: 2, sequences: 5 - 10
ip prefix-list test2:
count: 1, range entries: 1, sequences: 5 - 5
ip prefix-list test3:
count: 1, range entries: 1, sequences: 5 - 5
ip prefix-list test4:
count: 1, range entries: 1, sequences: 5 - 5
ip prefix-list test5:
count: 1, range entries: 1, sequences: 5 - 5
ip prefix-list test6:
count: 1, range entries: 1, sequences: 5 - 5
FTOS#

Route Map Commands

When an access-list is created without any rule and then applied to an interface, ACL behavior reflects
implicit permit.

The following commands allow you to configure route maps and their redistribution criteria.
• continue
• description
• match as-path
• match community
• match interface
• match ip address
• match ip next-hop
• match ip route-source
• match metric
• match origin
• match route-type
• match tag
• route-map
• set as-path
• set automatic-tag
• set comm-list delete
• set community
• set level
• set local-preference
• set metric
• set metric-type
• set next-hop
• set origin
• set tag
• set weight

250 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

 • show config
• show route-map

continue
ces Configure a route-map to go to a route-map entry with a higher sequence number.

Syntax continue [sequence-number]

To remove the continue clause, use the no continue [sequence-number] command.

Parameters
sequence-number (OPTIONAL) Enter the route map sequence number.
Range: 1 - 65535
Default: no sequence number

Defaults Not Configured

Command Modes ROUTE-MAP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced

Usage The continue feature allows movement from one route-map entry to a specific route-map entry (the
Information sequence number). If the sequence number is not specified, the continue feature simply moves to
the next sequence number (also known as an implied continue). If a match clause exists, the continue
feature executes only after a successful match occurs. If there are no successful matches, continue is
ignored.

Match clause with Continue clause

The continue feature can exist without a match clause. A continue clause without a match clause
executes and jumps to the specified route-map entry.

With a match clause and a continue clause, the match clause executes first and the continue clause next
in a specified route map entry. The continue clause launches only after a successful match. The
behavior is:

• A successful match with a continue clause—the route map executes the set clauses and then goes
to the specified route map entry upon execution of the continue clause.
• If the next route map entry contains a continue clause, the route map will execute the continue
clause if a successful match occurs.
• If the next route map entry does not contain a continue clause, the route map evaluates normally. If
a match does not does not occur, the route map does not continue and will fall through to the next
sequence number, if one exists.

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 251

 Set clause with Continue clause
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

If the route-map entry contains sets with the continue clause, then set actions is performed first
followed by the continue clause jump to the specified route map entry.

• If a set actions occurs in the first route map entry and then the same set action occurs with a
different value in a subsequent route map entry, the last set of actions overrides the previous set of
actions with the same set command.
• If set community additive and set as-path prepend are configure, the communities and AS
numbers are pre-pended.

Related
set community Specify a COMMUNITY attribute
Commands
set as-path Configure a filter to modify the AS path

description
ces Add a description to this route map.

Syntax description {description}

To remove the description, use the no description {description} command.

Parameters
description Enter a description to identify the route map (80 characters maximum).

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes ROUTE-MAP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
pre-Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced

Related
route-map Enable a route map
Commands

match as-path
ces Configure a filter to match routes that have a certain AS number in their BGP path.

Syntax match as-path as-path-name

To delete a match AS path filter, use the no match as-path as-path-name command.

Parameters
as-path-name Enter the name of an established AS-PATH ACL, up to 140 characters.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTE-MAP

252 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to
16 characters long.
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Related
set as-path Add information to the BGP AS_PATH attribute.
Commands

match community
ces Configure a filter to match routes that have a certain COMMUNITY attribute in their BGP path.

Syntax match community community-list-name [exact]

To delete a community match filter, use the no match community command.

Parameters
community-list-name Enter the name of a configured community list.
exact (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords exact to process only those routes with this
community list name.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTE-MAP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Related
ip community-list Configure an Community Access list.
Commands
set community Specify a COMMUNITY attribute.
neighbor send-community Send COMMUNITY attribute to peer or peer group.

match interface
ces Configure a filter to match routes whose next hop is on the interface specified.

Syntax match interface interface

To remove a match, use the no match interface interface command.

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 253

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:

• For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword FastEthernet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by the slot/
port information.
• For the loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback followed by a number from zero (0)
to 16383.
• For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale and ExaScale.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Ten Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet followed by
the slot/port information.
• For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094, 1-2094 for
ExaScale (can used IDs 1-4094).

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes ROUTE-MAP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Related
match ip address Redistribute routes that match an IP address.
Commands
match ip next-hop Redistribute routes that match the next-hop IP address.
match ip route-source Redistribute routes that match routes advertised by other routers.
match metric Redistribute routes that match a specific metric.
match route-type Redistribute routes that match a route type.
match tag Redistribute routes that match a specific tag.

match ip address
ces Configure a filter to match routes based on IP addresses specified in an access list.

Syntax match ip address prefix-list-name

To delete a match, use the no match ip address prefix-list-name command.

Parameters
prefix-list-name Enter the name of configured prefix list, up to 140 characters.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTE-MAP

254 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to
16 characters long.
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Related
match interface Redistribute routes that match the next-hop interface.
Commands
match ip next-hop Redistribute routes that match the next-hop IP address.
match ip route-source Redistribute routes that match routes advertised by other routers.
match metric Redistribute routes that match a specific metric.
match route-type Redistribute routes that match a route type.
match tag Redistribute routes that match a specific tag.

match ip next-hop
ces Configure a filter to match based on the next-hop IP addresses specified in an IP access list or IP prefix
list.

Syntax match ip next-hop {access-list | prefix-list prefix-list-name}

To delete a match, use the no match ip next-hop {access-list-name | prefix-list prefix-list-name}
command.

Parameters
access-list-name Enter the name of a configured IP access list, up to 140 characters.
prefix-list prefix-list-name Enter the keywords prefix-list followed by the name of configured prefix
list.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTE-MAP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to
16 characters long.
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Related
match interface Redistribute routes that match the next-hop interface.
Commands
match ip address Redistribute routes that match an IP address.
match ip route-source Redistribute routes that match routes advertised by other routers.
match metric Redistribute routes that match a specific metric.

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 255

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

match route-type Redistribute routes that match a route type.

match tag Redistribute routes that match a specific tag.

match ip route-source
ces Configure a filter to match based on the routes advertised by routes specified in IP access lists or IP
prefix lists.

Syntax match ip route-source {access-list | prefix-list prefix-list-name}

To delete a match, use the no match ip route-source {access-list | prefix-list prefix-list-name}
command.

Parameters
access-list-name Enter the name of a configured IP access list, up to 140 characters.
prefix-list Enter the keywords prefix-list followed by the name of configured prefix list,
prefix-list-name up 10 140 characters.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTE-MAP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to
16 characters long.
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Related
match interface Redistribute routes that match the next-hop interface.
Commands
match ip address Redistribute routes that match an IP address.
match ip next-hop Redistribute routes that match the next-hop IP address.
match metric Redistribute routes that match a specific metric.
match route-type Redistribute routes that match a route type.
match tag Redistribute routes that match a specific tag.

match metric
ces Configure a filter to match on a specified value.

Syntax match metric metric-value

To delete a value, use the no match metric [metric-value] command.

Parameters
metric-value Enter a value to match.
Range: zero (0) to 4294967295.

256 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

 Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTE-MAP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Related
match interface Redistribute routes that match the next-hop interface.
Commands
match ip address Redistribute routes that match an IP address.
match ip next-hop Redistribute routes that match the next-hop IP address.
match ip route-source Redistribute routes that match routes advertised by other routers.
match route-type Redistribute routes that match a route type.
match tag Redistribute routes that match a specific tag.

match origin
ces Configure a filter to match routes based on the value found in the BGP path ORIGIN attribute.

Syntax match origin {egp | igp | incomplete}

To disable matching filter, use the no match origin {igp | egp | incomplete} command.

Parameters
egp Enter the keyword egp to match routes originating outside the AS.
igp Enter the keyword igp to match routes originating within the same AS.
incomplete Enter the keyword incomplete to match routes with incomplete routing
information.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTE-MAP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

match route-type
ces Configure a filter to match routes based on the how the route is defined.

Syntax match route-type {external [type-1 | type-2] | internal | level-1 | level-2 | local}
To delete a match, use the no match route-type {local | internal | external [type-1 | type-2] |
level-1 | level-2} command.

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 257

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

external [type-1| type-2] Enter the keyword external followed by either type-1 or type-2 to
match only on OSPF Type 1 routes or OSPF Type 2 routes.
internal Enter the keyword internal to match only on routes generated within
OSPF areas.
level-1 Enter the keyword level-1 to match IS-IS Level 1 routes.
level-2 Enter the keyword level-2 to match IS-IS Level 2 routes.
local Enter the keyword local to match only on routes generated within the
switch.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTE-MAP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Related
match interface Redistribute routes that match the next-hop interface.
Commands
match ip address Redistribute routes that match an IP address.
match ip next-hop Redistribute routes that match the next-hop IP address.
match ip route-source Redistribute routes that match routes advertised by other routers.
match metric Redistribute routes that match a specific metric.
match tag Redistribute routes that match a tag.

match tag
ces Configure a filter to redistribute only routes that match a specified tag value.

Syntax match tag tag-value

To remove a match, use the no match tag command.

Parameters
tag-value Enter a value as the tag on which to match.
Range: zero (0) to 4294967295.

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes ROUTE-MAP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

258 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

 Related
match interface Redistribute routes that match the next-hop interface.
Commands
match ip address Redistribute routes that match an IP address.
match ip next-hop Redistribute routes that match the next-hop IP address.
match ip route-source Redistribute routes that match routes advertised by other routers.
match metric Redistribute routes that match a specific metric.
match route-type Redistribute routes that match a route type.

route-map
ces Enable a route map statement and configure its action and sequence number. This command also places
you in the ROUTE-MAP mode.

Syntax route-map map-name [permit | deny] [sequence-number]

To delete a route map, use the no route-map map-name [permit | deny] [sequence-number]
command.

Parameters
map-name Enter a text string of up to 140 characters to name the route map for easy
identification.
permit (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword permit to set the route map default as permit.
If no keyword is specified, the default is permit.
deny (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword deny to set the route map default as deny.
sequence-number (OPTIONAL) Enter a number to identify the route map for editing and sequencing
with other route maps. You are prompted for a sequence number if there are
multiple instances of the route map.
Range: 1 to 65535.

Defaults Not configured

If no keyword (permit or deny) is defined for the route map, the permit action is the default.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to
16 characters long.
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series
\

Example Figure 9-12. Command Example: route-map

FTOS(conf)#route-map dempsey
FTOS(config-route-map)#

Usage Use caution when you delete route maps because if you do not specify a sequence number, all route
Information maps with the same map-name are deleted when you use no route-map map-name command.

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 259

 Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16 characters long.
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Related
show config Display the current configuration.
Commands

set as-path
ces Configure a filter to modify the AS path for BGP routes.

Syntax set as-path prepend as-number [... as-number]

To remove an AS-Path setting, use the no set as-path {prepend as-number | tag} command.

Parameters
prepend as-number Enter the keyword prepend followed by up to eight AS numbers to be
inserted into the BGP path information.
Range: 1 to 65535

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes ROUTE-MAP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage You can prepend up to eight AS numbers to a BGP route.

Information
This command influences best path selection in BGP by inserting a tag or AS number into the
AS_PATH attribute.

Related
match as-path Redistribute routes that match an AS-PATH attribute.
Commands
ip as-path access-list Configure an AS-PATH access list.
neighbor filter-list Configure a BGP filter based on the AS-PATH attribute.
show ip community-lists Display configured IP Community access lists.

set automatic-tag
ces Configure a filter to automatically compute the tag value of the route.

Syntax set automatic-tag

To return to the default, enter no set automatic-tag.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTE-MAP

260 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Related
set level Specify the OSPF area for route redistribution.
Commands
set metric Specify the metric value assigned to redistributed routes.
set metric-type Specify the metric type assigned to redistributed routes.
set tag Specify the tag assigned to redistributed routes.

set comm-list delete

ces Configure a filter to remove the specified community list from the BGP route’s COMMUNITY
attribute.

Syntax set comm-list community-list-name delete

To insert the community list into the COMMUNITY attribute, use the no set comm-list
community-list-name delete command.

Parameters
community-list-name Enter the name of an established Community list, up to 140 characters.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTE-MAP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to
16 characters long.
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage The community list used in the set comm-list delete command must be configured so that each filter
Information contains only one community. For example, the filter deny 100:12 is acceptable, but the filter
deny 120:13 140:33 results in an error.

If the set comm-list delete command and the set community command are configured in the same
route map sequence, then the deletion command (set comm-list delete) is processed before the
insertion command (set community).

Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16 characters long.

Related
ip community-list Configure community access list.
Commands

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 261

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

match community Redistribute routes that match the COMMUNITY attribute.

set community Specify a COMMUNITY attribute.

set community
ces Allows you to assign a BGP COMMUNITY attribute.

Syntax set community {community-number | local-as | no-advertise | no-export | none} [additive]

To delete a BGP COMMUNITY attribute assignment, use the no set community
{community-number | local-as | no-advertise | no-export | none} command.

Parameters
community-number Enter the community number in AA:NN format where AA is the AS number (2
bytes) and NN is a value specific to that autonomous system.
local-AS Enter the keywords local-AS to drop all routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of
NO_EXPORT_SUBCONFED.
All routes with the NO_EXPORT_SUBCONFED (0xFFFFFF03) community
attribute must not be advertised to external BGP peers.
no-advertise Enter the keywords no-advertise to drop all routes containing the well-known
community attribute of NO_ADVERTISE.
All routes with the NO_ADVERTISE (0xFFFFFF02) community attribute must not
be advertised to other BGP peers.
no-export Enter the keywords no-export to drop all routes containing the well-known
community attribute of NO_EXPORT.
All routes with the NO_EXPORT (0xFFFFFF01) community attribute must not be
advertised outside a BGP confederation boundary.
none Enter the keywords none to remove the community attribute from routes meeting
the route map criteria.
additive (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword additive add the communities to already existing
communities.

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes ROUTE-MAP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Related
ip community-list Configure a Community access list.
Commands
match community Redistribute routes that match a BGP COMMUNITY attribute.
neighbor send-community Assign the COMMUNITY attribute.
show ip bgp community Display BGP community groups.
show ip community-lists Display configured Community access lists.

262 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

set level
ces Configure a filter to specify the IS-IS level or OSPF area to which matched routes are redistributed.

Syntax set level {backbone | level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2 | stub-area}

To remove a set level condition, use the no set level {backbone | level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2 |
stub-area} command.

Parameters
backbone Enter the keyword backbone to redistribute matched routes to the OSPF backbone area
(area 0.0.0.0).
level-1 Enter the keyword level-1 to redistribute matched routes to IS-IS Level 1.
level-1-2 Enter the keyword level-1-2 to redistribute matched routes to IS-IS Level 1 and Level 2.
level-2 Enter the keyword level-2 to redistribute matched routes to IS-IS Level 2.
stub-area Enter the keyword stub to redistributed matched routes to OSPF stub areas.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTE-MAP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Related
set automatic-tag Compute the tag value of the route.
Commands
set metric Specify the metric value assigned to redistributed routes.
set metric-type Specify the metric type assigned to redistributed routes.
set tag Specify the tag assigned to redistributed routes.

set local-preference
ces Configure a filter to set the BGP LOCAL_PREF attribute for routers within the local autonomous
system.

Syntax set local-preference value

To delete a BGP LOCAL_PREF attribute, enter no set local-preference.

Parameters
value Enter a number as the LOCAL_PREF attribute value.
Range: 0 to 4294967295

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes ROUTE-MAP

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 263

 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.

History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage The set local-preference command changes the LOCAL_PREF attribute for routes meeting the
Information route map criteria. To change the LOCAL_PREF for all routes, use the bgp default
local-preference command.

Related
bgp default local-preference Change default LOCAL_PREF attribute for all routes.
Commands

set metric
ces Configure a filter to assign a new metric to redistributed routes.

Syntax set metric [+ | -] metric-value

To delete a setting, enter no set metric.

Parameters
+ (OPTIONAL) Enter + to add a metric-value to the redistributed routes.
- (OPTIONAL) Enter - to subtract a metric-value from the redistributed routes.
metric-value Enter a number as the new metric value.
Range: zero (0) to 4294967295

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes ROUTE-MAP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Related
set automatic-tag Compute the tag value of the route.
Commands
set level Specify the OSPF area for route redistribution.
set metric-type Specify the route type assigned to redistributed routes.
set tag Specify the tag assigned to redistributed routes.

264 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

set metric-type
ces Configure a filter to assign a new route type for routes redistributed to OSPF.

Syntax set metric-type {internal | external | type-1 | type-2}

To delete a setting, enter no set metric-type.

Parameters
internal Enter the keyword internal to assign the Interior Gateway Protocol metric of the next
hop as the route’s BGP MULTI_EXIT_DES (MED) value.
external Enter the keyword external to assign the IS-IS external metric.
type-1 Enter the keyword type-1 to assign the OSPF Type 1 metric.
type-2 Enter the keyword type-2 to assign the OSPF Type 2 metric.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTE-MAP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Implemented internal keyword
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Related
set automatic-tag Compute the tag value of the route.
Commands
set level Specify the OSPF area for route redistribution.
set metric Specify the metric value assigned to redistributed routes.
set tag Specify the tag assigned to redistributed routes.

set next-hop
ces Configure a filter to specify an IP address as the next hop.

Syntax set next-hop ip-address

To delete the setting, use the no set next-hop ip-address command.

Parameters
ip-address Specify an IP address in dotted decimal format.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTE-MAP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 265

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series

pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage If the set next-hop command is configured, its configuration takes precedence over the neighbor
Information next-hop-self command in the ROUTER BGP mode.

If you configure the set next-hop command with the interface’s (either Loopback or physical) IP
address, the software declares the route unreachable.

Related
match ip next-hop Redistribute routes that match the next-hop IP address.
Commands
neighbor next-hop-self Configure the routers as the next hop for a BGP neighbor.

set origin
ces Configure a filter to manipulate the BGP ORIGIN attribute.

Syntax set origin {igp | egp | incomplete}

To delete an ORIGIN attribute setting, enter no set origin.

Parameters
egp Enter the keyword egp to set routes originating from outside the local AS.
igp Enter the keyword igp to set routes originating within the same AS.
incomplete Enter the keyword incomplete to set routes with incomplete routing information.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTE-MAP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

set tag
ces Configure a filter to specify a tag for redistributed routes.

Syntax set tag tag-value

To delete a setting, enter no set tag.

Parameters
tag-value Enter a number as the tag.
Range: zero (0) to 4294967295.

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes ROUTE-MAP

266 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Related
set automatic-tag Compute the tag value of the route.
Commands
set level Specify the OSPF area for route redistribution.
set metric Specify the metric value assigned to redistributed routes.
set metric-type Specify the route type assigned to redistributed routes.

set weight
ces Configure a filter to add a non-RFC compliant attribute to the BGP route to assist with route selection.

Syntax set weight weight

To delete a weight specification, use the no set weight weight command.

Parameters
weight Enter a number as the weight to be used by the route meeting the route map specification.
Routes with a higher weight are preferred when there are multiple routes to the same
destination.
Range: 0 to 65535
Default: router-originated = 32768; all other routes = 0

Defaults router-originated = 32768; all other routes = 0

Command Modes ROUTE-MAP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage If you do not use the set weight command, router-originated paths have a weight attribute of 32768
Information and all other paths have a weight attribute of zero.

show config
ces Display the current route map configuration.

Syntax show config

Command Modes ROUTE-MAP

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 267

 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.

History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 9-13. Command Example: show config

FTOS(config-route-map)#show config
!
route-map hopper permit 10
FTOS(config-route-map)#

show route-map
ces Display the current route map configurations.

Syntax show route-map [map-name]

Parameters
map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of a configured route map, up to 140 characters.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to
16 characters long.
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 9-14. Command Example: show route-map

FTOS#show route-map
route-map firpo, permit, sequence 10
Match clauses:
Set clauses:
tag 34
FTOS#

Related
route-map Configure a route map.
Commands

268 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

AS-Path Commands
This feature is supported on E-Series only, as indicated by this character under each command heading:
e
The following commands configure AS-Path ACLs.
• deny
• ip as-path access-list
• permit
• show config
• show ip as-path-access-lists

deny
e Create a filter to drop routes that match the route’s AS-PATH attribute. Use regular expressions to
identify which routes are affected by the filter.

Syntax deny as-regular-expression

To remove this filter, use the no deny as-regular-expression command.

Parameters
as-regular-expression Enter a regular expression to match BGP AS-PATH attributes.
Use one or a combination of the following:
• . = (period) matches on any single character, including white space
• * = (asterisk) matches on sequences in a pattern (zero or more
sequences)
• + = (plus sign) matches on sequences in a pattern (one or more
sequences)
• ? = (question mark) matches sequences in a pattern (0 or 1 sequences).
You must enter an escape sequence (CNTL+v) prior to entering the
? regular expression.
• [ ] = (brackets) matches a range of single-character patterns.
• ^ = (caret) matches the beginning of the input string. (If the caret is used
at the beginning of a sequence or range, it matches on everything BUT
the characters specified.)
• $ = (dollar sign) matches the end of the output string.
• _ = (underscore) matches a comma (,), left brace ({), right brace (}), left
parenthesis, right parenthesis, the beginning of the input string, the end
of the input string, or a space.
• | = (pipe) matches either character.

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes AS-PATH ACL

Usage The regular expression must match part of the ASCII-text in the AS-PATH attribute of the BGP route.
Information

Command
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
History
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 269

 ip as-path access-list
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

e Enter the AS-PATH ACL mode and configure an access control list based on the BGP AS_PATH
attribute.

Syntax ip as-path access-list as-path-name

To delete an AS-PATH ACL, use the no ip as-path access-list as-path-name command.

Parameters
as-path-name Enter the access-list name, up to 140 characters.

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Example Figure 9-15. Command Example: ip as-path access-list

FTOS(conf)#ip as-path access-list TestPath
FTOS(config-as-path)#

Usage Use the match as-path or neighbor filter-list commands to apply the AS-PATH ACL to BGP
Information routes.

Command
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to
16 characters long.
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Related
match as-path Match on routes contain a specific AS-PATH.
Commands
neighbor filter-list Configure filter based on AS-PATH information.

permit
e Create a filter to forward BGP routes that match the route’s AS-PATH attributes. Use regular
expressions to identify which routes are affected by this filter.

Syntax permit as-regular-expression

To remove this filter, use the no permit as-regular-expression command.

270 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

 Parameters
as-regular-expression Enter a regular expression to match BGP AS-PATH attributes.
Use one or a combination of the following:
• . = (period) matches on any single character, including white space
• * = (asterisk) matches on sequences in a pattern (zero or more sequences)
• + = (plus sign) matches on sequences in a pattern (one or more sequences)
• ? = (question mark) matches sequences in a pattern (0 or 1 sequences). You
must enter an escape sequence (CNTL+v) prior to entering the ? regular
expression.
• [] = (brackets) matches a range of single-character patterns.
• ^ = (caret) matches the beginning of the input string. (If the caret is used at the
beginning of a sequence or range, it matches on everything BUT the characters
specified.)
• $ = (dollar sign) matches the end of the output string.
• _ = (underscore) matches a comma (,), left brace ({), right brace (}), left
parenthesis, right parenthesis, the beginning of the input string, the end of the
input string, or a space.
• | = (pipe) matches either character.

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes AS-PATH ACL

Command
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
History
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

show config
e Display the current configuration.

Syntax show config

Command Mode AS-PATH ACL

Command
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
History
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 9-16. Command Example: show config (AS-PATH ACL)

FTOS(config-as-path)#show config
!
ip as-path access-list snickers
deny .3
FTOS(config-as-path)#

show ip as-path-access-lists
e Display the all AS-PATH access lists configured on the E-Series.

Syntax show ip as-path-access-lists

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 271

 Command Modes EXEC
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
History
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 9-17. Command Example: show ip as-path-access-lists

FTOS#show ip as-path-access-lists
ip as-path access-list 1
permit ^$
permit ^\(.*\)$
deny .*
ip as-path access-list 91
permit ^$
deny .*
permit ^\(.*\)$
FTOS#

IP Community List Commands

IP Community List commands are supported on E-Series only, as indicated by this character under
each command heading: e

The commands in this section are.

• deny
• ip community-list
• permit
• show config
• show ip community-lists

deny
e Create a filter to drop routes matching a BGP COMMUNITY number.

Syntax deny {community-number | local-AS | no-advertise | no-export | quote-regexp

regular-expressions-list | regexp regular-expression}
To delete a description, enter no deny {community-number | local-AS | no-advertise | no-export |
quote-regexp regular-expressions-list | regexp regular-expression}.

Parameters
community-number Enter the community number in AA:NN format where AA is the AS number (2
bytes) and NN is a value specific to that autonomous system.
local-AS Enter the keywords local-AS to drop all routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of
NO_EXPORT_SUBCONFED.
All routes with the NO_EXPORT_SUBCONFED (0xFFFFFF03) community
attribute must not be advertised to external BGP peers.

272 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

 no-advertise Enter the keywords no-advertise to drop all routes containing the well-known
community attribute of NO_ADVERTISE.
All routes with the NO_ADVERTISE (0xFFFFFF02) community attribute must not
be advertised to other BGP peers.
no-export Enter the keywords no-export to drop all routes containing the well-known
community attribute of NO_EXPORT.
All routes with the NO_EXPORT (0xFFFFFF01) community attribute must not be
advertised outside a BGP confederation boundary.
regexp Enter the keyword regexp followed by a regular expression. Use one or a
regular-expression combination of the following:
• . = (period) matches on any single character, including white space
• * = (asterisk) matches on sequences in a pattern (zero or more sequences)
• + = (plus sign) matches on sequences in a pattern (one or more sequences)
• ? = (question mark) matches sequences in a pattern (0 or 1 sequences). You must
enter an escape sequence (CNTL+v) prior to entering the ? regular
expression.
• [] = (brackets) matches a range of single-character patterns.
• ^ = (caret) matches the beginning of the input string. (If the caret is used at the
beginning of a sequence or range, it matches on everything BUT the characters
specified.)
• $ = (dollar sign) matches the end of the output string.
• _ = (underscore) matches a comma (,), left brace ({), right brace (}), left
parenthesis, right parenthesis, the beginning of the input string, the end of the
input string, or a space.
• | = (pipe) matches either character.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes COMMUNITY-LIST

Command
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
History
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

ip community-list
e Enter COMMUNITY-LIST mode and create an IP community-list for BGP.

Syntax ip community-list comm-list-name

To delete a community-list, use the no ip community-list comm-list-name command.

Parameters
comm-list-name Enter a text string as the name of the community-list, up to 140 characters.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Example Figure 9-18. Command Example: ip community-list

FTOS(conf)#ip community-list TestComList
FTOS(config-community-list)#

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 273

 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale

History
Version 7.8.1.0 Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to
16 characters long.
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

permit
e Configure a filter to forward routes that match the route’s COMMUNITY attribute.

Syntax permit {community-number | local-AS | no-advertise | no-export | quote-regexp

regular-expressions-list | regexp regular-expression}

To remove this filter, use the no permit {community-number | local-AS | no-advertise | no-export
| quote-regexp regular-expressions-list | regexp regular-expression} command.

Parameters
community-number Enter the community number in AA:NN format where AA is the AS number (2
bytes) and NN is a value specific to that autonomous system.
local-AS Enter the keywords local-AS to drop all routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of
NO_EXPORT_SUBCONFED.
All routes with the NO_EXPORT_SUBCONFED (0xFFFFFF03) community
attribute must not be advertised to external BGP peers.
no-advertise Enter the keywords no-advertise to drop all routes containing the well-known
community attribute of NO_ADVERTISE.
All routes with the NO_ADVERTISE (0xFFFFFF02) community attribute must not
be advertised to other BGP peers.
no-export Enter the keywords no-export to drop all routes containing the well-known
community attribute of NO_EXPORT.
All routes with the NO_EXPORT (0xFFFFFF01) community attribute must not be
advertised outside a BGP confederation boundary.
regexp Enter the keyword regexp followed by a regular expression. Use one or a
regular-expression combination of the following:
• . = (period) matches on any single character, including white space
• * = (asterisk) matches on sequences in a pattern (zero or more sequences)
• + = (plus sign) matches on sequences in a pattern (one or more sequences)
• ? = (question mark) matches sequences in a pattern (0 or 1 sequences). You must
enter an escape sequence (CNTL+v) prior to entering the ? regular
expression.
• [] = (brackets) matches a range of single-character patterns.
• ^ = (caret) matches the beginning of the input string. (If the caret is used at the
beginning of a sequence or range, it matches on everything BUT the characters
specified.)
• $ = (dollar sign) matches the end of the output string.
• _ = (underscore) matches a comma (,), left brace ({), right brace (}), left
parenthesis, right parenthesis, the beginning of the input string, the end of the
input string, or a space.
• | = (pipe) matches either character.

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes COMMUNITY-LIST

274 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

 Command
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
History
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

show config
e Display the non-default information in the current configuration.

Syntax show config

Command Mode COMMUNITY-LIST

Command
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
History
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 9-19. Command Example: show config (COMMUNITY-LIST

FTOS(config-std-community-list)#show config
!
ip community-list standard patches
deny 45:1
permit no-export
FTOS(config-std-community-list)#

show ip community-lists
e Display configured IP community lists in alphabetic order.

Syntax show ip community-lists [name]

Parameters
name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the standard or extended IP community list, up to 140
characters.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to
16 characters long.
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Access Control Lists (ACL) | 275

 Example Figure 9-20. Command Example: show ip community-lists
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show ip community-lists
ip community-list standard 1
deny 701:20
deny 702:20
deny 703:20
deny 704:20
deny 705:20
deny 14551:20
deny 701:112
deny 702:112
deny 703:112
deny 704:112
deny 705:112
deny 14551:112
deny 701:666
deny 702:666
deny 703:666
deny 704:666
deny 705:666
deny 14551:666
FTOS#

276 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

 10
Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

Overview
BGPv4 is supported as shown in the following table.

FTOS version Platform support

8.3.3.1 S60

8.1.1.0 E-Series ExaScale

ex
7.8.1.0 S-Series
s
7.7.1.0. C-Series
c
pre-7.7.1.0 E-Series TeraScale
et

For detailed information on configuring BGP, refer to the BGP chapter in the FTOS Configuration
Guide.

This chapter contains the following sections:

• BGPv4 Commands
• MBGP Commands
• BGP Extended Communities (RFC 4360)

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 277

 BGPv4 Commands
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an external gateway protocol that transmits interdomain routing
information within and between Autonomous Systems (AS). BGP version 4 (BGPv4) supports
Classless InterDomain Routing (CIDR) and the aggregation of routes and AS paths. Basically, two
routers (called neighbors or peers) exchange information including full routing tables and periodically
send messages to update those routing tables.

Note: FTOS Version 7.7.1 supports 2-Byte (16-bit) and 4-Byte (32-bit) format for
Autonomous System Numbers (ASNs), where the 2-Byte format is 1-65535, the 4-Byte
format is 1-4294967295.

Note: FTOS Version 8.3.1.0 supports Dotted format as well as the Traditional Plain format
for AS Numbers. The dot format is displayed when using the show ip bgp commands. To
determine the comparable dot format for an ASN from a traditional format, use ASN/65536.
ASN%65536.
For more information about using the 2 or 4-Byte format, refer to the FTOS Configuration Guide.

The following commands enable you to configure and enable BGP.

• address-family
• aggregate-address
• bgp always-compare-med
• bgp asnotation
• bgp bestpath as-path ignore
• bgp bestpath med confed
• bgp bestpath med missing-as-best
• bgp bestpath router-id ignore
• bgp client-to-client reflection
• bgp cluster-id
• bgp confederation identifier
• bgp confederation peers
• bgp dampening
• bgp default local-preference
• bgp enforce-first-as
• bgp fast-external-fallover
• bgp four-octet-as-support
• bgp graceful-restart
• bgp log-neighbor-changes
• bgp non-deterministic-med
• bgp recursive-bgp-next-hop
• bgp regex-eval-optz-disable
• bgp router-id
• bgp soft-reconfig-backup
• capture bgp-pdu neighbor
• capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size
• clear ip bgp
• clear ip bgp dampening
• clear ip bgp flap-statistics

278 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

• debug ip bgp
• debug ip bgp dampening
• debug ip bgp events
• debug ip bgp keepalives
• debug ip bgp notifications
• debug ip bgp soft-reconfiguration
• debug ip bgp updates
• default-metric
• description
• distance bgp
• maximum-paths
• neighbor activate
• neighbor advertisement-interval
• neighbor advertisement-start
• neighbor allowas-in
• neighbor default-originate
• neighbor description
• neighbor distribute-list
• neighbor ebgp-multihop
• neighbor fall-over
• neighbor filter-list
• neighbor graceful-restart
• neighbor local-as
• neighbor maximum-prefix
• neighbor next-hop-self
• neighbor password
• neighbor peer-group (assigning peers)
• neighbor peer-group (creating group)
• neighbor peer-group passive
• neighbor remote-as
• neighbor remove-private-as
• neighbor route-map
• neighbor route-reflector-client
• neighbor send-community
• neighbor shutdown
• neighbor soft-reconfiguration inbound
• neighbor timers
• neighbor update-source
• neighbor weight
• network
• network backdoor
• redistribute
• redistribute isis
• redistribute ospf
• router bgp
• show capture bgp-pdu neighbor

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 279

 • show config
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

• show ip bgp
• show ip bgp cluster-list
• show ip bgp community
• show ip bgp community-list
• show ip bgp dampened-paths
• show ip bgp detail
• show ip bgp extcommunity-list
• show ip bgp filter-list
• show ip bgp flap-statistics
• show ip bgp inconsistent-as
• show ip bgp neighbors
• show ip bgp next-hop
• show ip bgp paths
• show ip bgp paths as-path
• show ip bgp paths community
• show ip bgp peer-group
• show ip bgp regexp
• show ip bgp summary
• show running-config bgp
• timers bgp

address-family
ces Enable the IPv4 multicast or the IPv6 address family.

Syntax address-family [ipv4 multicast| ipv6unicast]

Parameters
ipv4 multicast Enter BGPv4 multicast mode.
ipv6 unicast Enter BGPv6 mode.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Command
.

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.

History
Version 6.5.1.0 Introduced

aggregate-address
ces Summarize a range of prefixes to minimize the number of entries in the routing table.

Syntax aggregate-address ip-address mask [advertise-map map-name] [as-set] [attribute-map

map-name] [summary-only] [suppress-map map-name]

280 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 Parameters
ip-address mask Enter the IP address and mask of the route to be the aggregate address. Enter the IP
address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D) and mask in /prefix format (/x).
advertise-map (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords advertise-map followed by the name of a
map-name configured route map to set filters for advertising an aggregate route.
as-set (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword as-set to generate path attribute information and
include it in the aggregate.
AS_SET includes AS_PATH and community information from the routes included
in the aggregated route.
attribute-map (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords attribute-map followed by the name of a
map-name configured route map to modify attributes of the aggregate, excluding AS_PATH
and NEXT_HOP attributes.
summary-only (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary-only to advertise only the aggregate
address. Specific routes will not be advertised.
suppress-map (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords suppress-map followed by the name of a
map-name configured route map to identify which more-specific routes in the aggregate are
suppressed.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP ADDRESS FAMILY

ROUTER BGP ADDRESS FAMILY IPv6

Usage At least one of the routes included in the aggregate address must be in the BGP routing table for the
Information configured aggregate to become active.

Do not add the as-set parameter to the aggregate, if routes within the aggregate are constantly
changing as the aggregate will flap to keep track of the changes in the AS_PATH.

In route maps used in the suppress-map parameter, routes meeting the deny clause are not suppress;
in other words, they are allowed. The opposite is true: routes meeting the permit clause are
suppressed.

If the route is injected via the network command, that route will still appear in the routing table if the
summary-only parameter is configured in the aggregate-address command.

The summary-only parameter suppresses all advertisements. If you want to suppress advertisements to
only specific neighbors, use the neighbor distribute-list command.

In the show ip bgp command, aggregates contain an ‘a’ in the first column and routes suppressed by
the aggregate contain an ‘s’ in the first column.

Command
.

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.

History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 281

 bgp always-compare-med
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Enables you to enable comparison of the MULTI_EXIT_DISC (MED) attributes in the paths from
different external ASs.

Syntax bgp always-compare-med

To disable comparison of MED, enter no bgp always-compare-med.

Defaults Disabled (that is, the software only compares MEDs from neighbors within the same AS).

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage Any update without a MED attribute is the least preferred route
Information
If you enable this command, use the clear ip bgp * command to recompute the best path.

Command
.

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.

History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced command
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

bgp asnotation
ces Enables you to implement a method for AS Number representation in the CLI.

Syntax bgp asnotation [asplain | asdot+ | asdot]

To disable a dot or dot+ representation and return to ASPLAIN, enter no bgp asnotation.

Defaults asplain

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage You must enable bgp four-octet-as-support before enabling this feature. If you disable
Information four-octect-support after using dot or dot+ format, the AS Numbers revert to asplain text.
When you apply an asnotation, it is reflected in the running-configuration. If you change the notation
type, the running-config is updated dynamically and the new notation is shown.

Related
bgp four-octet-as-support Enable 4-byte support for the BGP process
Commands

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced Dynamic Application of AS Notation changes
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced

282 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 Example Figure 10-1. Dynamic changes of the bgp asnotation command in the running config
FTOS(conf)#router bgp 1
FTOS(conf-router_bgp)#bgp asnotation asdot
FTOS(conf-router_bgp)#ex
FTOS(conf)#do show run | grep bgp

router bgp 1
bgp four-octet-as-support
bgp asnotation asdot

FTOS(conf)#router bgp 1
FTOS(conf-router_bgp)#bgp asnotation asdot+
FTOS(conf-router_bgp)#ex

FTOS(conf)#do show run | grep bgp

router bgp 1
bgp four-octet-as-support
bgp asnotation asdot+

FTOS(conf)#router bgp 1
FTOS(conf-router_bgp)#bgp asnotation asplain
FTOS(conf-router_bgp)#ex
FTOS(conf)#do show run |grep bgp
router bgp 1
bgp four-octet-as-support

FTOS(conf)#

bgp bestpath as-path ignore

ces Ignore the AS PATH in BGP best path calculations.

Syntax bgp bestpath as-path ignore

To return to the default, enter no bgp bestpath as-path ignore.

Defaults Disabled (that is, the software considers the AS_PATH when choosing a route as best).

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage If you enable this command, use the clear ip bgp * command to recompute the best path.
Information

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

bgp bestpath med confed

ces Enable MULTI_EXIT_DISC (MED) attribute comparison on paths learned from BGP confederations.

Syntax bgp bestpath med confed

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 283

 To disable MED comparison on BGP confederation paths, enter no bgp bestpath med confed.
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage The software compares the MEDs only if the path contains no external autonomous system numbers. If
Information you enable this command, use the clear ip bgp * command to recompute the best path.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

bgp bestpath med missing-as-best

ces During path selection, indicate preference to paths with missing MED (MULTI_EXIT_DISC) over
those paths with an advertised MED attribute.

Syntax bgp bestpath med missing-as-best

To return to the default selection, use the no bgp bestpath med missing-as-best command.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage The MED is a 4-byte unsigned integer value and the default behavior is to assume a missing MED as
Information 4294967295. This command causes a missing MED to be treated as 0. During the path selection, paths
with a lower MED are preferred over those with a higher MED.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 6.3.1.0 Introduced

bgp bestpath router-id ignore

ces Do not compare router-id information for external paths during best path selection.

Syntax bgp bestpath router-id ignore

To return to the default selection, use the no bgp bestpath router-id ignore command.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage Configuring this option will retain the current best-path. When sessions are subsequently reset, the
Information oldest received path will be chosen as the best-path.

284 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced

bgp client-to-client reflection

ces Enables you to enable route reflection between clients in a cluster.

Syntax bgp client-to-client reflection

To disable client-to-client reflection, enter no bgp client-to-client reflection.

Defaults Enabled when a route reflector is configured.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage Route reflection to clients is not necessary if all client routers are fully meshed.
Information

Related
bgp cluster-id Assign ID to a BGP cluster with two or more route reflectors.
Commands
neighbor route-reflector-client Configure a route reflector and clients.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

bgp cluster-id
ces Assign a cluster ID to a BGP cluster with more than one route reflector.

Syntax bgp cluster-id {ip-address | number}

To delete a cluster ID, use the no bgp cluster-id {ip-address | number} command.

Parameters
ip-address Enter an IP address as the route reflector cluster ID.
number Enter a route reflector cluster ID as a number from 1 to 4294967295.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage When a BGP cluster contains only one route reflector, the cluster ID is the route reflector’s router ID.
Information For redundancy, a BGP cluster may contain two or more route reflectors and you assign a cluster ID
with the bgp cluster-id command. Without a cluster ID, the route reflector cannot recognize route
updates from the other route reflectors within the cluster.

The default format for displaying the cluster-id is dotted decimal, but if you enter the cluster-id as an
integer, it will be displayed as an integer.

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 285

 Related
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

bgp client-to-client reflection Enable route reflection between route reflector and clients.
Commands
neighbor route-reflector-client Configure a route reflector and clients.
show ip bgp cluster-list View paths with a cluster ID.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

bgp confederation identifier

ces Configure an identifier for a BGP confederation.

Syntax bgp confederation identifier as-number

To delete a BGP confederation identifier, use the no bgp confederation identifier as-number
command.

Parameters
as-number Enter the AS number.
Range: 0-65535 (2-Byte) or
1-4294967295 (4-Byte) or
0.1-65535.65535 (Dotted format)

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage You must configure your system to accept 4-Byte formats before entering a 4-Byte AS Number. All the
Information routers in the Confederation must be 4 or 2-Byte identified routers. You cannot mix them.

The autonomous systems configured in this command are visible to the EBGP neighbors. Each
autonomous system is fully meshed and contains a few connections to other autonomous systems. The
next hop, MED, and local preference information is preserved throughout the confederation.

FTOS accepts confederation EBGP peers without a LOCAL_PREF attribute. The software sends
AS_CONFED_SET and accepts AS_CONFED_SET and AS_CONF_SEQ.

Related
bgp four-octet-as-support Enable 4-Byte support for the BGP process.
Commands

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Added support for 4-Byte format

286 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

bgp confederation peers
ces Specify the Autonomous Systems (ASs) that belong to the BGP confederation.

Syntax bgp confederation peers as-number [...as-number]

To return to the default, enter no bgp confederation peers.

Parameters
as-number Enter the AS number.
Range: 0-65535 (2-Byte) or
1-4294967295 (4-Byte) or
0.1-65535.65535 (Dotted format)
...as-number (OPTIONAL) Enter up to 16 confederation numbers.
Range: 0-65535 (2-Byte) or
1-4294967295 (4-Byte) or
0.1-65535.65535 (Dotted format)

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage All the routers in the Confederation must be 4 or 2 byte identified routers. You cannot mix them.
Information
The Autonomous Systems configured in this command are visible to the EBGP neighbors. Each
Autonomous System is fully meshed and contains a few connections to other Autonomous Systems.

After specifying autonomous systems numbers for the BGP confederation, recycle the peers to update
their configuration.

Related
bgp confederation identifier Configure a confederation ID.
Commands
bgp four-octet-as-support Enable 4-byte support for the BGP process.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Added support for 4-byte format

bgp dampening
ces Enable BGP route dampening and configure the dampening parameters.

Syntax bgp dampening [half-life reuse suppress max-suppress-time] [route-map map-name]

To disable route dampening, use the no bgp dampening [half-life reuse suppress
max-suppress-time] [route-map map-name] command.

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 287

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

half-life (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of minutes after which the Penalty is
decreased. After the router assigns a Penalty of 1024 to a route, the Penalty is
decreased by half after the half-life period expires.
Range: 1 to 45.
Default: 15 minutes
reuse (OPTIONAL) Enter a number as the reuse value, which is compared to the
flapping route’s Penalty value. If the Penalty value is less than the reuse
value, the flapping route is once again advertised (or no longer suppressed).
Range: 1 to 20000.
Default: 750
suppress (OPTIONAL) Enter a number as the suppress value, which is compared to
the flapping route’s Penalty value. If the Penalty value is greater than the
suppress value, the flapping route is no longer advertised (that is, it is
suppressed).
Range: 1 to 20000.
Default: 2000
max-suppress-time (OPTIONAL) Enter the maximum number of minutes a route can be
suppressed. The default is four times the half-life value.
Range: 1 to 255.
Default: 60 minutes.
route-map map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword route-map followed by the name of a
configured route map.
Only match commands in the configured route map are supported.

Defaults Disabled.

Command Modes ROUTER-BGP-ADDRESS FAMILY

Usage If you enter bgp dampening, the default values for half-life, reuse, suppress, and max-suppress-time
Information are applied. The parameters are position-dependent, therefore, if you configure one parameter, you must
configure the parameters in the order they appear in the CLI.

Related
show ip bgp dampened-paths View the BGP paths
Commands

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

bgp default local-preference

ces Change the default local preference value for routes exchanged between internal BGP peers.

Syntax bgp default local-preference value

To return to the default value, enter no bgp default local-preference.

288 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 Parameters
value Enter a number to assign to routes as the degree of preference for those routes. When
routes are compared, the higher the degree of preference or local preference value, the
more the route is preferred.
Range: 0 to 4294967295
Default: 100

Defaults 100

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage The bgp default local-preference command setting is applied by all routers within the AS. To set the
Information local preference for a specific route, use the set local-preference command in the ROUTE-MAP mode.

Related
set local-preference Assign a local preference value for a specific route.
Commands

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on C-Series

bgp enforce-first-as
ces Disable (or enable) enforce-first-as check for updates received from EBGP peers.

Syntax bgp enforce-first-as

To turn off the default, use the no bgp enforce-first-as command.

Defaults Enabled

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage This is enabled by default, that is for all updates received from EBGP peers, BGP ensures that the first
Information AS of the first AS segment is always the AS of the peer. If not, the update is dropped and a counter is
incremented. Use the show ip bgp neighbors command to view the “failed enforce-first-as check
counter.

If enforce-first-as is disabled, it can be viewed via the show ip protocols command.

Related
show ip bgp neighbors View the information exchanged by BGP neighbors
Commands
show ip protocols View Information on routing protocols.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support for C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 289

 bgp fast-external-fallover
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Enable the fast external fallover feature, which immediately resets the BGP session if a link to a
directly connected external peer fails.

Syntax bgp fast-external-fallover

To disable fast external fallover, enter no bgp fast-external-fallover.

Defaults Enabled.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage The bgp fast-external-fallover command appears in the show config command output.
Information

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support for C-Series

bgp four-octet-as-support
ces Enable 4-byte support for the BGP process.

Syntax bgp four-octet-as-support

To disable fast external fallover, enter no bgp four-octet-as-support.

Defaults Disabled (supports 2-Byte format)

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage Routers supporting 4-Byte ASNs advertise that function in the OPEN message. The behavior of a
Information 4-Byte router will be slightly different depending on whether it is speaking to a 2-Byte router or a
4-Byte router.

When creating Confederations, all the routers in the Confederation must be 4 or 2 byte identified
routers. You cannot mix them.

Where the 2-Byte format is 1-65535, the 4-Byte format is 1-4294967295. Both formats are accepted,
and the advertisements will reflect the entered format.

For more information about using the 2 or 4-Byte format, refer to the FTOS Configuration Guide.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced command
Introduced support on C-Series

290 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

bgp graceful-restart
ces Enable graceful restart on a BGP neighbor, a BGP node, or designate a local router to support graceful
restart as a receiver only.

Syntax bgp graceful-restart [restart-time seconds] [stale-path-time seconds] [role receiver-only]

To return to the default, enter the no bgp graceful-restart command.

Parameters
restart-time seconds Enter the keyword restart-time followed by the maximum number of
seconds needed to restart and bring-up all the peers.
Range: 1 to 3600 seconds
Default: 120 seconds
stale-path-time seconds Enter the keyword stale-path-time followed by the maximum
number of seconds to wait before restarting a peer’s stale paths.
Default: 360 seconds.
role receiver-only Enter the keyword role receiver-only to designate the local router to
support graceful restart as a receiver only.

Defaults as above

Command Modes ROUTER-BGP

Usage This feature is advertised to BGP neighbors through a capability advertisement. In receiver only mode,
Information BGP saves the advertised routes of peers that support this capability when they restart.

BGP graceful restart is active only when the neighbor becomes established. Otherwise it is disabled.
Graceful-restart applies to all neighbors with established adjacency.

Command
Version 8.3.3.4 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

bgp log-neighbor-changes
ces Enable logging of BGP neighbor resets.

Syntax bgp log-neighbor-changes

To disable logging, enter no bgp log-neighbor-changes.

Defaults Enabled.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage Use the show logging command in the EXEC mode to view BGP neighbor resets.
Information
The bgp log-neighbor-changes command appears in the show config command output.

Related
show logging View logging settings and system messages logged to the system.
Commands

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 291

 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series

History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

bgp non-deterministic-med
ces Compare MEDs of paths from different Autonomous Systems.

Syntax bgp non-deterministic-med

To return to the default, enter no bgp non-deterministic-med.

Defaults Disabled (that is, paths/routes for the same destination but from different ASs will not have their MEDs
compared).

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage In non-deterministic mode, paths are compared in the order in which they arrive. This method can lead
Information to FTOS choosing different best paths from a set of paths, depending on the order in which they are
received from the neighbors since MED may or may not get compared between adjacent paths. In
deterministic mode (no bgp non-deterministic-med), FTOS compares MED between adjacent
paths within an AS group since all paths in the AS group are from the same AS.

When you change the path selection from deterministic to non-deterministic, the path selection for
existing paths remains deterministic until you enter clear ip bgp command to clear existing paths.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

bgp recursive-bgp-next-hop
ces Enable next-hop resolution through other routes learned by BGP.

Syntax bgp recursive-bgp-next-hop

To disable next-hop resolution, use the no bgp recursive-bgp-next-hop command.

Defaults Enabled

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage This command is a knob to disable BGP next-hop resolution via BGP learned routes. During the
Information next-hop resolution, only the first route that the next-hop resolves through is verified for the route’s
protocol source and is checked if the route is learned from BGP or not.

The clear ip bgp command is required for this command to take effect and to keep the BGP database
consistent. Execute the clear ip bgp command right after executing this command.

Related
clear ip bgp Description.
Commands

292 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.2.1.0 Introduced

bgp regex-eval-optz-disable
ces Disables the Regex Performance engine that optimizes complex regular expression with BGP.

Syntax bgp regex-eval-optz-disable

To re-enable optimization engine, use the no bgp regex-eval-optz-disable command.

Defaults Enabled by default

Command Modes ROUTER BGP (conf-router_bgp)

Usage BGP uses regular expressions (regex) to filter route information. In particular, the use of regular
Information expressions to filter routes based on AS-PATHs and communities is quite common. In a large scale
configuration, filtering millions of routes based on regular expressions can be quite CPU intensive, as a
regular expression evaluation involves generation and evaluation of complex finite state machines.

BGP policies, containing regular expressions to match as-path and communities, tend to use a lot of
CPU processing time, which in turn affects the BGP routing convergence. Additionally, the show bgp
commands, which are filtered through regular expressions, use up CPU cycles particularly with large
databases. The Regex Engine Performance Enhancement feature optimizes the CPU usage by caching
and reusing regular expression evaluation results. This caching and reuse may be at the expensive of
RP1 processor memory.

Related
show ip protocols View information on all routing protocols enabled and active on the E-Series.
Commands

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 293

 Example Figure 10-2. Command Example: no bgp regex-eval-optz-disable
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS(conf-router_bgp)#no bgp regex-eval-optz-disable

FTOS(conf-router_bgp)#do show ip protocols
Routing Protocol is "ospf 22222"
Router ID is 2.2.2.2
Area Routing for Networks
51 10.10.10.0/00

Routing Protocol is "bgp 1"

Cluster Id is set to 10.10.10.0
Router Id is set to 10.10.10.0
Fast-external-fallover enabled
Regular expression evaluation optimization enabled
Capable of ROUTE_REFRESH
For Address Family IPv4 Unicast
BGP table version is 0, main routing table version 0
Distance: external 20 internal 200 local 200

FTOS(conf-router_bgp)#

bgp router-id
ces Assign a user-given ID to a BGP router.

Syntax bgp router-id ip-address

To delete a user-assigned IP address, enter no bgp router-id.

Parameters
ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format to reset only that BGP neighbor.

Defaults The router ID is the highest IP address of the Loopback interface or, if no Loopback interfaces are
configured, the highest IP address of a physical interface on the router.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage Peering sessions are reset when you change the router ID of a BGP router.
Information

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

bgp soft-reconfig-backup
ces Use this command only when route-refresh is not negotiated to avoid the peer from resending
messages.

Syntax bgp soft-reconfig-backup

To return to the default setting, use the no bgp soft-reconfig-backup command.

Defaults Off

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

294 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 Usage When soft-reconfiguration is enabled for a neighbor and the clear ip bgp soft in is executed, the
Information update database stored in the router is replayed and updates are reevaluated. With this command, the
replay and update process is triggered only if route-refresh request is not negotiated with the peer. If
the request is indeed negotiated (upon execution of clear ip bgp soft in), then BGP sends a
route-refresh request to the neighbor and receives all of the peer’s updates.

Note: This command is supported in BGP Router Configuration mode for IPv4 Unicast
address only.

Related
clear ip bgp soft in Activate inbound policies without resetting the BGP TCP session.
Commands

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.2.1.0 Introduced

capture bgp-pdu neighbor

ces Enable capture of an IPv4 BGP neighbor packet.

Syntax capture bgp-pdu neighbor ipv4-address direction {both | rx | tx}

To disable capture of the IPv4 BGP neighbor packet, use the no capture bgp-pdu neighbor
ipv4-address command.

Parameters
ipv4-address Enter the IPv4 address of the target BGP neighbor.
direction {both | rx | tx} Enter the keyword direction and a direction— either rx for
inbound, tx for outbound, or both.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Related
capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size Specify a size for the capture buffer.
Commands
show capture bgp-pdu neighbor Display BGP packet capture information

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 295

 capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Set the size of the BGP packet capture buffer. This buffer size pertains to both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses.

Syntax capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size 100-102400000

Parameters
100-102400000 Enter a size for the capture buffer.

Defaults 40960000 bytes.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Related
capture bgp-pdu neighbor Enable capture of an IPv4 BGP neighbor packet.
Commands
capture bgp-pdu neighbor Enable capture of an IPv6 BGP neighbor packet.
show capture bgp-pdu neighbor Display BGP packet capture information for an IPv6 address on the
E-Series.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced

clear ip bgp
ces Reset BGP sessions on the E-Series. The soft parameter (BGP Soft Reconfiguration) clears the policies
without resetting the TCP connection.

Syntax clear ip bgp * | as-number | ip-address [flap-statistics | soft [in | out]]

Parameters
* Enter an asterisk ( * ) to reset all BGP sessions.
as-number Enter the AS number to reset all neighbors belonging to that AS.
Range: 0-65535 (2-Byte) or
1-4294967295 (4-Byte) or
0.1-65535.65535 (Dotted format)
ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format to reset all prefixes from that
neighbor.
flap-statistics (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword flap-statistics to reset the flap statistics
on all prefixes from that neighbor.
soft (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword soft to configure and activate policies
without resetting the BGP TCP session, that is, BGP Soft Reconfiguration.
Note: If you enter clear ip bgp ip-address soft, both inbound and
outbound policies are reset.
in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to activate only inbound policies.
out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to activate only outbound policies.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

296 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 Related
bgp recursive-bgp-next-hop Disable next-hop resolution through other routes learned by BGP
Commands
bgp soft-reconfig-backup Turn on BGP Soft Reconfiguration

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 6.5.1.0 Expanded to include the as-number option

clear ip bgp peer-group

ces Reset a peer-group’s BGP sessions.

Syntax clear ip bgp peer-group peer-group-name

Parameters
peer-group-name Enter the peer group name to reset the BGP sessions within that peer group.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

clear ip bgp dampening

ces Clear information on route dampening and return suppressed route to active state.

Syntax clear ip bgp dampening [ip-address mask]

Parameters
ip-address mask (OPTIONAL) Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format and the prefix mask
in slash format (/x) to clear dampening information only that BGP neighbor.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Usage After you enter this command, the software deletes history routes and returns suppressed routes to
Information active state.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 297

 clear ip bgp flap-statistics
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Clear BGP flap statistics, which includes number of flaps and the time of the last flap.

Syntax clear ip bgp flap-statistics [ip-address mask | filter-list as-path-name | regexp

regular-expression]

Parameters
ip-address mask (OPTIONAL) Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format and the prefix mask
in slash format (/x) to reset only that prefix.
filter-list (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword filter-list followed by the name of a
as-path-name configured AS-PATH list.
regexp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword regexp followed by regular expressions. Use
regular-expression one or a combination of the following:
• . = (period) any single character (including a white space)
• * = (asterisk) the sequences in a pattern (0 or more sequences)
• + = (plus) the sequences in a pattern (1 or more sequences)
• ? = (question mark) sequences in a pattern (either 0 or 1 sequences). You
must enter an escape sequence (CTRL+v) prior to entering the ? regular
expression.
• [ ] = (brackets) a range of single-character patterns.
• ( ) = (parenthesis) groups a series of pattern elements to a single element
• { } = (braces) minimum and the maximum match count
• ^ = (caret) the beginning of the input string. If the caret is used at the
beginning of a sequence or range, it matches on everything BUT the
characters specified.
• $ = (dollar sign) the end of the output string.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Usage If you enter clear ip bgp flap-statistics without any parameters, all statistics are cleared.
Information

Related
show debugging View enabled debugging operations.
Commands
show ip bgp flap-statistics View BGP flap statistics.
undebug all Disable all debugging operations.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

debug ip bgp
ces Display all information on BGP, including BGP events, keepalives, notifications, and updates.

Syntax debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name] [in | out]

To disable all BGP debugging, enter no debug ip bgp.

298 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
peer-group Enter the keyword peer-group followed by the name of the peer group.
peer-group-name
in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view only information on inbound BGP
routes.
out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view only information on outbound
BGP routes.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Usage To view information on both incoming and outgoing routes, do not include the in and out parameters
Information in the debugging command. The in and out parameters cancel each other; for example, if you enter
debug ip bgp in and then enter debug ip bgp out, you will not see information on the incoming
routes.

Entering a no debug ip bgp command removes all configured debug commands for BGP.

Related
debug ip bgp events View information about BGP events.
Commands
debug ip bgp keepalives View information about BGP keepalives.
debug ip bgp notifications View information about BGP notifications.
debug ip bgp updates View information about BGP updates.
show debugging View enabled debugging operations.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

debug ip bgp dampening

ces Display information on routes being dampened.

Syntax debug ip bgp dampening [in | out]

To disable debugging, enter no debug ip bgp dampening.

Parameters
in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view only inbound dampened routes.
out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view only outbound dampened routes.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Usage Enter no debug ip bgp command to remove all configured debug commands for BGP.
Information

Related
show debugging View enabled debugging operations.
Commands
show ip bgp dampened-paths View BGP dampened routes.

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 299

 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.

History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

debug ip bgp events

ces Display information on local BGP state changes and other BGP events.

Syntax debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name] events [in | out]

To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name]

events command.

Parameters
ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
peer-group (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword peer-group followed by the name of the
peer-group-name peer group.
in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view only events on inbound BGP
messages.
out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view only events on outbound BGP
messages.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Usage Enter no debug ip bgp command to remove all configured debug commands for BGP.
Information

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

debug ip bgp keepalives

ces Display information about BGP keepalive messages.

Syntax debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name] keepalives [in | out]

To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name]

keepalives [in | out] command.

Parameters
ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
peer-group (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword peer-group followed by the name of the
peer-group-name peer group.
in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view only inbound keepalive messages.
out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view only outbound keepalive
messages.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

300 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 Usage Enter no debug ip bgp command to remove all configured debug commands for BGP.
Information

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

debug ip bgp notifications

ces Enables you to view information about BGP notifications received from neighbors.

Syntax debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name] notifications [in | out]

To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name]

notifications [in | out] command.

Parameters
ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
peer-group (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword peer-group followed by the name of the
peer-group-name peer group.
in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view BGP notifications received from
neighbors.
out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view BGP notifications sent to
neighbors.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Usage Enter no debug ip bgp command to remove all configured debug commands for BGP.
Information

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

debug ip bgp soft-reconfiguration

ces Enable soft-reconfiguration debug.

Syntax debug ip bgp {ip-address | peer-group-name} soft-reconfiguration

To disable, use the no debug ip bgp {ip-address | peer-group-name} soft-reconfiguration

command.

Parameters
ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
peer-group-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the peer group to disable or enable all routers
within the peer group.

Defaults Disabled

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 301

 Command Modes EXEC Privilege
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Usage This command turns on BGP soft-reconfiguration inbound debugging. If no neighbor is specified,
Information debug is turned on for all neighbors.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.2.1.0 Introduced

debug ip bgp updates

ces Enables you to view information about BGP updates.

Syntax debug ip bgp updates [in | out | prefix-list prefix-list-name]

To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name]

updates [in | out] command.

Parameters
in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view only BGP updates received from
neighbors.
out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view only BGP updates sent to
neighbors.
prefix-list (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword prefix-list followed by the name of an
prefix-list-name established prefix list. If the prefix list is not configured, the default is permit (to
allow all routes).
ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
peer-group-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the peer group to disable or enable all routers
within the peer group.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Usage Enter no debug ip bgp command to remove all configured debug commands for BGP.
Information

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.7.1 Introduced support on C-Series

default-metric
ces Enables you to change the metrics of redistributed routes to locally originated routes. Use this
command with the redistribute command.

Syntax default-metric number

To return to the default setting, enter no default-metric.

302 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 Parameters
number Enter a number as the metric to be assigned to routes from other protocols.
Range: 1 to 4294967295.

Defaults 0

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage The default-metric command in BGP sets the value of the BGP MULTI_EXIT_DISC (MED) attribute
Information for redistributed routes only.

Related
bgp always-compare-med Enable comparison of all BGP MED attributes.
Commands
redistribute Redistribute routes from other routing protocols into BGP.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

description
ces Enter a description of the BGP routing protocol

Syntax description {description}

To remove the description, use the no description {description} command.

Parameters
description Enter a description to identify the BGP protocol (80 characters maximum).

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
pre-7.7.1.0 Introduced

Related
router bgp Enter ROUTER mode on the switch.
Commands

distance bgp
ces Configure three administrative distances for routes.

Syntax distance bgp external-distance internal-distance local-distance

To return to default values, enter no distance bgp.

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 303

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

external-distance Enter a number to assign to routes learned from a neighbor external to the AS.
Range: 1 to 255.
Default: 20
internal-distance Enter a number to assign to routes learned from a router within the AS.
Range: 1 to 255.
Default: 200
local-distance Enter a number to assign to routes learned from networks listed in the network
command.
Range: 1 to 255.
Default: 200

Defaults external-distance = 20; internal-distance = 200; local-distance = 200.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Caution: Dell Networking recommends that you do not change the administrative distance
of internal routes. Changing the administrative distances may cause routing table
inconsistencies.

Usage The higher the administrative distance assigned to a route means that your confidence in that route is
Information low. Routes assigned an administrative distance of 255 are not installed in the routing table. Routes
from confederations are treated as internal BGP routes.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

maximum-paths
ces Configure the maximum number of parallel routes (multipath support) BGP supports.

Syntax maximum-paths {ebgp | ibgp} number

To return to the default values, enter no maximum-paths.

Parameters
ebgp Enter the keyword ebgp to enable multipath support for External BGP routes.
ibgp Enter the keyword ibgp to enable multipath support for Internal BGP routes.
number Enter a number as the maximum number of parallel paths.
Range: 1 to 16
Default: 1

Defaults 1

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage If you enable this command, use the clear ip bgp * command to recompute the best path.
Information

304 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

neighbor activate
ces This command allows the specified neighbor/peer group to be enabled for the current AFI/SAFI
(Address Family Identifier/Subsequent Address Family Identifier).

Syntax neighbor [ip-address | peer-group-name] activate

To disable, use the no neighbor [ip-address | peer-group-name] activate command.

Parameters
ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
peer-group-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the peer group
activate Enter the keyword activate to enable the neighbor/peer group in the new
AFI/SAFI.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes CONFIGURATION-ROUTER-BGP-ADDRESS FAMILY

Usage By default, when a neighbor/peer group configuration is created in the Router BGP context, it is
Information enabled for the IPv4/Unicast AFI/SAFI. By using activate in the new context, the neighbor/peer
group is enabled for AFI/SAFI.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

neighbor advertisement-interval
ces Set the advertisement interval between BGP neighbors or within a BGP peer group.

Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} advertisement-interval seconds

To return to the default value, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name}

advertisement-interval command.

Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to set the advertisement interval for all routers
in the peer group.
seconds Enter a number as the time interval, in seconds, between BGP advertisements.
Range: 0 to 600 seconds.
Default: 5 seconds for internal BGP peers; 30 seconds for external BGP peers.

Defaults seconds = 5 seconds (internal peers); seconds = 30 seconds (external peers)

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 305

 Command Modes ROUTER BGP
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

neighbor advertisement-start
ces Set the minimum interval before starting to send BGP routing updates.

Syntax neighbor {ip-address} advertisement-start seconds

To return to the default value, use the no neighbor {ip-address} advertisement-start command.

Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
seconds Enter a number as the time interval, in seconds, before BGP route updates are
sent.
Range: 0 to 3600 seconds.

Defaults none

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

neighbor allowas-in
ces Set the number of times an AS number can occur in the AS path

Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} allowas-in number

To return to the default value, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} allowas-in
command.

Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to set the advertisement interval for all routers
in the peer group.
number Enter a number of times to allow this neighbor ID to use the AS path.
Range: 1 to 10.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Related
bgp four-octet-as-support Enable 4-Byte support for the BGP process.
Commands

306 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and E-Series

neighbor default-originate
ces Inject the default route to a BGP peer or neighbor.

Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} default-originate [route-map map-name]

To remove a default route, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} default-originate

command.

Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to set the default route of all routers in that peer
group.
route-map map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword route-map followed by the name of a
configured route map.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage If you apply a route map to a BGP peer or neighbor with the neighbor default-originate command
Information configured, the software does not apply the set filters in the route map to that BGP peer or neighbor.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

neighbor description
ces Assign a character string describing the neighbor or group of neighbors (peer group).

Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} description text

To delete a description, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} description

command.

Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group.
text Enter a continuous text string up to 80 characters.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 307

 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.

History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

neighbor distribute-list
ces Distribute BGP information via an established prefix list.

Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} distribute-list prefix-list-name {in | out}

To delete a neighbor distribution list, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name}

distribute-list prefix-list-name {in | out} command.

Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to apply the distribute list filter to all routers
in the peer group.
prefix-list-name Enter the name of an established prefix list.
If the prefix list is not configured, the default is permit (to allow all routes).
in Enter the keyword in to distribute only inbound traffic.
out Enter the keyword out to distribute only outbound traffic.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage Other BGP filtering commands include: neighbor filter-list, ip as-path access-list, and neighbor
Information route-map.

Related
ip as-path access-list Configure IP AS-Path ACL.
Commands
neighbor filter-list Assign a AS-PATH list to a neighbor or peer group.
neighbor route-map Assign a route map to a neighbor or peer group.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

neighbor ebgp-multihop
ces Attempt and accept BGP connections to external peers on networks that are not directly connected.

Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} ebgp-multihop [ttl]

To disallow and disconnect connections, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name}

ebgp-multihop command.

308 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group.
ttl (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of hops as the Time to Live (ttl) value.
Range: 1 to 255.
Default: 255

Defaults Disabled.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage To prevent loops, the neighbor ebgp-multihop command will not install default routes of the multihop
Information peer. Networks not directly connected are not considered valid for best path selection.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

neighbor fall-over
ecs Enable or disable fast fall-over for BGP neighbors.

Syntax neighbor {ipv4-address | peer-group-name} fall-over

To disable, use the no neighbor {ipv4-address | peer-group-name} fall-over command.

Parameters
ipv4-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage When fall-over is enabled, BGP keeps track of IP or IPv6 reachability to the peer remote address and
Information the peer local address. Whenever either address becomes unreachable (i.e, no active route exists in the
routing table for peer IP or IPv6 destination/local address), BGP brings down the session with the peer.

Related
show ip bgp neighbors Display information on the BGP neighbors
Commands

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 309

 neighbor filter-list
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Configure a BGP filter based on the AS-PATH attribute.

Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} filter-list as-path-name {in | out}

To delete a BGP filter, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} filter-list

as-path-name {in | out} command.

Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to apply the filter to all routers in the
peer group.
as-path-name Enter the name of an established AS-PATH access list (up to 140
characters).
If the AS-PATH access list is not configured, the default is permit (allow
routes).
in Enter the keyword in to filter inbound BGP routes.
out Enter the keyword out to filter outbound BGP routes.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage Use the ip as-path access-list command syntax in the CONFIGURATION mode to enter the AS-PATH
Information ACL mode and configure AS-PATH filters to deny or permit BGP routes based on information in their
AS-PATH attribute.

Related
ip as-path access-list Enter AS-PATH ACL mode and configure AS-PATH filters.
Commands

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, ACL names are up
to 16 characters long.
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

neighbor graceful-restart
ces Enable graceful restart on a BGP neighbor.

Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} graceful-restart [restart-time seconds]

[stale-path-time seconds] [role receiver-only]

To return to the default, enter the no bgp graceful-restart command.

Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to apply the filter to all routers in the
peer group.

310 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 restart-time seconds Enter the keyword restart-time followed by the maximum number of
seconds needed to restart and bring-up all the peers.
Range: 1 to 3600 seconds
Default: 120 seconds
stale-path-time seconds Enter the keyword stale-path-time followed by the maximum
number of seconds to wait before restarting a peer’s stale paths.
Default: 360 seconds.
role receiver-only Enter the keyword role receiver-only to designate the local router to
support graceful restart as a receiver only.

Defaults as above

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage This feature is advertised to BGP neighbors through a capability advertisement. In receiver only mode,
Information BGP saves the advertised routes of peers that support this capability when they restart.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

neighbor local-as
ces Configure Internal BGP (IBGP) routers to accept external routes from neighbors with a local AS
number in the AS number path

Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} local-as as-number [no-prepend]

To return to the default value, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} local-as
command.

Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to set the advertisement interval for all routers
in the peer group.
as-number Enter the AS number to reset all neighbors belonging to that AS.
Range: 0-65535 (2-Byte) or
1-4294967295 (4-Byte) or
0.1-65535.65535 (Dotted format)
no prepend Specifies that local AS values are not prepended to announcements from the
neighbor.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Related
bgp four-octet-as-support Enable 4-Byte support for the BGP process.
Commands

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 311

 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.

History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced command
Introduced support on C-Series

neighbor maximum-prefix
ces Control the number of network prefixes received.

Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} maximum-prefix maximum [threshold]

[warning-only]

To return to the default values, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name}

maximum-prefix maximum command.

Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group.
maximum Enter a number as the maximum number of prefixes allowed for this BGP router.
Range: 1 to 4294967295.
threshold (OPTIONAL) Enter a number to be used as a percentage of the maximum value.
When the number of prefixes reaches this percentage of the maximum value, the
E-Series software sends a message.
Range: 1 to 100 percent.
Default: 75
warning-only (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword warning-only to set the router to send a log
message when the maximum value is reached. If this parameter is not set, the
router stops peering when the maximum number of prefixes is reached.

Defaults threshold = 75

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage If the neighbor maximum-prefix is configured and the neighbor receives more prefixes than allowed by
Information the neighbor maximum-prefix command configuration, the neighbor goes down and the show ip bgp
summary command displays (prfxd) in the State/PfxRcd column for that neighbor. The neighbor
remains down until you enter the clear ip bgp command for the neighbor or the peer group to which the
neighbor belongs or you enter neighbor shutdown and neighbor no shutdown commands.

Related
show ip bgp summary Displays the current BGP configuration.
Commands

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

312 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

neighbor next-hop-self
ces Enables you to configure the router as the next hop for a BGP neighbor. (This command is used for
IBGP).

Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} next-hop-self

To return to the default setting, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} next-hop-self
command.

Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group.

Defaults Disabled.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage If the set next-hop command in the ROUTE-MAP mode is configured, its configuration takes
Information precedence over the neighbor next-hop-self command.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

neighbor password
ces Enable Message Digest 5 (MD5) authentication on the TCP connection between two neighbors.

Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} password [encryption-type] password

To delete a password, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} password command.

Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the router to be included in the peer group.
peer-group-name Enter the name of a configured peer group.
encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter 7 as the encryption type for the password entered. 7 means
that the password is encrypted and hidden.
password Enter a text string up to 80 characters long. The first character of the password
must be a letter.
You cannot use spaces in the password.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage Configure the same password on both BGP peers or a connection does not occur. When you configure
Information MD5 authentication between two BGP peers, each segment of the TCP connection between them is
verified and the MD5 digest is checked on every segment sent on the TCP connection.

Configuring a password for a neighbor will cause an existing session to be torn down and a new one
established.

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 313

 If you specify a BGP peer group by using the peer-group-name parameter, all the members of the peer
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

group will inherit the characteristic configured with this command.

If you configure a password on one neighbor, but you have not configured a password for the
neighboring router, the following message appears on the console while the routers attempt to establish
a BGP session between them:

%RPM0-P:RP1 %KERN-6-INT: No BGP MD5 from [peer's IP address]

:179 to [local router's IP address]:65524

Also, if you configure different passwords on the two routers, the following message appears on the
console:

%RPM0-P:RP1 %KERN-6-INT: BGP MD5 password mismatch from

[peer's IP address] : 11502 to [local router's IP address] :179

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

neighbor peer-group (assigning peers)

ces Enables you to assign one peer to a existing peer group.

Syntax neighbor ip-address peer-group peer-group-name

To delete a peer from a peer group, use the no neighbor ip-address peer-group peer-group-name
command.

Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the router to be included in the peer group.
peer-group-name Enter the name of a configured peer group.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage You can assign up to 256 peers to one peer group.

Information
When you add a peer to a peer group, it inherits all the peer group’s configured parameters. A peer
cannot become part of a peer group if any of the following commands are configured on the peer:

• neighbor advertisement-interval
• neighbor distribute-list out
• neighbor filter-list out
• neighbor next-hop-self
• neighbor route-map out
• neighbor route-reflector-client
• neighbor send-community

314 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 A neighbor may keep its configuration after it was added to a peer group if the neighbor’s
configuration is more specific than the peer group’s, and the neighbor’s configuration does not affect
outgoing updates.

A peer group must exist before you add a peer to it. If the peer group is disabled (shutdown) the peers
within the group are also disabled (shutdown).

Related
clear ip bgp Resets BGP sessions.
Commands
neighbor peer-group (creating group) Create a peer group.
show ip bgp peer-group View BGP peers.
show ip bgp neighbors View BGP neighbors configurations.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

neighbor peer-group (creating group)

ces Enables you to create a peer group and assign it a name.

Syntax neighbor peer-group-name peer-group

To delete a peer group, use the no neighbor peer-group-name peer-group command.

Parameters
peer-group-name Enter a text string up to 16 characters long as the name of the peer group.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage When a peer group is created, it is disabled (shut mode).

Information

Related
neighbor peer-group (assigning peers) Assign routers to a peer group.
Commands
neighbor remote-as Assign a indirectly connected AS to a neighbor or peer group.
neighbor shutdown Disable a peer or peer group.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

neighbor peer-group passive

ces Enable passive peering on a BGP peer group, that is, the peer group does not send an OPEN message,
but will respond to one.

Syntax neighbor peer-group-name peer-group passive

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 315

 To delete a passive peer-group, use the no neighbor peer-group-name peer-group passive
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

command.

Parameters
peer-group-name Enter a text string up to 16 characters long as the name of the peer group.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage After you configure a peer group as passive, you must assign it a subnet using the neighbor
Information soft-reconfiguration inbound command.

Related
neighbor soft-reconfiguration inbound Assign a subnet to a dynamically-configured BGP neighbor.
Commands

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

neighbor remote-as
ces Create and specify the remote peer to the BGP neighbor.

Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} remote-as number

To delete a remote AS entry, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} remote-as

number command.

Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor to enter the remote AS in its routing table.
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to enter the remote AS into routing tables of all
routers within the peer group.
number Enter a number of the AS.
Range: 0-65535 (2-Byte) or 1-4294967295 (4-Byte)

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage You must configure your system to accept 4-Byte formats before entering a 4-Byte AS Number. If the
Information number parameter is the same as the AS number used in the router bgp command, the remote AS entry
in the neighbor is considered an internal BGP peer entry.

This command creates a peer and the newly created peer is disabled (shutdown).

Related
router bgp Enter the ROUTER BGP mode and configure routes in an AS.
Commands
bgp four-octet-as-support Enable 4-Byte support for the BGP process.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History

316 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Added 4-Byte support.

neighbor remove-private-as
ces Remove private AS numbers from the AS-PATH of outgoing updates.

Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} remove-private-as

To return to the default, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} remove-private-as

command.

Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor to remove the private AS numbers.
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to remove the private AS numbers

Defaults Disabled (that is, private AS number are not removed).

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage Applies to EBGP neighbors only.

Information
You must configure your system to accept 4-Byte formats before entering a 4-Byte AS Number.

If the AS-PATH contains both public and private AS number or contains AS numbers of an EBGP
neighbor, the private AS numbers are not removed.

If a confederation contains private AS numbers in its AS-PATH, the software removes the private AS
numbers only if they follow the confederation numbers in the AS path.

Private AS numbers are 64512 to 65535 (2-Byte).

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Added 4-Byte support.

neighbor route-map
ces Apply an established route map to either incoming or outbound routes of a BGP neighbor or peer
group.

Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} route-map map-name {in | out}

To remove the route map, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} route-map
map-name {in | out} command.

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 317

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.

peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group.
map-name Enter the name of an established route map.
If the Route map is not configured, the default is deny (to drop all routes).
in Enter the keyword in to filter inbound routes.
out Enter the keyword out to filter outbound routes.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage When you apply a route map to outbound routes, only routes that match at least one section of the route
Information map are permitted.

If you identify a peer group by name, the peers in that peer group inherit the characteristics in the
Route map used in this command. If you identify a peer by IP address, the Route map overwrites either
the inbound or outbound policies on that peer.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

neighbor route-reflector-client
ces Configure a neighbor as a member of a route reflector cluster.

Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} route-reflector-client

To indicate that the neighbor is not a route reflector client or to delete a route reflector configuration,
use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} route-reflector-client command.

Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group.
All routers in the peer group receive routes from a route reflector.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage The first time you enter this command it configures the neighbor as a route reflector and members of
Information the route-reflector cluster. Internal BGP (IBGP) speakers do not need to be fully meshed if you
configure a route reflector.

When all clients of a route reflector are disabled, the neighbor is no longer a route reflector.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

318 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

neighbor send-community
ces Send a COMMUNITY attribute to a BGP neighbor or peer group. A COMMUNITY attribute indicates
that all routes with that attribute belong to the same community grouping.

Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} send-community

To disable sending a COMMUNITY attribute, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name}

send-community command.

Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the peer router in dotted decimal format.
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to send a COMMUNITY attribute to all
routers within the peer group.

Defaults Not configured and COMMUNITY attributes are not sent to neighbors.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage To configure a COMMUNITY attribute, use the set community command in the ROUTE-MAP mode.
Information

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

neighbor shutdown
ces Disable a BGP neighbor or peer group.

Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} shutdown

To enable a disabled neighbor or peer group, use the neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} no
shutdown command.

Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to disable or enable all routers within the peer
group.

Defaults Enabled (that is, BGP neighbors and peer groups are disabled.)

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage Peers that are enabled within a peer group are disabled when their peer group is disabled.
Information
The neighbor shutdown command terminates all BGP sessions on the BGP neighbor or BGP peer
group. Use this command with caution as it terminates the specified BGP sessions. When a neighbor or
peer group is shutdown, use the show ip bgp summary command to confirm its status.

Related
show ip bgp summary Displays the current BGP configuration.
Commands
show ip bgp neighbors Displays the current BGP neighbors.

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 319

 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.

History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

neighbor soft-reconfiguration inbound

ces Enable soft-reconfiguration for BGP.

Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} soft-reconfiguration inbound

To disable, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} soft-reconfiguration inbound

command.

Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to disable or enable all routers within the
peer group.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage This command enables soft-reconfiguration for the BGP neighbor specified. BGP will store all the
Information updates received by the neighbor but will not reset the peer-session.

Caution: Inbound update storage is a memory-intensive operation. The entire BGP update
database from the neighbor is stored in memory regardless of the inbound policy results
applied on the neighbor.

Note: This command is supported in BGP Router Configuration mode for IPv4 Unicast
address only.

Related
show ip bgp neighbors Display routes received by a neighbor
Commands

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced

neighbor subnet
ces Enable passive peering so that the members of the peer group are dynamic

Syntax neighbor peer-group-name subnet subnet-number mask

To remove passive peering, use the no neighbor peer-group-name subnet subnet-number mask
command.

320 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 Parameters
subnet-number Enter a subnet number in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.) as the allowable range of
addresses included in the Peer group.
To allow all addresses, enter 0.0.0.0/0.
mask Enter a prefix mask in / prefix-length format (/x).

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

neighbor timers
ces Set keepalive and hold time timers for a BGP neighbor or a peer group.

Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} timers keepalive holdtime

To return to the default values, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} timers
command.

Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the peer router in dotted decimal format.
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to set the timers for all routers within the peer
group.
keepalive Enter a number for the time interval, in seconds, between keepalive messages sent
to the neighbor routers.
Range: 1 to 65535
Default: 60 seconds
holdtime Enter a number for the time interval, in seconds, between the last keepalive
message and declaring the router dead.
Range: 3 to 65535
Default: 180 seconds

Defaults keepalive = 60 seconds; holdtime = 180 seconds.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage Timer values configured with the neighbor timers command override the timer values configured with
Information the any other command.

When two neighbors, configured with different keepalive and holdtime values, negotiate for new
values, the resulting values will be as follows:

• the lower of the holdtime values is the new holdtime value, and
• whichever is the lower value; one-third of the new holdtime value, or the configured keepalive
value is the new keepalive value.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 321

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series

Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

neighbor update-source
ces Enable the E-Series software to use Loopback interfaces for TCP connections for BGP sessions.

Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} update-source interface

To use the closest interface, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} update-source
interface command.

Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the peer router in dotted decimal format.
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to disable all routers within the peer group.
interface Enter the keyword loopback followed by a number of the loopback interface.
Range: 0 to 16383.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage Loopback interfaces are up constantly and the BGP session may need one interface constantly up to
Information stabilize the session. The neighbor update-source command is not necessary for directly connected
internal BGP sessions.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

neighbor weight
ces Assign a weight to the neighbor connection, which is used to determine the best path.

Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} weight weight

To remove a weight value, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} weight command.

Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the peer router in dotted decimal format.
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to disable all routers within the peer group.
weight Enter a number as the weight.
Range: 0 to 65535
Default: 0

Defaults 0

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

322 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 Usage In the FTOS best path selection process, the path with the highest weight value is preferred.
Information

Note: Reset the neighbor connection (clear ip bgp * command) to apply the weight to the
connection and recompute the best path.

If the set weight command is configured in a route map applied to this neighbor, the weight set in that
command overrides the weight set in the neighbor weight command.

Related
set weight Assign a weight to all paths meeting the route map criteria.
Commands

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

network
ces Specify the networks for the BGP process and enter them in the BGP routing table.

Syntax network ip-address mask [route-map map-name]

To remove a network, use the no network ip-address mask [route-map map-name] command.

Parameters
ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format of the network.
mask Enter the mask of the IP address in the slash prefix length format (for example, /24).
The mask appears in command outputs in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D).
route-map (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword route-map followed by the name of an established route
map-name map.
Only the following ROUTE-MAP mode commands are supported:
• match ip address
• set community
• set local-preference
• set metric
• set next-hop
• set origin
• set weight
If the route map is not configured, the default is deny (to drop all routes).

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage FTOS software resolves the network address configured by the network command with the routes in
Information the main routing table to ensure that the networks are reachable via non-BGP routes and non-default
routes.

Related
redistribute Redistribute routes into BGP.
Commands

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 323

 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.

History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

network backdoor
ces Specify this IGP route as the preferred route.

Syntax network ip-address mask backdoor

To remove a network, use the no network ip-address mask backdoor command.

Parameters
ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format of the network.
mask Enter the mask of the IP address in the slash prefix length format (for example, /24).
The mask appears in command outputs in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D).

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage Though FTOS does not generate a route due to backdoor config, there is an option for injecting/
Information sourcing a local route in presence of network backdoor config on a learned route.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

redistribute
ces Redistribute routes into BGP.

Syntax redistribute {connected | static} [route-map map-name]

To disable redistribution, use the no redistribution {connected | static} command.

Parameters
connected Enter the keyword connected to redistribute routes from physically connected
interfaces.

324 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 static Enter the keyword static to redistribute manually configured routes.
These routes are treated as incomplete routes.
route-map (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword route-map followed by the name of an established
map-name route map.
Only the following ROUTE-MAP mode commands are supported:
• match ip address
• set community
• set local-preference
• set metric
• set next-hop
• set origin
• set weight
If the route map is not configured, the default is deny (to drop all routes).

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage With FTOS version 8.3.1.0 and later, the redistribute command can be used to advertise the IGP cost as
Information the MED on redistributed routes. When the route-map is set with metric-type internal and applied
outbound to an EBGP peer/peer-group, the advertised routes corresponding to those peer/peer-group
will have IGP cost set as MED.

If you do not configure default-metric command, in addition to the redistribute command, or there is no
route map to set the metric, the metric for redistributed static and connected is “0”.

To redistribute the default route (0.0.0.0/0) configure the neighbor default-originate command.

Related
neighbor default-originate Inject the default route.
Commands

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced ability to substitute IGP cost for MED when a peer/peer-group outbound
route-map is set as internal.
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

redistribute isis
e Redistribute IS-IS routes into BGP.

Syntax redistribute isis [WORD] [level-1| level-1-2 | level-2] [metric metric-value] [route-map
map-name]

To return to the default values, enter the no redistribute isis [WORD] [level-1| level-1-2 | level-2]
[metric metric-value] [route-map map-name] command.

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 325

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

WORD ISO routing area tag

level-1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword level-1 to independently redistributed into
Level 1 routes only.
level-1-2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword level-1-2 to independently redistributed
into Level 1 and Level 2 routes. This is the default.
level-2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword level-2 to independently redistributed into
Level 2 routes only
metric metric-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric followed by the metric value used
for the redistributed route. Use a metric value that is consistent with the
destination protocol.
Range: 0 to 16777215
Default: 0
route-map map-name Enter the keyword route-map followed by the map name that is an
identifier for a configured route map.
The route map should filter imported routes from the source routing protocol
to the current routing protocol.
If you do not specify a map-name, all routes are redistributed. If you specify
a keyword, but fail to list route map tags, no routes will be imported.

Defaults level-1-2

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Example Figure 10-3. Command Example: redistribute isis

FTOS(conf)#router bgp 1
FTOS(conf-router_bgp)#redistribute isis level-1 metric 44 route-map rmap-is2bgp
FTOS(conf-router_bgp)#show running-config bgp
!
router bgp 1
redistribute isis level-1 metric 44 route-map rmap-is2bgp

Usage With FTOS version 8.3.1.0 and later, the redistribute command can be used to advertise the IGP cost as
Information the MED on redistributed routes. When the route-map is set with metric-type internal and applied
outbound to an EBGP peer/peer-group, the advertised routes corresponding to those peer/peer-group
will have IGP cost set as MED.

IS-IS to BGP redistribution supports matching of level-1 or level-2 routes or all routes (default). More
advanced match options can be performed using route maps. The metric value of redistributed routes
can be set by the redistribution command.

Command
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced ability to substitute IGP cost for MED when a peer/peer-group outbound
History
route-map is set as internal.
Version 6.3.1.0 Introduced

redistribute ospf
ces Redistribute OSPF routes into BGP.

Syntax redistribute ospf process-id [[match external {1 | 2}] [match internal]] [route-map
map-name]

326 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 To stop redistribution of OSPF routes, use the no redistribute ospf process-id command.

Parameters
process-id Enter the number of the OSPF process.
Range: 1 to 65535
match external {1 | 2} (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords match external to redistribute OSPF
external routes. You can specify 1 or 2 to redistribute those routes only.
match internal (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords match internal to redistribute OSPF
internal routes only.
route-map map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords route-map followed by the name of a
configured Route map.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Usage With FTOS version 8.3.1.0 and later, the redistribute command can be used to advertise the IGP cost as
Information the MED on redistributed routes. When the route-map is set with metric-type internal and applied
outbound to an EBGP peer/peer-group, the advertised routes corresponding to those peer/peer-group
will have IGP cost set as MED.

When you enter redistribute isis process-id command without any other parameters, FTOS
redistributes all OSPF internal routes, external type 1 routes, and external type 2 routes. This feature is
not supported by an RFC.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced ability to substitute IGP cost for MED when a peer/peer-group
outbound route-map is set as internal.
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

router bgp
ces Enter ROUTER BGP mode to configure and enable BGP.

Syntax router bgp as-number

To disable BGP, use the no router bgp as-number command.

Parameters
as-number Enter the AS number.
Range: 1 to 65535 (2-Byte) or 1-4294967295 (4-Byte) or
0.1-65535.65535 (Dotted format)

Defaults Not enabled.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 327

 Example Figure 10-4. Command Example: router bgp
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS(conf)#router bgp 3
FTOS(conf-router_bgp)#

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

Usage At least one interface must be in Layer 3 mode for the router bgp command to be accepted. If no
Information interfaces are enabled for Layer 3, an error message appears: % Error: No router id
configured.

show capture bgp-pdu neighbor

ces Display BGP packet capture information for an IPv4 address on the system.

Syntax show capture bgp-pdu neighbor ipv4-address

Parameters
ipv4-address Enter the IPv4 address (in dotted decimal format) of the BGP address to display
packet information for that address.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Example Figure 10-5. Command Example: show capture bgp-pdu neighbor

FTOS(conf-router_bgp)#show capture bgp-pdu neighbor 20.20.20.2

Incoming packet capture enabled for BGP neighbor 20.20.20.2

Available buffer size 40958758, 26 packet(s) captured using 680 bytes
PDU[1] : len 101, captured 00:34:51 ago
ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00650100 00000013 00000000
00000000 419ef06c 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 0181a1e4 0181a25c 41af92c0
00000000 00000000 00000000
00000000 00000001 0181a1e4 0181a25c 41af9400 00000000
PDU[2] : len 19, captured 00:34:51 ago
ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00130400
PDU[3] : len 19, captured 00:34:51 ago
ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00130400
[. . .]

Outgoing packet capture enabled for BGP neighbor 20.20.20.2

Available buffer size 40958758, 27 packet(s) captured using 562 bytes
PDU[1] : len 41, captured 00:34:52 ago
ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00290104 000100b4 14141401
0c020a01 04000100 01020080
00000000
PDU[2] : len 19, captured 00:34:51 ago
ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00130400
PDU[3] : len 19, captured 00:34:50 ago
ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00130400
[. . .]
FTOS#

Related
capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size Specify a size for the capture buffer.
Commands

328 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced

show config
ces View the current ROUTER BGP configuration.

Syntax show config

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Example Figure 10-6. Command Example: show config

FTOS(conf-router_bgp)#show confi
!
router bgp 45
neighbor suzanne peer-group
neighbor suzanne no shutdown
neighbor sara peer-group
neighbor sara shutdown
neighbor 13.14.15.20 peer-group suzanne
neighbor 13.14.15.20 shutdown
neighbor 123.34.55.123 peer-group suzanne
neighbor 123.34.55.123 shutdown
FTOS(conf-router_bgp)#

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

show ip bgp
ces View the current BGP IPv4 routing table for the system.

Syntax show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] [network [network-mask] [longer-prefixes]]

Parameters
ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the ipv4 unicast keywords to view information only related
to ipv4 unicast routes.
network (OPTIONAL) Enter the network address (in dotted decimal format) of the BGP
network to view information only on that network.
network-mask (OPTIONAL) Enter the network mask (in slash prefix format) of the BGP network
address.
longer-prefixes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword longer-prefixes to view all routes with a
common prefix.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 329

 Usage When you enable bgp non-deterministic-med command, the show ip bgp command output for a
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Information BGP route does not list the INACTIVE reason.

Example Figure 10-7. Command Example: show ip bgp (Partial)

FTOS>show ip bgp
BGP table version is 847562, local router ID is 63.114.8.131
Status codes: s suppressed, d damped, h history, * valid, > best
Path source: I - internal, a - aggregate, c - confed-external, r - redistributed, n - network
Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete

Network Next Hop Metric LocPrf Weight Path

*> 0.0.0.0/0 63.114.8.33 0 18508 i
* 3.0.0.0/8 63.114.8.33 0 18508 209 701 80 i
*> 63.114.8.33 0 18508 701 80 i
*> 3.3.0.0/16 0.0.0.0 22 32768 ?
63.114.8.35 0 18508 ?
*> 4.0.0.0/8 63.114.8.33 0 18508 701 1 i
*> 4.2.49.12/30 63.114.8.33 0 18508 209 i
* 4.17.250.0/24 63.114.8.33 0 18508 209 1239 13716 i
*> 63.114.8.33 0 18508 701 1239 13716 i
* 4.21.132.0/23 63.114.8.33 0 18508 209 6461 16422 i
*> 63.114.8.33 0 18508 701 6461 16422 i
*> 4.24.118.16/30 63.114.8.33 0 18508 209 i
*> 4.24.145.0/30 63.114.8.33 0 18508 209 i
*> 4.24.187.12/30 63.114.8.33 0 18508 209 i
*> 4.24.202.0/30 63.114.8.33 0 18508 209 i
*> 4.25.88.0/30 63.114.8.33 0 18508 209 3561 3908 i
*> 5.0.0.0/9 63.114.8.33 0 0 18508 ?
*> 5.0.0.0/10 63.114.8.33 0 0 18508 ?
*> 5.0.0.0/11 63.114.8.33 0 0 18508 ?
--More--

Table 10-1 defines the information displayed in Figure 10-7

Table 10-1. Command Example Fields: show ip bgp

Field Description
Network Displays the destination network prefix of each BGP route.
Next Hop Displays the next hop address of the BGP router.
If 0.0.0.0 is listed in this column, then local routes exist in the routing
table.
Metric Displays the BGP route’s metric, if assigned.
LocPrf Displays the BGP LOCAL_PREF attribute for the route.
Weight Displays the route’s weight
Path Lists all the ASs the route passed through to reach the destination network.

Related
show ip bgp community View BGP communities.
Commands
neighbor maximum-prefix Control number of network prefixes received.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

330 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

show ip bgp cluster-list
ces View BGP neighbors in a specific cluster.

Syntax show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] cluster-list [cluster-id]

Parameters
ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the ipv4 unicast keywords to view information only related to ipv4
unicast routes.
cluster-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the cluster id in dotted decimal format.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Example Figure 10-8. Command Example: show ip bgp cluster-list (Partial)

FTOS#show ip bgp cluster-list
BGP table version is 64444683, local router ID is 120.1.1.1
Status codes: s suppressed, d damped, h history, * valid, > best
Path source: I - internal, a - aggregate, c - confed-external, r - redistributed, n
- network
Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete

Network Next Hop Metric LocPrf Weight Path

* I 10.10.10.1/32 192.68.16.1 0 100 0 i
* I 192.68.16.1 0 100 0 i
*>I 192.68.16.1 0 100 0 i
* I 192.68.16.1 0 100 0 i
* I 192.68.16.1 0 100 0 i
* I 192.68.16.1 0 100 0 i
* I 10.19.75.5/32 192.68.16.1 0 100 0 ?
* I 192.68.16.1 0 100 0 ?
*>I 192.68.16.1 0 100 0 ?
* I 192.68.16.1 0 100 0 ?
* I 192.68.16.1 0 100 0 ?
* I 192.68.16.1 0 100 0 ?
* I 10.30.1.0/24 192.68.16.1 0 100 0 ?
* I 192.68.16.1 0 100 0 ?
*>I 192.68.16.1 0 100 0 ?
* I 192.68.16.1 0 100 0 ?
* I 192.68.16.1 0 100 0 ?
* I 192.68.16.1 0 100 0 ?

Table 10-2 defines the information displayed in Figure 10-8.

Table 10-2. show ip bgp cluster-list Command Fields

Field Description
Network Displays the destination network prefix of each BGP route.
Next Hop Displays the next hop address of the BGP router.
If 0.0.0.0 is listed in this column, then local routes exist in the routing
table.
Metric Displays the BGP route’s metric, if assigned.
LocPrf Displays the BGP LOCAL_PREF attribute for the route.
Weight Displays the route’s weight
Path Lists all the ASs the route passed through to reach the destination network.

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 331

 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.

History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

show ip bgp community

ces View information on all routes with Community attributes or view specific BGP community groups.

Syntax show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] community [community-number] [local-as] [no-export]

[no-advertise]

Parameters
ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the ipv4 unicast keywords to view information only
related to ipv4 unicast routes.
community-number Enter the community number in AA:NN format where AA is the AS number (2
bytes) and NN is a value specific to that autonomous system.
You can specify up to eight community numbers to view information on those
community groups.
local-AS Enter the keywords local-AS to view all routes with the COMMUNITY
attribute of NO_EXPORT_SUBCONFED.
All routes with the NO_EXPORT_SUBCONFED (0xFFFFFF03) community
attribute must not be advertised to external BGP peers.
no-advertise Enter the keywords no-advertise to view all routes containing the
well-known community attribute of NO_ADVERTISE.
All routes with the NO_ADVERTISE (0xFFFFFF02) community attribute must
not be advertised to other BGP peers.
no-export Enter the keywords no-export to view all routes containing the well-known
community attribute of NO_EXPORT.
All routes with the NO_EXPORT (0xFFFFFF01) community attribute must not
be advertised outside a BGP confederation boundary.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Usage To view the total number of COMMUNITY attributes found, use the show ip bgp summary command.
Information The text line above the route table states the number of COMMUNITY attributes found.

332 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 Example Figure 10-9. Command Example: show ip bgp community (Partial)

FTOS>show ip bgp community

BGP table version is 3762622, local router ID is 63.114.8.48
Status codes: s suppressed, d damped, h history, * valid, > best
Path source: I - internal, a - aggregate, c - confed-external, r - redistributed, n - network
Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete

Network Next Hop Metric LocPrf Weight Path

* i 3.0.0.0/8 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 701 80 i
*>i 4.2.49.12/30 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 i
* i 4.21.132.0/23 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 6461 16422 i
*>i 4.24.118.16/30 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 i
*>i 4.24.145.0/30 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 i
*>i 4.24.187.12/30 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 i
*>i 4.24.202.0/30 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 i
*>i 4.25.88.0/30 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 3561 3908 i
*>i 6.1.0.0/16 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 7170 1455 i
*>i 6.2.0.0/22 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 7170 1455 i
*>i 6.3.0.0/18 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 7170 1455 i
*>i 6.4.0.0/16 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 7170 1455 i
*>i 6.5.0.0/19 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 7170 1455 i
*>i 6.8.0.0/20 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 7170 1455 i
*>i 6.9.0.0/20 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 7170 1455 i
*>i 6.10.0.0/15 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 7170 1455 i
*>i 6.14.0.0/15 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 7170 1455 i
*>i 6.133.0.0/21 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 7170 1455 i
*>i 6.151.0.0/16 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 7170 1455 i
--More--

The show ip bgp community command without any parameters lists BGP routes with at least one BGP
community attribute and the output is the same as for the show ip bgp command output.

Table 10-3. Command Example Fields: show ip bgp community

Field Description
Network Displays the destination network prefix of each BGP route.
Next Hop Displays the next hop address of the BGP router.
If 0.0.0.0 is listed in this column, then local routes exist in the routing
table.
Metric Displays the BGP route’s metric, if assigned.
LocPrf Displays the BGP LOCAL_PREF attribute for the route.
Weight Displays the route’s weight
Path Lists all the ASs the route passed through to reach the destination network.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

show ip bgp community-list

ces View routes that are affected by a specific community list.

Syntax show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] community-list community-list-name [exact-match]

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 333

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the ipv4 unicast keywords to view information only
related to ipv4 unicast routes.
community-list-name Enter the name of a configured IP community list. (max 16 chars)
exact-match Enter the keyword for an exact match of the communities.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Example Figure 10-10. Command Example: show ip bgp community-list

FTOS#show ip bgp community-list pass

BGP table version is 0, local router ID is 10.101.15.13
Status codes: s suppressed, d damped, h history, * valid, > best
Path source: I - internal, a - aggregate, c - confed-external, r - redistributed, n - network
Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete

Network Next Hop Metric LocPrf Weight Path

FTOS#

The show ip bgp community-list command without any parameters lists BGP routes matching the
Community List and the output is the same as for the show ip bgp command output.

Table 10-4. Command Example Fields: show ip bgp community-list

Field Description
Network Displays the destination network prefix of each BGP route.
Next Hop Displays the next hop address of the BGP router.
If 0.0.0.0 is listed in this column, then local routes exist in the routing table.
Metric Displays the BGP route’s metric, if assigned.
LocPrf Displays the BGP LOCAL_PREF attribute for the route.
Weight Displays the route’s weight
Path Lists all the ASs the route passed through to reach the destination network.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

show ip bgp dampened-paths

ces View BGP routes that are dampened (non-active).

Syntax show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] dampened-paths

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

334 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 Example Figure 10-11. Command Example: show ip bgp dampened-paths

FTOS>show ip bgp damp

BGP table version is 210708, local router ID is 63.114.8.2
Status codes: s suppressed, d damped, h history, * valid, > best
Path source: I - internal, a - aggregate, c - confed-external, r - redistributed, n - network
Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete
Network From Reuse Path
FTOS>

Table 10-5 defines the information displayed in Figure 10-11.

Table 10-5. Command Example: show ip bgp dampened-paths

Field Description
Network Displays the network ID to which the route is dampened.
From Displays the IP address of the neighbor advertising the dampened route.
Reuse Displays the hour:minutes:seconds until the dampened route is available.
Path Lists all the ASs the dampened route passed through to reach the
destination network.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

show ip bgp detail

ces Display BGP internal information for IPv4 Unicast address family.

Syntax show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] detail

Defaults none

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 335

 Example Figure 10-12. Command Example: show ip bgp detail
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

R2#show ip bgp detail

Detail information for BGP Node

bgpNdP 0x41a17000 : NdTmrP 0x41a17000 : NdKATmrP 0x41a17014 : NdTics 74857 :
NhLocAS 1 : NdState 2 : NdRPMPrim 1 : NdListSoc 13
NdAuto 1 : NdEqCost 1 : NdSync 0 : NdDefOrg 0
NdV6ListSoc 14 NdDefDid 0 : NdConfedId 0 : NdMedConfed 0 : NdMedMissVal -1 :
NdIgnrIllId 0 : NdRRC2C 1 : NdClstId 33686273 : NdPaTblP 0x41a19088
NdASPTblP 0x41a19090 : NdCommTblP 0x41a19098 : NhOptTransTblP 0x41a190a0 :
NdRRClsTblP 0x41a190a8
NdPktPA 0 : NdLocCBP 0x41a6f000 : NdTmpPAP 0x419efc80 : NdTmpASPAP 0x41a25000 :
NdTmpCommP 0x41a25800
NdTmpRRClP 0x41a4b000 : NdTmpOptP 0x41a4b800 : NdTmpNHP : NdOrigPAP 0
NdOrgNHP 0 : NdModPathP 0x419efcc0 : NdModASPAP 0x41a4c000 : NdModCommP 0x41a4c800
NdModOptP 0x41a4d000 : NdModNHP : NdComSortBufP 0x41a19110 : NdComSortHdP
0x41a19d04 : NdUpdAFMsk 0 : AFRstSet 0x41a1a298 : NHopDfrdHdP 0x41a1a3e0 :

NumNhDfrd 0 : CfgHdrAFMsk 1
AFChkNetTmrP 0x41ee705c : AFRtDamp 0 : AlwysCmpMed 0 : LocrHld 10 : LocrRem 10 :
softReconfig 0x41a1a58c
DefMet 0 : AutoSumm 1 : NhopsP 0x41a0d100 : Starts 0 : Stops 0 : Opens 0
Closes 0 : Fails 0 : Fatals 0 : ConnExps 0 : HldExps 0 : KeepExps 0
RxOpens 0 : RxKeeps 0 : RxUpds 0 : RxNotifs 0 : TxUpds 0 : TxNotifs 0
BadEvts 0 : SynFails 0 : RxeCodeP 0x41a1b6b8 : RxHdrCodeP 0x41a1b6d4 : RxOpCodeP
0x41a1b6e4
RxUpdCodeP 0x41a1b704 : TxEcodeP 0x41a1b734 : TxHdrcodeP 0x41a1b750 : TxOpCodeP
0x41a1b760
TxUpdCodeP 0x41a1b780 : TrEvt 0 : LocPref 100 : tmpPathP 0x41a1b7b8 : LogNbrChgs 1
RecursiveNH 1 : PgCfgId 0 : KeepAlive 0 : HldTime 0 : DioHdl 0 : AggrValTmrP
0x41ee7024
UpdNetTmrP 0 : RedistTmrP 0x41ee7094 : PeerChgTmrP 0 : CleanRibTmrP 0x41ee7104
PeerUpdTmrP 0x41ee70cc : DfrdNHTmrP 0x41ee7174 : DfrdRtselTmrP 0x41ee713c :
FastExtFallover 1 : FastIntFallover 0 : Enforce1stAS 1
PeerIdBitsP 0x41967120 : softOutSz 16 : RibUpdCtxCBP 0
UpdPeerCtxCBP 0 : UpdPeerCtxAFI 0 : TcpioCtxCB 0 : RedistBlk 1
NextCBPurg 1101119536 : NumPeerToPurge 0 : PeerIBGPCnt 0 : NonDet 0 : DfrdPathSel 0
BGPRst 0 : NumGrCfg 1 : DfrdTmestmp 0 : SnmpTrps 0 : IgnrBestPthASP 0
RstOn 1 : RstMod 1 : RstRole 2 : AFFalgs 7 : RstInt 120 : MaxeorExtInt 361
FixedPartCrt 1 : VarParCrt 1
Packet Capture max allowed length 40960000 : current length 0

Peer Grp List

Nbr List
Confed Peer List
Address Family specific Information
AFIndex 0
NdSpFlag 0x41a190b0 : AFRttP 0x41a0d200 : NdRTMMkrP 0x41a19d28 : NdRTMAFTblVer 0 :
NdRibCtxAddr 1101110688
NdRibCtxAddrLen 255 : NdAFPrefix 0 : NdAfNLRIP 0 : NdAFNLRILen 0 : NdAFWPtrP 0
NdAFWLen 0 : NdAfNH : NdAFRedRttP 0x41a0d400 : NdRecCtxAdd 1101110868
NdRedCtxAddrLen 255 : NdAfRedMkrP 0x41a19e88 : AFAggRttP 0x41a0d600 : AfAggCtxAddr
1101111028 : AfAggrCtxAddrLen 255
AfNumAggrPfx 0 : AfNumAggrASSet 0 : AfNumSuppmap 0 : AfNumAggrValidPfx 0 :
AfMPathRttP 0x41a0d700
MpathCtxAddr 1101111140 : MpathCtxAddrlen 255 : AfEorSet 0x41a19f98 : NumDfrdPfx 0
AfActPeerHd 0x41a1a3a4 : AfExtDist 1101112312 : AfIntDist 200 : AfLocDist 200
AfNumRRc 0 : AfRR 0 : AfNetRttP 0x41a0d300 : AfNetCtxAddr 1101112392 :
AfNetCtxAddrlen 255
AfNwCtxAddr 1101112443 : AfNwCtxAddrlen 255 : AfNetBKDrRttP 0x41a0d500 :
AfNetBKDRCnt 0 : AfDampHLife 0
AfDampReuse 0 : AfDampSupp 0 : AfDampMaxHld 0 : AfDampCeiling 0 : AfDampRmapP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced

336 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

show ip bgp extcommunity-list
ces View information on all routes with Extended Community attributes.

Syntax show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] extcommunity-list [list name]

Parameters
ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the ipv4 unicast keywords to view information only
related to ipv4 unicast routes.
list name Enter the extended community list name you wish to view.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Usage To view the total number of COMMUNITY attributes found, use the show ip bgp summary command.
Information The text line above the route table states the number of COMMUNITY attributes found.

The show ip bgp community command without any parameters lists BGP routes with at least one BGP
community attribute and the output is the same as for the show ip bgp command output.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

show ip bgp filter-list

ces View the routes that match the filter lists.

Syntax show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] filter-list as-path-name

Parameters
ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the ipv4 unicast keywords to view information only related
to ipv4 unicast routes.
as-path-name Enter the name of an AS-PATH.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 337

 Example Figure 10-13. Command Example: show ip bgp filter-list
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show ip bgp filter-list hello

BGP table version is 80227, local router ID is 120.1.1.1
Status codes: s suppressed, d damped, h history, * valid, > best
Path source: I - internal, a - aggregate, c - confed-external, r - redistributed, n -
network
Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete

Network Next Hop Metric LocPrf Weight Path

* I 6.1.5.0/24 192.100.11.2 20000 9999 0 ?
* I 192.100.8.2 20000 9999 0 ?
* I 192.100.9.2 20000 9999 0 ?
* I 192.100.10.2 20000 9999 0 ?
*>I 6.1.5.1 20000 9999 0 ?
* I 6.1.6.1 20000 9999 0 ?
* I 6.1.20.1 20000 9999 0 ?
* I 6.1.6.0/24 192.100.11.2 20000 9999 0 ?
* I 192.100.8.2 20000 9999 0 ?
* I 192.100.9.2 20000 9999 0 ?
* I 192.100.10.2 20000 9999 0 ?
*>I 6.1.5.1 20000 9999 0 ?
* I 6.1.6.1 20000 9999 0 ?
* I 6.1.20.1 20000 9999 0 ?
* I 6.1.20.0/24 192.100.11.2 20000 9999 0 ?
* I 192.100.8.2 20000 9999 0 ?
* I 192.100.9.2 20000 9999 0 ?
* I 192.100.10.2 20000 9999 0 ?
FTOS#

Table 10-6 defines the information displayed in Figure 10-13.

Table 10-6. Command Example Fields: show ip bgp filter-list

Field Description
Path source codes Lists the path sources shown to the right of the last AS number in the
Path column:
• i = internal route entry
• a = aggregate route entry
• c = external confederation route entry
• n = network route entry
• r = redistributed route entry
Next Hop Displays the next hop address of the BGP router.
If 0.0.0.0 is listed in this column, then local routes exist in the routing
table.
Metric Displays the BGP route’s metric, if assigned.
LocPrf Displays the BGP LOCAL_PREF attribute for the route.
Weight Displays the route’s weight
Path Lists all the ASs the route passed through to reach the destination
network.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

338 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

show ip bgp flap-statistics
ces View flap statistics on BGP routes.

Syntax show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] flap-statistics [ip-address [mask]] [filter-list as-path-name]
[regexp regular-expression]

Parameters
ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the ipv4 unicast keywords to view information only
related to ipv4 unicast routes.
ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address (in dotted decimal format) of the BGP
network to view information only on that network.
mask (OPTIONAL) Enter the network mask (in slash prefix (/x) format) of the
BGP network address.
filter-list as-path-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword filter-list followed by the name of a
configured AS-PATH ACL.
regexp regular-expression Enter a regular expression then use one or a combination of the following
characters to match:
• . = (period) any single character (including a white space)
• * = (asterisk) the sequences in a pattern (0 or more sequences)
• + = (plus) the sequences in a pattern (1 or more sequences)
• ? = (question mark) sequences in a pattern (either 0 or 1 sequences).
You must enter an escape sequence (CTRL+v) prior to entering the
? regular expression.
• [ ] = (brackets) a range of single-character patterns.
• ( ) = (parenthesis) groups a series of pattern elements to a single element
• { } = (braces) minimum and the maximum match count
• ^ = (caret) the beginning of the input string. If the caret is used at the
beginning of a sequence or range, it matches on everything BUT the
characters specified.
• $ = (dollar sign) the end of the output string.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Example Figure 10-14. Command Example: show ip bgp flap-statistics

FTOS>show ip bgp flap

BGP table version is 210851, local router ID is 63.114.8.2
Status codes: s suppressed, d damped, h history, * valid, > best
Path source: I - internal, a - aggregate, c - confed-external, r - redistributed, n - network
Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete

Network From Flaps Duration Reuse Path

FTOS>

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 339

 Table 10-7 defines the information displayed in Figure 10-14.
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Table 10-7. Command Example Fields: show ip bgp flap-statistics

Field Description
Network Displays the network ID to which the route is flapping.
From Displays the IP address of the neighbor advertising the flapping route.
Flaps Displays the number of times the route flapped.
Duration Displays the hours:minutes:seconds since the route first flapped.
Reuse Displays the hours:minutes:seconds until the flapped route is available.
Path Lists all the ASs the flapping route passed through to reach the destination
network.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

show ip bgp inconsistent-as

ces View routes with inconsistent originating Autonomous System (AS) numbers, that is, prefixes that are
announced from the same neighbor AS but with a different AS-Path.

Syntax show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] inconsistent-as

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Example Figure 10-15. Command Example: show ip bgp inconsistent-as (Partial)

FTOS>show ip bgp inconsistent-as
BGP table version is 280852, local router ID is 10.1.2.100
Status codes: s suppressed, d damped, h history, * valid, > best
Path source: I - internal, c - confed-external, r - redistributed, n - network
Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete

Network Next Hop Metric LocPrf Weight Path

* 3.0.0.0/8 63.114.8.33 0 18508 209 7018 80 i
* 63.114.8.34 0 18508 209 7018 80 i
* 63.114.8.60 0 18508 209 7018 80 i
*> 63.114.8.33 0 18508 701 80 i
*> 3.18.135.0/24 63.114.8.60 0 18508 209 7018 ?
* 63.114.8.34 0 18508 209 7018 ?
* 63.114.8.33 0 18508 701 7018 ?
* 63.114.8.33 0 18508 209 7018 ?
*> 4.0.0.0/8 63.114.8.60 0 18508 209 1 i
* 63.114.8.34 0 18508 209 1 i
* 63.114.8.33 0 18508 701 1 i
* 63.114.8.33 0 18508 209 1 i
* 6.0.0.0/20 63.114.8.60 0 18508 209 3549 i
* 63.114.8.34 0 18508 209 3549 i
*> 63.114.8.33 0 0 18508 ?
* 63.114.8.33 0 18508 209 3549 i
* 9.2.0.0/16 63.114.8.60 0 18508 209 701 i
* 63.114.8.34 0 18508 209 701 i
--More--

340 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 Table 10-8. Command Example Fields: show ip bgp inconsistent-as

Fields Description
Network Displays the destination network prefix of each BGP route.
Next Hop Displays the next hop address of the BGP router.
If 0.0.0.0 is listed in this column, then local routes exist in the routing
table.
Metric Displays the BGP route’s metric, if assigned.
LocPrf Displays the BGP LOCAL_PREF attribute for the route.
Weight Displays the route’s weight
Path Lists all the ASs the route passed through to reach the destination network.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

show ip bgp neighbors

ces Enables you to view the information exchanged by BGP neighbors.

Syntax show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] neighbors [ip-address [advertised-routes | dampened-routes |

detail | flap-statistics | routes | {received-routes [network [network-mask]]} | {denied-routes
[network [network-mask]]}]

Parameters
ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the ipv4 unicast keywords to view information only
related to ipv4 unicast routes.
ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor to view only BGP information
exchanged with that neighbor.
advertised-routes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords advertised-routes to view only the routes
the neighbor sent.
dampened-routes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dampened-routes to view information on
dampened routes from the BGP neighbor.
detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to view neighbor-specific internal
information for the IPv4 Unicast address family.
flap-statistics (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword flap-statistics to view flap statistics on the
neighbor’s routes.
routes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords routes to view only the neighbor’s feasible
routes.
received-routes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords received-routes followed by either the
[network network address (in dotted decimal format) or the network mask (in slash prefix
[network-mask] format) to view all information received from neighbors.
Note: neighbor soft-reconfiguration inbound must be configured prior to viewing
all the information received from the neighbors.
denied-routes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords denied-routes followed by either the
[network network address (in dotted decimal format) or the network mask (in slash prefix
[network-mask] format) to view all information on routes denied via neighbor inbound filters.

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 341

 Command Modes EXEC
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added detail option and output now displays default MED value
Version 7.2.1.0 Added received and denied route options
Version 6.3.10 The output is changed to display the total number of advertised prefixes

Example 1 Figure 10-16. Command Example: show ip bgp neighbors (Partial)

FTOS#show ip bgp neighbors

BGP neighbor is 100.10.10.2, remote AS 200, external link

BGP version 4, remote router ID 192.168.2.101
BGP state ESTABLISHED, in this state for 00:16:12
Last read 00:00:12, last write 00:00:03
Hold time is 180, keepalive interval is 60 seconds
Received 1404 messages, 0 in queue
3 opens, 1 notifications, 1394 updates
6 keepalives, 0 route refresh requests
Sent 48 messages, 0 in queue
3 opens, 2 notifications, 0 updates
43 keepalives, 0 route refresh requests
Minimum time between advertisement runs is 30 seconds
Minimum time before advertisements start is 0 seconds

Capabilities received from neighbor for IPv4 Unicast :

MULTIPROTO_EXT(1)
ROUTE_REFRESH(2)
CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128)

Capabilities advertised to neighbor for IPv4 Unicast :

MULTIPROTO_EXT(1)
ROUTE_REFRESH(2)
ROUTE_REFRESH(2)
GRACEFUL_RESTART(64)
CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128)

Route map for incoming advertisements is test

Maximum prefix set to 4 with threshold 75

For address family: IPv4 Unicast

BGP table version 34, neighbor version 34
5 accepted prefixes consume 20 bytes
Prefix advertised 0, denied 4, withdrawn 0

Prefixes accepted 1 (consume 4 bytes), withdrawn 0 by peer

Prefixes advertised 0, rejected 0, withdrawn 0 from peer

Connections established 2; dropped 1

Last reset 00:18:21, due to Maximum prefix limit reached

Notification History
'Connection Reset' Sent : 1 Recv: 0

Local host: 100.10.10.1, Local port: 179

Foreign host: 100.10.10.2, Foreign port: 47496

FTOS#

342 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

Example 2 Figure 10-17. Command Example: show ip bgp neighbors advertised-routes
FTOS>show ip bgp neighbors 192.14.1.5 advertised-routes

BGP table version is 74103, local router ID is 33.33.33.33

Status codes: s suppressed, S stale, d damped, h history, * valid, > best
Path source: I - internal, a - aggregate, c - confed-external, r - redistributed,
n - network
Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete

Network Next Hop Metric LocPrf Weight Path

*>r 1.10.1.0/24 0.0.0.0 5000 32768 ?
*>r 1.11.0.0/16 0.0.0.0 5000 32768 ?
.....
.....
*>I 223.94.249.0/24 223.100.4.249 0 100 0 ?
*>I 223.94.250.0/24 223.100.4.250 0 100 0 ?
*>I 223.100.0.0/16 223.100.255.254 0 100 0 ?
Total number of prefixes: 74102

Example 3 Figure 10-18. Command Example: show ip bgp neighbors received-routes

FTOS#show ip bgp neighbors 100.10.10.2 received-routes
BGP table version is 13, local router ID is 120.10.10.1
Status codes: s suppressed, S stale, d damped, h history, * valid, > best
Path source: I - internal, a - aggregate, c - confed-external, r - redistributed
n - network, D - denied, S - stale
Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete

Network Next Hop Metric LocPrf Weight Path

D 70.70.21.0/24 100.10.10.2 0 0 100 200 ?
D 70.70.22.0/24 100.10.10.2 0 0 100 200 ?
D 70.70.23.0/24 100.10.10.2 0 0 100 200 ?
D 70.70.24.0/24 100.10.10.2 0 0 100 200 ?
*> 70.70.25.0/24 100.10.10.2 0 0 100 200 ?
*> 70.70.26.0/24 100.10.10.2 0 0 0 100 200 ?
*> 70.70.27.0/24 100.10.10.2 0 0 0 100 200 ?
*> 70.70.28.0/24 100.10.10.2 0 0 0 100 200 ?
*> 70.70.29.0/24 100.10.10.2 0 0 0 100 200 ?
FTOS#

Example 4 Figure 10-19. Command Example: show ip bgp neighbors denied-routes

FTOS#show ip bgp neighbors 100.10.10.2 denied-routes
4 denied paths using 205 bytes of memory
BGP table version is 34, local router ID is 100.10.10.2
Status codes: s suppressed, S stale, d damped, h history, * valid, > best
Path source: I - internal, a - aggregate, c - confed-external, r - redistributed
n - network, D - denied, S - stale
Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete

Network Next Hop Metric LocPrf Weight Path

D 70.70.21.0/24 100.10.10.2 0 0 100 200 ?
D 70.70.22.0/24 100.10.10.2 0 0 100 200 ?
D 70.70.23.0/24 100.10.10.2 0 0 100 200 ?
D 70.70.24.0/24 100.10.10.2 0 0 100 200 ?
FTOS#

Table 10-9. Command Example Fields: show ip bgp neighbors

Lines beginning with Description

BGP neighbor Displays the BGP neighbor address and its AS number. The last
phrase in the line indicates whether the link between the BGP router
and its neighbor is an external or internal one. If they are located in the
same AS, then the link is internal; otherwise the link is external.
BGP version Displays the BGP version (always version 4) and the remote router
ID.

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 343

 Table 10-9. Command Example Fields: show ip bgp neighbors
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Lines beginning with Description

BGP state Displays the neighbor’s BGP state and the amount of time in
hours:minutes:seconds it has been in that state.
Last read This line displays the following information:
• last read is the time (hours:minutes:seconds) the router read a
message from its neighbor
• hold time is the number of seconds configured between messages
from its neighbor
• keepalive interval is the number of seconds between keepalive
messages to help ensure that the TCP session is still alive.
Received messages This line displays the number of BGP messages received, the number
of notifications (error messages) and the number of messages waiting
in a queue for processing.
Sent messages The line displays the number of BGP messages sent, the number of
notifications (error messages) and the number of messages waiting in
a queue for processing.
Received updates This line displays the number of BGP updates received and sent.
Soft reconfiguration This line indicates that soft reconfiguration inbound is configured.
Minimum time Displays the minimum time, in seconds, between advertisements.
(list of inbound and outbound Displays the policy commands configured and the names of the Route
policies) map, AS-PATH ACL or Prefix list configured for the policy.
For address family: Displays IPv4 Unicast as the address family.
BGP table version Displays the which version of the primary BGP routing table the
router and the neighbor are using.
accepted prefixes Displays the number of network prefixes accepted by the router and
the amount of memory used to process those prefixes.
Prefix advertised Displays the number of network prefixes advertised, the number
rejected and the number withdrawn from the BGP routing table.
Connections established Displays the number of TCP connections established and dropped
between the two peers to exchange BGP information.
Last reset Displays the amount of time since the peering session was last reset.
Also states if the peer resets the peering session.
If the peering session was never reset, the word never is displayed.
Local host: Displays the peering address of the local router and the TCP port
number.
Foreign host: Displays the peering address of the neighbor and the TCP port
number.

Related
show ip bgp View the current BGP routing table.
Commands

344 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

show ip bgp next-hop
ces View all next hops (via learned routes only) with current reachability and flap status. This command
only displays one path, even if the next hop is reachable by multiple paths.

Syntax show ip bgp next-hop

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Example Figure 10-20. Command Example: show ip bgp next-hop

FTOS>show ip bgp next-hop
Next-hop Via RefCount Cost Flaps Time Elapsed
63.114.8.33 63.114.8.33, Gi 12/22 240984 0 0 00:18:25
63.114.8.34 63.114.8.34, Gi 12/22 135152 0 0 00:18:13
63.114.8.35 63.114.8.35, Gi 12/22 1 0 0 00:18:07
63.114.8.60 63.114.8.60, Gi 12/22 135155 0 0 00:18:11
FTOS>

Table 10-10. Command Example Fields: show ip bgp next-hop

Field Description
Next-hop Displays the next-hop IP address.
Via Displays the IP address and interface used to reach the next hop.
RefCount Displays the number of BGP routes using this next hop.
Cost Displays the cost associated with using this next hop.
Flaps Displays the number of times the next hop has flapped.
Time Elapsed Displays the time elapsed since the next hop was learned. If the route is down,
then this field displays time elapsed since the route went down.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

show ip bgp paths

ces View all the BGP path attributes in the BGP database.

Syntax show ip bgp paths [regexp regular-expression]

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 345

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

regexp regular-expression Enter a regular expression then use one or a combination of the following
characters to match:
• . = (period) any single character (including a white space)
• * = (asterisk) the sequences in a pattern (0 or more sequences)
• + = (plus) the sequences in a pattern (1 or more sequences)
• ? = (question mark) sequences in a pattern (either 0 or 1 sequences).
You must enter an escape sequence (CTRL+v) prior to entering the
? regular expression.
• [ ] = (brackets) a range of single-character patterns.
• ( ) = (parenthesis) groups a series of pattern elements to a single element
• { } = (braces) minimum and the maximum match count
• ^ = (caret) the beginning of the input string. If the caret is used at the
beginning of a sequence or range, it matches on everything BUT the
characters specified.
• $ = (dollar sign) the end of the output string.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Example Figure 10-21. Command Example: show ip bgp paths (Partial)

FTOS#show ip bgp path
Total 16 Paths
Address Hash Refcount Metric Path
0x1efe7e5c 15 10000 32 ?
0x1efe7e1c 71 10000 23 ?
0x1efe7ddc 127 10000 22 ?
0x1efe7d9c 183 10000 43 ?
0x1efe7d5c 239 10000 42 ?
0x1efe7c9c 283 6 {102 103} ?
0x1efe7b1c 287 336 20000 ?
0x1efe7d1c 295 10000 13 ?
0x1efe7c5c 339 6 {92 93} ?
0x1efe7cdc 351 10000 12 ?
0x1efe7c1c 395 6 {82 83} ?
0x1efe7bdc 451 6 {72 73} ?
0x1efe7b5c 491 78 0 ?
0x1efe7adc 883 2 120 i
0x1efe7e9c 983 10000 33 ?
0x1efe7b9c 1003 6 0 i
FTOS#

Table 10-11. Command Example Fields: show ip bgp paths

Field Description
Total Displays the total number of BGP path attributes.
Address Displays the internal address where the path attribute is stored.
Hash Displays the hash bucket where the path attribute is stored.
Refcount Displays the number of BGP routes using this path attribute.
Metric Displays the MED attribute for this path attribute.
Path Displays the AS path for the route, with the origin code for the route
listed last.
Numbers listed between braces {} are AS_SET information.

346 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

show ip bgp paths as-path

ces View all unique AS-PATHs in the BGP database

Syntax show ip bgp paths as-path

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Example Figure 10-22. Command Example: show ip bgp paths as-path (Partial)
FTOS#show ip bgp paths as-path
Total 13 AS-Paths
Address Hash Refcount AS-Path
0x1ea3c1ec 251 1 42
0x1ea3c25c 251 1 22
0x1ea3c1b4 507 1 13
0x1ea3c304 507 1 33
0x1ea3c10c 763 1 {92 93}
0x1ea3c144 763 1 {102 103}
0x1ea3c17c 763 1 12
0x1ea3c2cc 763 1 32
0x1ea3c09c 764 1 {72 73}
0x1ea3c0d4 764 1 {82 83}
0x1ea3c224 1019 1 43
0x1ea3c294 1019 1 23
0x1ea3c02c 1021 4
FTOS#

Table 10-12. Command Example Fields: show ip bgp paths community

Field Description
Address Displays the internal address where the path attribute is stored.
Hash Displays the hash bucket where the path attribute is stored.
Refcount Displays the number of BGP routes using these AS-Paths.
AS-Path Displays the AS paths for this route, with the origin code for the route listed last.
Numbers listed between braces {} are AS_SET information.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

show ip bgp paths community

ces View all unique COMMUNITY numbers in the BGP database.

Syntax show ip bgp paths community

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 347

 Command Modes EXEC
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

EXEC Privilege

Example Figure 10-23. Command Example: show ip bgp paths community (Partial)
E1200-BGP>show ip bgp paths community
Total 293 Communities
Address Hash Refcount Community
0x1ec88a5c 3 4 209:209 209:6059 209:31272 3908:900 19092:300
0x1e0f10ec 15 4 209:209 209:3039 209:31272 3908:900 19092:300
0x1c902234 37 2 209:209 209:7193 209:21362 3908:900 19092:300
0x1f588cd4 41 24 209:209 209:6253 209:21362 3908:900 19092:300
0x1e805884 46 2 209:209 209:21226 286:777 286:3033 1899:3033
64675:21092
0x1e433f4c 46 8 209:209 209:5097 209:21362 3908:900 19092:300
0x1f173294 48 16 209:209 209:21226 286:40 286:777 286:3040 5606:40
12955:5606
0x1c9f8e24 50 6 209:209 209:4069 209:21362 3908:900 19092:300
0x1c9f88e4 53 4 209:209 209:3193 209:21362 3908:900 19092:300
0x1f58a944 57 6 209:209 209:2073 209:21362 3908:900 19092:300
0x1ce6be44 80 2 209:209 209:999 209:40832
0x1c6e2374 80 2 209:777 209:41528
0x1f58ad6c 82 46 209:209 209:41528
0x1c6e2064 83 2 209:777 209:40832
0x1f588ecc 85 570 209:209 209:40832
0x1f57cc0c 98 2 209:209 209:21226 286:3031 13646:1044 13646:1124
13646:1154 13646:1164 13646:1184 13646:1194 13646:1204 13646:1214 13646:1224
13646:1234 13646:1244 13646:1254 13646:1264 13646:3000
0x1d65b2ac 117 6 209:209 209:999 209:31272
0x1f5854ac 119 18 209:209 209:21226 286:108 286:111 286:777 286:3033
517:5104

Table 10-13. Command Example Fields: show ip bgp paths community

Field Description
Address Displays the internal address where the path attribute is stored.
Hash Displays the hash bucket where the path attribute is stored.
Refcount Displays the number of BGP routes using these communities.
Community Displays the community attributes in this BGP path.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

show ip bgp peer-group

ces Enables you to view information on the BGP peers in a peer group.

Syntax show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] peer-group [peer-group-name [detail | summary]]

Parameters
ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the ipv4 unicast keywords to view information only
related to ipv4 unicast routes.
peer-group-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of a peer group to view information about that peer
group only.

348 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to view detailed status information of
the peers in that peer group.
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view status information of the
peers in that peer group.
The output is the same as that found in show ip bgp summary command

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Example Figure 10-24. Command Example: show ip bgp peer-group (Partial)

FTOS#show ip bgp peer-group

Peer-group RT-PEERS
Description: ***peering-with-RT***
BGP version 4
Minimum time between advertisement runs is 30 seconds

For address family: IPv4 Unicast

BGP neighbor is RT-PEERS
Number of peers in this group 20
Peer-group members (* - outbound optimized):
12.1.1.2*
12.1.1.3*
12.1.1.4*
12.1.1.5*
12.1.1.6*
12.2.1.2*
12.2.1.3*
12.2.1.4*
12.2.1.5*
12.2.1.6*
12.3.1.2*
12.3.1.3*
12.3.1.4*
12.3.1.5*
12.3.1.6*
12.4.1.2*
12.4.1.3*
12.4.1.4*
12.4.1.5*
12.4.1.6*

Table 10-14. Command Example Fields: show ip bgp peer-group

Line beginning with Description

Peer-group Displays the peer group’s name.
Administratively shut Displays the peer group’s status if the peer group is not enabled.
If the peer group is enabled, this line is not displayed.
BGP version Displays the BGP version supported.
Minimum time Displays the time interval between BGP advertisements.
For address family Displays IPv4 Unicast as the address family.
BGP neighbor Displays the name of the BGP neighbor.
Number of peers Displays the number of peers currently configured for this peer group.
Peer-group members: Lists the IP addresses of the peers in the peer group.
If the address is outbound optimized, a * is displayed next to the IP address.

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 349

 Related
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

neighbor peer-group (assigning peers) Assign peer to a peer-group.

Commands
neighbor peer-group (creating group) Create a peer group.
show ip bgp peer-group (multicast) View information on the BGP peers in a peer group.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series

show ip bgp regexp

ces Display the subset of BGP routing table matching the regular expressions specified.

Syntax show ip bgp regexp regular-expression [character]

Parameters
regular-expression [character] Enter a regular expression then use one or a combination of the
following characters to match:
• . = (period) any single character (including a white space)
• * = (asterisk) the sequences in a pattern (0 or more sequences)
• + = (plus) the sequences in a pattern (1 or more sequences)
• ? = (question mark) sequences in a pattern (either 0 or 1
sequences). You must enter an escape sequence (CTRL+v)
prior to entering the ? regular expression.
• [ ] = (brackets) a range of single-character patterns.
• ( ) = (parenthesis) groups a series of pattern elements to a
single element
• { } = (braces) minimum and the maximum match count
• ^ = (caret) the beginning of the input string. If the caret is
used at the beginning of a sequence or range, it matches on
everything BUT the characters specified.
• $ = (dollar sign) the end of the output string.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

350 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 Example Figure 10-25. Command Example: show ip bgp regexp (Partial)

FTOS#show ip bgp regexp ^2914+

BGP table version is 3700481, local router ID is 63.114.8.35
Status codes: s suppressed, S stale, d damped, h history, * valid, > best
Path source: I - internal, a - aggregate, c - confed-external, r - redistributed, n - network
Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete
Network Next Hop Metric LocPrf Weight Path
*>I 3.0.0.0/8 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 1239 80 i
*>I 4.0.0.0/8 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 3356 i
*>I 4.17.225.0/24 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 11853 11853 11853 11853 11853 6496
*>I 4.17.226.0/23 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 11853 11853 11853 11853 11853 6496
*>I 4.17.251.0/24 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 11853 11853 11853 11853 11853 6496
*>I 4.17.252.0/23 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 11853 11853 11853 11853 11853 6496
*>I 4.19.2.0/23 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 701 6167 6167 6167 i
*>I 4.19.16.0/23 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 701 6167 6167 6167 i
*>I 4.21.80.0/22 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 174 4200 16559 i
*>I 4.21.82.0/24 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 174 4200 16559 i
*>I 4.21.252.0/23 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 701 6389 8063 19198 i
*>I 4.23.180.0/24 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 3561 6128 30576 i
*>I 4.36.200.0/21 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 14742 11854 14135 i
*>I 4.67.64.0/22 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 11608 19281 i
*>I 4.78.32.0/21 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 3491 29748 i
*>I 6.1.0.0/16 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 701 668 i
*>I 6.2.0.0/22 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 701 668 i
*>I 6.3.0.0/18 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 701 668 i

Table 10-15. Command Example Fields: show ip bgp regexp

Field Description
Network Displays the destination network prefix of each BGP route.
Next Hop Displays the next hop address of the BGP router.
If 0.0.0.0 is listed in this column, then non-BGP routes exist in the router’s routing table.
Metric Displays the BGP router’s metric, if assigned.
LocPrf Displays the BGP LOCAL_PREF attribute for the route.
Weight Displays the route’s weight
Path Lists all the AS paths the route passed through to reach the destination network.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

show ip bgp summary

ces Enables you to view the status of all BGP connections.

Syntax show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] summary

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 351

 Example Figure 10-26. Command Example: show ip bgp summary
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show ip bgp summary

BGP router identifier 120.10.10.1, local AS number 100
BGP table version is 34, main routing table version 34
9 network entrie(s) using 1372 bytes of memory
5 paths using 380 bytes of memory
4 denied paths using 164 bytes of memory
BGP-RIB over all using 385 bytes of memory
2 BGP path attribute entrie(s) using 168 bytes of memory
1 BGP AS-PATH entrie(s) using 39 bytes of memory
1 BGP community entrie(s) using 43 bytes of memory
2 neighbor(s) using 7232 bytes of memory

Neighbor AS MsgRcvd MsgSent TblVer InQ OutQ Up/Down State/Pfx

100.10.10.2 200 46 41 34 0 0 00:14:33 5

120.10.10.2 300 40 47 34 0 0 00:37:10 0
FTOS#

Table 10-16. Command Example Fields: show ip bgp summary

Field Description
BGP router identifier Displays the local router ID and the AS number.
BGP table version Displays the BGP table version and the main routing table version.
network entries Displays the number of network entries and route paths and the amount of
memory used to process those entries.
paths Displays the number of paths and the amount of memory used.
denied paths Displays the number of denied paths and the amount of memory used.
BGP path attribute entries Displays the number of BGP path attributes and the amount of memory
used to process them.
BGP AS-PATH entries Displays the number of BGP AS_PATH attributes processed and the
amount of memory used to process them.
BGP community entries Displays the number of BGP COMMUNITY attributes processed and the
amount of memory used to process them. The show ip bgp community
command provides more details on the COMMUNITY attributes.
Dampening enabled Displayed only when dampening is enabled. Displays the number of paths
designated as history, dampened, or penalized.
Neighbor Displays the BGP neighbor address.
AS Displays the AS number of the neighbor.
MsgRcvd Displays the number of BGP messages that neighbor received.
MsgSent Displays the number of BGP messages that neighbor sent.
TblVer Displays the version of the BGP table that was sent to that neighbor.
InQ Displays the number of messages from that neighbor waiting to be
processed.
OutQ Displays the number of messages waiting to be sent to that neighbor.
If a number appears in parentheses, the number represents the number of
messages waiting to be sent to the peer group.

352 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 Table 10-16. Command Example Fields: show ip bgp summary

Field Description
Up/Down Displays the amount of time that the neighbor is in the Established stage.
If the neighbor has never moved into the Established stage, the word never
is displayed.
The output format is:
Time Established----------Display Example
< 1 day ----------------------- 00:12:23 (hours:minutes:seconds)
< 1 week --------------------- 1d21h (DaysHours)
> 1 week --------------------- 11w2d (WeeksDays)
State/Pfxrcd If the neighbor is in Established stage, the number of network prefixes
received.
If a maximum limit was configured with the neighbor maximum-prefix
command, (prfxd) appears in this column.
If the neighbor is not in Established stage, the current stage is displayed
(Idle, Connect, Active, OpenSent, OpenConfirm) When the peer is
transitioning between states and clearing the routes received, the phrase
(Purging) may appear in this column.
If the neighbor is disabled, the phrase (Admin shut) appears in this column.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

show running-config bgp

ces Use this feature to display the current BGP configuration.

Syntax show running-config bgp

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

timers bgp
ces Adjust BGP Keep Alive and Hold Time timers.

Syntax timers bgp keepalive holdtime

To return to the default, enter no timers bgp.

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 353

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

keepalive Enter a number for the time interval, in seconds, between keepalive messages sent
to the neighbor routers.
Range: 1 to 65535
Default: 60 seconds
holdtime Enter a number for the time interval, in seconds, between the last keepalive
message and declaring the router dead.
Range: 3 to 65535
Default: 180 seconds

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes ROUTER BGP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

MBGP Commands
Multiprotocol BGP (MBGP) is an enhanced BGP that enables multicast routing policy throughout the
Internet and connecting multicast topologies between BGP and autonomous systems (AS). FTOS
MBGP is implemented as per IETF RFC 1858.

FTOS version 7.8.1.0 and later support MBGP for IPv6 on et and c platforms.

FTOS version 7.8.1.0 and later support MBGP for IPv4 Multicast only on the s platform.

FTOS version 8.2.1.0 and later support MBGP on the E-Series ExaScale ex platform.

The MBGP commands are:

• address family ipv4 multicast (MBGP)

• aggregate-address
• bgp dampening
• clear ip bgp ipv4 multicast
• clear ip bgp dampening
• clear ip bgp flap-statistics
• debug ip bgp dampening
• debug ip bgp dampening
• debug ip bgp dampening
• debug ip bgp peer-group updates
• debug ip bgp updates
• distance bgp
• neighbor activate
• neighbor advertisement-interval
• neighbor default-originate

354 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 • neighbor distribute-list
• neighbor filter-list
• neighbor maximum-prefix
• neighbor next-hop-self
• neighbor remove-private-as
• neighbor route-map
• neighbor route-reflector-client
• network
• redistribute
• redistribute ospf
• show ip bgp ipv4 multicast
• show ip bgp cluster-list
• show ip bgp community
• show ip bgp community-list
• show ip bgp dampened-paths
• show ip bgp filter-list
• show ip bgp flap-statistics
• show ip bgp inconsistent-as
• show ip bgp ipv4 multicast neighbors
• show ip bgp peer-group
• show ip bgp summary

address family ipv4 multicast (MBGP)

c et s This command changes the context to SAFI (Subsequent Address Family Identifier).

Syntax address family ipv4 multicast

To remove SAFI context, use the no address family ipv4 multicast command.

Parameters
ipv4 Enter the keyword ipv4 to specify the address family as IPV4.
multicast Enter the keyword multicast to specify multicast as SAFI.

Defaults IPv4 Unicast

Command Modes ROUTER BGP (conf-router_bgp)

Usage All subsequent commands will apply to this address family once this command is executed. You can
Information exit from this AFI/SAFI to the IPv4 Unicast (the default) family by entering exit and returning to the
Router BGP context.

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series for MBGP IPv4 Multicast
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 355

 aggregate-address
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

c et s Summarize a range of prefixes to minimize the number of entries in the routing table.

Syntax aggregate-address ip-address mask [advertise-map map-name] [as-set] [attribute-map

map-name] [summary-only] [suppress-map map-name]

Parameters
ip-address mask Enter the IP address and mask of the route to be the aggregate address.
Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D) and mask in /
prefix format (/x).
advertise-map map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords advertise-map followed by the
name of a configured route map to set filters for advertising an aggregate
route.
as-set (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword as-set to generate path attribute
information and include it in the aggregate.
AS_SET includes AS_PATH and community information from the routes
included in the aggregated route.
attribute-map map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords attribute-map followed by the name
of a configured route map to modify attributes of the aggregate, excluding
AS_PATH and NEXT_HOP attributes.
summary-only (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary-only to advertise only the
aggregate address. Specific routes will not be advertised.
suppress-map map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords suppress-map followed by the name
of a configured route map to identify which more-specific routes in the
aggregate are suppressed.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP Address Family (conf-router_bgp_af)

Usage At least one of the routes included in the aggregate address must be in the BGP routing table for the
Information configured aggregate to become active.

Do not add the as-set parameter to the aggregate. If routes within the aggregate are constantly
changing, the aggregate will flap to keep track of the changes in the AS_PATH.

In route maps used in the suppress-map parameter, routes meeting the deny clause are not suppress;
in other words, they are allowed. The opposite is true: routes meeting the permit clause are
suppressed.

If the route is injected via the network command, that route will still appear in the routing table if the
summary-only parameter is configured in the aggregate-address command.

The summary-only parameter suppresses all advertisements. If you want to suppress advertisements to
only specific neighbors, use the neighbor distribute-list command.

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

356 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

bgp dampening
c et s Enable MBGP route dampening.

Syntax bgp dampening [half-life time] [route-map map-name]

To disable route dampening, use the no bgp dampening [half-life time] [route-map map-name]
command.

Parameters
half-life time (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of minutes after which the Penalty is
decreased. After the router assigns a Penalty of 1024 to a route, the Penalty
is decreased by half, after the half-life period expires.
Range: 1 to 45.
Default: 15 minutes
route-map map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword route-map followed by the name of a
configured route map.
Only match commands in the configured route map are supported.

Defaults Disabled.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP Address Family (conf-router_bgp_af)

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced IPv6 MGBP support for E-Series

clear ip bgp ipv4 multicast

c et s Reset MBGP sessions.

Syntax clear ip bgp ipv4 multicast * ip-address [dampening | flap-statistics] peer-group]

Parameters
* Enter the character * to clear all peers.
ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format to clear the prefixes from that
neighbor.
dampening (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dampening to clear route flap
dampening information.
flap-statistics (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword flap-statistics to reset the flap statistics
on all prefixes from that neighbor.
peer-group (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword peer-group to clear all members of a
peer-group.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 357

 clear ip bgp dampening
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

c et s Clear information on route dampening.

Syntax clear ip bgp dampening ipv4 multicast network network-mask

Parameters
dampening Enter the keyword dampening to clear route flap dampening
information.
network (OPTIONAL) Enter the network address in dotted decimal format
(A.B.C.D).
network-mask (OPTIONAL) Enter the network mask in slash prefix format (/x).

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced IPv6 MGBP support for E-Series

clear ip bgp flap-statistics

c et s Clear BGP flap statistics, which includes number of flaps and the time of the last flap.

Syntax clear ip bgp ipv4 multicast flap-statistics network | filter-list list |regexp regexp

Parameters
Network (OPTIONAL) Enter the network address to clear flap statistics in dotted decimal
format (A.B.C.D).
filter-list list (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword filter-list followed by the name of a
configured AS-PATH list (max 16 characters).
regexp regexp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword regexp followed by regular expressions. Use
one or a combination of the following:
• . = (period) any single character (including a white space)
• * = (asterisk) the sequences in a pattern (0 or more sequences)
• + = (plus) the sequences in a pattern (1 or more sequences)
• ? = (question mark) sequences in a pattern (either 0 or 1 sequences). You
must enter an escape sequence (CTRL+v) prior to entering the ? regular
expression.
• [ ] = (brackets) a range of single-character patterns.
• ( ) = (parenthesis) groups a series of pattern elements to a single element
• { } = (braces) minimum and the maximum match count
• ^ = (caret) the beginning of the input string. If the caret is used at the
beginning of a sequence or range, it matches on everything BUT the
characters specified.
• $ = (dollar sign) the end of the output string.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
History

358 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced IPv6 MGBP support for E-Series

debug ip bgp dampening

c et s View information on routes being dampened.

Syntax debug ip bgp ipv4 multicast dampening

To disable debugging, enter no debug ip bgp ipv4 multicast dampening

Parameters
dampening Enter the keyword dampening to clear route flap dampening information.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced IPv6 MGBP support for E-Series

debug ip bgp peer-group updates

c et s View information about BGP peer-group updates.
debug ip bgp peer-group peer-group-name updates [in | out]

To disable debugging, enter no debug ip bgp peer-group peer-group-name updates [in | out]
command.

Parameters
peer-group Enter the keyword peer-group followed by the name of the peer-group.
peer-group-name
updates Enter the keyword updates to view BGP update information.
in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view only BGP updates received
from neighbors.
out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view only BGP updates sent to
neighbors.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced IPv6 MGBP support for E-Series

debug ip bgp updates

c et s View information about BGP updates.
debug ip bgp updates [in | out]

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 359

 To disable debugging, enter no debug ip bgp updates [in | out] command.
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Parameters
updates Enter the keyword updates to view BGP update information.
in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view only BGP updates received
from neighbors.
out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view only BGP updates sent to
neighbors.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Defaults Disabled.

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced IPv6 MGBP support for E-Series

distance bgp
c et s Define an administrative distance for routes.

Syntax distance bgp external-distance internal-distance local-distance

To return to default values, enter no distance bgp.

Parameters
external-distance Enter a number to assign to routes learned from a neighbor external to the AS.
Range: 1 to 255.
Default: 20
internal-distance Enter a number to assign to routes learned from a router within the AS.
Range: 1 to 255.
Default: 200
local-distance Enter a number to assign to routes learned from networks listed in the network
command.
Range: 1 to 255.
Default: 200

Defaults external-distance = 20; internal-distance = 200; local-distance = 200.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP (conf-router_bgp_af)

Caution: Dell Force10 recommends that you do not change the administrative distance of
internal routes. Changing the administrative distances may cause routing table
inconsistencies.

Usage The higher the administrative distance assigned to a route means that your confidence in that route is
Information low. Routes assigned an administrative distance of 255 are not installed in the routing table. Routes
from confederations are treated as internal BGP routes.

360 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced IPv6 MGBP support for E-Series

neighbor activate
c et s This command allows the specified neighbor/peer group to be enabled for the current AFI/SAFI.

Syntax neighbor [ip-address | peer-group-name] activate

To disable, use the no neighbor [ip-address | peer-group-name] activate command.

Parameters
ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
peer-group-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the peer group
activate Enter the keyword activate to enable the neighbor/peer group in the new
AFI/SAFI.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes ROUTER BGP Address Family (conf-router_bgp_af)

Usage By default, when a neighbor/peer group configuration is created in the Router BGP context, it is
Information enabled for the IPv4/Unicast AFI/SAFI. By using activate in the new context, the neighbor/peer
group is enabled for AFI/SAFI.

Related
address family ipv4 multicast (MBGP) Changes the context to SAFI
Commands

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced IPv6 MGBP support for E-Series

neighbor advertisement-interval
c et s Set the advertisement interval between BGP neighbors or within a BGP peer group.

Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} advertisement-interval seconds

To return to the default value, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name}
advertisement-interval command.

Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to set the advertisement interval for all routers
in the peer group.
seconds Enter a number as the time interval, in seconds, between BGP advertisements.
Range: 0 to 600 seconds.
Default: 5 seconds for internal BGP peers; 30 seconds for external BGP peers.

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 361

 Defaults seconds = 5 seconds (internal peers); seconds = 30 seconds (external peers)
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Command Modes ROUTER BGP Address Family (conf-router_bgp_af)

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced IPv6 MGBP support for E-Series

neighbor default-originate
c et s Inject the default route to a BGP peer or neighbor.

Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} default-originate [route-map map-name]

To remove a default route, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} default-originate
command.

Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to set the default route of all routers in that peer
group.
route-map map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword route-map followed by the name of a
configured route map.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP Address Family (conf-router_bgp_af)

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced IPv6 MGBP support for E-Series

neighbor distribute-list
c et s Distribute BGP information via an established prefix list.

Syntax neighbor [ip-address | peer-group-name] distribute-list prefix-list-name [in | out]

To delete a neighbor distribution list, use the no neighbor [ip-address | peer-group-name]
distribute-list prefix-list-name [in | out] command.

Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to apply the distribute list filter to all routers
in the peer group.
prefix-list-name Enter the name of an established prefix list.
If the prefix list is not configured, the default is permit (to allow all routes).
in Enter the keyword in to distribute only inbound traffic.
out Enter the keyword out to distribute only outbound traffic.

362 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP Address Family (conf-router_bgp_af)

Usage Other BGP filtering commands include: neighbor filter-list, ip as-path access-list, and neighbor
Information route-map.

Related
ip as-path access-list Configure IP AS-Path ACL.
Commands
neighbor filter-list Assign a AS-PATH list to a neighbor or peer group.
neighbor route-map Assign a route map to a neighbor or peer group.

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced IPv6 MGBP support for E-Series

neighbor filter-list
c et s Configure a BGP filter based on the AS-PATH attribute.

Syntax neighbor [ip-address | peer-group-name] filter-list aspath access-list-name [in | out]

To delete a BGP filter, use the no neighbor [ip-address | peer-group-name] filter-list aspath
access-list-name [in | out] command.

Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to apply the filter to all routers in the
peer group.
access-list-name Enter the name of an established AS-PATH access list (up to 140
characters).
If the AS-PATH access list is not configured, the default is permit (to
allow routes).
in Enter the keyword in to filter inbound BGP routes.
out Enter the keyword out to filter outbound BGP routes.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP Address Family (conf-router_bgp_af)

Usage Use the ip as-path access-list command syntax in the CONFIGURATION mode to enter the AS-PATH
Information ACL mode and configure AS-PATH filters to deny or permit BGP routes based on information in their
AS-PATH attribute.

Related
ip as-path access-list Enter AS-PATH ACL mode and configure AS-PATH filters.
Commands

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced IPv6 MGBP support for E-Series

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 363

 neighbor maximum-prefix
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

c et s Control the number of network prefixes received.

Syntax neighbor ip-address | peer-group-name maximum-prefix maximum [threshold] [warning-only]

To return to the default values, use the no neighbor ip-address | peer-group-name
maximum-prefix maximum command.

Parameters
ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
peer-group-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the peer group.
maximum Enter a number as the maximum number of prefixes allowed for this BGP router.
Range: 1 to 4294967295.
threshold (OPTIONAL) Enter a number to be used as a percentage of the maximum value.
When the number of prefixes reaches this percentage of the maximum value,
FTOS sends a message.
Range: 1 to 100 percent.
Default: 75
warning-only (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword warning-only to set the router to send a log
message when the maximum value is reached. If this parameter is not set, the
router stops peering when the maximum number of prefixes is reached.

Defaults threshold = 75

Command Modes ROUTER BGP Address Family (conf-router_bgp_af)

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced IPv6 MGBP support for E-Series

neighbor next-hop-self
c et s Enables you to configure the router as the next hop for a BGP neighbor.

Syntax neighbor ip-address | peer-group-name next-hop-self

To return to the default setting, use the no neighbor ip-address | peer-group-name next-hop-self
command.

Parameters
ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
peer-group-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the peer group.

Defaults Disabled.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP Address Family (conf-router_bgp_af)

Usage If the set next-hop command in the ROUTE-MAP mode is configured, its configuration takes
Information precedence over the neighbor next-hop-self command.

364 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced IPv6 MGBP support for E-Series

neighbor remove-private-as
c et s Remove private AS numbers from the AS-PATH of outgoing updates.

Syntax neighbor ip-address | peer-group-name remove-private-as

To return to the default, use the no neighbor ip-address | peer-group-name remove-private-as
command.

Parameters
ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor to remove the private AS
numbers.
peer-group-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the peer group to remove the private AS
numbers

Defaults Disabled (that is, private AS number are not removed).

Command Modes ROUTER BGP Address Family (conf-router_bgp_af)

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced IPv6 MGBP support for E-Series

neighbor route-map
c et s Apply an established route map to either incoming or outbound routes of a BGP neighbor or c peer
group.

Syntax neighbor [ip-address | peer-group-name] route-map map-name [in | out]

To remove the route map, use the no neighbor [ip-address | peer-group-name] route-map
map-name [in | out] command.

Parameters
ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
peer-group-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the peer group.
map-name Enter the name of an established route map.
If the Route map is not configured, the default is deny (to drop all routes).
in Enter the keyword in to filter inbound routes.
out Enter the keyword out to filter outbound routes.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP Address Family (conf-router_bgp_af)

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 365

 Usage When you apply a route map to outbound routes, only routes that match at least one section of the route
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Information map are permitted.

If you identify a peer group by name, the peers in that peer group inherit the characteristics in the
Route map used in this command. If you identify a peer by IP address, the Route map overwrites either
the inbound or outbound policies on that peer.

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced IPv6 MGBP support for E-Series

neighbor route-reflector-client
c et s Configure a neighbor as a member of a route reflector cluster.

Syntax neighbor ip-address | peer-group-name route-reflector-client

To indicate that the neighbor is not a route reflector client or to delete a route reflector configuration,
use the no neighbor ip-address | peer-group-name route-reflector-client command.

Parameters
ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal
format.
peer-group-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the peer group.
All routers in the peer group receive routes from a route reflector.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP Address Family (conf-router_bgp_af)

Usage The first time you enter this command it configures the neighbor as a route reflector and members of
Information the route-reflector cluster. Internal BGP (IBGP) speakers do not need to be fully meshed if you
configure a route reflector.

When all clients of a route reflector are disabled, the neighbor is no longer a route reflector.

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced IPv6 MGBP support for E-Series

network
c et s Specify the networks for the BGP process and enter them in the BGP routing table.

Syntax network ip-address mask [route-map map-name]

To remove a network, use the no network ip-address mask [route-map map-name] command.

366 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 Parameters
ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format of the network.
mask Enter the mask of the IP address in the slash prefix length format (for example, /24).
The mask appears in command outputs in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D).
route-map (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword route-map followed by the name of an established route
map-name map.
Only the following ROUTE-MAP mode commands are supported:
• match ip address
• set community
• set local-preference
• set metric
• set next-hop
• set origin
• set weight
If the route map is not configured, the default is deny (to drop all routes).

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP Address Family (conf-router_bgp_af)

Usage FTOS resolves the network address configured by the network command with the routes in the main
Information routing table to ensure that the networks are reachable via non-BGP routes and non-default routes.

Related
redistribute Redistribute routes into BGP.
Commands

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced IPv6 MGBP support for E-Series

redistribute
c et s Redistribute routes into BGP.

Syntax redistribute [connected | static] [route-map map-name]

To disable redistribution, use the no redistribution [connected | static] [route-map map-name]
command.

Parameters
connected Enter the keyword connected to redistribute routes from physically connected
interfaces.

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 367

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

static Enter the keyword static to redistribute manually configured routes.

These routes are treated as incomplete routes.
route-map (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword route-map followed by the name of an established
map-name route map.
Only the following ROUTE-MAP mode commands are supported:
• match ip address
• set community
• set local-preference
• set metric
• set next-hop
• set origin
• set weight
If the route map is not configured, the default is deny (to drop all routes).

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP Address Family (conf-router_bgp_af)

Usage If you do not configure default-metric command, in addition to the redistribute command, or there is no
Information route map to set the metric, the metric for redistributed static and connected is “0”.

To redistribute the default route (0.0.0.0/0) configure the neighbor default-originate command.

Related
neighbor default-originate Inject the default route.
Commands

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced IPv6 MGBP support for E-Series

redistribute ospf
c et s Redistribute OSPF routes into BGP.

Syntax redistribute ospf process-id [[match external {1 | 2}] [match internal]] [route-map
map-name]
To stop redistribution of OSPF routes, use the no redistribute ospf process-id command.

Parameters
process-id Enter the number of the OSPF process.
Range: 1 to 65535
match external (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords match external to redistribute OSPF external routes.
{1 | 2} You can specify 1 or 2 to redistribute those routes only.
match internal (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords match internal to redistribute OSPF internal
routes only.
route-map (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords route-map followed by the name of a configured
map-name Route map.

Defaults Not configured.

368 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

Command Modes ROUTER BGP Address Family (conf-router_bgp_af)

Usage When you enter redistribute ospf process-id command without any other parameters, FTOS
Information redistributes all OSPF internal routes, external type 1 routes, and external type 2 routes.
This feature is not supported by an RFC.

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced IPv6 MGBP support for E-Series

show ip bgp ipv4 multicast

c et s View the current MBGP routing table for the system.

Syntax show ip bgp ipv4 multicast [detail | network [network-mask] [length]]

Parameters
detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to display BGP internal information for
the IPv4 Multicast address family.
network (OPTIONAL) Enter the network address (in dotted decimal format) of the BGP
network to view information only on that network.
network-mask (OPTIONAL) Enter the network mask (in slash prefix format) of the BGP network
address.
longer-prefixes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword longer-prefixes to view all routes with a
common prefix.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Example Figure 10-27. Command Example: show ip bgp

FTOS#show ip bgp ipv4 multicast

BGP table version is 14, local router ID is 100.10.10.1
Status codes: s suppressed, S stale, d damped, h history, * valid, > best
Path source: I - internal, a - aggregate, c - confed-external, r - redistributed, n - network
Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete

Network Next Hop Metric LocPrf Weight Path

*>I 25.1.0.0/16 25.25.25.25 0 100 0 i
*>I 25.2.0.0/16 25.25.25.26 0 100 0 ?
*>I 25.3.0.0/16 211.1.1.165 0 100 0 ?
*>r 144.1.0.0/16 0.0.0.0 0 32768 ?
*>r 144.2.0.0/16 100.10.10.10 0 32768 ?
*>r 144.3.0.0/16 211.1.1.135 0 32768 ?
*>n 145.1.0.0/16 0.0.0.0 0 32768 i
FTOS#

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 369

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Table 10-17. Command Example Fields: show ip bgp

Field Description
Network Displays the destination network prefix of each BGP route.
Next Hop Displays the next hop address of the BGP router.
If 0.0.0.0 is listed in this column, then local routes exist in the routing
table.
Metric Displays the BGP route’s metric, if assigned.
LocPrf Displays the BGP LOCAL_PREF attribute for the route.
Weight Displays the route’s weight
Path Lists all the ASs the route passed through to reach the destination network.

Related
show ip bgp community View BGP communities.
Commands

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced IPv6 MGBP support for E-Series
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series

show ip bgp cluster-list

c et s View BGP neighbors in a specific cluster.

Syntax show ip bgp ipv4 multicast cluster-list [cluster-id]

Parameters
cluster-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the cluster id in dotted decimal format.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced IPv6 MGBP support for E-Series

show ip bgp community

ces View information on all routes with Community attributes or view specific BGP community groups.

Syntax show ip bgp ipv4 multicast community [community-number] [local-as] [no-export]

[no-advertise]

370 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 Parameters
community-number Enter the community number in AA:NN format where AA is the AS number (2
bytes) and NN is a value specific to that autonomous system.
You can specify up to eight community numbers to view information on those
community groups.
local-AS Enter the keywords local-AS to view all routes with the COMMUNITY
attribute of NO_EXPORT_SUBCONFED.
All routes with the NO_EXPORT_SUBCONFED (0xFFFFFF03) community
attribute must not be advertised to external BGP peers.
no-advertise Enter the keywords no-advertise to view all routes containing the
well-known community attribute of NO_ADVERTISE.
All routes with the NO_ADVERTISE (0xFFFFFF02) community attribute must
not be advertised to other BGP peers.
no-export Enter the keywords no-export to view all routes containing the well-known
community attribute of NO_EXPORT.
All routes with the NO_EXPORT (0xFFFFFF01) community attribute must not
be advertised outside a BGP confederation boundary.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Usage To view the total number of COMMUNITY attributes found, use the show ip bgp summary command.
Information The text line above the route table states the number of COMMUNITY attributes found.

The show ip bgp community command without any parameters lists BGP routes with at least one BGP
community attribute and the output is the same as for the show ip bgp command output.

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced IPv6 MGBP support for E-Series

show ip bgp community-list

c et s View routes that are affected by a specific community list.

Syntax show ip bgp ipv4 multicast community-list community-list-name

Parameters
community-list-name Enter the name of a configured IP community list.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 371

 show ip bgp dampened-paths
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

c et s View BGP routes that are dampened (non-active).

Syntax show ip bgp ipv4 multicast dampened-paths

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced IPv6 MGBP support for E-Series

show ip bgp filter-list

c et s View the routes that match the filter lists.

Syntax show ip bgp ipv4 multicast filter-list as-path-name

Parameters
as-path-name Enter the name of an AS-PATH.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced IPv6 MGBP support for E-Series

show ip bgp flap-statistics

c et s View flap statistics on BGP routes.

Syntax show ip bgp ipv4 multicast flap-statistics [ip-address [mask]] [filter-list as-path-name]
[regexp regular-expression]

Parameters
ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address (in dotted decimal format) of the BGP
network to view information only on that network.
mask (OPTIONAL) Enter the network mask (in slash prefix (/x) format) of the
BGP network address.

372 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 filter-list as-path-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword filter-list followed by the name of a
configured AS-PATH ACL.
regexp regular-expression Enter a regular expression then use one or a combination of the following
characters to match:
• . = (period) any single character (including a white space)
• * = (asterisk) the sequences in a pattern (0 or more sequences)
• + = (plus) the sequences in a pattern (1 or more sequences)
• ? = (question mark) sequences in a pattern (either 0 or 1 sequences). You
must enter an escape sequence (CTRL+v) prior to entering the ?
regular expression.
• [ ] = (brackets) a range of single-character patterns.
• ( ) = (parenthesis) groups a series of pattern elements to a single element
• { } = (braces) minimum and the maximum match count
• ^ = (caret) the beginning of the input string. If the caret is used at the
beginning of a sequence or range, it matches on everything BUT the
characters specified.
• $ = (dollar sign) the end of the output string.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced IPv6 MGBP support for E-Series

show ip bgp inconsistent-as

c et s View routes with inconsistent originating Autonomous System (AS) numbers, that is, prefixes that are
announced from the same neighbor AS but with a different AS-Path.

Syntax show ip bgp ipv4 multicast inconsistent-as

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 373

 show ip bgp ipv4 multicast neighbors
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

c et s Enables you to view the information exchanged by BGP neighbors.

Syntax show ip bgp ipv4 multicast neighbors [ip-address [advertised-routes | dampened-routes |

detail | flap-statistics | routes]]

Parameters
ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address, in either IPv4 or IPv6 format, of the neighbor
to view only BGP information exchanged with that neighbor.
advertised-routes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords advertised-routes to view only the routes
the neighbor sent.
dampened-routes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dampened-routes to view information on
dampened routes from the BGP neighbor.
detail (OPTIONAL) Display detailed neighbor information.
flap-statistics (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword flap-statistics to view flap statistics on the
neighbor’s routes.
routes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords routes to view only the neighbor’s feasible
routes.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

374 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

Example Figure 10-28. Command Example: show ip bgp ipv4 multicast neighbors
FTOS#show ip bgp ipv4 multicast neighbors
BGP neighbor is 25.25.25.25, remote AS 6400, internal link
BGP version 4, remote router ID 25.25.25.25
BGP state ESTABLISHED, in this state for 00:02:18
Last read 00:00:16, hold time is 180, keepalive interval is 60 seconds
Received 1404 messages, 0 in queue
3 opens, 1 notifications, 1394 updates
6 keepalives, 0 route refresh requests
Sent 48 messages, 0 in queue
3 opens, 2 notifications, 0 updates
43 keepalives, 0 route refresh requests
Minimum time between advertisement runs is 5 seconds
Minimum time before advertisements start is 0 seconds
Capabilities received from neighbor for IPv4 unicast :
MULTIPROTO_EXT(1)
ROUTE_REFRESH(2)
CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128)
Capabilities advertised to neighbor for IPv4 Multicast :
MULTIPROTO_EXT(1)
ROUTE_REFRESH(2)
CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128)
Update source set to Loopback 0
For address family: IPv4 Multicast
BGP table version 14, neighbor version 14
3 accepted prefixes consume 12 bytes
Prefixes accepted 1 (consume 4 bytes), withdrawn 0 by peer
Prefixes advertised 0, rejected 0, withdrawn 0 from peer
Connections established 2; dropped 1
Last reset 00:03:17, due to user reset

Notification History
'Connection Reset' Sent : 1 Recv: 0

Local host: 100.10.10.1, Local port: 179

Foreign host: 25.25.25.25, Foreign port: 2290

BGP neighbor is 211.1.1.129, remote AS 640, external link

BGP version 4, remote router ID 0.0.0.0
BGP state ACTIVE, in this state for 00:00:36
Last read 00:00:41, hold time is 180, keepalive interval is 60 seconds
Received 28 messages, 0 notifications, 0 in queue
Sent 6 messages, 3 notifications, 0 in queue
Received 18 updates, Sent 6 updates
Route refresh request: received 0, sent 0
Minimum time between advertisement runs is 30 seconds

For address family: IPv4 Multicast

BGP table version 14, neighbor version 0
0 accepted prefixes consume 0 bytes
Prefix advertised 0, rejected 0, withdrawn 0

Connections established 3; dropped 3

Last reset 00:00:37, due to user reset

Notification History
'Connection Reset' Sent : 3 Recv: 0

No active TCP connection

FTOS#

Table 10-18. Command Example Fields: show ip bgp ipv4 multicast neighbors

Lines beginning with Description

BGP neighbor Displays the BGP neighbor address and its AS number. The last phrase in
the line indicates whether the link between the BGP router and its
neighbor is an external or internal one. If they are located in the same AS,
then the link is internal; otherwise the link is external.
BGP version Displays the BGP version (always version 4) and the remote router ID.

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 375

 Table 10-18. Command Example Fields: show ip bgp ipv4 multicast neighbors
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Lines beginning with Description

BGP state Displays the neighbor’s BGP state and the amount of time in
hours:minutes:seconds it has been in that state.
Last read This line displays the following information:
• last read is the time (hours:minutes:seconds) the router read a message
from its neighbor
• hold time is the number of seconds configured between messages from
its neighbor
• keepalive interval is the number of seconds between keepalive
messages to help ensure that the TCP session is still alive.
Received messages This line displays the number of BGP messages received, the number of
notifications (error messages) and the number of messages waiting in a
queue for processing.
Sent messages The line displays the number of BGP messages sent, the number of
notifications (error messages) and the number of messages waiting in a
queue for processing.
Received updates This line displays the number of BGP updates received and sent.
Minimum time Displays the minimum time, in seconds, between advertisements.
(list of inbound and outbound Displays the policy commands configured and the names of the Route
policies) map, AS-PATH ACL or Prefix list configured for the policy.
For address family: Displays IPv4 Unicast as the address family.
BGP table version Displays the which version of the primary BGP routing table the router
and the neighbor are using.
accepted prefixes Displays the number of network prefixes accepted by the router and the
amount of memory used to process those prefixes.
Prefix advertised Displays the number of network prefixes advertised, the number rejected
and the number withdrawn from the BGP routing table.
Connections established Displays the number of TCP connections established and dropped between
the two peers to exchange BGP information.
Last reset Displays the amount of time since the peering session was last reset. Also
states if the peer resets the peering session.
If the peering session was never reset, the word never is displayed.
Local host: Displays the peering address of the local router and the TCP port number.
Foreign host: Displays the peering address of the neighbor and the TCP port number.

Related
show ip bgp View the current BGP routing table.
Commands

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced IPv6 MGBP support for E-Series

376 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

show ip bgp peer-group
c et s Enables you to view information on the BGP peers in a peer group.

Syntax show ip bgp ipv4 multicast peer-group [peer-group-name [detail | summary]]

Parameters
peer-group-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of a peer group to view information about that peer
group only.
detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to view detailed status information of
the peers in that peer group.
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view status information of the
peers in that peer group.
The output is the same as that found in show ip bgp summary command

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Related
neighbor peer-group (assigning peers) Assign peer to a peer-group.
Commands
neighbor peer-group (creating group) Create a peer group.
show ip bgp peer-group View information on the BGP peers in a peer group.

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced IPv6 MGBP support for E-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Modified: added detail option

show ip bgp summary

c et s Enables you to view the status of all BGP connections.

Syntax show ip bgp ipv4 multicast summary

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Example Figure 10-29. Command Example: show ip bgp ipv4 multicast summary
FTOS#sho ip bgp ipv4 multicast summary
BGP router identifier 100.10.10.1, local AS number 6400
BGP table version is 14, main routing table version 14
7 network entrie(s) and 7 paths using 972 bytes of memory
2 BGP path attribute entrie(s) using 112 bytes of memory
1 BGP AS-PATH entrie(s) using 35 bytes of memory

Neighbor AS MsgRcvd MsgSent TblVer InQ OutQ Up/Down State/Pfx

25.25.25.25 6400 21 9 14 0 0 00:02:04 3

211.1.1.129 640 28 6 0 0 0 00:00:21 Active
FTOS#

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 377

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Table 10-19. Command Example Fields: show ip bgp ipv4 multicast summary

Field Description
BGP router identifier Displays the local router ID and the AS number.
BGP table version Displays the BGP table version and the main routing table version.
network entries Displays the number of network entries and route paths and the amount of
memory used to process those entries.
BGP path attribute entries Displays the number of BGP path attributes and the amount of memory used to
process them.
BGP AS-PATH entries Displays the number of BGP AS_PATH attributes processed and the amount of
memory used to process them.
BGP community entries Displays the number of BGP COMMUNITY attributes processed and the
amount of memory used to process them. The show ip bgp community
command provides more details on the COMMUNITY attributes.
Dampening enabled Displayed only when dampening is enabled. Displays the number of paths
designated as history, dampened, or penalized.
Neighbor Displays the BGP neighbor address.
AS Displays the AS number of the neighbor.
MsgRcvd Displays the number of BGP messages that neighbor received.
MsgSent Displays the number of BGP messages that neighbor sent.
TblVer Displays the version of the BGP table that was sent to that neighbor.
InQ Displays the number of messages from that neighbor waiting to be processed.
OutQ Displays the number of messages waiting to be sent to that neighbor.
If a number appears in parentheses, the number represents the number of
messages waiting to be sent to the peer group.
Up/Down Displays the amount of time (in hours:minutes:seconds) that the neighbor is in
the Established stage.
If the neighbor has never moved into the Established stage, the word never is
displayed.
State/Pfx If the neighbor is in Established stage, the number of network prefixes received.
If a maximum limit was configured with the neighbor maximum-prefix
command, (prfxd) appears in this column.
If the neighbor is not in Established stage, the current stage is displayed (Idle,
Connect, Active, OpenSent, OpenConfirm) When the peer is transitioning
between states and clearing the routes received, the phrase (Purging) may
appear in this column.
If the neighbor is disabled, the phrase (Admin shut) appears in this column.

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced IPv6 MGBP support for E-Series

378 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

BGP Extended Communities (RFC 4360)
BGP Extended Communities, as defined in RFC 4360, is an optional transitive BGP attribute. It
provides two major advantages over Standard Communities:
• The range is extended from 4-octet (AA:NN) to 8-octet (Type:Value) to provide enough number
communities.
• Communities are structured using a new “Type” field (1 or 2-octets), allowing you to provide
granular control/filter routing information based on the type of extended communities.
The BGP Extended Community commands are:
• deny
• deny regex
• description
• ip extcommunity-list
• match extcommunity
• permit
• permit regex
• set extcommunity rt
• set extcommunity soo
• show ip bgp ipv4 extcommunity-list
• show ip bgp paths extcommunity
• show ip extcommunity-list
• show running-config extcommunity-list

deny
ces Use this feature to reject (deny) from the two types of extended communities, Route Origin (rt) or
Site-of-Origin (soo).

Syntax deny {rt | soo} {as4 ASN4:NN | ASN:NNNN | IPADDR:NN}

To remove (delete) the rule, use the no deny {rt | soo} {as4 ASN4:NN | ASN:NNNN | IPADDR:NN}
command.

Parameters
rt Enter the keyword rt to designate a Route Origin community
soo Enter the keyword soo to designate a Site-of-Origin community (also known as
Route Origin).
as4 ASN4:NN Enter the keyword as4 followed by the 4-octet AS specific extended community
number in the format ASN4:NN (4-byte AS number:2-byte community value).
ASN:NNNN Enter the 2-octet AS specific extended community number in the format
ASN:NNNN (2-byte AS number:4-byte community value).
IPADDR:NN Enter the IP address specific extended community in the format IPADDR:NN
(4-byte IPv4 Unicast Address:2-byte community value)

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-ext-community-list)

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 379

 Related
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

permit Configure to add (permit) rules

Commands
show ip extcommunity-list Display the Extended Community list

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

deny regex
ces This features enables you to specify an extended communities to reject (deny) using a regular
expressions (regex).

Syntax deny regex {regex}

To remove, use the no deny regex {regex} command.

Parameters
regex Enter a regular expression.

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-ext-community-list)

Usage Duplicate commands are silently accepted.

Information

Example Figure 10-30. Commands Example: deny regexp

FTOS(conf-ext-community-list)#deny regexp 123
FTOS(conf-ext-community-list)#

Related
permit regex Permit a community using a regular expression
Commands

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

description
ces Use this feature to designate a meaningful description to the extended community.

Syntax description {line}

To remove the description, use the no description {line} command.

Parameters
line Enter a description (maximum 80 characters).

Defaults Not configured

380 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-ext-community-list)

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

ip extcommunity-list
ces Use this feature to enter the Extended Community-list mode.

Syntax ip extcommunity-list word

To exit from this mode, use the exit command.

Parameters
word Enter a community list name (maximum 16 characters).

Defaults No defaults values or behavior

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-ext-community-list)

Usage This new mode will change the prompt. See the example below.
Information

Example Figure 10-31. Command Example: ip extcommunity-list

FTOS(conf)#ip extcommunity-list test
FTOS(conf-ext-community-list)#

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

match extcommunity
ces Use this feature to match an extended community in the Route Map mode.

Syntax match extcommunity {extended community list name}

To change the match, use the no match extcommunity {extended community list name}
command.

Parameters
extended community list name Enter the name of the extended community list.

Defaults No defaults values or behavior

Command Modes ROUTE MAP (config-route-map)

Usage Like standard communities, extended communities can be used in route-map to match the attribute.
Information

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 381

 Example Figure 10-32. Command Example: match extcommunity
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS(config-route-map)#match extcommunity Freedombird

FTOS(config-route-map)#

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

permit
ces Use this feature to add rules (permit) from the two types of extended communities, Route Origin (rt) or
Site-of-Origin (soo).

Syntax permit {rt | soo} {as4 ASN4:NN | ASN:NNNN | IPADDR:NN}

To change the rules, use the no permit {rt | soo} {as4 ASN4:NN | ASN:NNNN | IPADDR:NN}
command.

Parameters
rt Enter the keyword rt to designate a Route Origin community
soo Enter the keyword soo to designate a Site-of-Origin community (also known as
Route Origin).
as4 ASN4:NN Enter the keyword as4 followed by the 4-octet AS specific extended community
number in the format ASN4:NN (4-byte AS number:2-byte community value).
ASN:NNNN Enter the 2-octet AS specific extended community number in the format
ASN:NNNN (2-byte AS number:4-byte community value).
IPADDR:NN Enter the IP address specific extended community in the format IPADDR:NN (4-byte
IPv4 Unicast Address:2-byte community value)

Defaults Not Configured

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-ext-community-list)

Related
deny Configure to delete (deny) rules
Commands
show ip extcommunity-list Display the Extended Community list

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

permit regex
ces This features enables you specify an extended communities to forward (permit) using a regular
expressions (regex).

Syntax permit regex {regex}

To remove, use the no permit regex {regex} command.

382 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 Parameters
regex Enter a regular expression.

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-ext-community-list)

Usage Duplicate commands are silently accepted.

Information

Example Figure 10-33. Command Example: permit regexp

FTOS(conf-ext-community-list)#permit regexp 123
FTOS(conf-ext-community-list)#

Related
deny regex Deny a community using a regular expression
Commands

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

set extcommunity rt
ces Use this feature to set Route Origin community attributes in Route Map.

Syntax set extcommunity rt {as4 ASN4:NN [non-trans] | ASN:NNNN [non-trans] | IPADDR:NN

[non-trans]} [additive]
To delete the Route Origin community, use the no set extcommunity command.

Parameters
as4 ASN4:NN Enter the keyword as4 followed by the 4-octet AS specific extended community
number in the format ASN4:NN (4-byte AS number:2-byte community value).
ASN:NNNN Enter the 2-octet AS specific extended community number in the format
ASN:NNNN (2-byte AS number:4-byte community value).
IPADDR:NN Enter the IP address specific extended community in the format IPADDR:NN (4-byte
IPv4 Unicast Address:2-byte community value)
additive (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword additive to add to the existing extended
community.
non-trans (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword non-trans to indicate a non-transitive BGP
extended community.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes ROUTE MAP (config-route-map)

Usage If the set community rt and soo are in the same route-map entry, we can define the behavior as:
Information
• If rt option comes before soo, with or without additive option, then soo overrides the
communities set by rt

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 383

 • If rt options comes after soo, without the additive option, then rt overrides the communities set
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

by soo
• If rt with additive option comes after soo, then rt adds the communities set by soo

Related
Commands set extcommunity soo Set extended community site-of-origin in route-map.

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

set extcommunity soo

ces Use this feature to set extended community site-of-origin in Route Map.

Syntax set extcommunity soo {as4 ASN4:NN | ASN:NNNN | IPADDR:NN [non-trans]}

To delete the site-of-origin community, use the no set extcommunity command.

Parameters
as4 ASN4:NN Enter the keyword as4 followed by the 4-octet AS specific extended community
number in the format ASN4:NN (4-byte AS number:2-byte community value).
ASN:NNNN Enter the 2-octet AS specific extended community number in the format
ASN:NNNN (2-byte AS number:4-byte community value).
IPADDR:NN Enter the IP address specific extended community in the format IPADDR:NN (4-byte
IPv4 Unicast Address:2-byte community value)
non-trans (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword non-trans to indicate a non-transitive BGP
extended community.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes ROUTE MAP (config-route-map)

Usage If the set community rt and soo are in the same route-map entry, we can define the behavior as:
Information
• If rt option comes before soo, with or without additive option, then soo overrides the
communities set by rt
• If rt options comes after soo, without the additive option, then rt overrides the communities set
by soo
• If rt with additive option comes after soo, then rt adds the communities set by soo

Related
set extcommunity rt Set extended community route origins via the route-map
Commands

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

384 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

show ip bgp ipv4 extcommunity-list
ces Use this feature to display IPv4 routes matching the extended community list name.

Syntax show ip bgp [ipv4 [multicast | unicast] | ipv6 unicast] extcommunity-list name

Parameters
multicast Enter the keyword multicast to display the multicast route information.
unicast Enter the keyword unicast to display the unicast route information.
ipv6 unicast Enter the keywords ipv6 unicast to display the IPv6 unicast route information.
name (OPTIONALLY) Enter the name of the extcommunity-list.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Usage If there is a type or sub-type that is not well-known, it will be displayed as:
Information
TTSS:XX:YYYY

Where TT is type, SS is sub-type displayed in hexadecimal format, XX:YYYY is the value divided
into 2-byte and 4-byte values in decimal format. This format is consistent with other vendors.

For example, if the extended community has type 0x04, sub-type 0x05, value
0x20 00 00 00 10 00, it will be displayed as:

0x0405:8192:4096

Non-transitive extended communities are marked with an asterisk, as shown in the figure below.

Example Figure 10-34. Command Example: show ip bgp ipv4 multicast extcommunity-list
FTOS#show ip bgp ipv4 multicast extcommunity-list
BGP routing table entry for 192.168.1.0/24, version 2

Paths: (1 available, table Default-IP-Routing-Table.)

Not advertised to any peer
Received from :
100.100.1.2 (2.4.0.1) Best
AS_PATH : 200
Next-Hop : 100.100.1.2, Cost : 0
Origin IGP, Metric 4294967295 (Default), LocalPref 100, Weight 0,
external
Communities :
300:400 500:600

Extended Communities :
RT:1111:4278080 SoO:35:4 SoO:36:50529043 SoO:37:50529044
SoO:38:50529045 SoO:0.0.0.2:33 SoO:506.62106:34 0x0303:254:11223*

FTOS#

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 385

 show ip bgp paths extcommunity
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Use this feature to display all BGP paths having extended community attributes.

Syntax show ip bgp paths extcommunity

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Example Figure 10-35. Command Example: show ip bgp paths community (Partial)
FTOS#show ip bgp paths extcommunity
Total 1 Extended Communities

Address Hash Refcount Extended Community

0x41d57024 12272 1 RT:7:200 SoO:5:300 SoO:0.0.0.3:1285

FTOS#

Table 10-20. Command Example Fields: show ip bgp paths community

Field Description
Address Displays the internal address where the path attribute is stored.
Hash Displays the hash bucket where the path attribute is stored.
Refcount Displays the number of BGP routes using these extended communities.
Community Displays the extended community attributes in this BGP path.

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

show ip extcommunity-list
ces Display the IP extended community list.

Syntax show ip extcommunity-list [word]

Parameters
word Enter the name of the extended community list you want to view.

Defaults Defaults.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

386 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 Example Figure 10-36. Command Example: show ip extcommunity-list
FTOS#show ip extcommunity-list test
ip extcommunity-list test
deny RT:1234:12
permit regexp 123
deny regexp 234
deny regexp 123
FTOS#

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

show running-config extcommunity-list

ces Use this feature to display the current configuration of the extended community lists.

Syntax show running-config extcommunity-list [word]

Parameters
word Enter the name of the extended community list you want to view.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Example Figure 10-37. Command Example: show running-config extcommunity-list

FTOS#show running-config extcommunity-list test

ip extcommunity-list test
permit rt 65033:200
deny soo 101.11.11.2:23
permit rt as4 110212:340
deny regex ^(65001_)$
FTOS#

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4) | 387

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

388 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4(BGPv4)

 11
Bare Metal Provisioning

Overview
Bare Metal Provisioning version 2.0 is supported on the following platforms:
z

In a data center network, Bare Metal Provisioning (BMP) automates the configuration and updating of
switches, ensuring standard configurations across installed devices.

You can configure auto-configuration on a single switch or on multiple switches. BMP allows you to
set up a group of switches with a minimum of effort, but is also useful for quick configuration of a
single switch.

For additional information on BMP in an auto-configuration mode, refer to the Open Automation
Guide.

Note: BMP 2.0 does not support stacking in this release.

BMP eases configuration by automating the following steps:

• Boot images and running configurations are specified in a DHCP server.

• Switch boots up in Layer 3 mode with interfaces already in no shutdown mode and only enabling
some basic protocols to protect the switch and the network.
• The first port that receives the DHCP server response retains the IP address provided by the DHCP
server during the BMP process. All other management and user ports are shut down.
• Files are automatically downloaded from a file server.
• After the BMP process is complete, the IP address is released and the configuration is applied by
the switch.

Commands
• reload factory-default
• reload factory-default dhcp-client-mode
• reload factory-default dhcp-client-only-mode
• reload factory-default dhcp-server-mode
• reload-type
• show reload-type
• stop jump-start

Bare Metal Provisioning | 389

 reload factory-default
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

BMP 1.5 auto-configuration mode A: Reload the switch with the FTOS image stored in the local flash
and apply the factory-default startup configuration. A temporary management IP address (192.168.0.1)
is created.

Note: This command has been deprecated in FTOS software version 8.3.3.9.

Syntax reload factory-default

Defaults Loads the factory-default startup configuration file (see Example below).

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
History Version 8.3.3.9 Deprecated command.
Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on the S55.
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.

Usage This is the reload mode when a new Dell Networking switch (without BMP) arrives. You can
Information replace the temporary management IP address with a user-configured management IP
address. The IP address 192.168.0.1 continues to be active for ten minutes. After ten minutes,
a user-configured IP address is applied to the management interface.

Example The factory-default startup configuration file is as follows:

interface range GigabitEthernet 0/0 - 47

no shutdown
switchport
!
interface range TenGigabitEthernet 0/48 - 51
no shutdown
switchport
!
interface ManagementEthernet 0/0
ip address 192.168.0.1/24
no shutdown
!
ip telnet server enable
!
ip ssh server enable
!
protocol spanning-tree rstp
no disable
!
protocol lldp
no disable
advertise dot1-tlv port-vlan-id
advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size
advertise management-tlv system-description system-name
advertise med
no disable
!

390 | Bare Metal Provisioning

reload factory-default dhcp-client-mode
BMP 1.5 auto-configuration mode C: Reload a switch in DHCP-client mode with a specified FTOS
image and a startup configuration file.

Note: This command has been deprecated in FTOS software version 8.3.3.9.

Syntax reload factory-default dhcp-client-mode [honor-startup-config]

Parameters
honor-startup-config Honor the startup configuration file stored in the local flash. If this option is
not entered, retrieve the configuration file from the configured file server.

Defaults This is the default reload mode when a new Dell Networking switch configured with BMP
arrives. The switch contacts a DHCP server to download an FTOS image and configuration
file. If no DHCP server responds, the system reloads in factory-default mode.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.9 Deprecated command.
History
Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on the S55.
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.

reload factory-default dhcp-client-only-mode

BMP 1.5 auto-configuration mode D: Reload the switch in DHCP-client-only mode with a specified
FTOS image and startup configuration file for a specified number of discovery attempts.

Note: This command has been deprecated in FTOS software version 8.3.3.9.

Syntax reload factory-default dhcp-client-only-mode [retries] [honor-startup-config]

Parameters
retries Enter the number of times that the switch attempts to reach a DHCP server.
If no number of retries is entered, the switch continues to try to locate a
DHCP server an infinite number of times and does not complete reloading.
Range: 2 - 214748364
Default: Infinite number of retry attempts.
honor-startup-config Honor the startup configuration file stored in the local flash. If this option is
not entered, retrieve the configuration file from the configured file server.

Defaults The switch reloads by attempting to contact a DHCP server to download the FTOS image and
startup configuration file. By default, an infinite number of retries are attempted.

When a switch that is reloading in DHCP-client-only mode cannot reach a DHCP server and
has a number of retries configured, the switch attempts to reach the DHCP server only the
specified number of times. If a DHCP server cannot be reached within the configured number
of retries, the switch reloads in factory-default mode.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.9 Deprecated command.
History

Bare Metal Provisioning | 391

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on the S55.

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.

Usage Important: Do not use Mode D unless the DHCP, DNS, and file servers are already
Information configured. If the servers are not configured in the network, a switch endlessly attempts to
discover the DHCP and other servers and does not complete the reload.

reload factory-default dhcp-server-mode

BMP 1.5 auto-configuration mode B: Reload the switch using the FTOS image stored in the local flash
and apply the factory-default and DHCP server configurations. The switch boots up with a temporary
management IP address (192.168.0.1/24) and functions as a DHCP server.

Note: This command has been deprecated in FTOS software version 8.3.3.9.

Syntax reload factory-default dhcp-server-mode

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.9 Deprecated command.
History
]Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on the S55.
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.

Usage You must replace the temporary management IP address within ten minutes with a
Information user-configured, permanent management IP address in order to secure the switch. During the
first ten minutes, after authentication is enabled, access to the switch does not require a
password.

reload-type
Configure a switch to reload in normal mode or as a DHCP client with all ports configured for Layer 3
traffic.
z

Syntax reload-type {normal-reload | jump-start [config-download {enable | disable}] [dhcp-timeout

minutes] [vendor-class-identifier description]}

Parameters
normal-reload The switch reloads in normal mode using the FTOS image and startup
configuration file stored in the local flash.
jump-start The switch reloads in JumpStart mode as a DHCP client.
config-download {enable (Optional) Configure whether the switch boots up using the configuration
| disable} file downloaded from the DHCP/file servers (enable) OR if the downloaded
file will be discarded and the startup configuration file stored in the local
flash will be used (disable).
Default: None

392 | Bare Metal Provisioning

 dhcp-timeout minutes (Optional) Configure the DHCP timeout (in minutes) after which the
JumpStart reload stops.
Range: 0 to 50. If you enter 0, the switch waits until it receives a response
from a DHCP server.
Default: DHCP timeout is set to 0. The switch tries to contact a DHCP server
an infinite number of times.
vendor-class-identifier (Optional) Include a brief description in the user defined field in DHCP
description option 60. You can enter a maximum of 64 characters.

Defaults A switch running BMP 2.0 reloads in JumpStart mode as a DHCP client with all ports configured for
Layer 3 traffic.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.5.3 Introduced on S55
History
Version 8.3.3.8 Introduced on S60
Version 8.3.11.4 Introduced on Z9000
Version 8.3.10.1 Introduced on S4810.
Version 8.3.3.10 The reload-type command was moved from EXEC Privilege mode to
CONFIGURATION mode. The vendor-class-identifier keyword and the
description variable were introduced on S55 and S60 platforms.

Usage For an initial setup, the config-download parameter of the reload-type command is enabled. After
Information the configuration file is successfully downloaded, the config-download parameter is automatically
disabled. You can enable it again using the reload-type command.

After you set the auto-configuration mode (JumpStart or Normal reload) using the reload-type
command, you must enter the reload command to reload the switch in the configured mode.

When a switch reloads in JumpStart mode, all ports, including the management port, are automatically
configured as Layer 3 physical ports. The switch acts as a DHCP client on the ports for a
user-configured time (dhcp-timeout option). You can reconfigure the default startup configuration and
DHCP timeout values.

If a switch enters a loop while reloading in JumpStart mode because the switch continuously tries to
contact a DHCP server and a DHCP server is not found, connect to the switch using the console
terminal and enter the stop jump-start command to interrupt the reload and boot up in normal mode.
The startup configuration is then loaded from the local flash on the switch and the auto-configuration
mode is automatically changed to Normal reload.

Use the reload-type command in BMP 2.0 to toggle between Normal and JumpStart
auto-configuration modes. The reload settings for the auto-configuration mode that you configure are
stored in memory and retained for future reboots and BMP software upgrades. You can enter the
reload command at any time to reload the switch in the last configured mode: Normal reload or
JumpStart mode.

Related
show reload-type Display the current reload mode (Normal or jump-start mode)
Commands
stop jump-start Stops the JumpStart process to prevent a loop if the DHCP server is not
found.

Bare Metal Provisioning | 393

 show reload-type
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Display the currently configured reload mode.

Syntax show reload-type

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.5.3 Introduced on S55
History
Version 8.3.3.8 Introduced on S60
Version 8.3.11.4 Introduced on Z9000
Version 8.3.10.1 Introduced on S4810.

Usage Use the show reload-type command to check the currently configured auto-configuration mode
Information (JumpStart or Normal reload) on a switch running BMP 2.0.

You can also use the show bootvar command to display the current reload mode for BMP 2.0 with the
path of the FTOS image file retrieved from a DHCP server.

Example FTOS#show reload type

Reload-Type : jump-start [Next boot :jump-start]

config-download : enable

dhcp-timeout : 10

vendor-class-identifier : test

Related
reload-type Configure the reload mode as normal or JumpStart.
Commands

stop jump-start
Stop the switch from reloading in JumpStart mode to prevent an infinite loop.

Syntax stop jump-start

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.5.3 Introduced on S55
History
Version 8.3.3.8 Introduced on S60
Version 8.3.11.4 Introduced on Z9000
Version 8.3.10.1 Introduced on S4810.

394 | Bare Metal Provisioning

 Related
reload-type Configure the reload mode as normal or JumpStart.
Commands

Usage Use the stop jump-start command from the console of a switch running BMP 2.0 if the switch enters
Information a loop while reloading in JumpStart mode because it is continuously trying to contact a DHCP server
and a DHCP server is not found.The stop jump-start command stops the switch from connecting to
the DHCP server. After the stop jump-start command is used, the next default reload type will be a
normal reload. This will be indicated in the show reload-type command.

Bare Metal Provisioning | 395

 www.dell.com | dell.com/support

396
|
Bare Metal Provisioning
 12
Content Addressable Memory (CAM)

Overview
Content Addressable Memory (CAM) commands are supported C-Series, E-Series TeraScale and
S-Series, as indicated by the symbols under each command heading: c et s

This chapter includes information relating to the E-Series TeraScale platform. Refer to Chapter 11,
“Content Addressable Memory (CAM) for ExaScale for information on the commands for the E-Series
ExaScale platform.

Note: Not all CAM commands are supported on all platforms. Be sure to note the platform
symbol when looking for a command.

Warning: If you are using these features for the first time, contact Dell Networking
Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for guidance. For information on contacting Dell
Networking TAC, visit the Dell Networking website at http://support.dell.com/force10

This chapter includes the following sections:

• CAM Profile Commands

CAM Profile Commands

The CAM profiling feature enables you to partition the CAM to best suit your application. For
example:
• Configure more Layer 2 FIB entries when the system is deployed as a switch.
• Configure more Layer 3 FIB entries when the system is deployed as a router.
• Configure more ACLs (when IPv6 is not employed).
• Hash MPLS packets based on source and destination IP addresses for LAGs.
• Hash based on bidirectional flow for LAGs.
• Optimize the VLAN ACL Group feature, which permits group VLANs for IP egress ACLs.

Content Addressable Memory (CAM) | 397

 Important Points to Remember
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

• CAM Profiles are available on FTOS versions 6.3.1.1 and later for the E-Series TeraScale.
• FTOS versions 7.8.1.0 and later support CAM allocations on the C-Series and S-Series.
• All line cards within a single system must have the same CAM profile (including CAM sub-region
configurations); this profile must match the system CAM profile (the profile on the primary
RPM).
• FTOS automatically reconfigures the CAM profile on line cards and the secondary RPM to match
the system CAM profile by saving the correct profile on the card and then rebooting it.
• The CAM configuration is applied to entire system when you use CONFIGURATION mode
commands. You must save the running-configuration to affect the change.
• When budgeting your CAM allocations for ACLs and QoS configurations, remember that ACL
and QoS rules might consume more than one CAM entry depending on complexity. For example,
TCP and UDP rules with port range options might require more than one CAM entry.
• After you install a secondary RPM, copy the running-configuration to the startup-configuration so
that the new RPM has the correct CAM profile.
• You MUST save your changes and reboot the system for CAM profiling or allocations to take
effect.
The CAM Profiling commands are:
• cam-acl
• cam-acl-egress
• cam-optimization
• cam-profile
• show cam-acl
• show cam-profile
• show cam-usage
• test cam-usage

cam-acl
cs Allocate CAM for IPv4 and IPv6 ACLs

Syntax cam-acl {default | l2acl number ipv4acl number ipv6acl number, ipv4qos number l2qos number,
l2pt number ipmacacl number ecfmacl number [vman-qos | vman-dual-qos number}

Parameters
default Use the default CAM profile settings, and set the CAM as follows.
L3 ACL (ipv4acl): 6
L2 ACL(l2acl): 5
IPv6 L3 ACL (ipv6acl): 0
L3 QoS (ipv4qos): 1
L2 QoS (l2qos): 1
l2acl number ipv4acl number Allocate space to each CAM region.
ipv6acl number, ipv4qos number Enter the CAM profile name followed by the amount to be allotted.
l2qos number, l2pt number The total space allocated must equal 13.
ipmacacl number ecfmacl number The ipv6acl range must be a factor of 2.
[vman-qos | vman-dual-qos
number

398 | Content Addressable Memory (CAM)

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Added ecfmacl, vman-qos, and vman-dual-qos keywords.
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series

Usage You must save the new CAM settings to the startup-config (write-mem or copy run start) then
Information reload the system for the new settings to take effect.

The total amount of space allowed is 16 FP Blocks. System flow requires 3 blocks and these cannot be
reallocated.

When configuring space for IPv6 ACLs, the total number of Blocks must equal 13.

Ranges for the CAM profiles are 1-10, except for the ipv6acl profile which is 0-10. The ipv6acl
allocation must be a factor of 2 (2, 4, 6, 8, 10).

cam-acl-egress
Allocate CAM for egress ACLs

Syntax cam-acl-egress default | l2acl

Parameters
default Reset egress CAM ACL entries to default settings.
l2acl number Allocate space for Layer 2 egress ACL.
Range: 1-4 FP blocks

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.4 Introduced on the S60.
History

Content Addressable Memory (CAM) | 399

 cam-optimization
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

cs Optimize CAM utilization for QoS Entries by minimizing require policy-map CAM space.

Syntax cam-optimization [qos]

Parameters
qos Optimize CAM usage for Quality of Service (QoS)

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Defaults Disabled

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the s-Series
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series

Usage When this command is enabled, if a Policy Map containing classification rules (ACL and/or dscp/
Information ip-precedence rules) is applied to more than one physical interface on the same port pipe, only a single
copy of the policy will be written (only 1 FP entry will be used).

Note that an ACL itself may still require more that a single FP entry, regardless of the number of
interfaces. Refer to IP Access Control Lists, Prefix Lists, and Route-map in the FTOS
Configuration Guide for complete discussion.

cam-profile
e Set the default CAM profile and the required microcode.

Syntax cam-profile profile microcode microcode

400 | Content Addressable Memory (CAM)

 Parameters
profile Choose one of the following CAM profiles:
• Enter the keyword default to specify the default CAM profile.
• Enter the keyword eg-default to specify the default CAM profile for EG
(dual-CAM) line cards.
• Enter the keyword ipv4-320k to specify the CAM profile that provides
320K entries for the IPv4 Forwarding Information Base (FIB).
• Enter the keyword ipv4-egacl-16k to specify the CAM profile that
provides 16K entries for egress ACLs.
• Enter the keyword ipv6-extacl to specify the CAM profile that
provides IPv6 functionality.
• Enter the keyword l2-ipv4-inacl to specify the CAM profile that
provides 32K entries for ingress ACLs.
• Enter the keyword unified-default to specify the CAM profile that
maintains the CAM allocations for the IPv6 and IPv4 FIB while allocating
more CAM space for the Ingress and Egress Layer 2 ACL, and IPv4 ACL
regions.
• Enter the keyword ipv4-vrf to specify the CAM profile that maintains the
CAM allocations for the IPv4 FIB while allocating CAM space for VRF.
• Enter the keyword ipv4-v6-vrf to specify the CAM profile that maintains
the CAM allocations for the IPv4 and IPv6FIB while allocating CAM space
for VRF.
• Enter the keyword ipv4-64k-ipv6 to specify the CAM profile that provides
an alternate to ipv6-extacl that redistributes CAM space from the IPv4FIB to
IPv4Flow and IPv6FIB.
microcode microcode Choose a microcode based on the CAM profile you chose. Not all microcodes are
available to be paired with a CAM profile.
• Enter the keyword default to select the microcode that distributes CAM
space for a typical deployment.
• Enter the keyword lag-hash-align to select the microcode for
applications that require the same hashing for bi-directional traffic.
• Enter the keyword lag-hash-mpls to select the microcode for hashing
based on MPLS labels (up to five labels deep).
• Enter the keyword ipv6-extacl to select the microcode for IPv6.
• Enter the keyword acl-group to select the microcode for applications that
need 16k egress IPv4 ACLs.
• Enter the keyword ipv4-vrf to select the microcode for IPv4 VRF
applications.
• Enter the keyword ipv4-v6-vrf to select the microcode forIPv4 and IPv6
VRF applications.

Defaults cam-profile default microcode default

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Added support for ipv4-64k-ipv6 profile
Version 7.9.1.0 Added support for VRF protocols.
Version 7.5.1.0 Added the l2-ipv4-inacl CAM profile
Version 7.4.2.0 Added the unified-default CAM profile and lag-hash-align microcode
Version 7.4.1.0 Added the lag-hash-mpls microcode
Version 6.5.1.0 Added the eg-default and ipv4-320k CAM profiles
Version 6.3.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Content Addressable Memory (CAM) | 401

 Usage You must save the running configuration using the command copy running-config startup-config
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Information after changing the CAM profile from CONFIGURATION mode. CAM profile changes take effect after
the next chassis reboot.

Note: Do not use the ipv4-egacl-16 CAM profile for Layer 2 egress ACLs.

Note: Do not make any changes to the CAM profile after you change the profile to
ipv4-320K and save the configuration until after you reload the chassis; any changes lead to
unexpected behavior. After you reload the chassis, you may make changes to the IPv4 Flow
partition.

show cam-acl
c Display the details of the CAM profiles on the chassis and all line cards.

Syntax show cam-acl

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
History

Usage The display reflects the settings implemented with the cam-acl command.
Information

Example Figure 12-1. Command Output: show cam-acl (default)

FTOS#show cam-acl

-- Chassis Cam ACL --

Current Settings(in block sizes)
L2Acl : 5
Ipv4Acl : 6
Ipv6Acl : 0
Ipv4Qos : 1
L2Qos : 1

-- Line card 4 --
Current Settings(in block sizes)
L2Acl : 5
Ipv4Acl : 6
Ipv6Acl : 0
Ipv4Qos : 1
L2Qos : 1

FTOS#

402 | Content Addressable Memory (CAM)

 Figure 12-2. Command Output: show cam-acl (non-default)
FTOS#show cam-acl

-- Chassis Cam ACL --

Current Settings(in block sizes)
L2Acl : 2
Ipv4Acl : 2
Ipv6Acl : 4
Ipv4Qos : 2
L2Qos : 3

-- Line card 4 --
Current Settings(in block sizes)
L2Acl : 2
Ipv4Acl : 2
Ipv6Acl : 4
Ipv4Qos : 2
L2Qos : 3

FTOS#

show cam-profile
e Display the details of the CAM profiles on the chassis and all line cards.

Syntax show cam-profile [profile microcode microcode | summary]

Content Addressable Memory (CAM) | 403

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

profile (OPTIONAL) Choose a single CAM profile to display:

• Enter the keyword default to specify the default CAM profile.
• Enter the keyword eg-default to specify the default CAM profile for EG
(dual-CAM) line cards.
• Enter the keyword ipv4-320k to specify the CAM profile that provides 320K
entries for the IPv4 Forwarding Information Base (FIB).
• Enter the keyword ipv4-egacl-16k to specify the CAM profile that provides
16K entries for egress ACLs.
• Enter the keyword ipv6-extacl to specify the CAM profile that provides
IPv6 functionality.
• Enter the keyword l2-ipv4-inacl to specify the CAM profile that provides
32K entries for ingress ACLs.
• Enter the keyword unified-default to specify the CAM profile that maintains the
CAM allocations for the IPv6 and IPv4 FIB while allocating more CAM space for the
Ingress and Egress Layer 2 ACL, and IPv4 ACL regions.
• Enter the keyword ipv4-vrf to specify the CAM profile that maintains the CAM
allocations for the IPv4 FIB while allocating CAM space for VRF.
• Enter the keyword ipv4-v6-vrf to specify the CAM profile that maintains the CAM
allocations for the IPv4 and IPv6FIB while allocating CAM space for VRF.
microcode Choose the microcode to display. Not all microcodes are available to be paired with a
microcode CAM profile.
• Enter the keyword default to select the microcode that distributes CAM space for a
typical deployment.
• Enter the keyword lag-hash-align to select the microcode for applications that
require the same hashing for bi-directional traffic.
• Enter the keyword lag-hash-mpls to select the microcode for hashing based on
MPLS labels (up to five labels deep).
• Enter the keyword ipv6-extacl to select the microcode for IPv6.
• Enter the keyword acl-group to select the microcode for applications that need 16k
egress IPv4 ACLs.
• Enter the keyword ipv4-vrf to select the microcode for IPv4 VRF applications.
• Enter the keyword ipv4-v6-vrf to select the microcode forIPv4 and IPv6 VRF
applications.
• Enter the keyword ipv4-64k-ipv6 to specify the CAM profile that provides an
alternate to ipv6-extacl that redistributes CAM space from the IPv4FIB to IPv4Flow
and IPv6FIB.
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter this keyword to view a summary listing of the CAM profile and
microcode on the chassis and all line cards.

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Added support for ipv4-64k-ipv6 profile
Version 7.9.1.0 Added support for VRF protocols.
Version 6.3.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Usage If the CAM profile has been changed, this command displays the current CAM profile setting in one
Information column and in the other column displays the CAM profile and the microcode that will be configured
for the chassis and all online line cards after the next reboot.

404 | Content Addressable Memory (CAM)

 Example 1 Figure 12-3. Command Output: show cam-profile summary
FTOS#show cam-profile summary

-- Chassis CAM Profile --

: Current Settings : Next Boot
Profile Name : Default : Default
MicroCode Name : Default : Default

: Current Settings : Next Boot

-- Line card 1 --
Profile Name : Default : Default
MicroCode Name : Default : Default

: Current Settings : Next Boot

-- Line card 6 --
Profile Name : Default : Default
MicroCode Name : Default : Default
FTOS#

Example 2 Figure 12-4. Command Output: show cam-profile

FTOS#show cam-profile

-- Chassis Cam Profile --

CamSize : 18-Meg
: Current Settings : Next Boot
Profile Name : DEFAULT : DEFAULT
L2FIB : 32K entries : 32K entries
L2ACL : 1K entries : 1K entries
IPv4FIB : 256K entries : 256K entries
IPv4ACL : 12K entries : 12K entries
IPv4Flow : 24K entries : 24K entries
EgL2ACL : 1K entries : 1K entries
EgIPv4ACL : 1K entries : 1K entries
Reserved : 8K entries : 8K entries
IPv6FIB : 0 entries : 0 entries
IPv6ACL : 0 entries : 0 entries
IPv6Flow : 0 entries : 0 entries
EgIPv6ACL : 0 entries : 0 entries
MicroCode Name : Default : Default

-- Line card 0 --
CamSize : 18-Meg
: Current Settings : Next Boot
Profile Name : DEFAULT : DEFAULT
L2FIB : 32K entries : 32K entries
L2ACL : 1K entries : 1K entries
IPv4FIB : 256K entries : 256K entries
IPv4ACL : 12K entries : 12K entries
IPv4Flow : 24K entries : 24K entries
EgL2ACL : 1K entries : 1K entries
EgIPv4ACL : 1K entries : 1K entries
Reserved : 8K entries : 8K entries
IPv6FIB : 0 entries : 0 entries
IPv6ACL : 0 entries : 0 entries
IPv6Flow : 0 entries : 0 entries
EgIPv6ACL : 0 entries : 0 entries
MicroCode Name : Default : Default
FTOS#

show cam-usage
e Display Layer 2, Layer 3, ACL, or all CAM usage statistics.

Syntax show cam-usage [acl | router | switch]

Content Addressable Memory (CAM) | 405

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

acl (OPTIONAL) Enter this keyword to display Layer 2 and Layer 3 ACL CAM usage.
router (OPTIONAL) Enter this keyword to display Layer 3 CAM usage.
switch (OPTIONAL) Enter this keyword to display Layer 2 CAM usage.

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 6.5.1.0 Introduced on E-Series
History

Example Figure 12-5. Command Example: show cam-usage

FTOS#show cam-usage
Linecard|Portpipe| CAM Partition | Total CAM | Used CAM |Available CAM
========|========|=================|=============|=============|==============
1 | 0 | IN-L2 ACL | 1008 | 320 | 688
| | IN-L2 FIB | 32768 | 1132 | 31636
| | IN-L3 ACL | 12288 | 2 | 12286
| | IN-L3 FIB | 262141 | 14 | 262127
| | IN-L3-SysFlow | 2878 | 45 | 2833
| | IN-L3-TrcList | 1024 | 0 | 1024
| | IN-L3-McastFib | 9215 | 0 | 9215
| | IN-L3-Qos | 8192 | 0 | 8192
| | IN-L3-PBR | 1024 | 0 | 1024
| | IN-V6 ACL | 0 | 0 | 0
| | IN-V6 FIB | 0 | 0 | 0
| | IN-V6-SysFlow | 0 | 0 | 0
| | IN-V6-McastFib | 0 | 0 | 0
| | OUT-L2 ACL | 1024 | 0 | 1024
| | OUT-L3 ACL | 1024 | 0 | 1024
| | OUT-V6 ACL | 0 | 0 | 0
1 | 1 | IN-L2 ACL | 320 | 0 | 320
| | IN-L2 FIB | 32768 | 1136 | 31632
| | IN-L3 ACL | 12288 | 2 | 12286
| | IN-L3 FIB | 262141 | 14 | 262127
| | IN-L3-SysFlow | 2878 | 44 | 2834
--More--

Example Figure 12-6. Command Example: show cam-usage acl

FTOS#show cam-usage acl

Linecard|Portpipe| CAM Partition | Total CAM | Used CAM |Available CAM

========|========|=================|=============|=============|==============
11 | 0 | IN-L2 ACL | 1008 | 0 | 1008
| | IN-L3 ACL | 12288 | 2 | 12286
| | OUT-L2 ACL | 1024 | 2 | 1022
| | OUT-L3 ACL | 1024 | 0 | 1024

FTOS#

406 | Content Addressable Memory (CAM)

 Example Figure 12-7. Command Example: show cam-usage router
FTOS#show cam-usage router

Linecard|Portpipe| CAM Partition | Total CAM | Used CAM |Available CAM

========|========|=================|=============|=============|==============
11 | 0 | IN-L3 ACL | 8192 | 3 | 8189
| | IN-L3 FIB | 196607 | 1 | 196606
| | IN-L3-SysFlow | 2878 | 0 | 2878
| | IN-L3-TrcList | 1024 | 0 | 1024
| | IN-L3-McastFib | 9215 | 0 | 9215
| | IN-L3-Qos | 8192 | 0 | 8192
| | IN-L3-PBR | 1024 | 0 | 1024
| | OUT-L3 ACL | 16384 | 0 | 16384
11 | 1 | IN-L3 ACL | 8192 | 3 | 8189
| | IN-L3 FIB | 196607 | 1 | 196606
| | IN-L3-SysFlow | 2878 | 0 | 2878
| | IN-L3-TrcList | 1024 | 0 | 1024
| | IN-L3-McastFib | 9215 | 0 | 9215
| | IN-L3-Qos | 8192 | 0 | 8192
| | IN-L3-PBR | 1024 | 0 | 1024
| | OUT-L3 ACL | 16384 | 0 | 16384

FTOS#

Example Figure 12-8. Command Example: show cam-usage switch

FTOS#show cam-usage switch

Linecard|Portpipe| CAM Partition | Total CAM | Used CAM |Available CAM

========|========|=================|=============|=============|==============
11 | 0 | IN-L2 ACL | 7152 | 0 | 7152
| | IN-L2 FIB | 32768 | 1081 | 31687
| | OUT-L2 ACL | 0 | 0 | 0
11 | 1 | IN-L2 ACL | 7152 | 0 | 7152
| | IN-L2 FIB | 32768 | 1081 | 31687
| | OUT-L2 ACL | 0 | 0 | 0

FTOS#

test cam-usage
ces Verify that enough CAM space is available for the IPv6 ACLs you have created.

Syntax test cam-usage service-policy input input policy name linecard {number | all}

Parameters
policy-map name Enter the name of the policy-map to verify.
number Enter all to get information for all the linecards/stack-units, or enter the linecard/
stack-unit number to get information for a specific card.
Range: 0-6 for E-Series, 0-7 for C-Series, 0-11 for S60; 0-7 for all other S-Series

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced

Usage This command applies to both IPv4 and IPv6 CAM Profiles, but is best used when verifying QoS
Information optimization for IPv6 ACLs.

Content Addressable Memory (CAM) | 407

 QoS Optimization for IPv6 ACLs does not impact the CAM usage for applying a policy on a single (or
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

the first of several) interfaces. It is most useful when a policy is applied across multiple interfaces; it
can reduce the impact to CAM usage across subsequent interfaces.

Example The following examples show some sample output when using the test cam-usage command.

Figure 12-9. Command Example: test cam-usage (C-Series)

FTOS#test cam-usage service-policy input LauraMapTest linecard all

Linecard | Portpipe | CAM Partition | Available CAM | Estimated CAM per Port | Status
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 | 1 | IPv4Flow | 232 | 0 | Allowed
2 | 1 | IPv6Flow | 0 | 0 | Allowed
4 | 0 | IPv4Flow | 232 | 0 | Allowed
4 | 0 | IPv6Flow | 0 | 0 | Allowed
FTOS#

FTOS#test cam-usage service-policy input LauraMapTest linecard 4 port-set 0

Linecard | Portpipe | CAM Partition | Available CAM | Estimated CAM per Port | Status
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 | 0 | IPv4Flow | 232 | 0 | Allowed
4 | 0 | IPv6Flow | 0 | 0 | Allowed
FTOS#

FTOS#test cam-usage service-policy input LauraMapTest linecard 2 port-set 1

Linecard | Portpipe | CAM Partition | Available CAM | Estimated CAM per Port | Status
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 | 1 | IPv4Flow | 232 | 0 | Allowed
2 | 1 | IPv6Flow | 0 | 0 | Allowed
FTOS#

Table 12-1. Output Explanations: test cam-usage (C-Series)

Term Explanation
Linecard Lists the line card or linecards that are checked. Entering all shows
the status for linecards in the chassis
Portpipe Lists the portpipe (port-set) or port pipes (port-sets) that are checked.
Entering all shows the status for linecards and port-pipes in the
chassis.
CAM Partition Shows the CAM profile of the CAM
Available CAM Identifies the amount of CAM space remaining for that profile
Estimated CAM per Port Estimates the amount of CAM space the listed policy will require.
Status Indicates whether or not the policy will be allowed in the CAM

408 | Content Addressable Memory (CAM)

Figure 12-10. Command Example: test cam-usage (S-Series)
FTOS#test cam-usage service-policy input LauraIn stack-unit all

Stack-Unit | Portpipe | CAM Partition | Available CAM | Estimated CAM per Port | Status
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 | 0 | IPv4Flow | 102 | 0 | Allowed
0 | 1 | IPv4Flow | 102 | 0 | Allowed
FTOS#
!
FTOS#test cam-usage service-policy input LauraIn stack-unit 0 port-set 1

Stack-Unit | Portpipe | CAM Partition | Available CAM | Estimated CAM per Port | Status
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 | 1 | IPv4Flow | 102 | 0 | Allowed
FTOS#

Table 12-2. Output Explanations: test cam-usage (S-Series)

Term Explanation
Stack-Unit Lists the stack unit or units that are checked. Entering all shows the
status for all stacks.
Portpipe Lists the portpipe (port-set) or port pipes (port-sets) that are checked.
Entering all shows the status for linecards and port-pipes in the
chassis.
CAM Partition Shows the CAM profile of the CAM
Available CAM Identifies the amount of CAM space remaining for that profile
Estimated CAM per Port Estimates the amount of CAM space the listed policy will require.
Status Indicates whether or not the policy will be allowed in the CAM

Content Addressable Memory (CAM) | 409

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

410 | Content Addressable Memory (CAM)

 13
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)

Overview
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is an application layer protocol that dynamically
assigns IP addresses and other configuration parameters to network end-stations (hosts) based on
configuration policies determined by network administrators.

• Commands to Configure the System to be a DHCP Server

• Commands to Configure Secure DHCP

Commands to Configure the System to be a DHCP Server

• clear ip dhcp
• debug ip dhcp server
• default-router
• disable
• dns-server
• domain-name
• excluded-address
• hardware-address
• host
• ip dhcp relay information-option remote-id
• disable
• lease
• netbios-name-server
• netbios-node-type
• network
• pool
• show ip dhcp binding
• show ip dhcp configuration
• show ip dhcp conflict
• show ip dhcp server

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) | 411

 clear ip dhcp
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

cs Reset DHCP counters.

Syntax clear ip dhcp [binding {address} | conflict | server statistics]

Parameters
binding Enter this keyword to delete all entries in the binding table.
address Enter the IP address to clear the binding entry for a single IP address.
conflict Enter this keyword to delete all of the log entries created for IP address
conflicts.
server statistics Enter this keyword to clear all the server counter information.

Command Mode EXEC Privilege

Default None

Command
Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on the S55.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series.

Usage Entering <CR> after clear ip dhcp binding, clears all the IPs from the binding table.
Information

debug ip dhcp server

cs Display FTOS debugging messages for DHCP.

Syntax debug ip dhcp server [events | packets]

Parameters
events Enter this keyword to display DHCP state changes.
packet Enter this keyword to display packet transmission/reception.

Command Mode EXEC Privilege

Default None

Command
Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on the S55.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series.

default-router
cs Assign a default gateway to clients based on address pool.

Syntax default-router address [address2...address8]

Parameters
address Enter the a list of routers that may be the default gateway for clients on the subnet. You may
specify up to 8. List them in order of preference.

412 | Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)

Command Mode DHCP <POOL>

Default None

Command
Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on the S55.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series.

disable
cs Disable DHCP Server.

DHCP Server is disabled by default. Enable the system to be a DHCP server using the no form of the
disable command.

Syntax disable

Command Mode DHCP

Default Disabled

Command
Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on the S55.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series.

dns-server
cs Assign a DNS server to clients based on address pool.

Syntax dns-server address [address2...address8]

Parameters
address Enter the a list of DNS servers that may service clients on the subnet. You may list up to 8
servers, in order of preference.

Command Mode DHCP <POOL>

Default None

Command
Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on the S55.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series.

domain-name
cs Assign a domain to clients based on address pool.

Syntax domain-name name

Parameters
name Give a name to the group of addresses in a pool.

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) | 413

 Command Mode DHCP <POOL>
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Default None

Command
Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on the S55.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series.

excluded-address
cs Prevent the server from leasing an address or range of addresses in the pool.

Syntax excluded-address [address | low-address high-address]

Parameters
address Enter a single address to be excluded from the pool.
low-address Enter the lowest address in a range of addresses to be excluded from the pool.
high-address Enter the highest address in a range of addresses to be excluded from the pool.

Command Mode DHCP

Default None

Command
Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on the S55.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series.

hardware-address
cs For manual configurations, specify the client hardware address.

Syntax hardware-address address

Parameters
address Enter the hardware address of the client.

Command Mode DHCP <POOL>

Default None

Command
Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on the S55.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series.

host
cs For manual (rather than automatic) configurations, assign a host to a single-address pool.

Syntax host address

414 | Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)

 Parameters
address/mask Enter the host IP address and subnet mask.

Command Mode DHCP <POOL>

Default None

Command
Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on the S55.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series.

ip dhcp relay information-option remote-id

Manually re-set the remote-id (MAC address) for Option 82.

Syntax ip dhcp relay information-option [remote-id {hostname | remote-id}]

Parameters
hostname Set the hostname of the switch as the remote-id for Option 82.
remote-id Configure the system to enable the remote-id (MAC address) for Option 82.
Enter the name of the remote-id, maximum 64 characters.

Command Mode CONFIGURATION

Default Disabled

Command
Version 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000.
History
Version 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810.
Version 8.3.5.3 Introduced on the S55.
Version 8.3.3.8 Introduced on the S60.
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series (S25/S50).

Usage Option 82 is comprised of two sub-options, circuit id and remote id. Remote id uses the MAC address
Information of the relay information which adds Option 82 to identify the host sending the message. Use the ip
dhcp relay information-option remote-id command to change the default remote-id value of the
switch.

lease
cs Specify a lease time for the addresses in a pool.

Syntax lease {days [hours] [minutes] | infinite}

Parameters
days Enter the number of days of the lease.
Range: 0-31
hours Enter the number of hours of the lease.
Range: 0-23

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) | 415

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

minutes Enter the number of minutes of the lease.

Range: 0-59
infinite Specify that the lease never expires.

Command Mode DHCP <POOL>

Default 24 hours

Command
Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on the S55.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series.

netbios-name-server
cs Specify the NetBIOS Windows Internet Naming Service (WINS) name servers, in order of preference,
that are available to Microsoft Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) clients.

Syntax netbios-name-server address [address2...address8]

Parameters
address Enter the address of the NETBIOS name server. You may enter up to 8, in order of
preference.

Command Mode DHCP <POOL>

Default None

Command
Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on the S55.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series.

netbios-node-type
cs Specify the NetBIOS node type for a Microsoft DHCP client. Dell Networking recommends specifying
clients as hybrid.

Syntax netbios-node-type type

Parameters
type Enter the NETBIOS node type.
Broadcast: Enter the keyword b-node.
Hybrid: Enter the keyword h-node.
Mixed: Enter the keyword m-node.
Peer-to-peer: Enter the keyword p-node.

Command Mode DHCP <POOL>

Default Hybrid

Command
Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on the S55.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series.

416 | Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)

network
cs Specify the range of addresses in an address pool.

Syntax network network /prefix-length

Parameters
network/ Specify a range of addresses.
prefix-length Prefix-length Range: 17-31

Command Mode DHCP <POOL>

Default None

Command
Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on the S55.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series.

pool
cs Create an address pool

Syntax pool name

Parameters
name Enter the address pool’s identifying name

Command Mode DHCP

Default None

Command
Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on the S55.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series.

show ip dhcp binding

cs Display the DHCP binding table.

Syntax show ip dhcp binding

Command Mode EXEC Privilege

Default None

Command
Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on the S55.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series.

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) | 417

 show ip dhcp configuration
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

cs Display the DHCP configuration.

Syntax show ip dhcp configuration [global | pool name]

Parameters
pool name Display the configuration for a DHCP pool.
global Display the DHCP configuration for the entire system.

Command Mode EXEC Privilege

Default None

Command
Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on the S55.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series.

show ip dhcp conflict

cs Display the address conflict log.

Syntax show ip dhcp conflict address

Parameters
address Display a particular conflict log entry.

Command Mode EXEC Privilege

Default None

Command
Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on the S55.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series.

show ip dhcp server

cs Display the DHCP server statistics.

Syntax show ip dhcp server statistics

Command Mode EXEC Privilege

Default None

Command
Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on the S55.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series.

418 | Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)

Commands to Configure Secure DHCP
DHCP as defined by RFC 2131 provides no authentication or security mechanisms. Secure DHCP is a
suite of features that protects networks that use dynamic address allocation from spoofing and attacks.

• arp inspection
• arp inspection-trust
• clear ip dhcp snooping
• ip dhcp snooping
• ip dhcp snooping database
• ip dhcp snooping binding
• ip dhcp snooping database renew
• ip dhcp snooping trust
• ip dhcp source-address-validation
• ip dhcp snooping vlan
• ip dhcp relay
• ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address
• show ip dhcp snooping

arp inspection
ces Enable Dynamic Arp Inspection (DAI) on a VLAN.

Syntax arp inspection

Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN

Default Disabled

Command
Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on the S55.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on E-Series.
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series

Related
Commands
arp inspection-trust Specify a port as trusted so that ARP frames are not validated against
the binding table.

arp inspection-trust
ces Specify a port as trusted so that ARP frames are not validated against the binding table.

Syntax arp inspection-trust

Command Modes INTERFACE

INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL

Default Disabled

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) | 419

 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on the S55.

History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on E-Series.
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series

Related
arp inspection Enable Dynamic ARP Inspection on a VLAN.
Commands

clear ip dhcp snooping

ces Clear the DHCP binding table.

Syntax clear ip dhcp snooping binding

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Default None

Command
Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on the S55.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on E-Series.
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series

Related
show ip dhcp snooping Display the contents of the DHCP binding table.
Commands

ip dhcp snooping
ces Enable DHCP Snooping globally.

Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Default Disabled

Command
Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on the S55.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on E-Series.
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series for Layer 2 interfaces.
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series on Layer 3 interfaces.

Usage When enabled, no learning takes place until snooping is enabled on a VLAN. Upon disabling DHCP
Information Snooping the binding table is deleted, and Option 82, IP Source Guard, and Dynamic ARP Inspection
are disabled.

Introduced in FTOS version 7.8.1.0, DHCP Snooping was available for Layer 3 only and dependent on
DHCP Relay Agent (ip helper-address). FTOS version 8.2.1.0 extends DHCP Snooping to Layer 2,
and you do not have to enable relay agent to snoop on Layer 2 interfaces.

Related
ip dhcp snooping vlan Enable DHCP Snooping on one or more VLANs.
Commands

420 | Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)

ip dhcp snooping database
ces Delay writing the binding table for a specified time.

Syntax ip dhcp snooping database write-delay minutes

Parameters
minutes Range: 5-21600

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Default None

Command
Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on the S55.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on E-Series.
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series

ip dhcp snooping binding

ces Create a static entry in the DHCP binding table.

Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping binding mac address vlan-id vlan-id ip ip-address interface type slot/
port lease number

Parameters
mac address Enter the keyword mac followed by the MAC address of the host to which the
server is leasing the IP address.
vlan-id vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan-id followed by the VLAN to which the host belongs.
Range: 2-4094
ip ip-address Enter the keyword ip followed by the IP address that the server is leasing.
interface type Enter the keyword interface followed by the type of interface to which the host is
connected.
• For an 10/100 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fastethernet.
• For a Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword gigabitethernet.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet.
• For a Ten Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
tengigabitethernet.
slot/port Enter the slot and port number of the interface.
lease number Enter the keyword lease followed by the amount of time the IP address will be
leased.
Range: 1-4294967295

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Default None

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) | 421

 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on the S55.

History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on E-Series.
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series

Related
show ip dhcp snooping Display the contents of the DHCP binding table.
Commands

ip dhcp snooping database renew

ces Renew the binding table.

Syntax ip dhcp snooping database renew

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Default None

Command
Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on the S55.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on E-Series.
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series

ip dhcp snooping trust

ces Configure an interface as trusted.

Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping trust

Command Modes INTERFACE

Default Untrusted

Command
Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on the S55.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on E-Series.
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series

ip dhcp source-address-validation
ces Enable IP Source Guard.

Syntax [no] ip dhcp source-address-validation [ipmac]

Parameters
ipmac Enable IP+MAC Source Address Validation (Not available on E-Series).

Command Modes INTERFACE

422 | Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)

 Default Disabled

Command
Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on the S55.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on E-Series.
Version 8.2.1.0 Added keyword ipmac.
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series

Usage You must allocate at least one FP block to ipmacacl before you can enable IP+MAC Source Address
Information Validation.

1 Use the command cam-acl l2acl from CONFIGURATION mode

2 Save the running-config to the startup-config
3 Reload the system.

ip dhcp snooping vlan

ces Enable DHCP Snooping on one or more VLANs.

Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping vlan name

Parameters
name Enter the name of a VLAN on which to enable DHCP Snooping.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Default Disabled

Command
Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on the S55.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on E-Series.
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series

Usage When enabled the system begins creating entries in the binding table for the specified VLAN(s). Note
Information that learning only happens if there is a trusted port in the VLAN.

Related
Commands
ip dhcp snooping trust Configure an interface as trusted.

ip dhcp relay
ces Enable Option 82.

Syntax ip dhcp relay information-option [trust-downstream]

Parameters
trust-downstream Configure the system to trust Option 82 when it is received from the
previous-hop router.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) | 423

 Default Disabled
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Command
Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on the S55.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on E-Series.
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series

show ip dhcp snooping

ces Display the contents of the DHCP binding table or display the interfaces configured with IP Source
Guard.

Syntax show ip dhcp snooping [binding | source-address-validation]

Parameters
binding Display the binding table.
source-address-validation Display the interfaces configured with IP Source Guard.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Default None

Command
Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on the S55.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on E-Series.
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series

Related
clear ip dhcp snooping Clear the contents of the DHCP binding table.
Commands

ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address

ces Validate a DHCP packet’s source hardware address against the client hardware address field
(CHADDR) in the payload.

Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Default Disabled

Command
Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on the S55.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on E-Series.
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series

424 | Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)

 14
Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP)

Overview
Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP) is supported on platforms c e s

FRRP is a proprietary protocol for that offers fast convergence in a Layer 2 network without having to
run the Spanning Tree Protocol. The Resilient Ring Protocol is an efficient protocol that transmits a
high-speed token across a ring to verify the link status. All the intelligence is contained in the master
node with practically no intelligence required of the transit mode.

Commands
The FRRP commands are:

• clear frrp
• debug frrp
• description
• disable
• interface
• member-vlan
• mode
• protocol frrp
• show frrp
• timer

Important Points to Remember

• FRRP is media- and speed-independent.
• FRRP is a Dell Networking proprietary protocol that does not interoperate with any other vendor.
• Spanning Tree must be disabled on both primary and secondary interfaces before Resilient Ring
protocol is enabled.
• A VLAN configured as control VLAN for a ring cannot be configured as control or member
VLAN for any other ring.
• Member VLANs across multiple rings are not supported in Master nodes.
• If multiple rings share one or more member VLANs, they cannot share any links between them.
• Each ring can have only one Master node; all others are Transit nodes.

Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP) | 425

 clear frrp
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Clear the FRRP statistics counters.

Syntax clear frrp [ring-id]

Parameters
ring-id (Optional) Enter the ring identification number.
Range: 1 to 255

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced for the C-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced

Example Figure 14-1. clear frrp Command Examples

FTOS#clear frrp clears the frrp counters for all the available rings

Clear frrp statistics counter on all ring [confirm] yes confirmation required

FTOS#clear frrp 4 clears the frrp counters on the specified ring

Clear frrp statistics counter for ring 4 [confirm] yes confirmation required
FTOS#

Usage Executing this command, without the optional ring-id, will clear statistics counters on all the available
Information rings. FTOS requires a command line confirmation before the command is executed. This commands
clears the following counters:
• hello Rx and Tx counters
• Topology change Rx and Tx counters
• The number of state change counters

Related
show frrp Display the Resilient Ring Protocol configuration
Commands

debug frrp
c es Enable FRRP debugging.

Syntax debug frrp {event | packet | detail} [ring-id] [count number]

To disable debugging, use the no debug frrp {event | packet | detail} {ring-id} [count number]
command.

426 | Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP)

 Parameters
event Enter the keyword event to display debug information related to ring
protocol transitions.
packet Enter the keyword packet to display brief debug information related to
control packets.
detail Enter the keyword detail to display detailed debug information related to
the entire ring protocol packets.
ring-id (Optional) Enter the ring identification number.
Range: 1 to 255
count number Enter the keyword count followed by the number of debug outputs.
Range: 1 to 65534

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-frrp)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced for the C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced

Usage Since the Resilient Ring Protocol can potentially transmit 20 packets per interface, debug information
Information must be restricted.

description
ces Enter an identifying description of the ring.

Syntax description Word

To remove the ring description, use the no description [Word] command.

Parameters
Word Enter a description of the ring.
Maximum: 255 characters

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-frrp)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced for the C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced

disable
ces Disable the Resilient Ring Protocol.

Syntax disable
To enable the Resilient Ring Protocol, use the no disable command.

Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP) | 427

 Defaults Disabled
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-frrp)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced for the C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced

interface
ces Configure the primary, secondary, and control-vlan interfaces.

Syntax interface {primary interface secondary interface control-vlan vlan-id}

To return to the default, use the no interface {primary interface secondary interface control-vlan
vlan-id} command.

Parameters
primary interface Enter the keyword primary to configure the primary interface followed by one of
the following interfaces and slot/port information:
• For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword FastEthernet followed by
the slot/port information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For Port Channel interface types, enter the keyword port-channel followed
by a number from 1 to 255.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
secondary Enter the keyword secondary to configure the secondary interface followed by
interface one of the following interfaces and slot/port information:
• For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword FastEthernet followed by
the slot/port information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For Port Channel interface types, enter the keyword port-channel followed
by a number from 1 to 255.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
control-vlan Enter the keyword control-vlan followed by the VLAN ID.
vlan-id Range: 1 to 4094

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-frrp)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History

428 | Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP)

 Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced for the C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced

Usage This command causes the Ring Manager to take ownership of these two ports after the configuration is
Information validated by the IFM. Ownership is relinquished for a port only when the interface does not play a part
in any control VLAN, that is, the interface does not belong to any ring.

Related
show frrp Display the Resilient Ring Protocol configuration information
Commands

member-vlan
ces Specify the member VLAN identification numbers.

Syntax member-vlan{vlan-range}
To return to the default, use the no member-vlan[vlan-range] command.

Parameters
vlan-range Enter the member VLANs using comma separated VLAN IDs, a range of VLAN IDs, a
single VLAN ID, or a combination. For example:
Comma separated: 3, 4, 6
Range: 5-10
Combination: 3, 4, 5-10, 8

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-frrp)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced for the C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced

mode
ces Set the Master or Transit mode of the ring.

Syntax mode {master | transit}

To reset the mode, use the no mode {master | transit} command.

Parameters
master Enter the keyword master to set the Ring node to Master mode.
transit Enter the keyword transit to set the Ring node to Transit mode.

Defaults Mode None

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-frrp)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History

Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP) | 429

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced for the C-Series

Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced

protocol frrp
ces Enter the Resilient Ring Protocol and designate a ring identification.

Syntax protocol frrp {ring-id}

To exit the ring protocol, use the no protocol frrp {ring-id} command.

Parameters
ring-id Enter the ring identification number.
Range: 1 to 255

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced for the C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced

Usage This command places you into the Resilient Ring Protocol. After executing this command, the
Information command line prompt changes to conf-frrp.

show frrp
ces Display the Resilient Ring Protocol configuration.

Syntax show frrp [ring-id [summary]] | [summary]

Parameters
ring-id Enter the ring identification number.
Range: 1 to 255
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view just a summarized
version of the Ring configuration.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced for the C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced

430 | Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP)

 Example 1 Figure 14-2. show frrp summary Command Example
FTOS#show frrp summary

Ring-ID State Mode Ctrl_Vlan Member_Vlans

-----------------------------------------------------------------
2 UP Master 2 11-20, 25,27-30
31 UP Transit 31 40-41
50 Down Transit 50 32
FTOS#

Example 2 Figure 14-3. show frrp ring-id Command Example

FTOS#show frrp 1
Ring protocol 1 is in Master mode
Ring Protocol Interface:
Primary : GigabitEthernet 0/16 State: Forwarding
Secondary: Port-channel 100 State: Blocking
Control Vlan: 1
Ring protocol Timers: Hello-Interval 50 msec Dead-Interval 150 msec
Ring Master's MAC Address is 00:01:e8:13:a3:19
Topology Change Statistics: Tx:110 Rx:45
Hello Statistics: Tx:13028 Rx:12348
Number of state Changes: 34
Member Vlans: 1000-1009

FTOS#

Example 3 Figure 14-4. show frrp ring-id summary Command Example

FTOS#show frrp 2 summary

Ring-ID State Mode Ctrl_Vlan Member_Vlans

-----------------------------------------------------------------
2 Up Master 2 11-20, 25, 27-30
FTOS#

Related
protocol frrp Enter the Resilient Ring Protocol and designate a ring identification
Commands

timer
ces Set the hello or dead interval for the Ring control packets.

Syntax timer {hello-interval milliseconds}| {dead-interval milliseconds}

To remove the timer, use the no timer {hello-interval [milliseconds]}| {dead-interval
milliseconds} command.

Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP) | 431

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

hello-interval Enter the keyword hello-interval followed by the time, in milliseconds, to

milliseconds set the hello interval of the control packets. The milliseconds must be enter
in increments of 50 milliseconds, for example 50, 100, 150 and so on. If an
invalid value is enter, an error message is generated.
Range: 50 to 2000ms
Default: 500 ms
dead-interval Enter the keyword dead-interval followed by the time, in milliseconds, to
milliseconds set the dead interval of the control packets.
Range: 50 to 6000ms
Default: 1500ms
Note: The configured dead interval should be at least three times the
hello interval

Defaults Default as shown

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-frrp)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced for the C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced

Usage The hello interval is the interval at which ring frames are generated from the primary interface of the
Information master node. The dead interval is the time that elapses before a timeout occurs.

432 | Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP)

 15
GARP VLAN Registration (GVRP)

Overview
GARP VLAN Registration (GVRP) is supported on platforms c e s

Commands
The GVRP commands are:
• clear gvrp statistics
• bpdu-destination-mac-address
• debug gvrp
• disable
• garp timers
• gvrp enable
• gvrp registration
• protocol gvrp
• show config
• show garp timers
• show gvrp
• show gvrp statistics on page 27
The GARP (Generic Attribute Registration Protocol) mechanism allows the configuration of a GARP
participant to propagate through a network quickly. A GARP participant registers or de-registers its
attributes with other participants by making or withdrawing declarations of attributes. At the same
time, based on received declarations or withdrawals, GARP handles attributes of other participants.

GVRP enables a device to propagate local VLAN registration information to other participant devices
and dynamically update the VLAN registration information from other devices. The registration
information updates local databases regarding active VLAN members and through which port the
VLANs can be reached.

GVRP ensures that all participants on a bridged LAN maintain the same VLAN registration
information. The VLAN registration information propagated by GVRP include both manually
configured local static entries and dynamic entries from other devices.

GVRP participants have the following components:

• The GVRP application
• GARP Information Propagation (GIP)
• GARP Information Declaration (GID)

GARP VLAN Registration (GVRP) | 433

 Important Points to Remember
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

• GVRP is supported on Layer 2 ports only.

• All VLAN ports added by GVRP are tagged.
• GVRP is supported on untagged ports belonging to a default VLAN, and tagged ports.
• GVRP cannot be enabled on untagged ports belonging to a non-default VLAN unless native
VLAN is turned on.
• GVRP requires end stations with dynamic access NICs.
• Based on updates from GVRP-enabled devices, GVRP allows the system to dynamically create a
port-based VLAN (unspecified) with a specific VLAN ID and a specific port.
• On a port-by-port basis, GVRP allows the system to learn about GVRP updates to an existing
port-based VLAN with that VLAN ID and IEEE 802.1Q tagging.
• GVRP allows the system to send dynamic GVRP updates about your existing port-based VLAN.
• GVRP updates are not sent to any blocked Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) ports. GVRP operates
only on ports that are in the forwarding state.
• GVRP operates only on ports that are in the STP forwarding state. If GVRP is enabled, a port that
changes to the STP forwarding state automatically begins to participate in GVRP. A port that
changes to an STP state other than forwarding no longer participates in GVRP.
• VLANs created dynamically with GVRP exist only as long as a GVRP-enabled device is sending
updates. If the devices no longer send updates, or GVRP is disabled, or the system is rebooted, all
dynamic VLANs are removed.
• GVRP manages the active topology, not non-topological data such as VLAN protocols. If a local
bridge needs to classify and analyze packets by VLAN protocols, you must manually configure
protocol-based VLANs, and simply rely on GVRP for VLAN updates. But if the local bridge
needs to know only how to reach a given VLAN, then GVRP provides all necessary information.
• The VLAN topologies that GVRP learns are treated differently from VLANs that are statically
configured. The GVRP dynamic updates are not saved in NVRAM, while static updates are saved
in NVRAM. When GVRP is disabled, the system deletes all VLAN interfaces that were learned
through GVRP and leaves unchanged all VLANs that were manually configured.

clear gvrp statistics

ces Clear GVRP statistics on an interface.

Syntax clear gvrp statistics interface interface

Parameters
interface interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword FastEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
GigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel
followed by the Port Channel number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1-255 for TeraScale
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.

Defaults No default values or behavior

434 | GARP VLAN Registration (GVRP)

Command Modes EXEC

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C, E, and S-Series

Related
show gvrp statistics Display the GVRP statistics
Commands

debug gvrp
ces Enable debugging on GVRP.

Syntax debug gvrp {config | events | pdu}

To disable debugging, use the no debug gvrp {config | events | pdu} command.

Parameters
config Enter the keyword config to enable debugging on the GVRP configuration.
event Enter the keyword event to enable debugging on the JOIN/LEAVE events.
pdu Enter the keyword pdu followed one of the following Interface keywords and slot/port
or number information:
• For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword FastEthernet followed by the
slot/port information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed
by the slot/port information.
• For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by the Port
Channel number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1-255 for TeraScale
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C, E, and S-Series

disable
ces Globally disable GVRP.

Syntax disable
To re-enable GVRP, use the no disable command.

Defaults Enabled

Command Modes CONFIGURATION-GVRP

GARP VLAN Registration (GVRP) | 435

 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.

History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C, E, and S-Series

Related
gvrp enable Enable GVRP on physical interfaces and LAGs.
Commands
protocol gvrp Access GVRP protocol

garp timers
ces Set the intervals (in milliseconds) for sending GARP messages.

Syntax garp timers {join | leave | leave-all}

To return to the previous setting, use the no garp timers {join | leave | leave-all} command.

Parameters
join Enter the keyword join followed by the number of milliseconds to configure the join
time.
Range: 100-2147483647 milliseconds
Default: 200 milliseconds
Note: Designate the milliseconds in multiples of 100
leave Enter the keyword leave followed by the number of milliseconds to configure the leave
time.
Range: 100-2147483647 milliseconds
Default: 600 milliseconds
Note: Designate the milliseconds in multiples of 100
leave-all Enter the keyword leave-all followed by the number of milliseconds to configure the
leave-all time.
Range: 100-2147483647 milliseconds
Default: 1000 milliseconds
Note: Designate the milliseconds in multiples of 100

Defaults Default as above

Command Modes CONFIGURATION-GVRP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C, E, and S-Series

Usage Join Timer—Join messages announce the willingness to register some attributes with other
Information participants. Each GARP application entity sends a Join message twice, for reliability, and uses a join
timer to set the sending interval.

Leave Timer—Leave announces the willingness to de-register with other participants. Together with
the Join, Leave messages help GARP participants complete attribute reregistration and de-registration.
Leave Timer starts upon receipt of a leave message sent for de-registering some attribute information.
If a join message is not received before the leave time expires, the GARP application entity removes
the attribute information as requested.

436 | GARP VLAN Registration (GVRP)

 Leave All Timer—The Leave All Timer starts when a GARP application entity starts. When this timer
expires, the entity sends a leave-all message so that other entities can re-register their attribute
information. Then, the leave-all time begins again.

Related
show garp timers Display the current GARP times
Commands

gvrp enable
ces Enable GVRP on physical interfaces and LAGs.

Syntax gvrp enable

To disable GVRP on the interface, use the no gvrp enable command.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes CONFIGURATION-INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C, E, and S-Series

Related
disable Globally disable GVRP.
Commands

gvrp registration
ces Configure the GVRP register type.

Syntax gvrp registration {fixed | normal | forbidden}

To return to the default, use the gvrp register normal command.

Parameters
fixed Enter the keyword fixed followed by the VLAN range in a comma
separated VLAN ID set.
normal Enter the keyword normal followed by the VLAN range in a comma
separated VLAN ID set.
This is the default
forbidden Enter the keyword forbidden followed by the VLAN range in a comma
separated VLAN ID set.

Defaults Default registration is normal

Command Modes CONFIGURATION-INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C, E, and S-Series

GARP VLAN Registration (GVRP) | 437

 Usage The fixed registration prevents an interface, configured via the command line to belong to a VLAN
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Information (static configuration), from being un-configured when it receives a Leave message. Therefore, the
registration mode on that interface is fixed.

The normal registration is the default registration. The port’s membership in the VLANs depends on
GVRP. The interface becomes a member of VLANs after learning about the VLAN through GVRP. If
the VLAN is removed from the port that sends GVRP advertisements to this device, then the port will
stop being a member of the VLAN.

The forbidden is used when you do not want the interface to advertise or learn about VLANs through
GVRP.

Related
show gvrp Display the GVRP configuration including the registration
Commands

protocol gvrp
ces Access GVRP protocol — (config-gvrp)#.

Syntax protocol gvrp

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C, E, and S-Series

Related
disable Globally disable GVRP.
Commands

show config
ces Display the global GVRP configuration.

Syntax show config

Command Modes CONFIGURATION-GVRP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C, E, and S-Series

Related
gvrp enable Enable GVRP on physical interfaces and LAGs.
Commands
protocol gvrp Access GVRP protocol.

438 | GARP VLAN Registration (GVRP)

show garp timers
ces Display the GARP timer settings for sending GARP messages.

Syntax show garp timers

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C, E, and S-Series

Example Figure 15-1. show garp timers Command Example

FTOS#show garp timers
GARP Timers Value (milliseconds)
----------------------------------------
Join Timer 200
Leave Timer 600
LeaveAll Timer 10000
FTOS#

Related
garp timers Set the intervals (in milliseconds) for sending GARP messages.
Commands

show gvrp
ces Display the GVRP configuration.

Syntax show gvrp [brief | interface]

Parameters
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display a brief summary of the GVRP
configuration.
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword FastEthernet followed by the
slot/port information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed
by the slot/port information.
• For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by the
Port Channel number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1-255 for TeraScale
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

GARP VLAN Registration (GVRP) | 439

 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.

History
Version7.6.1.0 Introduced on C, E, and S-Series

Example Figure 15-2. show gvrp brief Command Example

R3#show gvrp brief
GVRP Feature is currently enabled.

Port GVRP Status Edge-Port

-------------------------------------------------------
Gi 3/0 Disabled No
Gi 3/1 Disabled No
Gi 3/2 Enabled No
Gi 3/3 Disabled No
Gi 3/4 Disabled No
Gi 3/5 Disabled No
Gi 3/6 Disabled No
Gi 3/7 Disabled No
Gi 3/8 Disabled No
R3#show gvrp brief

Usage If no ports are GVRP participants, the message output changes from:
Information
GVRP Participants running on <port_list>
to
GVRP Participants running on no ports

Related
show gvrp statistics Display the GVRP statistics
Commands

show gvrp statistics

ces Display the GVRP configuration statistics.

Syntax show gvrp statistics {interface interface | summary}

Parameters
interface interface Enter the keyword interface followed by one of the interface keywords and slot/
port or number information:
• For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword FastEthernet followed by
the slot/port information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by
the Port Channel number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1-255 for TeraScale
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
summary Enter the keyword summary to display just a summary of the GVRP statistics.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

440 | GARP VLAN Registration (GVRP)

 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C, E, and S-Series

Example Figure 15-3. show gvrp statistics Command Example

FTOS#show gvrp statistics int gi 1/0

Join Empty Received: 0

Join In Received: 0
Empty Received: 0
LeaveIn Received: 0
Leave Empty Received: 0
Leave All Received: 40
Join Empty Transmitted: 156
Join In Transmitted: 0
Empty Transmitted: 0
Leave In Transmitted: 0
Leave Empty Transmitted: 0
Leave All Transmitted: 41
Invalid Messages/Attributes skipped: 0
Failed Registrations: 0
FTOS#

Usage Invalid messages/attributes skipped can occur in the following cases:

Information
• The incoming GVRP PDU has an incorrect length.
• “End of PDU” was reached before the complete attribute could be parsed.
• The Attribute Type of the attribute that was being parsed was not the GVRP VID Attribute Type
(0x01).
• The attribute that was being parsed had an invalid attribute length.
• The attribute that was being parsed had an invalid GARP event.
• The attribute that was being parsed had an invalid VLAN ID. The valid range is 1 - 4095.
A failed registration can occur for the following reasons:
• Join requests were received on a port that was blocked from learning dynamic VLANs (GVRP
Blocking state).
• An entry for a new GVRP VLAN could not be created in the GVRP database.

Related
show gvrp Display the GVRP configuration
Commands

GARP VLAN Registration (GVRP) | 441

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

442 | GARP VLAN Registration (GVRP)

 16
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)

Overview
The platforms on which a command is supported is indicated by the character — e for the E-Series,
c for the C-Series, and s for the S-Series — that appears below each command heading.

This chapter contains the following sections:

• IGMP Commands
• IGMP Snooping Commands

IGMP Commands
FTOS supports IGMPv1/v2/v3 and is compliant with RFC-3376.

Important Points to Remember

• FTOS supports PIM-SM and PIM-SSM include and exclude modes.
• IGMPv2 is the default version of IGMP on interfaces. IGMPv3 can be configured on interfaces,
and is backward compatible with IGMPv2.
• The maximum number of interfaces supported is 512 on the E-Series. On the C-Series and
S-Series 31 interfaces are supported.

Note: The S60 supports up to 95 interfaces.

• Maximum number of groups supported – no hard limit

• IGMPv3 router interoperability with IGMPv2 and IGMPv1 routers on the same subnet is not
supported.
• An administrative command (ip igmp version) is added to manually set the IGMP version.
• All commands, previously used for IGMPv2, are compatible with IGMPv3.
The commands include:
• clear ip igmp groups
• debug ip igmp
• ip igmp access-group
• ip igmp group-join-limit
• ip igmp immediate-leave
• ip igmp last-member-query-interval

Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) | 443

 • ip igmp querier-timeout
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

• ip igmp query-interval
• ip igmp query-max-resp-time
• ip igmp ssm-map
• ip igmp static-group
• ip igmp version
• show ip igmp groups
• show ip igmp interface
• show ip igmp ssm-map

clear ip igmp groups

ces Clear entries from the group cache table.

Syntax clear ip igmp groups [group-address | interface]

Parameters
group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP multicast group address in dotted decimal format.
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For an 100/1000 Base-T Ethernet interface, enter the keyword gigabitethernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword gigabitethernet followed
by the slot/port information.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword tengigabitethernet
followed by the slot/port information.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Usage IGMP commands accept only non-VLAN interfaces—specifying VLAN will not yield a results.
Information

Note: The S60 supports up to 95 interfaces.

debug ip igmp
ces Enable debugging of IGMP packets.

Syntax debug ip igmp [group address | interface]

To disable IGMP debugging, enter no debug ip igmp [group address | interface]. To disable all
debugging, enter undebug all.

444 | Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)

 Parameters
group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP multicast group address in dotted decimal format.
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Usage IGMP commands accept only non-VLAN interfaces—specifying VLAN will not yield a results. This
Information command displays packets for IGMP and IGMP Snooping.

Note: The S60 supports up to 95 interfaces.

ip igmp access-group
ces Use this feature to specify access control for packets.

Syntax ip igmp access-group access-list

To remove the feature, use the no ip igmp access-group access-list command.

Parameters
access-list Enter the name of the extended ACL (16 characters maximum).

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-slot/port)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Usage The access list accepted is an extended ACL. This feature is used to block IGMP reports from hosts, on
Information a per-interface basis; based on the group address and source address specified in the access list.

Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) | 445

 ip igmp group-join-limit
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Use this feature to limit the number of IGMP groups that can be joined in a second.

Syntax ip igmp group-join-limit number

Parameters
number Enter the number of IGMP groups permitted to join in a second.
Range: 1 to 10000

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-if-interface-slot/port)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

ip igmp immediate-leave
ces Enable IGMP immediate leave.

Syntax ip igmp immediate-leave [group-list prefix-list-name]

To disable ip igmp immediate leave, use the no ip igmp immediate-leave command.

Parameters
group-list prefix-list-name Enter the keyword group-list followed by a string up to 16
characters long of the prefix-list-name.

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Usage Querier normally send a certain number of group specific queries when a leave message is received, for
Information a group, prior to deleting a group from the membership database. There may be situations in which
immediate deletion of a group from the membership database is required. This command provides a
way to achieve the immediate deletion. In addition, this command provides a way to enable
immediate-leave processing for specified groups.

446 | Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)

ip igmp last-member-query-interval
ces Change the last member query interval, which is the Max Response Time inserted into Group-Specific
Queries sent in response to Leave Group messages. This interval is also the interval between
Group-Specific Query messages.

Syntax ip igmp last-member-query-interval milliseconds

To return to the default value, enter no ip igmp last-member-query-interval.

Parameters
milliseconds Enter the number of milliseconds as the interval.
Default: 1000 milliseconds
Range: 100 to 65535

Defaults 1000 milliseconds

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series legacy command

ip igmp querier-timeout
ces Change the interval that must pass before a multicast router decides that there is no longer another
multicast router that should be the querier.

Syntax ip igmp querier-timeout seconds

To return to the default value, enter no ip igmp querier-timeout.

Parameters
seconds Enter the number of seconds the router must wait to become the new querier.
Default: 125 seconds
Range: 60 to 300

Defaults 125 seconds

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series in Interface VLAN mode only to enable that system to act as an
IGMP Proxy Querier.
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series in Interface VLAN mode only to enable that system to act as an
IGMP Proxy Querier.
E-Series legacy command

Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) | 447

 ip igmp query-interval
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Change the transmission frequency of IGMP general queries sent by the Querier.

Syntax ip igmp query-interval seconds

To return to the default values, enter no ip igmp query-interval.

Parameters
seconds Enter the number of seconds between queries sent out.
Default: 60 seconds
Range: 1 to 18000

Defaults 60 seconds

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series in Interface VLAN mode only to enable that system to act as an
IGMP Proxy Querier.
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series in Interface VLAN mode only to enable that system to act as an
IGMP Proxy Querier.
E-Series legacy command

ip igmp query-max-resp-time
ces Set the maximum query response time advertised in general queries.

Syntax ip igmp query-max-resp-time seconds

To return to the default values, enter no ip igmp query-max-resp-time.

Parameters
seconds Enter the number of seconds for the maximum response time.
Default: 10 seconds
Range: 1 to 25

Defaults 10 seconds

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series in Interface VLAN mode only to enable that system to act as an
IGMP Proxy Querier.
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series in Interface VLAN mode only to enable that system to act as an
IGMP Proxy Querier.
E-Series legacy command

448 | Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)

ip igmp ssm-map
ces Use a statically configured list to translate (*,G) memberships to (S,G) memberships.

Syntax ip igmp ssm-map std-access-list source-address

Undo this configuration, that is, remove SSM map (S,G) states and replace them with (*,G) states
using the command ip igmp ssm-map std-access-list source-address command.

Parameters
std-access-list Specify the standard IP access list that contains the mapping rules for multicast
groups.
source-address Specify the multicast source address to which the groups are mapped.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Usage Mapping applies to both v1 and v2 IGMP joins; any updates to the ACL are reflected in the IGMP
Information groups. You may not use extended access lists with this command. When a static SSM map is
configured and the router cannot find any matching access lists, the router continues to accept (*,G)
groups.

Related
ip access-list standard Create a standard access list to filter based on IP address.
Commands

ip igmp static-group
ces Configure an IGMP static group.

Syntax ip igmp static-group {group address [exclude [source address]] | [include {source address}]}
To delete a static address, use the no ip igmp static-group {group address [exclude [source
address]] | [include {source address}]} command.

Parameters
group address Enter the group address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D)
exclude source (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword exclude followed by the source address, in dotted
address decimal format (A.B.C.D), for which a static entry needs to be added.
include source (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword include followed by the source address, in dotted
address decimal format (A.B.C.D), for which a static entry needs to be added.
Note: A group in include mode must have at least one source address
defined.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) | 449

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on C-Series

Version 7.5.1.0 Expanded to support the exclude and include options
E-Series legacy command

Usage A group in the include mode should have at least one source address defined. In exclude mode if no
Information source address is specified, FTOS implicitly assumes all sources are included. If neither include or
exclude is specified, FTOS implicitly assumes a IGMPv2 static join.

Command Limitations
• Only one mode (include or exclude) is permitted per multicast group per interface. To configure
another mode, all sources belonging to the original mode must be unconfigured.
• If a static configuration is present and a packet for the same group arrives on an interface, the
dynamic entry will completely overwrite all the static configuration for the group.

Related
show ip igmp groups Display IGMP group information
Commands

ip igmp version
ces Manually set the version of the router to IGMPv2 or IGMPv3.

Syntax ip igmp version {2 | 3}

Parameters
2 Enter the number 2 to set the IGMP version number to IGMPv2.
3 Enter the number 3 to set the IGMP version number to IGMPv3.

Defaults 2 (that is IGMPv2)

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

show ip igmp groups

ces View the IGMP groups.

Syntax show ip igmp groups [group-address [detail] | detail | interface [group-address [detail]]]

450 | Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)

 Parameters
group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the group address in dotted decimal format to view information
on that group only.
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the interface type and slot/port information:
• For a 100/1000 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword gigabitethernet followed
by the slot/port information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword gigabitethernet followed
by the slot/port information.
• For a port-channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by the
port-channel number.
• For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback followed by a number
from 0 to 16383.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword tengigabitethernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a VLAN interface enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to
4094.
detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to display the IGMPv3 source information.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series and on C-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Expanded to support the detail option.
E-Series legacy command

Usage This command displays the IGMP database including configured entries for either all groups on all
Information interfaces, or all groups on specific interfaces, or specific groups on specific interfaces.

Note: The S60 supports up to 95 interfaces.

Example Figure 16-1. show ip igmp groups Command Example

FTOS#show ip igmp groups
IGMP Connected Group Membership
Group Address Interface Uptime Expires Last Reporter
224.0.1.40 GigabitEthernet 13/6 09:45:23 00:02:08 10.87.7.5
FTOS#

Table 16-1. show ip igmp groups Command Example Fields

Field Description
Group Address Lists the multicast address for the IGMP group.
Interface Lists the interface type, slot and port number.
Uptime Displays the amount of time the group has been operational.
Expires Displays the amount of time until the entry expires.
Last Reporter Displays the IP address of the last host to be a member of the IGMP group.

Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) | 451

 show ip igmp interface
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces View information on the interfaces participating in IGMP.

Syntax show ip igmp interface [interface]

Parameters
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the interface type and slot/port information:
• For a 100/1000 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword gigabitethernet followed by the
slot/port information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword gigabitethernet followed by the
slot/port information.
• For a port-channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by the
port-channel number.
• For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback followed by a number from 0 to
16383.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword tengigabitethernet followed
by the slot/port information.
• For a VLAN interface enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Usage IGMP commands accept only non-VLAN interfaces—specifying VLAN will not yield a results.
Information

Note: The S60 supports up to 95 interfaces.

Example Figure 16-2. show ip igmp interface Command Example

FTOS#show ip igmp interface
GigabitEthernet 0/0 is down, line protocol is down
Internet protocol processing disabled
GigabitEthernet 0/5 is down, line protocol is down
Internet protocol processing disabled
GigabitEthernet 0/6 is down, line protocol is down
Internet protocol processing disabled
GigabitEthernet 0/7 is up, line protocol is down
Internet protocol processing disabled
GigabitEthernet 7/9 is up, line protocol is up
Internet address is 10.87.5.250/24
IGMP is enabled on interface
IGMP query interval is 60 seconds
IGMP querier timeout is 120 seconds
IGMP max query response time is 10 seconds
IGMP last member query response interval is 1000 ms
IGMP activity: 0 joins, 0 leaves
IGMP querying router is 10.87.5.250 (this system)
IGMP version is 2

452 | Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)

show ip igmp ssm-map
ces Display is a list of groups that are currently in the IGMP group table and contain SSM mapped sources.

Syntax show ip igmp ssm-map [group]

Parameters
group (OPTIONAL) Enter the multicast group address in the form A.B.C.D to display the list of
sources to which this group is mapped.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Related
Commands ip igmp Use a statically configured list to translate (*,G) memberships to (S,G) memberships.
ssm-map

IGMP Snooping Commands

FTOS supports IGMP Snooping version 2 and 3 on all Dell Networking systems:

• ip igmp snooping enable

• ip igmp snooping fast-leave
• ip igmp snooping flood
• ip igmp snooping last-member-query-interval
• ip igmp snooping mrouter
• ip igmp snooping querier
• show ip igmp snooping mrouter

Important Points to Remember for IGMP Snooping

• FTOS supports version 1, version 2, and version 3 hosts.
• FTOS IGMP snooping implementation is based on IP multicast address (not based on Layer 2
multicast mac-address) and the IGMP snooping entries are in Layer 3 flow table not in Layer 2
FIB.
• FTOS IGMP snooping implementation is based on draft-ietf-magma-snoop-10.
• FTOS supports IGMP snooping on JUMBO enabled cards.
• IGMP snooping is not enabled by default on the switch.
• A maximum of 1800 groups and 600 VLAN are supported.
• IGMP snooping is not supported on default VLAN interface.
• IGMP snooping is not supported over VLAN-Stack-enabled VLAN interfaces (you must disable
IGMP snooping on a VLAN interface before configuring VLAN-Stack-related commands).
• IGMP snooping does not react to Layer 2 topology changes triggered by STP.

Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) | 453

 • IGMP snooping reacts to Layer 2 topology changes triggered by MSTP by sending a general query
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

on the interface that comes in FWD state.

Important Points to Remember for IGMP Querier

• The IGMP snooping Querier supports version 2.
• You must configure an IP address to the VLAN interface for IGMP snooping Querier to begin.
The IGMP snooping Querier disables itself when a VLAN IP address is cleared, and then it
restarts itself when an IP address is re-assigned to the VLAN interface.
• When enabled, IGMP snooping Querier will not start if there is a statically configured multicast
router interface in the VLAN.
• When enabled, IGMP snooping Querier starts after one query interval in case no IGMP general
query (with IP SA lower than its VLAN IP address) is received on any of its VLAN members.
• When enabled, IGMP snooping Querier periodically sends general queries with an IP source
address of the VLAN interface. If it receives a general query on any of its VLAN member, it will
check the IP source address of the incoming frame.
If the IP SA in the incoming IGMP general query frame is lower than the IP address of
the VLAN interface, then the switch disables its IGMP snooping Querier functionality.
If the IP SA of the incoming IGMP general query is higher than the VLAN IP address,
the switch will continue to work as an IGMP snooping Querier.

ip igmp snooping enable

ces Enable IGMP snooping on all or a single VLAN. This is the master on/off switch to enable IGMP
snooping.

Syntax ip igmp snooping enable

To disable IGMP snooping, enter no ip igmp snooping enable command.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

INTERFACE VLAN

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Usage You must enter this command to enable IGMP snooping. When enabled from CONFIGURATION
Information mode, IGMP snooping is enabled on all VLAN interfaces (except default VLAN).

Note: You must execute the no shutdown command on the VLAN interface for IGMP
Snooping to function.

Related
no shutdown Activate an interface
Commands

454 | Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)

ip igmp snooping fast-leave
ces Enable IGMP snooping fast leave for this VLAN.

Syntax ip igmp snooping fast-leave

To disable IGMP snooping fast leave, use the no igmp snooping fast-leave command.

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN—(conf-if-vl-n)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Usage Queriers normally send a certain number of queries when a leave message is received prior to deleting
Information a group from the membership database. There may be situations in which fast deletion of a group is
required. When IGMP fast leave processing is enabled, the switch will remove an interface from the
multicast group as soon as it detects an IGMP version 2 leave message on the interface.

ip igmp snooping flood

ces This command controls the flooding behavior of unregistered multicast data packets. On the E-Series,
when flooding is enabled (the default), unregistered multicast data traffic is flooded to all ports in a
VLAN. When flooding is disabled, unregistered multicast data traffic is forwarded to only multicast
router ports, both static and dynamic, in a VLAN. If there is no multicast router port in a VLAN, then
unregistered multicast data traffic is dropped. On the
C-Series and S-Series, unregistered multicast data traffic is dropped when flooding is disabled; they do
not forward the packets to multicast router ports. On the C-Series and S-Series, Layer 3 multicast must
be disabled (no ip multicast-routing) in order to disable Layer 2 multicast flooding.

Syntax ip igmp snooping flood

Defaults Enabled

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series.
Version 7.7.1.1 Introduced on E-Series.

Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) | 455

 ip igmp snooping last-member-query-interval
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces The last member query interval is the “maximum response time” inserted into Group-Specific queries
sent in response to Group-Leave messages. This interval is also the interval between successive
Group-Specific Query messages. Use this command to change the last member query interval.

Syntax ip igmp snooping last-member-query-interval milliseconds

To return to the default value, enter no ip igmp snooping last-member-query-interval.

Parameters
milliseconds Enter the interval in milliseconds.
Default: 1000 milliseconds
Range: 100 to 65535

Defaults 1000 milliseconds

Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series legacy command

ip igmp snooping mrouter

ces Statically configure a VLAN member port as a multicast router interface.

Syntax ip igmp snooping mrouter interface interface

To delete a specific multicast router interface, use the no igmp snooping mrouter interface
interface command.

Parameters
interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
interface • For an 100/1000 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a
number:
C-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN—(conf-if-vl-n)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

456 | Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)

 Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Usage FTOS provides the capability of statically configuring interface to which a multicast router is attached.
Information To configure a static connection to the multicast router, enter the ip igmp snooping mrouter
interface command in the VLAN context. The interface to the router must be a part of the VLAN
where you are entering the command.

Note: The S60 supports up to 95 interfaces.

ip igmp snooping querier

ces Enable IGMP querier processing for the VLAN interface.

Syntax ip igmp snooping querier

To disable IGMP querier processing for the VLAN interface, enter no ip igmp snooping querier
command.

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN—(conf-if-vl-n)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Usage This command enables the IGMP switch to send General Queries periodically. This is useful when
Information there is no multicast router present in the VLAN because the multicast traffic does not need to be
routed. An IP address must be assigned to the VLAN interface for the switch to act as a querier for this
VLAN.

show ip igmp snooping mrouter

ces Display multicast router interfaces.

Syntax show ip igmp snooping mrouter [vlan number]

Parameters
vlan number Enter the keyword vlan followed by the vlan number.
Range: 1-4094

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) | 457

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series

E-Series legacy command

Example Figure 16-3. show ip igmp snooping mrouter Command Example

FTOS#show ip igmp snooping mrouter
Interface Router Ports
Vlan 2 Gi 13/3, Po 1
FTOS#

Related
show ip igmp groups Use this IGMP command to view groups
Commands

458 | Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)

 17
\

Interfaces

Overview
This chapter defines interface commands and is divided into the following sections:

• Basic Interface Commands

• Port Channel Commands
• UDP Broadcast
The symbols c e s under command headings indicate which Dell Networking platforms —
C-Series, E-Series, or S-Series, respectively — support the command.

Although all interfaces are supported on E-Series ExaScale, some interface functionality is supported
on E-Series ExaScale ex with FTOS 8.2.1.0. and later. When this is the case that is noted in the
command history.

Basic Interface Commands

The following commands are for physical, Loopback, and Null interfaces:
• auto-mdix
• clear counters
• clear dampening
• cx4-cable-length
• dampening
• description
• disable-on-sfm-failure
• duplex (Management)
• duplex (10/100 Interfaces)
• flowcontrol
• interface
• interface loopback
• interface ManagementEthernet
• interface null
• interface range
• interface range macro (define)
• interface range macro name
• interface vlan
• ipg (10 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces)

Interfaces | 459
 • keepalive
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

• lfs enable
• link debounce-timer
• monitor
• mtu
• negotiation auto
• portmode hybrid
• rate-interval
• show config
• show config (from INTERFACE RANGE mode)
• show interfaces
• show interfaces configured
• show interfaces dampening
• show interfaces description
• show interfaces linecard
• show interfaces phy
• show interfaces stack-unit
• show interfaces status
• show interfaces switchport
• show interfaces transceiver
• show range
• shutdown
• speed (for 10/100/1000 interfaces)
• speed (Management interface)
• stack-unit module
• switchport
• wanport

auto-mdix
Enable Auto-MDIX on copper ports.

Syntax [no] auto-mdix

Defaults Enabled

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.5.3 Introduced on the S55.
History
Version 8.3.3.3 Introduced on the S60.

Usage With Auto-MDIX enabled, you can connect two network devices irrespective of the cable type
Information (straight-through or crossover) and the MDI mode of the peer device. When Auto-MDIX is disabled at
both ends, the copper ports behave as MDI. In this case, you need a crossover cable to connect the port
to another MDI port, or a straight-through cable to connect the port to a MDIX port. The link will not
come up when wrong cables are used.

460 | Interfaces
clear counters
ces Clear the counters used in the show interfaces commands for all VRRP groups, VLANs, and
physical interfaces, or selected ones.

Syntax clear counters [interface] [vrrp [vrid] | learning-limit]

Parameters
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed
by the slot/port information.
• For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback followed by a number
from 0 to 16383.
• For a port channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by the
number of the port channel:
C-Series and S55 and S60 Range: 1-128
• For the management interface on the RPM, enter the keyword
ManagementEthernet followed by slot/port information. The slot range is
0-1, and the port range is 0.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.
• For an IPv6 interface, enter the keyword ipv6.
• For a loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback
• For a MAC interface, enter the keyword mac.
vrrp vrid (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrrp to clear statistics for all VRRP groups
configured. Enter a number from 1 to 255 as the vrid.
learning-limit (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword learning-limit to clear unknown source address
(SA) drop counters when MAC learning limit is configured on the interface.
Note: This option is not supported on the S-Series, as the MAC learning limit
is not supported

Defaults Without an interface specified, the command clears all interface counters.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Support for 4093 VLANs on E-Series ExaScale. Prior to release supported 2094.
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.5.1.0 Updated definition of the learning-limit option for clarity.

Example Figure 17-1. clear counters Command Example

FTOS#clear counters
Clear counters on all interfaces [confirm]

Interfaces | 461
 Related
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

mac learning-limit Allow aging of MACs even though a learning-limit is configured or disallow
Commands
station move on learnt MACs.
show interfaces Displays information on the interfaces.

clear dampening
ces Clear the dampening counters on all the interfaces or just the specified interface.

Syntax clear dampening [interface]

Parameters
interface (Optional) Enter one of the following keywords and slot/port or number
information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
GigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a port channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel
followed by a number:
C-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale and ExaScale
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/
port information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.

Defaults Without a specific interface specified, the command clears all interface dampening counters

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Example
FTOS#clear dampening gigabitethernet 1/2
Clear dampening counters on Gi 1/2 [confirm] y
FTOS#

Related
Commands
show interfaces dampening Display interface dampening information.
dampening Configure dampening on an interface.

cx4-cable-length
s Configure the length of the cable to be connected to the selected CX4 port.

Syntax [no] cx4-cable-length {long | medium | short}

462 | Interfaces
Parameters
long | medium | short Enter the keyword that matches the cable length to be used at the selected
port:
short = For 1-meter and 3-meter cable lengths
medium = For 5-meter cable length
long = For 10-meter and 15-meter cable lengths

Defaults medium

Mode Interface

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Usage This command only works on ports that the system recognizes as CX4 ports. So, for example,
Information Figure 17-2 shows an attempt to configure an XFP port in an S25P with the command after inserting a
CX4 converter into the port:

Note: When using a long CX4 cable between the C-Series and the S-Series, configure the
cable using the cx4-cable-length short command only to avoid any errors.

Example Figure 17-2. Example of Unsuccessful CX4 Cable Length Configuration

FTOS#show interfaces tengigabitethernet 0/26 | grep "XFP type"

Pluggable media present, XFP type is 10GBASE-CX4

FTOS(conf-if-te-0/26)#cx4-cable-length short
% Error: Unsupported command.
FTOS(conf-if-te-0/26)#cx4-cable-length medium
% Error: Unsupported command.
FTOS(conf-if-te-0/26)#cx4-cable-length long
% Error: Unsupported command.
FTOS(conf-if-te-0/26)#

Figure 17-3 shows a successful CX4 cable length configuration.

Example Figure 17-3. Example of CX4 Cable Length Configuration

FTOS#config
FTOS(config)#interface tengigabitethernet 0/52
FTOS(conf-if-0/52)#cx4-cable-length long
FTOS(conf-if-0/52)#show config
!
interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/51
no ip address
cx4-cable-length long
shutdown
FTOS(conf-if-0/52)#exit
FTOS(config)#

For details on using XFP ports with CX4 cables, see your S-Series hardware guide.

Related
Commands show config Display the configuration of the selected interface.

Interfaces | 463
 dampening
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Configure dampening on an interface.

Syntax dampening [[[[half-life] [reuse-threshold]] [suppress-threshold]] [max-suppress-time]]

To disable dampening, use the no dampening [[[[half-life] [reuse-threshold]] [suppress-threshold]]
[max-suppress-time]] command syntax.

Parameters
half-life Enter the number of seconds after which the penalty is decreased. The
penalty is decreased by half after the half-life period expires.
Range: 1 to 30 seconds
Default: 5 seconds
reuse-threshold Enter a number as the reuse threshold, the penalty value below which the
interface state is changed to “up”.
Range: 1 to 20000
Default: 750
suppress-threshold Enter a number as the suppress threshold, the penalty value above which the
interface state is changed to “error disabled”.
Range: 1 to 20000
Default: 2500
max-suppress-time Enter the maximum number for which a route can be suppressed. The default
is four times the half-life value.
Range: 1 to 86400
Default: 20 seconds

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-if-)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Example
FTOS(conf-if-gi-3/2)#dampening 20 800 4500 120
FTOS(conf-if-gi-3/2)#

Usage With each flap, FTOS penalizes the interface by assigning a penalty (1024) that decays exponentially
Information depending on the configured half-life. Once the accumulated penalty exceeds the suppress threshold
value, the interface is moved to the error-disabled state. This interface state is deemed as “down” by all
static/dynamic Layer 2 and Layer 3 protocols. The penalty is exponentially decayed based on the
half-life timer. Once the penalty decays below the reuse threshold, the interface is enabled. The
configured parameters should follow:
• suppress-threshold should be greater than reuse-threshold
• max-suppress-time should be at least 4 times half-life

464 | Interfaces
 Note: Dampening cannot be applied on an interface that is monitoring traffic for other
interfaces.

Related
clear dampening Clear the dampening counters on all the interfaces or just the specified
Commands
interface.
show interfaces dampening Display interface dampening information.

description
ces Assign a descriptive text string to the interface.

Syntax description desc_text

To delete a description, enter no description.

Parameters
desc_text Enter a text string up to 240 characters long.

Defaults No description is defined.

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Modified for E-Series: Revised from 78 to 240 characters.

Usage Entering a text string after the description command overwrites any previous text string configured as
Information the description. The shutdown and description commands are the only commands that you can
configure on an interface that is a member of a port channel. Use the show interfaces description
command to display descriptions configured for each interface.

Related
Commands
show interfaces description Display description field of interfaces.

disable-on-sfm-failure
e Disable select ports on E300 systems when a single SFM is available.

Syntax disable-on-sfm-failure
To delete a description, enter no disable-on-sfm-failure.

Defaults Port is not disabled

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on E300 systems only
History

Interfaces | 465
 Usage When an E300 system boots up and a single SFM is active this configuration, any ports configured
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Information with this feature will be shut down. If an SFM fails (or is removed) in an E300 system with two SFM,
ports configured with this feature will be shut down. All other ports are treated normally.

When a second SFM is installed or replaced, all ports are booted up and treated as normally. This
feature does not take affect until a single SFM is active in the E300 system.

duplex (Management)
ce Set the mode of the Management interface.

Syntax duplex {half | full}

To return to the default setting, enter no duplex.

Parameters
half Enter the keyword half to set the Management interface to transmit only in one direction.
full Enter the keyword full to set the Management interface to transmit in both directions.

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.4.1.0 Documentation modified—added Management to distinguish from duplex (10/100
Interfaces)

Usage This command applies only to the Management interface on the RPMs.
Information

Related
Commands interface ManagementEthernet Configure the Management port on the system (either the Primary
or Standby RPM).
duplex (Management) Set the mode of the Management interface.
management route Configure a static route that points to the Management interface or a
forwarding router.
speed (Management interface) Set the speed on the Management interface.

duplex (10/100 Interfaces)

ces Configure duplex mode on any physical interfaces where the speed is set to 10/100.Syntax
duplex {half | full}
To return to the default setting, enter no duplex.

Parameters
half Enter the keyword half to set the physical interface to transmit only in one direction.
full Enter the keyword full to set the physical interface to transmit in both directions.

Defaults Not configured

466 | Interfaces
Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.4.1.0 Introduced

Usage This command applies to any physical interface with speed set to 10/100.
Information

Note: Starting with FTOS 7.8.1.0, when a copper SFP2 module with catalog number
GP-SFP2-1T is used in the S25P model of the S-Series, its speed can be manually set with the
speed command. When the speed is set to 10 or 100 Mbps, the duplex command can also be
executed.

Related
speed (for 10/100/1000 interfaces) Set the speed on the Base-T Ethernet interface.
Commands
negotiation auto Enable or disable auto-negotiation on an interface.

flowcontrol
ces Control how the system responds to and generates 802.3x pause frames on 1Gig and 10Gig line cards.

Syntax flowcontrol rx {off | on} tx {off | on} threshold {<1-2047> <1-2013> <1-2013>}
The threshold keyword is supported on C-Series and S-Series only.

To return to the default, use the no flowcontrol rx {off | on} tx {off | on} threshold command.

Parameters
rx on Enter the keywords rx on to process the received flow control frames on this port. This is
the default value for the receive side.
rx off Enter the keywords rx off to ignore the received flow control frames on this port.
tx on Enter the keywords tx on to send control frames from this port to the connected device
when a higher rate of traffic is received. This is the default value on the send side.
tx off Enter the keywords tx off so that flow control frames are not sent from this port to the
connected device when a higher rate of traffic is received.
threshold When tx on is configured, you can set the threshold values for:
(C-Series and Number of flow-control packet pointers: 1-2047 (default = 75)
S-Series only) Flow-control buffer threshold in KB: 1-2013 (default = 49KB)
Flow-control discard threshold in KB: 1-2013 (default= 75KB)

Defaults C-Series: rx off tx off

E-Series: rx on tx on
S-Series (S25/S50): rx off tx off

S60: rx on

Command Modes INTERFACE

Interfaces | 467
 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60, rx only.

History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 6.5.1.9 and 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series with thresholds

Usage The globally assigned 48-bit Multicast address 01-80-C2-00-00-01 is used to send and receive pause
Information frames. To allow full duplex flow control, stations implementing the pause operation instruct the MAC
to enable reception of frames with a destination address equal to this multicast address.

The pause:
• Starts when either the packet pointer or the buffer threshold is met (whichever is met first). When
the discard threshold is met, packets are dropped.
• Ends when both the packet pointer and the buffer threshold fall below 50% of the threshold
settings.
The discard threshold defines when the interface starts dropping the packet on the interface. This may
be necessary when a connected device does not honor the flow control frame sent by the S-Series. The
discard threshold should be larger than the buffer threshold so that the buffer holds at least hold at least
3 packets.

Note: The S60 supports only the rx control option. The S60 does not transmit pause
frames.

Important Points to Remember

• Do not enable tx pause when buffer carving is enabled. Consult Dell Networking TAC for
information and assistance.
• Asymmetric flow control (rx on tx off or rx off tx on) setting for the interface port less than 100
Mb/s speed is not permitted. The following error is returned:

Can’t configure Asymmetric flowcontrol when speed <1G, config

ignored

• The only configuration applicable to half duplex ports is rx off tx off. The following error is
returned:

Can’t configure flowcontrol when half duplex is configure,

config ignored

• Half duplex cannot be configured when the flow control configuration is on (default is rx on tx
on). The following error is returned:

Can’t configure half duplex when flowcontrol is on, config

ignored

Note: The flow control must be off (rx off tx off) before configuring the half duplex.

468 | Interfaces
 • Speeds less than 1 Gig cannot be configured when the asymmetric flow control configuration is
on. The following error is returned:

Can’t configure speed <1G when Asymmetric flowcontrol is on,

config ignored

• FTOS only supports rx on tx on and rx off tx off for speeds less than 1 Gig (Symmetric).
• On the C-Series and S-Series systems, the flow-control sender and receiver must be on the same
port-pipe. Flow control is not supported across different port-pipes on the C-Series or S-Series
system.

Example Figure 17-4. show running config (partial)

FTOS(conf-if-gi-0/1)#show config
!
interface GigabitEthernet 0/1
no ip address
switchport
no negotiation auto
flowcontrol rx off tx on
no shutdown
...

The table below displays how FTOS negotiates the flow control values between two Dell Networking
chassis connected back-to-back using 1G copper ports.

Table 17-1. Negotiated Flow Control Values

Configured Negotiated
LocRxConf LocTxConf RemoteRxConf RemoteTxConf LocNegRx LocNegTx RemNegRx RemNegTx
off off off off off off off off
off on off off off off
on off off off off off
on on off off off off

off on off off off off off off

off on off off off off
on off off on on off
on on off off off off

on off off off off off off off

off on on off off on
on off on on on on
on on on on on on

on on off off off off off off

off on off off off off
on off on on on on
on on on on on on

Related
show running-config Display the flow configuration parameters (non-default values only).
Commands
show interfaces Display the negotiated flow control parameters.

Interfaces | 469
 interface
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Configure a physical interface on the switch.

Syntax interface interface

Parameters
interface Enter one of the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For 100/1000 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by
the slot/port information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by
the slot/port information.
• For SONET interfaces, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.4.1.0 Introduced

Example Figure 17-5. interface Command Example

FTOS(conf)#interface gig 0/0
FTOS(conf-if-gi-0/0)#exit#

Usage You cannot delete a physical interface.

Information
By default, physical interfaces are disabled (shutdown) and are in Layer 3 mode. To place an interface
in mode, ensure that the interface’s configuration does not contain an IP address and enter the
switchport command.

Related
interface loopback Configure a Loopback interface.
Commands
interface null Configure a Null interface.
interface port-channel Configure a port channel.
interface sonet Configure a SONET interface.
interface vlan Configure a VLAN.
show interfaces Display interface configuration.

470 | Interfaces
interface loopback
ces Configure a Loopback interface.

Syntax interface loopback number

To remove a loopback interface, use the no interface loopback number command.

Parameters
number Enter a number as the interface number.
Range: 0 to 16383.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.4.1.0 Introduced

Example Figure 17-6. interface loopback Command Example

FTOS(conf)#interface loopback 1655
FTOS(conf-if-lo-1655)#

Related
interface Configure a physical interface.
Commands
interface null Configure a Null interface.
interface port-channel Configure a port channel.
interface vlan Configure a VLAN.

interface ManagementEthernet
Configure the Management port on the system (either the Primary or Standby RPM).
ce

Syntax interface ManagementEthernet slot/port

Parameters
slot/port Enter the keyword ManagementEthernet followed by slot number (0-1) and port
number zero (0).

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
Version 6.4.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Interfaces | 471
 Example Figure 17-7. interface ManagementEthernet Command Example
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS(conf)#interface managementethernet 0/0

FTOS(conf-if-ma-0/0)#

Usage You cannot delete a Management port.

Information
The Management port is enabled by default (no shutdown). Use the ip address command to assign an
IP address to the Management port.

If two RPMs are installed in your system, use the show redundancy command to display which RPM is
the Primary RPM.

Related
management route Configure a static route that points to the Management interface or a
Commands
forwarding router.
duplex (Management) Clear FIB entries on a specified line card.
speed (Management interface) Clear FIB entries on a specified line card.

interface null
ces Configure a Null interface on the switch.

Syntax interface null number

Parameters
number Enter zero (0) as the Null interface number.

Defaults Not configured; number = 0

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.4.1.0 Introduced

Example Figure 17-8. interface null Command Example

FTOS(conf)#interface null 0
FTOS(conf-if-nu-0)#

Usage You cannot delete the Null interface. The only configuration command possible in a Null interface is ip
Information unreachables.

Related
interface Configure a physical interface.
Commands
interface loopback Configure a Loopback interface.
interface port-channel Configure a port channel.

472 | Interfaces
 interface vlan Configure a VLAN.
ip unreachables Enable generation of ICMP unreachable messages.

interface range
ces This command permits configuration of a range of interfaces to which subsequent commands are
applied (bulk configuration). Using the interface range command, identical commands can be
entered for a range of interface.

Syntax interface range interface , interface , ...

Parameters
interface, Enter the keyword interface range and one of the interfaces — slot/port,
interface, ... port-channel or VLAN number. Select the range of interfaces for bulk configuration.
You can enter up to six comma separated ranges—spaces are not required between the
commas. Comma-separated ranges can include VLANs, port-channels and physical
interfaces.
Slot/Port information must contain a space before and after the dash. For example,
interface range gigabitethernet 0/1 - 5 is valid; interface range
gigabitethernet 0/1-5 is not valid.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed
by the slot/port information.
• For a port channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a
number:
C-Series and S55 and S60 Range: 1-128
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to
2147483647.

Defaults This command has no default behavior or values.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Support for 4093 VLANs on E-Series ExaScale. Prior releases supported 2094.
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage When creating an interface range, interfaces appear in the order they are entered; they are not sorted.
Information The command verifies that interfaces are present (physical) or configured (logical). Important things to
remember:
• Bulk configuration is created if at least one interface is valid.
• Non-existing interfaces are excluded from the bulk configuration with a warning message
(Figure 17-9).

Interfaces | 473
 • The interface range prompt includes interface types with slot/port information for valid interfaces.
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

The prompt allows for a maximum of 32 characters. If the bulk configuration exceeds 32
characters, it is represented by an ellipsis ( ... ).
• When the interface range prompt has multiple port ranges, the smaller port range is excluded from
the prompt (Figure 17-10).
• If overlapping port ranges are specified, the port range is extended to the smallest start port and the
biggest end port (Figure 17-11).

Example Figure 17-9. Bulk Configuration Warning Message

FTOS(conf)#interface range so 2/0 - 1 , te 10/0 , gi 3/0 , fa 0/0
% Warning: Non-existing ports (not configured) are ignored by
interface-range

Example Figure 17-10. Interface Range prompt with Multiple Ports

FTOS(conf)#interface range gi 2/0 - 23 , gi 2/1 - 10
FTOS(conf-if-range-gi-2/0-23#

Example Figure 17-11. Interface Range prompt Overlapping Port Ranges

FTOS(conf)#interface range gi 2/1 - 11 , gi 2/1 - 23
FTOS(conf-if-range-gi-2/1-23#

Only VLAN and port-channel interfaces created using the interface vlan and interface port-channel
commands can be used in the interface range command.

Use the show running-config command to display the VLAN and port-channel interfaces. VLAN or
port-channel interfaces that are not displayed in the show running-config command can not be used
with the bulk configuration feature of the interface range command. You cannot create virtual
interfaces (VLAN, Port-channel) using the interface range command.

Note: If a range has VLAN, physical, port-channel, and SONET interfaces, only commands
related to physical interfaces can be bulk configured. To configure commands specific to VLAN,
port-channel or SONET, only those respective interfaces should be configured in a particular
range.

Figure 17-12 is an example of a single range bulk configuration.

Example Figure 17-12. Single Range Bulk Configuration

FTOS(config)# interface range gigabitethernet 5/1 - 23
FTOS(config-if-range)# no shutdown
FTOS(config-if-range)#

Figure 17-13 shows how to use commas to add different interface types to the range enabling all
Gigabit Ethernet interfaces in the range 5/1 to 5/23 and both Ten Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 1/1 and 1/
2.

474 | Interfaces
 Example Figure 17-13. Multiple Range Bulk Configuration Gigabit Ethernet and Ten Gigabit
Ethernet

FTOS(config-if)# interface range gigabitethernet 5/1 - 23, tengigabitethernet 1/1 - 2

FTOS(config-if-range)# no shutdown
FTOS(config-if-range)#

Figure 17-14 shows how to use commas to add SONET, VLAN, and port-channel interfaces to the
range.

Example Figure 17-14. Multiple Range Bulk Configuration with SONET, VLAN, and port channel

FTOS(config-if)# interface range gigabitethernet 5/1 - 23, tengigabitethernet 1/1 – 2,

Vlan 2 – 100 , Port 1 – 25
FTOS(config-if-range)# no shutdown
FTOS(config-if-range)#

Related
interface port-channel Configure a port channel group.
Commands
interface vlan Configure a VLAN interface.
show config (from INTERFACE RANGE mode) Show the bulk configuration interfaces.
show range Show the bulk configuration ranges.
interface range macro (define) Define a macro for an interface-range.

interface range macro (define)

ces Defines a macro for an interface range and then saves the macro in the running configuration.

Syntax define interface range macro name interface, interface, ...

Parameters
name Enter up to 16 characters for the macro name.
interface , Enter the interface keyword (see below) and one of the interfaces slot/port, port-channel
interface ,... or VLAN numbers. Select the range of interfaces for bulk configuration. You can enter up
to six comma separated ranges—spaces are not required between the commas.
Comma-separated ranges can include VLANs, port-channels and physical interfaces.
Slot/Port information must contain a space before and after the dash. For example,
interface range gigabitethernet 0/1 - 5 is valid; interface range
gigabitethernet 0/1-5 is not valid.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by
the slot/port information.
• For a port channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a number:
C-Series and S55 and S60 Range: 1-128
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 2147483647.

Defaults This command has no default behavior or value

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Interfaces | 475
 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.

History
Version 8.2.1.0 Support for 4093 VLANs on E-Series ExaScale. Prior releases supported 2094.
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced

Example Figure 17-15. define interface-range macro Command Example

FTOS(config)# define interface-range test tengigabitethernet 0/0 - 3 ,
gigabitethernet 5/0 - 47 , gigabitethernet 13/0 - 89

FTOS# show running-config | grep define

define interface-range test tengigabitethernet 0/0 - 3 , gigabitethernet 5/0 - 47 ,
gigabitethernet 13/0 - 89
FTOS(config)#interface range macro test
FTOS(config-if-range-te-0/0-3,gi-5/0-47,gi-13/0-89)#

Usage Figure 17-15 is an example of how to define an interface range macro named test. Execute the show
Information running-config command to display the macro definition. Applying the macro is shown in
Figure 17-17.

Related
interface range Configure a range of command (bulk configuration)
Commands
interface range macro name Run an interface range macro.

interface range macro name

ces Run the interface-range macro to automatically configure the pre-defined range of interfaces.

Syntax interface range macro name

Parameters
name Enter the name of an existing macro.

Defaults This command has no default behavior or value

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced

Usage Figure 17-16 runs the macro named test that was defined in Figure 17-15.
Information

Example Figure 17-16. interface-range macro Command Example

FTOS(config)#interface range macro test
FTOS(config-if-range-te-0/0-3,gi-5/0-47,gi-13/0-89)#
FTOS

476 | Interfaces
 Related
interface range Configure a range of command (bulk configuration)
Commands
interface range macro (define) Define a macro for an interface range (bulk configuration)

interface vlan
ces Configure a VLAN. You can configure up to 4094 VLANs.

Syntax interface vlan vlan-id

To delete a VLAN, use the no interface vlan vlan-id command.

Parameters
vlan-id Enter a number as the VLAN Identifier.
Range: 1 to 4094.

Defaults Not configured, except for the Default VLAN, which is configured as VLAN 1.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Support for 4093 VLANs on E-Series ExaScale. Prior releases supported 2094.
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 17-17. interface vlan Command Example

FTOS(conf)#int vlan 3
FTOS(conf-if-vl-3)#

Usage For more information on VLANs and the commands to configure them, refer to Virtual LAN (VLAN)
Information Commands.

FTP, TFTP, and SNMP operations are not supported on a VLAN. MAC ACLs are not supported in
VLANs. IP ACLs are supported. See Chapter 9, Access Control Lists (ACL).

Related
interface Configure a physical interface.
Commands
interface loopback Configure a loopback interface.
interface null Configure a null interface.
interface port-channel Configure a port channel group.
show vlan Display the current VLAN configuration on the switch.
shutdown Disable/Enable the VLAN.
tagged Add a Layer 2 interface to a VLAN as a tagged interface.
untagged Add a Layer 2 interface to a VLAN as an untagged interface.

Interfaces | 477
 ipg (10 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces)
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

e Set the Inter-packet Gap for traffic on 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface.

Syntax ipg {ieee-802.3ae | shrink}

To return to the default of averaging the IPG, enter no ipg {shrink | ieee-802.3ae}

Parameters
ieee-802.3ae Enter the keyword ieee-802.3ae to set the IPG to 12 (12-15) bytes (packet size
dependent)
shrink Enter the keyword shrink to set the IPG to 8 (8-11) bytes (packet size dependent).

Defaults averaging the IPG

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series
History

Usage For 10 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces only.

Information
IPG equals 96 bits times from end of the previous packet to start of the pre-amble of the next packet.

keepalive
ces On SONET interfaces, send keepalive packets periodically to keep an interface alive when it is not
transmitting data.

Syntax keepalive [seconds]

To stop sending SONET keepalive packets, enter no keepalive.

Parameters
seconds (OPTIONAL) For SONET interfaces with PPP encapsulation enabled, enter the number of
seconds between keepalive packets.
Range: 0 to 23767
Default: 10 seconds

Defaults Enabled

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.2 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage When you configure keepalive, the system sends a self-addressed packet out of the configured
Information interface to verify that the far end of a WAN link is up. When you configure no keepalive, the system
does not send keepalive packets and so the local end of a WAN link remains up even if the remote end
is down.

478 | Interfaces
lfs enable
e Enable Link Fault Signaling (LFS) on 10 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces only.

Syntax lfs enable

To disable LFS, enter no lfs enable.

Defaults Enabled.

Command Modes INTERFACE (10 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces only)

Command
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series
History

Usage If there is a failure on the link, FTOS brings down the interface. The interface will stay down until the
Information link failure signal stops.

Note: On TeraScale line cards, LFS is always enabled by default.

link debounce-timer
e Assign the debounce time for link change notification on this interface.

Syntax link debounce [milliseconds]

Parameters
milliseconds Enter the time to delay link status change notification on this interface.
Range: 100-5000 ms
• Default for copper is 3100 ms
• Default for fiber is 100 ms

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Usage Changes do not affect any ongoing debounces. The timer changes take affect from the next debounce
Information onward.

monitor
ces Monitor counters on a single interface or all interfaces on a line card. The screen is refreshed every 5
seconds and the CLI prompt disappears.

Syntax monitor interface [interface]

To disable monitoring and return to the CLI prompt, press the q key.

Interfaces | 479
 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For an 100/1000 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For the management port, enter the keyword managementethernet followed
by the slot (0-1) and the port (0).
• For SONET interface types, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage The delta column displays changes since the last screen refresh.
Information

Example Figure 17-18. monitor Command Example of a Single Interface

systest-3 Monitor time: 00:00:06 Refresh Intvl.: 2s Time: 03:26:26

Interface: Gi 0/3, Enabled, Link is Up, Linespeed is 1000 Mbit

Traffic statistics: Current Rate Delta

Input bytes: 9069828 43 Bps 86
Output bytes: 606915800 43 Bps 86
Input packets: 54001 0 pps 1
Output packets: 9401589 0 pps 1
64B packets: 67 0 pps 0
Over 64B packets: 49166 0 pps 1
Over 127B packets: 350 0 pps 0
Over 255B packets: 1351 0 pps 0
Over 511B packets: 286 0 pps 0
Over 1023B packets: 2781 0 pps 0
Error statistics:
Input underruns: 0 0 pps 0
Input giants: 0 0 pps 0
Input throttles: 0 0 pps 0
Input CRC: 0 0 pps 0
Input IP checksum: 0 0 pps 0
Input overrun: 0 0 pps 0
Output underruns: 0 0 pps 0
Output throttles: 0 0 pps 0

m - Change mode c - Clear screen

l - Page up a - Page down
T - Increase refresh interval t - Decrease refresh interval
q - Quit

480 | Interfaces
 Figure 17-19. monitor Command Example of All Interfaces on a Line Card
systest-3 Monitor time: 00:01:31 Refresh Intvl.: 2s Time: 03:54:14

Interface Link In Packets [delta] Out Packets

[delta]
Gi 0/0 Down 0 0 0 0
Gi 0/1 Down 0 0 0 0
Gi 0/2 Up 61512 52 66160 42
Gi 0/3 Up 63086 20 9405888 24
Gi 0/4 Up 14697471418 2661481 13392989657
2661385
Gi 0/5 Up 3759 3 161959604 832816
Gi 0/6 Up 4070 3 8680346 5
Gi 0/7 Up 61934 34 138734357 72
Gi 0/8 Up 61427 1 59960 1
Gi 0/9 Up 62039 53 104239232 3
Gi 0/10 Up 17740044091 372 7373849244 79
Gi 0/11 Up 18182889225 44 7184747584 138
Gi 0/12 Up 18182682056 0 3682 1
Gi 0/13 Up 18182681434 43 6592378911 144
Gi 0/14 Up 61349 55 86281941 15
Gi 0/15 Up 59808 58 62060 27
Gi 0/16 Up 59889 1 61616 1
Gi 0/17 Up 0 0 14950126 81293
Gi 0/18 Up 0 0 0 0
Gi 0/19 Down 0 0 0 0
Gi 0/20 Up 62734 54 62766 18
Gi 0/21 Up 60198 9 200899 9
Gi 0/22 Up 17304741100 3157554 10102508511
1114221
Gi 0/23 Up 17304769659 3139507 7133354895
523329

m - Change mode c - Clear screen

b - Display bytes r - Display pkts/bytes per sec
l - Page up a - Page down
T - Increase refresh interval t - Decrease refresh interval
q - Quit

Table 17-2. monitor Command Menu Options

Key Description
systest-3 Displays the host name assigned to the system.
monitor time Displays the amount of time since the monitor command was entered.
time Displays the amount of time the chassis is up (since last reboot).
m Change the view from a single interface to all interfaces on the line card or visa-versa.
c Refresh the view.
b Change the counters displayed from Packets on the interface to Bytes.
r Change the [delta] column from change in the number of packets/bytes in the last interval to
rate per second.
l Change the view to next interface on the line card, or if in the line card mode, the next line
card in the chassis.
a Change the view to the previous interface on the line card, or if the line card mode, the
previous line card in the chassis.
T Increase the screen refresh rate.
t Decrease the screen refresh rate.
q Return to the CLI prompt.

Interfaces | 481
 mtu
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Set the maximum Link MTU (frame size) for an Ethernet interface.

Syntax mtu value

To return to the default MTU value, enter no mtu.

Parameters
value Enter a maximum frame size in bytes.
Range: 594 to 9252
Default: 1554

Defaults 1554

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.4 Introduced on S-Series
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage If the packet includes a Layer 2 header, the difference between the link MTU and IP MTU (ip mtu
Information command) must be enough bytes to include the Layer 2 header:
• On C-Series, the IP MTU will get adjusted automatically when the Layer 2 MTU is configured
with the mtu command.
• On the E-Series, you must compensate for a Layer 2 header when configuring IP MTU and link
MTU on an Ethernet interface. Use the ip mtu command.
When you enter the no mtu command, FTOS reduces the IP MTU value to 1536 bytes. On the
E-Series, to return the IP MTU value to the default, enter no ip mtu.

Link MTU and IP MTU considerations for port channels and VLANs are as follows.
port channels:
• All members must have the same link MTU value and the same IP MTU value.
• The port channel link MTU and IP MTU must be less than or equal to the link MTU and IP MTU
values configured on the channel members.
Example: if the members have a link MTU of 2100 and an IP MTU 2000, the port channel’s MTU
values cannot be higher than 2100 for link MTU or 2000 bytes for IP MTU.

VLANs:
• All members of a VLAN must have same IP MTU value.
• Members can have different Link MTU values. Tagged members must have a link MTU 4 bytes
higher than untagged members to account for the packet tag.
• The VLAN link MTU and IP MTU must be less than or equal to the link MTU and IP MTU values
configured on the VLAN members.

Example The VLAN contains tagged members with Link MTU of 1522 and IP MTU of 1500 and untagged
members with Link MTU of 1518 and IP MTU of 1500. The VLAN’s Link MTU cannot be higher
than 1518 bytes and its IP MTU cannot be higher than 1500 bytes.

482 | Interfaces
 Table 17-3. Difference between Link MTU and IP MTU

Layer 2 Overhead Link MTU and IP MTU Delta

Ethernet (untagged) 18 bytes
VLAN Tag 22 bytes
Untagged Packet with VLAN-Stack Header 22 bytes
Tagged Packet with VLAN-Stack Header 26 bytes

negotiation auto
ces Enable auto-negotiation on an interface.

Syntax negotiation auto

To disable auto-negotiation, enter no negotiation auto.

Defaults Enabled.

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage This command is available on C-Series and S-Series 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet interfaces, and on
Information TeraScale 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet line cards.

The no negotiation auto command is only available if you first manually set the speed of a port to
10Mbits or 100Mbits.

The negotiation auto command provides a mode option for configuring an individual port to
forced-master/forced slave once auto-negotiation is enabled

Note: The mode option is not available on non-10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet line cards.

Figure 17-20. negotiation auto Master/Slave Example

FTOS(conf)# int gi 0/0
FTOS(conf-if)#neg auto
FTOS(conf-if-autoneg)# ?

end Exit from configuration mode

exit Exit from autoneg configuration mode
mode Specify autoneg mode
no Negate a command or set its defaults
show Show autoneg configuration information
FTOS(conf-if-autoneg)#mode ?
forced-master Force port to master mode
forced-slave Force port to slave mode
FTOS(conf-if-autoneg)#

Interfaces | 483
 If the mode option is not used, the default setting is slave. If you do not configure forced-master or
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

forced slave on a port, the port negotiates to either a master or a slave state. Port status is one of the
following:
• Forced-master
• Force-slave
• Master
• Slave
• Auto-neg Error—typically indicates that both ends of the node are configured with forced-master
or forced-slave.

Caution: Ensure that one end of your node is configured as forced-master and one is
configured as forced-slave. If both are configured the same (that is forced-master or
forced-slave), the show interfaces command will flap between an auto-neg-error and
forced-master/slave states

You can display master/slave settings with the show interfaces command.

Figure 17-21. Display Auto-negotiation Master/Slave Setting (partial)

FTOS#show interfaces configured

GigabitEthernet 13/18 is up, line protocol is up
Hardware is Force10Eth, address is 00:01:e8:05:f7:fc
Current address is 00:01:e8:05:f7:fc
Interface index is 474791997
Internet address is 1.1.1.1/24
MTU 1554 bytes, IP MTU 1500 bytes
LineSpeed 1000 Mbit, Mode full duplex, Master
ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00
Last clearing of “show interfaces” counters 00:12:42
Queueing strategy: fifo
Input Statistics:
...

Both sides of the link must have auto-negotiation enabled or disabled for the link to come up.

The following table details the possible speed and auto-negotiation combinations for a line between
two 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet interfaces.

Table 17-4. Auto-negotiation and Link Speed Combinations

Link Status between

Port 0 Port 1
Port 1 and Port 2
auto-negotiation enabled* auto-negotiation enabled*
Up at 1000 Mb/s
speed 1000 or auto speed 1000 or auto
auto-negotiation enabled auto-negotiation enabled
Up at 100 Mb/s
speed 100 speed 100
auto-negotiation disabled auto-negotiation disabled
Up at 100 Mb/s
speed 100 speed 100
auto-negotiation disabled auto-negotiation enabled
Down
speed 100 speed 100

484 | Interfaces
 Table 17-4. Auto-negotiation and Link Speed Combinations

Link Status between

Port 0 Port 1
Port 1 and Port 2
auto-negotiation enabled* auto-negotiation disabled
Down
speed 1000 or auto speed 100
* You cannot disable auto-negotiation when the speed is set to 1000 or auto.

Related
speed (for 10/100/1000 interfaces) Set the link speed to 10, 100, 1000 or auto-negotiate the speed.
Commands

portmode hybrid
ces Set a physical port or port-channel to accept both tagged and untagged frames. A port configured this
way is identified as a hybrid port in report displays.

Syntax portmode hybrid

To return a port to accept either tagged or untagged frames (non-hybrid), use the no portmode
hybrid command.

Defaults non-hybrid

Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-slot/port)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on E-Series and S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series only

Example Figure 17-22. portmode hybrid configuration example

FTOS(conf)#interface gi 7/0
FTOS(conf-if-gi-7/0)#portmode hybrid
FTOS(conf-if-gi-7/0)#interface vlan 10
FTOS(conf-if-vl-10)#untagged gi 7/0
FTOS(conf-if-vl-10)#interface vlan 20
FTOS(conf-if-vl-20)#tagged gi 7/0
FTOS(conf-if-vl-20)#

Usage The figure above sets a port as hybrid, makes the port a tagged member of VLAN 20, and an untagged
Information member of VLAN 10, which becomes the native VLAN of the port. The port will now accept:
• untagged frames and classify them as VLAN 10 frames
• VLAN 20 tagged frames
The next figure is an example show output with “Hybrid” as the newly added value for 802.1QTagged.
The options for this field are:
• True—port is tagged
• False—port is untagged
• Hybrid—port accepts both tagged and untagged frames

Interfaces | 485
 Example Figure 17-23. Display the Tagged Hybrid Interface
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS(conf-if-vl-20)#do show interfaces switchport

Name: GigabitEthernet 7/0
802.1QTagged: Hybrid
Vlan membership:
Vlan 10, Vlan 20
Native VlanId: 10
FTOS(conf-if-vl-20)#

The figure below is an example unconfiguration of the hybrid port using the no portmode hybrid
command.
Note: You must remove all other configurations on the port before you can remove the
hybrid configuration from the port.

Example Figure 17-24. Unconfigure the hybrid port

FTOS(conf-if-vl-20)#interface vlan 10
FTOS(conf-if-vl-10)#no untagged gi 7/0
FTOS(conf-if-vl-10)#interface vlan 20
FTOS(conf-if-vl-20)#no tagged gi 7/0
FTOS(conf-if-vl-20)#interface gi 7/0
FTOS(conf-if-gi-7/0)#no portmode hybrid
FTOS(conf-if-vl-20)#

Related
show interfaces switchport Display the configuration of switchport (Layer 2) interfaces on the switch.
Commands
switchport Place the interface in a Layer 2 mode.
vlan-stack trunk Specify an interface as a trunk port to the Stackable VLAN network.

rate-interval
ces Configure the traffic sampling interval on the selected interface.

Syntax rate-interval seconds

Parameters
seconds Enter the number of seconds for which to collect traffic data.
Range: 30 to 299 seconds
Note: Since polling occurs every 15 seconds, the number of seconds designated
here will round to the multiple of 15 seconds lower than the entered value. For
example, if 44 seconds is designated it will round to 30; 45 to 59 seconds will
round to 45, and so forth.

Defaults 299 seconds

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced

486 | Interfaces
 Usage The configured rate interval is displayed, along with the collected traffic data, in the output of show
Information interfaces commands.

Related
show interfaces Display information on physical and virtual interfaces.
Commands

show config
ces Display the interface configuration.

Syntax show config

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 17-25. show config Command Example for the INTERFACE Mode
FTOS(conf-if)#show conf
!
interface GigabitEthernet 1/7
no ip address
switchport
no shutdown
FTOS(conf-if)#

show config (from INTERFACE RANGE mode)

ces Display the bulk configured interfaces (interface range).

Syntax show config

Command Modes CONFIGURATION INTERFACE (conf-if-range)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Interfaces | 487
 Example Figure 17-26. show config (Bulk Configuration) Command Example
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS(conf)#interface range gigabitethernet 1/1 - 2

FTOS(conf-if-range-gi-1/1-2)#show config
!
interface GigabitEthernet 1/1
no ip address
switchport
no shutdown
!
interface GigabitEthernet 1/2
no ip address
switchport
no shutdown
FTOS(conf-if-range-gi-1/1-2)#

show interfaces
ces Display information on a specific physical interface or virtual interface.

Syntax show interfaces interface

Parameters
interface Enter one of the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword FastEthernet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by the
slot/port information.
• For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback followed by a number from 0 to
16383.
• For the management interface on an RPM, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet
followed by the slot/port information. The slot range is 0-1 and the port range is 0.
• For a Null interface, enter the keywords null 0.
• For a port channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale and ExaScale
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet followed by
the slot/port information.
• For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
SFP and SFP+ optics power detail is included the S60.
Version 8.2.1.2 Include SFP and SFP+ optics power detail in E-Series and C-Series output.
Version 8.2.1.0 Support for 4093 VLANs on E-Series ExaScale. Prior releases supported 2094.
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Output expanded to include SFP+ media in C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series

488 | Interfaces
 Version 6.4.1.0 Changed organization of display output
Version 6.3.1.0 Added Pluggable Media Type field in E-Series TeraScale output

Usage Use this show interfaces command for details on a specific interface. Use the show interfaces
linecard command for details on all interfaces on the designated line card.

Example Figure 17-27. show interfaces Command Example for 10G Port (E-Series)
FTOS#show interfaces tengigabitethernet 2/0
TenGigabitEthernet 2/0 is up, line protocol is up
Hardware is Force10Eth, address is 00:01:e8:05:f7:3a
Interface index is 100990998
Internet address is 213.121.22.45/28
MTU 1554 bytes, IP MTU 1500 bytes
LineSpeed 10000 Mbit
ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00
Last clearing of "show interfaces" counters 02:31:45
Queueing strategy: fifo
Input Statistics:
0 packets, 0 bytes
Input 0 IP Packets, 0 Vlans 0 MPLS
0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts
0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts
0 symbol errors, 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles
0 CRC, 0 IP Checksum, 0 overrun, 0 discarded
Output Statistics:
1 packets, 64 bytes, 0 underruns
0 Multicasts, 2 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts
0 IP Packets, 0 Vlans, 0 MPLS
0 throttles, 0 discarded
Rate info (interval 299 seconds):
Input 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate
Output 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate
Time since last interface status change: 00:00:27

Table 17-5. Lines in show interfaces Command Example

Line Description
TenGigabitEthernet 2/0... Displays the interface’s type, slot/port, and administrative and line protocol
status.
Hardware is... Displays the interface’s hardware information and its assigned MAC address.
Interface index... Displays the interface index number used by SNMP to identify the interface.
Internet address... States whether an IP address is assigned to the interface. If one is, that address
is displayed.
MTU 1554... Displays link and IP MTU information.
If the chassis is in Jumbo mode, this number can range from 576 to 9252.
LineSpeed Displays the interface’s line speed.
ARP type:... Displays the ARP type and the ARP timeout value for the interface.
Last clearing... Displays the time when the show interfaces counters where cleared.
Queuing strategy... States the packet queuing strategy. FIFO means first in first out.

Interfaces | 489
 Table 17-5. Lines in show interfaces Command Example (continued)
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Line Description
Input Statistics: Displays all the input statistics including:
• Number of packets and bytes into the interface
• Number of packets with IP headers, VLAN tagged headers and MPLS
headers
Note: The sum of the number of packets may not be as expected since
a VLAN tagged IP packet counts as both a VLAN packet and an IP
packet.
• Packet size and the number of those packets inbound to the interface
• Number of symbol errors, runts, giants, and throttles packets:
runts = number of packets that are less than 64B
giants = packets that are greater than the MTU size
throttles = packets containing PAUSE frames
• Number of CRC, IP Checksum, overrun, and discarded packets:
CRC = packets with CRC/FCS errors
IP Checksum = packets with IP Checksum errors
overrun = number of packets discarded due to FIFO overrun conditions
discarded = the sum of input symbol errors, runts, giants, CRC, IP
Checksum, and overrun packets discarded without any processing
Output Statistics: Displays output statistics sent out of the interface including:
• Number of packets, bytes and underruns out of the interface
packets = total number of packets
bytes = total number of bytes
underruns = number of packets with FIFO underrun conditions
• Number of Multicast, Broadcast and Unicast packets:
Multicasts = number of MAC multicast packets
Broadcasts = number of MAC broadcast packets
Unicasts = number of MAC unicast packets
• Number of IP, VLAN and MPLs packets:
IP Packets = number of IP packets
Vlans = number of VLAN tagged packets
MPLS = number of MPLS packets (found on a LSR interface)
• Number of throttles and discards packets:
throttles = packets containing PAUSE frames
discarded = number of packets discarded without any processing
Rate information... Estimate of the input and output traffic rate over a designated interval (30 to
299 seconds).
Traffic rate is displayed in bits, packets per second, and percent of line rate.
Time since... Elapsed time since the last interface status change (hh:mm:ss format).

490 | Interfaces
Example Figure 17-28. show interfaces Command Example for 10G (TeraScale)
FTOS#show interfaces tengigabitethernet 0/0
TenGigabitEthernet 3/0 is up, line protocol is up
Hardware is Force10Eth, address is 00:01:e8:41:77:c5
Current address is 00:01:e8:41:77:c5
Pluggable media present, XFP type is 10GBASE-SR
Medium is MultiRate, Wavelength is 850.00nm
XFP receive power reading is -2.4834
Interface index is 134545468
Port will not be disabled on partial SFM failure
MTU 9252 bytes, IP MTU 9234 bytes
LineSpeed 10000 Mbit
Flowcontrol rx on tx on
ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00
Last clearing of "show interface" counters 00:15:14
Queueing strategy: fifo
Input Statistics:
4410013700 packets, 282240876800 bytes
0 Vlans
4410013700 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts
0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts
0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts
0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles
0 CRC, 0 overrun, 0 discarded
Output Statistics:
857732 packets, 54894848 bytes, 0 underruns
857732 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts
0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts
24 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 857708 Unicasts
0 Vlans,0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions, 4409143619 wredDrops
Rate info (interval 30 seconds):
Input 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate
Output 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate
Time since last interface status change: 00:12:14
FTOS#

Table 17-6. Fields in show interfaces Command Example (TeraScale)

Line Description
TenGigabitEthernet 0/0... Interface type, slot/port and administrative and line protocol status.
Hardware is... Interface hardware information, assigned MAC address, and current address.
Pluggable media present... Present pluggable media wavelength, type, and rate. The error scenarios are:
• Wavelength, Non-qualified — FTOS ID is not present, but wavelength
information is available from XFP or SFP serial data
• Wavelength, F10 unknown— FTOS ID is present, but not able to
determine the optics type
• Unknown, Non-qualified— if wavelength is reading error, and F10 ID is
not present
Dell Networking allows unsupported SFP and XFP transceivers to be used,
but FTOS might not be able to retrieve some data about them. In that case,
typically when the output of this field is “Pluggable media present, Media
type is unknown”, the Medium and the XFP/SFP receive power reading data
might not be present in the output.
Interface index... Displays the interface index number used by SNMP to identify the interface.
Internet address... States whether an IP address is assigned to the interface. If one is, that address
is displayed.
MTU 1554... Displays link and IP MTU information.
LineSpeed Displays the interface’s line speed, duplex mode, and Slave
ARP type:... Displays the ARP type and the ARP timeout value for the interface.
Last clearing... Displays the time when the show interfaces counters where cleared.

Interfaces | 491
 Table 17-6. Fields in show interfaces Command Example (TeraScale)
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Line Description
Queuing strategy... States the packet queuing strategy. FIFO means first in first out.
Input Statistics: Displays all the input statistics including:
• Number of packets and bytes into the interface
• Number of packets with VLAN tagged headers
• Packet size and the number of those packets inbound to the interface
• Number of Multicast and Broadcast packets:
Multicasts = number of MAC multicast packets
Broadcasts = number of MAC broadcast packets
• Number of runts, giants, and throttles packets:
runts = number of packets that are less than 64B
giants = packets that are greater than the MTU size
throttles = packets containing PAUSE frames
• Number of CRC, overrun, and discarded packets:
CRC = packets with CRC/FCS errors
overrun = number of packets discarded due to FIFO overrun conditions
discarded = the sum of runts, giants, CRC, and overrun packets discarded
without any processing
Output Statistics: Displays output statistics sent out the interface including:
• Number of packets, bytes and underruns out of the interface
• Packet size and the number of those packets outbound to the interface
• Number of Multicast, Broadcast and Unicast packets:
Multicasts = number of MAC multicast packets
Broadcasts = number of MAC broadcast packets
Unicasts = number of MAC unicast packets
• Number of VLANs, throttles, discards, and collisions:
Vlans = number of VLAN tagged packets
throttles = packets containing PAUSE frames
discarded = number of packets discarded without any processing
collisions = number of packet collisions
wred=count both packets discarded in the MAC and in the
hardware-based queues
Rate information... Estimate of the input and output traffic rate over a designated interval (30 to
299 seconds)
Traffic rate is displayed in bits, packets per second, and percent of line rate.
Time since... Elapsed time since the last interface status change (hh:mm:ss format).

492 | Interfaces
 Example Figure 17-29. show interfaces Command Example for 1G SFP Interface
FTOS#show interfaces gigabitethernet 2/0
GigabitEthernet 2/0 is up, line protocol is down
Hardware is Force10Eth, address is 00:01:e8:41:77:95
Current address is 00:01:e8:41:77:95
Pluggable media present, SFP type is 1000BASE-SX
Wavelength is 850nm
Interface index is 100974648
Port will not be disabled on partial SFM failure
Internet address is not set
MTU 1554 bytes, IP MTU 1500 bytes
LineSpeed 1000 Mbit
Flowcontrol rx on tx on
ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00
Last clearing of "show interface" counters 1w0d5h
Queueing strategy: fifo
Input Statistics:
0 packets, 0 bytes
0 Vlans
0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts
0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts
0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts
0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles
0 CRC, 0 overrun, 0 discarded
Output Statistics:
0 packets, 0 bytes, 0 underruns
0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts
0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts
0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts
0 Vlans, 0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions, 0 wreddrops
Rate info (interval 299 seconds):
Input 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate
Output 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate
Time since last interface status change: 1w0d5h
FTOS#

Example Figure 17-30. show interfaces Command Example for 10G SFP+ Interface in C-Series
FTOS#show interfaces tengigabitethernet 0/44
TenGigabitEthernet 0/44 is down, line protocol is down
Hardware is Force10Eth, address is 00:01:e8:32:44:26
Current address is 00:01:e8:32:44:26
Pluggable media present, SFP+ type is 10GBASE-CU5M
Medium is MultiRate
Interface index is 45417732
FTOS#

Usage On the C-Series and S-Series, the interface counter “over 1023-byte pkts” does not increment for
Information packets in the range 9216 > x < 1023.

Related
show interfaces configured Display any interface with a non-default configuration.
Commands
show interfaces linecard Display information on all interfaces on a specific line card.
show interfaces phy
show interfaces rate Display information of either rate limiting or rate policing on the interface.
show interfaces switchport Display Layer 2 information about the interfaces.
show inventory (C-Series and Display the chassis type, components (including media), FTOS version
E-Series) including hardware identification numbers and configured protocols.
show inventory (S-Series) Display the S-Series switch type, components (including media), FTOS
version including hardware identification numbers and configured
protocols.
show ip interface Display Layer 3 information about the interfaces.

Interfaces | 493
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

show linecard Display the line card(s) status.

show range Display all interfaces configured using the interface range command.

show interfaces configured

ces Display any interface with a non-default configuration.

Syntax show interfaces configured

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.4.1.0 Changed organization of display output

Example Figure 17-31. show interfaces configured Command Output

FTOS#show interfaces configured
GigabitEthernet 13/18 is up, line protocol is up
Hardware is Force10Eth, address is 00:01:e8:05:f7:fc
Current address is 00:01:e8:05:f7:fc
Interface index is 474791997
Internet address is 1.1.1.1/24
MTU 1554 bytes, IP MTU 1500 bytes
LineSpeed 1000 Mbit, Mode full duplex, Master
ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00
Last clearing of "show interfaces" counters 00:12:42
Queueing strategy: fifo
Input Statistics:
10 packets, 10000 bytes
0 Vlans
0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts
0 over 255-byte pkts, 10 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts
0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts
0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles
0 CRC, 0 overrun, 0 discarded
Output Statistics:
1 packets, 64 bytes, 0 underruns
1 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts
0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts
0 Multicasts, 1 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts
0 Vlans, 0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions
Rate info (interval 299 seconds):
Input 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate
Output 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate
Time since last interface status change: 00:04:59
FTOS#

Related
show interfaces Display information on a specific physical interface or virtual interface.
Commands

494 | Interfaces
show interfaces dampening
ces Display interface dampening information.

Syntax show interfaces dampening [[interface] [summary] [detail]]

Parameters
interface (Optional) Enter one of the following keywords and slot/port or number
information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
GigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a port channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel
followed by a number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
• E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale and ExaScale
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/
port information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to display the current
summary of dampening data, including the number of interfaces configured
and the number of interfaces suppressed, if any.
detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to display detailed interface
dampening data.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced

Example Figure 17-32. show interfaces dampening Command Example

FTOS#show interfaces dampening

Interface Supp Flaps Penalty Half-Life Reuse Suppress Max-Sup
State
Gi 3/2 Up 0 0 20 800 4500 120
Gi 3/10 Up 0 0 5 750 2500 20
FTOS#

Related
dampening Configure dampening on an interface
Commands
show interfaces Display information on a specific physical interface or virtual interface.
show interfaces configured Display any interface with a non-default configuration.

Interfaces | 495
 show interfaces debounce
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

e Display information on interfaces with debounce timer configured.

Syntax show interfaces debounce interface

Parameters
interface Enter one of the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Related
show interfaces Display information on a specific physical interface or virtual interface.
Commands

show interfaces description

ces Display the descriptions configured on the interface.

Syntax show interfaces [interface] description

Parameters
interface Enter one of the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword FastEthernet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by the
slot/port information.
• For Loopback interfaces, enter the keyword loopback followed by a number from 0 to
16383.
• For the management interface on the RPM, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet
followed by the slot/port information. The slot range is 0-1 and the port range is 0.
• For the Null interface, enter the keywords null 0.
• For a port channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale and ExaScale
• For SONET interfaces, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet followed
by the slot/port information.
• For VLAN interfaces, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

496 | Interfaces
 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Support for 4093 VLANs on E-Series ExaScale. Prior releases supported 2094.
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 17-33. show interfaces description Command Example

FTOS>
Interface OK? Status Protocol Description
GigabitEthernet 4/17 NO admin down down ***connected-to-host***
GigabitEthernet 4/18 NO admin down down ***connected-to-Tom***
GigabitEthernet 4/19 NO admin down down ***connected-to-marketing***
GigabitEthernet 4/20 NO admin down down ***connected-to-Bill***
GigabitEthernet 4/21 NO up down ***connected-to-Radius-Server***
GigabitEthernet 4/22 NO admin down down ***connected-to-Web-Server***
GigabitEthernet 4/23 NO admin down down ***connected-to-PC-client***
TenGigabitEthernet 6/0 NO admin down down
GigabitEthernet 8/0 YES up up
GigabitEthernet 8/1 YES up up
GigabitEthernet 8/2 YES up up
GigabitEthernet 8/3 YES up up
GigabitEthernet 8/4 YES up up
GigabitEthernet 8/5 YES up up
GigabitEthernet 8/6 YES up up
GigabitEthernet 8/7 YES up up
GigabitEthernet 8/8 YES up up
GigabitEthernet 8/9 YES up up
GigabitEthernet 8/10 YES up up
GigabitEthernet 8/11 YES up up
FTOS>

Table 17-7. show interfaces description Command Example Fields

Field Description
Interface Displays type of interface and associated slot and port number.
OK? Indicates if the hardware is functioning properly.
Status States whether the interface is enabled (up) or disabled (administratively down).
Protocol States whether IP is enabled (up) or disabled (down) on the interface.
Description Displays the description (if any) manually configured for the interface.

Related
show interfaces Display information on a specific physical interface or virtual interface.
Commands

Interfaces | 497
 show interfaces linecard
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ce Display information on all interfaces on a specific line card.

Syntax show interfaces linecard slot-number

Parameters
slot-number Enter a number for the line card slot.
C-Series Range: 0-7 for C300; 0–3 for C150
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on the E1200/1200i, 0 to 6 on the E600/600i, 0 to 5 on the
E300

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.1.1.2 Introduced support on E-Series ExaScale E600i
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage Figure 17-34 shows a line card that has an XFP interface. The type, medium, wavelength, and receive
power details are displayed. When a device that is not certified by Dell Networking is inserted, it might
work, but its details might not be readable by FTOS and not displayed here.

Example Figure 17-34. show interfaces linecard Command Example (in C150)
FTOS#show interfaces linecard 0
TenGigabitEthernet 0/0 is down, line protocol is down
Hardware is Force10Eth, address is 00:01:e8:51:b2:d4
Current address is 00:01:e8:51:b2:d4
Pluggable media present, XFP type is 10GBASE-SR
Medium is MultiRate, Wavelength is 850.00nm
XFP receive power reading is -2.3538
Interface index is 33883138
Internet address is not set
MTU 1554 bytes, IP MTU 1500 bytes
LineSpeed 10000 Mbit
ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00
Last clearing of "show interface" counters 20:16:29
Queueing strategy: fifo
Input Statistics:
0 packets, 0 bytes
0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts
0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts
0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts
0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles
0 CRC, 0 overrun, 0 discarded
Output Statistics:
0 packets, 0 bytes, 0 underruns
0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts
--More--

Related
show interfaces Display information on a specific physical interface or virtual interface.
Commands

498 | Interfaces
show interfaces phy
ces Display auto-negotiation and link partner information.

Syntax show interfaces gigabitethernet slot/port phy

Parameters
gigabitethernet Enter the keyword gigabitethernet followed by the slot/port information.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
Version 6.5.4.0 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 17-35. show interfaces gigabitethernet phy Command Example (Partial)
FTOS#show int gigabitethernet 1/0 phy
Mode Control:
SpeedSelection: 10b
AutoNeg: ON
Loopback: False
PowerDown: False
Isolate: False
DuplexMode: Full
Mode Status:
AutoNegComplete: False
RemoteFault: False
LinkStatus: False
JabberDetect: False
AutoNegotation Advertise:
100MegFullDplx: True
100MegHalfDplx: True
10MegFullDplx: False
10MegHalfDplx: True
Asym Pause: False
Sym Pause: False
AutoNegotiation Remote Partner's Ability:
100MegFullDplx: False
100MegHalfDplx: False
10MegFullDplx: False
10MegHalfDplx: False
Asym Pause: False
Sym Pause: False
AutoNegotiation Expansion:
ParallelDetectionFault: False
...

Table 17-8. Lines in show interfaces gigabitethernet Command Example

Line Description
Mode Control Indicates if auto negotiation is enabled. If so, indicates the selected speed and
duplex.
Mode Status Displays auto negotiation fault information. When the interface completes
auto negotiation successfully, the autoNegComplete field and the linkstatus
field read “True.”
AutoNegotiation Advertise Displays the control words advertised by the local interface during
negotiation. Duplex is either half or full. Asym- and Sym Pause is the types of
flow control supported by the local interface.

Interfaces | 499
 Table 17-8. Lines in show interfaces gigabitethernet Command Example
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Line Description
AutoNegotiation Remote Displays the control words advertised by the remote interface during
Partner’s Ability negotiation. Duplex is either half or full. Asym- and Sym Pause is the types of
flow control supported by the remote interface
AutoNegotiation Expansion ParallelDetectionFault is the handshaking scheme in which the link partner
continuously transmit an “idle” data packet using the Fast Ethernet MLT-3
waveform. Equipment that does not support auto-negotiation must be
configured to exactly match the mode of operation as the link partner or else
no link can be established.
1000Base-T Control 1000Base-T requires auto-negotiation. The IEEE Ethernet standard does not
support setting a speed to 1000 Mbps with the speed command without
auto-negotiation. E-Series line cards support both full-duplex and half-duplex
1000BaseT.
Phy Specific Control Values are:
0 - Manual MDI
1 - Manual MDIX
2 - N/A
3 - Auto MDI/MDIX
Phy Specific Status Displays PHY-specific status information. Cable length represents a rough
estimate in meters:
0 - < 50 meters
1 - 50 - 80 meters
2 - 80 - 110 meters
3 - 110 - 140 meters
4 - 140 meters.
Link Status:
Up or Down
Speed:
Auto
1000MB
100MB
10MB

Related
show interfaces Display information on a specific physical interface or virtual interface.
Commands

show interfaces stack-unit

s Display information on all interfaces on a specific S-Series stack member.

Syntax show interfaces stack-unit unit-number

Parameters
unit-number Enter the stack member number
Unit ID range:
S60: 0-11
all other S-Series: 0-7

500 | Interfaces
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series only

Example Figure 17-36. show interfaces status Command Example

FTOS#show interfaces stack-unit 0
GigabitEthernet 0/1 is down, line protocol is down
Hardware is Force10Eth, address is 00:01:e8:4c:f2:82
Current address is 00:01:e8:4c:f2:82
Pluggable media not present
Interface index is 34129154
Internet address is not set
MTU 1554 bytes, IP MTU 1500 bytes
LineSpeed auto, Mode auto
ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00
Last clearing of "show interface" counters 3w0d17h
Queueing strategy: fifo
Input Statistics:
0 packets, 0 bytes
5144 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts
0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts
0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts
0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles
0 CRC, 0 overrun, 0 discarded
Output Statistics:
0 packets, 0 bytes, 0 underruns
0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts
0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts
0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts
0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions
Rate info (interval 299 seconds):
Input 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate
Output 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate
Time since last interface status change: 3w0d17h

GigabitEthernet 0/2 is down, line protocol is down

Hardware is Force10Eth, address is 00:01:e8:4c:f2:83
Current address is 00:01:e8:4c:f2:83
!-------------output truncated ----------------!

Related
show hardware stack-unit Display data plane and management plane input/output statistics.
Commands
show interfaces Display information on a specific physical interface or virtual interface.

Interfaces | 501
 show interfaces status
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Display a summary of interface information or specify a line card slot and interface to display status
information on that specific interface only.

Syntax show interfaces [interface | linecard slot-number] status

Parameters
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following keywords and slot/port or number
information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
linecard slot-number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword linecard followed by the slot number.
C-Series Range: 0 to 7 for C300; 0–3 for C150
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on the E1200, 0 to 6 on the E600, 0 to 5 on the E300

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 17-37. show interfaces status Command Example

FTOS#show interfaces status
Port Description Status Speed Duplex Vlan
Gi 0/0 Up 1000 Mbit Auto --
Gi 0/1 Down Auto Auto 1
Gi 0/2 Down Auto Auto 1
Gi 0/3 Down Auto Auto --
Gi 0/4 Force10Port Up 1000 Mbit Auto 30-130
Gi 0/5 Down Auto Auto --
Gi 0/6 Down Auto Auto --
Gi 0/7 Up 1000 Mbit Auto 1502,1504,1506-1508,1602
Gi 0/8 Down Auto Auto --
Gi 0/9 Down Auto Auto --
Gi 0/10 Down Auto Auto --
Gi 0/11 Down Auto Auto --
Gi 0/12 Down Auto Auto --
Gi 0/13 Down Auto Auto --
Gi 0/14 Down Auto Auto --
Gi 0/15 Down Auto Auto --
FTOS#

Related
show interfaces Display information on a specific physical interface or virtual interface.
Commands

502 | Interfaces
show interfaces switchport
ces Display only virtual and physical interfaces in Layer 2 mode. This command displays the Layer 2
mode interfaces’ IEEE 802.1Q tag status and VLAN membership.

Syntax show interfaces switchport [interface [linecard slot-number] | stack-unit unit-id ]

Parameters
interface Enter one of the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed
by the slot/port information.
• For a port channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a
number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale and ExaScale
• For SONET interfaces, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information. This keyword is only available on E-Series and C-Series.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• Enter the keyword backup to view the backup interface for this interface.
linecard (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword linecard followed by the slot number. This option is
slot-number available only on E-Series and C-Series.
C-Series Range: 0-7 for C300; 0–3 for C150
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on the E1200, 0 to 6 on the E600, 0 to 5 on the E300
stack-unit (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword stack-unit followed by the stack member number.
unit-id This option is available only on S-Series.
Unit ID range:
S60: 0-11
all other S-Series: 0-7

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Support for 4093 VLANs on E-Series ExaScale
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for hybrid port/native VLAN, introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Interfaces | 503
 Example Figure 17-38. show interfaces switchport Command Example
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show interfaces switchport

Name: GigabitEthernet 13/0
802.1QTagged: Hybrid
Vlan membership:
Vlan 2, Vlan 20
Native VlanId: 20

Name: GigabitEthernet 13/1

802.1QTagged: True
Vlan membership:
Vlan 2

Name: GigabitEthernet 13/2

802.1QTagged: True
Vlan membership:
Vlan 2

Name: GigabitEthernet 13/3

802.1QTagged: True
Vlan membership:
Vlan 2

--More--

Table 17-9. Items in show interfaces switchport Command Example

Items Description
Name Displays the interface’s type, slot and port number.
802.1QTagged Displays whether if the VLAN tagged (“True”), untagged (“False”), or hybrid
(“Hybrid”, which supports both untagged and tagged VLANs by port 13/0.
Vlan membership Lists the VLANs to which the interface is a member. Starting with FTOS 7.6.1,
this field can display native VLAN membership by port 13/0.

Related
interface Configure a physical interface on the switch.
Commands
show ip interface Displays Layer 3 information about the interfaces.
show interfaces Display information on a specific physical interface or virtual interface.
show interfaces transceiver Display the physical status and operational status of an installed transceiver.
The output also displays the transceiver’s serial number.

show interfaces transceiver

ces Display the physical status and operational status of an installed transceiver. The output also displays
the transceiver’s serial number.

Syntax show interfaces [gigabitethernet | tengigabitethernet] slot/port transceiver

Parameters
gigabitethernet For a 10/100/1000 interface, enter the keyword gigabitethernet followed by
the slot/port information.
tengigabitethernet For a 10G interface, enter the keyword tengigabitethernet followed by the
slot/port information.

504 | Interfaces
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Output augmented with diagnostic data for pluggable media
Version 7.7.1.0 Removed three fields in output: Vendor Name, Vendor OUI, Vendor PN
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
Version 6.5.4.0 Introduced on E-Series

Usage See the figure below for an example screenshot, and see the following table or a description of the
output fields.

For related commands, see the Related Commands section, below, and see the Debugging and
Diagnostics chapter for your platform at the end of this book.

Interfaces | 505
 Example Figure 17-39. show interfaces gigabitethernet transceiver Command Example
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show interfaces gigabitethernet 1/0 transceiver

SFP is present.

SFP 0 Serial Base ID fields

SFP 0 Id = 0x03
SFP 0 Ext Id = 0x04
SFP 0 Connector = 0x07
SFP 0 Transciever Code = 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x01 0x20 0x40 0x0c 0x05
SFP 0 Encoding = 0x01
SFP 0 BR Nominal = 0x15
SFP 0 Length(9um) Km = 0x00
SFP 0 Length(9um) 100m = 0x00
SFP 0 Length(50um) 10m = 0x1e
SFP 0 Length(62.5um) 10m = 0x0f
SFP 0 Length(Copper) 10m = 0x00
SFP 0 Vendor Rev = A
SFP 0 Laser Wavelength = 850 nm
SFP 0 CheckCodeBase = 0x66
SFP 0 Serial Extended ID fields
SFP 0 Options= 0x00 0x12
SFP 0 BR max= 0
SFP 0 BR min= 0
SFP 0 Vendor SN= P5N1ACE
SFP 0 Datecode = 040528
SFP 0 CheckCodeExt = 0x5b

SFP 1 Diagnostic Information

===================================
SFP 1 Rx Power measurement type = Average
===================================
SFP 1 Temp High Alarm threshold = 95.000C
SFP 1 Voltage High Alarm threshold = 3.900V
SFP 1 Bias High Alarm threshold = 17.000mA
SFP 1 TX Power High Alarm threshold = 0.631mW
SFP 1 RX Power High Alarm threshold = 1.259mW
SFP 1 Temp Low Alarm threshold = -25.000C
SFP 1 Voltage Low Alarm threshold = 2.700V
SFP 1 Bias Low Alarm threshold = 1.000mA
SFP 1 TX Power Low Alarm threshold = 0.067mW
SFP 1 RX Power Low Alarm threshold = 0.010mW
===================================
SFP 1 Temp High Warning threshold = 90.000C
SFP 1 Voltage High Warning threshold = 3.700V
SFP 1 Bias High Warning threshold = 14.000mA
SFP 1 TX Power High Warning threshold = 0.631mW
SFP 1 RX Power High Warning threshold = 0.794mW
SFP 1 Temp Low Warning threshold = -20.000C
SFP 1 Voltage Low Warning threshold = 2.900V
SFP 1 Bias Low Warning threshold = 2.000mA
SFP 1 TX Power Low Warning threshold = 0.079mW
SFP 1 RX Power Low Warning threshold = 0.016mW
===================================
SFP 1 Temperature = 39.930C
SFP 1 Voltage = 3.293V
SFP 1 Tx Bias Current = 6.894mA
SFP 1 Tx Power = 0.328mW
SFP 1 Rx Power = 0.000mW
===================================
SFP 1 Data Ready state Bar = False
SFP 1 Rx LOS state = True
SFP 1 Tx Fault state = False
SFP 1 Rate Select state = False
SFP 1 RS state = False
SFP 1 Tx Disable state = False
===================================
SFP 1 Temperature High Alarm Flag = False
SFP 1 Voltage High Alarm Flag = False
SFP 1 Tx Bias High Alarm Flag = False
SFP 1 Tx Power High Alarm Flag = False
SFP 1 Rx Power High Alarm Flag = False
SFP 1 Temperature Low Alarm Flag = False
SFP 1 Voltage Low Alarm Flag = False
SFP 1 Tx Bias Low Alarm Flag = False
SFP 1 Tx Power Low Alarm Flag = False
SFP 1 Rx Power Low Alarm Flag = True
===================================
!-------output truncated -------------------------!

506 | Interfaces
Table 17-10. Diagnostic Data in show interfaces transceiver

Line Description
Rx Power measurement type Output depends on the vendor, typically either “Average” or “OMA”
(Receiver optical modulation amplitude).
Temp High Alarm threshold Factory-defined setting, typically in Centigrade. Value differs between SFPs
and SFP+.
Voltage High Alarm threshold Displays the interface index number used by SNMP to identify the interface.
Bias High Alarm threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
TX Power High Alarm Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
threshold
RX Power High Alarm Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
threshold
Temp Low Alarm threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
Voltage Low Alarm threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
Bias Low Alarm threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
TX Power Low Alarm Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
threshold
RX Power Low Alarm Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
threshold
Temp High Warning threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
Voltage High Warning Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
threshold
Bias High Warning threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
TX Power High Warning Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
threshold
RX Power High Warning Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
threshold
Temp Low Warning threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
Voltage Low Warning Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
threshold
Bias Low Warning threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
TX Power Low Warning Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
threshold
Power Low Warning threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
Temperature Current temperature of the sfps.If this temperature crosses Temp High alarm/
warning thresholds, then the temperature high alarm/warning flag is set to
true.
Voltage Current voltage of the sfps.If this voltage crosses voltage high alarm/warning
thresholds, then the voltage high alarm/warning flag is set to true.
Tx Bias Current Present Tx bias current of the SFP. If this crosses bias high alarm/warning
thresholds, then the tx bias high alarm/warning flag is set to true. If it falls
below the low alarm/warning thresholds, then the tx bias low alarm/warning
flag is set to true.

Interfaces | 507
 Table 17-10. Diagnostic Data in show interfaces transceiver (continued)
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Line Description
Tx Power Present Tx power of the SFP. If this crosses Tx power alarm/warning
thresholds, then the Tx power high alarm/warning flag is set to true. If it falls
below the low alarm/warning thresholds, then the Tx power low alarm/
warning flag is set to true.
Rx Power Present Rx power of the SFP. This value is either average Rx power or
OMA.This depends upon on the Rx Power measurement type displayed
above. If this crosses Rx power alarm/warning thresholds, then the Rx power
high alarm/warning flag is set to true. If it falls below the low alarm/warning
thresholds, then the Rx power low alarm/warning flag is set to true.
Data Ready state Bar This field indicates that the transceiver has achieved power up and data is
ready. This is set to true if data is ready to be sent, false if data is being
transmitted.
Rx LOS state This is the digital state of the Rx_LOS output pin.This is set to true if the
operating status is down.
Tx Fault state This is the digital state of the Tx Fault output pin.
Rate Select state This is the digital state of the SFP rate_select input pin.
RS state This is the reserved digital state of the pin AS(1) per SFF-8079 and RS(1) per
SFF-8431.
Tx Disable state If the admin status of the port is down then this flag will be set to true.
Temperature High Alarm Flag This can be either true/False and it depends on the Current Temperature value
displayed above.
Voltage High Alarm Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current voltage value
displayed above.
Tx Bias High Alarm Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the present Tx bias current value
displayed above.
Tx Power High Alarm Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Tx power value
displayed above.
Rx Power High Alarm Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Rx power value
displayed above.
Temperature Low Alarm Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Temperature value
displayed above.
Voltage Low Alarm Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current voltage value
displayed above.
Tx Bias Low Alarm Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Tx bias current value
displayed above.
Tx Power Low Alarm Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Tx power value
displayed above.
Rx Power Low Alarm Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Rx power value
displayed above.
Temperature High Warning This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Temperature value
Flag displayed above.
Voltage High Warning Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current voltage value
displayed above.
Tx Bias High Warning Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Tx bias current value
displayed above.

508 | Interfaces
 Table 17-10. Diagnostic Data in show interfaces transceiver (continued)

Line Description
Tx Power High Warning Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Tx power value
displayed above.
Rx Power High Warning Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Tx power value
displayed above.
Temperature Low Warning This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Temperature value
Flag displayed above.
Voltage Low Warning Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current voltage value
displayed above.
Tx Bias Low Warning Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the present Tx bias current value
displayed above.
Tx Power Low Warning Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Tx power value
displayed above.
Rx Power Low Warning Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Rx power value
displayed above.

Related
interface Configure a physical interface on the switch.
Commands
show ip interface Displays Layer 3 information about the interfaces.
show interfaces Display information on a specific physical interface or virtual interface.
show inventory (C-Series Display the chassis type, components (including media), FTOS version
and E-Series) including hardware identification numbers and configured protocols.
show inventory (S-Series) Display the S-Series switch type, components (including media), FTOS version
including hardware identification numbers and configured protocols.

show range
ces Display all interfaces configured using the interface range command.

Syntax show range

Command Mode INTERFACE RANGE (config-if-range)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Support for 4093 VLANs on E-Series ExaScale
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced

Example Figure 17-40. show range Command Example

FTOS(conf-if-range-so-2/0-1,fa-0/0)#show range
interface sonet 2/0 - 1
interface fastethernet 0/0
FTOS(conf-if-range-so-2/0-1,fa-0/0)#

Interfaces | 509
 Related
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

interface Configure a physical interface on the switch.

Commands
show ip interface Displays Layer 3 information about the interfaces.
show interfaces Display information on a specific physical interface or virtual interface.

shutdown
ces Disable an interface.

Syntax shutdown
To activate an interface, enter no shutdown.

Defaults The interface is disabled.

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Usage The shutdown command marks a physical interface as unavailable for traffic. To discover if an
Information interface is disabled, use the show ip interface brief command. Disabled interfaces are listed as down.

Disabling a VLAN or a port channel causes different behavior. When a VLAN is disabled, the Layer 3
functions within that VLAN are disabled. Layer 2 traffic continues to flow. Entering the shutdown
command on a port channel disables all traffic on the port channel and the individual interfaces within
the port channel. To enable a port channel, you must enter no shutdown on the port channel interface
and at least one interface within that port channel.

The shutdown and description commands are the only commands that you can configure on an
interface that is a member of a port channel.

Related
interface port-channel Create a port channel interface.
Commands
interface vlan Create a VLAN.
Displays the interface routing status. Add the keyword brief to display a
show ip interface
table of interfaces and their status.

510 | Interfaces
speed (for 10/100/1000 interfaces)
ces Set the speed for 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet interfaces. Both sides of a link must be set to the same
speed (10/100/1000) or to auto or the link may not come upSyntax
speed {10 | 100 | 1000 | auto}
To return to the default setting, use the no speed {10 | 100 | 1000} command.

Parameters
10 Enter the keyword 10 to set the interface’s speed to 10 Mb/s.
100 Enter the keyword 100 to set the interface’s speed to 10/100 Mb/s.
1000 Enter the keyword 1000 to set the interface’s speed to 1000 Mb/s.
(Auto-negotiation is enabled. See negotiation auto for more information)
auto Enter the keyword auto to set the interface to auto-negotiate its speed.
(Auto-negotiation is enabled. See negotiation auto for more information)

Defaults auto

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Supported on LC-EH-GE-50P or the LC-EJ-GE-50P cards
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Usage This command is found on the 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet interfaces.

Information
With speed 1000 configured on a copper interface, the speed is not auto-negotiated. The interface will
operate only at 1000 Mbps.

With speed 100 configured on a copper interface, the speed is auto-negotiated. The interface will
operate at 10 Mbps or at 100 Mbps.

When auto is enabled, the system performs and automatic discovery to determine the optics installed
and configure the appropriate speed.

When you configure a speed for the 10/100/1000 interface, you should confirm negotiation auto
command setting. Both sides of the link should have auto-negotiation either enabled or disabled. For
speed settings of 1000 or auto, the software sets the link to auto-negotiation, and you cannot change
that setting.

Note: Starting with FTOS 7.8.1.0, when a copper SFP2 module with catalog number
GP-SFP2-1T is used in the S25P model of the S-Series, its speed can be manually set with the
speed command. When the speed is set to 10 or 100 Mbps, the duplex command can also be
executed.

Interfaces | 511
 Related
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

duplex (10/100 Configure duplex mode on physical interfaces with the speed set to 10/100.
Commands
Interfaces)
negotiation auto Enable or disable auto-negotiation on an interface.

speed (Management interface)

ce Set the speed for the Management interface.

Syntax speed {10 | 100 | auto}

To return to the default setting, use the no speed {10 | 100} command.

Parameters
10 Enter the keyword 10 to set the interface’s speed to 10 Mb/s.
100 Enter the keyword 100 to set the interface’s speed to 100 Mb/s.
auto Enter the keyword auto to set the interface to auto-negotiate its speed.

Defaults auto

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage This command is found on the Management interface only.

Information

Related
interface ManagementEthernet Configure the Management port on the system (either the Primary or
Commands
Standby RPM).
duplex (Management) Set the mode of the Management interface.
management route Configure a static route that points to the Management interface or a
forwarding router.

stack-unit module
s Pre-configure ports on 10G optical modules in optional slots to preserve configuration.

Syntax stack-unit {stack-unit id} module {module id}

Parameters
stack-unit id Enter the unit number of the stacked unit.
Range: 0 - 11
module id Enter the module id number of the optional slot.
Range: 0 - 1

Defaults None

Command Modes Configuration

512 | Interfaces
 Command
Version 8.3.3.7 Introduced on S-Series S60
History

Usage Pre-configuring the interfaces for the optical module preserves the configuration if/when an optical
Information module is removed. The optional 10G optical module is automatically recognized and the interfaces
are created when the module is inserted into the slot. However, if the system is not already configured
for the interfaces, when the module is removed the interfaces and their configurations are removed as
well.

switchport
ces Place the interface in Layer 2 mode.

Syntax switchport [backup interface {gigabit | tengigabit} slot/port]

To remove the interface from Layer 2 mode and place it in Layer 3 mode, enter no switchport. If a
switchport backup relationship exists, remove that relationship first.
To remove a switchport backup relationship created on this port, enter no switchport backup
interface {gigabit | tengigabit} slot/port].

Parameters
backup Use this option to configure a redundant Layer 2 link without using Spanning Tree. This
interface keyword configures a backup port so that if the primary port fails the backup port changes
to the up state. If the primary later comes up, it becomes the backup.
gigabit Enter this keyword if the backup port is a 1G port.
tengigabit Enter this keyword if the backup port is a 10G port.
slot/port Specify the line card and port number of the backup port.

Defaults Disabled (The interface is in Layer 3 mode.)

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.7.1.0 Added backup interface option.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage If an IP address or VRRP group is assigned to the interface, you cannot use the switchport command
Information for that interface. To use the switchport command on an interface, only the no ip address and no
shutdown statements must be listed in the show config for that command.

When you enable the switchport command, the interface is automatically added to the Default
VLAN.

To use the switchport backup interface command on a port, first execute the switchport
command on the port. For details, see the section Configuring Redundant Links in the Layer 2 chapter
of the FTOS Configuration Guide.

Interfaces | 513
 Related
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

interface port-channel Create a port channel interface.

Commands
show interfaces switchport Display information about switchport interfaces.

wanport
e Enable the WAN mode on a TenGigabitEthernet interface.

Syntax wanport
To disable the WAN Port, enter no wanport.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.1.1.2 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
History
pre-Version 6.2.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage The port must be in a shutdown state to change from LAN mode to WAN mode and vice-versa as
Information shown in the figure below.

For E-Series ExaScale systems, you must configure all the ports in a port-pipe to either WANPHY or
non-WANPHY. They cannot be mixed on the same port-pipe.

Example Figure 17-41. wanport Command with shutdown Command Example

interface TenGigabitEthernet 13/0
no ip address
no shutdown
FTOS(conf-if-te-13/0)#
FTOS(conf-if-te-13/0)#wanport
% Error: Port should be in shutdown mode, config ignored Te 13/0.
FTOS(conf-if-te-13/0)#
FTOS(conf-if-te-13/0)#shutdown
FTOS(conf-if-te-13/0)#
FTOS(conf-if-te-13/0)#wanport
FTOS(conf-if-te-13/0)#

Related The following related commands are valid for E-Series only.
Commands
ais-shut Send LAIS on shutdown
alarm-report Enable reporting of a selected alarm
clock source Configure a clock source
down-when-looped Send a message when a loopback condition is detected
flag Set flags to ensure interoperability
framing Set framing type
keepalive Enable keepalive
loopback Troubleshoot a SONET loopback

514 | Interfaces
Port Channel Commands
A Link Aggregation Group (LAG) is a group of links that appear to a MAC client as if they were a
single link according to IEEE 802.3ad. In FTOS, a LAG is referred to as a Port Channel.

Table 17-11. Port Channel Limits

Maximum Port Channel Maximum Members per Port
Platform IDs Channel
E-Series ExaScale 255 64
E-Series TeraScale 255 16
C-Series 128 8
S-Series 128 8

Because each port can be assigned to only one Port Channel, and each Port Channel must have at least
one port, some of those nominally available Port Channels might have no function because they could
have no members if there are not enough ports installed. In the S-Series, those ports could be provided
by stack members.
The commands in this section are specific to Port Channel interfaces:
• channel-member
• group
• interface port-channel
• minimum-links
• port-channel failover-group
• show config
• show interfaces port-channel
• show port-channel-flow

Note: The FTOS implementation of LAG or Port Channel requires that you configure a LAG
on both switches manually. For information on FTOS Link Aggregation Control Protocol
(LACP) for dynamic LAGs, refer to Chapter 22, Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP).

For more information on configuring and using Port Channels, refer to the FTOS
Configuration Guide.

channel-member
ces Add an interface to the Port Channel, while in the INTERFACE PORTCHANNEL mode.

Syntax channel-member interface

To delete an interface from a Port Channel, use the no channel-member interface command.

Interfaces | 515
 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:

• For a 100/1000 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by
the slot/port information.
• For a Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by
the slot/port information.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a Ten Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes INTERFACE PORTCHANNEL

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage Use the interface port-channel command to access this command.

Information
You cannot add an interface to a Port Channel if the interface contains an IP address in its
configuration. Only the shutdown, description, mtu, and ip mtu commands can be configured on an
interface if it is to be added to a Port Channel. The mtu and ip mtu commands are only available when
the chassis is in Jumbo mode.

Link MTU and IP MTU considerations for Port Channels are:

• All members must have the same link MTU value and the same IP MTU value.
• The Port Channel link MTU and IP MTU must be less than or equal to the link MTU and IP MTU
values configured on the channel members.
Example: If the members have a link MTU of 2100 and an IP MTU 2000, the Port Channel’s MTU
values cannot be higher than 2100 for link MTU or 2000 bytes for IP MTU.

When an interface is removed from a Port Channel with the no channel-member command syntax, the
interface reverts to its configuration prior to joining the Port Channel.

An interface can belong to only one Port Channel.

On the E-Series TeraScale, you can add up to 16 interfaces to a Port Channel; E-Series ExaScale can
have up to 64. You can have eight interfaces per Port Channel on the C-Series and S-Series. The
interfaces can be located on different line cards but must be the same physical type and speed (for
example, all 1-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces). However, you can combine 100/1000 interfaces and GE
interfaces in the same Port Channel.

If the Port Channel contains a mix of interfaces with 100 Mb/s speed and 1000 Mb/s speed, the
software disables those interfaces whose speed does not match the speed of the first interface
configured and enabled in the Port Channel. If that first interface goes down, the Port Channel does not
change its designated speed; you must disable and re-enable the Port Channel or change the order of
the channel members configuration to change the designated speed. Refer to the FTOS Configuration
Guide for more information on Port Channels.

516 | Interfaces
 Related
description Assign a descriptive text string to the interface.
Commands
interface port-channel Create a Port Channel interface.
shutdown Disable/Enable the port channel.

group
ces Group two LAGs in a supergroup (“fate-sharing group” or “failover group”).

Syntax group group_number port-channel number port-channel number

To remove an existing LAG supergroup, use the no group group_number command.

Parameters
group_number Enter an integer from 1 to 32 that will uniquely identify this LAG
fate-sharing group.
port-channel number Enter the keyword port-channel followed by an existing LAG number.
Enter this keyword/variable combination twice, identifying the two LAGs to
be paired.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes PORT-CHANNEL FAILOVER-GROUP (conf-po-failover-grp)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for C-Series, E-Series, and S-Series

Example
FTOS(conf)#port-channel failover-group
FTOS(conf-po-failover-grp)#group 1 port-channel 1 port-channel 2
FTOS(conf-po-failover-grp)#

Related
port-channel failover-group Access the PORT-CHANNEL FAILOVER-GROUP mode to configure a
Commands
LAG failover group.
show interfaces port-channel Display information on configured Port Channel groups.

interface port-channel
ces Create a Port Channel interface, which is a link aggregation group containing up to 16 physical
interfaces on E-Series, eight physical interfaces on C-Series and S-Series.

Syntax interface port-channel channel-number

To delete a Port Channel, use the no interface port-channel channel-number command.

Parameters
channel-number Enter a number as the interface number.
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale and ExaScale

Defaults Not configured.

Interfaces | 517
 Command Modes CONFIGURATION
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 17-42. interface port-channel Command Example

FTOS(conf)#int port-channel 2
FTOS(conf-if-po-2)#

Usage Port Channel interfaces are logical interfaces and can be either in Layer 2 mode (by using the
Information switchport command) or Layer 3 mode (by configuring an IP address). You can add a Port Channel in
Layer 2 mode to a VLAN.
The shutdown, description, and name commands are the only commands that you can configure on an
interface while it is a member of a Port Channel. To add a physical interface to a Port Channel, the
interface can only have the shutdown, description, and name commands configured. The Port
Channel’s configuration is applied to the interfaces within the Port Channel.
A Port Channel can contain both 100/1000 interfaces and GE interfaces. Based on the first interface
configured in the Port Channel and enabled, FTOS determines if the Port Channel uses 100 Mb/s or
1000 Mb/s as the common speed. Refer to channel-member for more information.
If the line card is in a Jumbo mode chassis, then the mtu and ip mtu commands can also be configured.
The Link MTU and IP MTU values configured on the channel members must be greater than the Link
MTU and IP MTU values configured on the Port Channel interface.

Note: In a Jumbo-enabled system, all members of a Port Channel must be configured with the
same link MTU values and the same IP MTU values.

Related
channel-member Add a physical interface to the LAG.
Commands
interface Configure a physical interface.
interface loopback Configure a Loopback interface.
interface null Configure a null interface.
interface vlan Configure a VLAN.
shutdown Disable/Enable the port channel.

minimum-links
ces Configure the minimum number of links in a LAG (Port Channel) that must be in “oper up” status for
the LAG to be also in “oper up” status.

Syntax minimum-links number

Parameters
number Enter the number of links in a LAG that must be in “oper up” status.
Range: 1 to 16
Default: 1

518 | Interfaces
 Defaults 1

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage If you use this command to configure the minimum number of links in a LAG that must be in “oper up”
Information status, then the LAG must have at least that number of “oper up” links before it can be declared as up.

For example, if the required minimum is four, and only three are up, then the LAG will be considered
down.

port-channel failover-group
ces Access the PORT-CHANNEL FAILOVER-GROUP mode to configure a LAG failover group.

Syntax port-channel failover-group

To remove all LAG failover groups, use the no port-channel failover-group command.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for C-Series, E-Series, and S-Series

Usage This feature groups two LAGs to work in tandem as a supergroup, so that, for example, if one LAG
Information goes down, the other LAG is taken down automatically, providing an alternate path to reroute traffic,
avoiding oversubscription on the other LAG. You can use both static and dynamic (LACP) LAGs to
configure failover groups. For details, see the Port Channel chapter in the FTOS Configuration Guide.

Related
group Group two LAGs in a supergroup (“fate-sharing group”).
Commands
show interfaces port-channel Display information on configured Port Channel groups.

show config
ces Display the current configuration of the selected LAG.

Syntax show config

Command Modes INTERFACE PORTCHANNEL

Interfaces | 519
 Example Figure 17-43. show config Command Sample Output for a Selected LAG
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS(conf-if-po-1)#show config
!
interface Port-channel 1
no ip address
shutdown
FTOS(conf-if-po-1)#

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

show interfaces port-channel

ces Display information on configured Port Channel groups.

Syntax show interfaces port-channel [channel-number] [brief]

Parameters
channel-number (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of the port channel to display information on
that port channel:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale and ExaScale
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display only the port channel
number, the state of the port channel, and the number of interfaces in the port
channel.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series; Modified to display LAG failover group status
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
E-Series legacy command

520 | Interfaces
Example Figure 17-44. show interfaces port-channel Command Example
FTOS#show interfaces port-channel 20
Port-channel 20 is up, line protocol is up (Failover-group 1 is down)
Hardware address is 00:01:e8:01:46:fa
Port-channel is part of failover-group 1
Internet address is 1.1.120.1/24
MTU 1554 bytes, IP MTU 1500 bytes
LineSpeed 2000 Mbit
Members in this channel: Gi 0/5 Gi 0/18
ARP type: ARPA, ARP timeout 04:00:00
Last clearing of "show interfaces" counters 00:00:00
Queueing strategy: fifo
44507301 packets input, 3563070343 bytes
Input 44506754 IP Packets, 0 Vlans 0 MPLS
41 64-byte pkts, 44502871 over 64-byte pkts, 249 over 127-byte pkts
407 over 255-byte pkts, 3127 over 511-byte pkts, 606 over 1023-byte pkts
Received 0 input symbol errors, 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles
0 CRC, 0 IP Checksum, 0 overrun, 0 discarded
1218120 packets output, 100745130 bytes, 0 underruns
Output 5428 Multicasts, 4 Broadcasts, 1212688 Unicasts
1216142 IP Packets, 0 Vlans, 0 MPLS
0 throttles, 0 discarded
Rate info (interval 299 sec):
Input 01.50Mbits/sec, 2433 packets/sec
Output 00.02Mbits/sec, 4 packets/sec
Time since last interface status change: 00:22:34

FTOS#

Table 17-12. show interfaces port-channel Command Example Fields

Field Description
Port-Channel 1... Displays the LAG’s status. In the example, the status of the LAG’s LAG
fate-sharing group (“Failover-group”) is listed.
Hardware is... Displays the interface’s hardware information and its assigned MAC
address.
Port-channel is part... Indicates whether the LAG is part of a LAG fate-sharing group
(“Failover-group”).
Internet address... States whether an IP address is assigned to the interface. If one is, that
address is displayed.
MTU 1554... Displays link and IP MTU.
LineSpeed Displays the interface’s line speed. For a port channel interface, it is the
line speed of the interfaces in the port channel.
Members in this... Displays the interfaces belonging to this port channel.
ARP type:... Displays the ARP type and the ARP timeout value for the interface.
Last clearing... Displays the time when the show interfaces counters were cleared.
Queueing strategy. States the packet queuing strategy. FIFO means first in first out.
packets input... Displays the number of packets and bytes into the interface.
Input 0 IP packets... Displays the number of packets with IP headers, VLAN tagged headers
and MPLS headers.
The number of packets may not add correctly because a VLAN tagged IP
packet counts as both a VLAN packet and an IP packet.
0 64-byte... Displays the size of packets and the number of those packets entering that
interface. This information is displayed over two lines.
Received 0... Displays the type and number of errors or other specific packets received.
This information is displayed over three lines.

Interfaces | 521
 Table 17-12. show interfaces port-channel Command Example Fields (continued)
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Field Description
Output 0... Displays the type and number of packets sent out the interface. This
information is displayed over three lines.
Rate information... Displays the traffic rate information into and out of the interface. Traffic
rate is displayed in bits and packets per second.
Time since... Displays the time since the last change in the configuration of this
interface.

Figure 17-45. show interfaces port-channel brief Command Example

FTOS#sh int por 1 br

LAG Mode Status Uptime Ports

1 L2 up 00:00:08 Gi 3/0 (Up) *
Gi 3/1 (Down)
Gi 3/2 (Up)
FTOS#

Table 17-13. show interfaces port-channel brief Command Example Fields

Field Description
LAG Lists the port channel number.
Mode Lists the mode:
• L3 - for Layer 3
• L2 - for Layer 2
Status Displays the status of the port channel.
• down - if the port channel is disabled (shutdown)
• up - if the port channel is enabled (no shutdown)
Uptime Displays the age of the port channel in hours:minutes:seconds.
Ports Lists the interfaces assigned to this port channel.
(untitled) Displays the status of the physical interfaces (up or down).
In Layer 2 port channels, an * (asterisk) indicates which interface is the
primary port of the port channel. The primary port sends out interface
PDU.
In Layer 3 port channels, the primary port is not indicated.

Related
show lacp Display the LACP matrix.
Commands

show port-channel-flow
ces Display an egress port in a given port-channel flow.

Syntax show port-channel-flow outgoing-port-channel number incoming-interface interface

{source-ip address destination-ip address} | {protocol number | icmp | tcp | udp} |
{source-port number destination-port number} | {source-mac address destination-mac
address}

522 | Interfaces
 Parameters
outgoing-port-channel Enter the keyword outgoing-port-channel followed by the
number number of the port channel to display flow information.
• For a port channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel
followed by a number:
C-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale and ExaScale
incoming-interface interface Enter the keyword incoming-interface followed by the interface
type and slot/port or number information:
• For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword FastEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
GigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the
slot/port information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
source-ip address Enter the keyword source-ip followed by the IP source address in IP
address format.
destination-ip address Enter the keyword destination-ip followed by the IP destination
address in IP address format.
protocol number | icmp | tcp On the E-Series only, enter the keyword protocol followed by one of
the protocol type
| udp
keywords: tcp, udp, icmp or protocol number
Note: The protocol number keyword applies to E-Series only.
source-port number Enter the keyword source-port followed by the source port number.
Range: 1-65536
Default: None
destination-port number Enter the keyword destination-port followed by the destination
port number.
Range: 1-65536
Default: None
source-mac address Enter the keyword source-mac followed by the MAC source
address in the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
destination-mac address Enter the keyword destination-mac followed by the MAC
destination address in the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.

Command Modes EXEC

Usage Since this command calculates based on a Layer 2 hash algorithm, use this command to display flows
Information for switched Layer 2 packets, not for routed packets (use the show ip flow command to display routed
packets).

The show port-channel-flow command returns the egress port identification in a given
port-channel, if a valid flow is entered. A mismatched flow error occurs if MAC-based hashing is
configured for a Layer 2 interface and the user is trying to display a Layer 3 flow.

The output will display three entries:

• Egress port for unfragmented packets.
• In the event of fragmented packets, egress port of the first fragment.
• In the event of fragmented packets, egress port of the subsequent fragments.

Interfaces | 523
 Example show port-channel-flow outgoing-port-channel number incoming-interface interface
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

source-mac address destination-mac address

• Load-balance is configured for MAC

• Load balance is configured for IP 4-tuple/2-tuple for the C-Series and S-Series
• A non-IP payload is going out of Layer 2 LAG interface that is a member of VLAN with an IP
address.
Figure 17-46. show port-channel-flow Command for MAC Addresses
FTOS#show port-channel-flow outgoing-port-channel 1 incoming-interface gi 3/0
source-mac 00:00:50:00:00:00 destination-mac 00:00:a0:00:00:00

Egress Port for port-channel 1, for the given flow, is Te 13/01

Example On the E-Series only:

show port-channel-flow outgoing-port-channel number incoming-interface interface

source-ip address destination-ip address {protocol number [icmp/tcp/udp]} {source-port
number destination-port number}

• Load balance is configured for IP 5-tuple/3-tuple.

• An IP payload is going out of a Layer 2 LAG interface that is a member of a VLAN with an IP
address.
FTOS#show port-channel-flow outgoing-port-channel 2
incoming-interface gi 3/0 source-ip 2.2.2.0 destination-ip 3.2.3.1
protocol tcp source-port 5 destination-port 6

Egress Port for port-channel 2, for the given flow:

Unfragmented packet: Gi 1/6
Fragmented packets (first fragment): Gi 1/12
Fragmented packets (remaining fragments): Gi 1/12

Related
load-balance (E-Series) Balance traffic over E-Series port channel members.
Commands

524 | Interfaces
 UDP Broadcast
The User Datagram Protocol (UDP) broadcast feature is a software-based method to forward
low throughput (not to exceed 200 pps) IP/UDP broadcast traffic arriving on a physical or
VLAN interface.

Important Points to Remember

•This feature is available only on the E-Series platform, as noted by this symbol
under each command heading: e
•This feature applies only to E-Series Layer 3 physical or VLAN interfaces.
•Routing Information Protocol (RIP) is not supported with the UDP Broadcast
feature.
•If this feature is configured on an interface using ip udp-helper udp-port, then the
command ip directed-broadcast becomes ineffective on that interface.
•The existing command show interface has been modified to display the configured
broadcast address.

The commands for UDP Broadcast are:

•debug ip udp-helper
•ip udp-helper udp-port
•show ip udp-helper

debug ip udp-helper
Enable UDP debug and display the debug information on a console.
e

Syntax debug ip udp-helper

To disable debug information, use the no debug ip udp-helper command.

Defaults Debug disabled

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Example FTOS#debug ip udp-helper

UDP helper debugging is on

01:20:22: Pkt rcvd on Gi 5/0 with IP DA (0xffffffff) will be sent on Gi 5/1 Gi 5/2 Vlan 3

01:44:54: Pkt rcvd on Gi 7/0 is handed over for DHCP processing.

Interfaces | 525
 Related
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Commands ip udp-helper udp-port Enable the UDP broadcast feature on an interface.

show ip udp-helper Display the configured UDP helper(s) on all interfaces.

Command
History Version 8.3.3.9 Introduced on S60
Version 8.3.7.0 Introduced on S4810
Pre-version 8.3.7.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale

ip udp-helper udp-port
Enable the UDP broadcast feature on an interface either for all UDP ports or a specified list of
e UDP ports.

Syntax ip udp-helper udp-port [udp-port-list]

To disable the UDP broadcast on a port, use the no ip udp-helper udp-port [udp-port-list]
command.

Parameters
udp-port-list (OPTIONAL) Enter up to 16 comma separated UDP port numbers.
Note: If this option is not used, all UDP Ports are considered by default.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes INTERFACE (config-if)

Usage If the ip helper-address command and ip udp-helper udp-port command are configured, the
Information behavior is that the UDP broadcast traffic with port numbers 67/68 will be unicast relayed to
the DHCP server per the ip helper-address configuration. This will occur regardless if the ip
udp-helper udp-port command contains port numbers 67/68 or not.

If only the ip udp-helper udp-port command is configured, all the UDP broadcast traffic is
flooded, including ports 67/68 traffic if those ports are part of the udp-port-list.

Command
History Version 8.3.3.9 Introduced on S60
Version 8.3.7.0 Introduced on S4810
Pre-version 8.3.7.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale

Related
Commands ip helper-address Configure the destination broadcast or host address for DHCP server.
debug ip udp-helper Enable debug and display the debug information on a console.
show ip udp-helper Display the configured UDP helper(s) on all interfaces.

526 | Interfaces
show ip udp-helper
Display the configured UDP helper(s) on all interfaces.
e

Syntax show ip udp-helper

Defaults No default configuration or values

Command Modes EXEC

Example FTOS#show ip udp-helper

--------------------------------------------------
Port UDP port list
--------------------------------------------------
Gi 10/0 656, 658
Gi 10/1 All

Command
History Version 8.3.3.9 Introduced on S60
Version 8.3.7.0 Introduced on S4810
Pre-version 8.3.7.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale

Related
Commands debug ip udp-helper Enable debug and display the debug information on a console.
Enable the UDP broadcast feature on an interface either for all UDP
ip udp-helper udp-port
ports or a specified list of UDP ports.

Interfaces | 527
 www.dell.com | dell.com/support

528
|
Interfaces
 18
IPv4 Routing

Overview
The characters that appear below command headings indicate support for the associated Dell
Networking platform, as follows:
• C-Series: c
• E-Series: e
• S-Series: s

Commands
IPv4-related commands are described in this chapter. They are:
• arp
• arp learn-enable
• arp retries
• arp timeout
• clear arp-cache
• clear host
• clear ip fib linecard
• clear ip route
• clear tcp statistics
• debug arp
• debug ip dhcp
• debug ip icmp
• debug ip packet
• ip address
• ip directed-broadcast
• ip domain-list
• ip domain-lookup
• ip domain-name
• ip fib download-igp-only
• ip helper-address
• ip helper-address hop-count disable
• ip host
• ip max-frag-count
• ip mtu

IPv4 Routing | 529

 • ip name-server
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

• ip proxy-arp
• ip redirects
• ip route
• ip source-route
• ip unreachables
• ip vlan-flooding
• load-balance (C-Series and S-Series)
• load-balance (E-Series)
• management route
• show arp
• show arp retries
• show hosts
• show ip cam linecard
• show ip cam stack-unit
• show ip fib linecard
• show ip fib stack-unit
• show ip flow
• show ip interface
• show ip management-route
• show ip protocols
• show ip route
• show ip route list
• show ip route summary
• show ip traffic
• show protocol-termination-table
• show tcp statistics

arp
ces Use Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) to associate an IP address with a MAC address in the switch.

Syntax arp vrf {vrf name} ip-address mac-address interface

To remove an ARP address, use the no arp ip-address command.

Parameters
vrf name E-Series Only: Enter the VRF process identifier to tie the static route to the VRF
process.
ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format.

530 | IPv4 Routing

 mac-address Enter a MAC address in nnnn.nnnn.nnnn format.
interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed
by the slot/port information.
• For the Management interface, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet
followed by the slot/port information. The slot range is 0-1 and the port range is 0.
• For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a
number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage You cannot use Class D or Class E IP addresses or zero IP address (0.0.0.0) when creating a static ARP.
Information Zero MAC addresses (00:00:00:00:00:00) are also invalid.

Related
clear arp-cache Clear dynamic ARP entries from the ARP table.
Commands
show arp Display ARP table.

arp learn-enable
ces Enable ARP learning via Gratuitous ARP.

Syntax arp learn-enable

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced

Usage In FTOS versions prior to 8.3.1.0, if a gratuitous ARP is received some time after an ARP request is
Information sent, only RP2 installs the ARP information. For example:

1 At time t=0 FTOS sends an ARP request for IP A.B.C.D

2 At time t=1 FTOS receives an ARP request for IP A.B.C.D

IPv4 Routing | 531

 3 At time t=2 FTOS installs an ARP entry for A.B.C.D only on RP2.
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Beginning with version 8.3.1.0, when a Gratuitous ARP is received, FTOS installs an ARP entry on all
3 CPUs.

arp retries
ces Set the number of ARP retries in case the system does not receive an ARP reply in response to an ARP
request.

Syntax arp retries number

Parameters
number Enter the number of retries.
Range: 5 to 20.
Default: 5

Defaults 5

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced

Usage Retries are 20 seconds apart.

Information

Related
show arp retries Display the configured number of ARP retries.
Commands

arp timeout
ces Set the time interval for an ARP entry to remain in the ARP cache.

Syntax arp timeout minutes

To return to the default value, enter no arp timeout.

Parameters
seconds Enter the number of minutes.
Range: 0 to 35790.
Default: 240 minutes.

Defaults 240 minutes (4 hours)

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

532 | IPv4 Routing

 Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Related
show interfaces Displays the ARP timeout value for all available interfaces.
Commands

clear arp-cache
ces Clear the dynamic ARP entries from a specific interface or optionally delete (no-refresh) ARP entries
from CAM.

Syntax clear arp-cache [vrf name | interface | ip ip-address] [no-refresh]

Parameters
vrf name E-Series Only: Clear only the ARP cache entries tied to the VRF process.
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For the Management interface, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet
followed by the slot/port information. The slot range is 0-1 and the port range is
0.
• For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a
number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.
ip ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ip followed by the IP address of the ARP entry
you wish to clear.
no-refresh (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword no-refresh to delete the ARP entry from CAM.
Or use this option with interface or ip ip-address to specify which dynamic
ARP entries you want to delete.
Note: Transit traffic may not be forwarded during the period when deleted
ARP entries are resolved again and re-installed in CAM. Use this
option with extreme caution.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Support 4094 VLANs on E-Series ExaScale (prior limit was 2094)
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.9.1.0 Introduced VRF on the E-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

IPv4 Routing | 533

 clear host
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Remove one or all dynamically learnt host table entries.

Syntax clear host name

Parameters
name Enter the name of the host to delete.
Enter * to delete all host table entries.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series

clear ip fib linecard

ces Clear all Forwarding Information Base (fib) entries in the specified line card (use this command with
caution, see Usage Information below)

Syntax clear ip fib linecard slot-number | vrf vrf instance

Parameters
slot-number Enter the number of the line card slot.
C-Series and S-Series Range: 0-7
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on E12001200i, 0 to 6 on E600/E600i; 0 to 5 on E300
vrf instance (Optional) E-Series Only: Clear only the FIB entries on the specified card
associated with the VRF instance.

Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.2 Introduced support on E-Series ExaScale E600i
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.9.1.0 Introduced VRF on the E-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage Use this command to clear Layer 3 CAM inconsistencies.

Information
Caution: Executing this command will cause traffic disruption.

Related
Commands show ip fib linecard Show FIB entries.

534 | IPv4 Routing

clear ip route
ces Clear one or all routes in the routing table.

Syntax clear ip route {* | ip-address mask | vrf vrf instance}

Parameters
* Enter an asterisk (*) to clear all learned IP routes.
ip-address mask Enter a specific IP address and mask in dotted decimal format to clear
that IP address from the routing table.
vrf instance (Optional) E-Series Only: Clear only the routes tied to the VRF
instance.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.9.1.0 Introduced VRF
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Related
ip route Assign an IP route to the switch.
Commands
show ip route View the routing table.
show ip route summary View a summary of the routing table.

clear tcp statistics

ces Clear TCP counters.

Syntax clear tcp statistics [all | cp | rp1 | rp2]

Note: These options are supported only on the E-Series.

Parameters
all Enter the keyword all to clear all TCP statistics maintained on all switch processors.
cp (OPTIONAL) Enter the cp to clear only statistics from the Control Processor.
rp1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp1 to clear only the statistics from Route Processor 1.
rp2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp2 to clear only the statistics from Route Processor 2.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

IPv4 Routing | 535

 debug arp
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces View information on ARP transactions.

Syntax debug arp [interface] [count value]

To stop debugging ARP transactions, enter no debug arp.

Parameters
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword gigabitethernet followed by
the slot/port information.
• For the Management interface, enter the keyword managementethernet followed
by the slot/port information. The slot range is 0-1 and the port range is 0.
• For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a
number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword tengigabitethernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.
count value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count followed by the count value.
Range: 1 to 65534

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Support 4094 VLANs on E-Series ExaScale (prior limit was 2094)
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.3.1.0 Added the count option

Defaults No default behavior or values

Usage Use the count option to stop packets from flooding the user terminal when debugging is turned on.
Information

debug ip dhcp
ces Enable debug information for DHCP relay transactions and display the information on the console.

Syntax debug ip dhcp

To disable debug, use the no debug ip dhcp command.

Defaults Debug disabled

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

536 | IPv4 Routing

 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.4.10 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 18-1. debug ip dhcp Command Example

FTOS#debug ip dhcp
00:12:21 : %RELAY-I-PACKET: BOOTP REQUEST (Unicast) received at interface 113.3.3.17 BOOTP
Request, hops = 0, XID = 0xbf05140f, secs = 0, hwaddr = 00:60:CF:20:7B:8C, giaddr = 0.0.0.0
00:12:21 : %RELAY-I-BOOTREQUEST: Forwarded BOOTREQUEST for 00:60:CF:20:7B:8C to 14.4.4.2
00:12:26 : %RELAY-I-PACKET: BOOTP REQUEST (Unicast) received at interface 113.3.3.17 BOOTP
Request, hops = 0, XID = 0xbf05140f, secs = 5, hwaddr = 00:60:CF:20:7B:8C, giaddr = 0.0.0.0
00:12:26 : %RELAY-I-BOOTREQUEST: Forwarded BOOTREQUEST for 00:60:CF:20:7B:8C to 14.4.4.2
00:12:40 : %RELAY-I-PACKET: BOOTP REQUEST (Unicast) received at interface 113.3.3.17 BOOTP
Request, hops = 0, XID = 0xda4f9503, secs = 0, hwaddr = 00:60:CF:20:7B:8C, giaddr = 0.0.0.0
00:12:40 : %RELAY-I-BOOTREQUEST: Forwarded BOOTREQUEST for 00:60:CF:20:7B:8C to 14.4.4.2
00:12:42 : %RELAY-I-PACKET: BOOTP REPLY (Unicast) received at interface 14.4.4.1 BOOTP Reply,
hops = 0, XID = 0xda4f9503, secs = 0, hwaddr = 00:60:CF:20:7B:8C, giaddr = 113.3.3.17
00:12:42 : %RELAY-I-BOOTREPLY: Forwarded BOOTREPLY for 00:60:CF:20:7B:8C to 113.3.3.254
00:12:42 : %RELAY-I-PACKET: BOOTP REQUEST (Unicast) received at interface 113.3.3.17 BOOTP
Request, hops = 0, XID = 0xda4f9503, secs = 0, hwaddr = 00:60:CF:20:7B:8C, giaddr = 0.0.0.0
00:12:42 : %RELAY-I-BOOTREQUEST: Forwarded BOOTREQUEST for 00:60:CF:20:7B:8C to 14.4.4.2
00:12:42 : %RELAY-I-PACKET: BOOTP REPLY (Unicast) received at interface 14.4.4.1 BOOTP Reply,
hops = 0, XID = 0xda4f9503, secs = 0, hwaddr = 00:60:CF:20:7B:8C, giaddr = 113.3.3.17
00:12:42 : %RELAY-I-BOOTREPLY: Forwarded BOOTREPLY for 00:60:CF:20:7B:8C to 113.3.3.254
FTOS#

Related
Specify the destination broadcast or host address for DHCP
Commands ip helper-address
server request.
ip helper-address hop-count disable Disable hop-count increment for DHCP relay agent.

debug ip icmp
ces View information on the Internal Control Message Protocol (ICMP).

Syntax debug ip icmp [interface] [count value]

To disable debugging, use the no debug ip icmp command.

IPv4 Routing | 537

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by
the slot/port information.
• For the Management interface, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet
followed by the slot/port information. The slot range is 0 and the port range is 0-1.
• For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a
number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.
count value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count followed by the count value.
Range: 1 to 65534
Default: Infinity

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Support 4094 VLANs on E-Series ExaScale (prior limit was 2094)
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.3.1.0 Added the count option

Example Figure 18-2. debug ip icmp Command Example (Partial)

ICMP: echo request rcvd from src 40.40.40.40

ICMP: src 40.40.40.40, dst 40.40.40.40, echo reply
ICMP: src 40.40.40.40, dst 40.40.40.40, echo reply
ICMP: echo request sent to dst 40.40.40.40
ICMP: echo request rcvd from src 40.40.40.40
ICMP: src 40.40.40.40, dst 40.40.40.40, echo reply
ICMP: src 40.40.40.40, dst 40.40.40.40, echo reply
ICMP: echo request sent to dst 40.40.40.40

Usage Use the count option to stop packets from flooding the user terminal when debugging is turned on.
Information

debug ip packet
ces View a log of IP packets sent and received.

Syntax debug ip packet [access-group name] [count value] [interface]

To disable debugging, use the no debug ip packet [access-group name] [count value]
[interface] command.

538 | IPv4 Routing

 Parameters
access-group name Enter the keyword access-group followed by the access list name
(maximum 16 characters) to limit the debug output based on the defined rules
in the ACL.
count value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count followed by the count value.
Range: 1 to 65534
Default: Infinity
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number
information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword gigabitethernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For the management interface on the RPM, enter the keyword
managementethernet followed by the slot/port information. The
slot range is 0-1 and the port range is 0.
• For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed
by a number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/
port information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
tengigabitethernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to
4094.

Command Mode EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Support 4094 VLANs on E-Series ExaScale (prior limit was 2094)
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Added the access-group option
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.3.1.0 Added the count option

IPv4 Routing | 539

 Example Figure 18-3. debug ip packet Command Example (Partial)
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

IP: s=10.1.2.62 (local), d=10.1.2.206 (Ma 0/0), len 54, sending

TCP src=23, dst=40869, seq=2112994894, ack=606901739, win=8191 ACK PUSH
IP: s=10.1.2.206 (Ma 0/0), d=10.1.2.62, len 40, rcvd
TCP src=0, dst=0, seq=0, ack=0, win=0
IP: s=10.1.2.62 (local), d=10.1.2.206 (Ma 0/0), len 226, sending
TCP src=23, dst=40869, seq=2112994896, ack=606901739, win=8192 ACK PUSH
IP: s=10.1.2.216 (Ma 0/0), d=10.1.2.255, len 78, rcvd
UDP src=0, dst=0
IP: s=10.1.2.62 (local), d=10.1.2.3 (Ma 0/0), len 1500, sending fragment
IP Fragment, Ident = 4741, fragment offset = 0
ICMP type=0, code=0
IP: s=10.1.2.62 (local), d=10.1.2.3 (Ma 0/0), len 1500, sending fragment
IP Fragment, Ident = 4741, fragment offset = 1480
IP: s=40.40.40.40 (local), d=224.0.0.5 (Gi 4/11), len 64, sending broad/multicast
proto=89
IP: s=40.40.40.40 (local), d=224.0.0.6 (Gi 4/11), len 28, sending broad/multicast
proto=2
IP: s=0.0.0.0, d=30.30.30.30, len 100, unroutable
ICMP type=8, code=0
IP: s=0.0.0.0, d=30.30.30.30, len 100, unroutable
ICMP type=8, code=0

Table 18-1. debug ip packet Command Example Fields

Field Description
s= Lists the source address of the packet and the name of the interface (in
parentheses) that received the packet.
d= Lists the destination address of the packet and the name of the interface
(in parentheses) through which the packet is being sent out on the
network.
len Displays the packet’s length.
sending The last part of each line lists the status of the packet.
rcvd
fragment
sending broad/multicast proto
unroutable
TCP src= Displays the source and destination ports, the sequence number, the
acknowledgement number, and the window size of the packets in that
TCP packets.
UDP src= Displays the source and destination ports for the UDP packets.
ICMP type= Displays the ICMP type and code.
IP Fragment States that it is a fragment and displays the unique number identifying the
fragment (Ident) and the offset (in 8-byte units) of this fragment
(fragment offset) from the beginning of original datagram.

Usage Use the count option to stop packets from flooding the user terminal when debugging is turned on.
Information
The access-group option supports only the equal to (eq) operator in TCP ACL rules. Port operators
not equal to (neq), greater than (gt), less than (lt), or range are not supported in access-group
option (see Figure 18-4). ARP packets (arp) and Ether-type (ether-type) are also not supported in
access-group option. The entire rule is skipped to compose the filter.
The access-group option pertains to:
• IP Protocol Number 0 to 255

540 | IPv4 Routing

 • Internet Control Message Protocol* icmp
* but not the ICMP message type (0-255)
• Any Internet Protocol ip
• Transmission Control Protocol* tcp
* but not on the rst, syn, or urg bit
• User Datagram Protocol udp
In the case of ambiguous access control list rules, the debug ip packet access-control command will be
disabled. A message appears identifying the error (see Figure 18-4).

Example Figure 18-4. debug ip packet access-group Command Errors

FTOS#debug ip packet access-group test
%Error: port operator GT not supported in access-list debug
%Error: port operator LT not supported in access-list debug
%Error: port operator RANGE not supported in access-list debug
%Error: port operator NEQ not supported in access-list debug

FTOS#00:10:45: %RPM0-P:CP
%IPMGR-3-DEBUG_IP_PACKET_ACL_AMBIGUOUS_EXP: Ambiguous rules not
supported in access-list debug, access-list debugging is turned off
FTOS#

ip address
ces Assign a primary and secondary IP address to the interface.

Syntax ip address ip-address mask [secondary]

To delete an IP address from an interface, use the no ip address [ip-address] command.

Parameters
ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format.
mask Enter the mask of the IP address in slash prefix format (for example, /24).
secondary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword secondary to designate the IP address as the
secondary address.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series

Usage You must be in the INTERFACE mode before you add an IP address to an interface. Assign an IP
Information address to an interface prior to entering the ROUTER OSPF mode.

IPv4 Routing | 541

 ip directed-broadcast
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Enables the interface to receive directed broadcast packets.

Syntax ip directed-broadcast
To disable the interface from receiving directed broadcast packets, enter no ip directed-broadcast.

Defaults Disabled (that is, the interface does not receive directed broadcast packets)

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series

ip domain-list
ces Configure names to complete unqualified host names.

Syntax ip domain-list name

To remove the name, use the no ip domain-list name command.

Parameters
name Enter a domain name to be used to complete unqualified names (that is, incomplete
domain names that cannot be resolved).

Defaults Disabled.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series

Usage Configure the ip domain-list command up to 6 times to configure a list of possible domain names.
Information
If both the ip domain-name and ip domain-list commands are configured, the software will try to
resolve the name using the ip domain-name command. If the name is not resolved, the software goes
through the list of names configured with the ip domain-list command to find a match.

Use the following steps to enable dynamic resolution of hosts:

• specify a domain name server with the ip name-server command.
• enable DNS with the ip domain-lookup command.
To view current bindings, use the show hosts command. To view DNS related configuration, use the
show running-config resolve command.

542 | IPv4 Routing

 Related
ip domain-name Specify a DNS server.
Commands

ip domain-lookup
ces Enable dynamic host-name to address resolution (that is, DNS).

Syntax ip domain-lookup
To disable DNS lookup, use the no ip domain-lookup.

Defaults Disabled.

Command Mode CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series

Usage To fully enable DNS, also specify one or more domain name servers with the ip name-server
Information command.

FTOS does not support sending DNS queries over a VLAN. DNS queries are sent out all other
interfaces, including the Management port.

To view current bindings, use the show hosts command.

Related
ip name-server Specify a DNS server.
Commands
show hosts View current bindings.

ip domain-name
ces Configure one domain name for the switch.

Syntax ip domain-name name

To remove the domain name, enter no ip domain-name.

Parameters
name Enter one domain name to be used to complete unqualified names (that is,
incomplete domain names that cannot be resolved).

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale

IPv4 Routing | 543

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series

Usage You can only configure one domain name with the ip domain-name command. To configure more than
Information one domain name, configure the ip domain-list command up to 6 times.
Use the following steps to enable dynamic resolution of hosts:
• specify a domain name server with the ip name-server command.
• enable DNS with the ip domain-lookup command.
To view current bindings, use the show hosts command.

Related
ip domain-list Configure additional names.
Commands

ip fib download-igp-only
e Configure the E-Series to download only IGP routes (for example, OSPF) on to line cards. When the
command is configured or removed, it clears the routing table (similar to clear ip route command) and
only IGP routes populate the table.

Syntax ip fib download-igp-only [small-fib]

To return to default setting, use the no ip fib download-igp-only [small-fib] command.

Parameters
small-fib (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword small-fib to download a smaller FIB table. This option
is useful on line cards with a limited FIB size.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

ip helper-address
ces Specify the address of a DHCP server so that DHCP broadcast messages can be forwarded when the
DHCP server is not on the same subnet as the client.

Syntax ip helper-address ip-address | default-vrf

To remove a DHCP server address, enter no ip helper-address.

Parameters
ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D).
default-vrf (Optional) E-Series Only: Enter default-vrf for the DHCP server VRF is using.

544 | IPv4 Routing

 Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.9.1.0 Introduced VRF on the E-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage You can add multiple DHCP servers by entering the ip helper-address command multiple times. If
Information multiple servers are defined, an incoming request is sent simultaneously to all configured servers and
the reply is forwarded to the DHCP client.

FTOS uses standard DHCP ports, that is UDP ports 67 (server) and 68 (client) for DHCP relay
services. It listens on port 67 and if it receives a broadcast, the software converts it to unicast, and
forwards to it to the DHCP-server with source port=68 and destination port=67.

The server replies with source port=67, destination port=67 and FTOS forwards to the client with
source port=67, destination port=68.

ip helper-address hop-count disable

ces Disable the hop-count increment for the DHCP relay agent.

Syntax ip helper-address hop-count disable

To reenable the hop-count increment, use the no ip helper-address hop-count disable command.

Defaults Enabled; the hops field in the DHCP message header is incremented by default

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
Version 6.3.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage This command disables the incrementing of the hops field when boot requests are relayed to a DHCP
Information server through FTOS. If the incoming boot request already has a non-zero hops field, the message will
be relayed with the same value for hops. However, the message will be discarded if the hops field
exceeds 16, to comply with the relay agent behavior specified in RFC 1542.

Related
ip helper-address Specify the destination broadcast or host address for DHCP server requests.
Commands
show running-config Display the current configuration and changes from default values.

IPv4 Routing | 545

 ip host
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Assign a name and IP address to be used by the host-to-IP address mapping table.

Syntax ip host name ip-address

To remove an IP host, use the no ip host name [ip-address] command.

Parameters
name Enter a text string to associate with one IP address.
ip-address Enter an IP address, in dotted decimal format, to be mapped to the name.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

ip max-frag-count
ces Set the maximum number of fragments allowed in one packet for packet re-assembly.

Syntax ip max-frag-count count

To place no limit on the number of fragments allowed, enter no ip max-frag-count.

Parameters
count Enter a number for the number of fragments allowed for re-assembly.
Range: 2 to 256

Defaults No limit is set on number of fragments allowed.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage To avoid Denial of Service (DOS) attacks, keep the number of fragments allowed for re-assembly low.
Information

546 | IPv4 Routing

ip mtu
e Set the IP MTU (frame size) of the packet transmitted by the RPM for the line card interface. If the
packet must be fragmented, FTOS sets the size of the fragmented packets to the size specified in this
command.

Syntax ip mtu value

To return to the default IP MTU value, enter no ip mtu.

Parameters
value Enter the maximum MTU size if the IP packet is fragmented.
Default: 1500 bytes
Range: 576 to 9234

Defaults 1500 bytes

Command Modes INTERFACE (Gigabit Ethernet and 10 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces)

Command
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
History
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage When you enter no mtu command, FTOS reduces the ip mtu value to 1536 bytes. To return the IP MTU
Information value to the default, enter no ip mtu.

You must compensate for Layer 2 header when configuring link MTU on an Ethernet interface or
FTOS may not fragment packets. If the packet includes a Layer 2 header, the difference between the
link MTU and IP MTU (ip mtu command) must be enough bytes to include for the Layer 2 header.

Link MTU and IP MTU considerations for Port Channels and VLANs are as follows.

Port Channels:
All members must have the same link MTU value and the same IP MTU value.
• The Port Channel link MTU and IP MTU must be less than or equal to the link MTU and IP MTU
values configured on the channel members.
Example: if the members have a link MTU of 2100 and an IP MTU 2000, the Port Channel’s MTU
values cannot be higher than 2100 for link MTU or 2000 bytes for IP MTU.

VLANs:
• All members of a VLAN must have same IP MTU value.
• Members can have different Link MTU values. Tagged members must have a link MTU 4 bytes
higher than untagged members to account for the packet tag.
• The VLAN link MTU and IP MTU must be less than or equal to the link MTU and IP MTU values
configured on the VLAN members.
Example: The VLAN contains tagged members with Link MTU of 1522 and IP MTU of 1500 and
untagged members with Link MTU of 1518 and IP MTU of 1500. The VLAN’s Link MTU cannot be
higher than 1518 bytes and its IP MTU cannot be higher than 1500 bytes.

IPv4 Routing | 547

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Table 18-2. Difference between Link MTU and IP MTU

Layer 2 Overhead Difference between Link MTU and IP MTU

Ethernet (untagged) 18 bytes
VLAN Tag 22 bytes
Untagged Packet with VLAN-Stack Header 22 bytes
Tagged Packet with VLAN-Stack Header 26 bytes

Related
mtu Set the link MTU for an Ethernet interface.
Commands

ip name-server
ces Enter up to 6 IP addresses of name servers. The order you enter the addresses determines the order of
their use.

Syntax ip name-server ip-address [ip-address2...ip-address6]

To remove a name server, use the no ip name-server ip-address command.

Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address, in dotted decimal format, of the name server to be used.
ip-address2... (OPTIONAL) Enter up five more IP addresses, in dotted decimal format, of name servers
ip-address6 to be used.
Separate the IP addresses with a space.

Defaults No name servers are configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage FTOS does not support sending DNS queries over a VLAN. DNS queries are sent out all other
Information interfaces, including the Management port.

ip proxy-arp
ces Enable Proxy ARP on an interface.

Syntax ip proxy-arp
To disable Proxy ARP, enter no ip proxy-arp.

Defaults Enabled.

548 | IPv4 Routing

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Related
show ip interface Displays the interface routing status and configuration.
Commands

ip redirects
e Enable the interface to send ICMP redirect messages.

Syntax ip redirects
To return to default, enter no ip redirects.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
History
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage This command is available for physical interfaces and port-channel interfaces on the E-Series.
Information

Note: This command is not supported on default VLAN (default vlan-id command).

ip route
ces Assign a static route to the switch.

Syntax ip route vrf {vrf instance} destination mask {ip-address | interface [ip-address]} [distance]
[permanent] [tag tag-value]
To delete a specific static route, use the no ip route destination mask {address | interface
[ip-address]} command.

To delete all routes matching a certain route, use the no ip route destination mask command.

Parameters
vrf name (OPTIONAL) E-Series Only: Enter the keyword vrf followed by the VRF Instances
name to tie the static route to the VRF instance.
destination Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format of the destination device.
mask Enter the mask in slash prefix formation (/x) of the destination device’s IP address.
ip-address Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format of the forwarding router.

IPv4 Routing | 549

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:

• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed
by the slot/port information.
• For a loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback followed by a number from
zero (0) to 16383.
• For the null interface, enter the keyword null followed by zero (0).
• For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a
number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the sonet followed
by the slot/port information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.
distance (OPTIONAL) Enter a number as the distance metric assigned to the route.
Range: 1 to 255
permanent (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword permanent to specify the route is not removed,
even if the interface assigned to that route goes down. The route must be up initially to
install it in the routing table.
If you disable the interface with an IP address associated with the keyword
permanent, the route disappears from the routing table.
tag tag-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword tag followed by a number to assign to the route.
Range: 1 to 4294967295

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Support 4094 VLANs on E-Series ExaScale (prior limit was 2094)
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.9.1.0 Introduced VRF on the E-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage Using the following example of a static route:

Information ip route 33.33.33.0 /24 gigabitethernet 0/0 172.31.5.43

• The software installs a next hop that is not on the directly connected subnet but which recursively
resolves to a next hop on the interface’s configured subnet. In the example, if gig 0/0 has ip
address on subnet 2.2.2.0 and if 172.31.5.43 recursively resolves to 2.2.2.0, FTOS installs the
static route.
• When the interface goes down, FTOS withdraws the route.
• When the interface comes up, FTOS re-installs the route.
• When recursive resolution is “broken,” FTOS withdraws the route.
• When recursive resolution is satisfied, FTOS re-installs the route.

550 | IPv4 Routing

 Related
show ip route View the switch routing table.
Commands

ip source-route
ces Enable FTOS to forward IP packets with source route information in the header.

Syntax ip source-route
To drop packets with source route information, enter no ip route-source.

Defaults Enabled.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

ip unreachables
ces Enable the generation of Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) unreachable messages.

Syntax ip unreachables
To disable the generation of ICMP messages, enter no ip unreachables.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

ip vlan-flooding
e Enable unicast data traffic flooding on VLAN member ports.

Syntax ip vlan-flooding
To disable, use the no ip vlan-flooding command.

Defaults disabled

IPv4 Routing | 551

 Command Modes CONFIGURATION
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Command
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Usage By default this command is disabled. When enabled, all the Layer 3 unicast routed data traffic going
Information through a VLAN member port is flooded across all the member ports of that VLAN. There might be
some ARP table entries which are resolved through ARP packets which had Ethernet MAC SA
different from MAC information inside the ARP packet. This unicast data traffic flooding occurs only
for those packets which use these ARP entries.

load-balance (C-Series and S-Series)

cs By default for C-Series and S-Series, FTOS uses an IP 4-tuple (IP SA, IP DA, Source Port, and
Destination Port) to distribute IP traffic over members of a Port Channel as well as equal-cost paths. To
designate another method to balance traffic over Port Channel members, use the load-balance
command.

Syntax load-balance {ip-selection [dest-ip | source-ip]} | {mac [dest-mac | source-dest-mac |

source-mac]} | {tcp-udp [enable]}
To return to the default setting (IP 4-tuple), use the no version of the command.

Parameters
ip-selection {dest-ip | Enter the keywords to distribute IP traffic based on the following criteria:
source-ip} • dest-ip—Uses destination IP address and destination port fields to hash.
The hashing mechanism returns a 3-bit index indicating which port the
packet should be forwarded to.
• source-ip—Uses source IP address and source port fields to hash. The
hashing mechanism returns a 3-bit index indicating which port the
packet should be forwarded to.
mac {dest-mac | Enter the keywords to distribute MAC traffic based on the following criteria:
source-dest-mac | • dest-mac—Uses the destination MAC address, VLAN, Ethertype,
source-mac} source module ID and source port ID fields to hash. The hashing
mechanism returns a 3-bit index indicating which port the packet should
be forwarded to.
• source-dest-mac—Uses the destination and source MAC address,
VLAN, Ethertype, source module ID and source port ID fields to hash.
The hashing mechanism returns a 3-bit index indicating which port the
packet should be forwarded to.
• source-mac—Uses the source MAC address, VLAN, Ethertype, source
module ID and source port ID fields to hash. The hashing mechanism
returns a 3-bit index indicating which port the packet should be
forwarded to.
tcp-udp enable Enter the keywords to distribute traffic based on the following:
• enable—Takes the TCP/UDP source and destination ports into
consideration when doing hash computations. (By default, this is
enabled)

Defaults IP 4-tuple (IP SA, IP DA, Source Port, Destination Port)

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

552 | IPv4 Routing

 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series

Usage By default, FTOS distributes incoming traffic based on a hash algorithm using the following criteria:
Information
• IP source address
• IP destination address
• TCP/UDP source port
• TCP/UDP destination port

load-balance (E-Series)
e By default, for E-Series chassis, FTOS uses an IP 5-tuple to distribute IP traffic over members of a Port
Channel as well as equal cost paths. To designate another method to balance traffic over Port Channel
members, use the load-balance command.

Syntax load-balance [ip-selection 3-tuple | ip-selection packet-based] [mac]

To return to the default setting (IP 5-tuple), use one of the following commands:
• no load-balance ip-selection 3-tuple
• no load-balance ip-selection packet-based
• no load-balance mac

Parameters
ip-selection 3-tuple Enter the keywords ip-selection 3-tuple to distribute IP traffic based
on the following criteria:
• IP source address
• IP destination address
• IP Protocol type
Note: For IPV6, only the first 32 bits (LSB) of IP SA and IP DA are
used for hash generation.
ip-selection packet-based Enter the keywords ip-selection packet-based to distribute IPV4
traffic based on the IP Identification field in the IPV4 header.
This option does not affect IPV6 traffic; that is, IPV6 traffic is not
distributed when this command is executed.
Note: Hash-based load-balancing on MPLS does not work when
packet-based hashing (load-balance ip-selection
packet-based) is enabled.
mac Enter the keyword mac to distribute traffic based on the following:
• MAC source address, and
• MAC destination address.

Defaults IP 5-tuple (IP SA, IP DA, IP Protocol Type, Source Port and Destination Port)

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

IPv4 Routing | 553

 Usage By default, FTOS distributes incoming traffic based on a hash algorithm using the following criteria:
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Information
• IP source address
• IP destination address
• IP Protocol type
• TCP/UDP source port
• TCP/UDP destination port

Note: For IPV6, only the first 32 bits (LSB) of IP Source Address and IP Destination
Address are used for hash generation.

The table below lists the load balance command options and how the command combinations effect the
distribution of traffic.
Table 18-3. Configurations of the load-balance Command

Routed IP Traffic Switched Non-IP

Configuration Switched IP Traffic
(IPV4 Only) Traffic
Default (IP 5-tuple) IP 5-tuple IP 5-tuple MAC based
ip-selection 3-tuple IP 3-tuple IP 3-tuple MAC based
mac MAC based IP 5-tuple MAC based
ip-selection 3-tuple and mac MAC based IP 3-tuple MAC based
Packet based: IPV4
ip-selection packet-based Packet based: IPV4 MAC based
No distribution: IPV6
ip-selection packet-based and mac MAC based Packet based: IPV4 MAC based

Related
Commands ip address Change the algorithm used to distribute traffic on an E-Series chassis.

management route
ce Configure a static route that points to the Management interface or a forwarding router.

Syntax management route ip-address mask {forwarding-router-address | managementethernet}

To remove a static route, use the no management route ip-address mask
{forwarding-router-address | managementethernet} command.

Parameters
ip-address mask Enter an IP address (dotted decimal format) and mask (/prefix
format) as the IP address for the Management interface.
forwarding-router-address Enter an IP address (dotted decimal format) of a forwarding router.
managementethernet Enter the keyword managementethernet for the
Management interface on the Primary RPM.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

554 | IPv4 Routing

 Command
Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on S55.
History
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage When a static route (or a protocol route) overlaps with Management static route, the static route (or a
Information protocol route) is preferred over the Management Static route. Also, Management static routes and the
Management Connected prefix are not reflected in the hardware routing tables.

Related
interface ManagementEthernet Configure the Management port on the system (either the Primary or
Commands
Standby RPM).
duplex (Management) Set the mode of the Management interface.
speed (Management interface) Set the speed for the Management interface.

show arp
ces Display the ARP table.

Syntax show arp [vrf vrf name][interface interface | ip ip-address [mask] | macaddress mac-address
[mac-address mask]] [cpu {cp | rp1 | rp2}] [static | dynamic] [summary]

Parameters
vrf name E-Series Only: Show only the ARP cache entries tied to the VRF process.
cpu (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword cpu with one of the following keywords to
view ARP entries on that CPU:
• cp - view ARP entries on the control processer.
• rp1 - view ARP entries on Routing Processor 1.
• rp2 - view ARP entries on Routing Processor 2.
interface interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number
information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For the Management interface, enter the keyword
managementethernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by
a number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.
ip ip-address mask (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ip followed by an IP address in the dotted
decimal format. Enter the optional IP address mask in the slash prefix format (/
x).

IPv4 Routing | 555

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

macaddress (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword macaddress followed by a MAC address in

mac-address mask nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. Enter the optional MAC address mask in
nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format also.
static (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword static to view entries entered manually.
dynamic (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dynamic to view dynamic entries.
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view a summary of ARP
entries.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Support 4094 VLANs on E-Series ExaScale (prior limit was 2094)
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.9.1.0 Introduced VRF on the E-Series
Version 7.8.1.0 Augmented to display local ARP entries learned from private VLANs (PVLANs)
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage The following figure shows two VLANs that are associated with a private VLAN (PVLAN) (see
Information Chapter 32, Private VLAN (PVLAN)), a feature added for C-Series and S-Series in FTOS
7.8.1.0.

Example Figure 18-5. show arp Command Example (Partial)

FTOS>show arp

Protocol Address Age(min) Hardware Address Interface VLAN CPU

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Internet 192.2.1.254 1 00:00:c0:02:01:02 Gi 9/13 - CP
Internet 192.2.1.253 1 00:00:c0:02:01:02 Gi 9/13 - CP
Internet 192.2.1.252 1 00:00:c0:02:01:02 Gi 9/13 - CP
Internet 192.2.1.251 1 00:00:c0:02:01:02 Gi 9/13 - CP
Internet 192.2.1.250 1 00:00:c0:02:01:02 Gi 9/13 - CP
Internet 192.2.1.251 1 00:00:c0:02:01:02 Gi 9/13 - CP
Internet 192.2.1.250 1 00:00:c0:02:01:02 Gi 9/13 - CP
Internet 192.2.1.249 1 00:00:c0:02:01:02 Gi 9/13 - CP
Internet 192.2.1.248 1 00:00:c0:02:01:02 Gi 9/13 - CP
Internet 192.2.1.247 1 00:00:c0:02:01:02 Gi 9/13 - CP
Internet 192.2.1.246 1 00:00:c0:02:01:02 Gi 9/13 - CP
Internet 192.2.1.245 1 00:00:c0:02:01:02 Gi 9/13 - CP

556 | IPv4 Routing

Figure 18-6. show arp Command Example with Private VLAN data
FTOS#show arp

Protocol Address Age(min) Hardware Address Interface VLAN CPU

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Internet 5.5.5.1 - 00:01:e8:43:96:5e - Vl 10 pv 200 CP
Internet 5.5.5.10 - 00:01:e8:44:99:55 - Vl 10 CP
Internet 10.1.2.4 1 00:01:e8:d5:9e:e2 Ma 0/0 - CP
Internet 10.10.10.4 1 00:01:e8:d5:9e:e2 Ma 0/0 - CP
Internet 10.16.127.53 1 00:01:e8:d5:9e:e2 Ma 0/0 - CP
Internet 10.16.134.254 20 00:01:e8:d5:9e:e2 Ma 0/0 - CP
Internet 133.33.33.4 1 00:01:e8:d5:9e:e2 Ma 0/0 - CP
Line 1 shows community VLAN 200 (in primary VLAN 10) in
a PVLAN.

Line 2 shows primary VLAN 10.

Figure 18-7. show arp cpu cp Command Example

FTOS#sho arp cpu cp

Protocol Address Age(min) Hardware Address Interface VLAN CPU

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Internet 10.1.2.206 0 00:a0:80:00:15:b8 Ma 0/0 - CP
Internet 182.16.1.20 0 00:30:19:24:2d:70 Gi 8/0 - CP
Internet 100.10.10.10 0 00:30:19:4f:d3:80 Gi 8/12 - CP
Internet 10.1.2.209 12 00:a0:80:00:12:6c Ma 0/0 - CP
FTOS#

Table 18-4. show arp Command Example Fields

Row Heading Description

Protocol Displays the protocol type.
Address Displays the IP address of the ARP entry.
Age(min) Displays the age in minutes of the ARP entry.
Hardware Address Displays the MAC address associated with the ARP entry.
Interface Displays the first two letters of the interfaces type and the slot/port
associated with the ARP entry.
VLAN Displays the VLAN ID, if any, associated with the ARP entry.
CPU Lists which CPU the entries are stored on.

Figure 18-8. show arp summary Command Example

FTOS# show arp summary

Total Entries Static Entries Dynamic Entries CPU

------------------------------------------------------
83 0 83 CP
FTOS

IPv4 Routing | 557

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Table 18-5. show arp summary Command Example Fields

Row Heading Description

Total Entries Lists the total number of ARP entries in the ARP table.
Static Entries Lists the total number of configured or static ARP entries.
Dynamic Entries Lists the total number of learned or dynamic ARP entries.
CPU Lists which CPU the entries are stored on.

Related
ip local-proxy-arp Enable/disable Layer 3 communication in secondary VLANs.
Commands
switchport mode Set the PVLAN mode of the selected port.
private-vlan

show arp retries

ces Display the configured number of ARP retries.

Syntax show arp retries

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced

Related
arp retries Set the number of ARP retries in case the system does not receive an ARP reply
Commands
in response to an ARP request.

show hosts
ces View the host table and DNS configuration.

Syntax show hosts

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

558 | IPv4 Routing

 Example Figure 18-9. show hosts Command Example
FTOS#show hosts
Default domain is not set
Name/address lookup uses static mappings
Name servers are not set
Host Flags TTL Type Address
-------- ----- ---- ---- -------
ks (perm, OK) - IP 2.2.2.2
4200-1 (perm, OK) - IP 192.68.69.2
1230-3 (perm, OK) - IP 192.68.99.2
ZZr (perm, OK) - IP 192.71.18.2
Z10-3 (perm, OK) - IP 192.71.23.1
FTOS#

Table 18-6. show hosts Command Example Fields

Field Description
Default domain... Displays the domain name (if configured).
Name/address lookup... States if DNS is enabled on the system.
If DNS is enabled, the Name/Address lookup is domain service.
If DNS is not enabled, the Name/Address lookup is static mapping.
Name servers are... Lists the name servers, if configured.
Host Displays the host name assigned to the IP address.
Flags Classifies the entry as one of the following:
• perm - the entry was manually configured and will not time out
• temp - the entry was learned and will time out after 72 hours of inactivity.
Also included in the flag is an indication of the validity of the route:
• ok - the entry is valid.
• ex - the entry expired.
• ?? - the entry is suspect.
TTL Displays the amount of time until the entry ages out of the cache. For dynamically
learnt entries only.
Type Displays IP as the type of entry.
Address Displays the IP address(es) assigned to the host.

Related
traceroute View DNS resolution
Commands
ip host Configure a host.

show ip cam linecard

ce View CAM entries for a port pipe on a line card.

Syntax show ip cam linecard number port-set pipe-number [ip-address mask [longer-prefixes] |
index index-number | summary | vrf vrf instance]

IPv4 Routing | 559

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

number Enter the number of the line card.

Range: 0 to 13 on a E1200/1200i, 0 to 6 on a E600600i, and 0 to 5 on a E300.
pipe-number Enter the number of the line card’s port-pipe.
Range: 0 to 1
ip-address mask (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address and mask of a route to CAM entries for that route
[longer-prefix] only.
Enter the keyword longer-prefixes to view routes with a common prefix.
index (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword index followed by the CAM index number.
index-number Range: depends on CAM size
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view a table listing route prefixes
and the total number of routes that can be entered into the CAM.
vrf instance (OPTIONAL) E-Series Only: Enter the keyword vrf following by the VRF Instance
name to show CAM information as it applies to that VRF instance.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.1.1.2 E-Series ExaScale E600i supported
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.9.1.0 Introduced VRF on the E-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 18-10. show ip cam Command Example on E-Series

FTOS#show ip cam linecard 13 port-set 0

Index Destination EC CG V C Next-Hop VId Mac-Addr Port

------ --------------- -- -- - - --------------- ---- ---------------- -------
3276 6.6.6.2 0 0 1 1 0.0.0.0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 17c1 CP
3277 5.5.5.2 0 0 1 1 0.0.0.0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 17c1 CP
3278 4.4.4.2 0 0 1 1 0.0.0.0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 17c1 CP
3279 3.3.3.2 0 0 1 1 0.0.0.0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 17c1 CP
3280 2.2.2.2 0 0 1 1 0.0.0.0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 17c1 CP
11144 6.6.6.0 0 0 1 1 0.0.0.0 6 00:00:00:00:00:00 17c5 RP2
11145 5.5.5.0 0 0 1 1 0.0.0.0 5 00:00:00:00:00:00 17c5 RP2
11146 4.4.4.0 0 0 1 1 0.0.0.0 4 00:00:00:00:00:00 17c5 RP2
11147 3.3.3.0 0 0 1 1 0.0.0.0 3 00:00:00:00:00:00 17c5 RP2
11148 2.2.2.0 0 0 1 1 0.0.0.0 2 00:00:00:00:00:00 17c5 RP2
65535 0.0.0.0 0 0 1 1 0.0.0.0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 17c5 RP2
FTOS#

Table 18-7. show ip cam Command Example Fields

Field Description
Index Displays the CAM index number of the entry.
Destination Displays the destination route of the index.
EC Displays the number of equal cost multipaths (ECMP) available for the default route for
non-Jumbo line cards.
Displays 0,1 when ECMP is more than 8, for Jumbo line cards.
CG Displays 0.
V Displays a 1 if the entry is valid and a 0 if the entry is for a line card with Catalog number
beginning with LC-EF.

560 | IPv4 Routing

 Table 18-7. show ip cam Command Example Fields (continued)

Field Description
C Displays the CPU bit.
1 indicates that a packet hitting this entry is forwarded to the CP or RP2, depending on
Egress port.
Next-Hop Displays the next hop IP address of the entry.
VId Displays the VLAN ID. If the entry is 0, the entry is not part of a VLAN.
Mac Addr Displays the next-hop router’s MAC address.
Port Displays the egress interface. Use the second half of the entry to determine the interface.
For example, in the entry 17cl CP, the CP is the pertinent portion.
CP = control processor
RP2 = route processor 2
Gi = Gigabit Ethernet interface
So = SONET interface
Te = 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface

Example Figure 18-11. show ip cam summary Command Example

FTOS#show ip cam linecard 4 port-set 0 summary
Total Number of Routes in the CAM is 13
Total Number of Routes which can be entered in CAM is 131072

Prefix Len Current Use Initial Sz

---------- ----------- ----------
32 7 37994
31 0 1312
30 0 3932
29 0 1312
28 0 1312
27 0 1312
26 0 1312
25 0 1312
24 6 40610
23 0 3932
22 0 2622
21 0 2622
20 0 2622
19 0 2622
18 0 1312
17 0 1312
16 0 3932
15 0 1312
14 0 1312
13 0 1312
12 0 1312
11 0 1312
10 0 1312
9 0 1312
8 0 1312
7 0 1312
6 0 1312
5 0 1312
4 0 1312
3 0 1312
2 0 1312
1 0 1312
0 0 8
FTOS#

IPv4 Routing | 561

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Table 18-8. show ip cam summary Command Example Fields

Field Description
Prefix Length Displays the prefix-length or mask for the IP address configured on the linecard 0 port pipe
0.
Current Use Displays the number of routes currently configured for the corresponding prefix or mask on
the linecard 0 port pipe 0.
Initial Size Displays the CAM size allocated by FTOS for the corresponding mask. The CAM size is
adjusted by FTOS if the number of routes for the mask exceeds the initial allocation.

show ip cam stack-unit

s Display content-addressable memory (CAM) entries for an S-Series switch.

Syntax show ip cam stack-unit id port-set pipe-number [ip-address mask [longer-prefixes] |

summary]

Parameters
id Enter the stack-unit ID.
Unit ID range:
S60: 0-11
all other S-Series: 0-7
pipe-number Enter the number of the Port-Pipe number.
S50n, S50V range: 0 to 1; S25N, S25P, S25V range: 0 to 0
ip-address mask (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address and mask of a route to CAM entries for that route
[longer-prefix] only.
Enter the keyword longer-prefixes to view routes with a common prefix.
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view a table listing route prefixes
and the total number routes which can be entered in to CAM.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Modified: Added support for up to seven stack members.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Example Figure 18-12. show ip cam stack-unit Command Example

FTOS#show ip cam stack-unit 0 port-set 0 10.10.10.10/32 longer-prefixes

Destination EC CG V C VId Mac-Addr Port

----------------- -- -- - - ----- ----------------- -------------

10.10.10.10 0 0 1 1 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 3f01 CP

FTOS#

562 | IPv4 Routing

 Table 18-9. show ip cam Command Example Fields

Field Description
Destination Displays the destination route of the index.
EC Displays the number of equal cost multipaths (ECMP) available for the default route for
non-Jumbo line cards.
Displays 0,1 when ECMP is more than 8, for Jumbo line cards.
CG Displays 0.
V Displays a 1 if the entry is valid and a 0 otherwise.
C Displays the CPU bit.
1 indicates that a packet hitting this entry is forwarded to the control processor, depending
on Egress port.
V Id Displays the VLAN ID. If the entry is 0, the entry is not part of a VLAN.
Mac Addr Displays the next-hop router’s MAC address.
Port Displays the egress interface. Use the second half of the entry to determine the interface.
For example, in the entry 17cl CP, the CP is the pertinent portion.
CP = control processor
Gi = Gigabit Ethernet interface
Te = 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface

show ip fib linecard

ce View all Forwarding Information Base (FIB) entries.

Syntax show ip fib linecard slot-number [vrf vrf instance | ip-address/prefix-list | summary]

Parameters
vrf instance (OPTIONAL) E-Series Only: Enter the keyword vrf followed by the VRF INstance
name to show the FIB cache entries tied to that VRF instance.
slot-number Enter the number of the line card slot.
C-Series Range: 0-7
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on a E1200, 0 to 6 on a E600/E600i, 0 to 5 on a E300
ip-address mask (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the network destination to view only
information on that destination.
You must enter the IP address is dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). You must enter
the mask in slash prefix format (/X).
longer-prefixes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword longer-prefixes to view all routes with a
common prefix.
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view the total number of prefixes in
the FIB.

Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.9.1.0 Introduced VRF on the E-Series

IPv4 Routing | 563

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series

pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 18-13. show ip fib linecard Command Example

FTOS>show ip fib linecard 12

Destination Gateway First-Hop Mac-Addr Port VId Index EC

-------------------- -------------------------- -------------- ---------------- ------- -------------
3.0.0.0/8 via 100.10.10.10, So 2/8 100.10.10.10 00:01:e8:00:03:ff So 2/8 0 60260 0
3.0.0.0/8 via 101.10.10.10, So 2/9
100.10.10.0/24 Direct, So 2/8 0.0.0.0 00:01:e8:00:03:ff So 2/8 0 11144 0
100.10.10.1/32 via 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1 00:00:00:00:00:00 CP 0 3276 0
100.10.10.10/32 via 100.10.10.10, So 2/8 100.10.10.10 00:01:e8:00:03:ff So 2/8 0 0 0
101.10.10.0/24 Direct, So 2/9 0.0.0.0 00:00:00:00:00:00 RP2 0 11145 0
101.10.10.1/32 via 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1 00:00:00:00:00:00 CP 0 3277 0
101.10.10.10/32 via 101.10.10.10, So 2/9 101.10.10.10 00:01:e8:01:62:32 So 2/9 0 1 0
FTOS>

Table 18-10. show ip fib linecard Command Example Fields

Field Description
Destination Lists the destination IP address.
Gateway Displays either the word direct and an interface for a directly
connected route or the remote IP address to be used to forward the traffic.
First-Hop Displays the first hop IP address.
Mac-Addr Displays the MAC address.
Port Displays the egress-port information.
VId Displays the VLAN ID. If no VLAN is assigned, zero (0) is listed.
Index Displays the internal interface number.
EC Displays the number of ECMP paths.

Related
clear ip fib linecard Clear FIB entries on a specified line card.
Commands

show ip fib stack-unit

s View all Forwarding Information Base (FIB) entries.

Syntax show ip fib stack-unit id [ip-address [mask] [longer-prefixes] | summary]

Parameters
id Enter the S-Series stack unit ID.Unit ID range:
S60: 0-11
all other S-Series: 0-7
ip-address mask (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the network destination to view only
information on that destination.
Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). You must enter the mask in
slash prefix format (/X).

564 | IPv4 Routing

 longer-prefixes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword longer-prefixes to view all routes with a
common prefix.
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view the total number of prefixes in
the FIB.

Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Modified: Added support for up to seven stack members.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Example Figure 18-14. show ip fib linecard Command Example

FTOS#show ip fib stack-unit 0

Destination Gateway First-Hop Mac-Addr Port VId EC

------------------ --------------------------- ----------------- ------------------- -------- ----- --

10.10.10.10/32 Direct, Nu 0 0.0.0.0 00:00:00:00:00:00 BLK HOLE 0 0

FTOS>

Table 18-11. show ip fib linecard Command Example Fields

Field Description
Destination Lists the destination IP address.
Gateway Displays either the word Direct and an interface for a directly connected route or the
remote IP address to be used to forward the traffic.
First-Hop Displays the first hop IP address.
Mac-Addr Displays the MAC address.
Port Displays the egress-port information.
VId Displays the VLAN ID. If no VLAN is assigned, zero (0) is listed.
EC Displays the number of ECMP paths.

Related
clear ip fib linecard Clear FIB entries on a specified line card.
Commands

show ip flow
ces Show how a Layer 3 packet is forwarded when it arrives at a particular interface.

Syntax show ip flow interface [vrf vrf instance] interface {source-ip address destination-ip address}
{protocol number [tcp | udp] | icmp} {src-port number destination-port number}

IPv4 Routing | 565

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

vrf instance E-Series Only: Show only the L3 flow as they apply to that VRF process.
interface interface Enter the keyword interface followed by of the following interface
keywords.
• For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword FastEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
GigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/
port information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
(OPTIONAL) Enter an in or out parameter in conjunction with the
optional interface:
source-ip address Enter the keyword source-ip followed by the IP source address in IP
address format.
destination-ip address Enter the keyword destination-ip followed by the IP destination address
in IP address format.
protocol number [tcp | E-Series only: Enter the keyword protocol followed by one of the protocol
udp] | icmp type
keywords: tcp, udp, icmp or protocol number
src-port number Enter the keyword src-port followed by the source port number.
destination-port number Enter the keyword destination-port followed by the destination port
number.

Command Modes EXEC

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.9.1.0 Introduced VRF on the E-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage This command provides egress port information for a given IP flow. This is useful in identifying which
Information interface the packet will follow in the case of Port-channel and Equal Cost Multi Paths. Use this
command for routed packed only. For switched packets use the show port-channel-flow command

show ip flow does not compute the egress port information when load-balance mac hashing is
also configured due to insufficient information (the egress MAC is not available).

S-Series produces the following error message:

%Error: Unable to read IP route table

C-Series produces the message:

%Error: FIB cannot compute the egress port with the current trunk hash
setting.

566 | IPv4 Routing

 Example Figure 18-15. Command Example show ip flow on E-Series

FTOS#show ip flow interface Gi 1/8 189.1.1.1 63.0.0.1 protocol tcp source-port 7898 destination-port 8976

flow: 189.1.1.1 63.0.0.1 protocol 6 7868 8976

Ingress interface: Gi 1/20
Egress interface: Gi 1/14 to 1.7.1.2[CAM hit 103710] unfragmented packet
Gi 1/10 to 1.2.1.2[CAM hit 103710] fragmented packet

show ip interface
ces View IP-related information on all interfaces.

Syntax show ip interface [interface | brief | linecard slot-number] [configuration]

Parameter
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed
by the slot/port information.
• For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword Loopback followed by a number
from 0 to 16383.
• For the Management interface, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet
followed by zero (0).
• For the Null interface, enter the keyword null followed by zero (0).
• For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a
number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to view a brief summary of the interfaces and
whether an IP address is assigned.
linecard (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword linecard followed by the number of the line card
slot-number slot.
C-Series Range: 0-7
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on a E1200/1200i, 0 to 6 on a E600/E600i, and 0 to 5 on a
E300
Note: This keyword is not available on the S-Series.
configuration (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword configuration to display the physical interfaces
with non-default configurations only.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.2 Supported on E-Series ExaScale E600i
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale

IPv4 Routing | 567

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 18-16. show ip interface Command Example

FTOS#show ip int te 0/0

TenGigabitEthernet 0/0 is down, line protocol is down
Internet address is not set
IP MTU is 1500 bytes
Inbound access list is not set
Proxy ARP is enabled
Split Horizon is enabled
Poison Reverse is disabled
ICMP redirects are not sent
ICMP unreachables are not sent

FTOS#

Table 18-12. show ip interface Command Example Items

Lines Description
TenGigabitEthernet 0/0... Displays the interface’s type, slot/port and physical and line protocol
status.
Internet address... States whether an IP address is assigned to the interface. If one is, that
address is displayed.
IP MTU is... Displays IP MTU value.
Inbound access... Displays the name of the any configured incoming access list. If none is
configured, the phrase “not set” is displayed.
Proxy ARP... States whether proxy ARP is enabled on the interface.
Split horizon... States whether split horizon for RIP is enabled on the interface.
Poison Reverse... States whether poison for RIP is enabled on the interface
ICMP redirects... States if ICMP redirects are sent.
ICMP unreachables... States if ICMP unreachable messages are sent.

Figure 18-17. show ip interface brief Command Example (Partial)

FTOS#show ip int brief

Interface IP-Address OK? Method Status Protocol
GigabitEthernet 1/0 unassigned NO Manual administratively down down
GigabitEthernet 1/1 unassigned NO Manual administratively down down
GigabitEthernet 1/2 unassigned YES Manual up up
GigabitEthernet 1/3 unassigned YES Manual up up
GigabitEthernet 1/4 unassigned YES Manual up up
GigabitEthernet 1/5 10.10.10.1 YES Manual up up
GigabitEthernet 1/6 unassigned NO Manual administratively down down

568 | IPv4 Routing

 Table 18-13. show ip interface brief Column Headings

Field Description
Interface Displays type of interface and the associated slot and port number.
IP-Address Displays the IP address for the interface, if configured.
Ok? Indicates if the hardware is functioning properly.
Method Displays Manual if the configuration is read from the saved configuration.
Status States whether the interface is enabled (up) or disabled (administratively
down).
Protocol States whether IP is enabled (up) or disabled (down) on the interface.

show ip management-route
ce View the IP addresses assigned to the Management interface.

Syntax show ip management-route [all | connected | summary | static]

Parameters
all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to view all IP addresses assigned to all
Management interfaces on the switch.
connected (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword connected to view only routes directly
connected to the Management interface.
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view a table listing the number
of active and non-active routes and their sources.
static (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword static to view non-active routes also.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on S55.
History
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60.
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 18-18. show ip management route Command Example

FTOS#show ip management-route

Destination Gateway State

----------- ------- -----
10.1.2.0/24 ManagementEthernet 0/0 Connected
172.16.1.0/24 10.1.2.4 Active

FTOS#

IPv4 Routing | 569

 show ip protocols
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces View information on all routing protocols enabled and active on the switch.

Syntax show ip protocols

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Regular evaluation optimization enabled/disabled added to display output
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 18-19. show ip protocols Command Example

FTOS#show ip protocols
Routing Protocol is "bgp 1"
Cluster Id is set to 20.20.20.3
Router Id is set to 20.20.20.3
Fast-external-fallover enabled
Regular expression evaluation optimization enabled
Capable of ROUTE_REFRESH
For Address Family IPv4 Unicast
BGP table version is 0, main routing table version 0
Distance: external 20 internal 200 local 200
Neighbor(s):
Address : 20.20.20.2
Filter-list in : foo
Route-map in : foo
Weight : 0
Address : 5::6
Weight : 0
FTOS#

show ip route
ces View information, including how they were learned, about the IP routes on the switch.

Syntax show ip route [vrf [vrf name] hostname | ip-address [mask] [longer-prefixes] | list prefix-list |
protocol [process-id | routing-tag] | all | connected | static | summary]

Parameter
vrf name E-Series Only: Clear only the route entries tied to the VRF process.
ip-address (OPTIONAL) Specify a name of a device or the IP address of the device to view
more detailed information about the route.
mask (OPTIONAL) Specify the network mask of the route. Use this parameter with
the IP address parameter.
longer-prefixes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword longer-prefixes to view all routes with a
common prefix.
list prefix-list (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword list and the name of a configured prefix list.
See show ip route list.

570 | IPv4 Routing

 protocol (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of a routing protocol (bgp, isis, ospf, rip) or
the keywords connected or static.
bgp, isis, ospf, rip are E-Series-only options.
If you enter bgp, you can include the BGP as-number. (E-Series only)
If you enter isis, you can include the ISIS routing-tag. (E-Series only)
If you enter ospf, you can include the OSPF process-id.
process-id (OPTIONAL) Specify that only OSPF routes with a certain process ID must be
displayed.
routing-tag (OPTIONAL) Specify that only ISIS routes with a certain routing tag must be
displayed.
connected (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword connected to view only the directly
connected routes.
all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to view both active and non-active routes.
static (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword static to view only routes configured by the
ip route command.
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary. See show ip route summary.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.9.1.0 Introduced VRF on the E-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 18-20. show ip route all Command Example

FTOS#show ip route all

Codes: C - connected, S - static, R - RIP

B - BGP, IN - internal BGP, EX - external BGP, LO - Locally Originated
O - OSPF, IA - OSPF inter area N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1
N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2, E1 - OSPF external type 1
E2 - OSPF external type 2, i - IS-IS, L1 - IS-IS level-1
L2 - IS-IS level-2, IA - IS-IS inter area, * - candidate default
> - non-active route + - summary route

Gateway of last resort is not set

Destination Gateway Dist/Metric Last Change

----------- ------- ----------- -----------
R 3.0.0.0/8 via 100.10.10.10, So 2/8 120/1 00:07:12
via 101.10.10.10, So 2/9
C 100.10.10.0/24 Direct, So 2/8 0/0 00:08:54
> R 100.10.10.0/24 Direct, So 2/8 120/0 00:08:54
C 101.10.10.0/24 Direct, So 2/9 0/0 00:09:15
> R 101.10.10.0/24 Direct, So 2/9 120/0 00:09:15
FTOS#

IPv4 Routing | 571

 Example Figure 18-21. show ip route summary and show ip route static Command Examples
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show ip route summary

Route Source Active Routes Non-active Routes

connected 2 0
static 1 0
Total 3 0
Total 3 active route(s) using 612 bytes
R1_E600i>show ip route static ?
| Pipe through a command
<cr>
R1_E600i>show ip route static
Destination Gateway Dist/Metric Last Change
----------- ------- ----------- -----------
*S 0.0.0.0/0 via 10.10.91.9, Gi 1/2 1/0 3d2h
FTOS>

Table 18-14. show ip route all Command Example Fields

Field Description
(undefined) Identifies the type of route:
• C = connected
• S = static
• R = RIP
• B = BGP
• IN = internal BGP
• EX = external BGP
• LO = Locally Originated
• O = OSPF
• IA = OSPF inter area
• N1 = OSPF NSSA external type 1
• N2 = OSPF NSSA external type 2
• E1 = OSPF external type 1
• E2 = OSPF external type 2
• i = IS-IS
• L1 = IS-IS level-1
• L2 = IS-IS level-2
• IA = IS-IS inter-area
• * = candidate default
• > = non-active route
• + = summary routes
Destination Identifies the route’s destination IP address.
Gateway Identifies whether the route is directly connected and on which interface the route is
configured.
Dist/Metric Identifies if the route has a specified distance or metric.
Last Change Identifies when the route was last changed or configured.

show ip route list

ces Display IP routes in an IP prefix list.

Syntax show ip route list prefix-list

572 | IPv4 Routing

 Parameters
prefix-list Enter the name of a configured prefix list.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Related
ip prefix-list Enter the CONFIGURATION-IP PREFIX-LIST mode and configure a
Commands
prefix list.
show ip prefix-list summary Display a summary of the configured prefix lists.

Example Figure 18-22. show ip route summary Command Example

FTOS#show ip route list test

Codes: C - connected, S - static, R - RIP,

B - BGP, IN - internal BGP, EX - external BGP,LO - Locally Originated,
O - OSPF, IA - OSPF inter area, N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1,
N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2, E1 - OSPF external type 1,
E2 - OSPF external type 2, i - IS-IS, L1 - IS-IS level-1,
L2 - IS-IS level-2, IA - IS-IS inter area, * - candidate default,
> - non-active route, + - summary route

Gateway of last resort is not set

Destination Gateway Dist/Metric Last Change

----------- ------- ----------- -----------
R 2.1.0.0/24 via 2.1.4.1, Gi 4/43 120/2 3d0h
R 2.1.1.0/24 via 2.1.4.1, Gi 4/43 120/2 3d1h
R 2.1.2.0/24 via 2.1.4.1, Gi 4/43 120/1 3d0h
R 2.1.3.0/24 via 2.1.4.1, Gi 4/43 120/1 3d1h
C 2.1.4.0/24 Direct, Gi 4/43 0/0 3d1h

show ip route summary

ces View a table summarizing the IP routes in the switch.

Syntax show ip route summary

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

IPv4 Routing | 573

 Example Figure 18-23. show ip route summary Command Example
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS>show ip route summary

Route Source Active Routes Non-active Routes

connected 17 0
static 3 0
ospf 100 1368 2
Intra-area: 762 Inter-area: 1 External-1: 600 External-2: 5
Total 1388 2
Total 1388 active route(s) using 222440 bytes
Total 2 non-active route(s) using 128 bytes
FTOS>

Table 18-15. show ip route summary Column Headings

Column Heading Description

Route Source Identifies how the route is configured in FTOS.

Active Routes Identifies the best route if a route is learned from two protocol sources.
Non-active Routes Identifies the back-up routes when a route is learned by two different protocols. If the
best route or active route goes down, the non-active route will become the best route.
ospf 100 If routing protocols (OSPF, RIP) are configured and routes are advertised, then
information on those routes is displayed.
Total 1388 active... Displays the number of active and non-active routes and the memory usage of those
routes.
If there are no routes configured in the FTOS, this line does not appear.

Related
show ip route Display information about the routes found in switch.
Commands

show ip traffic
ces View IP, ICMP, UDP, TCP and ARP traffic statistics.

Syntax show ip traffic [all | cp | rp1 | rp2]

Note: These options are supported only on the E-Series.

Parameters
all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to view statistics from all processors.
If you do not enter a keyword, you also view all statistics from all processors.
cp (OPTIONAL) Enter the cp to view only statistics from the Control Processor.
rp1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp1 to view only the statistics from Route Processor 1.
rp2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp2 to view only the statistics from Route Processor 2.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series

574 | IPv4 Routing

 Version 6.5.1.0 F10 Monitoring MIB available for ip traffic statistics
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 18-24. show ip traffic Command Example (partial)

FTOS#show ip traffic
Control Processor IP Traffic:

IP statistics:
Rcvd: 23857 total, 23829 local destination
0 format errors, 0 checksum errors, 0 bad hop count
0 unknown protocol, 0 not a gateway
0 security failures, 0 bad options
Frags: 0 reassembled, 0 timeouts, 0 too big
0 fragmented, 0 couldn't fragment
Bcast: 28 received, 0 sent; Mcast: 0 received, 0 sent
Sent: 16048 generated, 0 forwarded
21 encapsulation failed, 0 no route
ICMP statistics:
Rcvd: 0 format errors, 0 checksum errors, 0 redirects, 0 unreachable
0 echo, 0 echo reply, 0 mask requests, 0 mask replies, 0 quench
0 parameter, 0 timestamp, 0 info request, 0 other
Sent: 0 redirects, 0 unreachable, 0 echo, 0 echo reply
0 mask requests, 0 mask replies, 0 quench, 0 timestamp
0 info reply, 0 time exceeded, 0 parameter problem
UDP statistics:
Rcvd: 0 total, 0 checksum errors, 0 no port
0 short packets, 0 bad length, 0 no port broadcasts, 0 socket full
Sent: 0 total, 0 forwarded broadcasts
TCP statistics:
Rcvd: 23829 total, 0 checksum errors, 0 no port
Sent: 16048 total
ARP statistics:
Rcvd: 156 requests, 11 replies
Sent: 21 requests, 10 replies (0 proxy)
Routing Processor1 IP Traffic:

Table 18-16. show ip traffic output definitions

Keyword Definition
unknown protocol... No receiver for these packets. Counts those packets whose protocol type field is not
recognized by FTOS.
not a gateway... Packets can not be routed; host/network is unreachable.
security failures... Counts the number of received unicast/multicast packets that could not be forwarded
due to:
• route not found for unicast/multicast; ingress interfaces do not belong to the
destination multicast group
• destination IP address belongs to reserved prefixes; host/network unreachable
bad options... Unrecognized IP option on a received packet.
Frags: IP fragments received.
... reassembled Number of IP fragments that were reassembled.
... timeouts Number of times a timer expired on a reassembled queue.
... too big Number of invalid IP fragments received.
... couldn’t fragment Number of packets that could not be fragmented and forwarded.
...encapsulation failed Counts those packets which could not be forwarded due to ARP resolution failure.
FTOS sends an arp request prior to forwarding an IP packet. If a reply is not
received, FTOS repeats the request three times. These packets are counted in
encapsulation failed.
Rcvd:

IPv4 Routing | 575

 Table 18-16. show ip traffic output definitions
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Keyword Definition
...short packets The number of bytes in the packet are too small.
...bad length The length of the packet was not correct.
...no port broadcasts The incoming broadcast/multicast packet did not have any listener.
...socket full The applications buffer was full and the incoming packet had to be dropped.

Usage The F10 Monitoring MIB provides access to the statistics described below.
Information
Table 18-17. F10 Monitoring MIB

Command Display Object OIDs

IP statistics:
Bcast:
Received f10BcastPktRecv 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.3.5.1.1
Sent f10BcastPktSent 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.3.5.1.2
Mcast:
Received f10McastPktRecv 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.3.5.1.3
Sent f10McastPktSent 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.3.5.1.4
ARP statistics:
Rcvd:
Request f10ArpReqRecv 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.3.5.2.1
Replies f10ArpReplyRecv 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.3.5.2.3
Sent:
Request f10ArpReqSent 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.3.5.2.2
Replies f10ArpReplySent 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.3.5.2.4
Proxy f10ArpProxySent 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.3.5.2.5

show protocol-termination-table
e Display the IP Packet Termination Table (IPPTT).

Syntax show protocol-termination-table linecard number port-set port-pipe-number

Parameters
linecard number Enter the keyword linecard followed by slot number of the line card.
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on a E1200/1200i, 0 to 6 on a E600/E600i,
and 0 to 5 on a E300
port-set port-pipe-number Enter the keyword port-set followed by the line card’s Port-Pipe
number.
Range: 0 to 1

Defaults No default behavior or values

576 | IPv4 Routing

Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.1.1.2 Introduced support for E-Series ExaScale E600i
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 6.4.1.0 Introduced

Example Figure 18-25. show protocol-termination-table Command Output

FTOS#show protocol-termination-table linecard 2 port-set 0
Index Protocol Src-Port Dst-Port Queue DP Blk-Hole VlanCPU EgPort
----- -------- -------- -------- ----- -- -------- ---------- ------
0 ICMP any any Q0 0 No - CP
1 UDP any 1812 Q7 6 No - CP
2 UDP any 68 Q7 6 No - CP
3 UDP any 67 Q7 6 No - CP
4 TCP any 22 Q7 6 No - CP
5 TCP 22 any Q7 6 No - CP
6 TCP 639 any Q7 6 No - RP2
7 TCP any 639 Q7 6 No - RP2
8 TCP 646 any Q7 6 No - RP1
9 TCP any 646 Q7 6 No - RP1
10 UDP 646 any Q7 6 No - RP1
11 UDP any 646 Q7 6 No - RP1
12 TCP 23 any Q7 6 No - CP
13 TCP any 23 Q7 6 No - CP
14 UDP any 123 Q7 6 No - CP
15 TCP any 21 Q7 6 No - CP
16 TCP any 20 Q7 6 No - CP
17 UDP any 21 Q7 6 No - CP
18 UDP any 20 Q7 6 No - CP
19 TCP 21 any Q7 6 No - CP
20 TCP 20 any Q7 6 No - CP
21 UDP 21 any Q7 6 No - CP
22 UDP 20 any Q7 6 No - CP
23 UDP any 69 Q7 6 No - CP
24 UDP 69 any Q7 6 No - CP
25 TCP any 161 Q7 6 No - CP
26 TCP 161 any Q7 6 No - CP
27 TCP 162 any Q7 6 No - CP
28 TCP any 162 Q7 6 No - CP
29 UDP any 161 Q7 6 No - CP
30 UDP 161 any Q7 6 No - CP
31 UDP any 162 Q7 6 No - CP
32 UDP 162 any Q7 6 No - CP
33 PIM-SM any any Q6 0 No - RP2
34 IGMP any any Q7 6 No - RP2
35 OSPF any any Q7 6 No - RP1
36 RSVP any any Q7 6 No - RP1
FTOS#

Usage The IPPTT table is used for looking up forwarding information for IP control traffic destined to the
Information router. For the listed control traffic types, IPPTT contains the information for the following:
• Which CPU to send the traffic (CP, RP1, or RP2)
• What QoS parameters to set

Related
Commands show ip cam stack-unit Display the CAM table

show tcp statistics

ces View information on TCP traffic through the switch.

Syntax show tcp statistics {all | cp | rp1 | rp2}

IPv4 Routing | 577

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

all Enter the keyword all to view all TCP information.

cp Enter the keyword cp to view only TCP information from the Control Processor.
rp1 Enter the keyword rp1 to view only TCP statistics from Route Processor 1.
rp2 Enter the keyword rp2 to view only TCP statistics from Route Processor 2.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 6.4.1.0 Introduced

Example Figure 18-26. show tcp statistics cp Command Example

FTOS#show tcp stat cp

Control Processor TCP:

Rcvd: 10585 Total, 0 no port
0 checksum error, 0 bad offset, 0 too short
329 packets (1263 bytes) in sequence
17 dup packets (6 bytes)
0 partially dup packets (0 bytes)
7 out-of-order packets (0 bytes)
0 packets ( 0 bytes) with data after window
0 packets after close
0 window probe packets, 41 window update packets
41 dup ack packets, 0 ack packets with unsend data
10184 ack packets (12439508 bytes)
Sent: 12007 Total, 0 urgent packets
25 control packets (including 24 retransmitted)
11603 data packets (12439677 bytes)
24 data packets (7638 bytes) retransmitted
355 ack only packets (41 delayed)
0 window probe packets, 0 window update packets
7 Connections initiated, 8 connections accepted, 15 connections established
14 Connections closed (including 0 dropped, 0 embryonic dropped)
20 Total rxmt timeout, 0 connections dropped in rxmt timeout
0 Keepalive timeout, 0 keepalive probe, 0 Connections dropped in keepalive
FTOS#

Table 18-18. show tcp statistics cp Command Example Fields

Field Description
Rcvd: Displays the number and types of TCP packets received by the switch.
• Total = total packets received
• no port = number of packets received with no designated port.
0 checksum error... Displays the number of packets received with the following:
• checksum errors
• bad offset to data
• too short
329 packets... Displays the number of packets and bytes received in sequence.
17 dup... Displays the number of duplicate packets and bytes received.
0 partially... Displays the number of partially duplicated packets and bytes received.
7 out-of-order... Displays the number of packets and bytes received out of order.
0 packets with data after Displays the number of packets and bytes received that exceed the switch’s
window window size.
0 packets after close Displays the number of packet received after the TCP connection was closed.

578 | IPv4 Routing

Table 18-18. show tcp statistics cp Command Example Fields (continued)

Field Description
0 window probe packets... Displays the number of window probe and update packets received.
41 dup ack... Displays the number of duplicate acknowledgement packets and
acknowledgement packets with data received.
10184 ack... Displays the number of acknowledgement packets and bytes received.
Sent: Displays the total number of TCP packets sent and the number of urgent packets
sent.
25 control packets... Displays the number of control packets sent and the number retransmitted.
11603 data packets... Displays the number of data packets sent.
24 data packets retransmitted Displays the number of data packets resent.
355 ack... Displays the number of acknowledgement packets sent and the number of packet
delayed.
0 window probe... Displays the number of window probe and update packets sent.
7 Connections initiated... Displays the number of TCP connections initiated, accepted, and established.
14 Connections closed... Displays the number of TCP connections closed, dropped.
20 Total rxmt... Displays the number of times the switch tried to resend data and the number of
connections dropped during the TCP retransmit timeout period.
0 Keepalive.... Lists the number of keepalive packets in timeout, the number keepalive probes
and the number of TCP connections dropped during keepalive.

IPv4 Routing | 579

 www.dell.com | dell.com/support

580
|
IPv4 Routing
 19
IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs)

Overview
IPv6 ACLs and IPv6 Route Map commands are supported on platforms c e s
• IPv6 ACL Commands
• IPv6 Route Map Commands
Note: For IPv4 ACL commands, see Chapter 9, Access Control Lists (ACL).

Important Points to Remember

• S-Series systems support Ingress IPv6 ACLs.
• The S60 supports both Ingress and Egress IPv6 ACLs.E-Series platforms require IPv6-ExtACL
CAM profile to support IPv6 ACLs.
• C-Series platforms require manual CAM usage space allotment. Refer to cam-acl later in this
document.
• Egress IPv6 ACL and IPv6 ACL on Loopback interface is not supported.
• Reference to an empty ACL will permit any traffic.
• ACLs are not applied to self-originated traffic (e.g. Control Protocol traffic not affected by IPv6
ACL since the routed bit is not set for Control Protocol traffic and for egress ACLs the routed bit
must be set).
• The same access list name can be used for both IPv4 and IPv6 ACLs.
• Both IPv4 and IPv6 ACLs can be applied on an interface at the same time.
• IPv6 ACLs can be applied on physical interfaces and a logical interfaces (Port-channel/VLAN).
• Non-contiguous masks are not supported in source or destination addresses in IPv6 ACL entries.
• Since prefix mask is specified in /x format in IPv6 ACLs, inverse mask is not supported.

IPv6 ACL Commands

The following commands configure IPv6 ACLs:
• cam-acl
• clear counters ipv6 access-group
• deny
• deny icmp
• deny tcp
• deny udp

IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs) | 581

 • ipv6 access-group
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

• ipv6 access-list
• permit
• permit icmp
• permit tcp
• permit udp
• remark
• resequence access-list
• resequence prefix-list ipv6
• seq
• show cam-acl
• show config
• show ipv6 accounting access-list
• show running-config acl
• test cam-usage

cam-acl
cs Allocate space for IPv6 ACLs.

Syntax cam-acl {default | l2acl 1-10 ipv4acl 1-10 ipv6acl 0-10 ipv4qos 1-10 l2qos 1-10}

Parameters
default Use the default CAM profile settings, and set the CAM as follows.
L3 ACL (ipv4acl): 6
L2 ACL(l2acl) : 5
IPv6 L3 ACL (ipv6acl): 0
L3 QoS (ipv4qos): 1
L2 QoS (l2qos): 1
l2acl 1-10 ipv4acl 1-10 Allocate space to support IPv6 ACLs. You must enter all of the
ipv6acl 0-10 ipv4qos 1-10 profiles and a range.
l2qos 1-10 Enter the CAM profile name followed by the amount to be allotted.
The total space allocated must equal 13.
The ipv6acl range must be a factor of 2.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series

Usage You must save the new CAM settings to the startup-config (write-mem or copy run start) then
Information reload the system for the new settings to take effect.

The total amount of space allowed is 16 FP Blocks. System flow requires 3 blocks and these cannot be
reallocated.

When configuring space for IPv6 ACLs, the total number of Blocks must equal 13.

582 | IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs)

 Ranges for the CAM profiles are 1-10, except for the ipv6acl profile which is 0-10. The ipv6acl
allocation must be a factor of 2 (2, 4, 6, 8, 10).

clear counters ipv6 access-group

ces Erase all counters maintained for the IPv6 access lists.

Syntax clear counters ipv6 access-group [access-list-name]

Parameters
access-list-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of a configured access-list, up to 140 characters.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on the C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series
Added monitor option

Usage The S-Series supports Ingress IPv6 ACLs.

Information
The S60 supports both Ingress and Egress IPv6 ACLs.

deny
ces Configure a filter that drops IPv6 packets that match the filter criteria.

Syntax deny {ipv6-protocol-number | icmp | ipv6 | tcp | udp}

To remove this filter, you have two choices:

• Use the no seq sequence-number command syntax if you know the filter’s sequence number or
• Use the no deny {ipv6-protocol-number | icmp | ipv6 | tcp | udp} command.

Parameters
ip-protocol-number Enter an IPv6 protocol number.
Range: 0 to 255
icmp Enter the keyword icmp to deny Internet Control Message Protocol version 6.
ipv6 Enter the keyword ipv6 to deny any Internet Protocol version 6.
tcp Enter the keyword tcp to deny the Transmission Control protocol.
udp Enter the keyword udp to deny the User Datagram Protocol.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ACCESS-LIST

Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series ExaScale
History

IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs) | 583

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on the C-Series

Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series

Usage The S-Series supports Ingress IPv6 ACLs.

Information
The S60 supports both Ingress and Egress IPv6 ACLs.

deny icmp
ces Configure a filter to drop all or specific ICMP messages.

Syntax deny icmp {source address mask | any | host ipv6-address} {destination address | any | host
ipv6-address} [message-type] [count [byte]] | [log] [monitor]

To remove this filter, you have two choices:

• Use the no seq sequence-number command syntax if you know the filter’s sequence number or
• Use the no deny icmp {source address mask | any | host ipv6-address} {destination address
| any | host ipv6-address} command.

Parameters
source address Enter the IPv6 address of the network or host from which the packets were sent
in the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the prefix length in the /x format.
Range: /0 to /128
The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero.
mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x).
any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter.
host ipv6-address Enter the keyword host followed by the IPv6 address of the host in the
x:x:x:x::x format.
The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero
destination address Enter the IPv6 address of the network or host to which the packets are sent in
the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the prefix length in the /x format.
Range: /0 to /128
The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero.
message-type On the E-Series, enter an ICMP message type, either with the type (and code, if
necessary) numbers or with the name of the message type.
Range: 0 to 255 for ICMP type; 0 to 255 for ICMP code
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the
filter.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter.
log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to have the information kept in an ACL
log file.
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor to monitor traffic on the monitoring
interface specified in the flow-based monitoring session along with the filter
operation.

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes ACCESS-LIST

584 | IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs)

 Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on the C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series
Added monitor option

Usage The S-Series supports Ingress IPv6 ACLs.

Information
The S60 supports both Ingress and Egress IPv6 ACLs.

The C-Series cannot count both packets and bytes, so when you enter the count byte options, only
bytes are incremented.

The following table lists the keywords displayed in the CLI help and their corresponding ICMP
Message Type Name.

Table 19-1. ICMP Message Type Keywords

Keyword ICMP Message Type Name

dest-unreachable Destination unreachable
echo Echo request (ping)
echo-reply Echo reply
inverse-nd-na Inverse neighbor discovery advertisement
inverse-nd-ns Inverse neighbor discovery solicitation
log Log matches against this entry
mobile-advertisement Mobile prefix advertisement
mobile-solicitation Mobile prefix solicitation
mrouter-advertisement Multicast router advertisement
mrouter-solicitation Multicast router solicitation
mrouter-termination Multicast router termination
nd-na Neighbor advertisement
nd-ns Neighbor solicitation
packet-too-big Packet is too big
parameter-problem Parameter problems
redirect Neighbor redirect
router-advertisement Neighbor discovery router advertisement
router-renumbering All routers renumbering
router-solicitation Neighbor discovery router solicitation
time-exceeded All time exceeded

deny tcp
ces Configure a filter that drops TCP packets that match the filter criteria.

Syntax deny tcp {source address mask | any | host ipv6-address} [operator port [port]] {destination
address | any | host ipv6-address} [bit] [operator port [port]] [count [byte]] | [log] [monitor]

IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs) | 585

 To remove this filter, you have two choices:
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

• Use the no seq sequence-number command syntax if you know the filter’s sequence number or
• Use the no deny tcp {source address mask | any | host ipv6-address} {destination address |
any | host ipv6-address} command.

Parameters
source address Enter the IPv6 address of the network or host from which the packets were sent
in the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the prefix length in the /x format.
Range: /0 to /128
The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero.
mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x).
any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter.
host ipv6-address Enter the keyword host followed by the IPv6 address of the host in the
x:x:x:x::x format.
The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero
operator (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following logical operand:
• eq = equal to
• neq = not equal to
• gt = greater than
• lt = less than
• range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port
command parameter.
port port Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if using the
range logical operand.
Range: 0 to 65535.
The following list includes some common TCP port numbers:
• 23 = Telnet
• 20 and 21 = FTP
• 25 = SMTP
• 169 = SNMP
destination address Enter the IPv6 address of the network or host to which the packets are sent in
the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the prefix length in the /x format.
Range: /0 to /128
The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero.
bit Enter a flag or combination of bits:
ack: acknowledgement field
fin: finish (no more data from the user)
psh: push function
rst: reset the connection
syn: synchronize sequence numbers
urg: urgent field
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the
filter.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter.

586 | IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs)

 log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enter ACL matches in the log.
Supported on Jumbo-enabled line cards only.
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor to monitor traffic on the monitoring
interface specified in the flow-based monitoring session along with the filter
operation.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ACCESS-LIST

Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on the C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series
Added monitor option

Usage The S-Series supports Ingress IPv6 ACLs.

Information
The S60 supports both Ingress and Egress IPv6 ACLs.

The C-Series cannot count both packets and bytes, so when you enter the count byte options, only
bytes are incremented.

Most ACL rules require one entry in the CAM. However, rules with TCP and UDP port operators (gt,
lt, range) may require more than one entry. The range of ports is configured in the CAM based on
bitmask boundaries; the space required depends on exactly what ports are included in the range.
For example, an ACL rule with TCP port range 4000 - 8000 uses 8 entries in the CAM:

Rule# Data Mask From To #Covered

1 0000111110100000 1111111111100000 4000 4031 32

2 0000111111000000 1111111111000000 4032 4095 64
3 0001000000000000 1111100000000000 4096 6143 2048
4 0001100000000000 1111110000000000 6144 7167 1024
5 0001110000000000 1111111000000000 7168 7679 512
6 0001111000000000 1111111100000000 7680 7935 256
7 0001111100000000 1111111111000000 7936 7999 64
8 0001111101000000 1111111111111111 8000 8000 1

Total Ports: 4001

But an ACL rule with TCP port lt 1023 takes only one entry in the CAM:

Rule# Data Mask From To #Covered

1 0000000000000000 1111110000000000 0 1023 1024

Total Ports: 1024

Related
deny Assign a filter to deny IP traffic.
Commands
deny udp Assign a filter to deny UDP traffic.

IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs) | 587

 deny udp
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Configure a filter to drop UDP packets meeting the filter criteria.

Syntax deny udp {source address mask | any | host ipv6-address} [operator port [port]] {destination
address | any | host ipv6-address} [operator port [port]] [count [byte]] | [log] [monitor]

To remove this filter, you have two choices:

• Use the no seq sequence-number command syntax if you know the filter’s sequence number or

• Use the no deny udp {source address mask | any | host ipv6-address} {destination address
| any | host ipv6-address} command.

Parameters
source address Enter the IPv6 address of the network or host from which the packets were sent
in the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the prefix length in the /x format.
Range: /0 to /128
The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero.
mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x).
any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter.
host ipv6-address Enter the keyword host followed by the IPv6 address of the host in the
x:x:x:x::x format.
The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero
operator (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following logical operand:
• eq = equal to
• neq = not equal to
• gt = greater than
• lt = less than
• range = inclusive range of ports
port port (OPTIONAL) Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers
if using the range logical operand.
Range: 0 to 65535
destination address Enter the IPv6 address of the network or host to which the packets are sent in
the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the prefix length in the /x format.
Range: /0 to /128
The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero.
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the
filter.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter.
log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enter ACL matches in the log.
Supported on Jumbo-enabled line cards only.
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor to monitor traffic on the
monitoring interface specified in the flow-based monitoring session along with
the filter operation.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ACCESS-LIST

588 | IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs)

 Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on the C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series
Added monitor option

Usage The S-Series supports Ingress IPv6 ACLs.

Information
The S60 supports both Ingress and Egress IPv6 ACLs.

The C-Series cannot count both packets and bytes, so when you enter the count byte options, only
bytes are incremented.

Most ACL rules require one entry in the CAM. However, rules with TCP and UDP port operators (gt,
lt, range) may require more than one entry. The range of ports is configured in the CAM based on
bitmask boundaries; the space required depends on exactly what ports are included in the range.
For example, an ACL rule with TCP port range 4000 - 8000 will use 8 entries in the CAM:
Rule# Data Mask From To #Covered

1 0000111110100000 1111111111100000 4000 4031 32

2 0000111111000000 1111111111000000 4032 4095 64
3 0001000000000000 1111100000000000 4096 6143 2048
4 0001100000000000 1111110000000000 6144 7167 1024
5 0001110000000000 1111111000000000 7168 7679 512
6 0001111000000000 1111111100000000 7680 7935 256
7 0001111100000000 1111111111000000 7936 7999 64
8 0001111101000000 1111111111111111 8000 8000 1

Total Ports: 4001

But an ACL rule with TCP port lt 1023 takes only one entry in the CAM:
Rule# Data Mask From To #Covered

1 0000000000000000 1111110000000000 0 1023 1024

Total Ports: 1024

Related
deny Assign a deny filter for IP traffic.
Commands
deny tcp Assign a deny filter for TCP traffic.

ipv6 access-group
ces Assign an IPv6 access-group to an interface.

Syntax ipv6 access-group access-list-name {in | out} [implicit-permit] [vlan range]

To delete an IPv6 access-group configuration, use the no ipv6 access-group access-list-name {in}
[implicit-permit] [vlan range] command.

Parameters
access-list-name Enter the name of a configured access list, up to 140 characters.
in | out Enter either the keyword in or out to apply the IPv6 ACL to incoming traffic
(ingress) or outgoing traffic (egress).

IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs) | 589

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

implicit-permit (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword implicit-permit to change the default action
of the IPv6 ACL from implicit-deny to implicit-permit (that is, if the traffic does
not match the filters in the IPv6 ACL, the traffic is permitted instead of dropped).
vlan range (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN range in a comma
separated format.
Range: 1 to 4094

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on the C-Series
History
Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16
characters long.
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series

Usage The S-Series supports Ingress IPv6 ACLs.

Information
The S60 supports both Ingress and Egress IPv6 ACLs.

You can assign an IPv6 access group to a physical, LAG, or VLAN interface context.

Example Figure 19-1. Command Example: ipv6 access-group

FTOS(conf-if-gi-9/0)#ipv6 access-group AclList1 in implicit-permit vlan 10-20

FTOS(conf-if-gi-9/0)#show config
!
interface GigabitEthernet 9/0
no ip address
ipv6 access-group AclList1 in implicit-permit Vlan 10-20
no shutdown
FTOSconf-if-gi-9/0)#

ipv6 access-list
ces Configure an access list based on IPv6 addresses or protocols.

Syntax ipv6 access-list access-list-name

To delete an access list, use the no ipv6 access-list access-list-name command.

Parameters
access-list-name Enter the as the access list name as a string, up to 140 characters.

Defaults All access lists contain an implicit “deny any”; that is, if no match occurs, the packet is dropped.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced support on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series ExaScale

590 | IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs)

 Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on the C-Series
Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16
characters long.
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series

Usage The S-Series supports Ingress IPv6 ACLs.

Information
The S60 supports both Ingress and Egress IPv6 ACLs.

The number of entries allowed per ACL is hardware-dependent. Refer to your line card documentation
for detailed specification on entries allowed per ACL.

Related
show config View the current configuration.
Commands

permit
ces Select an IPv6 protocol number, ICMP, IPv6, TCP, or UDP to configure a filter that match the filter
criteria.

Syntax permit {ipv6-protocol-number | icmp | ipv6 | tcp | udp}

To remove this filter, you have two choices:

• Use the no seq sequence-number command syntax if you know the filter’s sequence number or
• Use the no permit {ipv6-protocol-number | icmp | ipv6 | tcp | udp} command.

Parameters
ip-protocol-number Enter an IPv6 protocol number.
Range: 0 to 255
icmp Enter the keyword icmp to filter Internet Control Message Protocol version 6.
ipv6 Enter the keyword ipv6 to filter any Internet Protocol version 6.
tcp Enter the keyword tcp to filter the Transmission Control protocol.
udp Enter the keyword udp to filter the User Datagram Protocol.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ACCESS-LIST

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced support on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on the C-Series
Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16
characters long.
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series

Usage The S-Series supports Ingress IPv6 ACLs.

Information
The S60 supports both Ingress and Egress IPv6 ACLs.

IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs) | 591

 permit icmp
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Configure a filter to allow all or specific ICMP messages.

Syntax permit icmp {source address mask | any | host ipv6-address} {destination address | any | host
ipv6-address} [message-type] [count [byte]] | [log] [monitor]
To remove this filter, you have two choices:
• Use the no seq sequence-number command syntax if you know the filter’s sequence number or
• Use the no permit icmp {source address mask | any | host ipv6-address} {destination
address | any | host ipv6-address} command.

Parameters
source address Enter the IPv6 address of the network or host from which the packets were sent
in the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the prefix length in the /x format.
Range: /0 to /128
The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero.
mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x).
any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter.
host ipv6-address Enter the keyword host followed by the IPv6 address of the host in the
x:x:x:x::x format.
The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero
destination address Enter the IPv6 address of the network or host to which the packets are sent in
the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the prefix length in the /x format.
Range: /0 to /128
The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero.
message-type (OPTIONAL) Enter an ICMP message type, either with the type (and code, if
necessary) numbers or with the name of the message type.
Range: 0 to 255 for ICMP type; 0 to 255 for ICMP code
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the
filter.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter.
log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to have the information kept in an ACL
log file.
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor to monitor traffic on the monitoring
interface specified in the flow-based monitoring session along with the filter
operation.

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes ACCESS-LIST

Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on the C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series
Added monitor option

Usage The S-Series supports Ingress IPv6 ACLs.

Information
The S60 supports both Ingress and Egress IPv6 ACLs.

592 | IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs)

 The C-Series cannot count both packets and bytes, so when you enter the count byte options, only
bytes are incremented.

permit tcp
ces Configure a filter to pass TCP packets that match the filter criteria.

Syntax permit tcp {source address mask | any | host ipv6-address} [operator port [port]] {destination
address | any | host ipv6-address} [bit] [operator port [port]] [count [byte]] | [log] [monitor]

To remove this filter, you have two choices:

• Use the no seq sequence-number command syntax if you know the filter’s sequence number or
• Use the no permit tcp {source address mask | any | host ipv6-address} {destination address
| any | host ipv6-address} command.

Parameters
source address Enter the IPv6 address of the network or host from which the packets were sent
in the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the prefix length in the /x format.
Range: /0 to /128
The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero.
mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x).
any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter.
host ipv6-address Enter the keyword host followed by the IPv6 address of the host in the
x:x:x:x::x format.
The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero
operator (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following logical operand:
• eq = equal to
• neq = not equal to
• gt = greater than
• lt = less than
• range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two port for the port
parameter.)
port port Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if using the
range logical operand.
Range: 0 to 65535.
The following list includes some common TCP port numbers:
23 = Telnet
20 and 21 = FTP
25 = SMTP
169 = SNMP
destination address Enter the IPv6 address of the network or host to which the packets are sent in
the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the prefix length in the /x format.
Range: /0 to /128
The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero.

IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs) | 593

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

bit Enter a flag or combination of bits:

ack: acknowledgement field
fin: finish (no more data from the user)
psh: push function
rst: reset the connection
syn: synchronize sequence numbers
urg: urgent field
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the
filter.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter.
log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enter ACL matches in the log.
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor to monitor traffic on the
monitoring interface specified in the flow-based monitoring session along with
the filter operation.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ACCESS-LIST

Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on the C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series
Added monitor option

Usage The S-Series supports Ingress IPv6 ACLs.

Information
The S60 supports both Ingress and Egress IPv6 ACLs.

The C-Series cannot count both packets and bytes, so when you enter the count byte options, only
bytes are incremented.

Most ACL rules require one entry in the CAM. However, rules with TCP and UDP port operators (gt,
lt, range) may require more than one entry. The range of ports is configured in the CAM based on
bitmask boundaries; the space required depends on exactly what ports are included in the range.

594 | IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs)

 For example, an ACL rule with TCP port range 4000 - 8000 uses 8 entries in the CAM:
Rule# Data Mask From To #Covered

1 0000111110100000 1111111111100000 4000 4031 32

2 0000111111000000 1111111111000000 4032 4095 64
3 0001000000000000 1111100000000000 4096 6143 2048
4 0001100000000000 1111110000000000 6144 7167 1024
5 0001110000000000 1111111000000000 7168 7679 512
6 0001111000000000 1111111100000000 7680 7935 256
7 0001111100000000 1111111111000000 7936 7999 64
8 0001111101000000 1111111111111111 8000 8000 1

Total Ports: 4001

But an ACL rule with TCP port lt 1023 takes only one entry in the CAM:
Rule# Data Mask From To #Covered

1 0000000000000000 1111110000000000 0 1023 1024

Total Ports: 1024

Related
permit Assign a permit filter for IPv6 packets.
Commands
permit udp Assign a permit filter for UDP packets.

permit udp
ces Configure a filter to pass UDP packets meeting the filter criteria.

Syntax permit udp {source address mask | any | host ipv6-address} [operator port [port]] {destination
address | any | host ipv6-address} [operator port [port]] [count [byte]] | [log] [monitor]

To remove this filter, you have two choices:

• Use the no seq sequence-number command syntax if you know the filter’s sequence number or
• Use the no permit udp {source address mask | any | host ipv6-address} {destination
address | any | host ipv6-address} command.

Parameters
source address Enter the IPv6 address of the network or host from which the packets were sent
in the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the prefix length in the /x format.
Range: /0 to /128
The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero.
mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x).
any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter.
host ipv6-address Enter the keyword host followed by the IPv6 address of the host in the
x:x:x:x::x format.
The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero

IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs) | 595

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

operator (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following logical operand:

• eq = equal to
• neq = not equal to
• gt = greater than
• lt = less than
• range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port
parameter.)
port port (OPTIONAL) Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers
if using the range logical operand.
Range: 0 to 65535
destination address Enter the IPv6 address of the network or host to which the packets are sent in
the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the prefix length in the /x format.
Range: /0 to /128
The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero.
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the
filter.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter.
log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enter ACL matches in the log.
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor to monitor traffic on the monitoring
interface specified in the flow-based monitoring session along with the filter
operation.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ACCESS-LIST

Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on the C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series
Added monitor option

Usage The S-Series supports Ingress IPv6 ACLs.

Information
The S60 supports both Ingress and Egress IPv6 ACLs.

The C-Series cannot count both packets and bytes, so when you enter the count byte options, only
bytes are incremented.

Most ACL rules require one entry in the CAM. However, rules with TCP and UDP port operators (gt,
lt, range) may require more than one entry. The range of ports is configured in the CAM based on
bitmask boundaries; the space required depends on exactly what ports are included in the range.

596 | IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs)

 For example, an ACL rule with TCP port range 4000 - 8000 uses 8 entries in the CAM:
Rule# Data Mask From To #Covered

1 0000111110100000 1111111111100000 4000 4031 32

2 0000111111000000 1111111111000000 4032 4095 64
3 0001000000000000 1111100000000000 4096 6143 2048
4 0001100000000000 1111110000000000 6144 7167 1024
5 0001110000000000 1111111000000000 7168 7679 512
6 0001111000000000 1111111100000000 7680 7935 256
7 0001111100000000 1111111111000000 7936 7999 64
8 0001111101000000 1111111111111111 8000 8000 1

Total Ports: 4001

But an ACL rule with TCP port lt 1023 takes only one entry in the CAM:
Rule# Data Mask From To #Covered

1 0000000000000000 1111110000000000 0 1023 1024

Total Ports: 1024

Related
permit Assign a permit filter for IP packets.
Commands
permit tcp Assign a permit filter for TCP packets.

remark
ces Enter a description for an IPv6 ACL entry.

Syntax remark remark number [description]

To delete the description, use the no remark remark number command (it is not necessary to include
the remark description that you are deleting).

Parameters
remark number Enter the remark number. Note that the same sequence number can be used
for the remark and an ACL rule.
Range: 0 to 4294967290
description Enter a description of up to 80 characters.

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes ACCESS-LIST

Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on the C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series

IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs) | 597

 Example Figure 19-2. Command Example: remark
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS(config-ipv6-acl)#remark 10 Remark for Entry # 10

FTOS(config-ipv6-acl)#show config
!
ipv6 access-list Acl1
description IPV6 Access-list
seq 5 permit ipv6 1111::2222/127 host 3333::1111 log count bytes
remark 10 Remark for Entry # 10
seq 10 permit icmp host 3333:: any mobile-advertisement log
seq 15 deny tcp any any rst
seq 20 permit udp any any gt 100 count
!FTOS(config-ipv6-acl)#

Usage The S-Series supports Ingress IPv6 ACLs.

Information
The S60 supports both Ingress and Egress IPv6 ACLs.

As shown in the example above, the same sequence number is used for the remark and an ACL rule.
The remark will precede the rule in the running-configuration because it is assumed that the remark is
for that rule or that group of rules that follow the remark. You can configure up to 4294967290 remarks
in a given ACL.

Related
show config Display the current ACL configuration.
Commands

resequence access-list
ces Re-assign sequence numbers to entries of an existing access-list.

Syntax resequence access-list {ipv4 | ipv6 | mac} {access-list-name StartingSeqNum

Step-to-Increment}

Parameters
ipv4 |ipv6 | mac Enter the keyword ipv4, ipv6 or mac to identify the access list type to
resequence.
access-list-name Enter the name of a configured IP access list, up to 140 characters.
Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names
are up to 16 characters long.
StartingSeqNum Enter the starting sequence number to resequence.
Range: 0 - 4294967290
Step-to-Increment Enter the step to increment the sequence number.
Range: 1 - 4294967290

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on the C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series

598 | IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs)

 Usage The S-Series supports Ingress IPv6 ACLs.
Information
The S60 supports both Ingress and Egress IPv6 ACLs.

When all sequence numbers have been exhausted, this feature permits re-assigning new sequence
number to entries of an existing access-list.

Related
resequence prefix-list ipv6 Resequence a prefix list
Commands

resequence prefix-list ipv6

ces Re-assign sequence numbers to entries of an existing prefix list.

Syntax resequence prefix-list ipv6 {prefix-list-name StartingSeqNum Step-to-increment}

Parameters
prefix-list-name Enter the name of configured prefix list, up to 140 characters.
Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names
are up to 16 characters long.
StartingSeqNum Enter the starting sequence number to resequence.
Range: 0 – 65535
Step-to-Increment Enter the step to increment the sequence number.
Range: 1 – 65535

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on the C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series

Usage The S-Series supports Ingress IPv6 ACLs.

Information
The S60 supports both Ingress and Egress IPv6 ACLs.

When all sequence numbers have been exhausted, this feature permits re-assigning new sequence
number to entries of an existing prefix list.

Related
resequence access-list Resequence an access-list
Commands

IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs) | 599

 seq
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Assign a sequence number to a deny or permit filter in an IPv6 access list while creating the filter.

Syntax seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {ipv6-protocol-number | icmp | ip | tcp | udp} {source
address mask | any | host ipv6-address} {destination address | any | host ipv6-address}
[operator port [port]] [count [byte]] | [log] [monitor]
To delete a filter, use the no seq sequence-number command.

Parameters
sequence-number Enter a number from 0 to 4294967290.
deny Enter the keyword deny to configure a filter to drop packets meeting this
condition.
permit Enter the keyword permit to configure a filter to forward packets meeting
this criteria.
ipv6-protocol-number Enter an IPv6 protocol number.
Range: 0 to 255
icmp Enter the keyword icmp to configure an Internet Control Message Protocol
version 6 filter.
ipv6 Enter the keyword ipv6 to configure any Internet Protocol version 6 filter.
tcp Enter the keyword tcp to configure a Transmission Control protocol filter.
udp Enter the keyword udp to configure a User Datagram Protocol filter.
source address Enter the IPv6 address of the network or host from which the packets were
sent in the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the prefix length in the /x format.
Range: /0 to /128
The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero.
mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x).
any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter.
host ipv6-address Enter the keyword host followed by the IPv6 address of the host in the
x:x:x:x::x format.
The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero
operator (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following logical operands:
• eq = equal to
• neq = not equal to
• gt = greater than
• lt = less than
• range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port
parameter.)
port port (OPTIONAL) Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port
numbers if using the range logical operand.
Range: 0 to 65535
The following list includes some common TCP port numbers:
• 23 = Telnet
• 20 and 21 = FTP
• 25 = SMTP
• 169 = SNMP

600 | IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs)

 destination address Enter the IPv6 address of the network or host to which the packets are sent in
the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the prefix length in the /x format.
Range: /0 to /128
The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero.
message-type (OPTIONAL) Enter an ICMP message type, either with the type (and code, if
necessary) numbers or with the name of the message type.
Range: 0 to 255 for ICMP type; 0 to 255 for ICMP code
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the
filter.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter.
log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enter ACL matches in the log.
Supported on Jumbo-enabled line cards only.
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor to monitor traffic on the
monitoring interface specified in the flow-based monitoring session along
with the filter operation.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ACCESS-LIST

Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on the C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Added monitor option

Usage The S-Series supports Ingress IPv6 ACLs.

Information
The S60 supports both Ingress and Egress IPv6 ACLs.

Related
deny Configure a filter to drop packets.
Commands
permit Configure a filter to forward packets.

show cam-acl
cs Show space allocated for IPv6 ACLs.

Syntax show cam-acl

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privileged

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series

Related
cam-acl Configure CAM profiles to support IPv6 ACLs
Commands

IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs) | 601

 Examples Figure 19-3. Command Example: show cam-acl (default profile)
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show cam-acl

-- Chassis Cam ACL --

Current Settings(in block sizes)
L2Acl : 5
Ipv4Acl : 6
Ipv6Acl : 0
Ipv4Qos : 1
L2Qos : 1

-- Line card 4 --
Current Settings(in block sizes)
L2Acl : 5
Ipv4Acl : 6
Ipv6Acl : 0
Ipv4Qos : 1
L2Qos : 1

FTOS#show cam-acl

Figure 19-4. Command Example: show cam-acl (manually set profiles)

FTOS#show cam-acl

-- Chassis Cam ACL --

Current Settings(in block sizes)
L2Acl : 2
Ipv4Acl : 2
Ipv6Acl : 4
Ipv4Qos : 2
L2Qos : 3

-- Line card 4 --
Current Settings(in block sizes)
L2Acl : 2
Ipv4Acl : 2
Ipv6Acl : 4
Ipv4Qos : 2
L2Qos : 3

FTOS#show cam-acl

show config
ces View the current IPv6 ACL configuration.

Syntax show config

Command Modes ACCESS-LIST

Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on the C-Series

Usage The S-Series supports Ingress IPv6 ACLs.

Information
The S60 supports both Ingress and Egress IPv6 ACLs.

602 | IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs)

 Example Figure 19-5. Command Example: show config
FTOS(conf-ipv6-acl)#show config
!
ipv6 access-list Acl1
seq 5 permit ipv6 1111::2222/127 host 3333::1111 log count bytes
seq 10 permit icmp host 3333:: any mobile-advertisement log
seq 15 deny tcp any any rst
seq 20 permit udp any any gt 100 count
FTOS(conf-ipv6-acl)#

show ipv6 accounting access-list

ces View the IPv6 access-lists created on the E-Series and the sequence of filters.

Syntax show ipv6 accounting {access-list access-list-name | cam_count} interface interface

Parameters
access-list-name Enter the name of the ACL to be displayed, up to 140 characters.
cam_count List the count of the CAM rules for this ACL.
interface interface Enter the keyword interface followed by the interface type and slot/port or
number information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by
a number from 1 to 255 for TeraScale and ExaScale.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on the C-Series
Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16
characters long.
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series

Usage The S-Series supports Ingress IPv6 ACLs.

Information
The S60 supports both Ingress and Egress IPv6 ACLs.

Example Figure 19-6. Command Example: show ipv6 accounting access-lists

FTOS#show ipv6 accounting access-list
!
Ingress IPv6 access list AclList1 on GigabitEthernet 9/0
Total cam count 15
seq 10 permit icmp host 3333:: any mobile-advertisement log
seq 15 deny tcp any any rst
seq 20 permit udp any any gt 101 count (0 packets)
!
FTOS#

IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs) | 603

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Table 19-2. show ip accounting access-lists Command Example Field

Field Description
“Ingress IPv6...” Displays the name of the IPv6 ACL, in this example “AclList1”.
“seq 10 ...” Displays the filter. If the keywords count or byte were configured in the
filter, the number of packets or bytes processed by the filter is displayed at
the end of the line.

show running-config acl

ces Display the ACL running configuration.

Syntax show running-config acl

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on the C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series

Usage The S-Series supports Ingress IPv6 ACLs.

Information
The S60 supports both Ingress and Egress IPv6 ACLs.

Example Figure 19-7. Command Example: show running-config acl

FTOS#show running-config acl
!
ip access-list extended ext-acl1
!
ip access-list standard std-acl1
!
ipv6 access-list Acl1
description IPV6 Access-list
seq 5 permit ipv6 1111::2222/127 host 3333::1111 log count bytes
remark 10 Remark for Entry # 10
seq 10 permit icmp host 3333:: any mobile-advertisement log
seq 15 deny tcp any any rst
seq 20 permit udp any any gt 100 count
!FTOS#

test cam-usage
ce Verify that enough ACL CAM space is available for the IPv6 ACLs you have created.

Syntax test cam-usage service-policy input input policy name linecard {number | all}

604 | IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs)

 Parameters
policy-map name Enter the name of the policy-map to verify.
number Enter all to get information for all the linecards, or enter the linecard number to get
information for a specific card.
Range: 0-6 for E-Series, 0-7 for C-Series

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and E-Series

Usage This command applies to both IPv4 and IPv6 CAM Profiles, but is best used when verifying QoS
Information optimization for IPv6 ACLs.

QoS Optimization for IPv6 ACLs does not impact the CAM usage for applying a policy on a single (or
the first of several) interfaces. It is most useful when a policy is applied across multiple interfaces; it
can reduce the impact to CAM usage across subsequent interfaces.

Example The following example shows the output shown when using the test cam-usage command.

Figure 19-8. Command Example: test cam-usage (C-Series)

FTOS#test cam-usage service-policy input LauraMapTest linecard all

Linecard | Portpipe | CAM Partition | Available CAM | Estimated CAM per Port | Status
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 | 1 | IPv4Flow | 232 | 0 | Allowed
2 | 1 | IPv6Flow | 0 | 0 | Allowed
4 | 0 | IPv4Flow | 232 | 0 | Allowed
4 | 0 | IPv6Flow | 0 | 0 | Allowed
FTOS#

FTOS#test cam-usage service-policy input LauraMapTest linecard 4 port-set 0

Linecard | Portpipe | CAM Partition | Available CAM | Estimated CAM per Port | Status
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 | 0 | IPv4Flow | 232 | 0 | Allowed
4 | 0 | IPv6Flow | 0 | 0 | Allowed
FTOS#

FTOS0#test cam-usage service-policy input LauraMapTest linecard 2 port-set 1

Linecard | Portpipe | CAM Partition | Available CAM | Estimated CAM per Port | Status
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 | 1 | IPv4Flow | 232 | 0 | Allowed
2 | 1 | IPv6Flow | 0 | 0 | Allowed
FTOS#

IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs) | 605

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Table 19-3. Output Explanations: test cam-usage

Term Explanation
Linecard Lists the line card or line cards that are checked. Entering all shows
the status for line cards in the chassis
Portpipe Lists the portpipe (port-set) or port pipes (port-sets) that are checked.
Entering all shows the status for line cards and port-pipes in the
chassis.
CAM Partition Shows the CAM profile of the CAM
Available CAM Identifies the amount of CAM space remaining for that profile
Estimated CAM per Port Estimates the amount of CAM space the listed policy will require.
Status Indicates whether or not the policy will be allowed in the CAM

IPv6 Route Map Commands

The following commands allow you to configure route maps and their redistribution criteria.
• match ipv6 address
• match ipv6 next-hop
• match ipv6 route-source
• route-map
• set ipv6 next-hop
• show config
• show route-map

match ipv6 address

ce Configure a filter to match routes based on IPv6 addresses specified in an access list.

Syntax match ipv6 address prefix-list-name

To delete a match, use the no match ipv6 address prefix-list-name command.

Parameters
prefix-list-name Enter the name of IPv6 prefix list, up to 140 characters.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTE-MAP

Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on the C-Series
Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16
characters long.
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series

606 | IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs)

 Related
match ipv6 next-hop Redistribute routes that match the next-hop IP address.
Commands
match ipv6 route-source Redistribute routes that match routes advertised by other routers.

match ipv6 next-hop

ce Configure a filter which matches based on the next-hop IPv6 addresses specified in the IPv6 prefix list.

Syntax match ipv6 next-hop prefix-list prefix-list-name

To delete a match, use the no match ipv6 next-hop prefix-list prefix-list-name command.

Parameters
prefix-list prefix-list-name Enter the keywords prefix-list followed by the name of configured prefix
list, up to 140 characters.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTE-MAP

Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on the C-Series
Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16
characters long.
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series

Related
match ipv6 address Redistribute routes that match an IP address.
Commands
match ipv6 route-source Redistribute routes that match routes advertised by other routers.

match ipv6 route-source

ce Configure a filter which matches based on the routes advertised in the IPv6 prefix lists.

Syntax match ipv6 route-source prefix-list prefix-list-name

To delete a match, use the no match ipv6 route-source prefix-list prefix-list-name command.

Parameters
prefix-list prefix-list-name Enter the keywords prefix-list followed by the name of configured
prefix list, up to 140 characters.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTE-MAP

Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on the C-Series
Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16
characters long.
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series

IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs) | 607

 Related
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

match ipv6 address Redistribute routes that match an IP address.

Commands
match ipv6 next-hop Redistribute routes that match the next-hop IP address.

route-map
ce Designate a IPv6 route map name and enter the ROUTE-MAP mode.

Syntax route-map map-name

To delete a route map, use the no route-map map-name command.

Parameters
map-name Enter a text string to name the route map, up to 140 characters.

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes ROUTE-MAP

Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on the C-Series
Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16
characters long.
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series

Example Figure 19-9. Command Example: route-map

FTOS(conf)#route-map Rmap1

FTOS(config-route-map)#match ?
…
ip IP specific information
ipv6 IPv6 specific information
…

Related
show config View the current configuration.
Commands

set ipv6 next-hop

ce Configure a filter that specifies IPv6 address as the next hop.

Syntax set ipv6 next-hop ipv6-address

To delete the setting, use the no set ipv6 next-hop ipv6-address command.

Parameters
ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format.
Note: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTE-MAP

608 | IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs)

 Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on the C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series

Usage The set ipv6 next-hop command is the only way to set an IPv6 Next-Hop.
Information

show config
ce View the current route map configuration.

Syntax show config

Command Modes ROUTE-MAP

Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on the C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series

Example Figure 19-10. Command Example: show config

FTOS(config-route-map)#show config
!
route-map Rmap1 permit 10
match ip address v4plist
match ipv6 address plist1
match ipv6 next-hop prefix-list plist2
match ipv6 route-source prefix-list plist3
set next-hop 1.1.1.1
set ipv6 next-hop 3333:2222::
FTOS(config-route-map)#

show route-map
ce View the current route map configurations.

Syntax show route-map

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on the C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series

IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs) | 609

 Example Figure 19-11. Command Example: show route-map
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show route-map
!
route-map Rmap1, permit, sequence 10
Match clauses:
ip address: v4plist
ipv6 address: plist1
ipv6 next-hop prefix-lists: plist2
ipv6 route-source prefix-lists: plist3
Set clauses:
next-hop 1.1.1.1
ipv6 next-hop 3333:2222::
FTOS#

Related
route-map Configure a route map.
Commands

610 | IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs)

 20
IPv6 Basics

Overview
IPv6 Basic Commands are supported on platforms c e and s as designated by the symbols
beneath the commands

E-Series ExaScale supports IPv6 with FTOS 8.2.1.0 and later.

Note: The IPv6 basic commands are supported on all platforms. However, not all features are
supported on all platforms. See the table in Chapter 18, IPv6 Addressing to determine the
FTOS version that supports which features and platforms.

Commands
The IPv6 commands in the chapter are:

• clear ipv6 fib

• clear ipv6 route
• ipv6 address
• ipv6 unicast-routing
• show ipv6 cam linecard
• show ipv6 cam stack-unit
• show ipv6 fib linecard
• show ipv6 fib stack-unit
• show ipv6 interface
• show ipv6 route
• trust ipv6-diffserv

clear ipv6 fib

ces Clear (refresh) all FIB entries on a line card.

Syntax clear ipv6 fib linecard slot

Parameters
slot Enter the slot number to clear the FIB for a line card.

Command Mode EXEC Privilege

IPv6 Basics | 611

 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.

History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced

clear ipv6 route

ces Clear (refresh) all or a specific route from the IPv6 routing table.

Syntax clear ipv6 route {* | ipv6-address prefix-length}

Parameters
* Enter the * to clear (refresh) all routes from the IPv6 routing table.
ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the prefix length in the /x
prefix-length format.
Range: /0 to /128
Note: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros

Command Mode EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

ipv6 address
ces Configure an IPv6 address to an interface.

Syntax ipv6 address {ipv6-address prefix-length}

To remove the IPv6 address, use the no ipv6 address {ipv6-address prefix-length} command.

Parameters
ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the prefix length in the /x
prefix-length format.
Range: /0 to /128
Note: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced

612 | IPv6 Basics

 Example Figure 20-1. Command Example: ipv6 address
FTOS(conf)#interface gigabitethernet 10/0
FTOS(conf-if-gi-10/0)#ipv6 address ?
X:X:X:X::X IPv6 address
FTOS(conf-if-gi-10/0)#ipv6 address 2002:1:2::3 ?
<0-128> Prefix length in bits
FTOS(conf-if-gi-10/0)#ipv6 address 2002:1:2::3 /96 ?
<cr>
FTOS(conf-if-gi-10/0)#ipv6 address 2002:1:2::3 /96
FTOS(conf-if-gi-10/0)#show config
!
interface GigabitEthernet 10/0
no ip address
ipv6 address 2002:1:2::3 /96
no shutdown
FTOS(conf-if-gi-10/0)#

Usage FTOS allows multiple IPv6 addresses to be configured on an interface. When the no ipv6 address
Information command is issued without specifying a particular IPv6 address, all IPv6 addresses on that interface are
deleted.

ipv6 route
ces Establish a static IPv6 route.

Syntax ipv6 route ipv6-address prefix-length {ipv6-address | interface | interface ipv6-address} [distance]
[tag value] [permanent]
To remove the IPv6 route, use the no ipv6 route ipv6-address prefix-length {ipv6-address |
interface | interface ipv6-address} [distance] [tag value] [permanent] command.

Parameters
ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the prefix length in
prefix-length the /x format.
Range: /0 to /128
Note: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback followed by a number
from zero (0) to 16383.
• For the null interface, enter the keyword null followed by zero (0).
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
ipv6-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the forwarding router IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format.
Note: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros
distance (OPTIONAL) Enter a number as the distance metric assigned to the route.
Range: 1 to 255
tag value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword tag followed by a tag value number.
Range: 1 to 4294967295
permanent (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword permanent to specify that the route is not to
be removed, even if the interface assigned to that route goes down.
Note: If you disable the interface with an IPv6 address associated with the
keyword permanent, the route disappears from the routing table.

IPv6 Basics | 613

 Defaults No default values or behavior
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced

Example Figure 20-2. Command Example: ipv6 route

FTOS(conf)#ipv6 route 44::0 /64 33::1 ?
<1-255> Distance metric for this route
permanent Permanent route
tag Set tag for this route

FTOS(conf)#ipv6 route 55::0 /64 ?

X:X:X:X::X Forwarding router's address
gigabitethernet Gigabit Ethernet interface
loopback Loopback interface
null Null interface
port-channel Port channel interface
sonet Sonet interface
tenGigabitethernet TenGigabit Ethernet interface
vlan VLAN interface

FTOS(conf)#ipv6 route 55::0 /64 gigabitethernet 9/0 ?

<1-255> Distance metric for this route
X:X:X:X::X Forwarding router's address
permanent Permanent route
tag Set tag for this route

FTOS(conf)#ipv6 route 55::0 /64 gigabitethernet 9/0 66::1 ?

<1-255> Distance metric for this route
permanent Permanent route
tag Set tag for this route
FTOS#

Usage When the interface goes down, FTOS withdraws the route. The route is re-installed, by FTOS, when
Information the interface comes back up. When a recursive resolution is “broken,” FTOS withdraws the route. The
route is re-installed, by FTOS, when the recursive resolution is satisfied.

Related
show ipv6 route View the IPv6 configured routes.
Commands

ipv6 unicast-routing
ce Enable IPv6 Unicast routing.

Syntax ipv6 unicast-routing

To disable unicast routing, use the no ipv6 unicast-routing command.

Defaults Enabled

614 | IPv6 Basics

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced

Usage Since this command is enabled by default, it does not appear in the running configuration. When
Information unicast routing is disabled, the no ipv6 unicast-routing command is included in the running
configuration. Whenever unicast routing is disabled or re-enabled, FTOS generates a syslog message
indicating the action.

Disabling unicast routing on an E-Series chassis causes the following behavior:

• static and protocol learnt routes are removed from RTM and from the CAM; packet forwarding to
these routes is terminated.
• connected routes and resolved neighbors remain in the CAM and new IPv6 neighbors are still
discoverable
• additional protocol adjacencies (OSPFv3 and BGP4) are brought down and no new adjacencies
are formed
• the IPv6 address family configuration (under router bgp) is deleted
• IPv6 Multicast traffic continues to flow unhindered

show ipv6 cam linecard

ce Displays the IPv6 CAM entries for the specified line card.

Syntax show ipv6 cam linecard slot-number port-set {0-1} [summary | index | ipv6 address]

Parameters
slot-number Enter the line card slot ID number.
Range: 0 to 13 on the E1200; 0 on 6 for E600, and 0 to 5 on the E300.
port-set Enter the Port Set to
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to display a table listing network
prefixes and the total number prefixes which can be entered into the IPv6 CAM.
index (OPTIONAL) Enter the index in the IPv6 CAM
ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x/n format to display networks that have
more specific prefixes.
Range: /0 to /128
Note: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series

IPv6 Basics | 615

 Usage The forwarding table displays host route first, then displays route originated by routing protocol
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Information including static route.

The egress port section displays the egress port of the forwarding entry which is designated as:
C for the Control Processor
1 for the Route Processor 1
2 for the Route Processor 2

Examples Figure 20-3. Command Example: show ipv6 cam linecard fib (C or E-Series)

FTOS#show ipv6 cam linecard 13 fib

Neighbor Mac-Addr Port VId

---------------------------------------------- ----------------- --------- ----

[ 31] 2002:44:1:1::11 00:00:01:1a:1e:d5 Gi 13/2 0

Prefix Next-Hop Mac-Addr Port VId EC

------------------------------- ------------------------------- ----------------- --------- ---- --

[ 3147] 100::/64 [ 0] 2002:44:1:1::11 - Gi 0/0 0 1

[ 0] 2002:44:1:24::11 - Gi 0/0 0 1
[ 0] 2002:44:1:23::11 - Gi 0/0 0 1
[ 0] 2002:44:1:21::11 - Gi 0/0 0 1
[ 0] 2002:44:1:20::11 - Gi 0/0 0 1
[ 0] 2002:44:1:19::11 - Gi 0/0 0 1
FTOS#

Figure 20-4. Command Example: show ipv6 cam linecard (C or E-Series)

FTOS#show ipv6 cam linecard 1 port-set 0

Neighbor Mac-Addr Port VId
--------------------------------------------------- ----------------- --------- ----
[ 0] fe80::201:e8ff:fe17:5cae 00:01:e8:17:5c:ae BLK 100
[ 1] fe80::201:e8ff:fe17:5bbe 00:01:e8:17:5b:be BLK 0
[ 2] fe80::201:e8ff:fe17:5bbd 00:01:e8:17:5b:bd BLK 0
[ 3] fe80::201:e8ff:fe17:5cb0 00:01:e8:17:5c:b0 BLK 0
[ 4] fe80::201:e8ff:fe17:5cae 00:01:e8:17:5c:ae BLK 1000
[ 5] fe80::201:e8ff:fe17:5caf 00:01:e8:17:5c:af BLK 0

Prefix First-Hop Mac-Addr Port VId EC

------------------------------------ ------------------------ ----------------- --------- ----
--

[ 80] 2222::2/128 [ 2] : 00:00:00:00:00:00 RP2 0 0

[ 81] 3333::2/128 [ 2] ::1 00:00:00:00:00:00 RP2 0 0

FTOS#

show ipv6 cam stack-unit

s Displays the IPv6 CAM entries for the specified stack-unit.

Syntax show ipv6 cam stack-unit unit-number port-set {0-1} [summary | index | ipv6 address]

616 | IPv6 Basics

 Parameters
unit-number Enter the stack unit’s ID number.
Unit ID range:
S60: 0-11
all other S-Series: 0-7
port-set Enter the Port Set to
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to display a table listing network
prefixes and the total number prefixes which can be entered into the IPv6 CAM.
index (OPTIONAL) Enter the index in the IPv6 CAM
ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x/n format to display networks that have
more specific prefixes.
Range: /0 to /128
Note: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced

show ipv6 fib linecard

ce View all Forwarding Information Base entries.

Syntax show ipv6 fib linecard slot-number {summary | ipv6-address}

Parameters
slot-number Enter the number of the line card slot.
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on a E1200, 0 to 6 on a E600/E600i, and 0 to 5 on a E300
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view a summary of entries in IPv6 cam.
ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x/n format to display networks that have more
specific prefixes.
Range: /0 to /128
Note: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros.

Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced

IPv6 Basics | 617

 show ipv6 fib stack-unit
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

s View all Forwarding Information Base entries.

Syntax show ipv6 fib stack-unit unit-number [summary] ipv6-address

Parameters
slot-number Enter the number of the stack unit.
Unit ID range:
S60: 0-11
all other S-Series: 0-7
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view a summary of entries in IPv6 cam.
ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x/n format to display networks that have more
specific prefixes.
Range: /0 to /128
Note: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros.

Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced

show ipv6 interface

ces Display the status of interfaces configured for IPv6.

Syntax show ipv6 interface interface [brief] [configured] [gigabitethernet slot | slot/port] [linecard
slot-number] [loopback interface-number] [port-channel number] [tengigabitethernet slot | slot/
port] [vlan vlan-id]

Parameters
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number
information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
GigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword Loopback followed by a
number from 0 to 16383.
• For the Null interface, enter the keyword null followed by zero (0).
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
brief (OPTIONAL) View a summary of IPv6 interfaces.
configured (OPTIONAL) View information on all IPv6 configured interfaces
gigabitethernet (OPTIONAL) View information for an IPv6 gigabitethernet interface.
linecard slot-number (OPTIONAL) View information for a specific IPv6 line card or S-Series
stack-unit
Range: 0 to 13 on a E1200, 0 to 6 on a E600, and 0 to 5 on a E300.
Range: 0-7 for C-Series
Range 0-11 for S60, 0-7 for all other S-Series

618 | IPv6 Basics

 loopback (OPTIONAL) View information for IPv6 loopback interfaces.
port-channel (OPTIONAL) View information for IPv6 port channels.
tengigabitethernet (OPTIONAL) View information for an IPv6 tengigabitethernet interface.
vlan (OPTIONAL) View information for IPv6 VLANs.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced

Example Figure 20-5. Command Example: show ipv6 interface

FTOS#show ipv6 interface gigabitethernet 1/1
GigabitEthernet 1/1 is up, line protocol is up
IPV6 is enabled
Link Local address: fe80::201:e8ff:fe04:62c4
Global Unicast address(es):
2001::1, subnet is 2001::/64
2002::1, subnet is 2002::/120
2003::1, subnet is 2003::/120
2004::1, subnet is 2004::/32
Global Anycast address(es):
Joined Group address(es):
ff02::1
ff02::2
ff02::1:ff00:1
ff02::1:ff04:62c4
MTU is 1500
ICMP redirects are not sent
DAD is enabled: number of DAD attempts: 1
ND reachable time is 30 seconds
ND advertised reachable time is 30 seconds
ND advertised retransmit interval is 30 seconds

show ipv6 route

ces Displays the IPv6 routes.

Syntax show ipv6 route [ipv6-address prefix-length] [hostname] [all] [bgp as number] [connected]
[isis tag] [list prefix-list name] [ospf process-id] [rip] [static] [summary]

Parameter
ipv6-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the
prefix-length prefix length in the /x format.
Range: /0 to /128
The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros.
hostname (OPTIONAL) View information for this IPv6 routes with Host Name

IPv6 Basics | 619

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

all (OPTIONAL) View information for all IPv6 routes

bgp (OPTIONAL) View information for all IPv6 BGP routes
connected (OPTIONAL) View only the directly connected IPv6 routes.
isis (OPTIONAL) View information for all IPv6 IS-IS routes
list (OPTIONAL) View the IPv6 prefix list
ospf (OPTIONAL) View information for all IPv6 OSPF routes
rip (OPTIONAL) View information for all IPv6 RIP routes
static (OPTIONAL) View only routes configured by the ipv6 route command.
summary (OPTIONAL) View a brief list of the configured IPv6 routes.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S=-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced

Example Figure 20-6. Command Example: show ipv6 route

FTOS#show ipv6 route

Codes: C - connected, L - local, S - static, R - RIP,

B - BGP, IN - internal BGP, EX - external BGP,LO - Locally Originated,
O - OSPF, IA - OSPF inter area, N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1,
N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2, E1 - OSPF external type 1,
E2 - OSPF external type 2, i - IS-IS, L1 - IS-IS level-1,
L2 - IS-IS level-2, IA - IS-IS inter area, * - candidate default,
Gateway of last resort is not set

Destination Dist/Metric, Gateway, Last Change

-----------------------------------------------------
C 2001::/64 [0/0]
Direct, Gi 1/1, 00:28:49
C 2002::/120 [0/0]
Direct, Gi 1/1, 00:28:49
C 2003::/120 [0/0]
Direct, Gi 1/1, 00:28:49
C 2004::/32 [0/0]
Direct, Gi 1/1, 00:28:49
L fe80::/10 [0/0]
Direct, Nu 0, 00:29:09

Example Figure 20-7. Command Example: show ipv6 route summary

FTOS#show ipv6 route summary

Route Source Active Routes Non-active Routes

connected 5 0
static 0 0
Total 5 0
Total 5 active route(s) using 952 bytes

620 | IPv6 Basics

 Table 20-1. show ipv6 route Command Example Fields
Field Description
(undefined) Identifies the type of route:
• L = Local
• C = connected
• S = static
• R = RIP
• B = BGP
• IN = internal BGP
• EX = external BGP
• LO = Locally Originated
• O = OSPF
• IA = OSPF inter area
• N1 = OSPF NSSA external type 1
• N2 = OSPF NSSA external type 2
• E1 = OSPF external type 1
• E2 = OSPF external type 2
• i = IS-IS
• L1 = IS-IS level-1
• L2 = IS-IS level-2
• IA = IS-IS inter-area
• * = candidate default
• > = non-active route
• + = summary routes
Destination Identifies the route’s destination IPv6 address.
Gateway Identifies whether the route is directly connected and on which interface the route is
configured.
Dist/Metric Identifies if the route has a specified distance or metric.
Last Change Identifies when the route was last changed or configured.

trust ipv6-diffserv
ces Allows the dynamic classification of IPv6 DSCP.

Syntax trust ipv6-diffserv

To remove the definition, use the no trust ipv6-diffserv command.

Defaults This command has no default behavior or values.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION-POLICY-MAP-IN

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced

IPv6 Basics | 621

 Usage When trust IPv6 diffserv is configured, matched bytes/packets counters are not incremented in the
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Information show qos statistics command.

Trust diffserv (IPv4) can co-exist with trust ipv6-diffserv in an Input Policy Map. Dynamic
classification happens based on the mapping detailed in the following table.

Table 20-2. IPv6 -Diffserv Mapping

IPv6 Service Class Field Queue ID

111XXXXX 7
110XXXXX 6
101XXXXX 5
100XXXXX 4
011XXXXX 3
010XXXXX 2
001XXXXX 1
000XXXXX 0

622 | IPv6 Basics

 21
iSCSI Optimization

Overview
Internet Small Computer System Interface (iSCSI) optimization enables quality-of-service (QoS)
treatment for iSCSI storage traffic on the following platforms as indicated: .

The following FTOS commands are used to configure and verify the iSCSI Optimization feature:

• iscsi aging time

• iscsi cos
• iscsi enable
• iscsi priority-bits
• iscsi profile-compellent
• iscsi target port
• show iscsi
• show iscsi session
• show iscsi session detailed
• show run iscsi

iscsi aging time

Set the aging time for iSCSI sessions.

Syntax iscsi aging time time

To remove the iSCSI session aging time, use the no iscsi aging time command.

Parameters
time Enter the aging time for the iSCSI session.
Range: 5 to 43,200 minutes.

Defaults 10 minutes.

Command Mode CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810.
History
Version 8.3.16.0 Introduced on MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module

iSCSI Optimization | 623

 iscsi cos
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Set the QoS policy that will be applied to the iSCSI flows.

Syntax iscsi cos {enable | disable | dot1p vlan-priority-value [remark] | dscp dscp-value [remark]}

To disable the QoS policy, use the iscsi cos disable command.

Parameters
enable Enter the keyword enable to allow the application of preferential QoS treatment to
iSCSI traffic so that the iSCSI packets are scheduled in the switch with a dot1p
priority 4 regardless of the VLAN priority tag in the packet.
Default: iSCSI packets are handled with dotp1 priority 4 without remark.
disable Enter the keyword disable to disable the application of preferential QoS treatment
to iSCSI frames.
dot1p Enter the dot1p value of the VLAN priority tag assigned to the incoming packets in
vlan-priority-value an iSCSI session.
Range: 0 to 7.
Default: The dot1p value in ingress iSCSI frames is not changed and is used in
iSCSI TLV advertisements if you did not enter the iscsi priority-bits command.
dscp dscp-value Enter the DSCP value assigned to the incoming packets in an iSCSI session.
The valid range is 0 to 63.
Default: The DSCP value in ingress packets is not changed.
remark Marks the incoming iSCSI packets with the configured dot1p or DSCP value when
they egress to the switch.
Default: The dot1and DSCP values in egress packets are not changed.

Defaults See above.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810.
History
Version 8.3.16.0 Introduced on MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module

Usage By default, iSCSI flows are assigned to dot1p priority 4. Dell Networking recommends
Information changing the dot1p priority-queue setting to 0 (zero).

iscsi enable
Globally enable iSCSI optimization.

Syntax iscsi enable

To disable iSCSI optimization, use the no iscsi enable command.

Parameters
enable Enter the keyword enable to enable the iSCSI optimization feature.

Defaults Disabled.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

624 | iSCSI Optimization

 Command
Version 8.3.3.8 Introduced on the S60
History
Version 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810.
Version 8.3.16.0 Introduced on MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module

Usage • LLDP must be enabled before using this command.

Information • LLDP cannot be disabled if iSCSI is enabled.

iscsi priority-bits
Configure the priority bitmap to be advertised in iSCSI application TLVs.

Syntax iscsi priority-bits

To remove the configured priority bitmap, use the no iscsi priority-bits command.

Defaults 4 (0x10 in the bitmap)

Command Modes PROTOCOL LLDP (only on global, not on interface)

Command
Version 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810.
History
Version 8.3.16.0 Introduced on MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module

iscsi profile-compellent
Configure the auto-detection of Compellent arrays on a port.

Syntax iscsi profile-compellent

Defaults Compellent disk arrays are not detected.

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.5.3 Introduced on the S55
History
Version 8.3.3.8 Introduced on the S60
Version 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810.
Version 8.3.16.0 Introduced on MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module

iSCSI Optimization | 625

 iscsi target port
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Configure the iSCSI target ports and optionally, the IP addresses on which iSCSI communication will
be monitored.

Syntax iscsi target port [tcp-port-2...tcp-port-16]ip-address [ip-address]

To remove the configured iSCSI target ports or IP addresses, use the no iscsi target port command.

Parameters
tcp-port-2...tcp- Enter the tcp-port number of the iSCSI target ports.
port-16 The tcp-port-n is the TCP port number or a list of TCP port numbers on which the
iSCSI target listens to requests. Separate port numbers with a comma.
Default: 860, 3260.
ip-address (Optional) Enter the ip-address that the iSCSI will monitor.
The ip-address specifies the IP address of the iSCSI target.

Defaults 860, 3260.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810.
History
Version 8.3.16.0 Introduced on MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module

Usage You can configure up to 16 target TCP ports on the switch in one command or multiple commands.
Information
When you use the no iscsi target port command and the TCP port to be deleted is one bound to a
specific IP address, the IP address value must be included in the command.

show iscsi
Display the currently configured iSCSI settings.

Syntax show iscsi

Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. Support added for cam modification.
History
Version 8.3.16.0 Introduced on MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module

Example FTOS#show iscsi

iSCSI is enabled
iSCSI session monitoring is disabled
iSCSI COS : dot1p is 4 no-remark
Session aging time: 10
Maximum number of connections is 256
------------------------------------------------
iSCSI Targets and TCP Ports:

626 | iSCSI Optimization

 ------------------------------------------------
TCP Port Target IP Address
3260
860

Related
Commands show iscsi session Display information on active iSCSI sessions on the switch.
show iscsi session detailed Display detailed information on active iSCSI sessions on the switch.
show run iscsi show run iscsi

show iscsi session

Display information on active iSCSI sessions on the switch.

Syntax show iscsi session

Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810.
History
Version 8.3.16.0 Introduced on MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module

Usage Only sessions observed by the switch will be learnt; sessions flowing through an adjacent switch will
Information not be learnt. Session monitoring learns sessions that actually flow through the switch, it does not learn
all sessions in the entire topology.

After a switch is reloaded, any information exchanged during the initial handshake is not available. If
the switch picks up the communication after reloading, it would detect a session was in progress but
could not obtain complete information for it. Any incomplete information of this type would not be
available in the “show” commands.

Example FTOS# show isci session

Session 0:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Target: iqn.2001-05.com.equallogic:0-8a0906-0e70c2002-10a0018426a48c94-iom010
Initiator: iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft:win-x9l8v27yajg
ISID: 400001370000

Session 1:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Target: iqn.2001-05.com.equallogic:0-8a0906-0f60c2002-0360018428d48c94-iom011
Initiator: iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft:win-x9l8v27yajg
ISID: 400001370000.

Related
Commands show iscsi Display the currently configured iSCSI settings.
show iscsi session detailed Display detailed information on active iSCSI sessions on the switch.
show run iscsi show run iscsi

iSCSI Optimization | 627

 show iscsi session detailed
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Display detailed information on active iSCSI sessions on the switch.

Syntax show iscsi session detailed [session isid]

Parameters
isid Enter the session’s iSCSi ID to display detailed information on specified iSCSi session.

Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810.
History
Version 8.3.16.0 Introduced on MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module

Example FTOS# show isci session detailed

Session 0 :
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Target:iqn.2010-11.com.ixia:ixload:iscsi-TG1
Initiator:iqn.2010-11.com.ixia.ixload:initiator-iscsi-2c
Up Time:00:00:01:28(DD:HH:MM:SS)
Time for aging out:00:00:09:34(DD:HH:MM:SS)
ISID:806978696102
Initiator Initiator Target Target Connection
IP Address TCP Port IP Address TCPPort ID
10.10.0.44 33345 10.10.0.101 3260 0
Session 1 :
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Target:iqn.2010-11.com.ixia:ixload:iscsi-TG1
Initiator:iqn.2010-11.com.ixia.ixload:initiator-iscsi-35
Up Time:00:00:01:22(DD:HH:MM:SS)
Time for aging out:00:00:09:31(DD:HH:MM:SS)
ISID:806978696102
Initiator Initiator Target Target Connection
IP Address TCP Port IP Address TCPPort ID
10.10.0.53 33432 10.10.0.101 3260 0

Related
Commands show iscsi Display the currently configured iSCSI settings.
show iscsi session Display information on active iSCSI sessions on the switch.
show run iscsi show run iscsi

show run iscsi

Display all globally-configured non-default iSCSI settings in the current FTOS session.

Syntax show run iscsi

Command Mode EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.8 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810.
Version 8.3.16.0 Introduced on MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module

628 | iSCSI Optimization

Example FTOS(conf) # show run iscsi
!
iscsi enable
FTOS(conf) #

iSCSI Optimization | 629

 www.dell.com | dell.com/support

630
|
iSCSI Optimization
 22
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

Overview
This chapter contains commands for Dell Networking’s implementation of Link Aggregation Control
Protocol (LACP) for the creation of dynamic link aggregation groups (LAGs — called port-channels
in FTOS parlance). For static LAG commands, see the section Port Channel Commands in the
Interfaces chapter), based on the standards specified in the IEEE 802.3 Carrier sense multiple access
with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications.

Commands in this chapter generally are supported on all three Dell Networking platforms — C-Series,
E-Series, and S-Series — as indicated by the following symbols under command headings: c e s

Commands
Use the following commands for LACP:
• clear lacp counters
• debug lacp
• lacp long-timeout
• lacp port-priority
• lacp system-priority
• lacp ungroup member-independent
• port-channel mode
• port-channel-protocol lacp
• show lacp
In addition, an FTOS option provides hitless dynamic LACP states (no noticeable impact to dynamic
LACP states after an RPM failover) on E-Series.

clear lacp counters

ces Clear Port Channel counters.

Syntax clear lacp port-channel-number counters

Parameters
port-channel-number Enter the Port Channel number to clear the counters.
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1-255 for TeraScale

Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) | 631

 Defaults Without a Port Channel specified, the command clears all Port Channel counters.
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Related
show lacp Display the lacp configuration
Commands

debug lacp
ces Debug LACP (configuration, events etc.)

Syntax debug lacp [config | events | pdu [in | out | [interface [in | out]]]]
To disable LACP debugging, use the no debug lacp [config | events | pdu [in | out | [interface
[in | out]]]] command.

Parameters
config (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword config to debug the LACP configuration.
events (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword events to debug LACP event information.
pdu in | out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword pdu to debug LACP Protocol Data Unit
information. Optionally, enter an in or out parameter to:
• Receive enter in
• Transmit enter out
interface in | out (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a 100/1000 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a Ten Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
Optionally, enter an in or out parameter:
• Receive enter in
• Transmit enter out

Defaults This command has no default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
History

632 | Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

 Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

lacp long-timeout
ce Configure a long timeout period (30 seconds) for an LACP session.

Syntax lacp long-timeout

To reset the timeout period to a short timeout (1 second), use the no lacp long-timeout command.

Defaults 1 second

Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-if-po-number)

Command
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
History
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Usage This command applies to dynamic port-channel interfaces only. When applied on a static port-channel,
Information the command has no effect.

Related
show lacp Display the lacp configuration
Commands

lacp port-priority
ces Configure the port priority to influence which ports will be put in standby mode when there is a
hardware limitation that prevents all compatible ports from aggregating.

Syntax lacp port-priority priority-value

To return to the default setting, use the no lacp port-priority priority-value command.

Parameters
priority-value Enter the port-priority value. The higher the value number the lower the priority.
Range: 1 to 65535
Default: 32768

Defaults 32768

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) | 633

 lacp system-priority
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Configure the LACP system priority.

Syntax lacp system-priority priority-value

To return to the default setting, use the no lacp system-priority priority-value command.

Parameters
priority-value Enter the port-priority value. The higher the value, the lower the priority.
Range: 1 to 65535
Default: 32768

Defaults 32768

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

lacp ungroup member-independent

Enable BMP boot for the device connected to the LACP LAG.

Syntax lacp ungroup member-independent {port-channel port-channel-id}

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Usage During boot-up in a stacking configuration, the system must be able to reach the DHCP server
Information with the image and configuration image. During bootup, only untagged DHCP requests are
sent to the DHCP server to receive an offer on static LAGs between switches. The DHCP
server must be configured to start in JumpStart mode. If switches are connected using LACP
port-channel like ToR, use the port-channel parameter on the TOR side of the configuration
to allow member ports of a completely un-grouped lacp port-channel to inherit vlan
membership of that port channel to ensure untagged packets reach the DHCP server located
on the TOR. To ungroup the port-channel configurations, use the no lacp ungroup
member-independent command.

Command
History Version 8.3.5.3 Introduced on S55
Version 8.3.3.8 Introduced on S60
Version 8.3.12.0 Added port-channel parameter.
Version 8.3.8.0 Introduced on S4810

634 | Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

port-channel mode
ces Configure the LACP port channel mode.

Syntax port-channel number mode [active] [passive] [off]

Parameters
number Enter the port-channel number.
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1-255 for TeraScale
active Enter the keyword active to set the mode to the active state.*
passive Enter the keyword passive to set the mode to the passive state.*
off Enter the keyword off to set the mode to the off state.*
* The LACP modes are defined in the table below.

Defaults off

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced

Usage The LACP modes are defined in the following table.

Information
Table 22-1. LACP Modes

Mode Function
An interface is in an active negotiating state in this mode. LACP runs on any link
active configured in the active state and also automatically initiates negotiation with other
ports by initiating LACP packets.
An interface is not in an active negotiating state in this mode. LACP runs on any link
configured in the passive state. Ports in a passive state respond to negotiation requests
passive
from other ports that are in active states. Ports in a passive state respond to LACP
packets.
An interface can not be part of a dynamic port channel in the off mode. LACP will not
off
run on a port configured in the off mode.

port-channel-protocol lacp
ces Enable LACP on any LAN port.

Syntax port-channel-protocol lacp

To disable LACP on a LAN port, use the no port-channel-protocol lacp command.

Command Modes INTERFACE

Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) | 635

 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.

History
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced

Related
show lacp Display the LACP information.
Commands
show interfaces port-channel Display information on configured Port Channel groups.

show lacp
ces Display the LACP matrix.

Syntax show lacp port-channel-number [sys-id | counters]

Parameters
port-channel-number Enter the port-channel number to display the LACP matrix.
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1-255 for TeraScale
sys-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword sys-id and the value that identifies a
system.
counters (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword counters to display the LACP counters.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced

Example 1 Figure 22-1. show lacp port-channel-number command

FTOS#show lacp 1
Port-channel 1 admin up, oper up, mode lacp
Actor System ID: Priority 32768, Address 0001.e800.a12b
Partner System ID: Priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.45a5
Actor Admin Key 1, Oper Key 1, Partner Oper Key 1
LACP LAG 1 is an aggregatable link

A - Active LACP, B - Passive LACP, C - Short Timeout, D - Long Timeout

E - Aggregatable Link, F - Individual Link, G - IN_SYNC, H - OUT_OF_SYNC
I - Collection enabled, J - Collection disabled, K - Distribution enabled L - Distribution disabled,
M - Partner Defaulted, N - Partner Non-defaulted, O - Receiver is in expired state,
P - Receiver is not in expired state

Port Gi 10/6 is enabled, LACP is enabled and mode is lacp

Actor Admin: State ACEHJLMP Key 1 Priority 128
Oper: State ACEGIKNP Key 1 Priority 128
Partner Admin: State BDFHJLMP Key 0 Priority 0
Oper: State BCEGIKNP Key 1 Priority 128
FTOS#

636 | Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

Example 2 Figure 22-2. show lacp sys-id command Example
FTOS#show lacp 1 sys-id
Actor System ID: Priority 32768, Address 0001.e800.a12b
Partner System ID: Priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.45a5

FTOS#

Example 3 Figure 22-3. show lacp counter command Example

FTOS#show lacp 1 counters
----------------------------------------------------------------------
LACP PDU Marker PDU Unknown Illegal
Port Xmit Recv Xmit Recv Pkts Rx Pkts Rx
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Gi 10/6 200 200 0 0 0 0
FTOS#

Related
clear lacp counters Clear the LACP counters.
Commands
show interfaces port-channel Display information on configured Port Channel groups.

Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) | 637

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

638 | Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

 23
Layer 2

Overview
This chapter describes commands to configure Layer 2 features. It contains the following sections:

• MAC Addressing Commands

• Virtual LAN (VLAN) Commands
Some MAC addressing commands are supported only on the E-Series, some on all three Dell
Networking platforms, and some on two Dell Networking platforms. Support is indicated by these
characters, where appropriate, under each command heading: c e s

The VLAN commands are supported on all three Dell Networking platforms — c e s

MAC Addressing Commands

The following commands are related to configuring, managing, and viewing MAC addresses:
• clear mac-address-table dynamic
• mac accounting destination
• mac-address-table aging-time
• mac-address-table static
• mac-address-table station-move threshold
• mac-address-table station-move time-interval
• mac-address-table station-move refresh-arp
• mac cam fib-partition
• mac learning-limit
• mac learning-limit learn-limit-violation
• mac learning-limit station-move-violation
• mac learning-limit reset
• show cam mac linecard (count)
• show cam maccheck linecard
• show cam mac linecard (dynamic or static)
• show cam mac stack-unit
• show mac-address-table
• show mac-address-table aging-time
• show mac accounting destination
• show mac cam
• show mac learning-limit

Layer 2 | 639
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

clear mac-address-table dynamic

ces Clear the MAC address table of all MAC address learned dynamically.

Syntax clear mac-address-table dynamic {address mac-address | all | interface interface | vlan
vlan-id}

Parameters
address mac-address Enter the keyword address followed by a MAC address in
nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
all Enter the keyword all to delete all MAC address entries in the MAC address
table.
interface interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
GigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel
followed by a number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/
port information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan followed by a VLAN ID number from 1 to 4094.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

mac accounting destination

e Configure a destination counter for Layer 2 traffic.

Syntax mac accounting destination {mac-address vlan vlan-id | vlan} [bytes | packets]
To delete a destination counter, enter no mac accounting destination.

Parameters
mac-address Enter the MAC address in the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format to count Layer 2 packets
or bytes sent to that MAC address.
vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID to count Layer 2 packets or
bytes sent to the VLAN.
Range: 1 to 4094.
bytes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bytes to count only bytes
packets (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword packets to count only packets.

640 | Layer 2
 Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes INTERFACE (available on physical interfaces only)

Command
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series
History

Usage You must place the interface in Layer 2 mode (using the switchport command) prior to configuring the
Information mac accounting destination command.

mac-address-table aging-time
ces Specify an aging time for MAC addresses to be removed from the MAC Address Table.

Syntax mac-address-table aging-time seconds

Parameters
seconds Enter either zero (0) or a number as the number of seconds before MAC addresses are
relearned. To disable aging of the MAC address table, enter 0.
E-Series Range from CONFIGURATION mode: 10 - 1000000
E-Series Range from INTERFACE VLAN mode: 1 - 1000000
C-Series and S-Series Range: 10 - 1000000
Default: 1800 seconds

Defaults 1800 seconds

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

INTERFACE VLAN (E-Series only)

Command
Version 8.3.1.0 On the E-Series, available in INTERFACE VLAN context and reduced
History
minimum aging time in INTERFACE VLAN context from 10 seconds to 1
second.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Related
mac learning-limit Set the MAC address learning limits for a selected interface.
Commands
show mac-address-table aging-time Display the MAC aging time.

mac-address-table static
ces Associate specific MAC or hardware addresses to an interface and VLANs.

Syntax mac-address-table static mac-address output interface vlan vlan-id

To remove a MAC address, use the no mac-address-table static mac-address output interface
vlan vlan-id command.

Layer 2 | 641
 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

mac-address Enter the 48-bit hexidecimal address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.

output interface Enter the keyword output followed by one of the following interfaces:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
GigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel
followed by a number:
C-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/
port information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan followed by a VLAN ID.
Range:1 to 4094.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Related
show mac-address-table Displays the MAC address table.
Commands

mac-address-table station-move threshold

ce Change the frequency with which the MAC address station-move trap is sent after a MAC address
changes in a VLAN. A trap is sent if a station move is detected above a threshold number of times in a
given interval.

Syntax [no] mac-address-table station-move threshold number interval count

Parameters
threshold number Enter the keyword threshold followed by the number of times MAC
addresses in VLANs can change before an SNMP trap is sent.
Range: 1 to 10
interval seconds Enter the keyword interval followed by the number of seconds.
Range: 5 to 60

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
History
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

642 | Layer 2
 Usage For information on the specific trap sent and the corresponding Syslog refer to Appendix A, SNMP
Information Traps.

mac-address-table station-move time-interval

e Reduce the amount of time FTOS takes to detect aged entries and station moves.

Syntax [no] mac-address-table station-move time-interval number

Parameters
time-interval number Select the interval of the successive scans of the MAC address table that are
used to detect a aged entries and station moves.
Range: 500 to 5000ms

Defaults 5000ms

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on E-Series
History

Usage FTOS takes 4 to 5 seconds to detect aged entries and station moves because the MAC address table
Information scanning routine runs every 5000 ms by default. To achieve faster detection, reduce the scanning
interval.

mac-address-table station-move refresh-arp

ces Ensure that ARP refreshes the egress interface when a station move occurs due to a topology change.

Syntax [no] mac-address-table station-move refresh-arp

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Usage See the “NIC Teaming” section of the Layer 2 chapter in the FTOS Configuration Guide for details on
Information using this command.

mac cam fib-partition

e Reapportion the amount of Content Addressable Memory (CAM) available for MAC address learning
(FIB) versus the amount available for MAC ACLs on a line card.

Syntax mac cam fib-partition {25 | 50 | 75 | 100} slot-number

Layer 2 | 643
 To return to the default setting, enter no mac cam fib-partition.
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Parameters
25 Enter the keyword 25 to set aside 25% of the CAM for MAC address learning.
50 Enter the keyword 50 to set aside 50% of the CAM for MAC address learning.
75 Enter the keyword 75 to set aside 75% of the CAM for MAC address learning.
100 Enter the keyword 100 to set aside 100% of the MAC CAM for MAC address
learning.
With this configuration, no MAC ACLs are processed.
slot-number Enter the line card slot number.
Range: 0 to 13 for the E1200
0 to 6 for the E600
0 to 5 for the E300

Defaults 75 (75% of the MAC CAM for MAC address learning)

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Usage After setting the CAM partition size, the line card resets.
Information

Related
show mac cam Display the current MAC CAM partition values.
Commands

mac learning-limit
ces Limit the maximum number of MAC addresses (static + dynamic) learned on a selected interface.

Syntax mac learning-limit address_limit [vlan vlan-id] [station-move [dynamic]] [no-station-move

[dynamic]] | [dynamic [no-station-move | station-move]]

Parameters
address_limit Enter the maximum number of MAC addresses learned.
Range: 1 to 1000000
vlan vlan-id On the E-Series only, enter the keyword followed by the VLAN ID.
Range: 1-4094
dynamic (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dynamic to allow aging of MACs even
though a learning limit is configured.
no-station-move (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword no-station-move to disallow a station
move (associate the learned MAC address with the most recently accessed
port) on learned MAC addresses.
station-move (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword station-move to allow a station move
on learned MAC addresses.

Defaults On C-Series, the default behavior is no-station-move + static.

On E-Series, the default behavior is station-move + static.
“Static” means manually entered addresses, which do not age.

Command Modes INTERFACE

644 | Layer 2
 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Added vlan option on E-Series.
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on C-Series; added station-move option
Version 6.5.1.0 Added support for MAC Learning-Limit on LAG

Usage This command and its options are supported on physical interfaces, static LAGs, LACP LAGs, and
Information VLANs.

If the vlan option is not specified, then the MAC address counters is not VLAN-based. That is, the
sum of the addresses learned on all VLANs (not having any learning limit configuration) is counted
against the MAC learning limit.

MAC Learning Limit violation logs and actions are not available on a per-VLAN basis.

With the keyword no-station-move option, MAC addresses learned through this feature on the selected
interface will persist on a per-VLAN basis, even if received on another interface. Enabling or disabling
this option has no effect on already learned MAC addresses.

Once the MAC address learning limit is reached, the MAC addresses do not age out unless you add the
dynamic option. To clear statistics on MAC address learning, use the clear counters command with
the learning-limit parameter.

Note: If you configure this command on an interface in a routed VLAN, and once the MAC
addresses learned reaches the limit set in the mac learning-limit command, IP protocols are
affected. For example, VRRP sets multiple VRRP Masters, and OSPF may not come up.

When a channel member is added to a port-channel and there is not enough ACL CAM space, then the
MAC limit functionality on that port-channel is undefined. When this occurs, unconfigure the existing
configuration first and then reapply the limit with a lower value.

Related
Commands
clear counters Clear counters used in the show interface command
clear mac-address-table Clear the MAC address table of all MAC address learned dynamically.
dynamic
show mac learning-limit Display MAC learning-limit configuration.

mac learning-limit learn-limit-violation

ces Configure an action for a MAC address learning-limit violation.

Syntax mac learning-limit learn-limit-violation {log | shutdown}

To return to the default, use the no mac learning-limit learn-limit-violation {log | shutdown}
command.

Parameters
log Enter the keyword log to generate a syslog message on a learning-limit
violation.
shutdown Enter the keyword shutdown to shut down the port on a learning-limit
violation.

Layer 2 | 645
 Defaults No default behavior or values
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-slot/port)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Usage This is supported on physical interfaces, static LAGs, and LACP LAGs.
Information

Related
show mac learning-limit Display details of the mac learning-limit
Commands

mac learning-limit station-move-violation

ces Specify the actions for a station move violation.

Syntax mac learning-limit station-move-violation {log | shutdown-both | shutdown-offending |

shutdown-original}
To disable a configuration, use the no mac learning-limit station-move-violation command,
followed by the configured keyword.

Parameters
log Enter the keyword log to generate a syslog message on a station move
violation.
shutdown-both Enter the keyword shutdown to shut down both the original and offending
interface and generate a syslog message.
shutdown-offending Enter the keyword shutdown-offending to shut down the offending
interface and generate a syslog message.
shutdown-original Enter the keyword shutdown-original to shut down the original
interface and generate a syslog message.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-slot/port)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Usage This is supported on physical interfaces, static LAGs, and LACP LAGs.
Information

Related
show mac learning-limit Display details of the mac learning-limit
Commands

646 | Layer 2
mac learning-limit reset
ces Reset the MAC address learning-limit error-disabled state.

Syntax mac learning-limit reset

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

show cam mac linecard (count)

e Display the CAM size and the portions allocated for MAC addresses and for MAC ACLs.

Syntax show cam mac linecard slot port-set port-pipe count [vlan vlan-id] [interface interface]

Parameters
linecard slot (REQUIRED) Enter the keyword linecard followed by a slot number to
select the linecard for which to gather information.
E-Series range: 0 to 6.
port-set port-pipe (REQUIRED) Enter the keyword port-set followed by a Port-Pipe number
to select the Port-Pipe for which to gather information.
E-Series range: 0 or 1
count (REQUIRED) Enter the keyword count to display CAM usage by interface
type.
interface interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interface followed by the interface type,
slot and port information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
GigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel
followed by a number:
C-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/
port information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID to display
the MAC address assigned to the VLAN.
Range: 1 to 4094.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Layer 2 | 647
 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

History

show cam maccheck linecard

c Display the results of the BCMI2 check command.

Note: This command was deprecated in FTOS version 8.3.3.9.

Syntax show cam maccheck linecard slot port-set port-pipe

Parameters
linecard slot (REQUIRED) Enter the keyword linecard followed by a slot number to
select the linecard for which to gather information.
C300 range: 0 to 7; C150 range: 0 to 4
port-set port-pipe (REQUIRED) Enter the keyword port-set followed by a Port-Pipe number
to select the Port-Pipe for which to gather information.
Range: 0 or 1

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.9 Deprecated command
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series

Example Figure 23-1. show cam maccheck linecard Command Output Example
FTOS#show cam maccheck linecard 2 port-set 0
Dumping entries. From 0 to 16383.
Progress . marks 100 memory table entries.
............................Index 5576 (0x15c8) has valid entries (H: 2b9, E: 0)

<MAC_ADDR=0xffffffffffff,VLAN_ID=0xfff,PRI=0,CPU=0,DST_DISCARD=0,SRC_DISCARD=0,SCP
=0,TGID_LO=0,PORT_TGID=0,TGID_PORT=0,T=0,TGID_HI=0,L2MC_PTR=0,MODULE_ID=0,REMOTE_T
RUNK=0,L3=0,MAC_BLOCK_INDEX=0,STATIC_BIT=1,RPE=0,MIRROR=0,VALID=1,EVEN_PARITY=0,HI
TDA=0,HITSA=0>
..........Index 6592 (0x19c0) has valid entries (H: 338, E: 0)

<MAC_ADDR=0xa0000000,VLAN_ID=0xffe,PRI=0,CPU=0,DST_DISCARD=0,SRC_DISCARD=0,SCP=0,T
GID_LO=0,PORT_TGID=0,TGID_PORT=0,T=0,TGID_HI=0,L2MC_PTR=0,MODULE_ID=0x10,REMOTE_TR
UNK=0,L3=0,MAC_BLOCK_INDEX=0,STATIC_BIT=0,RPE=0,MIRROR=0,VALID=1,EVEN_PARITY=1,HIT
DA=1,HITSA=1>

!-------------output truncated-------------------!

Usage Use this command to check various flags associated with each MAC address in the CAM.
Information
Figure 23-1 shows information for two MAC addresses. The second entry is for MAC address
00:00:a0:00:00:00 (leading 0s are not shown), which is shown as learned on VLAN ID 4094
(0xfff), as shown below in Figure 23-2 and Figure 23-3. Above, “STATIC_BIT=0” means that
the address is dynamically learned.

When an entry is listed as STATIC_BIT=1, its HIT_SA is 0, which signifies that this address is
not getting continuously learned trough traffic. The HIT_DA is set when a new learn happens, and
after the first age sweep, it gets reset.

648 | Layer 2
 Example Figure 23-2. show mac-address-table Command Output Example
FTOS#show mac-address-table
VlanId Mac Address Type Interface State
4094 00:00:a0:00:00:00 Dynamic Gi 2/0 Active

!-------------output truncated-------------------!

Example Figure 23-3. show cam mac linecard Command Output Example
FTOS#show cam mac linecard 2 port-set 0
VlanId Mac Address Region Interface
0 ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff STATIC 00001
4094 00:00:a0:00:00:00 DYNAMIC Gi 2/0
!-------------output truncated-------------------!

show cam mac linecard (dynamic or static)

ce Display the CAM size and the portions allocated for MAC addresses and for MAC ACLs.

Syntax show cam mac linecard slot port-set port-pipe [address mac_addr | dynamic | interface
interface | static | vlan vlan-id]

Parameters
linecard slot (REQUIRED) Enter the keyword linecard followed by a slot number to
select the linecard for which to gather information.
C-Series Range: 0 to 4 (C150); 0 to 8 (C300)
E-Series Range: 0 to 6
port-set port-pipe (REQUIRED) Enter the keyword port-set followed by a Port-Pipe number
to select the Port-Pipe for which to gather information.
Range: 0 or 1
address mac-addr (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword address followed by a MAC address in
the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format to display information on that MAC address.
dynamic (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dynamic to display only those MAC
addresses learned dynamically by the switch.
interface interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interface followed by the interface type,
slot and port information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
GigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel
followed by a number:
C-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/
port information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
static (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword static to display only those MAC address
specifically configured on the switch.
vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID to display
the MAC address assigned to the VLAN.
Range: 1 to 4094.

Layer 2 | 649
 Command Modes EXEC
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
History
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 23-4. show cam mac linecard Command Example

FTOS#show cam mac linecard 1 port-set 0
Port - (TableID) assignments:
00(01) 01(01) 02(01) 03(01) 04(01) 05(01) 06(01) 07(01) 08(01) 09(01) 10(01) 11(01)
12(01) 13(01) 14(01) 15(01) 16(01) 17(01) 18(01) 19(01) 20(01) 21(01) 22(01) 23(01)
Index Table ID VlanId Mac Address Region Interface
0 1 0 00:01:e8:0d:b7:3b LOCAL_DA 1e000
1 1 0 00:01:e8:0d:b7:3a LOCAL_DA 1e000
101 0 0 00:01:e8:00:04:00 SYSTEM_STATIC 01c05
102 0 0 01:80:00:00:00:00 SYSTEM_STATIC 01c05
103 0 0 01:00:0c:cc:cc:cc SYSTEM_STATIC 01c01
104 0 0 01:80:c2:00:00:02 SYSTEM_STATIC 01c02
105 0 0 01:80:c2:00:00:0e SYSTEM_STATIC 01c01
106 0 0 00:01:e8:0d:b7:68 SYSTEM_STATIC DROP
107 0 0 00:01:e8:0d:b7:67 SYSTEM_STATIC DROP
108 0 0 00:01:e8:0d:b7:66 SYSTEM_STATIC DROP
109 0 0 00:01:e8:0d:b7:65 SYSTEM_STATIC DROP
110 0 0 00:01:e8:0d:b7:64 SYSTEM_STATIC DROP
111 0 0 00:01:e8:0d:b7:63 SYSTEM_STATIC DROP
112 0 0 00:01:e8:0d:b7:62 SYSTEM_STATIC DROP
113 0 0 00:01:e8:0d:b7:61 SYSTEM_STATIC DROP
114 0 0 00:01:e8:0d:b7:60 SYSTEM_STATIC DROP
115 0 0 00:01:e8:0d:b7:5f SYSTEM_STATIC DROP
116 0 0 00:01:e8:0d:b7:5e SYSTEM_STATIC DROP
117 0 0 00:01:e8:0d:b7:5d SYSTEM_STATIC DROP
FTOS#

show cam mac stack-unit

s Display the Content Addressable Memory (CAM) size and the portions allocated for MAC addresses
and for MAC ACLs.

Syntax show cam mac stack-unit unit_number port-set port-pipe count [vlan vlan-id] [interface
interface]

Parameters
stack-unit unit_number (REQUIRED) Enter the keyword linecard followed by a stack member
number to select the linecard for which to gather information.
S-Series Range: 0 to 1
port-set port-pipe (REQUIRED) Enter the keyword port-set followed by a Port-Pipe number
to select the Port-Pipe for which to gather information.
Unit ID range:
S60: 0-11
all other S-Series: 0-7
address mac-addr (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword address followed by a MAC address in
the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format to display information on that MAC address.
dynamic (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dynamic to display only those MAC
addresses learned dynamically by the switch.
static (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword static to display only those MAC address
specifically configured on the switch.

650 | Layer 2
 interface interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interface followed by the interface type,
slot and port information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
GigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel
followed by a number:
S-Series Range: 1-128
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID to display
the MAC address assigned to the VLAN.
Range: 1 to 4094.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 This version of the command introduced for S-Series

show mac-address-table
ces Display the MAC address table.

Syntax show mac-address-table [dynamic | static] [address mac-address | interface interface | vlan
vlan-id] [count [vlan vlan-id] [interface interface-type [slot [/port]]]]

Parameters
dynamic (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dynamic to display only those MAC
addresses learned dynamically by the switch. Optionally, you can also add
one of these combinations: address/mac-address, interface/
interface, or vlan vlan-id.
static (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword static to display only those MAC address
specifically configured on the switch. Optionally, you can also add one of
these combinations: address/mac-address, interface/interface, or
vlan vlan-id.
address mac-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword address followed by a MAC address in
the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format to display information on that MAC address.
interface interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interface followed by the interface type,
slot and port information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
GigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel
followed by a number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/
port information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.

Layer 2 | 651
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

interface interface-type (OPTIONAL) Instead of entering the keyword interface followed by the
interface type, slot and port information, as above, you can enter the
interface type, followed by just a slot number.
vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID to display
the MAC address assigned to the VLAN.
Range: 1 to 4094.
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count, followed optionally, by an
interface or VLAN ID, to display total or interface-specific static addresses,
dynamic addresses, and MAC addresses in use.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
History
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 23-5. show mac-address-table Command Example

FTOS#show mac-address-table

VlanId Mac Address Type Interface State

999 00:00:00:00:00:19 Dynamic Gi 0/1 Active
999 00:00:00:00:00:29 Dynamic Gi 0/2 Active

FTOS#

Table 23-1. show mac-address-table Information

Column Heading Description

VlanId Displays the VLAN ID number.
Mac Address Displays the MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
Type Lists whether the MAC address was manually configured (Static) or learned
(Dynamic).
Interface Displays the interface type and slot/port information. The following abbreviations
describe the interface types:
• gi—Gigabit Ethernet followed by a slot/port.
• po—Port Channel followed by a number. Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale
• so—Sonet followed by a slot/port.
• te—10-Gigabit Ethernet followed by a slot/port.
State Lists if the MAC address is in use (Active) or not in use (Inactive).

Figure 23-6. show mac-address-table count Command Example

FTOS#show mac-address-table count
MAC Entries for all vlans :
Dynamic Address Count : 5
Static Address (User-defined) Count : 0
Total MAC Addresses in Use: 5
FTOS#

652 | Layer 2
 Table 23-2. show mac-address-table count Information

Line Beginning with Description

MAC Entries... Displays the number of MAC entries learnt per VLAN.
Dynamic Address... Lists the number of dynamically learned MAC
addresses.
Static Address... Lists the number of user-defined MAC addresses.
Total MAC... Lists the total number of MAC addresses used by the
switch.

Related
show mac-address-table aging-time Display MAC aging time.
Commands

show mac-address-table aging-time

ces Display the aging times assigned to the MAC addresses on the switch.

Syntax show mac-address-table aging-time [vlan vlan-id]

Parameters
vlan vlan-id On the E-Series, enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID to
display the MAC address aging time for MAC addresses on the VLAN.
Range: 1 to 4094.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Added the vlan option on the E-Series.
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 23-7. show mac-address-table aging-time Command Example

FTOS#show mac-address-table aging-time
Mac-address-table aging time : 1800

FTOS#

Related
show mac-address-table Display the current MAC address configuration.
Commands

show mac accounting destination

e Display destination counters for Layer 2 traffic (available on physical interfaces only).

Syntax show mac accounting destination [mac-address vlan vlan-id] [interface interface
[mac-address vlan vlan-id] [vlan vlan-id]] [vlan vlan-id]

Layer 2 | 653
 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

mac-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the MAC address in the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format to

display information on that MAC address.
interface interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interface followed by the interface type,
slot and port information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
GigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID to display
the MAC address assigned to that VLAN.
Range: 1 to 4094.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series
History

Usage MAC Accounting information can be accessed using SNMP via the Force10 Monitor MIB. For more
Information information on enabling SNMP, refer to Chapter 3 of the FTOS Configuration Guide.

Note: Currently, the Force10 MONITOR MIB does not return the MAC addresses in an
increasing order via SNMP. As a workaround, you can use the -C c option in snmpwalk or
snmpbulkwalk to access the Force10 MONITOR MIB. For example:
% snmpwalk -C c -v 2c -c public 133.33.33.131 enterprise.6027.3.3.3

Example Figure 23-8. show mac accounting destination Command Example

FTOS#show mac accounting destination interface gigabitethernet 2/1

Destination Out Port VLAN Packets Bytes

00:44:00:00:00:02 Te 11/0 1000 10000 5120000

00:44:00:00:00:01 Te 11/0 1000 10000 5120000
00:22:00:00:00:00 Te 11/0 1000 10000 5120000
00:44:00:00:00:02 Te 11/0 2000 10000 5120000
00:44:00:00:00:01 Te 11/0 2000 10000 5120000

FTOS#

Related
show mac accounting access-list Display MAC access list configurations and counters (if configured).
Commands

show mac cam

e Display the CAM size and the portions allocated for MAC addresses and for MAC ACLs.

Syntax show mac cam

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series
History

654 | Layer 2
 Example Figure 23-9. show mac cam Command Example
FTOS#show mac cam
Slot Type MAC CAM Size MAC FIB Entries MAC ACL Entries
0 E24PD 64K entries 48K (75%) 8K (25%)
2 E24PD2 128K entries 64K (50%) 32K (50%)
11 EX2YD 64K entries 16K (25%) 24K (75%)
Note: All CAM entries are per portpipe.
FTOS#

Table 23-3. show mac cam Information

Field Description
Slot Lists the active line card slots.
Type Lists the type of line card present in the slot.
MAC CAM Size Displays the total CAM size available.
Note: A portion of the MAC CAM is used for system operations, therefore
adding the MAC FIB and MAC ACL will be less than the MAC CAM.
MAC FIB Entries Displays the amount and percentage of CAM available for MAC addresses.
MAC ACL Entries Displays the amount and percentage of CAM available for MAC ACLs.

show mac learning-limit

ce Display MAC address learning limits set for various interfaces.

Syntax show mac learning-limit [violate-action] [detail] [interface interface [vlan vlan-id]]

Parameters
violate-action (OPTIONALY) Enter the keyword violate-action to display the MAC
learning limit violation status.
detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to display the MAC learning limit
in detail.
interface interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interface with the following keywords
and slot/port or number information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
GigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For SONET interfaces, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/
port information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel
followed by a Port Channel ID between 1 and 255.
vlan vlan-id On the E-Series, enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID.
Range: 1-4094

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Layer 2 | 655
 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.1.0 Added vlan option on E-Series.

History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for violate-action and detail options
Version 6.5.1.0 Added support for Port Channel

Example E-Series output:

FTOS#show mac learning-limit

Interface Vlan Learning Dynamic Static Unknown SA
Slot/port Id Limit MAC count MAC count Drops
Gi 5/84 2 2 0 0 0
Gi 5/84 * 5 0 0 0
Gi 5/85 3 3 0 0 0
Gi 5/85 * 10 0 0 0
FTOS#show mac learning-limit interface gig 5/84
Interface Vlan Learning Dynamic Static Unknown SA
Slot/port Id Limit MAC count MAC count Drops
Gi 5/84 2 2 0 0 0
Gi 5/84 * 5 0 0 0
FTOS#show mac learning-limit interface gig 5/84 vlan 2
Interface Vlan Learning Dynamic Static Unknown SA
Slot/port Id Limit MAC count MAC count Drops
Gi 5/84 2 2 0 0 0

Example C-Series/S-Series output:

FTOS#show mac learning-limit

Interface Learning Dynamic Static Unknown SA
Slot/port Limit MAC count MAC count Drops
Gi 1/0 10 0 0 0
Gi 1/1 5 0 0 0
FTOS#show mac learning-limit interface gig 1/0
Interface Learning Dynamic Static Unknown SA
Slot/port Limit MAC count MAC count Drops
Gi 1/0 10 0 0 0

Virtual LAN (VLAN) Commands

The following commands configure and monitor Virtual LANs (VLANs). VLANs are a virtual
interface and use many of the same commands as physical interfaces.
You can configure an IP address and Layer 3 protocols on a VLAN called Inter-VLAN routing. FTP,
TFTP, ACLs and SNMP are not supported on a VLAN.

Occasionally, while sending broadcast traffic over multiple Layer 3 VLANs, the VRRP state of a
VLAN interface may continually switch between Master and Backup.
• description
• default vlan-id
• default-vlan disable
• enable vlan-counters
• name
• show config
• show vlan
• tagged
• track ip
• untagged

656 | Layer 2
 See also VLAN Stacking and see VLAN-related commands, such as portmode hybrid, in Chapter 17,
Interfaces.

description
ces Add a description about the selected VLAN.

Syntax description description

To remove the description from the VLAN, use the no description command.

Parameters
description Enter a text string description to identify the VLAN (80 characters maximum).

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
Version 6.3.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Related
show vlan Display VLAN configuration.
Commands

default vlan-id
ces Specify a VLAN as the Default VLAN.

Syntax default vlan-id vlan-id

To remove the default VLAN status from a VLAN and VLAN 1 does not exist, use the no default
vlan-id vlan-id syntax.

Parameters
vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID number of the VLAN to become the new Default VLAN.
Range: 1 to 4094.
Default: 1

Defaults The Default VLAN is VLAN 1.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Layer 2 | 657
 Usage To return VLAN 1 as the Default VLAN, use this command syntax (default-vlan-id 1).
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Information
The Default VLAN contains only untagged interfaces.

Related
interface vlan Configure a VLAN.
Commands

default-vlan disable
ces Disable the default VLAN so that all switchports are placed in the Null VLAN until they are explicitly
configured as a member of another VLAN.

Defaults The default VLAN is enabled.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced

Usage no default vlan disable is not listed in the running-configuration, but when the default VLAN is
Information disabled, default-vlan disable is listed in the running-configuration.

enable vlan-counters
ex Display VLAN counters for ingress and/or egress hardware. You must be in restricted mode to use this
command.

Syntax enable vlan-output-counters [ingress | egress | all]

To return to the default (disabled), use the no enable vlan-output-counters command.

Defaults Disabled—VLAN counters are disabled in hardware (all linecards/port-pipes) by default.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.1.1.2 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale E600i
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale E1200i

658 | Layer 2
 Example

FTOS(conf)#enable vlan-output-counters
FTOS(conf)#exit
FTOS#show interface vlan 101
Vlan 101 is down, line protocol is down
Address is 00:01:e8:26:e0:5b, Current address is 00:01:e8:26:e0:5b
Interface index is 1107787877
Internet address is not set
MTU 1554 bytes, IP MTU 1500 bytes
LineSpeed 1000 Mbit
ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00
Last clearing of "show interface" counters 01:12:44
Queueing strategy: fifo
Input Statistics:
0 packets, 0 bytes
Output Statistics: Enabling VLAN output reveals the output statistics counters for the VLAN
0 packets, 0 bytes
Time since last interface status change: 01:12:44
FTOS#

FTOS#show interfaces vlan 1

Vlan 1 is down, line protocol is down
Address is 00:01:e8:13:a5:aa, Current address is 00:01:e8:13:a5:aa
Interface index is 1107787777
Internet address is not set
MTU 1554 bytes, IP MTU 1500 bytes
LineSpeed 1000 Mbit
ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00
Last clearing of "show interface" counters 01:36:01
Queueing strategy: fifo
Input Statistics:
100000 packets, 10000000 bytes
Output Statistics:
200000 packets, 20800000 bytes
Time since last interface status change: 01:36:01
FTOS#

Usage FTOS supports a command to enable viewing of the VLAN input/output counters. This command also
Information applies to SNMP requests. If the command is not enabled, IFM returns zero values for VLAN output
counters.

SNMP counters differ from show interface counters as SNMP counters must maintain history. At any
point, the value of SNMP counters reflect the amount of traffic being carried on the VLAN.

VLAN output counters may show higher than expected values because source-suppression drops are
counted.

During an RPM failover event, all SNMP counters remain intact. The counters will sync over to the
secondary RPM.

name
ces Assign a name to the VLAN.

Syntax name vlan-name

To remove the name from the VLAN, enter no name.

Parameters
vlan-name Enter up to 32 characters as the name of the VLAN.

Defaults Not configured.

Layer 2 | 659
 Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage To display information about a named VLAN, enter the show vlan command with the name parameter
Information or the show interfaces description command.

Related
description Assign a descriptive text string to the interface.
Commands
interface vlan Configure a VLAN.
show vlan Display the current VLAN configurations on the switch.

show config
ces Display the current configuration of the selected VLAN.

Syntax show config

Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN

Example Figure 23-10. show config Command Sample Output for a Selected VLAN
FTOS(conf-if-vl-100)#show config
!
interface Vlan 100
no ip address
no shutdown
FTOS(conf-if-vl-100)#

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

show vlan
ces Display the current VLAN configurations on the switch.

Syntax show vlan [brief | id vlan-id | name vlan-name]

660 | Layer 2
 Parameters
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the following information:
• VLAN ID
• VLAN name (left blank if none is configured.)
• Spanning Tree Group ID
• MAC address aging time
• IP address
id vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword id followed by a number from 1 to 4094. Only
information on the VLAN specified is displayed.
name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword name followed by the name configured for the VLAN.
vlan-name Only information on the VLAN named is displayed.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Augmented to display PVLAN data for C-Series and S-Series; revised output to
include Description field to display user-entered VLAN description
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series; revised output to display Native VLAN
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 23-11. show vlan Command Example

FTOS#show vlan

Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs, P - Primary, C - Community, I - Isolated

Q: U - Untagged, T - Tagged
x - Dot1x untagged, X - Dot1x tagged
G - GVRP tagged, M - Vlan-stack

NUM Status Description Q Ports

* 1 Inactive
2 Active U Po1(Gi 13/0)
T Po20(Gi 13/6), Gi 13/25
T Gi 13/7
3 Active T Po20(Gi 13/6)
T Gi 13/7
U Gi 13/1
4 Active U Po2(Gi 13/2)
T Po20(Gi 13/6)
T Gi 13/7
5 Active T Po20(Gi 13/6)
T Gi 13/7
U Gi 13/3
6 Active U Po3(Gi 13/4)
T Po20(Gi 13/6)
T Gi 13/7
7 Active T Po20(Gi 13/6)
T Gi 13/7
U Gi 13/5
P 100 Active T Po1(Gi 0/1)
T Gi 0/2
C 101 Inactive T Gi 0/3
I 102 Inactive T Gi 0/4
FTOS#

Layer 2 | 661
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Table 23-4. show vlan Information

Column Heading Description

(Column 1 — no heading) asterisk symbol (*) = Default VLAN
G = GVRP VLAN
P = primary VLAN
C = community VLAN
I = isolated VLAN
NUM Displays existing VLAN IDs.
Status Displays the word Inactive for inactive VLANs and the word
Active for active VLANs.
Q Displays G for GVRP tagged, M for member of a VLAN-Stack VLAN, T
for tagged interface, U (for untagged interface), x (uncapitalized x) for
Dot1x untagged, or X (capitalized X) for Dot1x tagged.
Ports Displays the type, slot, and port information. For the type, Po = port
channel, Gi = gigabit ethernet, and Te = ten gigabit ethernet.

Figure 23-12. Example of Output of show vlan id

FTOS# show vlan id 40

Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs

Q: U - Untagged, T - Tagged
x - Dot1x untagged, X - Dot1x tagged
G - GVRP tagged, M - Vlan-stack

NUM Status Description Q Ports

40 Active M Gi 13/47
FTOS#show vlan id 41

Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs

Q: U - Untagged, T - Tagged
x - Dot1x untagged, X - Dot1x tagged
G - GVRP tagged, M - Vlan-stack

NUM Status Description Q Ports

41 Active T Gi 13/47

FTOS#show vlan id 42

Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs

Q: U - Untagged, T - Tagged
x - Dot1x untagged, X - Dot1x tagged
G - GVRP tagged, M - Vlan-stack

NUM Status Description Q Ports

42 Active U Gi 13/47
FTOS#

662 | Layer 2
 Figure 23-13. Example of Output of show vlan brief
FTOS#show vlan br
VLAN Name STG MAC Aging IP Address
---- -------------------------------- ---- --------- ------------------
1 0 1800 unassigned
2 0 1800 2.2.2.2/24
3 0 1800 3.3.3.2/24
FTOS#

Figure 23-14. Using VLAN Name

FTOS(conf)#interface vlan 222
FTOS(conf-if-vl-222)#name test
FTOS(conf-if-vl-222)#do show vlan name test

Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs

Q: U - Untagged, T - Tagged
x - Dot1x untagged, X - Dot1x tagged
G - GVRP tagged, M - Vlan-stack

NUM Status Description Q Ports

222 Inactive U Gi 1/22
FTOS(conf-if-vl-222)#

Related
vlan-stack compatible Enable the Stackable VLAN feature on the selected VLAN.
Commands
interface vlan Configure a VLAN.

tagged
ces Add a Layer 2 interface to a VLAN as a tagged interface.

Syntax tagged interface

To remove a tagged interface from a VLAN, use no tagged interface command.

Parameters
interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by
the slot/port information.
• For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a
number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.

Defaults All interfaces in Layer 2 mode are untagged.

Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Layer 2 | 663
 Usage When you use the no tagged command, the interface is automatically placed in the Default VLAN as
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Information an untagged interface unless the interface is a member of another VLAN. If the interface belongs to
several VLANs, you must remove it from all VLANs to change it to an untagged interface.

Tagged interfaces can belong to multiple VLANs, while untagged interfaces can only belong to one
VLAN at a time.

Related
Commands interface vlan Configure a VLAN.
untagged Specify which interfaces in a VLAN are untagged.

track ip
ces Track the Layer 3 operational state of a Layer 3 VLAN, using a subset of the VLAN member
interfaces.

Syntax track ip interface

To remove the tracking feature from the VLAN, use the no track ip interface command.

Parameters
interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a
number:
C-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage When this command is configured, the VLAN is operationally UP if any of the interfaces specified in
Information the track ip command are operationally UP, and the VLAN is operationally DOWN if none of the
tracking interfaces are operationally UP.

If the track ip command is not configured, the VLAN's Layer 3 operational state depends on all the
members of the VLAN.

The Layer 2 state of the VLAN, and hence the Layer 2 traffic is not affected by the track ip command
configuration.

664 | Layer 2
 Related
interface vlan Configure a VLAN.
Commands
tagged Specify which interfaces in a VLAN are tagged.

untagged
ces Add a Layer 2 interface to a VLAN as an untagged interface.

Syntax untagged interface

To remove an untagged interface from a VLAN, use the no untagged interface command.

Parameters
interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by
the slot/port information.
• For Port Channel interface types, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a
number from 1 to 255 for TeraScale.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.

Defaults All interfaces in Layer 2 mode are untagged.

Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage Untagged interfaces can only belong to one VLAN.

Information
In the Default VLAN, you cannot use the no untagged interface command. To remove an untagged
interface from all VLANs, including the Default VLAN, enter the INTERFACE mode and use the no
switchport command.

Related
interface vlan Configure a VLAN.
Commands
tagged Specify which interfaces in a VLAN are tagged.

Layer 2 | 665
 www.dell.com | dell.com/support

666
|
Layer 2
 24
Link Layer Detection Protocol (LLDP)

Overview
Link Layer Detection Protocol (LLDP) advertises connectivity and management from the local station
to the adjacent stations on an IEEE 802 LAN. LLDP facilitates multi-vendor interoperability by using
standard management tools to discover and make available a physical topology for network
management. The FTOS implementation of LLDP is based on IEEE standard 801.1ab.

Commands
This chapter contains the following commands, in addition to the commands in the related section —
LLDP-MED Commands.

• advertise dot1-tlv
• advertise dot3-tlv
• advertise management
• clear lldp counters
• clear lldp neighbors
• debug lldp interface
• disable
• hello
• mode
• multiplier
• protocol lldp (Configuration)
• protocol lldp (Interface)
• show lldp neighbors
• show lldp statistics
• show running-config lldp
The starting point for using LLDP is invoking LLDP with the protocol lldp command in either the
CONFIGURATION or INTERFACE mode.

The information distributed by LLDP is stored by its recipients in a standard Management Information
Base (MIB). The information can be accessed by a network management system through a
management protocol such as SNMP.

See the Link Layer Discovery Protocol chapter of the FTOS Configuration Guide for details on
implementing LLDP/LLDP-MED.

Link Layer Detection Protocol (LLDP) | 667

 advertise dot1-tlv
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Advertise dot1 TLVs (Type, Length, Value).

Syntax advertise dot1-tlv {port-protocol-vlan-id | port-vlan-id | vlan-name}

To remove advertised dot1-tlv, use the no advertise dot1-tlv {port-protocol-vlan-id | port-vlan-id
| vlan-name} command.

Parameters
port-protocol-vlan-id Enter the keyword port-protocol-vlan-id to advertise the port protocol
VLAN identification TLV.
port-vlan-id Enter the keyword port-vlan-id to advertise the port VLAN identification
TLV.
vlan-name Enter the keyword vlan-name to advertise the vlan-name TLV. This
keyword is only supported on C-Series and S-Series.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) and INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-lldp)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series, added vlan-name option.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Related
protocol lldp (Configuration) Enable LLDP globally.
Commands
debug lldp interface Debug LLDP
show lldp neighbors Display the LLDP neighbors
show running-config lldp Display the LLDP running configuration

advertise dot3-tlv
ces Advertise dot3 TLVs (Type, Length, Value).

Syntax advertise dot3-tlv {max-frame-size}

To remove advertised dot3-tlv, use the no advertise dot3-tlv {max-frame-size} command.

Parameters
max-frame-size Enter the keyword max-frame-size to advertise the dot3 maximum frame size.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) and INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-lldp)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

668 | Link Layer Detection Protocol (LLDP)

advertise management
ces Advertise management TLVs (Type, Length, Value).

Syntax advertise management -tlv {system-capabilities | system-description | system-name}

To remove advertised management TLVs, use the no advertise management -tlv
{system-capabilities | system-description | system-name} command.

Parameters
system-capabilities Enter the keyword system-capabilities to advertise the system
capabilities TLVs.
system-description Enter the keyword system-description to advertise the system
description TLVs.
system-name Enter the keyword system-name to advertise the system name TLVs.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Usage All three command options — system-capabilities, system-description, and system-name —

Information -can be invoked individually or together, in any sequence.

advertise management-tlv
Z
Advertise management TLVs (Type, Length, Value).

Syntax advertise management-tlv {management-address | system-capabilities |

system-description| system-name}
To remove advertised management TLVs, use the no advertise management-tlv
{management-address | system-capabilities | system-description | system-name} command.

Parameters
management-address Enter the keyword management-address to advertise the management
IP address TLVs to the LLDP peer.
system-capabilities Enter the keyword system-capabilities to advertise the system
capabilities TLVs to the LLDP peer.
system-description Enter the keyword system-description to advertise the system
description TLVs to the LLDP peer.
system-name Enter the keyword system-name to advertise the system name TLVs to
the LLDP peer.

Link Layer Detection Protocol (LLDP) | 669

 Defaults No default values or behavior
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp)

Command
Version 8.3.3.9 Introduced on the S60
History
Version 8.3.5.4 Introduced on the S55
Version 9.1.(0.0) Modified to support management-address parameter
Version 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000
Version 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Usage The command options — management-address, system-capabilities, system-description, and

Information system-name —-can be invoked individually or together, in any sequence.

advertise management-tlv (Interface)

Z
Advertise management TLVs (Type, Length, Value) to the specified interface.

Syntax advertise management-tlv {management-address | system-capabilities |

system-description| system-name}
To remove advertised management TLVs, use the no advertise management-tlv
{management-address | system-capabilities | system-description | system-name} command.

Parameters
management-address Enter the keyword management-address to advertise the management
IP address TLVs to the specified interface.
system-capabilities Enter the keyword system-capabilities to advertise the system
capabilities TLVs to the specified interface.
system-description Enter the keyword system-description to advertise the system
description TLVs to the specified interface.
system-name Enter the keyword system-name to advertise the system name TLVs to
the specified interface.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-interface-lldp)

Command
Version 8.3.3.9 Introduced on the S60
History
Version 8.3.5.4 Introduced on S55
Version 9.1.(0.0) Introduced on the Z9000 and S4810

670 | Link Layer Detection Protocol (LLDP)

 Usage All three command options — system-capabilities, system-description, and system-name —
Information -can be invoked individually or together, in any sequence.

clear lldp counters

ces Clear LLDP transmitting and receiving counters for all physical interfaces or a specific physical
interface.

Syntax clear lldp counters interface

Parameters
interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword FastEthernet followed by the slot/
port information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword gigabitEthernet followed by
the slot/port information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword tenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

clear lldp neighbors

ces Clear LLDP neighbor information for all interfaces or a specific interfaces.

Syntax clear lldp neighbors {interface}

Parameters
interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword FastEthernet followed by the
slot/port information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword gigabitEthernet followed
by the slot/port information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword tenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Link Layer Detection Protocol (LLDP) | 671

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series

Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

debug lldp interface

ces Enable LLDP debugging to display timer events, neighbor additions or deletions, and other
information about incoming and outgoing packets.

Syntax debug lldp interface {interface | all}{events| packet {brief | detail} {tx | rx | both}}
To disable debugging, use the no debug lldp interface {interface | all}{events} {packet {brief |
detail} {tx | rx | both}} command.

Parameters
interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword FastEthernet followed by the
slot/port information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword gigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword tenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
Note: The FastEthernet option is not supported on S-Series.
all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to display information on all interfaces.
events (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword events to display major events such as timer
events.
packet (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword packet to display information regarding packets
coming in or going out.
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display brief packet information.
detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to display detailed packet information.
tx (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword tx to display transmit only packet information.
rx (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rx to display receive only packet information
both (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword both to display both receive and transmit packet
information.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

672 | Link Layer Detection Protocol (LLDP)

disable
ces Enable or disable LLDP.

Syntax disable
To enable LLDP, use the no disable

Defaults Enabled, that is no disable

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) and INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-lldp)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Related
protocol lldp (Configuration) Enable LLDP globally.
Commands
debug lldp interface Debug LLDP
show lldp neighbors Display the LLDP neighbors
show running-config lldp Display the LLDP running configuration

hello
ces Configure the rate at which the LLDP control packets are sent to its peer.

Syntax hello seconds

To revert to the default, use the no hello seconds command.

Parameters
seconds Enter the rate, in seconds, at which the control packets are sent to its peer.
Rate: 5 - 180 seconds
Default: 30 seconds

Defaults 30 seconds

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) and INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-lldp)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Link Layer Detection Protocol (LLDP) | 673

 mode
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Set LLDP to receive or transmit.

Syntax mode {tx | rx}

To return to the default, use the no mode {tx | rx} command.

Parameters
tx Enter the keyword tx to set the mode to transmit.
rx Enter the keyword rx to set the mode to receive.

Defaults Both transmit and receive

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) and INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-lldp)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Related
protocol lldp (Configuration) Enable LLDP globally.
Commands
show lldp neighbors Display the LLDP neighbors

multiplier
ces Set the number of consecutive misses before LLDP declares the interface dead.

Syntax multiplier integer

To return to the default, use the no multiplier integer command.

Parameters
integer Enter the number of consecutive misses before the LLDP declares the interface dead.
Range: 2 - 10

Defaults 4 x hello

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) and INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-lldp)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

674 | Link Layer Detection Protocol (LLDP)

protocol lldp (Configuration)
ces Enable LLDP globally on the switch.

Syntax protocol lldp

To disable LLDP globally on the chassis, use the no protocol lldp command.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

protocol lldp (Interface)

ces Enter the LLDP protocol in the INTERFACE mode.

Syntax [no] protocol lldp

To return to the global LLDP configuration mode, use the no protocol lldp command from the
Interface mode.

Defaults LLDP is not enabled on the interface.

Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-lldp)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Usage When you enter the LLDP protocol in the Interface context, it overrides global configurations. When
Information you execute the no protocol lldp from the INTERFACE mode, interfaces will begin to inherit the
configuration from the global LLDP CONFIGURATION mode.

show lldp neighbors

ces Display LLDP neighbor information for all interfaces or a specified interface.

Syntax show lldp neighbors [interface] [detail]

Link Layer Detection Protocol (LLDP) | 675

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword FastEthernet followed by the slot/
port information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword gigabitEthernet followed
by the slot/port information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword tenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to display all the TLV information, timers, and
LLDP tx and rx counters.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 24-1. show lldp neighbors Command Output

R1(conf-if-gi-1/31)#do show lldp neighbors
Loc PortID Rem Host Name Rem Port Id Rem Chassis Id
-------------------------------------------------------------------------

Gi 1/21 R2 GigabitEthernet 2/11 00:01:e8:06:95:3e

Gi 1/31 R3 GigabitEthernet 3/11 00:01:e8:09:c2:4a

Usage Omitting the keyword detail displays only the remote chassis ID, Port ID, and Dead Interval.
Information

show lldp statistics

ces Display the LLDP statistical information.

Syntax show lldp statistics

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

676 | Link Layer Detection Protocol (LLDP)

 Example Figure 24-2. show lldp statistics Command Output
FTOS#show lldp statistics
Total number of neighbors: 300
Last table change time : Mon Oct 02 16:00:52 2006
Number of Table Inserts : 1621
Number of Table Deletes : 200
Number of Table Drops : 0
Number of Table Age Outs : 400
FTOS#

show running-config lldp

ces Display the current global LLDP configuration.

Syntax show running-config lldp

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Example
FTOS#show running-config lldp
!
protocol lldp
advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id
advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size
advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description
hello 15
multiplier 3
no disable
FTOS#

LLDP-MED Commands
The LLDP-MED commands in this section are:
• advertise med guest-voice
• advertise med guest-voice-signaling
• advertise med location-identification
• advertise med power-via-mdi
• advertise med softphone-voice
• advertise med streaming-video
• advertise med video-conferencing
• advertise med video-signaling
• advertise med voice
• advertise med voice-signaling

Link Layer Detection Protocol (LLDP) | 677

 FTOS LLDP-MED (Media Endpoint Discovery) commands are an extension of the set of LLDP TLV
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

advertisement commands. The C-Series and S-Series support all commands, as indicated by these
symbols underneath the command headings: c s

The E-Series generally supports the commands, too, as indicated by the e symbol under command
headings. However, LLDP-MED commands are more useful on the C-Series and the S50V model of
the S-Series, because they support Power over Ethernet (PoE) devices.

As defined by ANSI/TIA-1057, LLDP-MED provides organizationally specific TLVs (Type Length

Value), so that endpoint devices and network connectivity devices can advertise their characteristics
and configuration information. The Organizational Unique Identifier (OUI) for the
Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) is 00-12-BB.
• LLDP-MED Endpoint Device—any device that is on an IEEE 802 LAN network edge, can
communicate using IP, and uses the LLDP-MED framework.
• LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Device—any device that provides access to an IEEE 802
LAN to an LLDP-MED endpoint device, and supports IEEE 802.1AB (LLDP) and TIA-1057
(LLDP-MED). The Dell Networking system is an LLDP-MED network connectivity device.
With regard to connected endpoint devices, LLDP-MED provides network connectivity devices with
the ability to:
• manage inventory
• manage Power over Ethernet (POE)
• identify physical location
• identify network policy

advertise med guest-voice

ces Configure the system to advertise a separate limited voice service for a guest user with their own IP
telephony handset or other appliances that support interactive voice services.

Syntax advertise med guest-voice {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number}

To return to the default, use the no advertise med guest-voice {vlan-id layer2_priority
DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number} command.

Parameters
vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID.
Range: 1 to 4094
layer2_priority Enter the Layer 2 priority.
Range: 0 to 7
DSCP_value Enter the DSCP value.
Range: 0 to 63
priority-tagged number Enter the keyword priority-tagged followed the Layer 2 priority.
Range: 0 to 7

Defaults unconfigured

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp)

678 | Link Layer Detection Protocol (LLDP)

 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and E-Series

Related
protocol lldp (Configuration) Enable LLDP globally.
Commands
debug lldp interface Debug LLDP.
show lldp neighbors Display the LLDP neighbors.
show running-config lldp Display the LLDP running configuration.

advertise med guest-voice-signaling

ces Configure the system to advertise a separate limited voice service for a guest user when the guest voice
control packets use a separate network policy than the voice data.

Syntax advertise med guest-voice-signaling {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged

number}
To return to the default, use the no advertise med guest-voice-signaling {vlan-id layer2_priority
DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number} command.

Parameters
vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID.
Range: 1 to 4094
layer2_priority Enter the Layer 2 priority.
Range: 0 to 7
DSCP_value Enter the DSCP value.
Range: 0 to 63
priority-tagged number Enter the keyword priority-tagged followed the Layer 2 priority.
Range: 0 to 7

Defaults unconfigured

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp)

Command
\

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.

History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and E-Series

Related
debug lldp interface Debug LLDP
Commands
show lldp neighbors Display the LLDP neighbors
show running-config lldp Display the LLDP running configuration

Link Layer Detection Protocol (LLDP) | 679

 advertise med location-identification
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Configure the system to advertise a location identifier.

Syntax advertise med location-identification {coordinate-based value | civic-based value | ecs-elin

value}
To return to the default, use the no advertise med location-identification {coordinate-based
value | civic-based value | ecs-elin value} command.

Parameters
coordinate-based value Enter the keyword coordinate-based followed by the coordinated based
location in hexadecimal value of 16 bytes.
civic-based value Enter the keyword civic-based followed by the civic based location in
hexadecimal format.
Range: 6 to 255 bytes
ecs-elin value Enter the keyword ecs-elin followed by the Emergency Call Service (ecs)
Emergency Location Identification Number (elin) numeric location string.
Range: 10 to 25 characters

Defaults unconfigured

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and E-Series

Usage ECS—Emergency Call Service such as defined by TIA or National Emergency Numbering
Information Association (NENA)

ELIN—Emergency Location Identification Number, a valid North America Numbering Plan format
telephone number supplied for ECS purposes.

Related
debug lldp interface Debug LLDP
Commands
show lldp neighbors Display the LLDP neighbors
show running-config lldp Display the LLDP running configuration

advertise med power-via-mdi

cs Configure the system to advertise the Extended Power via MDI TLV.

Syntax advertise med power-via-mdi

To return to the default, use the no advertise med power-via-mdi command.

Defaults unconfigured

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp)

680 | Link Layer Detection Protocol (LLDP)

 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series

Usage Advertise the Extended Power via MDI on all ports that are connected to an 802.3af powered,
Information LLDP-MED endpoint device.

Related
debug lldp interface Debug LLDP
Commands
show lldp neighbors Display the LLDP neighbors
show running-config lldp Display the LLDP running configuration

advertise med softphone-voice

ces Configure the system to advertise softphone to enable IP telephony on a computer so that the computer
can be used as a phone.

Syntax advertise med softphone-voice {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged

number}
To return to the default, use the no advertise med softphone-voice {vlan-id layer2_priority
DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number} command.

Parameters
vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID.
Range: 1 to 4094
layer2_priority Enter the Layer 2 priority (C-Series and E-Series only).
Range: 0 to 7
DSCP_value Enter the DSCP value (C-Series and E-Series only).
Range: 0 to 63
priority-tagged number Enter the keyword priority-tagged followed the Layer 2 priority.
Range: 0 to 7

Defaults unconfigured

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and E-Series

Related
debug lldp interface Debug LLDP
Commands
show lldp neighbors Display the LLDP neighbors
show lldp neighbors Display the LLDP running configuration

Link Layer Detection Protocol (LLDP) | 681

 advertise med streaming-video
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Configure the system to advertise streaming video services for broadcast or multicast-based video.
This does not include video applications that rely on TCP buffering.

Syntax advertise med streaming-video {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged

number}

To return to the default, use the no advertise med streaming-video {vlan-id layer2_priority
DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number} command.

Parameters
vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID.
Range: 1 to 4094
layer2_priority Enter the Layer 2 priority (C-Series and E-Series only).
Range: 0 to 7
DSCP_value Enter the DSCP value (C-Series and E-Series only).
Range: 0 to 63
priority-tagged number Enter the keyword priority-tagged followed the Layer 2 priority.
Range: 0 to 7

Defaults unconfigured

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and E-Series

Related
debug lldp interface Debug LLDP
Commands
show lldp neighbors Display the LLDP neighbors
show lldp neighbors Display the LLDP running configuration

advertise med video-conferencing

ces Configure the system to advertise dedicated video conferencing and other similar appliances that
support real-time interactive video.

Syntax advertise med video-conferencing {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged

number}
To return to the default, use the no advertise med video-conferencing {vlan-id layer2_priority
DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number} command.

Parameters
vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID.
Range: 1 to 4094
layer2_priority Enter the Layer 2 priority (C-Series and E-Series only).
Range: 0 to 7

682 | Link Layer Detection Protocol (LLDP)

 DSCP_value Enter the DSCP value (C-Series and E-Series only).
Range: 0 to 63
priority-tagged number Enter the keyword priority-tagged followed the Layer 2 priority.
Range: 0 to 7

Defaults unconfigured

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and E-Series

Related
debug lldp interface Debug LLDP
Commands
show lldp neighbors Display the LLDP neighbors
show running-config lldp Display the LLDP running configuration

advertise med video-signaling

ces Configure the system to advertise video control packets that use a separate network policy than video
data.

Syntax advertise med video-signaling {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged

number}
To return to the default, use the no advertise med video-signaling {vlan-id layer2_priority
DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number} command.

Parameters
vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID.
Range: 1 to 4094
layer2_priority Enter the Layer 2 priority (C-Series and E-Series only).
Range: 0 to 7
DSCP_value Enter the DSCP value (C-Series and E-Series only).
Range: 0 to 63
priority-tagged number Enter the keyword priority-tagged followed the Layer 2 priority.
Range: 0 to 7

Defaults unconfigured

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and E-Series

Related
debug lldp interface Debug LLDP
Commands

Link Layer Detection Protocol (LLDP) | 683

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

show lldp neighbors Display the LLDP neighbors

show lldp neighbors Display the LLDP running configuration

advertise med voice

ces Configure the system to advertise a dedicated IP telephony handset or other appliances supporting
interactive voice services.

Syntax advertise med voice {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number}

To return to the default, use the no advertise med voice {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} |
{priority-tagged number} command.

Parameters
vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID.
Range: 1 to 4094
layer2_priority Enter the Layer 2 priority (C-Series and E-Series only).
Range: 0 to 7
DSCP_value Enter the DSCP value (C-Series and E-Series only).
Range: 0 to 63
priority-tagged number Enter the keyword priority-tagged followed the Layer 2 priority.
Range: 0 to 7

Defaults unconfigured

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and E-Series

Related
debug lldp interface Debug LLDP
Commands
show lldp neighbors Display the LLDP neighbors
show running-config lldp Display the LLDP running configuration

advertise med voice-signaling

ces Configure the system to advertise when voice control packets use a separate network policy than voice
data.

Syntax advertise med voice-signaling {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged

number}
To return to the default, use the no advertise med voice-signaling {vlan-id layer2_priority
DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number} command.

684 | Link Layer Detection Protocol (LLDP)

 Parameters
vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID.
Range: 1 to 4094
layer2_priority Enter the Layer 2 priority (C-Series and E-Series only).
Range: 0 to 7
DSCP_value Enter the DSCP value (C-Series and E-Series only).
Range: 0 to 63
priority-tagged number Enter the keyword priority-tagged followed the Layer 2 priority.
Range: 0 to 7

Defaults unconfigured

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and E-Series

Related
debug lldp interface Debug LLDP
Commands
show lldp neighbors Display the LLDP neighbors
show lldp neighbors Display the LLDP running configuration

Link Layer Detection Protocol (LLDP) | 685

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

686 | Link Layer Detection Protocol (LLDP)

 25
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)

Overview
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP), as implemented by FTOS, conforms to IEEE 802.1s. MSTP
is supported by FTOS on all Dell Networking systems (C-Series, E-Series, and S-Series), as indicated
by the characters that appear below each command heading:

• C-Series: c
• E-Series: e
• S-Series: s

Commands
The following commands configure and monitor MSTP:

• debug spanning-tree mstp

• disable
• forward-delay
• hello-time
• max-age
• max-hops
• msti
• name
• protocol spanning-tree mstp
• revision
• show config
• show spanning-tree mst configuration
• show spanning-tree msti
• spanning-tree
• spanning-tree msti
• spanning-tree mstp edge-port
• tc-flush-standard

Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) | 687

 debug spanning-tree mstp
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Enable debugging of Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol and view information on the protocol.

Syntax debug spanning-tree mstp [all | bpdu interface {in | out} | events]

To disable debugging, enter no debug spanning-tree mstp.

Parameters
all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to debug all spanning tree operations.
bpdu interface {in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bpdu to debug Bridge Protocol Data Units.
| out} (OPTIONAL) Enter the interface keyword along with the type slot/port of the
interface you want displayed. Type slot/port options are the following:
• For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword FastEthernet followed by the
slot/port information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For Port Channel groups, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a
number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range:1-255 for TeraScale
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
Optionally, enter an in or out parameter in conjunction with the optional interface:
•For Receive, enter in
•For Transmit, enter out
events (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword events to debug MSTP events.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 25-1. debug spanning-tree mstp bpdu Command Example

FTOS#debug spanning-tree mstp bpdu gigabitethernet 2/0 ?
in Receive (in)
out Transmit (out)

688 | Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)

description
ces Enter a description of the Multiple Spanning Tree

Syntax description {description}

To remove the description, use the no description {description} command.

Parameters
description Enter a description to identify the Multiple Spanning Tree (80 characters maximum).

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes SPANNING TREE (The prompt is “config-mstp”.)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
pre-7.7.1.0 Introduced

Related
protocol spanning-tree mstp Enter Multiple SPANNING TREE mode on the switch.
Commands

disable
ces Globally disable Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol on the switch.

Syntax disable

To enable Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol, enter no disable.

Defaults Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol is disabled

Command Modes MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
Version 6.5.1.0 Introduced

Related
protocol spanning-tree mstp Enter MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE mode.
Commands

forward-delay
ces The amount of time the interface waits in the Blocking State and the Learning State before
transitioning to the Forwarding State.

Syntax forward-delay seconds

To return to the default setting, enter no forward-delay.

Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) | 689

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

seconds Enter the number of seconds the interface waits in the Blocking State and the Learning
State before transiting to the Forwarding State.
Range: 4 to 30
Default: 15 seconds.

Defaults 15 seconds

Command Modes MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
Version 6.5.1.0 Introduced

Related
max-age Change the wait time before MSTP refreshes protocol configuration information.
Commands
hello-time Change the time interval between BPDUs.

hello-time
ces Set the time interval between generation of Multiple Spanning Tree Bridge Protocol Data Units
(BPDUs).

Syntax hello-time seconds

To return to the default value, enter no hello-time.

Parameters
seconds Enter a number as the time interval between transmission of BPDUs.
Range: 1 to 10.
Default: 2 seconds.

Defaults 2 seconds

Command Modes MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
Version 6.5.1.0 Introduced

Related
forward-delay The amount of time the interface waits in the Blocking State and the Learning State
Commands
before transitioning to the Forwarding State.
max-age Change the wait time before MSTP refreshes protocol configuration information.

690 | Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)

max-age
ces Set the time interval for the Multiple Spanning Tree bridge to maintain configuration information
before refreshing that information.

Syntax max-age seconds

To return to the default values, enter no max-age.

Parameters
max-age Enter a number of seconds the FTOS waits before refreshing configuration information.
Range: 6 to 40
Default: 20 seconds.

Defaults 20 seconds

Command Modes MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
Version 6.5.1.0 Introduced

Related
forward-delay The amount of time the interface waits in the Blocking State and the Learning State
Commands
before transitioning to the Forwarding State.
hello-time Change the time interval between BPDUs.

max-hops
ces Configure the maximum hop count.

Syntax max-hops number

To return to the default values, enter no max-hops.

Parameters
range Enter a number for the maximum hop count.
Range: 1 to 40
Default: 20

Defaults 20 hops

Command Modes MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
Version 6.5.1.0 Introduced

Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) | 691

 Usage The max-hops is a configuration command that applies to both the IST and all MST instances in the
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Information MSTP region. The BPDUs sent out by the root switch set the remaining-hops parameter to the
configured value of max-hops. When a switch receives the BPDU, it decrements the received value of
the remaining hops and uses the resulting value as remaining-hops in the BPDUs. If the
remaining-hops reaches zero, the switch discards the BPDU and ages out any information that it holds
for the port.

msti
ces Configure Multiple Spanning Tree instance, bridge priority, and one or multiple VLANs mapped to the
MST instance.

Syntax msti instance {vlan range | bridge-priority priority}

To disable mapping or bridge priority no msti instance {vlan range | bridge-priority priority}

Parameters
msti instance Enter the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Instance
Range: zero (0) to 63
vlan range Enter the keyword vlan followed by the identifier range value.
Range: 1 to 4094
bridge-priority priority Enter the keyword bridge-priority followed by a value in increments of
4096 as the bridge priority.
Range: zero (0) to 61440
Valid priority values are: 0, 4096, 8192, 12288, 16384, 20480, 24576,
28672, 32768, 36864, 40960, 45056, 49152, 53248, 57344, and 61440. All
other values are rejected.

Defaults default bridge-priority is 32768

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage By default, all VLANs are mapped to MST instance zero (0) unless you use the vlan range command
Information to map it to a non-zero instance.

name
ces The name you assign to the Multiple Spanning Tree region.

Syntax name region-name

To remove the region name, enter no name

Parameters
region-name Enter the MST region name.
Range: 32 character limit

692 | Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)

 Defaults no default name

Command Modes MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
Version 6.5.1.0 Introduced

Usage For two MSTP switches to be within the same MSTP region, the switches must share the same region
Information name (including matching case).

Related
msti Map the VLAN(s) to an MST instance
Commands
revision Assign revision number to the MST configuration.

protocol spanning-tree mstp

ces Enter the MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE mode to enable and configure the Multiple Spanning Tree
group.

Syntax protocol spanning-tree mstp

To disable the Multiple Spanning Tree group, enter no protocol spanning-tree mstp command.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 25-2. protocol spanning-tree mstp Command Example

FTOS(conf)#protocol spanning-tree mstp
FTOS(config-mstp)#no disable

Usage MSTP is not enabled when you enter the MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE mode. To enable MSTP
Information globally on the switch, enter no disable while in MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE mode.

Refer to the FTOS Configuration Guide for more information on Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol.

Related
disable Disable Multiple Spanning Tree.
Commands

Defaults Disable.

Command Modes MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE

Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) | 693

 Usage Refer to the FTOS Configuration Guide for more information on Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol.
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Information

revision
ces The revision number for the Multiple Spanning Tree configuration

Syntax revision range

To return to the default values, enter no revision.

Parameters
range Enter the revision number for the MST configuration.
Range: 0 to 65535
Default: 0

Defaults 0

Command Modes MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
Version 6.5.1.0 Introduced

Usage For two MSTP switches to be within the same MST region, the switches must share the same revision
Information number.

Related
msti Map the VLAN(s) to an MST instance
Commands
name Assign the region name to the MST region.

show config
ces View the current configuration for the mode. Only non-default values are shown.

Syntax show config

Command Modes MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
Version 6.5.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

694 | Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)

 Example Figure 25-3. show config Command for MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE Mode
FTOS(conf-mstp)#show config
!
protocol spanning-tree mstp
no disable
name CustomerSvc
revision 2
MSTI 10 VLAN 101-105
max-hops 5
FTOS(conf-mstp)#

show spanning-tree mst configuration

ces View the Multiple Spanning Tree configuration.

Syntax show spanning-tree mst configuration

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 25-4. show spanning-tree mst configuration Command Example

FTOS#show spanning-tree mst configuration
MST region name: CustomerSvc
Revision: 2
MSTI VID
10 101-105
FTOS#

Usage You must enable Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol prior to using this command.
Information

Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) | 695

 show spanning-tree msti
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces View the Multiple Spanning Tree instance.

Syntax show spanning-tree msti [instance-number [brief]]

Parameters
instance-number [Optional] Enter the Multiple Spanning Tree Instance number
Range: 0 to 63
brief [Optional] Enter the keyword brief to view a synopsis of the MST instance.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
Version 6.4.1.0 Expanded to display port error disable state (EDS) caused by loopback BPDU
inconsistency (see Figure 25-6)

Example Figure 25-5. show spanning-tree msti [instance-number] Command Example

FTOS#show spanning-tree msti 10
MSTI 10 VLANs mapped 101-105

Bridge Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e802.3506

Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15, max hops 5
Current root has priority 16384, Address 0001.e800.0a5c
Number of topology changes 0, last change occurred 3058087

Port 82 (GigabitEthernet 2/0) is designated Forwarding

Port path cost 0, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.82
Designated root has priority 16384, address 0001.e800.0a:5c
Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e802.35:06
Designated port id is 128.82, designated path cost
Number of transitions to forwarding state 1
BPDU (Mrecords): sent 1109, received 0
The port is not in the portfast mode

Port 88 (GigabitEthernet 2/6) is root Forwarding

Port path cost 0, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.88
Designated root has priority 16384, address 0001.e800.0a:5c
Designated bridge has priority 16384, address 0001.e800.0a:5c
Designated port id is 128.88, designated path cost
Number of transitions to forwarding state 4
BPDU (Mrecords): sent 19, received 1103
The port is not in the portfast mode

Port 89 (GigabitEthernet 2/7) is alternate Discarding

Port path cost 0, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.89
Designated root has priority 16384, address 0001.e800.0a:5c
Designated bridge has priority 16384, address 0001.e800.0a:5c
Designated port id is 128.89, designated path cost
Number of transitions to forwarding state 3
BPDU (Mrecords): sent 7, received 1103
The port is not in the portfast mode

FTOS#

696 | Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)

 Example 2 Figure 25-6. show spanning-tree msti with EDS and LBK
FTOS#show spanning-tree msti 0 brief
MSTI 0 VLANs mapped 1-4094

Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol

Root ID Priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.6aa8
Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15, max hops 20
Bridge ID Priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.6aa8
We are the root of MSTI 0 (CIST)
Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15, max hops 20
CIST regional root ID Priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.6aa8
CIST external path cost 0

Interface Designated
Name PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Bridge ID PortID
---------- -------- ---- ------- --- ------- -------------------- --------
Gi 0/0 128.257 128 20000 EDS 0 32768 0001.e801.6aa8 128.257

Interface
Name Role PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Link-type Edge Boundary
---------- ------ -------- ---- ------- --- ------- --------- ---- --------
Gi 0/0 ErrDis 128.257 128 20000 EDS 0 P2P No No

FTOS#show spanning-tree msti 0

MSTI 0 VLANs mapped 1-4094

Root Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.6aa8

Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15, max hops 20
Bridge Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.6aa8
Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15, max hops 20
We are the root of MSTI 0 (CIST)
Current root has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.6aa8
CIST regional root ID Priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.6aa8
CIST external path cost 0
Number of topology changes 1, last change occurred 00:00:15 ago on Gi 0/0

Port 257 (GigabitEthernet 0/0) is LBK_INC Discarding Loopback BPDU

Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.257Inconsistency
Designated root has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.6aa8 (LBK_INC)
Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.6aa8
Designated port id is 128.257, designated path cost 0
Number of transitions to forwarding state 1
BPDU (MRecords): sent 21, received 9
The port is not in the Edge port mode

Usage You must enable Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol prior to using this command.
Information

spanning-tree
ces Enable Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol on the interface.

Syntax spanning-tree
To disable the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol on the interface, use no spanning-tree

Parameters
spanning-tree Enter the keyword spanning-tree to enable the MSTP on the interface.
Default: Enable

Defaults Enable

Command Modes INTERFACE

Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) | 697

 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.

History
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

spanning-tree msti
ces Configure Multiple Spanning Tree instance cost and priority for an interface.

Syntax spanning-tree msti instance {cost cost | priority priority}

To remove the cost or priority for the MST instance, use
no spanning-tree msti instance {cost cost | priority priority}

Parameters
msti instance Enter the keyword msti and the MST Instance number.
Range: zero (0) to 63
cost cost (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword cost followed by the port cost value.
Range: 1 to 200000
Defaults:
100 Mb/s Ethernet interface = 200000
1-Gigabit Ethernet interface = 20000
10-Gigabit Ethernet interface = 2000
Port Channel interface with one 100 Mb/s Ethernet = 200000
Port Channel interface with one 1-Gigabit Ethernet = 20000
Port Channel interface with one 10-Gigabit Ethernet = 2000
Port Channel with two 1-Gigabit Ethernet = 18000
Port Channel with two 10-Gigabit Ethernet = 1800
Port Channel with two 100-Mbps Ethernet = 180000
priority priority Enter keyword priority followed by a value in increments of 16 as the priority.
Range: 0 to 240.
Default: 128

Defaults cost = depends on the interface type; priority = 128

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
Version 6.5.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

spanning-tree mstp edge-port

ces Configures the interface as an Multiple Spanning Tree edge port and optionally a Bridge Protocol Data
Unit (BPDU) guard.

Syntax spanning-tree mstp edge-port [bpduguard [shutdown-on-violation]]

698 | Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)

 Parameters
mstp Enter the keywords mstp followed by the keyword edge-port to configure the
edge-port interface as a Multiple Spanning Tree edge port.
bpduguard (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword portfast to enable Portfast to move the interface into
forwarding mode immediately after the root fails.
Enter the keyword bpduguard to disable the port when it receives a BPDU.
shutdown-on-v (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword shutdown-on-violation to hardware disable an
iolation interface when a BPDU is received and the port is disabled.

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced hardware shutdown-on-violation option
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
Version 6.1.1.0 Support for BPDU guard added

Usage On an MSTP switch, a port configured as an edge port will immediately transition to the forwarding
Information state. Only ports connected to end-hosts should be configured as an edge port. Consider an edge port
similar to a port with spanning-tree portfast enabled.

If shutdown-on-violation is not enabled, BPDUs will still be sent to the RPM CPU.

tc-flush-standard
ces Enable the MAC address flushing upon receiving every topology change notification.

Syntax tc-flush-standard
To disable, use the no tc-flush-standard command.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
Version 6.5.1.0 Introduced

Usage By default FTOS implements an optimized flush mechanism for MSTP. This helps in flushing the
Information MAC addresses only when necessary (and less often) allowing for faster convergence during topology
changes. However, if a standards-based flush mechanism is needed, this knob command can be turned
on to enable flushing MAC addresses upon receiving every topology change notification.

Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) | 699

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

700 | Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)

 26
Multicast

Overview
The platforms on which a command is supported is indicated by the character — e for the E-Series,
c for the C-Series, and s for the S-Series — that appears below each command heading.

This chapter contains the following sections:

• IPv4 Multicast Commands

• IPv6 Multicast Commands

IPv4 Multicast Commands

The IPv4 Multicast commands are:

• clear ip mroute
• ip mroute
• ip multicast-lag-hashing
• ipv6 multicast-routing
• ip multicast-limit
• mac-flood-list
• mtrace
• multicast-buffering enable
• queue backplane multicast
• restrict-flooding
• show ip mroute
• show ip rpf
• show queue backplane multicast

clear ip mroute
ces Clear learned multicast routes on the multicast forwarding table. To clear the PIM tree information
base, use clear ip pim tib command.

Syntax clear ip mroute {group-address [source-address] | *}

Multicast | 701
 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

group-address Enter multicast group address and source address (if desired), in dotted decimal
[source-address] format, to clear information on a specific group.
* Enter * to clear all multicast routes.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Related
show ip pim tib Show the PIM Tree Information Base.
Commands

ip mroute
ces Assign a static mroute.

Syntax ip mroute destination mask {ip-address | null 0| {{bgp| ospf} process-id | isis | rip | static}
{ip-address | tag | null 0}} [distance]
To delete a specific static mroute, use the command ip mroute destination mask {ip-address | null 0|
{{bgp| ospf} process-id | isis | rip | static} {ip-address | tag | null 0}} [distance].

To delete all mroutes matching a certain mroute, use the no ip mroute destination mask command.

Parameters
destination Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format of the destination device.
mask Enter the mask in slash prefix formation ( /x ) or in dotted decimal
format.
null 0 (OPTIONAL) Enter the null followed by zero (0).
[protocol [process-id | tag] (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the routing protocols:
ip-address] • Enter the BGP as-number followed by the IP address in dotted
decimal format of the reverse path forwarding (RPF) neighbor.
Range:1-65535
• Enter the OSPF process identification number followed by the IP
address in dotted decimal format of the reverse path forwarding
(RPF) neighbor.
Range: 1-65535
• Enter the IS-IS alphanumeric tag string followed by the IP address
in dotted decimal format of the reverse path forwarding (RPF)
neighbor.
• Enter the RIP IP address in dotted decimal format of the reverse
path forwarding (RPF) neighbor.
static ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the Static IP address in dotted decimal format of
the reverse path forwarding (RPF) neighbor.
ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format of the
reverse path forwarding (RPF) neighbor.
distance (OPTIONAL) Enter a number as the distance metric assigned to the
mroute.
Range: 0 to 255

702 | Multicast
 Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
E-Series legacy command

Related
show ip mroute View the E-Series routing table.
Commands

ip multicast-lag-hashing
e Distribute multicast traffic among Port Channel members in a round-robin fashion.

Syntax ip multicast-lag-hashing
To revert to the default, enter no ip multicast-lag-hashing.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 6.3.1.0 Introduced for E-Series
History

Usage By default, one Port Channel member is chosen to forward multicast traffic. With this feature turned
Information on, multicast traffic will be distributed among the Port Channel members in a round-robin fashion.
This feature applies to the routed multicast traffic. If IGMP Snooping is turned on, this feature also
applies to switched multicast traffic.

Related
Commands ipv6 multicast-routing Enable IP multicast forwarding.

ip multicast-routing
ces Enable IP multicast forwarding.

Syntax ip multicast-routing
To disable multicast forwarding, enter no ip multicast-routing.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
E-Series legacy command

Usage You must enter this command to enable multicast on the E-Series.
Information
After you enable multicast, you can enable IGMP and PIM on an interface. In the INTERFACE mode,
enter the ip pim sparse-mode command to enable IGMP and PIM on the interface.

Multicast | 703
 Related
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ip pim sparse-mode Enable IGMP and PIM on an interface.

Commands

ip multicast-limit
ces Use this feature to limit the number of multicast entries on the system.

Syntax ip multicast-limit limit

Parameters
limit Enter the desired maximum number of multicast entries on the system.
E-Series Range: 1 to 50000
E-Series Default: 15000
C-Series Range: 1 to 10000
C-Series Default: 4000
S-Series Range: 1 to 2000
S-Series Default: 400

Defaults As above

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Usage This features allows the user to limit the number of multicast entries on the system. This number is the
Information sum total of all the multicast entries on all line cards in the system. On each line card, the multicast
module will only install the maximum possible number of entries, depending on the configured CAM
profile.

The IN-L3-McastFib CAM partition is used to store multicast routes and is a separate hardware limit
that is exists per port-pipe. Any software-configured limit might be superseded by this hardware space
limitation. The opposite is also true, the CAM partition might not be exhausted at the time the
system-wide route limit set by the ip multicast-limit is reached.

Related
show ip igmp groups
Commands

mac-flood-list
e Provide an exception to the restrict-flood configuration so that multicast frames within a specified
MAC address range to be flooded on all ports in a VLAN.

Syntax mac-flood-list mac-address mask vlanvlan-list [min-speed speed]

Parameters
mac-address Enter a multicast MAC address in hexadecimal format.
mac-mask Enter the MAC Address mask.

704 | Multicast
 vlan vlan-list Enter the VLAN(s) in which flooding will be restricted. Separate values by
commas—no spaces ( 1,2,3 ) or indicate a list of values separated by a
hyphen (1-3).
Range: 1 to 4094
min-speed min-speed (OPTIONAL) Enter the minimum link speed that ports must have to receive
the specified flooded multicast traffic.

Defaults None

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Usage When the mac-flood-list with the min-speed option is used in combination with the restrict-flood
Information command, mac-flood-list command has higher priority than the restrict-flood command.

Therefore, all multicast frames matching the mac-address range specified using the mac-flood-list
command are flooded according to the mac-flood-list command. Only the multicast frames not
matching the mac-address range specified using the mac-flood-list command are flooded according to
the restrict-flood command.

Related
Commands restrict-flooding Prevent Layer 2 multicast traffic from being forwarded on ports below a
specified speed.

mtrace
e Trace a multicast route from the source to the receiver.

Syntax mtrace {source-address/hostname} {destination-address/hostname} {group-address}

Parameters
source-address/ Enter the source IP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D).
hostname
destination-address/ Enter the destination (receiver) IP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D).
hostname
group-address Enter the multicast group address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D).

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.5.1.0 Expanded to support originator
History
Version 7.4.1.0 Expanded to support intermediate (transit) router
E-Series legacy command

Usage Mtrace is an IGMP protocol based on the Multicast trace route facility and implemented according to
Information the IETF draft “A trace route facility for IP Multicast” (draft-fenner-traceroute-ipm-01.txt). FTOS
supports the Mtrace client and transmit functionality.

As an Mtrace client, FTOS transmits Mtrace queries, receives, parses and prints out the details in the
response packet received.

Multicast | 705
 As an Mtrace transit or intermediate router, FTOS returns the response to Mtrace queries. Upon
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

receiving the Mtrace request, FTOS computes the RPF neighbor for the source, fills in the request and
the forwards the request to the RPF neighbor. While computing the RPF neighbor, the static mroute
and mBGP route is preferred over the unicast route.

multicast-buffering enable
Enable buffering for all multicast traffic on the buffering unit.

Syntax [no] multicast-buffering enable

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.8 Introduced on S60.
History

Usage Use this command to enable backpressure messages for multicast traffic and allow the system to start
Information buffering multicast traffic. If multicast traffic is buffered for one group on any port, all multicast,
Destination Lookup Failure (DLF) and broadcast traffic is buffered. Note that multicast packets might
be dropped if either of the following occurs:

• continuous oversubscription at the egress

• if the packet is not drained for a long period because of slow draining rate at the egress port
compared to high ingress rate.
You must reboot the switch to enable the command on a standalone unit. Buffering multicast units is
not supported on stacked units.

Related
Commands show hardware Display the data plane or management plane input and output statistics
stack-unit of the designated component of the designated stack member.

queue backplane multicast

e Reallocate the amount of bandwidth dedicated to multicast traffic.

Syntax queue backplane multicast bandwidth-percentage percentage

Parameters
percentage Enter the percentage of backplane bandwidth to be dedicated to multicast
traffic.
Range: 5-95

Defaults 80% of the scheduler weight is for unicast traffic and 20% is for multicast traffic by default.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on E-Series
History

706 | Multicast
 Example Figure 26-1. Command Example: queue backplane multicast
FTOS(conf)#queue backplane multicast bandwidth-percent 30
FTOS(conf)#exit
FTOS#00:14:04: %RPM0-P:CP %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console by
console
show run | grep bandwidth
queue backplane multicast bandwidth-percent 30
FTOS#

Related
show queue backplane Display the backplane bandwidth configuration about how much bandwidth is
Commands
multicast dedicated to multicast versus unicast.

restrict-flooding
e Prevent Layer 2 multicast traffic from being flooded on ports below a specified link speed.

Syntax restrict-flooding multicast min-speed speed

Parameters
min-speed min-speed Enter the minimum link speed that a port must have to receive flooded
multicast traffic.
Range: 1000

Defaults None

Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN

Command
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on E-Series
History

Usage This command restricts flooding for all unknown multicast traffic on ports below a certain speed. If
Information you want some multicast traffic to be flooded on slower ports, use the command mac-flood-list
without the min-speed option, in combination with restrict-flooding. With mac-flood-list you
specify the traffic you want to be flooded using a MAC address range.

You may not use unicast MAC addresses when specifying MAC address ranges, and do not overlap
MAC addresses ranges, when creating multiple mac-flood-list entries for the same VLAN. Restricted
Layer 2 Flooding is not compatible with MAC accounting or VMANs.

Related
Commands mac-flood-list Flood multicast frames with specified MAC addresses to all ports in a
VLAN.

show ip mroute
ces View the Multicast Routing Table.

Syntax show ip mroute [static | group-address [source-address] | active [rate] | count | summary]

Multicast | 707
 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

static (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword static to view static multicast routes.
group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the multicast group-address to view only routes associated
[source-address] with that group.
Enter the source-address to view routes with that group-address and
source-address.
active [rate] (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword active to view only active multicast routes.
Enter a rate to view active routes over the specified rate.
Range: 0 to 10000000
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to view the number of multicast routes
and packets on the E-Series.
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view routes in a tabular format.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Example 1 Figure 26-2. Command Example: show ip mroute static

FTOS#show ip mroute static

Mroute: 23.23.23.0/24, interface: Lo 2

Protocol: static, distance: 0, route-map: none, last change: 00:00:23

FTOS#

Example 2 Figure 26-3. Command Example: show ip mroute

FTOS#show ip mroute

IP Multicast Routing Table

(*, 224.10.10.1), uptime 00:05:12

Incoming interface: GigabitEthernet 3/12
Outgoing interface list:
GigabitEthernet 3/13

(1.13.1.100, 224.10.10.1), uptime 00:04:03

Incoming interface: GigabitEthernet 3/4
Outgoing interface list:
GigabitEthernet 3/12
GigabitEthernet 3/13

(*, 224.20.20.1), uptime 00:05:12

Incoming interface: GigabitEthernet 3/12
Outgoing interface list:
GigabitEthernet 3/4

FTOS#

708 | Multicast
 Table 26-1. Command Example Fields: show ip mroute

Field Description
(S,G) Displays the forwarding entry in the multicast route table.
uptime Displays the amount of time the entry has been in the multicast forwarding
table.
Incoming interface Displays the reverse path forwarding (RPF) information towards the the
source for (S,G) entries and the RP for (*,G) entries.
Outgoing interface list: Lists the interfaces that meet one of the following:
• a directly connected member of the Group
• statically configured member of the Group
• received a (*,G) or (S,G) Join message

show ip rpf
ces View reverse path forwarding.

Syntax show ip rpf

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
E-Series legacy command

Usage Static mroutes are used by network administrators to control the reachability of the multicast sources.
Information If a PIM registered multicast source is reachable via static mroute as well as unicast route, the distance
of each route is examined and the route with shorter distance is the one the PIM selects for reachability.

Note: The default distance of mroutes is zero (0) and is CLI configurable on a per route basis.
Example Figure 26-4. Command Example: show ip rpf
FTOS#show ip rpf
RPF information for 10.10.10.9
RPF interface: Gi 3/4
RPF neighbor: 165.87.31.4
RPF route/mask: 10.10.10.9/255.255.255.255
RPF type: unicast

show queue backplane multicast

e Display the backplane bandwidth configuration about how much bandwidth is dedicated to multicast
versus unicast.

Syntax show queue backplane multicast bandwidth-percentage

Defaults None

Multicast | 709
 Command Modes EXEC
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on E-Series
History

Example Figure 26-5. Command Example: show queue backplane multicast

FTOS#show queue backplane multicast bandwidth-percent
Configured multicast bandwidth percentage is 80

Related
Commands queue backplane Reallocate the amount of bandwidth dedicated to multicast traffic.
multicast

IPv6 Multicast Commands

IPv6 Multicast commands are:

• clear ipv6 mroute

• ipv6 multicast-limit
• ipv6 multicast-routing
• show ipv6 mroute
• show ipv6 mroute mld
• show ipv6 mroute summary

clear ipv6 mroute

e Clear learned multicast routes on the multicast forwarding table. To clear the PIM tib, use clear ip pim
tib command.

Syntax clear ipv6 mroute {group-address [source-address] | *}

Parameters
group-address Enter multicast group address and source address (if desired) to clear information
[source-address] on a specific group. Enter the addresses in the x:x:x:x::x format.
The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero.
* Enter * to clear all multicast routes.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced
History

710 | Multicast
ipv6 multicast-limit
e Limit the number of multicast entries on the system.

Syntax ipv6 multicast-limit limit

Parameters
limit Enter the desired maximum number of multicast entries on the system.
Range: 1 to 50000
Default: 15000

Defaults 15000 routes

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced
History

Usage The maximum number of multicast entries allowed on each line card is determined by the CAM
Information profile. Multicast routes are stored in the IN-V6-McastFib CAM region, which has a fixed number of
entries. Any limit configured via the CLI is superseded by this hardware limit. The opposite is also
true; the CAM might not be exhausted at the time the CLI-configured route limit is reached.

ipv6 multicast-routing
e Enable IPv6 multicast forwarding.

Syntax ipv6 multicast-routing

To disable multicast forwarding, enter no ipv6 multicast-routing.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
E-Series legacy command
History

show ipv6 mroute

e View IPv6 multicast routes.

Syntax show ipv6 mroute [group-address [source-address]] [active rate] [count group-address [source
source-address]]

Parameters
group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IPv6 multicast group-address to view only
[source-address] routes associated with that group. Optionally, enter the IPv6
source-address to view routes with that group-address and
source-address.

Multicast | 711
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

active [rate] (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword active to view active multicast
sources. Enter a rate to view active routes over the specified rate.
Range: 0 to 10000000 packets/second
count group-address [source (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to view the number of IPv6
source-address]} multicast routes and packets on the E-Series. Optionally, enter the IPv6
source-address count information.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced
History

Example Figure 26-6. Command Example: show ipv6 mroute

FTOS#show ipv6 mroute
IP Multicast Routing Table
(165:87:32::30, ff05:100::1), uptime 00:01:11
Incoming interface: Vlan 200
Outgoing interface list:
GigabitEthernet 2/14

(165:87:37::30, ff05:200::1), uptime 00:01:04

Incoming interface: Port-channel 200
Outgoing interface list:
Vlan 200

(165:87:31::30, ff05:300::1), uptime 00:01:19

Incoming interface: GigabitEthernet 2/14
Outgoing interface list:
Port-channel 200

(165:87:32::30, ff05:1100::1), uptime 00:01:08

Incoming interface: Vlan 200
Outgoing interface list:
GigabitEthernet 2/14

(165:87:37::30, ff05:2200::1), uptime 00:01:01

Incoming interface: Port-channel 200
Outgoing interface list:
Vlan 200

FTOS#

Example Figure 26-7. Command Example: show ipv6 mroute active

FTOS#show ipv6 mroute active 10

Active Multicast Sources - sending >= 10 pps

Group: ff05:300::1
Source: 165:87:31::30
Rate: 100 pps

Group: ff05:3300::1
Source: 165:87:31::30
Rate: 100 pps

Group: ff3e:300::4000:1
Source: 165:87:31::20
Rate: 100 pps

Group: ff3e:3300::4000:1
Source: 165:87:31::20
Rate: 100 pps

FTOS#

712 | Multicast
 Example Figure 26-8. Command Example: show ipv6 mroute count group
FTOS#show ipv6 mroute count group ff05:3300::1

IP Multicast Statistics
1 routes using 648 bytes of memory
1 groups, 1.00 average sources per group
Forwarding Counts: Pkt Count/Pkts per second

Group: ff05:3300::1, Source count: 1

Source: 165:87:31::30, Forwarding: 3997/0
FTOS#

Example Figure 26-9. Command Example: show ipv6 mroute count source
FTOS#show ipv6 mroute count source 165:87:31::30

IP Multicast Statistics
2 routes using 1296 bytes of memory
2 groups, 1.00 average sources per group
Forwarding Counts: Pkt Count/Pkts per second

Group: ff05:300::1, Source count: 1

Source: 165:87:31::30, Forwarding: 3993/0

Group: ff05:3300::1, Source count: 1

Source: 165:87:31::30, Forwarding: 3997/0

FTOS#

show ipv6 mroute mld

e Display the Multicast MLD information.

Syntax show ipv6 mroute [mld [group-address | all | vlan vlan-id]]

Parameters
mld (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword mld to display Multicast MLD
information.
group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the multicast group address in the x:x:x:x::x format.
The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero.
all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to view all the MLD information.
vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID to view
MLD VLAN information.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced
History

Multicast | 713
 Example Figure 26-10. Command Example: show ipv6 mroute mld all
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show ipv6 mroute mld all

MLD SNOOPING MRTM Table

(*, ff05:100::1), uptime 00:04:21

Incoming vlan: Vlan 200
Outgoing interface list:
GigabitEthernet 2/15
GigabitEthernet 2/16

(*, ff05:200::1), uptime 00:04:15

Incoming vlan: Vlan 200
Outgoing interface list:
GigabitEthernet 2/15
GigabitEthernet 2/16

(*, ff05:1100::1), uptime 00:04:18

Incoming vlan: Vlan 200
Outgoing interface list:
GigabitEthernet 2/15
GigabitEthernet 2/16
FTOS#

show ipv6 mroute summary

e Display a summary of the Multicast routing table.

Syntax show ipv6 mroute summary

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced
History

Example Figure 26-11. Command Example: show ipv6 mroute summary

FTOS#show ipv6 mroute summary
IP Multicast Routing Table
12 groups, 12 routes

(165:87:32::30, ff05:100::1), 00:00:24

(165:87:37::30, ff05:200::1), 00:00:24
(165:87:31::30, ff05:300::1), 00:00:24
(165:87:32::30, ff05:1100::1), 00:00:21
(165:87:37::30, ff05:2200::1), 00:00:21
(165:87:31::30, ff05:3300::1), 00:00:21
(165:87:32::20, ff3e:100::4000:1), 00:00:41
FTOS#

714 | Multicast
 27
Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP)

Overview
Neighbor Discovery Protocol for IPv6 is defined in RFC 2461 as part of the Stateless Address
Autoconfiguration protocol. It replaces the Address Resolution Protocol used with IPv4. It defines
mechanisms for solving the following problems:
• Router discovery: Hosts can locate routers residing on a link.
• Prefix discovery: Hosts can discover address prefixes for the link.
• Parameter discovery
• Address autoconfiguration — configuration of addresses for an interface
• Address resolution — mapping from IP address to link-layer address
• Next-hop determination
• Neighbor Unreachability Detection (NUD): Determine that a neighbor is no longer reachable on
the link.
• Duplicate Address Detection (DAD): Allow a node to check whether a proposed address is already
in use.
• Redirect: The router can inform a node about a better first-hop.
NDP makes use of the following five ICMPv6 packet types in its implementation:
• Router Solicitation
• Router Advertisement
• Neighbor Solicitation
• Neighbor Advertisement
• Redirect

Commands
The Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) commands in this chapter are:
• clear ipv6 neighbors
• ipv6 nd managed-config-flag
• ipv6 nd max-ra-interval
• ipv6 nd mtu
• ipv6 nd other-config-flag
• ipv6 nd prefix
• ipv6 nd ra-lifetime
• ipv6 nd reachable-time
• ipv6 nd suppress-ra

Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) | 715

 • ipv6 neighbor
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

• show ipv6 neighbors

clear ipv6 neighbors

e Delete all entries in the IPv6 neighbor discovery cache, or neighbors of a specific interface. Static
entries will not be removed using this command.

Syntax clear ipv6 neighbors [ipv6-address] [interface]

Parameters
ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address of the neighbor in the x:x:x:x::x format to remove a
specific IPv6 neighbor.
The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero.
interface interface To remove all neighbor entries learned on a specific interface, enter the
keyword interface followed by the interface type and slot/port or number
information of the interface:
• For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fastEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
GigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel
followed by a number from 1 to 255.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID. The
range is from 1 to 4094.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

ipv6 nd managed-config-flag
e Set the managed address configuration flag in the IPv6 router advertisement. The description of this
flag from RFC 2461 (http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc2461) is:
M: 1-bit “Managed address configuration” flag. When set, hosts use the administered (stateful)
protocol for address autoconfiguration in addition to any addresses autoconfigured using stateless
address autoconfiguration. The use of this flag is described in:
Thomson, S. and T. Narten, “IPv6 Address Autoconfiguration”, RFC 2462, December 1998.

Syntax ipv6 nd managed-config-flag

To clear the flag from the IPv6 router advertisements, use the no ipv6 nd managed-config-flag
command.

Defaults The default flag is 0.

Command Modes INTERFACE

716 | Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP)

ipv6 nd max-ra-interval
e Configure the interval between the IPv6 router advertisement (RA) transmissions on an interface.

Syntax ipv6 nd max-ra-interval {interval} min-ra-interval {interval}

To restore the default interval, use the no ipv6 nd max-ra-interval command.

Parameters
max-ra-interval {interval} Enter the keyword max-ra-interval followed by the interval in
seconds.
Range: 4 to 1800 seconds
min-ra-interval {interval} Enter the keyword min-ra-interval followed by the interval in
seconds.
Range: 3 to 1350 seconds

Defaults Max RA interval: 600 seconds, Min RA interval: 200 seconds

Command Modes INTERFACE

ipv6 nd mtu
ces Configure an IPv6 neighbor discovery.

Syntax ipv6 nd mtu number

Parameters
mtu number Set the MTU advertisement value in Routing Prefix
Advertisement packets. Range: 1280 to 9234

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced

Usage The ip nd mtu command sets the value advertised to routers. It does not set the actual MTU rate. For
Information example, if ip nd mtu is set to 1280, the interface will still pass 1500-byte packets.

The mtu command sets the actual frame size passed, and can be larger than the advertised MTU. If the
mtu setting is larger than the ip nd mtu, an error message is sent, but the configuration is accepted.

% Error: nd ra mtu is greater than link mtu, link mtu will be used.

Related
Commands
mtu Set the maximum link MTU (frame size) for an Ethernet interface.

Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) | 717

 ipv6 nd other-config-flag
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

e Set the other stateful configuration flag in the IPv6 router advertisement. The description of this flag
from RFC 2461 (http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc2461) is:
O: 1-bit “Other stateful configuration” flag. When set, hosts use the administered (stateful) protocol
for autoconfiguration of other (non-address) information. The use of this flag is described in:
Thomson, S. and T. Narten, “IPv6 Address Autoconfiguration”, RFC 2462, December 1998.

Syntax ipv6 nd other-config-flag

To clear the flag from the IPv6 router advertisements, use the no ipv6 nd other-config-flag
command.

Defaults The default flag is 0.

Command Modes INTERFACE

ipv6 nd prefix
e Configure how IPv6 prefixes are advertised in the IPv6 router advertisements. The description of an
IPv6 prefix from RFC 2461(http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc2461) is a bit string that consists of some
number of initial bits of an address.

Syntax ipv6 nd prefix {ipv6-address prefix-length | default} [no-advertise] | [no-autoconfig |

no-rtr-address | off-link]

To prevent a prefix (or prefixes) from being advertised, use the no ipv6 nd prefix {ipv6-address
prefix-length | default} [no-advertise {valid-lifetime seconds | preferred-lifetime seconds}] |
[no-autoconfig | no-rtr-address | off-link] command.

Parameters
ipv6-address prefix-length Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the
prefix length in the /x format.
Range: /0 to /128
The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros
default (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword default to specify the prefix
default parameters.
no-advertise (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword no-advertise to not advertise
prefixes.
no-autoconfig (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword no-autoconfig to not use
prefixes for auto-configuration.
no-rtr-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword no-rtr-address to not send full
router addresses in prefix advertisement.
off-link (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword off-link to not use prefixes for
on-link determination.

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes INTERFACE

718 | Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP)

ipv6 nd ra-lifetime
e Configure the router lifetime value in the IPv6 router advertisements on an interface. The description
of router lifetime from RFC 2461(http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc2461) is:
Router Lifetime: 16-bit unsigned integer. The lifetime associated with the default router in units of
seconds. The maximum value corresponds to 18.2 hours. A Lifetime of 0 indicates that the router is not
a default router and SHOULD NOT appear on the default router list. The Router Lifetime applies only
to the router's usefulness as a default router; it does not apply to information contained in other
message fields or options. Options that need time limits for their information include their own lifetime
fields.

Syntax ipv6 nd ra-lifetime seconds

To restore the default values, use the no ipv6 nd ra-lifetime command.

Parameters
seconds Enter the lifetime value in seconds.
Range: 0 to 9000

Defaults 9000 seconds

Command Modes INTERFACE

ipv6 nd reachable-time
e Configure the amount of time that a remote IPv6 node is considered available after a reachability
confirmation event has occurred. The description of reachable time from RFC 2461(http://
tools.ietf.org/html/rfc2461) is:
Reachable Time: 32-bit unsigned integer. The time, in milliseconds, that a node assumes a neighbor is
reachable after having received a reachability confirmation. Used by the Neighbor Unreachability
Detection algorithm. A value of zero means unspecified (by this router).

Syntax ipv6 nd reachable-time {milliseconds}

To restore the default time, use the no ipv6 nd reachable-time command.

Parameters
milliseconds Enter the leachability time in milliseconds.
Range: 0 to 3600000

Defaults 3600000 milliseconds

Command Modes INTERFACE

ipv6 nd suppress-ra
e Suppress the IPv6 router advertisement transmissions on an interface.

Syntax ipv6 nd suppress-ra

To enable the sending of IPv6 router advertisement transmissions on an interface, use the no ipv6 nd
suppress-ra command.

Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) | 719

 Defaults Enabled
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Command Modes INTERFACE

ipv6 neighbor
e Configure a static entry in the IPv6 neighbor discovery.

Syntax ipv6 neighbor {ipv6-address} {interface interface} {hardware_address}

To remove a static IPv6 entry from the IPv6 neighbor discovery, use the no ipv6 neighbor
{ipv6-address} {interface interface} command.

Parameters
ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address of the neighbor in the x:x:x:x::x format.
The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero
interface interface Enter the keyword interface followed by the interface type and slot/port or
number information:
• For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fastEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
GigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel
followed by a number from 1 to 255.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
hardware_address Enter a 48-bit hardware MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

show ipv6 neighbors

e Display IPv6 discovery information. Entering the command without options shows all IPv6 neighbor
addresses stored on the CP (control processor).

Syntax show ipv6 neighbors [ipv6-address] [cpu {rp1 [ipv6-address] | rp2 [ipv6-address]}] [interface
interface]

Parameters
ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address of the neighbor in the x:x:x:x::x format.
The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero

720 | Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP)

 cpu Enter the keyword cpu followed by either rp1 or rp2 (Route Processor 1
or 2), optionally followed by an IPv6 address to display the IPv6 neighbor
entries stored on the designated RP.
interface interface • For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fastEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
GigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel
followed by a number from 1 to 255.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID. The
range is from 1 to 4094.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Example Figure 27-1. Command Example: show ipv6 neighbors

FTOS#show ipv6 neighbors

IPv6 Address Expires(min) Hardware Address State Interface VLAN CPU

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
fe80::201:e8ff:fe17:5bc6
1439 00:01:e8:17:5b:c6 STALE Gi 1/9 - CP
fe80::201:e8ff:fe17:5bc7
1439 00:01:e8:17:5b:c7 STALE Gi 1/10 - CP
fe80::201:e8ff:fe17:5bc8
1439 00:01:e8:17:5b:c8 STALE Gi 1/11 - CP
fe80::201:e8ff:fe17:5caf
0.3 00:01:e8:17:5c:af REACH Po 1 - CP
fe80::201:e8ff:fe17:5cb0
1439 00:01:e8:17:5c:b0 STALE Po 32 - CP
fe80::201:e8ff:fe17:5cb1
1439 00:01:e8:17:5c:b1 STALE Po 255 - CP
fe80::201:e8ff:fe17:5cae
1439 00:01:e8:17:5c:ae STALE Gi 1/3 Vl 100 CP
fe80::201:e8ff:fe17:5cae
1439 00:01:e8:17:5c:ae STALE Gi 1/5 Vl 1000 CP
fe80::201:e8ff:fe17:5cae
1439 00:01:e8:17:5c:ae STALE Gi 1/7 Vl 2000 CP
FTOS#

Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) | 721

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

722 | Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP)

 28
Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3)

Overview
Open Shortest Path First version 2 for IPv4 is supported on platforms c e s

Open Shortest Path First version 3 (OSPFv3) for IPv6 is supported on platforms c e

Note: The C-Series supports OSPFv3 with FTOS version 7.8.1.0 and later.

OSPF is an Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP), which means that it distributes routing information
between routers in a single Autonomous System (AS). OSPF is also a link-state protocol in which all
routers contain forwarding tables derived from information about their links to their neighbors.

The fundamental mechanisms of OSPF (flooding, DR election, area support, SPF calculations, etc.) are
the same for OSPFv2 and OSPFv3. OSPFv3 runs on a per-link basis instead of on a per-IP-subnet
basis.

This chapter is divided into 2 sections. There is no overlap between the two sets of commands. You
cannot use an OSPFv2 command in the IPv6 OSPFv3 mode.

• OSPFv2 Commands
Note: FTOS version 7.8.1.0 introduces Multi-Process OSPF on IPv4 (OSPFv2) only. It is not
supported on OSPFv3 (IPv6).
Note that the CLI now requires that the Process ID be included when entering the
ROUTER-OSPF mode. Each command entered applies to the specified OSPFv2 process only.

OSPFv2 Commands
The Dell Networking implementation of OSPFv2 is based on IETF RFC 2328. The following
commands enable you to configure and enable OSPFv2.

• area default-cost
• area nssa
• area range
• area stub
• area virtual-link
• auto-cost

Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) | 723

 • clear ip ospf
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

• clear ip ospf statistics

• debug ip ospf
• default-information originate
• default-metric
• description
• distance
• distance ospf
• distribute-list in
• distribute-list out
• enable inverse mask
• fast-convergence
• flood-2328
• graceful-restart grace-period
• graceful-restart helper-reject
• graceful-restart mode
• graceful-restart role
• ip ospf auth-change-wait-time
• ip ospf authentication-key
• ip ospf cost
• ip ospf dead-interval
• ip ospf hello-interval
• ip ospf message-digest-key
• ip ospf mtu-ignore
• ip ospf network
• ip ospf priority
• ip ospf retransmit-interval
• ip ospf transmit-delay
• log-adjacency-changes
• maximum-paths
• mib-binding
• network area
• passive-interface
• redistribute
• redistribute bgp
• redistribute isis
• router-id
• router ospf
• show config
• show ip ospf
• show ip ospf asbr
• show ip ospf database
• show ip ospf database asbr-summary
• show ip ospf database external
• show ip ospf database network
• show ip ospf database nssa-external

724 | Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3)

 • show ip ospf database opaque-area
• show ip ospf database opaque-as
• show ip ospf database opaque-link
• show ip ospf database router
• show ip ospf database summary
• show ip ospf interface
• show ip ospf neighbor
• show ip ospf routes
• show ip ospf statistics
• show ip ospf topology
• show ip ospf virtual-links
• summary-address
• timers spf

area default-cost
ces Set the metric for the summary default route generated by the area border router (ABR) into the stub
area. Use this command on the border routers at the edge of a stub area.

Syntax area area-id default-cost cost

To return default values, use the no area area-id default-cost command.

Parameters
area-id Specify the OSPF area in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.) or enter a number from zero
(0) to 65535.
cost Specifies the stub area’s advertised external route metric.
Range: zero (0) to 65535.

Defaults cost = 1; no areas are configured.

Command Modes ROUTER OSPF

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support for Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage In FTOS, cost is defined as reference bandwidth/bandwidth.

Information

Related
area stub Create a stub area.
Commands

Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) | 725

 area nssa
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Specify an area as a Not So Stubby Area (NSSA).

Syntax area area-id nssa [default-information-originate] [no-redistribution] [no-summary]

To delete an NSSA, enter no area area-id nssa.

Parameters
area-id Specify the OSPF area in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D) or enter a number
from 0 and 65535.
no-redistribution (OPTIONAL) Specify that the redistribute command should not distribute
routes into the NSSA. You should only use this command in a NSSA Area
Border Router (ABR).
default-information-ori (OPTIONAL) Allows external routing information to be imported into the
ginate NSSA by using Type 7 default.
no-summary (OPTIONAL) Specify that no summary LSAs should be sent into the NSSA.

Defaults Not configured

Command Mode ROUTER OSPF

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support for Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

area range
ces Summarize routes matching an address/mask at an area border router (ABR).

Syntax area area-id range ip-address mask [not-advertise]

To disable route summarization, use the no area area-id range ip-address mask command.

Parameters
area-id Specify the OSPF area in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.) or enter a number from
zero (0) to 65535.
ip-address Specify an IP address in dotted decimal format.
mask Specify a mask for the destination prefix. Enter the full mask (for example,
255.255.255.0).
not-advertise (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword not-advertise to set the status to DoNotAdvertise
(that is, the Type 3 summary-LSA is suppressed and the component networks remain
hidden from other areas.)

Defaults No range is configured.

Command Modes ROUTER OSPF

726 | Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3)

 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support for Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage Only the routes within an area are summarized, and that summary is advertised to other areas by the
Information ABR. External routes are not summarized.

Related
area stub Create a stub area.
Commands
router ospf Enter the ROUTER OSPF mode to configure an OSPF instance.

area stub
ces Configure a stub area, which is an area not connected to other areas.

Syntax area area-id stub [no-summary]

To delete a stub area, enter no area area-id stub.

Parameters
area-id Specify the stub area in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.) or enter a number from zero
(0) to 65535.
no-summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword no-summary to prevent the ABR from sending
summary Link State Advertisements (LSAs) into the stub area.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes ROUTER OSPF

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support for Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage Use this command to configure all routers and access servers within a stub.
Information

Related
router ospf Enter the ROUTER OSPF mode to configure an OSPF instance.
Commands

Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) | 727

 area virtual-link
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Set a virtual link and its parameters.

Syntax area area-id virtual-link router-id [[authentication-key [encryption-type] key] |

[message-digest-key keyid md5 [encryption-type] key]] [dead-interval seconds]
[hello-interval seconds] [retransmit-interval seconds] [transmit-delay seconds]

To delete a virtual link, use the no area area-id virtual-link router-id command.

To delete a parameter of a virtual link, use the no area area-id virtual-link router-id
[[authentication-key [encryption-type] key] | [message-digest-key keyid md5
[encryption-type] key]] [dead-interval seconds] [hello-interval seconds] [retransmit-interval
seconds] [transmit-delay seconds] command syntax.

Parameters
area-id Specify the transit area for the virtual link in dotted decimal format
(A.B.C.D.) or enter a number from zero (0) to 65535.
router-id Specify an ID (IP address in dotted decimal format) associated with a
virtual link neighbor.
authentication-key (OPTIONAL) Choose between two authentication methods:
[encryption-type] key | • Enter the keyword authentication-key to enable simple
message-digest-key keyid authentication followed by an alphanumeric string up to 8
md5 [encryption-type] key characters long. Optionally, for the encryption-type variable,
enter the number 7 before entering the key string to indicate that an
encrypted password will follow.
• Enter the keyword message-digest-key followed by a number
from 1 to 255 as the keyid. After the keyid, enter the keyword
md5 followed by the key. The key is an alphanumeric string up to
16 characters long. Optionally, for the encryption-type variable,
enter the number 7 before entering the key string to indicate that an
encrypted password will follow.
dead-interval seconds (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dead-interval followed by a
number as the number of seconds for the interval.
Range: 1 to 8192.
Default: 40 seconds.
hello-interval seconds (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword hello-interval followed by the
number of seconds for the interval.
Range: 1 to 8192.
Default: 10 seconds.
retransmit-interval seconds (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword retransmit-interval followed by
the number of seconds for the interval.
Range: 1 to 8192.
Default: 5 seconds.
transmit-delay seconds (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword transmit-delay followed by the
number of seconds for the interval.
Range: 1 to 8192.
Default: 1 second.

Defaults dead-interval seconds = 40 seconds; hello-interval seconds = 10 seconds; retransmit-interval

seconds = 5 seconds; transmit-delay seconds = 1 second

Command Modes ROUTER OSPF

728 | Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3)

 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support for Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage All OSPF areas must be connected to a backbone area (usually Area 0). Virtual links connect broken or
Information discontiguous areas.

You cannot enable both authentication options. Choose either the authentication-key or
message-digest-key option.

auto-cost
ces Specify how the OSPF interface cost is calculated based on the reference bandwidth method.

Syntax auto-cost [reference-bandwidth ref-bw]

To return to the default bandwidth or to assign cost based on the interface type, use the no auto-cost
[reference-bandwidth] command.

Parameters
ref-bw (OPTIONAL) Specify a reference bandwidth in megabits per second.
Range: 1 to 4294967
Default: 100 megabits per second.

Defaults 100 megabits per second.

Command Modes ROUTER OSPF

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support for Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

clear ip ospf
ces Clear all OSPF routing tables.

Syntax clear ip ospf process-id [process]

Parameters
process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to clear a specific process.
If no Process ID is entered, all OSPF processes are cleared.
process (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword process to reset the OSPF process.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) | 729

 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60

History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support for Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

clear ip ospf statistics

ces Clear the packet statistics in interfaces and neighbors.

Syntax clear ip ospf process-id statistics [interface name {neighbor router-id}]

Parameters
process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to clear statistics for a specific process.
If no Process ID is entered, all OSPF processes are cleared.
interface name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interface followed by one of the
following interface keywords and slot/port or number information:
For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
For Port Channel groups, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a
number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1-255 for TeraScale
For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.
neighbor router-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword neighbor followed by the neighbor’s
router-id in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.).

Defaults No defaults values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support for Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Related
show ip ospf statistics Display the OSPF statistics
Commands

730 | Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3)

debug ip ospf
ces Display debug information on OSPF. Entering debug ip ospf enables OSPF debugging for the first
OSPF process,.

Syntax debug ip ospf process-id [bfd |event | packet | spf]

To cancel the debug command, enter no debug ip ospf.

Parameters
process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to debug a specific process.
If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process.
bfd (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bfd to debug only OSPF BFD information.
event (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword event to debug only OSPF event information.
packet (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword packet to debug only OSPF packet information.
spf (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword spf to display the Shortest Path First information.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support for Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 28-1. Command example: debug ip ospf process-id packet

FTOS#debug ip ospf 1 packet
OSPF process 90, packet debugging is on

FTOS#
08:14:24 : OSPF(100:00):
Xmt. v:2 t:1(HELLO) l:44 rid:192.1.1.1
aid:0.0.0.1 chk:0xa098 aut:0 auk: keyid:0 to:Gi 4/3 dst:224.0.0.5
netmask:255.255.255.0 pri:1 N-, MC-, E+, T-,
hi:10 di:40 dr:90.1.1.1 bdr:0.0.0.0

Table 28-1. Output Descriptions for debug ip ospf process-id packet

Field Description
8:14 Displays the time stamp.
OSPF Displays the OSPF process ID: instance ID.
v: Displays the OSPF version. FTOS supports version 2 only.
t: Displays the type of packet sent:
• 1 - Hello packet
• 2 - database description
• 3 - link state request
• 4 - link state update
• 5 - link state acknowledgement
l: Displays the packet length.
rid: Displays the OSPF router ID.

Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) | 731

 Table 28-1. Output Descriptions for debug ip ospf process-id packet
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Field Description
aid: Displays the Autonomous System ID.
chk: Displays the OSPF checksum.
aut: States if OSPF authentication is configured. One of the following is listed:
• 0 - no authentication configured
• 1 - simple authentication configured using the ip ospf authentication-key command)
• 2 - MD5 authentication configured using the ip ospf message-digest-key command.
auk: If the ip ospf authentication-key command is configured, this field displays the key used.
keyid: If the ip ospf message-digest-key command is configured, this field displays the MD5 key
to: Displays the interface to which the packet is intended.
dst: Displays the destination IP address.
netmask: Displays the destination IP address mask.
pri: Displays the OSPF priority
N, MC, E, T Displays information available in the Options field of the HELLO packet:
• N + (N-bit is set)
• N - (N-bit is not set)
• MC+ (bit used by MOSPF is set and router is able to forward IP multicast packets)
• MC- (bit used by MOSPF is not set and router cannot forward IP multicast packets)
• E + (router is able to accept AS External LSAs)
• E - (router cannot accept AS External LSAs)
• T + (router can support TOS)
• T - (router cannot support TOS)
hi: Displays the amount of time configured for the HELLO interval.
di: Displays the amount of time configured for the DEAD interval.
dr: Displays the IP address of the designated router.
bdr: Displays the IP address of the Border Area Router.

default-information originate
ces Configure the FTOS to generate a default external route into an OSPF routing domain.

Syntax default-information originate [always] [metric metric-value] [metric-type type-value]

[route-map map-name]
To return to the default values, enter no default-information originate.

Parameters
always (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword always to specify that default route
information must always be advertised.
metric metric-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric followed by a number to configure a
metric value for the route.
Range: 1 to 16777214

732 | Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3)

 metric-type type-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric-type followed by an OSPF link
state type of 1 or 2 for default routes. The values are:
• 1 = Type 1 external route
• 2 = Type 2 external route.
route-map map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword route-map followed by the name of an
established route map.

Defaults Disabled.

Command Modes ROUTER OSPF

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support for Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Related
redistribute Redistribute routes from other routing protocols into OSPF.
Commands

default-metric
ces Change the metrics of redistributed routes to a value useful to OSPF. Use this command with the
redistribute command.

Syntax default-metric number

To return to the default values, enter no default-metric [number].

Parameters
number Enter a number as the metric.
Range: 1 to 16777214.

Defaults Disabled.

Command Modes ROUTER OSPF

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support for Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Related
redistribute Redistribute routes from other routing protocols into OSPF.
Commands

description
ces Add a description about the selected OSPF configuration.

Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) | 733

 Syntax description description
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

To remove the OSPF description, use the no description command.

Parameters
description Enter a text string description to identify the OSPF configuration (80 characters maximum).

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes ROUTER OSPF

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support for Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Related
show ip ospf asbr Display VLAN configuration.
Commands

distance
ces Define an administrative distance for particular routes to a specific IP address.

Syntax distance weight [ip-address mask access-list-name]

To delete the settings, use the no distance weight [ip-address mask access-list-name] command.

Parameters
weight Specify an administrative distance.
Range: 1 to 255.
Default: 110
ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter a router ID in the dotted decimal format.
If you enter a router ID, you must include the mask for that router address.
mask (OPTIONAL) Enter a mask in dotted decimal format or /n format.
access-list-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of an IP standard access list, up to 140 characters.

Defaults 110

Command Modes ROUTER OSPF

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support for Multi-Process OSPF.
Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to
16 characters long.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

734 | Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3)

distance ospf
ces Configure an OSPF distance metric for different types of routes.

Syntax distance ospf [external dist3] [inter-area dist2] [intra-area dist1]

To delete these settings, enter no distance ospf.

Parameters
external dist3 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword external followed by a number to specify a
distance for external type 5 and 7 routes.
Range: 1 to 255
Default: 110.
inter-area dist2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword inter-area followed by a number to specify a
distance metric for routes between areas.
Range: 1 to 255
Default: 110.
intra-area dist1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword intra-area followed by a number to specify a
distance metric for all routes within an area.
Range: 1 to 255
Default: 110.

Defaults external dist3 = 110; inter-area dist2 = 110; intra-area dist1 = 110.

Command Modes ROUTER OSPF

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support for Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage To specify a distance for routes learned from other routing domains, use the redistribute command.
Information

distribute-list in
ces Apply a filter to incoming routing updates from OSPF to the routing table.

Syntax distribute-list prefix-list-name in [interface]

To delete a filter, use the no distribute-list prefix-list-name in [interface] command.

Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) | 735

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

prefix-list-name Enter the name of a configured prefix list.

interface (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following keywords and slot/port or number
information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For Port Channel groups, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a
number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1-255 for TeraScale
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER OSPF

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support for Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

distribute-list out
ces Apply a filter to restrict certain routes destined for the local routing table after the SPF calculation.

Syntax distribute-list prefix-list-name out [bgp | connected | isis | rip | static]

To remove a filter, use the no distribute-list prefix-list-name out [bgp | connected | isis | rip |
static] command.

Parameters
prefix-list-name Enter the name of a configured prefix list.
bgp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bgp to specify that BGP routes are distributed.*
connected (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword connected to specify that connected routes are
distributed.
isis (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword isis to specify that IS-IS routes are distributed.*
rip (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rip to specify that RIP routes are distributed.*
static (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword static to specify that only manually configured
routes are distributed.

* BGP and ISIS routes are not available on the C-Series.

BGP, ISIS, and RIP routes are not available on the S-Series.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER OSPF

736 | Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3)

 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support for Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage The distribute-list out command applies to routes being redistributed by autonomous system boundary
Information routers (ASBRs) into OSPF. It can be applied to external type 2 and external type 1 routes, but not to
intra-area and inter-area routes.

enable inverse mask

ce FTOS, by default, permits the user to input OSPF network command with a net-mask. This command
provides a choice between inverse-mask or net-mask (the default).

Syntax enable inverse mask

To return to the default net-mask, enter no enable inverse mask.

Defaults net-mask

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
History
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

fast-convergence
ces This command sets the minimum LSA origination and arrival times to zero (0), allowing more rapid
route computation so that convergence takes less time.

Syntax fast-convergence {number}

To cancel fast-convergence, enter no fast convergence.

Parameters
number Enter the convergence level desired. The higher this parameter is set, the
faster OSPF converge takes place.
Range: 1-4

Defaults None.

Command Modes ROUTER OSPF

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on all platforms.

Usage The higher this parameter is set, the faster OSPF converge takes place. Note that the faster the
Information convergence, the more frequent the route calculations and updates. This will impact CPU utilization
and may impact adjacency stability in larger topologies.

Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) | 737

 Generally, convergence level 1 meets most convergence requirements. Higher convergence levels
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

should only be selected following consultation with Dell Networking technical support.

flood-2328
ces Enable RFC-2328 flooding behavior.

Syntax flood-2328

To disable, use the no flood-2328 command.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes ROUTER OSPF

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support for Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and E-Series

Usage In OSPF, flooding is the most resource-consuming task. The flooding algorithm, described in
Information RFC-2328, requires that OSPF flood LSAs (Link State Advertisements) on all interfaces, as governed
by LSA’s flooding scope (see Section 13 of the RFC). When multiple direct links connect two routers,
the RFC-2328 flooding algorithm generates significant redundant information across all links.

By default, FTOS implements an enhanced flooding procedure that dynamically and intelligently
determines when to optimize flooding. Whenever possible, the OSPF task attempts to reduce flooding
overhead by selectively flooding on a subset of the interfaces between two routers.

When flood-2328 is enabled, this command configures FTOS to flood LSAs on all interfaces.

graceful-restart grace-period
ces Specifies the time duration, in seconds, that the router’s neighbors will continue to advertise the router
as fully adjacent regardless of the synchronization state during a graceful restart.

Syntax graceful-restart grace-period seconds

To disable the grace period, enter no graceful-restart grace-period.

Parameters
seconds Time duration, in seconds, that specifies the duration of the restart process
before OSPF terminates the process.
Range: 40 to 3000 seconds

Defaults Not Configured

Command Modes ROUTER OSPF

738 | Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3)

 Command
Version 8.3.3.4 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Introduced support for Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage OSPF Graceful Restart is not supported on the S60 system.

Information

graceful-restart helper-reject
ces Specify the OSPF router to not act as a helper during graceful restart.

Syntax graceful-restart helper-reject ip-address

To return to default value, enter no graceful-restart helper-reject.

Parameters
ip-address Enter the OSPF router-id, in IP address format, of the restart router that will
not act as a helper during graceful restart.

Defaults Not Configured

Command Modes ROUTER OSPF

Command
Version 8.3.3.4 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support for Multi-Process OSPF.
Restart role enabled on S-Series (Both Helper and Restart roles now supported
on S-Series.
Version 7.7.1.0 Helper-Role supported on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

graceful-restart mode
ces Enable the graceful restart mode.

Syntax graceful-restart mode [planned-only | unplanned-only]

To disable graceful restart mode, enter no graceful-restart mode.

Parameters
planned-only (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords planned-only to indicate graceful
restart is supported in a planned restart condition only.
unplanned-only (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords unplanned-only to indicate graceful
restart is supported in an unplanned restart condition only.

Defaults Support for both planned and unplanned failures.

Command Modes ROUTER OSPF

Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) | 739

 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.3.4 Introduced on S60

History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

graceful-restart role
ces Specify the role for your OSPF router during graceful restart.

Syntax graceful-restart role [helper-only | restart-only]

To disable graceful restart role, enter no graceful-restart role.

Parameters
role helper-only (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords helper-only to specify the OSPF router
is a helper only during graceful restart.
role restart-only (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords restart-only to specify the OSPF router
is a restart only during graceful-restart.

Defaults OSPF routers are, by default, both helper and restart routers during a graceful restart.

Command Modes ROUTER OSPF

Command
Version 8.3.3.4 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support for Multi-Process OSPF.
Restart and helper roles supported on S-Series
Version 7.7.1 Helper-Role supported on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

ip ospf auth-change-wait-time
ces OSPF provides a grace period while OSPF changes its interface authentication type. During the grace
period, OSPF sends out packets with new and old authentication scheme till the grace period expires.

Syntax ip ospf auth-change-wait-time seconds

To return to the default, enter no ip ospf auth-change-wait-time.

Parameters
seconds Enter seconds
Range: 0 to 300

Defaults zero (0) seconds

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

740 | Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3)

 Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

ip ospf authentication-key
ces Enable authentication and set an authentication key on OSPF traffic on an interface.

Syntax ip ospf authentication-key [encryption-type] key

To delete an authentication key, enter no ip ospf authentication-key.

Parameters
encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter 7 to encrypt the key.
key Enter an 8 character string. Strings longer than 8 characters are truncated.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage All neighboring routers in the same network must use the same password to exchange OSPF
Information information.

ip ospf cost
ces Change the cost associated with the OSPF traffic on an interface.

Syntax ip ospf cost cost

To return to default value, enter no ip ospf cost.

Parameters
cost Enter a number as the cost.
Range: 1 to 65535.

Defaults The default cost is based on the reference bandwidth.

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage If this command is not configured, cost is based on the auto-cost command.
Information

Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) | 741

 When you configure OSPF over multiple vendors, use the ip ospf cost command to ensure that all
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

routers use the same cost. Otherwise, OSPF routes improperly.

Related
auto-cost Control how the OSPF interface cost is calculated.
Commands

ip ospf dead-interval
ces Set the time interval since the last hello-packet was received from a router. After the interval elapses,
the neighboring routers declare the router dead.

Syntax ip ospf dead-interval seconds

To return to the default values, enter no ip ospf dead-interval.

Parameters
seconds Enter the number of seconds for the interval.
Range: 1 to 65535. Default: 40 seconds.

Defaults 40 seconds

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage By default, the dead interval is four times the default hello-interval.
Information

Related
ip ospf hello-interval Set the time interval between hello packets.
Commands

ip ospf hello-interval
ces Specify the time interval between the hello packets sent on the interface.

Syntax ip ospf hello-interval seconds

To return to the default value, enter no ip ospf hello-interval.

Parameters
seconds Enter a the number of second as the delay between hello packets.
Range: 1 to 65535.
Default: 10 seconds.

Defaults 10 seconds

Command Modes INTERFACE

742 | Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3)

 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage The time interval between hello packets must be the same for routers in a network.
Information

Related
ip ospf dead-interval Set the time interval before a router is declared dead.
Commands

ip ospf message-digest-key
ces Enable OSPF MD5 authentication and send an OSPF message digest key on the interface.

Syntax ip ospf message-digest-key keyid md5 key

To delete a key, use the no ip ospf message-digest-key keyid command.

Parameters
keyid Enter a number as the key ID.
Range: 1 to 255.
key Enter a continuous character string as the password.

Defaults No MD5 authentication is configured.

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage To change to a different key on the interface, enable the new key while the old key is still enabled. The
Information FTOS will send two packets: the first packet authenticated with the old key, and the second packet
authenticated with the new key. This process ensures that the neighbors learn the new key and
communication is not disrupted by keeping the old key enabled.

After the reply is received and the new key is authenticated, you must delete the old key. Dell
Networking recommends keeping only one key per interface.

Note: The MD5 secret is stored as plain text in the configuration file with service password
encryption.

Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) | 743

 ip ospf mtu-ignore
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Disable OSPF MTU mismatch detection upon receipt of database description (DBD) packets.

Syntax ip ospf mtu-ignore

To return to the default, enter no ip ospf mtu-ignore.

Defaults Enabled

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

ip ospf network
ces Set the network type for the interface.

Syntax ip ospf network {broadcast | point-to-point}

To return to the default, enter no ip ospf network.

Parameters
broadcast Enter the keyword broadcast to designate the interface as part of a broadcast
network.
point-to-point Enter the keyword point-to-point to designate the interface as part of a
point-to-point network.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER OSPF

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support for Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

ip ospf priority
ces Set the priority of the interface to determine the Designated Router for the OSPF network.

Syntax ip ospf priority number

To return to the default setting, enter no ip ospf priority.

744 | Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3)

 Parameters
number Enter a number as the priority.
Range: 0 to 255.
The default is 1.

Defaults 1

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage Setting a priority of 0 makes the router ineligible for election as a Designated Router or Backup
Information Designated Router.

Use this command for interfaces connected to multi-access networks, not point-to-point networks.

ip ospf retransmit-interval
ces Set the retransmission time between lost link state advertisements (LSAs) for adjacencies belonging to
the interface.

Syntax ip ospf retransmit-interval seconds

To return to the default values, enter no ip ospf retransmit-interval.

Parameters
seconds Enter the number of seconds as the interval between retransmission.
Range: 1 to 3600.
Default: 5 seconds.
This interval must be greater than the expected round-trip time for a packet to travel
between two routers.

Defaults 5 seconds

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage Set the time interval to a number large enough to prevent unnecessary retransmissions. For example,
Information the interval should be larger for interfaces connected to virtual links.

Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) | 745

 ip ospf transmit-delay
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Set the estimated time elapsed to send a link state update packet on the interface.

Syntax ip ospf transmit-delay seconds

To return to the default value, enter no ip ospf transmit-delay.

Parameters
seconds Enter the number of seconds as the transmission time. This value should be greater than the
transmission and propagation delays for the interface.
Range: 1 to 3600.
Default: 1 second.

Defaults 1 second

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

log-adjacency-changes
ces Set FTOS to send a Syslog message about changes in the OSPF adjacency state.

Syntax log-adjacency-changes
To disable the Syslog messages, enter no log-adjacency-changes.

Defaults Disabled.

Command Mode ROUTER OSPF

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support for Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

maximum-paths
ces Enable the software to forward packets over multiple paths.

Syntax maximum-paths number

To disable packet forwarding over multiple paths, enter no maximum-paths.

746 | Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3)

 Parameters
number Specify the number of paths.
Range: 1 to 16.
Default: 4 paths.

Defaults 4

Command Modes ROUTER OSPF

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support for Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

mib-binding
ces Enable this OSPF process ID to manage the SNMP traps and process SNMP queries.

Syntax mib-binding
To mib-binding on this OSPF process, enter no mib-binding.

Defaults None.

Command Modes ROUTER OSPF

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced to all platforms.

Usage This command is either enabled or disabled. If no OSPF process is identified as the MIB manager, the
Information first OSPF process will be used.

If an OSPF process has been selected, it must be disabled prior to assigning new process ID the MIB
responsibility.

network area
ces Define which interfaces run OSPF and the OSPF area for those interfaces.

Syntax network ip-address mask area area-id

To disable an OSPF area, use the no network ip-address mask area area-id command.

Parameters
ip-address Specify a primary or secondary address in dotted decimal format. The primary address
is required before adding the secondary address.

Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) | 747

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format. (/x)

area-id Enter the OSPF area ID as either a decimal value or in a valid IP address.
Decimal value range: 0 to 65535
IP address format: dotted decimal format A.B.C.D.
Note: If the area ID is smaller than 65535, it will be converted to a decimal value. For
example, if you use an area ID of 0.0.0.1, it will be converted to 1.

Command Modes ROUTER OSPF

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support for Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage To enable OSPF on an interface, the network area command must include, in its range of addresses,
Information the primary IP address of an interface.

Note: An interface can be attached only to a single OSPF area.

If you delete all the network area commands for Area 0, the show ip ospf command output will not list
Area 0.

passive-interface
ces Suppress both receiving and sending routing updates on an interface.

Syntax passive-interface {default | interface}

To enable both the receiving and sending routing, enter the no passive-interface interface
command.
To return all OSPF interfaces (current and future) to active, enter the no passive-interface default
command.

Parameters
default Enter the keyword default to make all OSPF interfaces (current and future) passive.
interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by
the slot/port information.
• For Port Channel groups, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1-255 for TeraScale
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.

Command Modes ROUTER OSPF

748 | Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3)

 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support for Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Modified to include the default keyword.
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage Although the passive interface will neither send nor receive routing updates, the network on that
Information interface will still be included in OSPF updates sent via other interfaces.

The default keyword sets all interfaces as passive. You can then configure individual interfaces, where
adjacencies are desired, using the no passive-interface interface command. The no form of this
command is inserted into the configuration for individual interfaces when the no passive-interface
interface command is issued while passive-interface default is configured.

This command behavior has changed as follows:

passive-interface interface

• The previous no passive-interface interface is removed from the running configuration.

• The ABR status for the router is updated.
• Save passive-interface interface into the running configuration.
passive-interface default
• All present and future OSPF interface are marked as passive.
• Any adjacency are explicitly terminated from all OSPF interfaces.
• All previous passive-interface interface commands are removed from the running
configuration.
• All previous no passive-interface interface commands are removed from the running
configuration.

no passive-interface interface

• Remove the interface from the passive list.

• The ABR status for the router is updated.
• If passive-interface default is specified, then save no passive-interface interface into the
running configuration.
No passive-interface default
• Clear everything and revert to the default behavior.
• All previously marked passive interfaces are removed.
• May update ABR status.

redistribute
ces Redistribute information from another routing protocol throughout the OSPF process.

Syntax redistribute {connected | rip | static} [metric metric-value | metric-type type-value]

[route-map map-name] [tag tag-value]
To disable redistribution, use the no redistribute {connected | isis | rip | static} command.

Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) | 749

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

connected Enter the keyword connected to specify that information from active routes
on interfaces is redistributed.
rip Enter the keyword rip to specify that RIP routing information is redistributed.
static Enter the keyword static to specify that information from static routes is
redistributed.
metric metric-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric followed by a number.
Range: 0 (zero) to 16777214.
metric-type (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric-type followed by one of the
type-value following:
• 1 = OSPF External type 1
• 2 = OSPF External type 2
route-map map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword route-map followed by the name of the
route map.
tag tag-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword tag followed by a number.
Range: 0 to 4294967295

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER OSPF

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support for Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage To redistribute the default route (0.0.0.0/0), configure the default-information originate command.
Information

Related
default-information originate Generate a default route into the OSPF routing domain.
Commands

redistribute bgp
ces Redistribute BGP routing information throughout the OSPF instance.

Syntax redistribute bgp as number [metric metric-value] | [metric-type type-value] | [tag tag-value]
To disable redistribution, use the no redistribute bgp as number [metric metric-value] |
[metric-type type-value] [route-map map-name] [tag tag-value] command.

Parameters
as number Enter the autonomous system number.
Range: 1 to 65535
metric metric-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric followed by the metric-value
number.
Range: 0 to16777214

750 | Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3)

 metric-type type-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric-type followed by one of the
following:
• 1 = for OSPF External type 1
• 2 = for OSPF External type 2
route-map map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword route-map followed by the name of the
route map.
tag tag-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword tag to set the tag for routes redistributed
into OSPF.
Range: 0 to 4294967295

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes ROUTER OSPF

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.3 Introduced Route Map for BGP Redistribution to OSPF
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support for Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Modified to include the default keyword.
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

redistribute isis
ces Redistribute IS-IS routing information throughout the OSPF instance.

Syntax redistribute isis [tag] [level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2] [metric metric-value | metric-type
type-value] [route-map map-name] [tag tag-value]
To disable redistribution, use the no redistribute isis [tag] [level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2] [metric
metric-value | metric-type type-value] [route-map map-name] [tag tag-value] command.

Parameters
tag (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the IS-IS routing process.
level-1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword level-1 to redistribute only IS-IS Level-1
routes.
level-1-2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword level-1-2 to redistribute both IS-IS Level-1
and Level-2 routes.
level-2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword level-2 to redistribute only IS-IS Level-2
routes.
metric metric-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric followed by a number.
Range: 0 (zero) to 4294967295.
metric-type type-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric-type followed by one of the
following:
• 1 = for OSPF External type 1
• 2 = for OSPF External type 2

Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) | 751

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

route-map map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword route-map followed by the name of the
route map.
tag tag-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword tag followed by a number.
Range: 0 to 4294967295

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER OSPF

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support for Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage IS-IS is not supported on S-Series platforms.

Information

router-id
ces Use this command to configure a fixed router ID.

Syntax router-id ip-address

To remove the fixed router ID, use the no router-id ip-address command.

Parameters
ip-address Enter the router ID in the IP address format

Defaults This command has no default behavior or values.

Command Modes ROUTER OSPF

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support for Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 28-2. Command Example: router-id

FTOS(conf)#router ospf 100
FTOS(conf-router_ospf)#router-id 1.1.1.1
Changing router-id will bring down existing OSPF adjacency [y/n]:

FTOS(conf-router_ospf)#show config
!
router ospf 100
router-id 1.1.1.1
FTOS(conf-router_ospf)#no router-id
Changing router-id will bring down existing OSPF adjacency [y/n]:
FTOS#

752 | Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3)

 Usage You can configure an arbitrary value in the IP address format for each router. However, each router ID
Information must be unique. If this command is used on an OSPF router process, which is already active (that is,
has neighbors), a prompt reminding you that changing router-id will bring down the existing OSPF
adjacency. The new router ID is effective at the next reload.

router ospf
ces Enter the ROUTER OSPF mode to configure an OSPF instance.

Syntax router ospf process-id [vrf {vrf name}]

To clear an OSPF instance, enter no router ospf process-id.

Parameters
process-id Enter a number for the OSPF instance.
Range: 1 to 65535.
vrf name (Optional) E-Series Only: Enter the VRF process identifier to tie the OSPF instance to the
VRF. All network commands under this OSPF instance are subsequently tied to the VRF
instance.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.9.1.0 Introduced VRF
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support of Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 28-3. Command Example: router ospf

FTOS(conf)#router ospf 2
FTOS(conf-router_ospf)#

Usage You must have an IP address assigned to an interface to enter the ROUTER OSPF mode and configure
Information OSPF.

Once the OSPF process and the VRF are tied together, the OSPF Process ID cannot be used again in
the system.

show config
ces Display the non-default values in the current OSPF configuration.

Syntax show config

Command Modes ROUTER OSPF

Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) | 753

 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60

History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 28-4. Command Example: show config

FTOS(conf-router_ospf)#show config
!
router ospf 3
passive-interface FastEthernet 0/1
FTOS(conf-router_ospf)#

show ip ospf
ces Display information on the OSPF process configured on the switch.

Syntax show ip ospf process-id [vrf vrf name]

Parameters
process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process.
If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process.
vrf name E-Series Only: Show only the OSPF information tied to the VRF process.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.9.1.0 Introduced VRF
Version 7.9.1.0 Introduced VRF
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support of Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced process-id option, in support of Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage If you delete all the network area commands for Area 0, the show ip ospf command output will not list
Information Area 0.

Example Figure 28-5. Command Example: show ip ospf process-id

FTOS>show ip ospf 1
Routing Process ospf 1 with ID 11.1.2.1
Supports only single TOS (TOS0) routes
It is an autonomous system boundaryrouter
SPF schedule delay 0 secs, Hold time between two SPFs 5 secs
Number of area in this router is 1, normal 1 stub 0 nssa 0
Area BACKBONE (0.0.0.0)
Number of interface in this area is 2
SPF algorithm executed 4 times
Area ranges are
FTOS>

754 | Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3)

 Table 28-2. Command Output Descriptions: show ip ospf process-id

Line Beginning with Description

“Routing Process...” Displays the OSPF process ID and the IP address associated with the
process ID.
“Supports only...” Displays the number of Type of Service (TOS) rouse supported.
“SPF schedule...” Displays the delay and hold time configured for this process ID.
“Number of...” Displays the number and type of areas configured for this process ID.

Related
show ip ospf database Displays information about the OSPF routes configured.
Commands
show ip ospf interface Displays the OSPF interfaces configured.
show ip ospf neighbor Displays the OSPF neighbors configured.
show ip ospf virtual-links Displays the OSPF virtual links configured.

show ip ospf asbr

ces Display all ASBR routers visible to OSPF.

Syntax show ip ospf process-id asbr

Parameters
process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process.
If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support of Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced process-id option, in support of Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and E-Series

Usage Use this command to isolate problems with external routes. In OSPF, external routes are calculated by
Information adding the LSA cost to the cost of reaching the ASBR router. If an external route does not have the
correct cost, use this command to determine if the path to the originating router is correct. The display
output is not sorted in any order.

Note: ASBRs that are not in directly connected areas are also displayed.

Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) | 755

 Example Figure 28-6. Command Example: show ip ospf process-id asbr
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show ip ospf 1asbr

RouterID Flags Cost Nexthop Interface Area

3.3.3.3 -/-/-/ 2 10.0.0.2 Gi 0/1 1
1.1.1.1 E/-/-/ 0 0.0.0.0 - 0 FTOS#

You can determine if an ASBR is in a directly connected area (or not) by the flags. For ASBRs in a
directly connected area, E flags are set. In the figure above, router 1.1.1.1 is in a directly connected
area since the Flag is E/-/-/. For remote ASBRs, the E flag is clear (-/-/-/)

show ip ospf database

ces Display all LSA information. If OSPF is not enabled on the switch, no output is generated.

Syntax show ip ospf process-id database [database-summary]

Parameters
process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process.
If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process.
database-summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords database-summary to the display the
number of LSA types in each area and the total number of LSAs.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support of Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

756 | Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3)

 Example Figure 28-7. Command Example: show ip ospf process-id database
FTOS>show ip ospf 1 database

OSPF Router with ID (11.1.2.1) (Process ID 1)

Router (Area 0.0.0.0)
Link ID ADV Router Age Seq# Checksum Link count
11.1.2.1 11.1.2.1 673 0x80000005 0x707e 2
13.1.1.1 13.1.1.1 676 0x80000097 0x1035 2
192.68.135.2 192.68.135.2 1419 0x80000294 0x9cbd 1

Network (Area 0.0.0.0)

Link ID ADV Router Age Seq# Checksum
10.2.3.2 13.1.1.1 676 0x80000003 0x6592
10.2.4.2 192.68.135.2 908 0x80000055 0x683e

Type-5 AS External
Link ID ADV Router Age Seq# Checksum Tag
0.0.0.0 192.68.135.2 908 0x80000052 0xeb83 100
1.1.1.1 192.68.135.2 908 0x8000002a 0xbd27 0
10.1.1.0 11.1.2.1 718 0x80000002 0x9012 0
10.1.2.0 11.1.2.1 718 0x80000002 0x851c 0
10.2.2.0 11.1.2.1 718 0x80000002 0x7927 0
10.2.3.0 11.1.2.1 718 0x80000002 0x6e31 0
10.2.4.0 13.1.1.1 1184 0x80000068 0x45db 0
11.1.1.0 11.1.2.1 718 0x80000002 0x831e 0
11.1.2.0 11.1.2.1 718 0x80000002 0x7828 0
12.1.2.0 192.68.135.2 1663 0x80000054 0xd8d6 0
13.1.1.0 13.1.1.1 1192 0x8000006b 0x2718 0
13.1.2.0 13.1.1.1 1184 0x8000006b 0x1c22 0
172.16.1.0 13.1.1.1 148 0x8000006d 0x533b 0
FTOS>

Table 28-3. Command Output Description: show ip ospf process-id database

Field Description
Link ID Identifies the router ID.
ADV Router Identifies the advertising router’s ID.
Age Displays the link state age.
Seq# Identifies the link state sequence number. This number enables you to identify old or
duplicate link state advertisements.
Checksum Displays the Fletcher checksum of an LSA’s complete contents.
Link count Displays the number of interfaces for that router.

Related
show ip ospf database asbr-summary Displays only ASBR summary LSA information.
Commands

show ip ospf database asbr-summary

ces Display information about AS Boundary LSAs.

Syntax show ip ospf process-id database asbr-summary [link-state-id] [adv-router ip-address]

Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) | 757

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process.

If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process.
link-state-id (OPTIONAL) Specify LSA ID in dotted decimal format. The LSA ID value depends
on the LSA type, and it can be one of the following:
• the network’s IP address for Type 3 LSAs or Type 5 LSAs
• the router’s OSPF router ID for Type 1 LSAs or Type 4 LSAs
• the default destination (0.0.0.0) for Type 5 LSAs
adv-router (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords adv-router ip-address to display only the LSA
ip-address information about that router.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support of Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 28-8. Command Example: show ip ospf database asbr-summary (Partial)
FTOS#show ip ospf 100 database asbr-summary

OSPF Router with ID (1.1.1.10) (Process ID 100)

Summary Asbr (Area 0.0.0.0)

LS age: 1437
Options: (No TOS-capability, No DC, E)
LS type: Summary Asbr
Link State ID: 103.1.50.1
Advertising Router: 1.1.1.10
LS Seq Number: 0x8000000f
Checksum: 0x8221
Length: 28
Network Mask: /0
TOS: 0 Metric: 2

LS age: 473
Options: (No TOS-capability, No DC, E)
LS type: Summary Asbr
Link State ID: 104.1.50.1
Advertising Router: 1.1.1.10
LS Seq Number: 0x80000010
Checksum: 0x4198
Length: 28
--More--

758 | Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3)

 Table 28-4. Command Output Descriptions: show ip ospf database asbr-summary

Item Description
LS Age Displays the LSA’s age.
Options Displays the optional capabilities available on router. The following options can be
found in this item:
• TOS-capability or No TOS-capability is displayed depending on whether the
router can support Type of Service.
• DC or No DC is displayed depending on whether the originating router can
support OSPF over demand circuits.
• E or No E is displayed on whether the originating router can accept AS
External LSAs.
LS Type Displays the LSA’s type.
Link State ID Displays the Link State ID.
Advertising Router Identifies the advertising router’s ID.
Checksum Displays the Fletcher checksum of the an LSA’s complete contents.
Length Displays the length in bytes of the LSA.
Network Mask Displays the network mask implemented on the area.
TOS Displays the Type of Service (TOS) options. Option 0 is the only option.
Metric Displays the LSA metric.

Related
show ip ospf database Displays OSPF database information.
Commands

show ip ospf database external

ces Display information on the AS external (type 5) LSAs.

Syntax show ip ospf process-id database external [link-state-id] [adv-router ip-address]

Parameters
process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process.
If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process.
link-state-id (OPTIONAL) Specify LSA ID in dotted decimal format. The LSA ID value depends
on the LSA type, and it can be one of the following:
• the network’s IP address for Type 3 LSAs or Type 5 LSAs
• the router’s OSPF router ID for Type 1 LSAs or Type 4 LSAs
• the default destination (0.0.0.0) for Type 5 LSAs
adv-router (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords adv-router ip-address to display only the LSA
ip-address information about that router.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support of Multi-Process OSPF.

Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) | 759

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 28-9. Command Example: show ip ospf database external

FTOS#show ip ospf 1 database external

OSPF Router with ID (20.20.20.5) (Process ID 1)

Type-5 AS External
LS age: 612
Options: (No TOS-capability, No DC, E)
LS type: Type-5 AS External
Link State ID: 12.12.12.2
Advertising Router: 20.31.3.1
LS Seq Number: 0x80000007
Checksum: 0x4cde
Length: 36
Network Mask: /32
Metrics Type: 2
TOS: 0
Metrics: 25
Forward Address: 0.0.0.0
External Route Tag: 43

LS age: 1868
Options: (No TOS-capability, DC)
LS type: Type-5 AS External
Link State ID: 24.216.12.0
Advertising Router: 20.20.20.8
LS Seq Number: 0x80000005
Checksum: 0xa00e
Length: 36
Network Mask: /24
Metrics Type: 2
TOS: 0
Metrics: 1
Forward Address: 0.0.0.0
External Route Tag: 701
FTOS#

Table 28-5. Command Example Descriptions: show ip ospf process-id database

external

Item Description
LS Age Displays the LSA age.
Options Displays the optional capabilities available on router. The following options can
be found in this item:
• TOS-capability or No TOS-capability is displayed depending on whether the
router can support Type of Service.
• DC or No DC is displayed depending on whether the originating router can
support OSPF over demand circuits.
• E or No E is displayed on whether the originating router can accept AS
External LSAs.
LS Type Displays the LSA’s type.
Link State ID Displays the Link State ID.
Advertising Router Identifies the router ID of the LSA’s originating router.
LS Seq Number Identifies the link state sequence number. This number enables you to identify
old or duplicate LSAs.
Checksum Displays the Fletcher checksum of an LSA’s complete contents.

760 | Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3)

 Table 28-5. Command Example Descriptions: show ip ospf process-id database
external

Item Description
Length Displays the length in bytes of the LSA.
Network Mask Displays the network mask implemented on the area.
Metrics Type Displays the external type.
TOS Displays the TOS options. Option 0 is the only option.
Metrics Displays the LSA metric.
Forward Address Identifies the address of the forwarding router. Data traffic is forwarded to this
router. If the forwarding address is 0.0.0.0, data traffic is forwarded to the
originating router.
External Route Tag Displays the 32-bit field attached to each external route. This field is not used by
the OSPF protocol, but can be used for external route management.

Related
show ip ospf database Displays OSPF database information.
Commands

show ip ospf database network

ces Display the network (type 2) LSA information.

Syntax show ip ospf process-id database network [link-state-id] [adv-router ip-address]

Parameters
process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process.
If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process.
link-state-id (OPTIONAL) Specify LSA ID in dotted decimal format. The LSA ID value depends
on the LSA type, and it can be one of the following:
• the network’s IP address for Type 3 LSAs or Type 5 LSAs
• the router’s OSPF router ID for Type 1 LSAs or Type 4 LSAs
• the default destination (0.0.0.0) for Type 5 LSAs
adv-router (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords adv-router ip-address to display only the LSA
ip-address information about that router.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support of Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) | 761

 Example Figure 28-10. Command Example: show ip ospf process-id database network
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show ip ospf 1 data network

OSPF Router with ID (20.20.20.5) (Process ID 1)

Network (Area 0.0.0.0)

LS age: 1372
Options: (No TOS-capability, DC, E)
LS type: Network
Link State ID: 202.10.10.2
Advertising Router: 20.20.20.8
LS Seq Number: 0x80000006
Checksum: 0xa35
Length: 36
Network Mask: /24
Attached Router: 20.20.20.8
Attached Router: 20.20.20.9
Attached Router: 20.20.20.7

Network (Area 0.0.0.1)

LS age: 252
Options: (TOS-capability, No DC, E)
LS type: Network
Link State ID: 192.10.10.2
Advertising Router: 192.10.10.2
LS Seq Number: 0x80000007
Checksum: 0x4309
Length: 36
Network Mask: /24
Attached Router: 192.10.10.2
Attached Router: 20.20.20.1
Attached Router: 20.20.20.5
FTOS#

Table 28-6. Command Example Descriptions: show ip ospf process-id database

network

Item Description
LS Age Displays the LSA age.
Options Displays the optional capabilities available on router. The following options can be
found in this item:
• TOS-capability or No TOS-capability is displayed depending on whether the router
can support Type of Service.
• DC or No DC is displayed depending on whether the originating router can support
OSPF over demand circuits.
• E or No E is displayed on whether the originating router can accept AS External
LSAs.
LS Type Displays the LSA’s type.
Link State ID Displays the Link State ID.
Advertising Router Identifies the router ID of the LSA’s originating router.
Checksum Identifies the link state sequence number. This number enables you to identify old or
duplicate LSAs.
Length Displays the Fletcher checksum of an LSA’s complete contents.
Network Mask Displays the length in bytes of the LSA.
Attached Router Identifies the IP address of routers attached to the network.

Related
show ip ospf database Displays OSPF database information.
Commands

762 | Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3)

show ip ospf database nssa-external
ces Display NSSA-External (type 7) LSA information.

Syntax show ip ospf database nssa-external [link-state-id] [adv-router ip-address]

Parameters
link-state-id (OPTIONAL) Specify LSA ID in dotted decimal format. The LSA ID value depends
on the LSA type, and it can be one of the following:
• the network’s IP address for Type 3 LSAs or Type 5 LSAs
• the router’s OSPF router ID for Type 1 LSAs or Type 4 LSAs
• the default destination (0.0.0.0) for Type 5 LSAs
adv-router (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords adv-router ip-address to display only the LSA
ip-address information about that router.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support of Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Related
show ip ospf database Displays OSPF database information.
Commands

show ip ospf database opaque-area

ces Display the opaque-area (type 10) LSA information.

Syntax show ip ospf process-id database opaque-area [link-state-id] [adv-router ip-address]

Parameters
process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process.
If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process.
link-state-id (OPTIONAL) Specify LSA ID in dotted decimal format. The LSA ID value depends
on the LSA type, and it can be one of the following:
• the network’s IP address for Type 3 LSAs or Type 5 LSAs
• the router’s OSPF router ID for Type 1 LSAs or Type 4 LSAs
• the default destination (0.0.0.0) for Type 5 LSAs
adv-router (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords adv-router ip-address to display only the LSA
ip-address information about that router.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support of Multi-Process OSPF.

Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) | 763

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 28-11. Command Example: show ip ospf process-id database opaque-area
(Partial)
FTOS>show ip ospf 1 database opaque-area

OSPF Router with ID (3.3.3.3) (Process ID 1)

Type-10 Opaque Link Area (Area 0)

LS age: 1133
Options: (No TOS-capability, No DC, E)
LS type: Type-10 Opaque Link Area
Link State ID: 1.0.0.1
Advertising Router: 10.16.1.160
LS Seq Number: 0x80000416
Checksum: 0x376
Length: 28
Opaque Type: 1
Opaque ID: 1
Unable to display opaque data

LS age: 833
Options: (No TOS-capability, No DC, E)
LS type: Type-10 Opaque Link Area
Link State ID: 1.0.0.2
Advertising Router: 10.16.1.160
LS Seq Number: 0x80000002
Checksum: 0x19c2
--More--

Table 28-7. Command Example Descriptions: show ip ospf process-id database

opaque-area

Item Description
LS Age Displays the LSA’s age.
Options Displays the optional capabilities available on router. The following
options can be found in this item:
• TOS-capability or No TOS-capability is displayed depending on
whether the router can support Type of Service.
• DC or No DC is displayed depending on whether the originating router
can support OSPF over demand circuits.
• E or No E is displayed on whether the originating router can accept AS
External LSAs.
LS Type Displays the LSA’s type.
Link State ID Displays the Link State ID.
Advertising Router Identifies the advertising router’s ID.
Checksum Displays the Fletcher checksum of the an LSA’s complete contents.
Length Displays the length in bytes of the LSA.
Opaque Type Displays the Opaque type field (the first 8 bits of the Link State ID).
Opaque ID Displays the Opaque type-specific ID (the remaining 24 bits of the Link
State ID).

Related
show ip ospf database Displays OSPF database information.
Commands

764 | Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3)

show ip ospf database opaque-as
ces Display the opaque-as (type 11) LSA information.

Syntax show ip ospf process-id database opaque-as [link-state-id] [adv-router ip-address]

Parameters
process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process.
If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process.
link-state-id (OPTIONAL) Specify LSA ID in dotted decimal format. The LSA ID value depends
on the LSA type, and it can be one of the following:
• the network’s IP address for Type 3 LSAs or Type 5 LSAs
• the router’s OSPF router ID for Type 1 LSAs or Type 4 LSAs
• the default destination (0.0.0.0) for Type 5 LSAs
adv-router (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords adv-router ip-address to display only the LSA
ip-address information about that router.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support of Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Related
show ip ospf database Displays OSPF database information.
Commands

show ip ospf database opaque-link

ces Display the opaque-link (type 9) LSA information.

Syntax show ip ospf process-id database opaque-link [link-state-id] [adv-router ip-address]

Parameters
process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process.
If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process.
link-state-id (OPTIONAL) Specify LSA ID in dotted decimal format. The LSA ID value depends
on the LSA type, and it can be one of the following:
• the network’s IP address for Type 3 LSAs or Type 5 LSAs
• the router’s OSPF router ID for Type 1 LSAs or Type 4 LSAs
• the default destination (0.0.0.0) for Type 5 LSAs
adv-router (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword adv-router followed by the IP address of an
ip-address Advertising Router to display only the LSA information about that router.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) | 765

 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60

History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support of Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Related
show ip ospf database Displays OSPF database information.
Commands

show ip ospf database router

ces Display the router (type 1) LSA information.

Syntax show ip ospf process-id database router [link-state-id] [adv-router ip-address]

Parameters
process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process.
If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process.
link-state-id (OPTIONAL) Specify LSA ID in dotted decimal format. The LSA ID value depends
on the LSA type, and it can be one of the following:
• the network’s IP address for Type 3 LSAs or Type 5 LSAs
• the router’s OSPF router ID for Type 1 LSAs or Type 4 LSAs
• the default destination (0.0.0.0) for Type 5 LSAs
adv-router (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords adv-router ip-address to display only the LSA
ip-address information about that router.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support of Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

766 | Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3)

Example Figure 28-12. Command Example: show ip ospf process-id database router (Partial)
FTOS#show ip ospf 100 database router

OSPF Router with ID (1.1.1.10) (Process ID 100)

Router (Area 0)

LS age: 967
Options: (No TOS-capability, No DC, E)
LS type: Router
Link State ID: 1.1.1.10
Advertising Router: 1.1.1.10
LS Seq Number: 0x8000012f
Checksum: 0x3357
Length: 144
AS Boundary Router
Area Border Router
Number of Links: 10

Link connected to: a Transit Network

(Link ID) Designated Router address: 192.68.129.1
(Link Data) Router Interface address: 192.68.129.1
Number of TOS metric: 0
TOS 0 Metric: 1

Link connected to: a Transit Network

(Link ID) Designated Router address: 192.68.130.1
(Link Data) Router Interface address: 192.68.130.1
Number of TOS metric: 0
TOS 0 Metric: 1

Link connected to: a Transit Network

(Link ID) Designated Router address: 192.68.142.2
(Link Data) Router Interface address: 192.68.142.2
Number of TOS metric: 0
TOS 0 Metric: 1

Link connected to: a Transit Network

(Link ID) Designated Router address: 192.68.141.2
(Link Data) Router Interface address: 192.68.141.2
Number of TOS metric: 0
TOS 0 Metric: 1

Link connected to: a Transit Network

(Link ID) Designated Router address: 192.68.140.2
(Link Data) Router Interface address: 192.68.140.2
Number of TOS metric: 0
TOS 0 Metric: 1

Link connected to: a Stub Network

(Link ID) Network/subnet number: 11.1.5.0
--More--

Table 28-8. Command Example Descriptions: show ip ospf process-id database router

Item Description
LS Age Displays the LSA age.
Options Displays the optional capabilities available on router. The following options can
be found in this item:
• TOS-capability or No TOS-capability is displayed depending on whether the
router can support Type of Service.
• DC or No DC is displayed depending on whether the originating router can
support OSPF over demand circuits.
• E or No E is displayed on whether the originating router can accept AS
External LSAs.
LS Type Displays the LSA type.
Link State ID Displays the Link State ID.
Advertising Router Identifies the router ID of the LSA’s originating router.

Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) | 767

 Table 28-8. Command Example Descriptions: show ip ospf process-id database router
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Item Description
LS Seq Number Displays the link state sequence number. This number detects duplicate or old
LSAs.
Checksum Displays the Fletcher checksum of an LSA’s complete contents.
Length Displays the length in bytes of the LSA.
Number of Links Displays the number of active links to the type of router (Area Border Router or
AS Boundary Router) listed in the previous line.
Link connected to: Identifies the type of network to which the router is connected.
(Link ID) Identifies the link type and address.
(Link Data) Identifies the router interface address.
Number of TOS Metric Lists the number of TOS metrics.
TOS 0 Metric Lists the number of TOS 0 metrics.

Related
show ip ospf database Displays OSPF database information.
Commands

show ip ospf database summary

ces Display the network summary (type 3) LSA routing information.

Syntax show ip ospf process-id database summary [link-state-id] [adv-router ip-address]

Parameters
process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process.
If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process.
link-state-id (OPTIONAL) Specify LSA ID in dotted decimal format. The LSA ID value depends
on the LSA type, and it can be one of the following:
• the network’s IP address for Type 3 LSAs or Type 5 LSAs
• the router’s OSPF router ID for Type 1 LSAs or Type 4 LSAs
• the default destination (0.0.0.0) for Type 5 LSAs
adv-router (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords adv-router ip-address to display only the LSA
ip-address information about that router.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support of Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

768 | Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3)

Example Figure 28-13. Command Example: show ip ospf process-id database summary
FTOS#show ip ospf 100 database summary

OSPF Router with ID (1.1.1.10) (Process ID 100)

Summary Network (Area 0.0.0.0)

LS age: 1551
Options: (No TOS-capability, DC, E)
LS type: Summary Network
Link State ID: 192.68.16.0
Advertising Router: 192.168.17.1
LS Seq Number: 0x80000054
Checksum: 0xb5a2
Length: 28
Network Mask: /24
TOS: 0 Metric: 1

LS age: 9
Options: (No TOS-capability, No DC, E)
LS type: Summary Network
Link State ID: 192.68.32.0
Advertising Router: 1.1.1.10
LS Seq Number: 0x80000016
Checksum: 0x987c
Length: 28
Network Mask: /24
TOS: 0 Metric: 1

LS age: 7
Options: (No TOS-capability, No DC, E)
LS type: Summary Network
Link State ID: 192.68.33.0
Advertising Router: 1.1.1.10
LS Seq Number: 0x80000016
Checksum: 0x1241
Length: 28
Network Mask: /26
TOS: 0 Metric: 1

FTOS#

Table 28-9. Command Example Descriptions: show ip ospf process-id database

summary

Items Description
LS Age Displays the LSA age.
Options Displays the optional capabilities available on router. The following options can be
found in this item:
• TOS-capability or No TOS-capability is displayed depending on whether the router
can support Type of Service.
• DC or No DC is displayed depending on whether the originating router can support
OSPF over demand circuits.
• E or No E is displayed on whether the originating router can accept AS External
LSAs.
LS Type Displays the LSA’s type.
Link State ID Displays the Link State ID.
Advertising Router Identifies the router ID of the LSA’s originating router.
LS Seq Number Identifies the link state sequence number. This number enables you to identify old or
duplicate LSAs.
Checksum Displays the Fletcher checksum of an LSA’s complete contents.
Length Displays the length in bytes of the LSA.

Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) | 769

 Table 28-9. Command Example Descriptions: show ip ospf process-id database
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

summary

Items Description
Network Mask Displays the network mask implemented on the area.
TOS Displays the TOS options. Option 0 is the only option.
Metric Displays the LSA metrics.

Related
show ip ospf database Displays OSPF database information.
Commands

show ip ospf interface

ces Display the OSPF interfaces configured. If OSPF is not enabled on the switch, no output is generated.

Syntax show ip ospf process-id interface [interface]

Parameters
process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process.
If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process.
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by
the slot/port information.
• For the null interface, enter the keyword null followed by zero (0).
• For loopback interfaces, enter the keyword loopback followed by a number from 0
to 16383.
• For Port Channel groups, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1-255 for TeraScale
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID. The range is from 1
to 4094.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced process-id option, in support of Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

770 | Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3)

 Example Figure 28-14. Command Example: show ip ospf process-id interface

FTOS>show ip ospf int

GigabitEthernet 13/17 is up, line protocol is up

Internet Address 192.168.1.2/30, Area 0.0.0.1
Process ID 1, Router ID 192.168.253.2, Network Type BROADCAST, Cost: 1
Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State DR, Priority 1
Designated Router (ID) 192.168.253.2, Interface address 192.168.1.2
Backup Designated Router (ID) 192.168.253.1, Interface address 192.168.1.1
Timer intervals configured, Hello 10, Dead 40, Wait 40, Retransmit 5
Hello due in 00:00:02
Neighbor Count is 1, Adjacent neighbor count is 1
Adjacent with neighbor 192.168.253.1 (Backup Designated Router)

GigabitEthernet 13/23 is up, line protocol is up

Internet Address 192.168.0.1/24, Area 0.0.0.1
Process ID 1, Router ID 192.168.253.2, Network Type BROADCAST, Cost: 1
Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State DROTHER, Priority 1
Designated Router (ID) 192.168.253.5, Interface address 192.168.0.4
Backup Designated Router (ID) 192.168.253.3, Interface address 192.168.0.2
Timer intervals configured, Hello 10, Dead 40, Wait 40, Retransmit 5
Hello due in 00:00:08
Neighbor Count is 3, Adjacent neighbor count is 2
Adjacent with neighbor 192.168.253.5 (Designated Router)
Adjacent with neighbor 192.168.253.3 (Backup Designated Router)

Loopback 0 is up, line protocol is up

Internet Address 192.168.253.2/32, Area 0.0.0.1
Process ID 1, Router ID 192.168.253.2, Network Type LOOPBACK, Cost: 1
Loopback interface is treated as a stub Host.
FTOS>

Table 28-10. Command Example Descriptions: show ip ospf process-id interface

Line beginning with Description

GigabitEthernet... This line identifies the interface type slot/port and the status of the OSPF protocol
on that interface.
Internet Address... This line displays the IP address, network mask and area assigned to this
interface.
Process ID... This line displays the OSPF Process ID, Router ID, Network type and cost metric
for this interface.
Transmit Delay... This line displays the interface’s settings for Transmit Delay, State, and Priority.
In the State setting, BDR is Backup Designated Router.
Designated Router... This line displays the ID of the Designated Router and its interface address.
Backup Designated... This line displays the ID of the Backup Designated Router and its interface
address.
Timer intervals... This line displays the interface’s timer settings for Hello interval, Dead interval,
Transmit Delay (Wait), and Retransmit Interval.
Hello due... This line displays the amount time till the next Hello packet is sent out this
interface.
Neighbor Count... This line displays the number of neighbors and adjacent neighbors. Listed below
this line are the details about each adjacent neighbor.

show ip ospf neighbor

ces Display the OSPF neighbors configured.

Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) | 771

 Syntax show ip ospf process-id neighbor
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Parameters
process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process.
If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support of Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 28-15. Command Example: show ip ospf process-id neighbor

FTOS#show ip ospf 34 neighbor

Neighbor ID Pri State Dead Time Address Interface Area

20.20.20.7 1 FULL/DR 00:00:32 182.10.10.3 Gi 0/0 0.0.0.2
192.10.10.2 1 FULL/DR 00:00:37 192.10.10.2 Gi 0/1 0.0.0.1
20.20.20.1 1 FULL/DROTHER00:00:36 192.10.10.4 Gi 0/1 0.0.0.1
FTOS#

Table 28-11. Command Example Descriptions: show ip ospf process-id neighbor

Row Heading Description

Neighbor ID Displays the neighbor router ID.
Pri Displays the priority assigned neighbor.
State Displays the OSPF state of the neighbor.
Dead Time Displays the expected time until FTOS declares the neighbor dead.
Address Displays the IP address of the neighbor.
Interface Displays the interface type slot/port information.
Area Displays the neighbor’s area (process ID).

show ip ospf routes

ces Display routes as calculated by OSPF and stored in OSPF RIB.

Syntax show ip ospf process-id routes

Parameters
process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process.
If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC

772 | Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3)

 EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support of Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and E-Series

Usage This command is useful in isolating routing problems between OSPF and RTM. For example, if a route
Information is missing from the RTM/FIB but is visible from the display output of this command, then likely the
problem is with downloading the route to the RTM.

This command has the following limitations:

• The display output is sorted by prefixes; intra-area ECMP routes are not displayed together.
• For Type 2 external routes, type1 cost is not displayed.

Example Figure 28-16. Command Example: show ip ospf process-id routes

FTOS#show ip ospf 100 route

Prefix Cost Nexthop Interface Area Type

1.1.1.1 1 0.0.0.0 Lo 0 0 Intra-Area
3.3.3.3 2 13.0.0.3 Gi 0/47 1 Intra-Area
13.0.0.0 1 0.0.0.0 Gi 0/47 0 Intra-Area
150.150.150.0 2 13.0.0.3 Gi 0/47 - External
172.30.1.0 2 13.0.0.3 Gi 0/47 1 Intra-Area
FTOS#

show ip ospf statistics

ces Display OSPF statistics.

Syntax show ip ospf process-id statistics global | [interface name {neighbor router-id}]

Parameters
process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process.
If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process.
global Enter the keyword global to display the packet counts received on all running
OSPF interfaces and packet counts received and transmitted by all OSPF
neighbors.

Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) | 773

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

interface name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interface followed by one of the following
interface keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For Port Channel groups, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a
number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1-255 for TeraScale
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.
neighbor router-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword neighbor followed by the neighbor’s
router-id in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.).

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support of Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 28-17. Command Example: show ip ospf process-id statistics global
FTOS#show ip ospf 1 statistics global

OSPF Packet Count

Total Error Hello DDiscr LSReq LSUpd LSAck
RX 10 0 8 2 0 0 0
TX 10 0 10 0 0 0 0
OSPF Global Queue Length
TxQ-Len RxQ-Len Tx-Mark Rx-Mark
Hello-Q 0 0 0 2
LSR-Q 0 0 0 0
Other-Q 0 0 0 0

Error packets (Only for RX)

Intf-Down 0 Non-Dr 0 Self-Org 0

Wrong-Len 0 Invld-Nbr 0 Nbr-State 0
Auth-Err 0 MD5-Err 0 Chksum 0
Version 0 AreaMis 0 Conf-Issues 0
No-Buffer 0 Seq-No 0 Socket 0
Q-OverFlow 0 Unkown-Pkt 0

Error packets (Only for TX)

Socket Errors 0
FTOS#

774 | Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3)

Table 28-12. Command Example Descriptions: show ip ospf statistics process-id global

Row Heading Description

Total Displays the total number of packets received/transmitted by the OSPF process
Error Displays the error count while receiving and transmitting packets by the OSPF process
Hello Number of OSPF Hello packets
DDiscr Number of database description packets
LSReq Number of link state request packets
LSUpd Number of link state update packets
LSAck Number of link state acknowledgement packets
TxQ-Len The transmission queue length
RxQ-Len The reception queue length
Tx-Mark The highest number mark in the transmission queue
Rx-Mark The highest number mark in the reception queue
Hello-Q The queue, for transmission or reception, for the hello packets
LSR-Q The queue, for transmission or reception, for the link state request packets.
Other-Q The queue, for transmission or reception, for the link state acknowledgement, database
description, and update packets.

Table 28-13. Error Definitions: show ip ospf statistics process-id global

Error Type Description

Intf_Down Received packets on an interface that is either down or OSPF is not enabled.
Non-Dr Received packets with a destination address of ALL_DRS even though SELF is not a
designated router
Self-Org Receive the self originated packet
Wrong_Len The received packet length is different to what was indicated in the OSPF header
Invld-Nbr LSA, LSR, LSU, and DDB are received from a peer which is not a neighbor peer
Nbr-State LSA, LSR, and LSU are received from a neighbor with stats less than the loading state
Auth-Error Simple authentication error
MD5-Error MD5 error
Cksum-Err Checksum Error
Version Version mismatch
AreaMismatch Area mismatch
Conf-Issue The received hello packet has a different hello or dead interval than the configuration
No-Buffer Buffer allocation failure
Seq-no A sequence no errors occurred during the database exchange process
Socket Socket Read/Write operation error
Q-overflow Packet(s) dropped due to queue overflow
Unknown-Pkt Received packet is not an OSPF packet

Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) | 775

 The show ip ospf process-id statistics command displays the error packet count received on each
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

interface as:
• The hello-timer remaining value for each interface
• The wait-timer remaining value for each interface
• The grace-timer remaining value for each interface
• The packet count received and transmitted for each neighbor
• Dead timer remaining value for each neighbor
• Transmit timer remaining value for each neighbor
• The LSU Q length and its highest mark for each neighbor
• The LSR Q length and its highest mark for each neighbor

Example Figure 28-18. Command Example: show ip ospf process-id statistics

FTOS#show ip ospf 100 statistics

Interface GigabitEthernet 0/8

Hello-Timer 9, Wait-Timer 0, Grace-Timer 0

Error packets (Only for RX)

Intf-Down 0 Non-Dr 0 Self-Org 0

Wrong-Len 0 Invld-Nbr 0 Nbr-State 0
Auth-Error 0 MD5-Error 0 Cksum-Err 0
Version 0 AreaMisMatch 0 Conf-Issue 0
SeqNo-Err 0 Unkown-Pkt 0

Neighbor ID 9.1.1.2

Hello DDiscr LSReq LSUpd LSAck

RX 59 3 1 1 1
TX 62 2 1 0 0

Dead-Timer 37, Transmit-Timer 0

LSU-Q-Len 0, LSU-Q-Wmark 0
LSR-Q-Len 0, LSR-Q-Wmark 1

Related
clear ip ospf statistics Clear the packet statistics in all interfaces and neighbors
Commands

show ip ospf topology

ces Display routers in directly connected areas.

Syntax show ip ospf process-id topology

Parameters
process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process.
If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support of Multi-Process OSPF.

776 | Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3)

 Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and E-Series

Usage This command can be used to isolate problems with inter-area and external routes. In OSPF inter-area
Information and external routes are calculated by adding LSA cost to the cost of reaching the router. If an inter-area
or external route is not of correct cost, the display can determine if the path to the originating router is
correct or not.

Example Figure 28-19. Command Example: show ip ospf process-id topology

FTOS#show ip ospf 1 topology

Router ID Flags Cost Nexthop Interface Area

3.3.3.3 E/B/-/ 1 20.0.0.3 Gi 13/1 0
1.1.1.1 E/-/-/ 1 10.0.0.1 Gi 7/1 1
FTOS#

show ip ospf virtual-links

ces Display the OSPF virtual links configured and is useful for debugging OSPF routing operations. If no
OSPF virtual-links are enabled on the switch, no output is generated.

Syntax show ip ospf process-id virtual-links

Parameters
process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process.
If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support of Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 28-20. Command Example: show ip ospf process-id virtual-links

FTOS#show ip ospf 1 virt

Virtual Link to router 192.168.253.5 is up

Run as demand circuit
Transit area 0.0.0.1, via interface GigabitEthernet 13/16, Cost of using 2
Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State POINT_TO_POINT,
Timer intervals configured, Hello 10, Dead 40, Wait 40, Retransmit 5
Hello due in 00:00:02
FTOS#

Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) | 777

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Table 28-14. Command Example Descriptions: show ip ospf process-id virtual-links

Items Description
“Virtual Link...” This line specifies the OSPF neighbor to which the virtual link was created
and the link’s status.
“Run as...” This line states the nature of the virtual link.
“Transit area...” This line identifies the area through which the virtual link was created, the
interface used, and the cost assigned to that link.
“Transmit Delay...” This line displays the transmit delay assigned to the link and the State of
the OSPF neighbor.
“Timer intervals...” This line displays the timer values assigned to the virtual link. The timers
are Hello is hello-interval, Dead is dead-interval, Wait is transmit-delay,
and Retransmit is retransmit-interval.
“Hello due...” This line displays the amount of time until the next Hello packet is
expected from the neighbor router.
“Adjacency State...” This line displays the adjacency state between neighbors.

summary-address
ces Set the OSPF ASBR to advertise one external route.

Syntax summary-address ip-address mask [not-advertise] [tag tag-value]

To disable summary address, use the no summary-address ip-address mask command.

Parameters
ip-address Specify the IP address in dotted decimal format of the address to be summarized.
mask Specify the mask in dotted decimal format of the address to be summarized.
not-advertise (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword not-advertise to suppress that match the
network prefix/mask pair.
tag tag-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword tag followed by a value to match on routes
redistributed through a route map.
Range: 0 to 4294967295

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER OSPF

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support of Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage The command area range summarizes routes for the different areas.
Information

778 | Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3)

 With "not-advertise" parameter configured, this command can be used to filter out some external
routes. For example, you want to redistribute static routes to OSPF, but you don't want OSPF to
advertise routes with prefix 1.1.0.0. Then you can configure summary-address 1.1.0.0
255.255.0.0 not-advertise to filter out all the routes fall in range 1.1.0.0/16.

Related
area range Summarizes routes within an area.
Commands

timers spf
ces Set the time interval between when the switch receives a topology change and starts a shortest path first
(SPF) calculation.

Syntax timers spf delay holdtime

To return to the default, enter no timers spf.

Parameters
delay Enter a number as the delay.
Range: 0 to 4294967295.
Default: 5 seconds
holdtime Enter a number as the hold time.
Range: 0 to 4294967295.
Default: 10 seconds.

Defaults delay = 5 seconds; holdtime = 10 seconds

Command Modes ROUTER OSPF

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support of Multi-Process OSPF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage Setting the delay and holdtime parameters to a low number enables the switch to switch to an alternate
Information path quickly but requires more CPU usage.

Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) | 779

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

780 | Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3)

 29
PIM-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM)

Overview
The platforms on which a command is supported is indicated by the character — e for the E-Series,
c for the C-Series, and s for the S-Series — that appears below each command heading.

This chapter contains the following sections:

• IPv4 PIM-Sparse Mode Commands

IPv4 PIM-Sparse Mode Commands

The IPv4 PIM-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM) commands are:
• clear ip pim rp-mapping
• clear ip pim tib
• debug ip pim
• ip pim bsr-border
• ip pim bsr-candidate
• ip pim dr-priority
• ip pim graceful-restart
• ip pim join-filter
• ip pim neighbor-filter
• ip pim query-interval
• ip pim register-filter
• ip pim rp-address
• ip pim rp-candidate
• ip pim sparse-mode
• ip pim sparse-mode sg-expiry-timer
• ip pim spt-threshold
• show ip pim bsr-router
• show ip pim interface
• show ip pim neighbor
• show ip pim rp
• show ip pim tib

PIM-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM) | 781

 clear ip pim rp-mapping
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Used by the bootstrap router (BSR) to remove all or particular Rendezvous Point (RP) Advertisement.

Syntax clear ip pim rp-mapping rp-address

Parameters
rp-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the RP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D)

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

clear ip pim tib

ces Clear PIM tree information from the PIM database.

Syntax clear ip pim tib [group]

Parameters
group (OPTIONAL) Enter the multicast group address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D)

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

debug ip pim
ces View IP PIM debugging messages.

Syntax debug ip pim [bsr | events | group | packet [in | out] | register | state | timer [assert | hello |
joinprune | register]]
To disable PIM debugging, enter no debug ip pim, or enter undebug all to disable all debugging.

Parameters
bsr (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bsr to view PIM Candidate RP/BSR
activities.
events (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword events to view PIM events.
group (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword group to view PIM messages for a specific
group.
packet [in | out] (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword packet to view PIM packets. Enter one of the
optional parameters
• in: to view incoming packets
• out: to view outgoing packets.

782 | PIM-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM)

 register (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword register to view PIM register address in
dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D).
state (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword state to view PIM state changes.
timer [assert | hello | (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword timer to view PIM timers. Enter one of the
joinprune | register] optional parameters:
• assert: to view the assertion timer.
• hello: to view the PIM neighbor keepalive timer.
• joinprune: to view the expiry timer (join/prune timer)
• register: to view the register suppression timer.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

ip pim bsr-border
ces Define the border of PIM domain by filtering inbound and outbound PIM-BSR messages per interface.

Syntax ip pim bsr-border

To return to the default value, enter no ip pim bsr-border.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series on port-channels and S-Series.

Usage This command is applied to the subsequent PIM-BSR. Existing BSR advertisements are cleaned up by
Information time out. Candidate RP advertisements can be cleaned using the clear ip pim rp-mapping command.

ip pim bsr-candidate
ces Configure the PIM router to join the Bootstrap election process.

Syntax ip pim bsr-candidate interface [hash-mask-length] [priority]

To return to the default value, enter no ip pim bsr-candidate.

PIM-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM) | 783

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:

• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback followed by a number
from 0 to 16383.
• For Port Channel interface types, enter the keyword port-channel followed
by a number from 1 to 255.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.
hash-mask-length (OPTIONAL) Enter the hash mask length.
Range: zero (0) to 32
Default: 30
priority (OPTIONAL) Enter the priority used in Bootstrap election process.
Range: zero (0) to 255
Default: zero (0)

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 6.1.1.0 Added support for VLAN interface

ip pim dr-priority
ces Change the Designated Router (DR) priority for the interface.

Syntax ip pim dr-priority priority-value

To remove the DR priority value assigned, use the no ip pim dr-priority command.

Parameters
priority-value Enter a number. Preference is given to larger/higher number.
Range: 0 to 4294967294
Default: 1

Defaults 1

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series on port-channels and S-Series

784 | PIM-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM)

 Usage The router with the largest value assigned to an interface becomes the Designated Router. If two
Information interfaces contain the same DR priority value, the interface with the largest interface IP address
becomes the Designated Router.

ip pim graceful-restart
e This feature permits configuration of Non-stop Forwarding (NFS or graceful restart) capability of a PIM
router to its neighbors.

Syntax [ipv6] ip pim graceful-restart {helper-only | nsf [restart-time | stale-entry-time]}

Parameters
ipv6 Enter this keyword to enable graceful-restart for IPv6 Multicast Routes.
helper-only Enter the keyword helper-only to configure as a receiver (helper) only by
preserving the PIM status of a graceful restart PIM neighboring router.
nsf Enter the keyword nfs to configure the Non-stop Forwarding capability.
restart-time (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword restart-time followed by the number of
seconds estimated for the PIM speaker to restart.
Range: 30 to 300 seconds
Default: 180 seconds
stale-entry-time (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword stale-entry-time followed by the number of
seconds for which entries are kept alive after restart.
Range: 30 to 300 seconds
Default: 60 seconds

Defaults as above

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale. Added the ipv6 option for E-Series.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Usage When an NSF-capable router comes up, it announces the graceful restart capability and restart duration
Information as a Hello option. The receiving router notes the Hello option. Routers not NSF capable will discard
the unknown Hello option and adjacency is not affected.

When an NSF-capable router goes down, neighboring PIM speaker preserves the states and continues
the forwarding of multicast traffic while the neighbor router restarts.

ip pim join-filter
ces Permit or deny PIM Join/Prune messages on an interface using an extended IP access list. This
command prevents the PIM SM router from creating state based on multicast source and/or group.

Syntax ip pim join-filter ext-access-list {in | out}

Remove the access list using the command no ip pim join-filter ext-access-list {in | out}

PIM-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM) | 785

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ext-access-list Enter the name of an extended access list.

in Enter this keyword to apply the access list to inbound traffic.
out Enter this keyword to apply the access list to outbound traffic.

Defaults None

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series on port-channels and S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on E-Series.

Example Figure 29-1. Command Example: ip pim join-filter

FTOS(conf)# ip access-list extended iptv-channels
FTOS(config-ext-nacl)# permit ip 10.1.2.3/24 225.1.1.0/24
FTOS(config-ext-nacl)# permit ip any 232.1.1.0/24
FTOS(config-ext-nacl)# permit ip 100.1.1.0/16 any
FTOS(config-if-gi-1/1)# ip pim join-filter iptv-channels in
FTOS(config-if-gi-1/1)# ip pim join-filter iptv-channels out

Related
ip access-list Configure an access list based on IP addresses or protocols.
Commands
extended

ip pim neighbor-filter
ces Configure this feature to prevent a router from participating in protocol independent Multicast (PIM).

Syntax ip pim neighbor-filter {access-list}

To remove the restriction, use the no ip pim neighbor-filter {access-list} command.

Parameters
access-list Enter the name of a standard access list. Maximum 16 characters.

Defaults Defaults.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series

Usage Do not enter this command before creating the access-list.

Information

786 | PIM-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM)

ip pim query-interval
ces Change the frequency of PIM Router-Query messages.

Syntax ip pim query-interval seconds

To return to the default value, enter no ip pim query-interval seconds command.

Parameters
seconds Enter a number as the number of seconds between router query messages.
Default: 30 seconds
Range: 0 to 65535

Defaults 30 seconds

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series on port-channels and S-Series

ip pim register-filter
ces Use this feature to prevent a PIM source DR from sending register packets to an RP for the specified
multicast source and group.

Syntax ip pim register-filter access-list

To return to the default, use the no ip pim register-filter access-list command.

Parameters
access-list Enter the name of an extended access list. Maximum 16 characters.

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced

Usage The access name is an extended IP access list that denies PIM register packets to RP at the source DR
Information based on the multicast and group addresses. Do not enter this command before creating the access-list.

ip pim rp-address
ces Configure a static PIM Rendezvous Point (RP) address for a group or access-list.

Syntax ip pim rp-address address {group-address group-address mask} override

To remove an RP address, use the no ip pim rp-address address {group-address group-address
mask} override command.

PIM-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM) | 787

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

address Enter the RP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D).

group-address Enter the keyword group-address followed by a group-address mask, in
group-address mask dotted decimal format (/xx), to assign that group address to the RP.
override Enter the keyword override to override the BSR updates with static RP.
The override will take effect immediately during enable/disable.
Note: This option is applicable to multicast group range.

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage This address is used by first-hop routers to send Register packets on behalf of source multicast hosts.
Information The RP addresses are stored in the order in which they are entered. RP addresses learned via BSR take
priority over static RP addresses. Without the override option, RPs advertised by the BSR updates take
precedence over the statically configured RPs.

ip pim rp-candidate
ces Configure a PIM router to send out a Candidate-RP-Advertisement message to the Bootstrap (BS)
router or define group prefixes that are defined with the RP address to PIM BSR.

Syntax ip pim rp-candidate {interface [priority]

To return to the default value, enter no ip pim rp-candidate {interface [priority] command.

Parameters
interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback followed by a
number from 0 to 16383.
• For Port Channel interface types, enter the keyword port-channel
followed by a number from 1 to 255.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/
port information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to
4094.
priority (OPTIONAL) Enter the priority used in Bootstrap election process.
Range: zero (0) to 255
Default: 192

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

788 | PIM-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM)

 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage Priority is stored at BSR router when receiving a Candidate-RP-Advertisement.

Information

ip pim sparse-mode
ces Enable PIM sparse mode and IGMP on the interface.

Syntax ip pim sparse-mode

To disable PIM sparse mode and IGMP, enter no ip pim sparse-mode.

Defaults Disabled.

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series on port-channels and S-Series

Usage C-Series supports a maximum of 31 PIM interfaces.

Information
The interface must be enabled (no shutdown command) and not have the switchport command
configured. Multicast must also be enabled globally (using the ip multicast-lag-hashing command). PIM
is supported on the port-channel interface.

Related
ip multicast-lag-hashing Enable multicast globally.
Commands

ip pim sparse-mode sg-expiry-timer

ces Enable expiry timers globally for all sources, or for a specific set of (S,G) pairs defined by an access
list.

Syntax ip pim sparse-mode sg-expiry-timer seconds [access-list name]

To disable configured timers and return to default mode, enter no ip pim sparse-mode
sg-expiry-timer.

Parameters
seconds Enter the number of seconds the S, G entries will be retained.
Range 211-86400
access-list (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of a previously configured Extended ACL to enable the
name expiry time to specified S,G entries

Defaults Disabled. The default expiry timer (with no times configured) is 210 sec.

PIM-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM) | 789

 Command Modes CONFIGURATION
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced
Version 7.7.1.1 Introduced

Usage This command configures an expiration timer for all S.G entries, unless they are assigned to an
Information Extended ACL.

ip pim spt-threshold
ce Configure PIM router to switch to shortest path tree when the traffic reaches the specified threshold
value.

Syntax ip pim spt-threshold value | infinity

To return to the default value, enter no ip pim spt-threshold.

Parameters
value (OPTIONAL) Enter the traffic value in kilobits per second.
Default: 10 packets per second. A value of zero (0) will cause a switchover on the first
packet.
infinity (OPTIONAL) To never switch to the source-tree, enter the keyword infinity.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series on port-channels and S-Series

Usage This is applicable to last hop routers on the shared tree towards the Rendezvous Point (RP).
Information

show ip pim bsr-router

ces View information on the Bootstrap router.

Syntax show ip pim bsr-router

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

790 | PIM-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM)

 Example Figure 29-2. Command Example: show ip pim bsr-router
E600-7-rpm0#show ip pim bsr-router
PIMv2 Bootstrap information
This system is the Bootstrap Router (v2)
BSR address: 7.7.7.7 (?)
Uptime: 16:59:06, BSR Priority: 0, Hash mask length: 30
Next bootstrap message in 00:00:08

This system is a candidate BSR

Candidate BSR address: 7.7.7.7, priority: 0, hash mask length: 30

show ip pim interface

ces View information on the interfaces with IP PIM enabled.

Syntax show ip pim interface

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Example Figure 29-3. Command Example: show ip pim interface

E600-7-RPM0#show ip pim interface
Address Interface Ver/ Nbr Query DR DR
Mode Count Intvl Prio
172.21.200.254 Gi 7/9 v2/S 0 30 1 172.21.200.254
172.60.1.2 Gi 7/11 v2/S 0 30 1 172.60.1.2
192.3.1.1 Gi 7/16 v2/S 1 30 1 192.3.1.1
192.4.1.1 Gi 13/5 v2/S 0 30 1 192.4.1.1
172.21.110.1 Gi 13/6 v2/S 0 30 1 172.21.110.1
172.21.203.1 Gi 13/7 v2/S 0 30 1 172.21.203.1

Table 29-1. show ip pim interface Command Example Fields

Field Description
Address Lists the IP addresses of the interfaces participating in PIM.
Interface List the interface type, with either slot/port information or ID (VLAN or
Port Channel), of the interfaces participating in PIM.
Ver/Mode Displays the PIM version number and mode for each interface
participating in PIM.
• v2 = PIM version 2
• S = PIM Sparse mode
Nbr Count Displays the number of PIM neighbors discovered over this interface.
Query Intvl Displays the query interval for Router Query messages on that interface
(configured with ip pim query-interval command).

PIM-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM) | 791

 Table 29-1. show ip pim interface Command Example Fields
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Field Description
DR Prio Displays the Designated Router priority value configured on the interface
(ip pim dr-priority command).
DR Displays the IP address of the Designated Router for that interface.

show ip pim neighbor

ces View PIM neighbors.

Syntax show ip pim neighbor

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Example Figure 29-4. Command Example: show ip pim neighbor

FTOS#show ip pim neighbor
Neighbor Interface Uptime/Expires Ver DR
Address Prio/Mode
127.87.3.4 Gi 7/16 09:44:58/00:01:24 v2 1 / S
FTOS#

Table 29-2. show ip pim neighbor Command Example Fields

Field Description
Neighbor address Displays the IP address of the PIM neighbor.
Interface List the interface type, with either slot/port information or ID (VLAN or
Port Channel), on which the PIM neighbor was found.
Uptime/expires Displays the amount of time the neighbor has been up followed by the
amount of time until the neighbor is removed from the multicast routing
table (that is, until the neighbor hold time expires).
Ver Displays the PIM version number.
• v2 = PIM version 2
DR prio/Mode Displays the Designated Router priority and the mode.
• 1 = default Designated Router priority (use ip pim dr-priority)
• DR = Designated Router
• S = source

792 | PIM-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM)

show ip pim rp
ces View all multicast groups-to-RP mappings.

Syntax show ip pim rp [mapping | group-address]

Parameters
mapping (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword mapping to display the multicast
groups-to-RP mapping and information on how RP is learnt.
group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the multicast group address mask in dotted decimal
format to view RP for a specific group.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Example 1 Figure 29-5. Command Example 1: show ip pim rp mapping

FTOS#sh ip pim rp
Group RP
224.2.197.115 165.87.20.4
224.2.217.146 165.87.20.4
224.3.3.3 165.87.20.4
225.1.2.1 165.87.20.4
225.1.2.2 165.87.20.4
229.1.2.1 165.87.20.4
229.1.2.2 165.87.20.4
FTOS#

Example 2 Figure 29-6. Command Example 2: show ip pim rp mapping

FTOS#sh ip pim rp mapping
Group(s): 224.0.0.0/4
RP: 165.87.20.4, v2
Info source: 165.87.20.5, via bootstrap, priority 0
Uptime: 00:03:11, expires: 00:02:46
RP: 165.87.20.3, v2
Info source: 165.87.20.5, via bootstrap, priority 0
Uptime: 00:03:11, expires: 00:03:03

FTOS#

Example 3 Figure 29-7. Command Example 3: show ip pim rp group-address

FTOS#sh ip pim rp 229.1.2.1
Group RP
229.1.2.1 165.87.20.4

FTOS#

PIM-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM) | 793

 show ip pim tib
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces View the PIM tree information base (TIB).

Syntax show ip pim tib [group-address [source-address]]

Parameters
group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the group address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D)
source-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the source address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D).

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Example Figure 29-8. Command Example: show ip pim tib

FTOS#show ip pim tib

PIM Multicast Routing Table

Flags: D - Dense, S - Sparse, C - Connected, L - Local, P - Pruned,
R - RP-bit set, F - Register flag, T - SPT-bit set, J - Join SPT,
M - MSDP created entry, A - Candidate for MSDP Advertisement,
K - Ack-Pending State
Timers: Uptime/Expires
Interface state: Interface, next-Hop, State/Mode

(*, 226.1.1.1), uptime 01:29:19, expires 00:00:52, RP 10.211.2.1, flags: SCJ

Incoming interface: GigabitEthernet 4/23, RPF neighbor 10.211.1.2
Outgoing interface list:
GigabitEthernet 8/0

(*, 226.1.1.2), uptime 00:18:08, expires 00:00:52, RP 10.211.2.1, flags: SCJ

Incoming interface: GigabitEthernet 4/23, RPF neighbor 10.211.1.2
Outgoing interface list:
GigabitEthernet 8/0

(*, 226.1.1.3), uptime 00:18:08, expires 00:00:52, RP 10.211.2.1, flags: SCJ

Incoming interface: GigabitEthernet 4/23, RPF neighbor 10.211.1.2
Outgoing interface list:
GigabitEthernet 8/0

(*, 226.1.1.4), uptime 00:18:08, expires 00:00:52, RP 10.211.2.1, flags: SCJ

Incoming interface: GigabitEthernet 4/23, RPF neighbor 10.211.1.2
Outgoing interface list:
GigabitEthernet 8/0

FTOS#

Table 29-3. show ip pim tib Command Example Fields

Field Description
(S, G) Displays the entry in the multicast PIM database.
uptime Displays the amount of time the entry has been in the PIM route table.
expires Displays the amount of time until the entry expires and is removed from
the database.
RP Displays the IP address of the RP/source for this entry.

794 | PIM-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM)

Table 29-3. show ip pim tib Command Example Fields (continued)

Field Description
flags List the flags to define the entries:
• D = PIM Dense Mode
• S = PIM Sparse Mode
• C = directly connected
• L = local to the multicast group
• P = route was pruned
• R = the forwarding entry is pointing toward the RP
• F = FTOS is registering this entry for a multicast source
• T = packets were received via Shortest Tree Path
• J = first packet from the last hop router is received and the entry is
ready to switch to SPT
• K= acknowledge pending state
Incoming interface Displays the reverse path forwarding (RPF) interface towards the RP/
source.
RPF neighbor Displays the next hop from this interface towards the RP/source.
Outgoing interface list: Lists the interfaces that meet one of the following criteria:
• a directly connect member of the Group.
• statically configured member of the Group.
• received a (*,G) Join message.

PIM-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM) | 795

 www.dell.com | dell.com/support

796
|
PIM-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM)
 30
PIM-Source Specific Mode (PIM-SSM)

Overview
The platforms on which a command is supported is indicated by the character — e for the E-Series,
c for the C-Series, and s for the S-Series — that appears below each command heading.

This chapter contains the following sections:

• IPv4 PIM Commands

• IPv4 PIM-Source Specific Mode COmmands

IPv4 PIM Commands

The following commands apply to IPv4 PIM-SM, PIM-SSM, and PIM-DM:

• clear ip pim tib

• debug ip pim
• ip pim dr-priority
• ip pim graceful-restart
• ip pim neighbor-filter
• ip pim query-interval

IPv4 PIM-Source Specific Mode COmmands

The IPv4 PIM-Source Specific Mode (PIM-SSM) commands are:

• ip pim ssm-range
• ip pim join-filter
• show ip pim ssm-range

PIM-Source Specific Mode (PIM-SSM) | 797

 ip pim ssm-range
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Specify the SSM group range using an access-list.

Syntax ip pim ssm-range {access_list_name}

Parameters
access_list_name Enter the name of the access list.

Defaults Default SSM range is 232/8 and ff3x/32

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on C-Series.
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on E-Series.

Usage FTOS supports standard access list for the SSM range. Extended ACL cannot be used for configuring
Information SSM range. If an Extended ACL is configured and then used in the ip pim ssm-range {access list
name} configuration, an error is reported.

However, if ip pim ssm-range {access list name} is configured first and then the ACL is configured
as an Extended ACL, an error is not reported and the ACL is not applied to the SSM range.

FTOS recommended best-practices are to configure the standard ACL, and then apply the ACL to the
SSM range. Once the SSM range is applied, the changes are applied internally without requiring
clearing of the TIB.

When ACL rules change, the ACL and PIM modules apply the new rules automatically.

When SSM range is configured, FTOS supports SSM for configured group range as well as default
SSM range.

When the SSM ACL is removed, PIM SSM is supported for default SSM range only

show ip pim ssm-range

ces Display the non-default groups added using the SSM range feature.

Syntax show ip pim ssm-range

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

798 | PIM-Source Specific Mode (PIM-SSM)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on C-Series.
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on E-Series.

PIM-Source Specific Mode (PIM-SSM) | 799

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

800 | PIM-Source Specific Mode (PIM-SSM)

 31
Port Monitoring

Overview
The Port Monitoring feature enables you to monitor network traffic by forwarding a copy of each
incoming or outgoing packet from one port to another port.

The commands in this chapter are generally supported on the C-Series, E-Series, and S-Series, with
one exception, as noted in the Command History fields and by these symbols under the command
headings: c e s

Commands
• description
• flow-based enable
• monitor session
• show config
• show monitor session
• show running-config monitor session
• source

Important Points to Remember

• On the E-Series, Port Monitoring is supported on TeraScale and ExaScale platforms.
• Port Monitoring is supported on physical ports only. Logical interfaces, such as Port Channels and
VLANs, are not supported.
• FTOS supports as many monitor sessions on a system as the number of port-pipes.
• A SONET port can only be configured as a monitored port.
• The monitoring (destination, “MG”) and monitored (source, “MD”) ports must be on the same
switch.
• A monitoring port can monitor any physical port in the chassis.
• Only one MG and one MD may be in a single port-pipe.
• A monitoring port can monitor more than one port.
• More than one monitored port can have the same destination monitoring port.
• FTOS on the S-Series supports multiple source ports to be monitored by a single destination port
in one monitor session.

Port Monitoring | 801

 • On the S-Series, one monitor session can have only one MG port. There is no restriction on the
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

number of source ports, or destination ports on the chassis.

Note: The monitoring port should not be a part of any other configuration.

description
ces Enter a description of this monitoring session

Syntax description {description}

To remove the description, use the no description {description} command.

Parameters
description Enter a description regarding this session(80 characters maximum).

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes MONITOR SESSION (conf-mon-sess-session-ID)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-7.7.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Related
monitor session Enable a monitoring session.
Commands

flow-based enable
e Enable flow-based monitoring.

Syntax flow-based enable

To disable flow-based monitoring, use the no flow-based enable command.

Defaults Disabled, that is flow-based monitoring is not applied

Command Modes MONITOR SESSION (conf-mon-sess-session-ID)

Command
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Usage To monitoring traffic with particular flows ingressing/egressing the interface, appropriate ACLs can be
Information applied in both ingress and egress direction.

Related
monitor session Create a monitoring session.
Commands

802 | Port Monitoring

monitor session
ces Create a session for monitoring traffic.

Syntax monitor session session-ID

To delete a session, use the no monitor session session-ID command.
To delete all monitor sessions, use the no monitor session command.

Parameters
session-ID Enter a session identification number.
Range: 0 to 65535

Defaults No default values or behaviors

Command Modes MONITOR SESSION (conf-mon-sess-session-ID)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 31-1. Command Example: monitor session

FTOS(conf)# monitor session 60
FTOS(conf-mon-sess-60)

Usage All monitor sessions contain an implicit “mode interface,” that is, if no mode is designated, the mode is
Information set to interface as shown in the example above.

The monitor command is saved in the running configuration at the Monitor Session mode level and
can be restored after a chassis reload.

Related
show monitor session Display the monitor session
Commands
show running-config monitor session Display the running configuration of a monitor session

show config
ces Display the current monitor session configuration.

Syntax show config

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes MONITOR SESSION (conf-mon-sess-session-ID)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Port Monitoring | 803

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series

Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Example
FTOS(conf-mon-sess-11)#show config
!
monitor session 11
source GigabitEthernet 10/0 destination GigabitEthernet 10/47 direction rx
FTOS#

show monitor session

ces Display the monitor information of a particular session or all sessions.

Syntax show monitor session {session-ID}

To display the monitor information for all sessions, use the show monitor session command.

Parameters
session-ID (OPTIONAL) Enter a session identification number.
Range: 0 to 65535

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 31-2. Commands Example: show monitor session

FTOS#show monitor session 11

SessionID Source Destination Direction Mode

----------- -------- ------------- ------------ -------
11 Gi 10/0 Gi 10/47 rx interface

FTOS#

Related
monitor session Create a session for monitoring.
Commands

804 | Port Monitoring

show running-config monitor session
ces Display the running configuration of all monitor sessions or a specific session.

Syntax show running-config monitor session {session-ID}

To display the running configuration for all monitor sessions, use just the show running-config
monitor session command.

Parameters
session-ID (OPTIONAL) Enter a session identification number.
Range: 0 to 65535

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Example
FTOS#show running-config monitor session
!
monitor session 8
source GigabitEthernet 10/46 destination GigabitEthernet 10/1 direction rx
!
monitor session 11
source GigabitEthernet 10/0 destination GigabitEthernet 10/47 direction rx

FTOS#show running-config monitor session 11

!
monitor session 11
source GigabitEthernet 10/0 destination GigabitEthernet 10/47 direction rx

Usage The monitoring command is saved in the running configuration at the Monitor Session mode level and
Information can be restored after a chassis reload.

Related
monitor session Create a session for monitoring.
Commands
show monitor session Display a monitor session.

source
ces Configure a port monitor source.

Syntax source interface destination interface direction {rx | tx | both}

To disable a monitor source, use the no source interface destination interface direction {rx | tx |
both} command.

Port Monitoring | 805

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

interface Enter the one of the following keywords and slot/port information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
GigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the
slot/port information.
destination Enter the keyword destination to indicate the interface destination.
direction {rx | tx | both} Enter the keyword direction followed by one of the packet directional
indicators.
rx: to monitor receiving packets only
tx: to monitor transmitting packets only
both: to monitor both transmitting and receiving packets

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes MONITOR SESSION (conf-mon-sess-session-ID)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 31-3. Command Example: Configuring a Port Monitor Source

FTOS(conf-mon-sess-11)#source gi 10/0 destination gi 10/47 direction rx
FTOS(conf-mon-sess-11)#

Usage
Information
Note: A SONET port can only be configured as a monitored port.

806 | Port Monitoring

 32
Private VLAN (PVLAN)

Overview
Starting with FTOS 7.8.1.0, the Private VLAN (PVLAN) feature of FTOS is available for the C-Series
and S-Series: c s

Commands
• ip local-proxy-arp
• private-vlan mode
• private-vlan mapping secondary-vlan
• show interfaces private-vlan
• show vlan private-vlan
• show vlan private-vlan mapping
• switchport mode private-vlan
See also the following commands. The command output is augmented in FTOS 7.8.1.0 to provide
PVLAN data:

• show arp in IPv4 Routing

• show vlan in Chapter 23, Layer 2
Private VLANs extend the FTOS security suite by providing Layer 2 isolation between ports within the
same private VLAN. A private VLAN partitions a traditional VLAN into subdomains identified by a
primary and secondary VLAN pair.

The FTOS private VLAN implementation is based on RFC 3069.

Private VLAN Concepts

Primary VLAN:
The primary VLAN is the base VLAN and can have multiple secondary VLANs. There are two types of
secondary VLAN — community VLAN and isolated VLAN:

• A primary VLAN can have any number of community VLANs and isolated VLANs.
• Private VLANs block all traffic to isolated ports except traffic from promiscuous ports. Traffic
received from an isolated port is forwarded only to promiscuous ports or trunk ports.

Private VLAN (PVLAN) | 807

 Community VLAN:
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

A community VLAN is a secondary VLAN of the primary VLAN:

• Ports in a community VLAN can talk to each other. Also, all ports in a community VLAN can talk
to all promiscuous ports in the primary VLAN and vice-versa.
• Devices on a community VLAN can communicate with each other via member ports, while
devices in an isolated VLAN cannot.
Isolated VLAN:
An isolated VLAN is a secondary VLAN of the primary VLAN:

• Ports in an isolated VLAN cannot talk to each other. Servers would be mostly connected to
isolated VLAN ports.
• Isolated ports can talk to promiscuous ports in the primary VLAN, and vice-versa.
Port types:
• Community port: A community port is, by definition, a port that belongs to a community VLAN
and is allowed to communicate with other ports in the same community VLAN and with
promiscuous ports.
• Isolated port: An isolated port is, by definition, a port that, in Layer 2, can only communicate
with promiscuous ports that are in the same PVLAN.
• Promiscuous port: A promiscuous port is, by definition, a port that is allowed to communicate
with any other port type.
• Trunk port: A trunk port, by definition, carries VLAN traffic across switches:
• A trunk port in a PVLAN is always tagged.
• Primary or secondary VLAN traffic is carried by the trunk port in tagged mode. The tag on the
packet helps identify the VLAN to which the packet belongs.
• A trunk port can also belong to a regular VLAN (non-private VLAN).

ip local-proxy-arp
cs Enable/disable Layer 3 communication between secondary VLANs in a private VLAN.

Syntax [no] ip local-proxy-arp

To disable Layer 3 communication between secondary VLANs in a private VLAN, use the no ip
local-proxy-arp command in the INTERFACE VLAN mode for the primary VLAN.

To disable Layer 3 communication in a particular secondary VLAN, use the no ip local-proxy-arp

command in the INTERFACE VLAN mode for the selected secondary VLAN.

Note: Even after ip-local-proxy-arp is disabled (no ip-local-proxy-arp) in a secondary VLAN,

Layer 3 communication may happen between some secondary VLAN hosts, until the ARP timeout
happens on those secondary VLAN hosts.

Defaults Layer 3 communication is disabled between secondary VLANs in a private VLAN.

Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN

808 | Private VLAN (PVLAN)

 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series

Related
private-vlan mode Set the mode of the selected VLAN to community, isolated, or primary.
Commands
private-vlan mapping Map secondary VLANs to the selected primary VLAN.
secondary-vlan
show arp Display the ARP table.
show interfaces private-vlan Display type and status of PVLAN interfaces.
show vlan private-vlan Display PVLANs and/or interfaces that are part of a PVLAN.
switchport mode private-vlan Set the PVLAN mode of the selected port.

private-vlan mode
cs Set the PVLAN mode of the selected VLAN to community, isolated, or primary.

Syntax [no] private-vlan mode {community | isolated | primary}

To remove the PVLAN configuration, use the no private-vlan mode {community | isolated |
primary} command syntax.

Parameters
community Enter community to set the VLAN as a community VLAN, as described above.
isolated Enter isolated to configure the VLAN as an isolated VLAN, as described above.
primary Enter primary to configure the VLAN as a primary VLAN, as described above.

Defaults none

Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series

Usage The VLAN:

Information
• Can be in only one mode, either community, isolated, or primary.
• Mode can be set to community or isolated even before associating it to a primary VLAN. This
secondary VLAN will continue to work normally as a normal VLAN even though it is not
associated to a primary VLAN. (A syslog message indicates this.)
• Must not have a port in it when the VLAN mode is being set.
Only ports (and port channels) configured as promiscuous, host, or PVLAN trunk ports (as described
above) can be added to the PVLAN. No other regular ports can be added to the PVLAN.

After using this command to configure a VLAN as a primary VLAN, use the private-vlan mapping
secondary-vlan command to map secondary VLANs to this VLAN.

Related
private-vlan mapping Set the mode of the selected VLAN to primary and then associate
Commands
secondary-vlan secondary VLANs to it.
show interfaces private-vlan Display type and status of PVLAN interfaces.

Private VLAN (PVLAN) | 809

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

show vlan private-vlan Display PVLANs and/or interfaces that are part of a PVLAN.
show vlan private-vlan mapping Display primary-secondary VLAN mapping.
switchport mode private-vlan Set the PVLAN mode of the selected port.

private-vlan mapping secondary-vlan

cs Map secondary VLANs to the selected primary VLAN.

Syntax [no] private-vlan mapping secondary-vlan vlan-list

To remove specific secondary VLANs from the configuration, use the no private-vlan mapping
secondary-vlan vlan-list command syntax.

Parameters
vlan-list Enter the list of secondary VLANs to associate with the selected primary VLAN, as described
above. The list can be in comma-delimited or hyphenated-range format, following the
convention for range input.

Defaults none

Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series

Usage The list of secondary VLANs can be:

Information
• Specified in comma-delimited or hyphenated-range format.
• Specified with this command even before they have been created.
• Amended by specifying the new secondary VLAN to be added to the list.

Related
private-vlan mode Set the mode of the selected VLAN to community, isolated, or primary.
Commands
show interfaces private-vlan Display type and status of PVLAN interfaces.
show vlan private-vlan Display PVLANs and/or interfaces that are part of a PVLAN.
show vlan private-vlan Display primary-secondary VLAN mapping.
mapping
switchport mode private-vlan Set the PVLAN mode of the selected port.

show interfaces private-vlan

cs Display type and status of PVLAN interfaces.

Syntax show interfaces private-vlan [interface interface]

Parameters
interface interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interface, followed by the ID of the specific
interface for which to display PVLAN status.

810 | Private VLAN (PVLAN)

 Defaults none

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series

Usage This command has two types of display — a list of all PVLAN interfaces or for a specific interface.
Information Examples of both types of output are shown below.

Examples Figure 32-1. show interfaces private-vlan Command Output

FTOS# show interfaces private-vlan
Interface Vlan PVLAN-Type Interface Type Status
--------- ---- ---------- -------------- --------
Gi 2/1 10 Primary Promiscuous Up
Gi 2/2 100 Isolated Host Down
Gi 2/3 10 Primary Trunk Up
Gi 2/4 101 Community Host Up

FTOS# show interfaces private-vlan Gi 2/2

Interface Vlan PVLAN-Type Interface Type Status
--------- ---- ---------- -------------- --------
Gi 2/2 100 Isolated Host Up

The table, below, defines the fields in the output, above.

Table 32-1. show interfaces description Command Example Fields

Field Description
Interface Displays type of interface and associated slot and port number
Vlan Displays the VLAN ID of the designated interface
PVLAN-Type Displays the type of VLAN in which the designated interface resides
Interface Type Displays the PVLAN port type of the designated interface.
Status States whether the interface is operationally up or down.

Related
private-vlan mode Set the mode of the selected VLAN to community, isolated, or primary.
Commands
show vlan private-vlan Display PVLANs and/or interfaces that are part of a PVLAN.
show vlan private-vlan mapping Display primary-secondary VLAN mapping.
switchport mode private-vlan Set the PVLAN mode of the selected port.

show vlan private-vlan

cs Display PVLANs and/or interfaces that are part of a PVLAN.

Private VLAN (PVLAN) | 811

 Syntax show vlan private-vlan [community | interface | isolated | primary | primary_vlan | interface
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

interface]

Parameters
community (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword community to display VLANs
configured as community VLANs, along with their interfaces.
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword community to display VLANs
configured as community VLANs, along with their interfaces.
isolated (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword isolated to display VLANs configured
as isolated VLANs, along with their interfaces.
primary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword primary to display VLANs configured as
primary VLANs, along with their interfaces.
primary_vlan (OPTIONAL) Enter a private VLAN ID or secondary VLAN ID to display
interface details about the designated PVLAN.
interface interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interface and an interface ID to display
the PVLAN configuration of the designated interface.

Defaults none

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series

Usage Examples of all types of command output are shown below. The first type of output is the result of not
Information entering an optional keyword. It displays a detailed list of all PVLANs and their member VLANs and
interfaces. The other types of output show details about PVLAN subsets.

Examples Figure 32-2. show vlan private-vlan Command Output

FTOS# show vlan private-vlan
Primary Secondary Type Active Ports
------- --------- --------- ------ ------------------------
10 primary Yes Gi 2/1,3
100 isolated Yes Gi 2/2
101 community Yes Gi 2/10
20 primary Yes Po 10, 12-13
Gi 3/1
200 isolated Yes Gi 3/2,4-6
201 community No
202 community Yes Gi 3/11-12

FTOS# show vlan private-vlan primary

Primary Secondary Type Active Ports
------- --------- --------- ------ ------------------------
10 primary Yes Gi 2/1,3
20 primary Yes Gi 3/1,3

812 | Private VLAN (PVLAN)

 FTOS# show vlan private-vlan isolated
Primary Secondary Type Active Ports
------- --------- --------- ------ ------------------------
10 primary Yes Gi 2/1,3
100 isolated Yes Gi 2/2,4-6
200 isolated Yes Gi 3/2,4-6

FTOS# show vlan private-vlan community

Primary Secondary Type Active Ports
------- --------- --------- ------ ------------------------
10 primary Yes Gi 2/1,3
101 community Yes Gi 2/7-10
20 primary Yes Po 10, 12-13
Gi 3/1
201 community No
202 community Yes Gi 3/11-12

FTOS# show vlan private-vlan interface Gi 2/1

Primary Secondary Type Active Ports
------- --------- --------- ------ ------------------------
10 primary Yes Gi 2/1

If the VLAN ID is that of a primary VLAN, then the entire private VLAN output will be displayed, as
shown in Figure 32-3. If the VLAN ID is a secondary VLAN, only its primary VLAN and its particular
secondary VLAN properties will be displayed, as shown in Figure 32-4.

Figure 32-3. Output of show vlan private-vlan (primary)

FTOS# show vlan private-vlan 10
Primary Secondary Type Active Ports
------- --------- --------- ------ ------------------------
10 primary Yes Gi 2/1,3
1020 isolated Yes Gi 0/4
101 community Yes Gi 2/7-10

Figure 32-4. Output of show vlan private-vlan (secondary)

FTOS#show vlan private-vlan 102
Primary Secondary Type Active Ports
------- --------- --------- ------ ------------------------------------------
10 Primary Yes Po 1
Gi 0/2
102 Isolated Yeso Gi 0/4

The table, below, defines the fields in the output, above.

Table 32-2. show interfaces description Command Example Fields

Field Description
Primary Displays the VLAN ID of the designated or associated primary VLAN(s)
Secondary Displays the VLAN ID of the designated or associated secondary VLAN(s
Type Displays the type of VLAN in which the listed interfaces reside

Private VLAN (PVLAN) | 813

 Table 32-2. show interfaces description Command Example Fields
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Field Description
Active States whether the interface is operationally up or down
Ports Displays the interface IDs in the listed VLAN.

Related
private-vlan mode Set the mode of the selected VLAN to either community or isolated.
Commands
show interfaces private-vlan Display type and status of PVLAN interfaces.
show vlan private-vlan mapping Display primary-secondary VLAN mapping.
switchport mode private-vlan Set the PVLAN mode of the selected port.

show vlan private-vlan mapping

cs Display primary-secondary VLAN mapping.

Syntax show vlan private-vlan mapping

Defaults none

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series

Usage The output of this command, shown below, displays the community and isolated VLAN IDs that are
Information associated with each primary VLAN.

Figure 32-5. show vlan private-vlan mapping Command Output

FTOS# show vlan private-vlan mapping
Private Vlan:
Primary : 100
Isolated : 102
Community : 101
Unknown : 200

Related
private-vlan mode Set the mode of the selected VLAN to either community or isolated.
Commands
show interfaces private-vlan Display type and status of PVLAN interfaces.
show vlan private-vlan mapping Display primary-secondary VLAN mapping.
switchport mode private-vlan Set the PVLAN mode of the selected port.

814 | Private VLAN (PVLAN)

switchport mode private-vlan
cs Set the PVLAN mode of the selected port.

Syntax [no] switchport mode private-vlan {host | promiscuous | trunk}

To remove the PVLAN mode from the selected port, use the no switchport mode private-vlan
command.

Parameters
host Enter host to configure the selected port or port channel as an isolated interface in a
PVLAN, as described above.
promiscuous Enter promiscuous to configure the selected port or port channel as an
promiscuous interface, as described above.
trunk Enter trunk to configure the selected port or port channel as a trunk port in a PVLAN,
as described above.

Defaults disabled

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series

Usage The assignment of the various PVLAN port types to port and port channel (LAG) interfaces is
Information demonstrated below.

Example Figure 32-6. Examples of switchport mode private-vlan Command

FTOS#conf
FTOS(conf)#interface GigabitEthernet 2/1
FTOS(conf-if-gi-2/1)#switchport mode private-vlan promiscuous

FTOS(conf)#interface GigabitEthernet 2/2

FTOS(conf-if-gi-2/2)#switchport mode private-vlan host

FTOS(conf)#interface GigabitEthernet 2/3

FTOS(conf-if-gi-2/3)#switchport mode private-vlan trunk

FTOS(conf)#interface port-channel 10
FTOS(conf-if-gi-2/3)#switchport mode private-vlan promiscuous

Related
private-vlan mode Set the mode of the selected VLAN to either community or isolated.
Commands
private-vlan mapping Set the mode of the selected VLAN to primary and then associate
secondary-vlan secondary VLANs to it.
show interfaces private-vlan Display type and status of PVLAN interfaces.
show vlan private-vlan mapping Display primary-secondary VLAN mapping.

Private VLAN (PVLAN) | 815

 www.dell.com | dell.com/support

816
|
Private VLAN (PVLAN)
 33
Per-VLAN Spanning Tree plus (PVST+)

Overview
The FTOS implementation of PVST+ (Per-VLAN Spanning Tree plus) is based on the IEEE 802.1d
standard Spanning Tree Protocol, but it creates a separate spanning tree for each VLAN configured.

PVST+ (Per-VLAN Spanning Tree plus) is supported by FTOS on all Dell Networking systems, as
indicated by the characters that appear below each command heading:
• C-Series: c
• E-Series: e
• S-Series: s

Commands
The FTOS PVST+ commands are:
• disable
• description
• extend system-id
• protocol spanning-tree pvst
• show spanning-tree pvst
• spanning-tree pvst
• spanning-tree pvst err-disable
• tc-flush-standard
• vlan bridge-priority
• vlan forward-delay
• vlan hello-time
• vlan max-age
Note: For easier command line entry, the plus (+) sign is not used at the command line.

disable
ces Disable PVST+ globally.

Syntax disable

To enable PVST+, enter no disable.

Per-VLAN Spanning Tree plus (PVST+) | 817

 Defaults PVST+ is disabled
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-pvst)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Related
protocol spanning-tree pvst Enter PVST+ mode.
Commands

description
ces Enter a description of the PVST+

Syntax description {description}

To remove the description, use the no description {description} command.

Parameters
description Enter a description to identify the Spanning Tree (80 characters maximum).

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes SPANNING TREE PVST+ (The prompt is “config-pvst”.)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
pre-7.7.1.0 Introduced

Related
protocol spanning-tree pvst Enter SPANNING TREE mode on the switch.
Commands

extend system-id
ces Use Extend System ID to augment the Bridge ID with a VLAN ID so that PVST+ differentiate
between BPDUs for each VLAN. If for some reason on VLAN receives a BPDU meant for another
VLAN, PVST+ will then not detect a loop, and both ports can remain in forwarding state.

Syntax extend system-id

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes PROTOCOL PVST

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced

818 | Per-VLAN Spanning Tree plus (PVST+)

 Example FTOS(conf-pvst)#do show spanning-tree pvst vlan 5 brief

VLAN 5
Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol
Root ID Priority 32773, Address 0001.e832.73f7
Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15
Bridge ID Priority 32773 (priority 32768 sys-id-ext 5), Address 0001.e832.73f7
We are the root of Vlan 5
Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15

Interface Designated
Name PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Bridge ID PortID
---------- -------- ---- ------ --- ------- -------------------- --------
Gi 0/10 128.140 128 200000 FWD 0 32773 0001.e832.73f7 128.140
Gi 0/12 128.142 128 200000 DIS 0 32773 0001.e832.73f7 128.142

Interface
Name Role PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Link-type Edge
---------- ------ -------- ---- ------- --- ------- --------- ------------------------
Gi 0/10 Desg 128.140 128 200000 FWD 0 P2P No
Gi 0/12 Dis 128.142 128 200000 DIS 0 P2P No

Related
protocol spanning-tree pvst Enter SPANNING TREE mode on the switch.
Commands

protocol spanning-tree pvst

ces Enter the PVST+ mode to enable PVST+ on a device.

Syntax protocol spanning-tree pvst

To disable PVST+, use the disable command.

Defaults This command has no default value or behavior.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced

Example Figure 33-1. Configuring with protocol spanning-tree pvst Command

FTOS#conf
FTOS(conf)#protocol spanning-tree pvst
FTOS(conf-pvst)#no disable
FTOS(conf-pvst)#vlan 2 bridge-priority 4096
FTOS(conf-pvst)#vlan 3 bridge-priority 16384
FTOS(conf-pvst)#
FTOS(conf-pvst)#show config
!
protocol spanning-tree pvst
no disable
vlan 2 bridge-priority 4096
vlan 3 bridge-priority 16384
FTOS#

Usage Once PVST+ is enabled, the device runs an STP instance for each VLAN it supports.
Information

Per-VLAN Spanning Tree plus (PVST+) | 819

 Related
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

disable Disable PVST+.

Commands
show spanning-tree pvst Display the PVST+ configuration.

show spanning-tree pvst

ces View the Per-VLAN Spanning Tree configuration.

Syntax show spanning-tree pvst [vlan vlan-id] [brief] [Interface]

Parameters
vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID.
Range: 1 to 4094
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to view a synopsis of the PVST+
configuration information.
Interface (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the interface keywords along with the slot/port
information:
• For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword FastEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
GigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For Port Channel groups, enter the keyword port-channel followed
by a number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1-255 for TeraScale
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 6.4.1.0 Expanded to display port error disable state (EDS) caused by loopback BPDU
inconsistency and Port VLAN ID inconsistency.
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced

820 | Per-VLAN Spanning Tree plus (PVST+)

Example 1 Figure 33-2. show spanning-tree pvst brief Command
FTOS#show spanning-tree pvst vlan 3 brief
VLAN 3
Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol
Root ID Priority 4096, Address 0001.e801.6aa8
Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15
Bridge ID Priority 16384, Address 0001.e805.e306
Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15

Interface Designated
Name PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Bridge ID PortID
---------- -------- ---- ------ --- ------- -------------------- --------
Gi 1/0 128.130 128 20000 FWD 20000 4096 0001.e801.6aa8 128.426
Gi 1/1 128.131 128 20000 BLK 20000 4096 0001.e801.6aa8 128.427
Gi 1/16 128.146 128 20000 FWD 20000 16384 0001.e805.e306 128.146
Gi 1/17 128.147 128 20000 FWD 20000 16384 0001.e805.e306 128.147

Interface
Name Role PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Link-type Edge
---------- ------ -------- ---- ------- --- ------- --------- ----
Gi 1/0 Root 128.130 128 20000 FWD 20000 P2P No
Gi 1/1 Altr 128.131 128 20000 BLK 20000 P2P No
Gi 1/16 Desg 128.146 128 20000 FWD 20000 P2P Yes
Gi 1/17 Desg 128.147 128 20000 FWD 20000 P2P Yes

Example 2 Figure 33-3. show spanning-tree pvst vlan Command

FTOS#show spanning-tree pvst vlan 2
VLAN 2
Root Identifier has priority 4096, Address 0001.e805.e306
Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15
Bridge Identifier has priority 4096, Address 0001.e805.e306
Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15
We are the root of VLAN 2
Current root has priority 4096, Address 0001.e805.e306
Number of topology changes 3, last change occured 00:57:00

Port 130 (GigabitEthernet 1/0) is designated Forwarding

Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.130
Designated root has priority 4096, address 0001.e805.e3:06
Designated bridge has priority 4096, address 0001.e805.e3:06
Designated port id is 128.130, designated path cost 0
Number of transitions to forwarding state 1
BPDU sent 1567, received 3
The port is not in the Edge port mode

Port 131 (GigabitEthernet 1/1) is designated Forwarding

Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.131
Designated root has priority 4096, address 0001.e805.e3:06
Designated bridge has priority 4096, address 0001.e805.e3:06
Designated port id is 128.131, designated path cost 0
Number of transitions to forwarding state 1
BPDU sent 1567, received 0
The port is not in the Edge port mode

Port 146 (GigabitEthernet 1/16) is designated Forwarding

Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.146
Designated root has priority 4096, address 0001.e805.e3:06
Designated bridge has priority 4096, address 0001.e805.e3:06
Designated port id is 128.146, designated path cost 0
Number of transitions to forwarding state 1
BPDU sent 1578, received 0
The port is in the Edge port mode

Port 147 (GigabitEthernet 1/17) is designated Forwarding

Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.147
Designated root has priority 4096, address 0001.e805.e3:06
Designated bridge has priority 4096, address 0001.e805.e3:06
Designated port id is 128.147, designated path cost 0
Number of transitions to forwarding state 1
BPDU sent 1579, received 0
The port is in the Edge port mode

Per-VLAN Spanning Tree plus (PVST+) | 821

 Example 3 Figure 33-4. show spanning-tree pvst command with EDS and LBK
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show spanning-tree pvst vlan 2 interface gigabitethernet 1/0

GigabitEthernet 1/0 of VLAN 2 is LBK_INC discarding Loopback BPDU

Inconsistency
Edge port:no (default) port guard :none (default) (LBK_INC)
Link type: point-to-point (auto) bpdu filter:disable (default)
Bpdu guard :disable (default)
Bpdus sent 152, received 27562

Interface Designated
Name PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Bridge ID PortID
--------- -------- ---- ------- --- ------- -------------------- --------
Gi 1/0 128.1223 128 20000 EDS 0 32768 0001.e800.a12b 128.1223

Example 4 Figure 33-5. show spanning-tree pvst with EDS and PVID

FTOS#show spanning-tree pvst vlan 2 interface gigabitethernet 1/0

GigabitEthernet 1/0 of VLAN 2 is PVID_INC discarding Port VLAN ID (PVID)

Inconsistency
Edge port:no (default) port guard :none (default)
Link type: point-to-point (auto) bpdu filter:disable (default)
Bpdu guard :disable (default)
Bpdus sent 1, received 0

Interface Designated
Name PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Bridge ID PortID
--------- -------- ---- ------- --- ------- -------------------- --------
Gi 1/0 128.1223 128 20000 EDS 0 32768 0001.e800.a12b 128.1223

Related
spanning-tree pvst Configure PVST+ on an interface.
Commands

spanning-tree pvst
ces Configure PVST+ edge port with optional Bridge Port Data Unit (BPDU) guard, VLAN, port priority,
and port cost on an interface.

Syntax spanning-tree pvst [edge-port [bpduguard [shutdown-on-violation]] | vlan vlan-range

{cost number | priority value}]
To disable PVST+ on an interface, use the no spanning-tree pvst [edge-port [bpduguard]
[shutdown-on-violation]] | vlan vlan-range {cost number | priority value}] command.

Parameters
edge-port (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword edge-port to configure the interface as a PVST+
edge port.
bpduguard (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword portfast to enable Portfast to move the interface
into forwarding mode immediately after the root fails.
Enter the keyword bpduguard to disable the port when it receives a BPDU.
shutdown-on-v (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword shutdown-on-violation to hardware disable an
iolation interface when a BPDU is received and the port is disabled.
vlan vlan-range (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN number(s).
Range: 1 to 4094

822 | Per-VLAN Spanning Tree plus (PVST+)

 cost number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword cost followed by the port cost value.
Range: 1 to 200000
Defaults:
100 Mb/s Ethernet interface = 200000
1-Gigabit Ethernet interface = 20000
10-Gigabit Ethernet interface = 2000
Port Channel interface with one 100 Mb/s Ethernet = 200000
Port Channel interface with one 1-Gigabit Ethernet = 20000
Port Channel interface with one 10-Gigabit Ethernet = 2000
Port Channel with two 1-Gigabit Ethernet = 18000
Port Channel with two 10-Gigabit Ethernet = 1800
Port Channel with two 100-Mbps Ethernet = 180000
priority value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword priority followed the Port priority value in
increments of 16.
Range: 0 to 240
Default: 128

Defaults Not Configured

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced hardware shutdown-on-violation option
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Added the optional Bridge Port Data Unit (BPDU) guard
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced

Usage The BPDU guard option prevents the port from participating in an active STP topology in case a
Information BPDU appears on a port unintentionally, or is misconfigured, or is subject to a DOS attack. This option
places the port into an error disable state if a BPDU appears, and a message is logged so that the
administrator can take corrective action.

Note: A port configured as an edge port, on a PVST switch, will immediately transition to
the forwarding state. Only ports connected to end-hosts should be configured as an edge port.
Consider an edge port similar to a port with a spanning-tree portfast enabled.

If shutdown-on-violation is not enabled, BPDUs will still be sent to the RPM CPU.

Example Figure 33-6. spanning-tree pvst vlan Command Example

FTOS(conf-if-gi-1/1)#spanning-tree pvst vlan 3 cost 18000
FTOS(conf-if-gi-1/1)#end
FTOS(conf-if-gi-1/1)#show config
!
interface GigabitEthernet 1/1
no ip address
switchport
spanning-tree pvst vlan 3 cost 18000
no shutdown
FTOS(conf-if-gi-1/1)#end

FTOS#

Per-VLAN Spanning Tree plus (PVST+) | 823

 Related
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

show spanning-tree pvst View PVST+ configuration

Commands

spanning-tree pvst err-disable

ces Place ports in an err-disabled state if they receive a PVST+ BPDU when they are members an untagged
VLAN.

Syntax spanning-tree pvst err-disable cause invalid-pvst-bpdu

Defaults Enabled; ports are placed in err-disabled state if they receive a PVST+ BPDU when they are members
of an untagged VLAN.

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced

Usage Some non-Dell Networking systems which have hybrid ports participating in PVST+ transmit two
Information kinds of BPDUs: an 802.1D BPDU and an untagged PVST+ BPDU.

Dell Networking systems do not expect PVST+ BPDU on an untagged port. If this happens, FTOS
places the port in error-disable state. This behavior might result in the network not converging. To
prevent FTOS from executing this action, use the command no spanning-tree pvst err-disable
cause invalid-pvst-bpdu.

Related
show spanning-tree pvst View the PVST+ configuration.
Commands

tc-flush-standard
ces Enable the MAC address flushing upon receiving every topology change notification.

Syntax tc-flush-standard
To disable, use the no tc-flush-standard command.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 6.5.1.0 Introduced

Usage By default FTOS implements an optimized flush mechanism for PVST+. This helps in flushing the
Information MAC addresses only when necessary (and less often) allowing for faster convergence during topology
changes. However, if a standards-based flush mechanism is needed, this knob command can be turned
on to enable flushing MAC addresses upon receiving every topology change notification.

824 | Per-VLAN Spanning Tree plus (PVST+)

vlan bridge-priority
ces Set the PVST+ bridge-priority for a VLAN or a set of VLANs.

Syntax vlan vlan-range bridge-priority value

To return to the default value, enter no vlan bridge-priority command.

Parameters
vlan vlan-range Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN number(s).
Range: 1 to 4094
bridge-priority value Enter the keyword bridge-priority followed by the bridge priority value
in increments of 4096.
Range: 0 to 61440
Default: 32768

Defaults 32768

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-pvst)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced

Related
vlan forward-delay Change the time interval before FTOS transitions to the forwarding state
Commands
vlan hello-time Change the time interval between BPDUs
vlan max-age Change the time interval before PVST+ refreshes
show spanning-tree pvst Display the PVST+ configuration

vlan forward-delay
ces Set the amount of time the interface waits in the Listening State and the Learning State before
transitioning to the Forwarding State.

Syntax vlan vlan-range forward-delay seconds

To return to the default setting, enter no vlan forward-delay command.

Parameters
vlan vlan-range Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN number(s).
Range: 1 to 4094
forward-delay Enter the keyword forward-delay followed by the time interval, in seconds, that
seconds FTOS waits before transitioning PVST+ to the forwarding state.
Range: 4 to 30 seconds
Default: 15 seconds

Defaults 15 seconds

Per-VLAN Spanning Tree plus (PVST+) | 825

 Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-pvst)
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced

Related
vlan bridge-priority Set the bridge-priority value
Commands
vlan hello-time Change the time interval between BPDUs
vlan max-age Change the time interval before PVST+ refreshes
show spanning-tree pvst Display the PVST+ configuration

vlan hello-time
ces Set the time interval between generation of PVST+ Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs).

Syntax vlan vlan-range hello-time seconds

To return to the default value, enter no vlan hello-time command.

Parameters
vlan vlan-range Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN number(s).
Range: 1 to 4094
hello-time seconds Enter the keyword hello-time followed by the time interval, in seconds,
between transmission of BPDUs.
Range: 1 to 10 seconds
Default: 2 seconds

Defaults 2 seconds

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-pvst)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced

Related
vlan bridge-priority Set the bridge-priority value
Commands
vlan forward-delay Change the time interval before FTOS transitions to the forwarding state
vlan max-age Change the time interval before PVST+ refreshes
show spanning-tree pvst Display the PVST+ configuration

826 | Per-VLAN Spanning Tree plus (PVST+)

vlan max-age
ces Set the time interval for the PVST+ bridge to maintain configuration information before refreshing that
information.

Syntax vlan vlan-range max-age seconds

To return to the default, use the no vlan max-age command.

Parameters
vlan vlan-range Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN number(s).
Range: 1 to 4094
max-age seconds Enter the keyword max-age followed by the time interval, in seconds, that
FTOS waits before refreshing configuration information.
Range: 6 to 40 seconds
Default: 20 seconds

Defaults 20 seconds

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-pvst)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced

Related
vlan bridge-priority Set the bridge-priority value
Commands
vlan forward-delay Change the time interval before FTOS transitions to the forwarding state
vlan hello-time Change the time interval between BPDUs
show spanning-tree pvst Display the PVST+ configuration

Per-VLAN Spanning Tree plus (PVST+) | 827

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

828 | Per-VLAN Spanning Tree plus (PVST+)

 34
Quality of Service (QoS)

Overview
FTOS commands for Quality of Service (QoS) include traffic conditioning and congestion control.
QoS commands are not universally supported on all Dell Networking platforms. Support is indicated
by the c, e and s characters under command headings.

This chapter contains the following sections:

• Global Configuration Commands
• Per-Port QoS Commands
• Policy-Based QoS Commands
• Queue-Level Debugging (E-Series Only)

Global Configuration Commands

• qos-rate-adjust
• qos-scheduling

qos-rate-adjust
ces By default, while rate limiting, policing, and shaping, FTOS does not include the Preamble, SFD, or
the IFG fields. These fields are overhead; only the fields from MAC Destination Address to the CRC
are used for forwarding and are included in these rate metering calculations. You can optionally
include overhead fields in rate metering calculations by enabling QoS Rate Adjustment.

Syntax qos-rate-adjustment overhead-bytes

Parameters
overhead-bytes Include a specified number of bytes of packet overhead to include in rate limiting,
policing, and shaping calculations.
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-31
E-Series Range: 1-144

Defaults QoS Rate Adjustment is disabled by default, and no qos-rate-adjust is listed in the
running-configuration

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Quality of Service (QoS) | 829

 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60

History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced

qos-scheduling
Configure QoS scheduling priority by setting the scheduled interval for unicast and multicast packets.

Syntax qos-scheduling [unicast packet-number || multicast packet-number]

Parameters
unicast Enter the keyword unicast for unicast packet scheduling.
multicast Enter the keyword multicast for multicast packet scheduling.
packet-number Enter the number of consecutive packets to schedule.
Range: 1 to 63.
Default: 1.

Defaults 1

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.9 Introduced on the S60.
History

Per-Port QoS Commands

Per-port QoS (“port-based QoS”) allows users to defined QoS configuration on a per-physical-port
basis. The commands include:
• dot1p-priority
• rate limit
• rate police
• rate shape
• service-class bandwidth-percentage
• service-class dynamic dot1p
• show interfaces rate
• strict-priority queue

830 | Quality of Service (QoS)

dot1p-priority
ces Assign a value to the IEEE 802.1p bits on the traffic received by this interface.

Syntax dot1p-priority priority-value

To delete the IEEE 802.1p configuration on the interface, enter no dot1p-priority.

Parameters
priority-value Enter a value from 0 to 7.
dot1p Queue Number
0 2
1 0
2 1
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
For the C-Series and S-Series, enter a value 0, 2, 4, or 6
dot1p Queue Number
0 1
1 0
2 0
3 1
4 2
5 2
6 3
7 3

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage The dot1p-priority command changes the priority of incoming traffic on the interface. The system
Information places traffic marked with a priority in the correct queue and processes that traffic according to its
queue.

When you set the priority for a Port Channel, the physical interfaces assigned to the Port Channel are
configured with the same value. You cannot assign dot1p-priority command to individual interfaces in
a Port Channel.

Quality of Service (QoS) | 831

 rate limit
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

e Limit the outgoing traffic rate on the selected interface.

Syntax rate limit [kbps] committed-rate [burst-KB] [peak [kbps] peak-rate [burst-KB]] [vlan vlan-id]

Parameters
kbps Enter this keyword to specify the rate limit in Kilobits per second (Kbps). On the
E-Series, Dell Networking recommends using a value greater than or equal to 512 as
lower values does not yield accurate results.The default granularity is Megabits per
second (Mbps).
Range: 0-10000000
committed-rate Enter the bandwidth in Mbps
Range: 0 to 10000
burst-KB (OPTIONAL) Enter the burst size in KB.
Range: 16 to 200000
Default: 50
peak peak-rate (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword peak followed by a number to specify the peak
rate in Mbps.
Range: 0 to 10000
vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan followed by a VLAN ID to limit traffic to
those specific VLANs.
Range: 1 to 4094

Defaults Granularity for committed-rate and peak-rate is Mbps unless the kbps option is used.

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Added kbps option on E-Series.
Version 7.7.1.0 Removed from C-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage
Information Note: Per Port rate limit and rate police is supported for Layer 2 tagged and untagged
switched traffic and for Layer 3 traffic. Per VLAN rate limit and rate police is supported on
only tagged ports with Layer 2 switched traffic.
On one interface, you can configure the rate limit or rate police command for a VLAN or you can
configure the rate limit or the rate police command for the interface. For each physical interface, you
can configure six rate limit commands specifying different VLANS.

If you receive the error message:

%Error: Specified VLANs overlap with existing config.

after configuring VLANs in the rate police command, check to see if the same VLANs are used in rate
limit command on other interfaces. To clear the problem, remove the rate limit configuration(s), and
re-configure the rate police command. After the rate police command is configured, return to the other
interfaces and re-apply the rate limit configuration.

832 | Quality of Service (QoS)

rate police
ces Police the incoming traffic rate on the selected interface.

Syntax rate police [kbps] committed-rate [burst-KB] [peak [kbps] peak-rate [burst-KB]] [vlan vlan-id]

Parameters
kbps Enter this keyword to specify the rate limit in Kilobits per second (Kbps). On
C-Series and S-Series make the following value a multiple of 64. On the E-Series,
Dell Networking recommends using a value greater than or equal to 512 as lower
values does not yield accurate results. The default granularity is Megabits per
second (Mbps).
Range: 0-10000000
committed-rate Enter a number as the bandwidth in Mbps.
Range: 0 to 10000
burst-KB (OPTIONAL) Enter a number as the burst size in KB.
Range: 16 to 200000
Default: 50
peak peak-rate (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword peak followed by a number to specify the peak
rate in Mbps.
Range: 0 to 10000
vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan followed by a VLAN ID to police traffic to
those specific VLANs.
Range: 1 to 4094

Defaults Granularity for committed-rate and peak-rate is Mbps unless the kbps option is used.

Command Mode INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Added kbps option on C-Series, E-Series, and Series.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage
Information Note: Per Port rate limit and rate police is supported for Layer 2 tagged and untagged
switched traffic and for Layer 3 traffic. Per VLAN rate limit and rate police is supported on
only tagged ports with Layer 2 switched traffic.

C-Series and S-Series

On one interface, you can configure the rate police command for a VLAN or you can configure the rate
police command for an interface. For each physical interface, you can configure three rate police
commands specifying different VLANS.

Quality of Service (QoS) | 833

 E-Series
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

On one interface, you can configure the rate limit or rate police command for a VLAN or you can
configure the rate limit or the rate police command for the interface.
For each physical interface, you can configure six rate police commands specifying different VLANS.
After configuring VLANs in the rate police command, if this error message appears:
%Error: Specified VLANs overlap with existing config.

Check to see if the same VLANs are used with the rate limit command on other interfaces. To clear
the problem, remove the rate limit configuration(s), and re-configure the rate police command. After
the rate police command is configured, return to the other interfaces and re-apply the rate limit
configuration.

Related
rate-police Police traffic output as part of the designated policy.
Commands

rate shape
ces Shape the traffic output on the selected interface.

Syntax rate shape [kbps] rate [burst-KB]

Parameters
kbps Enter this keyword to specify the rate limit in Kilobits per second (Kbps). On
C-Series and S-Series make the following value a multiple of 64. The default
granularity is Megabits per second (Mbps).
Range: 0-10000000
rate Enter the outgoing rate in multiples of 10 Mbps.
Range: 0 to 10000
burst-KB (OPTIONAL) Enter a number as the burst size in KB.
Range: 0 to 10000
Default: 10

Defaults Granularity for rate is Mbps unless the kbps option is used.

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Added kbps option on C-Series, E-Series, and Series.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series and on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Related
rate-shape Shape traffic output as part of the designated policy.
Commands

834 | Quality of Service (QoS)

service-class bandwidth-percentage
cs Specify a minimum bandwidth for queues

Syntax service-class bandwidth-percentage queue0 number queue1 number queue2 number

queue3 number

Parameters
number Enter the bandwidth-weight, as a percentage. The value must be a power of 2.
Range 1-1024.

Defaults None

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.5.0 Introduced on S55
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series.

Usage Guarantee a minimum bandwidth to different queues globally using the command service-class
Information bandwidth-weight from CONFIGURATION mode. The command is applied in the same way as the
bandwidth-weight command in an output QoS policy. The bandwidth-weight command in
QOS-POLICY-OUT mode supersedes the service-class bandwidth-weight command.

service-class dynamic dot1p

ces Honor all 802.1p markings on incoming switched traffic on an interface (from INTERFACE mode) or
on all interfaces (from CONFIGURATION mode). A CONFIGURATION mode entry supercedes
INTERFACE mode entries.

Syntax service-class dynamic dot1p

To return to the default setting, enter no service-class dynamic dot1p.

Defaults All dot1p traffic is mapped to Queue 0 unless service-class dynamic dot1p is enabled. Then the
default mapping is as follows:

Table 34-1. Default dot1p to Queue Mapping

E-Series C-Series S-Series

dot1p Queue ID Queue ID Queue ID
0 2 1 1
1 0 0 0
2 1 0 0
3 3 1 1
4 4 2 2
5 5 2 2
6 6 3 3
7 7 3 3

Quality of Service (QoS) | 835

 Command Modes INTERFACE
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

CONFIGURATION (C-Series and S-Series only)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Available globally on the C-Series and S-Series so that the configuration applies to all
ports.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.5.1.0 Expanded command to permit configuration on port channels
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage Enter this command to honor all incoming 802.1p markings, on incoming switched traffic, on the
Information interface. By default, this facility is not enabled (that is, the 802.1p markings on incoming traffic are
not honored).

This command can be applied on both physical interfaces and port channels. When you set the
service-class dynamic for a port channel, the physical interfaces assigned to the port channel are
automatically configured; you cannot assign the service-class dynamic command to individual
interfaces in a port channel.

On the C-Series and S-Series all traffic is by default mapped to the same queue, Queue 0. If you honor
dot1p on ingress, then you can create service classes based the queueing strategy using the command
service-class dynamic dot1p from INTERFACE mode. You may apply this queuing strategy to all
interfaces by entering this command from CONFIGURATION mode.

• All dot1p traffic is mapped to Queue 0 unless service-class dynamic dot1p is enabled on an
interface or globally.
• Layer 2 or Layer 3 service policies supercede dot1p service classes.

show interfaces rate

e Display information of either rate limiting or rate policing on the interface.

Syntax show interfaces [interface] rate [limit | police]

Parameters
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a 100/1000 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
limit (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword limit to view the outgoing traffic rate.
police (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword police to view the incoming traffic rate.

Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege

836 | Quality of Service (QoS)

Command
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series
History

Example Figure 34-1. show interfaces rate limit Command Example

FTOS#show interfaces gigabitEthernet 1/1 rate limit
Rate limit 300 (50) peak 800 (50)
Traffic Monitor 0: normal 300 (50) peak 800 (50)
Out of profile yellow 23386960 red 320605113
Traffic Monitor 1: normal NA peak NA
Out of profile yellow 0 red 0
Traffic Monitor 2: normal NA peak NA
Out of profile yellow 0 red 0
Traffic Monitor 3: normal NA peak NA
Out of profile yellow 0 red 0
Traffic Monitor 4: normal NA peak NA
Out of profile yellow 0 red 0
Traffic Monitor 5: normal NA peak NA
Out of profile yellow 0 red 0
Traffic Monitor 6: normal NA peak NA
Out of profile yellow 0 red 0
Traffic Monitor 7: normal NA peak NA
Out of profile yellow 0 red 0
Total: yellow 23386960 red 320605113

Table 34-2. show interfaces Command Example Fields

Field Description
Rate limit Committed rate (Mbs) and burst size (KB) of the committed rate
peak Peak rate (Mbs) and burst size (KB) of the peak rate
Traffic monitor 0 Traffic coming to class 0
Normal Committed rate (Mbs) and burst size (KB) of the committed rate
peak Peak rate (Mbs) and burst size (KB) of the peak rate
Out of profile Yellow Number of packets that have exceeded the configured committed rate
Out of profile Red Number of packets that have exceeded the configured peak rate
Traffic monitor 1 Traffic coming to class 1
Traffic monitor 2 Traffic coming to class 2
Traffic monitor 3 Traffic coming to class 3
Traffic monitor 4 Traffic coming to class 4
Traffic monitor 5 Traffic coming to class 5
Traffic monitor 6 Traffic coming to class 6
Traffic monitor 7 Traffic coming to class 7
Total: yellow Total number of packets that have exceeded the configured committed rate
Total: red Total number of packets that have exceeded the configured peak rate

Quality of Service (QoS) | 837

 Figure 34-2. show interfaces rate police Command Example
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show interfaces gigabitEthernet 1/2 rate police

Rate police 300 (50) peak 800 (50)
Traffic Monitor 0: normal 300 (50) peak 800 (50)
Out of profile yellow 23386960 red 320605113
Traffic Monitor 1: normal NA peak NA
Out of profile yellow 0 red 0
Traffic Monitor 2: normal NA peak NA
Out of profile yellow 0 red 0
Traffic Monitor 3: normal NA peak NA
Out of profile yellow 0 red 0
Traffic Monitor 4: normal NA peak NA
Out of profile yellow 0 red 0
Traffic Monitor 5: normal NA peak NA
Out of profile yellow 0 red 0
Traffic Monitor 6: normal NA peak NA
Out of profile yellow 0 red 0
Traffic Monitor 7: normal NA peak NA
Out of profile yellow 0 red 0
Total: yellow 23386960 red 320605113

Table 34-3. show interfaces police Command Example Fields

Field Description
Rate police Committed rate (Mbs) and burst size (KB) of the committed rate
peak Peak rate (Mbs) and burst size (KB) of the peak rate
Traffic monitor 0 Traffic coming to class 0
Normal Committed rate (Mbs) and burst size (KB) of the committed rate
peak Peak rate (Mbs) and burst size (KB) of the peak rate
Out of profile Yellow Number of packets that have exceeded the configured committed rate
Out of profile Red Number of packets that have exceeded the configured peak rate
Traffic monitor 1 Traffic coming to class 1
Traffic monitor 2 Traffic coming to class 2
Traffic monitor 3 Traffic coming to class 3
Traffic monitor 4 Traffic coming to class 4
Traffic monitor 5 Traffic coming to class 5
Traffic monitor 6 Traffic coming to class 6
Traffic monitor 7 Traffic coming to class 7
Total: yellow Total number of packets that have exceeded the configured committed rate
Total: red Total number of packets that have exceeded the configured peak rate

strict-priority queue
ces Configure a unicast queue as a strict-priority (SP) queue.

Syntax strict-priority queue unicast queue number

Parameters
unicast queue number Enter the keywords unicast queue followed by the queue number.
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1 to 3
E-Series Range: 1 to 7

838 | Quality of Service (QoS)

 Defaults No default behavior or value

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage Once a unicast queue is configured as strict-priority, that particular queue, on the entire chassis, is
Information treated as strict-priority queue. Traffic for a strict priority is scheduled before any other queues are
serviced. For example, if you send 100% line rate traffic over the SP queue, it will starve all other
queues on the ports on which this traffic is flowing.

Policy-Based QoS Commands

Policy-based traffic classification is handled with class maps. These maps classify unicast traffic into
one of eight classes in E-Series and one of four classes in C-Series and S-Series. FTOS enables you to
match multiple class maps and specify multiple match criteria. Policy-based QoS is not supported on
logical interfaces, such as port-channels, VLANS, or loopbacks. The commands are:
• bandwidth-percentage
• bandwidth-weight
• class-map
• clear qos statistics
• match ip access-group
• description
• match ip dscp
• match ip precedence
• match mac access-group
• match mac dot1p
• match mac vlan
• policy-aggregate
• policy-map-input
• policy-map-output
• qos-policy-input
• qos-policy-output
• queue backplane ignore-backpressure
• queue egress
• queue ingress
• rate-limit
• rate-police
• rate-shape
• service-policy input
• service-policy output
• service-queue

Quality of Service (QoS) | 839

 • set
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

• show cam layer2-qos

• show cam layer3-qos
• show qos class-map
• show qos policy-map
• show qos policy-map-input
• show qos policy-map-output
• show qos qos-policy-input
• show qos qos-policy-output
• show qos statistics
• show qos wred-profile
• test cam-usage
• threshold
• trust
• wred
• wred-profile

bandwidth-percentage
e Assign a percentage of weight to class/queue.

Syntax bandwidth-percentage percentage

To remove the bandwidth percentage, use the no bandwidth-percentage command.

Parameters
percentage Enter the percentage assignment of weight to class/queue.
Range: 0 to 100% (granularity 1%)

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-qos-policy-out)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage The unit of bandwidth percentage is 1%. A bandwidth percentage of 0 is allowed and will disable the
Information scheduling of that class. If the sum of the bandwidth percentages given to all eight classes exceeds
100%, the bandwidth percentage will automatically scale down to 100%.

Related
qos-policy-output Create a QoS output policy.
Commands

840 | Quality of Service (QoS)

bandwidth-weight
cs Assign a priority weight to a queue.

Syntax bandwidth-weight weight

To remove the bandwidth weight, use the no bandwidth-weight command.

Parameters
weight Enter the weight assignment to queue.
Range: 1 to 1024 (in increments of powers of 2: 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256,
512, or 1024)

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-qos-policy-out)

Command
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series

Usage This command is not supported on the S60.

Information
This command provides a minimum bandwidth guarantee to traffic flows in a particular queue. The
minimum bandwidth is provided by scheduling packets from that queue a certain number of times
relative to scheduling packets from the other queues using the Deficit Round Robin method.

Related
qos-policy-output Create a QoS output policy.
Commands

class-map
ces Create/access a class map. Class maps differentiate traffic so that you can apply separate quality of
service policies to each class.

Syntax class-map {match-all | match-any} class-map-name [layer2]

Parameters
match-all Determines how packets are evaluated when multiple match criteria exist.
Enter the keyword match-all to determine that the packets must meet all
the match criteria in order to be considered a member of the class.
match-any Determines how packets are evaluated when multiple match criteria exist.
Enter the keyword match-any to determine that the packets must meet at
least one of the match criteria in order to be considered a member of the
class.
class-map-name Enter a name of the class for the class map in a character format (32
character maximum).
layer2 Enter the keyword layer2 to specify a Layer 2 Class Map.
Default: Layer 3

Defaults Layer 3

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Quality of Service (QoS) | 841

 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60

History
Version 8.2.1.0 Class-map names can be 32 characters. layer2 available on C-Series and S-Series.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 E-Series Only: Expanded to add support for Layer 2

Usage Packets arriving at the input interface are checked against the match criteria, configured using this
Information command, to determine if the packet belongs to that class. This command accesses the CLASS-MAP
mode, where the configuration commands include match ip and match mac options.

Related
ip access-list extended Configure an extended IP ACL.
Commands
ip access-list standard Configure a standard IP ACL.
match ip access-group Configure the match criteria based on the access control list (ACL)
match ip precedence Identify IP precedence values as match criteria
match ip dscp Configure the match criteria based on the DSCP value
match mac access-group Configure a match criterion for a class map, based on the contents of the
designated MAC ACL.
match mac dot1p Configure a match criterion for a class map, based on a dot1p value.
match mac vlan Configure a match criterion for a class map based on VLAN ID.
service-queue Assign a class map and QoS policy to different queues.
show qos class-map View the current class map information.

clear qos statistics

ces Clears Matched Packets, Matched Bytes, and Dropped Packets. For TeraScale, clears Matched Packets,
Matched Bytes, Queued Packets, Queued Bytes, and Dropped Packets.

Syntax clear qos statistics interface-name.

Parameters
interface-name Enter one of the following keywords:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
GigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

842 | Quality of Service (QoS)

 Usage E-Series Only Behavior
Information
If a Policy QoS is applied on an interface when clear qos statistics is issued, it will clear the egress
counters in show queue statistics and vice versa. This behavior is due to the values being read from
the same hardware registers.
The clear qos statistics command clears both the queued and matched byte and packet counters if
the queued counters incremented based on classification of packets to the queues because of
policy-based QoS. If the queued counters were incremented because of some other reason and do not
reflect a matching QoS entry in CAM, then this command clears the matched byte and packet counters
only.

Related
show qos statistics Display qos statistics.
Commands

match ip access-group
ces Configure match criteria for a class map, based on the access control list (ACL).

Syntax match ip access-group access-group-name [set-ip-dscp value]

To remove ACL match criteria from a class map, enter no match ip access-group
access-group-name [set-ip-dscp value] command.

Parameters
access-group-name Enter the ACL name whose contents are used as the match criteria in
determining if packets belong to the class specified by class-map.
set-ip-dscp value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword set-ip-dscp followed by the IP DSCP
value. The matched traffic will be marked with the DSCP value.
Range: 0 to 63

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes CLASS-MAP CONFIGURATION (config-class-map)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Added DSCP Marking option support on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for DSCP Marking option
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage You must enter the class-map command in order to access this command. Once the class map is
Information identified, you can configure the match criteria. For class-map match-any, a maximum of five ACL
match criteria are allowed. For class-map match-all, only one ACL match criteria is allowed.

Related
class-map Identify the class map.
Commands

Quality of Service (QoS) | 843

 description
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Add a description to the selected policy map or QOS policy.

Syntax description {description}

To remove the description, use the no description {description} command.

Parameters
description Enter a description to identify the policies (80 characters maximum).

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (policy-map-input and policy-map-output; conf-qos-policy-in and

conf-qos-policy-out; wred)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
pre-Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced

Related
policy-map-input Create an input policy map.
Commands
policy-map-output Create an output policy map.
qos-policy-input Create an input QOS-policy on the router.
qos-policy-output Create an output QOS-policy on the router.
wred-profile Create a WRED profile.

match ip dscp
ces Use a DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point) value as a match criteria.

Syntax match ip dscp dscp-list [[multicast] set-ip-dscp value]

To remove a DSCP value as a match criteria, enter no match ip dscp dscp-list [[multicast]
set-ip-dscp value] command.

Parameters
dscp-list Enter the IP DSCP value(s) that is to be the match criteria. Separate values by
commas—no spaces ( 1,2,3 ) or indicate a list of values separated by a hyphen
(1-3).
Range: 0 to 63
multicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword multicast to match against multicast traffic.
Note: This option is not supported on C-Series or S-Series.
set-ip-dscp value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword set-ip-dscp followed by the IP DSCP value.
The matched traffic will be marked with the DSCP value.
Range: 0 to 63
Note: This option is not supported on S-Series.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes CLASS-MAP CONFIGURATION (config-class-map)

844 | Quality of Service (QoS)

 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Added keyword multicast.
Added DSCP Marking option support on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Added support for DSCP Marking option
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage You must enter the class-map command in order to access this command. Once the class map is
Information identified, you can configure the match criteria.

The match ip dscp and match ip precedence commands are mutually exclusive.

Up to 64 IP DSCP values can be matched in one match statement. For example, to indicate IP DCSP
values 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7, enter either the command match ip dscp 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 or match ip dscp
0-7.

Note: Only one of the IP DSCP values must be a successful match criterion, not all of the
specified IP DSCP values need to match.

Related
class-map Identify the class map.
Commands

match ip precedence
ces Use IP precedence values as a match criteria.

Syntax match ip precedence ip-precedence-list [[multicast] set-ip-dscp value]

To remove IP precedence as a match criteria, enter no match ip precedence ip-precedence-list
[[multicast] set-ip-dscp value] command.

Parameters
ip-precedence-list Enter the IP precedence value(s) as the match criteria. Separate values by
commas—no spaces ( 1,2,3 ) or indicate a list of values separated by a
hyphen (1-3).
Range: 0 to 7
multicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword multicast to match against multicast
traffic.
Note: This option is not supported on C-Series or S-Series.
set-ip-dscp value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword set-ip-dscp followed by the IP DSCP
value. The matched traffic will be marked with the DSCP value.
Range: 0 to 63
Note: This option is not supported on S-Series.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes CLASS-MAP CONFIGURATION (conf-class-map)

Quality of Service (QoS) | 845

 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60

History
Version 7.7.1.0 Added keyword multicast.
Added DSCP marking option support for S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Added support for DSCP Marking option
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage You must enter the class-map command in order to access this command. Once the class map is
Information identified, you can configure the match criteria.

The match ip precedence command and the match ip dscp command are mutually exclusive.

Up to eight precedence values can be matched in one match statement. For example, to indicate the IP
precedence values 0 1 2 3 enter either the command match ip precedence 0-3 or match ip
precedence 0,1,2,3.

Note: Only one of the IP precedence values must be a successful match criterion, not all of
the specified IP precedence values need to match.

Related
class-map Identify the class map.
Commands

match mac access-group

ces Configure a match criterion for a class map, based on the contents of the designated MAC ACL.

Syntax match mac access-group {mac-acl-name}

Parameters
mac-acl-name Enter a MAC ACL name. Its contents will be used as the match criteria in the class map.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes CLASS-MAP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Available on the C-Series and S-Series.
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for DSCP Marking option
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced

Usage You must enter the class-map command in order to access this command. Once the class map is
Information identified, you can configure the match criteria.

Related
class-map Identify the class map.
Commands

846 | Quality of Service (QoS)

match mac dot1p
ces Configure a match criterion for a class map, based on a dot1p value.

Syntax match mac dot1p {dot1p-list}

Parameters
dot1p-list Enter a dot1p value.
Range: 0–7

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes CLASS-MAP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Available on the C-Series and S-Series.
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for DSCP Marking option
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced

Usage You must enter the class-map command in order to access this command. Once the class map is
Information identified, you can configure the match criteria.

Related
class-map Identify the class map.
Commands

match mac vlan

ces Configure a match criterion for a class map based on VLAN ID.

Syntax match mac vlan number

Parameters
number Enter the VLAN ID.
Range: 1–4094

Defaults None

Command Modes CLASS-MAP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.2.0.1 Introduced

Usage You must first enter the class-map command in order to access this command. You can match against
Information only one VLAN ID.

Related
class-map Create/access a class map.
Commands

Quality of Service (QoS) | 847

 policy-aggregate
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Allow an aggregate method of configuring per-port QoS via policy maps. An aggregate QoS policy is
part of the policy map (input/output) applied on an interface.

Syntax policy-aggregate qos-policy-name

To remove a policy aggregate configuration, use no policy-aggregate qos-policy-name command.

Parameters
qos-policy-name Enter the name of the policy map in character format (32 characters maximum)

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (policy-map-input and policy-map-output)

This command is supported on C-Series, S-Series, and the S60 under policy-map-output only.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Policy name character limit increased from 16 to 32.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage C-Series and S-Series

Information
Aggregate input/output QoS policy applies to all the port ingoing/outgoing traffic. Aggregate input/
output QoS policy can co-exist with per queue input/output QoS policies.

1. If only aggregate input QoS policy exists, input traffic conditioning configurations (rate-police)
will apply. Any marking configurations in aggregate input QoS policy will be ignored.
2. If aggregate input QoS policy and per class input QoS policy co-exist, then aggregate input QoS
policy will preempt per class input QoS policy on input traffic conditioning (rate-police). In other
words, if rate police configuration exists in aggregate QoS policy, the rate police configurations in
per class QoS are ignored. Marking configurations in per class input QoS policy still apply to each
queue.
E-Series
Aggregate input/output QoS policy applies to all the port ingoing/outgoing traffic. Aggregate input/
output QoS policy can co-exist with per queue input/output QoS policies.

1. If only an aggregate input QoS policy exists, input traffic conditioning configurations (rate-police)
will apply. Any marking configurations in the aggregate input QoS policy will be ignored.
2. If an aggregate input QoS policy and a per-class input QoS policy co-exist, then the aggregate
input QoS policy will preempt the per-class input QoS policy on input traffic conditioning
(rate-police). In other words, if a rate police configuration exists in the aggregate QoS policy, the
rate police configurations in the per-class QoS are ignored. Marking configurations in the per-class
input QoS policy still apply to each queue.
3. If only an aggregate output QoS policy exists, egress traffic conditioning configurations (rate-limit
and rate-shape) in the aggregate output QoS policy will apply. Scheduling and queuing configura-
tions in the aggregate output QoS policy (if existing) are ignored. Each queue will use default
scheduling and queuing configuration (Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED) and Band-
width).

848 | Quality of Service (QoS)

 4. If the aggregate output QoS policy and per-queue output QoS policy co-exist, the aggregate output
QoS policy will preempt a per-queue output QoS policy on egress traffic conditioning (rate-limit).
In other words, if a rate limit configuration exists in the aggregate output QoS policy, the rate limit
configurations in per-queue output QoS policies are ignored. Scheduling and queuing configura-
tions (WRED and Bandwidth) in the per-queue output QoS policy still apply to each queue.

Related
policy-map-input Create an input policy map
Commands
policy-map-output Create an output policy map (E-Series Only)

policy-map-input
ces Create an input policy map.

Syntax policy-map-input policy-map-name [layer2]

To remove an input policy map, use the no policy-map-input policy-map-name [layer2] command.

Parameters
policy-map-name Enter the name for the policy map in character format (32 characters maximum).
layer2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword layer2 to specify a Layer 2 Class Map.
Default: Layer 3

Defaults Layer 3

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Policy name character limit increased from 16 to 32.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Expanded to add support for Layer 2
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage Input policy map is used to classify incoming traffic to different flows using class-map, QoS policy, or
Information simply using incoming packets DSCP. This command enables policy-map-input configuration mode
(conf-policy-map-in).

Related
service-queue Assign a class map and QoS policy to different queues.
Commands
policy-aggregate Allow an aggregate method of configuring per-port QoS via policy maps.
service-policy input Apply an input policy map to the selected interface.

Quality of Service (QoS) | 849

 policy-map-output
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Create an output policy map.

Syntax policy-map-output policy-map-name

To remove a policy map, use the no policy-map-output policy-map-name command.

Parameters
policy-map-name Enter the name for the policy map in character format (16 characters
maximum).

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Policy name character limit increased from 16 to 32.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage Output policy map is used to assign traffic to different flows using QoS policy. This command enables
Information the policy-map-output configuration mode (conf-policy-map-out).

Related
service-queue Assign a class map and QoS policy to different queues.
Commands
policy-aggregate Allow an aggregate method of configuring per-port QoS via policy maps.
service-policy output Apply an output policy map to the selected interface.

qos-policy-input
ces Create a QoS input policy on the router.

Syntax qos-policy-input qos-policy-name [layer2]

To remove an existing input QoS policy from the router, use no qos-policy-input qos-policy-name
[layer2] command.

Parameters
qos-policy-name Enter your input QoS policy name in character format (32 character
maximum).
layer2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword layer2 to specify a Layer 2 Class Map.
Default: Layer 3

Defaults Layer 3

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Policy name character limit increased from 16 to 32.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

850 | Quality of Service (QoS)

 Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 E-Series Only: Expanded to add support for Layer 2

Usage Use this command to specify the name of the input QoS policy. Once input policy is specified,
Information rate-police can be defined. This command enables the qos-policy-input configuration mode—
(conf-qos-policy-in).

When changing a “service-queue” configuration in a QoS policy map, all QoS rules are deleted and
re-added automatically to ensure that the order of the rules is maintained. As a result, the Matched
Packets value shown in the “show qos statistics” command is reset.

Note: On ExaScale, FTOS cannot classify IGMP packets on a Layer 2 interface using Layer 3
policy map. The packets always take the default queue, Queue 0, and cannot be rate-policed.
Related
rate-police Incoming traffic policing function
Commands

qos-policy-output
ces Create a QoS output policy.

Syntax qos-policy-output qos-policy-name

To remove an existing output QoS policy, use no qos-policy-output qos-policy-name command.

Parameters
qos-policy-name Enter your output QoS policy name in character format (32 character
maximum).

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Policy name character limit increased from 16 to 32.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage Use this command to specify the name of the output QoS policy. Once output policy is specified,
Information rate-limit, bandwidth-percentage, and WRED can be defined. This command enables the
qos-policy-output configuration mode—(conf-qos-policy-out).

When changing a “service-queue” configuration in a QoS policy map, all QoS rules are deleted and
re-added automatically to ensure that the order of the rules is maintained. As a result, the Matched
Packets value shown in the “show qos statistics” command is reset.

Related
Commands rate-limit Outgoing traffic rate-limit functionality
bandwidth-percentage Assign weight to class/queue percentage
bandwidth-weight Assign a priority weight to a queue.
wred Assign yellow or green drop precedence

Quality of Service (QoS) | 851

 queue backplane ignore-backpressure
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

e Reduce egress pressure by ignoring the ingress backpressure

Syntax queue backplane ignore-backpressure

To return to the default, use the no queue backplane ignore-backpressure command.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on E-Series
History

queue egress
e Assign a WRED Curve to all eight egress Multicast queues or designate the percentage for the
Multicast bandwidth queue.

Syntax queue egress multicast linecard {slot number port-set number | all} [wred-profile name |
multicast-bandwidth percentage]
To return to the default, use the no queue egress multicast linecard {slot number port-set
number | all} [wred-profile name | multicast-bandwidth percentage] command.

Parameters
linecard number Enter the keyword linecard followed by the line card slot number.
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on a E1200, 0 to 6 on a E600/E600i, and 0 to 5 on a
E300.
port-set number Enter the keyword port-set followed by the line card’s port pipe.
Range: 0 or 1
all Enter the keyword all to apply to all line cards.
wred-profile name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword wred-profile followed by your WRED
profile name in character format (16 character maximum). Or use one of the
pre-defined WRED profile names.
Pre-defined Profiles:
wred_drop, wred-ge_y, wred_ge_g, wred_teng_y, wred_teng_g
multicast-bandwidth (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword multicast-bandwidth followed by the
percentage bandwidth percentage.
Range: 0 to 100%

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for multicast-bandwidth
History
Version 7.4.1.0 and 6.5.3.0 Introduced on E-Series

Usage This command does not uniquely identify a queue, but rather identifies only a set of queues. The
Information WRED curve is applied to all eight egress Multicast queues.

852 | Quality of Service (QoS)

 Important Points to Remember—multicast-bandwidth option
• A unique Multicast Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ) setting can be applied only on a per port-pipe
basis. The minimum percentage of the multicast bandwidth assigned to any of the ports in the
port-pipe will take effect for the entire port-pipe.
• If the percentage of multicast bandwidth is 0, control traffic going through multicast queues are
dropped.
• The no form of the command without multicast-bandwidth and wred-profile, will remove
both the wred-profile and multicast-bandwidth configuration.
• On 10 Gigabit ports only, the multicast bandwidth option will work only if the total unicast
bandwidth is more than the multicast bandwidth.
• If strict priority is applied along with multicast-bandwidth, the effect of strict priority is on all
ports where unicast and multicast bandwidth are applied.
• When multicast bandwidth is assigned along with unicast bandwidth, first multicast bandwidth
will be reserved for that port, then the remaining unicast bandwidth configured is adjusted
according to the bandwidth available after reserving for multicast bandwidth.
Related
Commands show queue statistics egress Display the egress queue statistics

queue ingress
e Assign a WRED Curve to all eight ingress Multicast queues or designate the percentage for the
Multicast bandwidth queue.

Syntax queue ingress multicast {linecard slot number port-set number | all} [wred-profile name]
To return to the default, use the no queue ingress multicast {linecard slot number port-set
number | all} [wred-profile name] command.

Parameters
linecard number Enter the keyword linecard followed by the line card slot number.
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on a E1200, 0 to 6 on a E600/E600i, and 0 to 5 on a
E300.
port-set number Enter the keyword port-set followed by the line card’s port pipe.
Range: 0 or 1
all Enter the keyword all to apply to all line cards.
wred-profile name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword wred-profile followed by your WRED
profile name in character format (16 character maximum). Or use one of the
pre-defined WRED profile names.
Pre-defined Profiles:
wred_drop, wred-ge_y, wred_ge_g, wred_teng_y, wred_teng_g

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 7.4.1.0 and 6.5.3.0 Introduced on E-Series
History

Quality of Service (QoS) | 853

 Usage This command does not uniquely identify a queue, but rather identifies only a set of queues. The
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Information WRED Curve is applied to all eight ingress Multicast queues.

Note: The multicast-bandwidth option is not supported on queue ingress. If you attempt to
use the multicast-bandwidth option, the following reject error message is generated:
% Error:Bandwidth-percent is not allowed for ingress
multicast

Related
Commands show queue statistics ingress Display the ingress queue statistics

rate-limit
e Specify the rate-limit functionality on outgoing traffic as part of the selected policy.

Syntax rate-limit [kbps] committed-rate [burst-KB] [peak [kbps] peak-rate [burst-KB]]

Parameters
kbps Enter this keyword to specify the rate limit in Kilobits per second (Kbps). On
the E-Series, Dell Networking recommends using a value greater than or
equal to 512 as lower values does not yield accurate results. The default
granularity is Megabits per second (Mbps).
Range: 0-10000000
committed-rate Enter the committed rate in Mbps.
Range: 0 to 10000 Mbps
burst-KB (OPTIONAL) Enter the burst size in KB.
Range: 16 to 200000 KB
Default: 50 KB
peak peak-rate (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword peak followed by the peak rate in Mbps.
Range: 0 to 10000 Mbps
Default: Same as designated for committed-rate

Defaults Burst size is 50 KB. peak-rate is by default the same as committed-rate. Granularity for
committed-rate and peak-rate is Mbps unless the kbps option is used.

Command Modes QOS-POLICY-OUT

Command
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Added kbps option on E-Series.
Version 7.7.1.0 Removed from C-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Related
rate limit Specify rate-limit functionality on the selected interface.
Commands
qos-policy-output Create a QoS output policy.

854 | Quality of Service (QoS)

rate-police
ces Specify the policing functionality on incoming traffic.

Syntax rate-police [kbps] committed-rate [burst-KB] [peak [kbps] peak-rate [burst-KB]]

Parameters
kbps Enter this keyword to specify the rate limit in Kilobits per second (Kbps). On
C-Series and S-Series make the following value a multiple of 64. On the E-Series,
Dell Networking recommends using a value greater than or equal to 512 as lower
values does not yield accurate results. The default granularity is Megabits per
second (Mbps).
Range: 0-10000000
committed-rate Enter the committed rate in Mbps.
Range: 0 to 10000 Mbps
burst-KB (OPTIONAL) Enter the burst size in KB.
Range: 16 to 200000 KB
Default: 50 KB
peak peak-rate (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword peak followed by the peak rate in Mbps.
Range: 0 to 10000 Mbps
Default: Same as designated for committed-rate

Defaults Burst size is 50 KB. peak-rate is by default the same as committed-rate. Granularity for
committed-rate and peak-rate is Mbps unless the kbps option is used.

Command Modes QOS-POLICY-IN

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Added kbps option on C-Series, E-Series, and Series.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Related
rate police Specify traffic policing on the selected interface.
Commands
qos-policy-input Create a QoS output policy.

rate-shape
ces Shape traffic output as part of the designated policy.

Syntax rate-shape [kbps] rate [burst-KB]

Parameters
kbps Enter this keyword to specify the rate limit in Kilobits per second (Kbps). On
C-Series and S-Series make the following value a multiple of 64. The default
granularity is Megabits per second (Mbps).
Range: 0-10000000

Quality of Service (QoS) | 855

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

rate Enter the outgoing rate in multiples of 10 Mbps.

Range: 0 to 10000
burst-KB (OPTIONAL) Enter a number as the burst size in KB.
Range: 0 to 10000
Default: 10

Defaults Burst size is 10 KB. Granularity for rate is Mbps unless the kbps option is used.

Command Modes QOS-POLICY-OUT

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Added kbps option on C-Series, E-Series, and Series.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage rate-shape can be applied only as an aggregate policy. If it is applied as a class-based policy, then
Information rate-shape will not take effect.

Related
rate shape Shape the traffic output of the selected interface.
Commands
qos-policy-output Create a QoS output policy.

service-policy input
ces Apply an input policy map to the selected interface.

Syntax service-policy input policy-map-name [layer2]

To remove the input policy map from the interface, use the no service-policy input
policy-map-name [layer2] command.

Parameters
policy-map-name Enter the name for the policy map in character format (16 characters
maximum). You can identify an existing policy map or name one that
does not yet exist.
layer2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword layer2 to specify a Layer 2 Class Map.
Default: Layer 3

Defaults Layer 3

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 E-Series Only: Expanded to add support for Layer 2
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

856 | Quality of Service (QoS)

 Usage A single policy-map can be attached to one or more interfaces to specify the service-policy for those
Information interfaces. A policy map attached to an interface can be modified.

Note: The service-policy commands are not allowed on a port channel.

The service-policy input policy-map-name command and the service-class dynamic
dot1p command are not allowed simultaneously on an interface. However, the service-policy
input command (without the policy-map-name option) and the service-class dynamic
dot1p command are allowed on an interface.

Related
policy-map-input Create an input policy map.
Commands

service-policy output
ces Apply an output policy map to the selected interface.

Syntax service-policy output policy-map-name

To remove the output policy map from the interface, use the no service-policy output
policy-map-name command.

Parameters
policy-map-name Enter the name for the policy map in character format (16 characters
maximum). You can identify an existing policy map or name one that
does not yet exist.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage A single policy-map can be attached to one or more interfaces to specify the service-policy for those
Information interfaces. A policy map attached to an interface can be modified.

Related
policy-map-output Create an output policy map.
Commands

service-queue
ces Assign a class map and QoS policy to different queues.

Syntax service-queue queue-id [class-map class-map-name] [qos-policy qos-policy-name]

To remove the queue assignment, use the no service-queue queue-id [class-map
class-map-name] [qos-policy qos-policy-name] command.

Quality of Service (QoS) | 857

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

queue-id Enter the value used to identify a queue.

Range: 0 to 7 on E-Series (eight queues per interface), 0-3 on C-Series and
S-Series (four queues per interface; four queues are reserved for control
traffic.)
class-map (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword class-map followed by the class map
class-map-name name assigned to the queue in character format (16 character maximum).
Note: This option is available under policy-map-input only.
qos-policy (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword qos-policy followed by the QoS policy
qos-policy-name name assigned to the queue in text format (16 characters maximum). This
specifies the input QoS policy assigned to the queue under policy-map-input
and output QoS policy under policy-map-output context.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-policy-map-in and conf-policy-map-out)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage There are eight (8) queues per interface on the E-Series and four (4) queues per interface on the
Information C-Series and S-Series. This command assigns a class map or QoS policy to different queues.

Related
class-map Identify the class map.
Commands
service-policy input Apply an input policy map to the selected interface.
service-policy output Apply an output policy map to the selected interface.

set
ces Mark outgoing traffic with a Differentiated Service Code Point (DSCP) or dot1p value.

Syntax set {ip-dscp value | mac-dot1p value}

Parameters
ip-dscp value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ip-dscp followed by the IP DSCP value.
Range: 0 to 63
mac-dot1p value Enter the keyword mac-dot1p followed by the dot1p value.
Range: 0 to 7
On the C-Series and S-Series allowed values are:0,2,4,6

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-qos-policy-in)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.2.1.0 mac-dot1p available on the C-Series and S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

858 | Quality of Service (QoS)

 Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 E-Series Only: Expanded to add support for mac-dot1p
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage C-Series and S-Series

Information
Once the IP DSCP bit is set, other QoS services can then operate on the bit settings.

E-Series
Once the IP DSCP bit is set, other QoS services can then operate on the bit settings. WRED (Weighted
Random Early Detection) ensures that high-precedence traffic has lower loss rates than other traffic
during times of congestion.

show cam layer2-qos

e Display the Layer 2 QoS CAM entries.

Syntax show cam layer2-qos {[linecard number port-set number] | [interface interface]} [summary]

Parameters
linecard number Enter the keyword linecard followed by the line card slot number.
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on a E1200, 0 to 6 on a E600/E600i, and 0 to 5 on a
E300.
port-set number Enter the keyword port-set followed by the line card’s port pipe.
Range: 0 or 1
interface interface Enter the keyword interface followed by one of the keywords below and
slot/port or number information:
• For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword FastEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/
port information.
• For a Ten Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to display only the total
number of CAM entries.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes EXEC

Command
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series
History

Quality of Service (QoS) | 859

 Example Figure 34-3. show cam layer2-qos interface Command Output
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show cam layer2-qos interface gigabitethernet 2/0

Cam Port Dot1p Proto SrcMac SrcMask DstMac DstMask Dot1p DSCP Queue
Index Marking Marking
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------
01817 0 - 0 00:00:00:00:cc:cc 00:00:00:00:ff:ff 00:00:00:00:dd:dd 00:00:00:00:ff:ff - - 7
01818 0 - 0 00:00:00:00:00:c0 00:00:00:00:00:f0 00:00:00:00:00:d0 00:00:00:00:00:f0 - 45 5
01819 0 4 0 00:00:00:a0:00:00 00:00:00:ff:00:00 00:00:00:b0:00:00 00:00:00:ff:00:00 4 - 4
01820 0 - 0x2000 00:00:00:00:00:00 00:00:00:00:00:00 00:00:00:00:00:b0 ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff - - 1
02047 0 - 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 00:00:00:00:00:00 00:00:00:00:00:00 00:00:00:00:00:00 - - 0
FTOS#

Example Figure 34-4. show cam layer2-qos linecard Command Output

FTOS#show cam layer2-qos linecard 2 port-set 0

Cam Port Dot1p Proto SrcMac SrcMask DstMac DstMask Dot1p DSCP Queue
Index Marking Marking
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------=--
01817 0 - 0 00:00:00:00:cc:cc 00:00:00:00:ff:ff 00:00:00:00:dd:dd 00:00:00:00:ff:ff - - 7
01818 0 - 0 00:00:00:00:00:c0 00:00:00:00:00:f0 00:00:00:00:00:d0 00:00:00:00:00:f0 - 45 5
01819 0 4 0 00:00:00:a0:00:00 00:00:00:ff:00:00 00:00:00:b0:00:00 00:00:00:ff:00:00 4 - 4
01820 0 - 0x2000 00:00:00:00:00:00 00:00:00:00:00:00 00:00:00:00:00:b0 ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff - - 1
02047 0 - 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 00:00:00:00:00:00 00:00:00:00:00:00 00:00:00:00:00:00 - - 0
FTOS#

show cam layer3-qos

e Display the Layer 3 QoS CAM entries.

Syntax show cam layer3-qos {[linecard number port-set number] | [interface interface]} [summary]

Parameters
linecard number Enter the keyword linecard followed by the line card slot number.
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on a E1200, 0 to 6 on a E600/E600i, and 0 to 5 on a
E300.
port-set number Enter the keyword port-set followed by the line card’s port pipe.
Range: 0 or 1
interface interface Enter the keyword interface followed by one of the keywords below and
slot/port or number information:
• For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword FastEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/
port information.
• For a Ten Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to display only the total
number of CAM entries.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes EXEC

Command
Version 6.5.1.0 Introduced on E-Series
History

860 | Quality of Service (QoS)

Example Figure 34-5. show cam layer3-qos linecard interface Command Output

FTOS#sh cam layer3-qos interface gigabitethernet 2/1

Cam Port Dscp Proto Tcp Src Dst SrcIp DstIp DSCP Queue
Index Flag Port Port Marking
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----
23488 1 0 0 0x0 0 0 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 - TRUST-DSCP
FTOS#

In these figures outputs, note that:

• The entry TRUST-DSCP in the Queue column indicates that the trust diffserv is configured on the
policy-map.
• A hyphen (-) entry in the DSCP Marking column indicates that there is no DSCP marking.
• In the Proto column (Protocol), IP, ICMP, UDP, and TCP strings are displayed. For other
protocols, the corresponding protocol number is displayed.

Example Figure 34-6. show cam layer3-qos linecard port-set Command Output

FTOS#show cam layer3-qos linecard 13 port-set 0

Cam Port Dscp Proto Tcp Src Dst SrcIp DstIp DSCP Queue
Index Flag Port Port Marking
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
24511 1 0 TCP 0x5 2 5 1.0.0.1/24 2.0.0.2/24 - TRUST-DSCP
24512 1 0 UDP 0x2 2 5 8.0.0.8/24 8.0.0.8/24 23 3

FTOS#

Example Figure 34-7. show cam layer3-qos linecard interface Command without Trust Output

FTOS#sh cam layer3-qos interface gigabitethernet 2/1

Cam Port Dscp Proto Tcp Src Dst SrcIp DstIp DSCP Queue
Index Flag Port Port Marking
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------
23488 1 56 0 0x0 0 0 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 - 7
23489 1 48 0 0x0 0 0 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 - 6
23490 1 40 0 0x0 0 0 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 - 5
23491 1 0 IP 0x0 0 0 10.1.1.1/32 20.1.1.1/32 - 0
23492 1 0 IP 0x0 0 0 10.1.1.1/32 20.1.1.2/32 - 0
24511 1 0 0 0x0 0 0 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 - 0
FTOS#

Example Figure 34-8. show cam layer3-qos summary Command Output

FTOS#show cam layer3-qos linecard 13 port-set 0 summary

Total number of CAM entries for Port-Set 0 is 100

FTOS#

Quality of Service (QoS) | 861

 show qos class-map
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces View the current class map information.

Syntax show qos class-map [class-name]

Parameters
class-name (Optional) Enter the name of a configured class map.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 34-9. show qos class-map Command Output

FTOS#show qos class-map

Class-map match-any CM
Match ip access-group ACL

Related
class-map Identify the class map
Commands

show qos policy-map

ces View the QoS policy map information.

Syntax show qos policy-map {summary [interface] | detail [interface]}

Parameters
summary To view a policy map interface summary, enter the keyword summary and optionally one
interface of the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword FastEthernet followed by the slot/
port information.
• For a Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by the
slot/port information.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Ten Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.

862 | Quality of Service (QoS)

 detail To view a policy map interface in detail, enter the keyword detail and optionally one of the
interface following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword FastEthernet followed by the slot/
port information.
• For a Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by the
slot/port information.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Ten Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 E-Series only: Added Trust IPv6 diffserv
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Example 1 Figure 34-10. show qos policy-map detail (IPv4) Command Output
FTOS#show qos policy-map detail gigabitethernet 0/0

Interface GigabitEthernet 4/1

Policy-map-input policy
Trust diffserv
Queue# Class-map-name Qos-policy-name
0 - q0
1 CM1 q1
2 CM2 q2
3 CM3 q3
4 CM4 q4
5 CM5 q5
6 CM6 q6
7 CM7 q7
FTOS#

Example 2 Figure 34-11. show qos policy-map detail (IPv6) Command Output (E-Series only)
FTOS# show qos policy-map detail gigabitethernet 0/0

Interface GigabitEthernet 8/29

Policy-map-input pmap1
Trust ipv6-diffserv
Queue# Class-map-name Qos-policy-name
0 c0 q0
1 c1 q1
2 c2 q2
3 c3 q3
4 c4 q4
5 c5 -
6 c6 q6
7 c7 q7
FTOS#

Quality of Service (QoS) | 863

 Example 3 Figure 34-12. show qos policy-map summary (IPv4) Command Output
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show qos policy-map summary

Interface policy-map-input policy-map-output

Gi 4/1 PM1 -
Gi 4/2 PM2 PMOut
FTOS#

show qos policy-map-input

ces View the input QoS policy map details.

Syntax show qos policy-map-input [policy-map-name] [class class-map-name] [qos-policy-input

qos-policy-name]

Parameters
policy-map-name Enter the policy map name.
class class-map-name Enter the keyword class followed by the class map name.

qos-policy-input Enter the keyword qos-policy-input followed by the QoS policy name.
qos-policy-name

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 E-Series Only: Added Trust IPv6 diffserv
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Example 1 Figure 34-13. show qos policy-map-input (IPv4) Command Output

FTOS#show qos policy-map-input

Policy-map-input PolicyMapInput
Aggregate Qos-policy-name AggPolicyIn
Queue# Class-map-name Qos-policy-name
0 ClassMap1 qosPolicyInput
FTOS#

864 | Quality of Service (QoS)

 Example 2 Figure 34-14. show qos policy-map-input (IPv6) Command Output
FTOS# show qos policy-map-input

Policy-map-input pmap1
Trust ipv6-diffserv
Queue# Class-map-name Qos-policy-name
0 c0 q0
1 c1 q1
2 c2 q2
3 c3 q3
4 c4 q4
5 c5 -
6 c6 q6
7 c7 q7
FTOS#

show qos policy-map-output

ces View the output QoS policy map details.

Syntax show qos policy-map-output [policy-map-name] [qos-policy-output qos-policy-name]

Parameters
policy-map-name Enter the policy map name.
qos-policy-output qos-policy-name Enter the keyword qos-policy-output followed by the
QoS policy name.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 34-15. show qos policy-map-output Command Output

FTOS#show qos policy-map-output

Policy-map-output PolicyMapOutput
Aggregate Qos-policy-name AggPolicyOut
Queue# Qos-policy-name
0 qosPolicyOutput
FTOS#

show qos qos-policy-input

ces View the input QoS policy details.

Syntax show qos qos-policy-input [qos-policy-name]

Parameters
qos-policy-name Enter the QoS policy name.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Quality of Service (QoS) | 865

 Command Modes EXEC
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 34-16. show qos qos-policy-input Command Output

FTOS#show qos qos-policy-input

Qos-policy-input QosInput
Rate-police 100 50 peak 100 50
Dscp 32
FTOS#

show qos qos-policy-output

ces View the output QoS policy details.

Syntax show qos qos-policy-output [qos-policy-name]

Parameters
qos-policy-name Enter the QoS policy name.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 34-17. show qos qos-policy-output Command Output

FTOS#show qos qos-policy-output

Qos-policy-output qosOut
Rate-limit 50 50 peak 50 50
Wred yellow 1
Wred green 1

866 | Quality of Service (QoS)

show qos statistics
ces View QoS statistics.

Syntax show qos statistics {wred-profile [interface]} | [interface]

Parameters
wred-profile interface Platform—E-Series Only: Enter the keyword wred-profile and
optionally one of the following keywords and slot/port or number
information:
• For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword FastEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/
port information.
• For a Ten Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
interface Enter one of the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• On the C-Series and E-Series, For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the
keyword FastEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/
port information.
• For a Ten Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.7.1.1 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage The show qos statistics command can be used on the C-Series, but the wred-profile keyword must
Information be omitted in the syntax. The show qos statistics output differs from the ED and EE series line cards
and the EF series line cards. The QoS statistics for the EF series generates two extra columns, Queued
Pkts and Dropped Pkts, see Example 2.

Note: The show qos statistics command displays Matched Packets and Matched Bytes.
The show queue statistics egress command (E-Series only) displays Queued Packets and Queued
Bytes. The following example explains how these two displays relate to each other.
• 9000 byte size packets are sent from Interface A to Interface B.
• The Matched Packets on Interface A are equal to the Queued Packets on Interface B.
• Matched bytes on Interface A = matched packets *9000
• Queued bytes on Interface B = queued packets *(9020)—Each packet has an additional
header of 20 bytes.

Quality of Service (QoS) | 867

 Example 1 Figure 34-18. show qos statistics Command Output (ED and EE Series of E-Series)
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show qos statistics

Interface Gi 0/0
Queue# Queued Bytes Matched Pkts Matched Bytes
0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0

Interface Gi 0/1
Queue# Queued Bytes Matched Pkts Matched Bytes
0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0

Table 34-4. show qos statistics Command Example Fields (ED and EE Series)

Field Description
Queue # Queue Number
Queued Bytes Snapshot of the byte count in that queue.
Matched Pkts The number of packets that matched the class-map criteria.
Note: When trust is configured, matched packet counters are not
incremented in this field.
Matched Bytes The number of bytes that matched the class-map criteria.
Note: When trust is configured, matched byte counters are not
incremented in this field.

Example 2 Figure 34-19. show qos statistics Command Output (EFSeries of E-Series)
FTOS#show qos statistics gig 0/1

Queue# Queued Queued Matched Matched Dropped

Bytes Pkts Pkts Bytes Pkts
(Cumulative) (Cumulative)
0 0 0 1883725 1883725000 0
1 0 0 1883725 1883725000 0
2 0 0 1883725 1883725000 0
3 0 0 1883725 1883725000 0
4 0 0 1883725 1883725000 0
5 0 0 1883724 1883724000 0
6 0 0 1883720 1883720000 0
7 0 0 1883720 1883720000 0

FTOS#

Table 34-5. show qos statistics Command Example Fields (EF Series)

Field Description
Queue # Queue Number
Queued Bytes Cumulative byte count in that queue

868 | Quality of Service (QoS)

 Table 34-5. show qos statistics Command Example Fields (EF Series) (continued)

Field Description
Queued Pkts Cumulative packet count in that queue.
Matched Pkts The number of packets that matched the class-map criteria.
Note: When trust is configured, matched packet counters are not incremented in
this field.
Matched Bytes The number of bytes that matched the class-map criteria.
Note: When trust is configured, matched byte counters are not incremented in this
field.
Dropped Pkts The total of the number of packets dropped for green, yellow and out-of-profile.

Example 3 Figure 34-20. show qos statistics wred-profile Command Output (ED, EE, and EF
Series)
FTOS#show qos statistics wred-profile
Interface Gi 5/11
Queue# Drop-statistic WRED-name Dropped Pkts

0 Green WRED1 51623

Yellow WRED2 51300
Out of Profile 0
1 Green WRED1 52082
Yellow WRED2 51004
Out of Profile 0
2 Green WRED1 50567
Yellow WRED2 49965
Out of Profile 0
3 Green WRED1 50477
Yellow WRED2 49815
Out of Profile 0
4 Green WRED1 50695
Yellow WRED2 49476
Out of Profile 0
5 Green WRED1 50245
Yellow WRED2 49535
Out of Profile 0
6 Green WRED1 50033
Yellow WRED2 49595
Out of Profile 0
7 Green WRED1 50474
Yellow WRED2 49522
Out of Profile 0
FTOS#

Table 34-6. show qos statistics wred-profile Command Example Fields (ED, EE, and EF
Series)

Field Description
Queue # Queue Number
Drop-statistic Drop statistics for green, yellow and out-of-profile packets
WRED-name WRED profile name
Dropped Pkts The number of packets dropped for green, yellow and out-of-profile

Related
clear qos statistics Clears counters as shown in show qos statistics
Commands

Quality of Service (QoS) | 869

 show qos wred-profile
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

e View the WRED profile details.

Syntax show qos wred-profile wred-profile-name

Parameters
wred-profile-name Enter the WRED profile name to view the profile details.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series
History

Example Figure 34-21. show qos wred-profile Command Output

FTOS#show qos wred-profile

Wred-profile-name min-threshold max-threshold

wred_drop 0 0
wred_ge_y 1024 2048
wred_ge_g 2048 4096
wred_teng_y 4096 8192
wred_teng_g 8192 16384
WRED1 2000 7000

test cam-usage
ces Check the Input Policy Map configuration for the CAM usage.

Syntax test cam-usage service-policy input policy-map linecard {[number port-set portpipe number]
| [all]}

Parameters
policy-map Enter the policy map name.
linecard number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword linecard followed by the line card
slot number.
port-set portpipe number Enter the keyword port-set followed by the line card’s port pipe
number.
Range: 0 or 1
linecard all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords linecard all to indicate all line
cards.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

870 | Quality of Service (QoS)

 Example Figure 34-22. test cam-usage service-policy input policy-map linecard all Example
Command

FTOS# test cam-usage service-policy input pmap_l2 linecard all

For a L2 Input Policy Map pmap_l2, the output must be as follows,

Linecard | Portpipe | CAM Partition | Available CAM | Estimated CAM | Status

| | | | per Port | (Allowed ports)

0 0 L2ACL 500 200 Allowed (2)

0 1 L2ACL 100 200 Exception
1 0 L2ACL 1000 200 Allowed (5)
1 1 L2ACL 0 200 Exception
…
…
…
13 1 L2ACL 400 200 Allowed (2)
FTOS#

Note: In a Layer 2 Policy Map, IPv4/IPv6 rules are not allowed and hence the output
contains only L2ACL CAM partition entries.

Table 34-7. test cam-usage Command Example Fields

Field Description
Linecard Indicates the line card slot number.
Portpipe Indicates the portpipe number.
CAM Partition The CAM space where the rules are added.
Available CAM Indicates the free CAM space, in the partition, for the classification rules.
Note: The CAM entries reserved for the default rules are not included in
the Available CAM column; free entries, from the default rules space, can
not be used as a policy map for the classification rules.
Estimated CAM per Port Indicates the number of free CAM entries required (for the classification
rules) to apply the input policy map on a single interface.
Note: The CAM entries for the default rule are not included in this
column; a CAM entry for the default rule is always dedicated to a port and
is always available for that interface.
Status (Allowed ports) Indicates if the input policy map configuration on an interface belonging
to a line card/port-pipe is successful—Allowed (n)—or not successful—
Exception.
The allowed number (n) indicates the number of ports in that port-pipe on
which the Policy Map can be applied successfully.

Usage This features allows you to determine if the CAM has enough space available before applying the
Information configuration on an interface.

An input policy map with both Trust and Class-map configuration, the Class-map rules are ignored and
only the Trust rule is programmed in the CAM. In such an instance, the Estimated CAM output column
will contain the size of the CAM space required for the Trust rule and not the Class-map rule.

Quality of Service (QoS) | 871

 threshold
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

e Specify the minimum and maximum threshold values for the configured WRED profiles.

Syntax threshold min number max number

To remove the threshold values, use the no threshold min number max number command.

Parameters
min number Enter the keyword min followed by the minimum threshold number for the
WRED profile.
Range: 1024 to 77824 KB
max number Enter the keyword max followed by the maximum threshold number for the
WRED profile.
Range: 1024 to 77824 KB

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (config-wred)

Command
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series
History

Usage Use this command to configure minimum and maximum threshold values for user defined profiles.
Information Additionally, use this command to modify the minimum and maximum threshold values for the
pre-defined WRED profiles. If you delete threshold values of the pre-defined WRED profiles, the
profiles will revert to their original default values.

Table 34-8. Pre-defined WRED Profile Threshold Values

Pre-defined WRED Profile Name Minimum Threshold Maximum Threshold
wred_drop 0 0
wred_ge_y 1024 2048
wred_ge_g 2048 4096
wred_teng_y 4096 8192
wred_teng_g 8192 16384

Related
wred-profile Create a WRED profile.
Commands

trust
ces Specify dynamic classification (DSCP) or dot1p to trust.

Syntax trust {diffserv [fallback]| dot1p [fallback]| ipv6-diffserv}

Parameters
diffserv Enter the keyword diffserv to specify trust of DSCP markings.
dot1p Enter the keyword dot1p to specify trust dot1p configuration.
fallback Enter this keyword to classify packets according to their DSCP value as a
secondary option in case no match occurs against the configured class maps.
ipv6-diffserv On E-Series only, enter the keyword ipv6-diffserv to specify trust configuration of
IPv6 DSCP.

872 | Quality of Service (QoS)

 Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-policy-map-in)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.3.1.0 fallback available on the E-Series.
Version 8.2.1.0 dot1p available on the C-Series and S-Series.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Expanded to add support for dot1p and IPv6 DSCP
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage When trust is configured, matched bytes/packets counters are not incremented in the show qos
Information statistics command.

The trust diffserv feature is not supported on E-Series ExaScale when an IPv6 microcode is enabled.

Dynamic mapping honors packets marked according to the standard definitions of DSCP. The default
mapping table is detailed in the following table.

Table 34-9. Standard Default DSCP Mapping Table

DSCP/CP DSCP Definition Traditional IP Precedence E-Series C-Series and DSCP/CP
hex range Internal Queue S-Series Internal decimal
(XXX) ID Queue ID

111XXX Network Control 7 3

48–63
110XXX Internetwork Control 6 3
101XXX EF (Expedited CRITIC/ECP 5 2
Forwarding)
32–47
100XXX AF4 (Assured Flash Override 4 2
Forwarding)
011XXX AF3 Flash 3 1
16–31
010XXX AF2 Immediate 2 1
001XXX AF1 Priority 1 0
0–15
000XXX BE (Best Effort) Best Effort 0 0

Quality of Service (QoS) | 873

 wred
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

e Designate the WRED profile to yellow or green traffic.

Syntax wred {yellow | green} profile-name

To remove the WRED drop precedence, use the no wred {yellow | green} [profile-name] command.

Parameters
yellow | green Enter the keyword yellow for yellow traffic. DSCP value of xxx110 and
xxx100 maps to yellow.
Enter the keyword green for green traffic. DSCP value of xxx010 maps to
green.
profile-name Enter your WRED profile name in character format (16 character
maximum). Or use one of the 5 pre-defined WRED profile names.
Pre-defined Profiles:
wred_drop, wred-ge_y, wred_ge_g, wred_teng_y, wred_teng_

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-qos-policy-out)

Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Profile name character limit increased from 16 to 32.
History
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage Use this command to assign drop precedence to green or yellow traffic. If there is no honoring enabled
Information on the input, all the traffic defaults to green drop precedence.

Related
wred-profile Create a WRED profile and name that profile
Commands
trust Define the dynamic classification to trust DSCP

wred-profile
e Create a WRED profile and name that profile.

Syntax wred-profile wred-profile-name

To remove an existing WRED profile, use the no wred-profile command.

Parameters
wred-profile-name Enter your WRED profile name in character format (16 character maximum). Or
use one of the pre-defined WRED profile names. You can configure up to 26
WRED profiles plus the 5 pre-defined profiles, for a total of 31 WRED profiles.
Pre-defined Profiles:
wred_drop, wred-ge_y, wred_ge_g, wred_teng_y, wred_teng_g

Defaults The five pre-defined WRED profiles. When a new profile is configured, the minimum and maximum
threshold defaults to predefined wred_ge_g values

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
pre-Version 6.1.1.1 Introduced on E-Series
History

874 | Quality of Service (QoS)

 Usage Use the default pre-defined profiles or configure your own profile. You can not delete the pre-defined
Information profiles or their default values. This command enables the WRED configuration mode—(conf-wred).

Related
threshold Specify the minimum and maximum threshold values of the WRED profile
Commands

Queue-Level Debugging
Queue-Level Debugging is an E-Series-only feature, as indicated by the e character that appears
below each command heading.

The following queuing statistics are available on TeraScale versions of E-Series systems.
• clear queue statistics egress
• clear queue statistics ingress
• show queue statistics egress
• show queue statistics ingress

clear queue statistics egress

e Clear egress queue statistics.

Syntax clear queue statistics egress [unicast | multicast] [Interface]

Parameters
unicast | multicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword multicast to clear only Multicast queue
statistics. Enter the keyword unicast to clear only Unicast queue statistics.
Default: Both Unicast and Multicast queue statistics are cleared.
Interface (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following interfaces to display the interface
specific queue statistics.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• Fast Ethernet is not supported

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced
History

Usage If a Policy QoS is applied on an interface when clear queue statistics egress is issued, it will clear
Information the egress counters in show queue statistics and vice-versa. This behavior is due to the values being
read from the same hardware registers.

Quality of Service (QoS) | 875

 Related
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Commands clear queue statistics egress Clear ingress queue statistics

show queue statistics egress Display egress queue statistics
show queue statistics ingress Display ingress queue statistics

clear queue statistics ingress

e Clear ingress queue statistics.

Syntax clear queue statistics ingress [unicast [src-card ID [dst-card ID]] | [multicast] [src-card
ID]]

Parameters
unicast [src-card ID (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword unicast to clear Unicast queue
[dst-card ID]] statistics. Optionally, enter the source card identification (src-card ID)
and the destination card identification (dst-card ID) to clear the unicast
statistics from the source card to the destination card.
multicast [src-card ID] (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword multicast to clear only Multicast
queue statistics. Optionally, enter the source card identification (src-card
ID) to clear the multicast statistics from the source card. Default: Both
Unicast and Multicast queue statistics are cleared.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced
History

Related
Commands clear queue statistics egress Clear egress queue statistics
show queue statistics egress Display egress queue statistics
show queue statistics ingress Display ingress queue statistics

show queue statistics egress

e Display the egress queue statistics.

Syntax show queue statistics egress [unicast | multicast] [Interface] [brief]

876 | Quality of Service (QoS)

 Parameters
unicast | multicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword multicast to display only Multicast
queue statistics. Enter the keyword unicast to display only Unicast queue
statistics.
Default: Both Unicast and Multicast queue statistics are displayed.
Interface (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following interfaces to display the interface
specific queue statistics.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
GigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/
port information.
• Fast Ethernet is not supported.
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display only ingress per link
buffering and egress per port buffering statistics.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced for E-Series
History

Usage TeraScale systems display cumulative queued bytes (in KB), cumulative queued packets (in KB), and
Information cumulative dropped packets (in KB).

The display area is limited to 80 spaces to accommodate the screen and for optimal readability.
Numbers, that is values, are limited to 12 characters. The numbering conventions are detailed in the
table below.

Table 34-10. Numbering Conventions for show queue egress statistics Output
Value Divide the number by Quotient Display Examples
(10^11) - (10^14) 1024 K 12345678901K
(10^14) - (10^17) 1024*1024 M 12345678901M
> (10^17) 1024*1024*1024 T 12345678901T

Note: The show queue statistics command displays Queued Packets and Queued Bytes.
The show qos statistics command displays Matched Packets and Matched Bytes. The
following example explains how these two outputs relate to each other.
• 9000 byte size packets are sent from Interface A to Interface B.
• The Matched Packets on Interface A are equal to the Queued Packets on Interface B.
• Matched bytes on Interface A = matched packets *9000
• Queued bytes on Interface B = queued packets *(9020)—Each packet has an additional
header of 20 bytes.

Quality of Service (QoS) | 877

 Example 1 Figure 34-23. show queue statistics egress Command (TeraScale)
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show queue statistics egress unicast gigabitethernet 9/1

Interface Gi 9/1

Egress Queued Queued Packet Type Min Max Dropped

Port bytes packets KB KB packets
Queue#
0 281513847K 31959000 Green 2048 4096 0
Yellow 1024 2048 0
Out of Profile 30385770
1 99281660K 11271000 Green 2048 4096 0
Yellow 1024 2048 0
Out of Profile 9886100
2 99281660K 11271000 Green 2048 4096 0
Yellow 1024 2048 0
Out of Profile 9784600
3 38984440000 4322000 Green 2048 4096 0
Yellow 1024 2048 0
Out of Profile 3053753
4 99281660K 11271000 Green 2048 4096 0
Yellow 1024 2048 0
Out of Profile 9581600
5 39760160000 4408000 Green 2048 4096 0
Yellow 1024 2048 0
Out of Profile 3070671
6 39642900000 4395000 Green 2048 4096 0
Yellow 1024 2048 0
Out of Profile 3026100
7 99274410K 11270177 Green 2048 4096 0
Yellow 1024 2048 0
Out of Profile 9273402
FTOS#

Table 34-11. show queue statistics egress Command Fields

Field Description
Egress Port Queue# Egress Port Queue Number
Queued bytes Cumulative byte count in that queue
Queued packets Cumulative packet count in that queue.
Packet type Green, yellow, and out-of-profile packets
Min KB Minimum threshold for WRED queue
Max KB Maximum threshold for WRED queue
Dropped Pkts The number of packets dropped for green, yellow and out-of-profile

878 | Quality of Service (QoS)

Example 2 Figure 34-24. show queue statistics egress multicast Command Output
FTOS#sho queue statistics egress multicast

Linecard 3 port pipe 0, multicast

Packet Type Min Max Dropped

KB KB packets
Green 8192 16384 0
Yellow 4096 8192 0
Out of Profile 0

Linecard 3 port pipe 1, multicast

Packet Type Min Max Dropped

KB KB packets
Green 8192 16384 0
Yellow 4096 8192 0
Out of Profile 0

Linecard 7 port pipe 0, multicast

Packet Type Min Max Dropped

KB KB packets
Green 2048 4096 0
Yellow 1024 2048 0
Out of Profile 0

Linecard 7 port pipe 1, multicast

Packet Type Min Max Dropped

KB KB packets
Green 2048 4096 0
Yellow 1024 2048 0
Out of Profile 0
FTOS#

Table 34-12. show queue statistics egress multicast Command Fields

Field Description
Packet type Green, yellow, and out-of-profile packets
Min KB Minimum threshold for WRED queue
Max KB Maximum threshold for WRED queue
Dropped Pkts The number of packets dropped for green, yellow and out-of-profile

Quality of Service (QoS) | 879

 Example 3 Figure 34-25. show queue statistics egress brief Command Output
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show queue statistics egress brief

LC Portpipe Port Dropped

PortPipe packets
0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0
0 0 2 0
0 0 3 0
0 0 4 0
0 0 5 0
0 0 6 0
0 0 7 0
0 0 8 0
0 0 9 0
0 0 10 0
0 0 11 0
0 0 M 0
0 1 0 0
0 1 1 0
0 1 2 0
0 1 3 0
0 1 4 0
0 1 5 0
0 1 6 0
0 1 7 0
0 1 8 0
0 1 9 0
0 1 10 0
0 1 11 0
0 1 M 0
1 0 0 0
FTOS#

Table 34-13. show queue statistics egress brief Command Fields

Field Description
LC Line Card
Portpipe Portpipe number
Port Port Queue. Where M is Multicast queue
Dropped Pkts The number of packets dropped for green, yellow and out-of-profile

Related
clear queue statistics egress Clear egress queue statistics.
Commands
clear queue statistics ingress Clear ingress queue statistics.
show queue statistics ingress Display ingress queue statistics

show queue statistics ingress

e Display the ingress queue statistics.

Syntax show queue statistics ingress [unicast [src-card ID [dst-card ID]] | [multicast] [src-card
ID]] [brief]

880 | Quality of Service (QoS)

 Parameters
unicast [src-card ID (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword unicast to display Unicast queue
[dst-card ID]] statistics. Optionally, enter the source card identification (src-card ID)
and the destination card identification (dst-card ID) to display the
unicast statistics from the source card to the destination card.
Destination card Identification: Range 0 to 13 or RPM
multicast [src-card ID] (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword multicast to display only Multicast
queue statistics. Optionally, enter the source card identification
(src-card ID) to display the multicast statistics from the source card.
Default: Both Unicast and Multicast queue statistics are displayed.
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display only ingress per link
buffering and egress per port buffering statistics.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced
History

Usage TeraScale systems display cumulative queued bytes (in KB), cumulative queued packets (in KB), and
Information cumulative dropped packets (in KB).

The display area is limited to 80 spaces to accommodate the screen and for optimal readability.
Numbers, that is values, are limited to 12 characters. The conventions are detailed in the following
table.

Table 34-14. Numbering Conventions for show queue statistics ingress Output
Value Divide the number by Quotient Display Examples
(10^11) - (10^14) 1024 K 12345678901K
(10^14) - (10^17) 1024*1024 M 12345678901M
> (10^17) 1024*1024*1024 T 12345678901T

Note: The show queue statistics command displays Queued Packets and Queued Bytes.
The show qos statistics command displays Matched Packets and Matched Bytes. The
following example explains how these two displays relate to each other.
• 9000 byte size packets are sent from Interface A to Interface B.
• The Matched Packets on Interface A are equal to the Queued Packets on Interface B.
• Matched bytes on Interface A = matched packets *9000
• Queued bytes on Interface B = queued packets *(9020)—Each packet has an additional
header of 20 bytes.

Quality of Service (QoS) | 881

 Figure 34-26. show queue statistics ingress Command Partial
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show queue statistics ingress unicast src-card 7 dst-card 3

Linecard 7 port pipe 0, to linecard 3 port pipe 0, unicast

SF Packet Type Min Max Dropped

Ingress KB KB packets
Queue#
0 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
1 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
2 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
3 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
4 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
5 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
6 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
7 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
Linecard 7 port pipe 0, to linecard 3 port pipe 1, unicast
SF Packet Type Min Max Dropped
Ingress KB KB packets
Queue#
0 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
1 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
2 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
3 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
4 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
5 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
6 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
7 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
4 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
5 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
6 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
7 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0

882 | Quality of Service (QoS)

Table 34-15. show queue statistics Command Fields

Field Description
SF Ingress Queue # Switch Fabric Queue Number
Packet type Green, yellow, and out-of-profile packets
Min KB Minimum threshold for WRED queue
Max KB Maximum threshold for WRED queue
Dropped Pkts The number of packets dropped for green, yellow and out-of-profile

Quality of Service (QoS) | 883

 Example 2 Figure 34-27. show queue statistics ingress Multicast Command Output
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show queue statistics ingress multicast src-card 7

Linecard 7 port pipe 0, multicast

SF Packet Type Min Max Dropped

Ingress KB KB packets
Queue#
0 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
1 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
2 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
3 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
4 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
5 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
6 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
7 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0

Linecard 7 port pipe 1, multicast

SF Packet Type Min Max Dropped

Ingress KB KB packets
Queue#
0 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
1 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
2 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
3 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
4 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
5 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
6 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
7 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
FTOS#

Table 34-16. show queue statistics ingress Multicast Command Fields

Field Description
SF Ingress Queue # Switch Fabric Queue Number
Packet type Green, yellow, and out-of-profile packets
Min KB Minimum threshold for WRED queue
Max KB Maximum threshold for WRED queue
Dropped Pkts The number of packets dropped for green, yellow and out-of-profile

884 | Quality of Service (QoS)

Example 3 Figure 34-28. show queue statistics ingress brief Command Output
FTOS#show queue statistics ingress src-card 0 brief
Source Linecard 0

Dest LC Src Dest Dropped

Port set Port set packets
0 0 0 0
0 0 1 100
0 1 0 0
0 1 1 100
1 0 0 0
1 0 1 100
1 1 0 0
1 1 1 100
2 0 0 0
2 0 1 100
2 1 0 0
2 1 1 100
3 0 0 0
3 0 1 100
3 1 0 0
3 1 1 100
4 0 0 0
4 0 1 100
4 1 0 0
4 1 1 100
5 0 0 0
5 0 1 100
5 1 0 0
5 1 1 100
6 0 0 0
6 0 1 100
6 1 0 0
6 1 1 100
RPM 0 0
RPM 1 100
Multicast 0 0
Multicast 1 0

FTOS#

Table 34-17. show queue statistics ingress brief Command Fields

Field Description
Dest LC Destination Line Card
Src Port Set Source PortPipe Number
Dest Port Set Destination PortPipe Number
Dropped Pkts The number of packets dropped

Related
clear queue statistics egress Clear egress queue statistics.
Commands
clear queue statistics ingress Clear ingress queue statistics.
show queue statistics ingress Display egress queue statistics

Quality of Service (QoS) | 885

 www.dell.com | dell.com/support

886
|
Quality of Service (QoS)
 35
Router Information Protocol (RIP)

Overview
Router Information Protocol (RIP) is a Distance Vector routing protocol. FTOS supports both RIP
version 1 (RIPv1) and RIP version 2 (RIPv2) on C-Series and E-Series and S-Series systems, as
indicated by the characters that appear below each command heading:

• C-Series: c
• E-Series: e
• S-Series: s
Note: The C-Series platform supports RIP with FTOS version 7.6.1.0 and later. The S-Series
platform supports RIP with FTOS version 7.8.1.0 and later. Prior to 7.6.1.0, only the E-Series
platform supported RIP.

The FTOS implementation of RIP is based on IETF RFCs 2453 and RFC 1058. For more information
on configuring RIP, refer to FTOS Configuration Guide.

Commands
The following commands enable you to configure RIP:
• auto-summary
• clear ip rip
• debug ip rip
• default-information originate
• default-metric
• description
• distance
• distribute-list in
• distribute-list out
• ip poison-reverse
• ip rip receive version
• ip rip send version
• ip split-horizon
• maximum-paths
• neighbor
• network
• offset-list

Router Information Protocol (RIP) | 887

 • output-delay
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

• passive-interface
• redistribute
• redistribute isis
• redistribute ospf
• router rip
• show config
• show ip rip database
• show running-config rip
• timers basic
• version

auto-summary
ces Restore the default behavior of automatic summarization of subnet routes into network routes. This
command applies only to RIP version 2.

Syntax auto-summary

To send sub-prefix routing information, enter no auto-summary.

Default Enabled.

Command Modes ROUTER RIP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

clear ip rip
ces Update all the RIP routes in the FTOS routing table.

Syntax clear ip rip

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage This command triggers updates of the main RIP routing tables.
Information

888 | Router Information Protocol (RIP)

debug ip rip
ces Examine RIP routing information for troubleshooting.

Syntax debug ip rip [interface | database | events [interface] | packet [interface] | trigger]

To turn off debugging output, use the no debug ip rip command.

Parameters
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the interface type and ID as one of the following:
• For a Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by
the slot/port information.
• For a Port Channel, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a number from 1
to 255 for TeraScale, 1-128 on C-Series and S-Series.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.
Note: This option is available only on E-Series when entered as a standalone
option. It is available on both C-Series and E-Series as a sub-option.
database (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword database to display messages when there is a change
to the RIP database.
events (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword events to debug only RIP protocol changes.
packet (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword events to debug only RIP protocol packets.
Note: This option is available only on C-Series.
trigger (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword trigger to debug only RIP trigger extensions.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

default-information originate
ces Generate a default route for the RIP traffic.

Syntax default-information originate [always] [metric metric-value] [route-map map-name]

To return to the default values, enter no default-information originate.

Parameters
always (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword always to enable the switch software to
always advertise the default route.

Router Information Protocol (RIP) | 889

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

metric metric-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric followed by a number as the
metric value.
Range: 1 to 16
Default: 1
route-map map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword route-map followed by the name of a
configured route-map.

Defaults Disabled.
metric: 1

Command Modes ROUTER RIP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage The default route must be present in the switch routing table for the default-information originate
Information command to take effect.

default-metric
ces Change the default metric for routes. Use this command with the redistribute command to ensure
that all redistributed routes use the same metric value.

Syntax default-metric number

To return the default metric to the original values, enter no default-metric.

Parameters
number Specify a number.
Range: 1 to 16.
The default is 1.

Default 1

Command Modes ROUTER RIP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage This command ensures that route information being redistributed is converted to the same metric value.
Information

Related
redistribute Allows you to redistribute routes learned by other methods.
Commands

890 | Router Information Protocol (RIP)

description
ces Enter a description of the RIP routing protocol

Syntax description {description}

To remove the description, use the no description {description} command.

Parameters
description Enter a description to identify the RIP protocol (80 characters maximum).

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes ROUTER RIP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-7.7.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Related
router rip Enter ROUTER mode on the switch.
Commands

distance
ces Assign a weight (for prioritization) to all routes in the RIP routing table or to a specific route. Lower
weights (“administrative distance”) are preferred.

Syntax distance weight [ip-address mask [prefix-name]]

To return to the default values, use the no distance weight [ip-address mask] command.

Parameters
weight Enter a number from 1 to 255 for the weight (for prioritization).
The default is 120.
ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address, in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D), of the host or
network to receive the new distance metric.
mask If you enter an IP address, you must also enter a mask for that IP address, in either dotted
decimal format or /prefix format (/x)
prefix-name (OPTIONAL) Enter a configured prefix list name.

Defaults weight = 120

Command Modes ROUTER RIP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series
Related
default-metric Assign one distance metric to all routes learned using the redistribute command.
Commands

Router Information Protocol (RIP) | 891

 distribute-list in
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Configure a filter for incoming routing updates.

Syntax distribute-list prefix-list-name in [interface]

To delete the filter, use the no distribute-list prefix-list-name in command.

Parameters
prefix-list-name Enter the name of a configured prefix list.
interface (OPTIONAL) Identifies the interface type slot/port as one of the following:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Port Channel, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a number
from 1 to 255 for TeraScale, 1-128 on C-Series and S-Series.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER RIP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Related
ip prefix-list Enter the PREFIX-LIST mode and configure a prefix list.
Commands

distribute-list out
ces Configure a filter for outgoing routing updates.

Syntax distribute-list prefix-list-name out [interface | bgp | connected | isis | ospf | static]

To delete the filter, use the no distribute-list prefix-list-name out command.

892 | Router Information Protocol (RIP)

 Parameters
prefix-list-name Enter the name of a configured prefix list.
interface (OPTIONAL) Identifies the interface type slot/port as one of the following:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Port Channel, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a number
from 1 to 255 for TeraScale, 1-128 on C-Series and S-Series.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.
connected (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword connected to filter only directly connected
routes.
isis (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword isis to filter only IS-IS routes.
Note: This option is only available on E-Series.
ospf (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ospf to filter all OSPF routes.
static (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword static to filter manually configured routes.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER RIP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Related
ip prefix-list Enter the PREFIX-LIST mode and configure a prefix list.
Commands

ip poison-reverse
ces Set the prefix of the RIP routing updates to the RIP infinity value.

Syntax ip poison-reverse

To disable poison reverse, enter no ip poison-reverse.

Defaults Disabled.

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Router Information Protocol (RIP) | 893

 Related
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ip split-horizon Set RIP routing updates to exclude routing prefixes.

Commands

ip rip receive version

ces Set the interface to receive specific versions of RIP. The RIP version you set on the interface overrides
the version command in the ROUTER RIP mode.

Syntax ip rip receive version [1] [2]

To return to the default, enter no ip rip receive version.

Parameters
1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the number 1 for RIP version 1.
2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the number 2 for RIP version 2.

Defaults RIPv1 and RIPv2.

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage If you want the interface to receive both versions of RIP, enter ip rip receive version 1 2.
Information

Related
ip rip send version Sets the RIP version to be used for sending RIP traffic on an interface.
Commands
version Sets the RIP version to be used for the switch software.

ip rip send version

ces Set the interface to send a specific version of RIP. The version you set on the interface overrides the
version command in the ROUTER RIP mode.

Syntax ip rip send version [1] [2]

To return to the default value, enter no ip rip send version.

Parameters
1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the number 1 for RIP version 1.
The default is RIPv1.
2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the number 2 for RIP version 2.

Defaults RIPv1.

Command Modes INTERFACE

894 | Router Information Protocol (RIP)

 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage To enable the interface to send both version of RIP packets, enter ip rip send version 1 2.
Information

Related
ip rip receive version Sets the RIP version for the interface to receive traffic.
Commands
version Sets the RIP version to be used for the switch software.

ip split-horizon
ces Enable split-horizon for RIP data on the interface. As described in RFC 2453, the split-horizon scheme
prevents any routes learned over a specific interface to be sent back out that interface.

Syntax ip split-horizon
To disable split-horizon, enter no ip split-horizon.

Defaults Enabled

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Related
ip poison-reverse Set the prefix for RIP routing updates.
Commands

maximum-paths
ces Set RIP to forward packets over multiple paths.

Syntax maximum-paths number

To return to the default values, enter no maximum-paths.

Parameters
number Enter the number of paths.
Range: 1 to 16.
The default is 4 paths.

Defaults 4

Command Modes ROUTER RIP

Router Information Protocol (RIP) | 895

 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60

History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage RIP supports a maximum of 16 ECMP paths.

Information

neighbor
ces Define a neighbor router with which to exchange RIP information.

Syntax neighbor ip-address

To delete a neighbor setting, use the no neighbor ip-address command.

Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address, in dotted decimal format, of a router with which to exchange
information.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER RIP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage When a neighbor router is identified, unicast data exchanges occur. Multiple neighbor routers are
Information possible.

Use the passive-interface command in conjunction with the neighbor command to ensure that only
specific interfaces are receiving and sending data.

Related
passive-interface Sets the interface to only listen to RIP broadcasts.
Commands

network
ces Enable RIP for a specified network. Use this command to enable RIP on all networks connected to the
switch.

Syntax network ip-address

To disable RIP for a network, use the no network ip-address command.

Parameter
ip-address Specify an IP network address in dotted decimal format. You cannot specify a subnet.

Defaults No RIP network is configured.

896 | Router Information Protocol (RIP)

Command Modes ROUTER RIP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage You can enable an unlimited number of RIP networks.

Information
RIP operates over interfaces configured with any address specified by the network command.

offset-list
ces Specify a number to add to the incoming or outgoing route metrics learned via RIP.

Syntax offset-list prefix-list-name {in | out} offset [interface]

To delete an offset list, use the no offset-list prefix-list-name {in | out} offset [interface] command.

Parameters
prefix-list-name Enter the name of an established Prefix list to determine which incoming routes will
be modified.
offset Enter a number from zero (0) to 16 to be applied to the incoming route metric
matching the access list specified.
If you set an offset value to zero (0), no action is taken.
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a
number from 1 to 255 for TeraScale.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER RIP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage When the offset metric is applied to an interface, that value takes precedence over an offset value that
Information is not extended to an interface.

Related
ip prefix-list Enter the PREFIX-LIST mode and configure a prefix list.
Commands

Router Information Protocol (RIP) | 897

 output-delay
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Set the interpacket delay of successive packets to the same neighbor.

Syntax output-delay delay

To return to the switch software defaults for interpacket delay, enter no output-delay.

Parameters
delay Specify a number of milliseconds as the delay interval.
Range: 8 to 50.

Default Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER RIP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage This command is intended for low-speed interfaces.

Information

passive-interface
ces Suppress routing updates on a specified interface.

Syntax passive-interface interface

To delete a passive interface, use the no passive-interface interface command.

Parameters
interface Enter the following information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by
the slot/port information.
• For a Port Channel, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a number from 1
to 255 for TeraScale, 1-128 on C-Series and S-Series.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER RIP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

898 | Router Information Protocol (RIP)

 Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage Although the passive interface will neither send nor receive routing updates, the network on that
Information interface will still be included in RIP updates sent via other interfaces.

Related
neighbor Enable RIP for a specified network.
Commands
network Define a neighbor.

redistribute
ces Redistribute information from other routing instances.

Syntax redistribute {connected | static}

To disable redistribution, use the no redistribute {connected | static} command.

Parameters
connected Enter the keyword connected to specify that information from active routes on
interfaces is redistributed.
static Enter the keyword static to specify that information from static routes is redistributed.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER RIP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage To redistribute the default route (0.0.0.0/0), configure the default-information originate command.
Information

Related
default-information Generate a default route for RIP traffic.
Commands
originate

redistribute isis
e Redistribute routing information from an IS-IS instance.

Syntax redistribute isis [tag] [level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2] [metric metric-value] [route-map
map-name]
To disable redistribution, use the no redistribute isis [tag] [level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2] [metric
metric-value] [route-map map-name] command.

Router Information Protocol (RIP) | 899

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

tag (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the IS-IS routing process.

level-1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword level-1 to redistribute only IS-IS Level-1
routes.
level-1-2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword level-1-2 to redistribute both IS-IS Level-1
and Level-2 routes.
level-2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword level-2 to redistribute only IS-IS Level-2
routes.
metric metric-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric followed by a number as the metric
value.
Range: 0 to16
route-map map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword route-map followed by the name of a
configured route map.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER RIP

Command
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series
History

Usage IS-IS is not supported on S-Series systems.

Information

redistribute ospf
ces Redistribute routing information from an OSPF process.

Syntax redistribute ospf process-id [match external {1 | 2} | match internal | metric metric-value]
[route-map map-name]
To disable redistribution, enter no redistribute ospf process-id [match external {1 | 2} | match
internal | metric metric-value] [route-map map-name] command.

Parameters
process-id Enter a number that corresponds to the OSPF process ID to be redistributed.
Range: 1 to 65355.
match external {1 | (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords match external followed by the numbers 1 or
2} 2 to indicated that external 1 routes or external 2 routes should be redistributed.
match internal (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords match internal to indicate that internal routes
should be redistributed.
metric metric-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric followed by a number as the metric
value.
Range: 0 to16
route-map (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword route-map followed by the name of a
map-name configured route map.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes ROUTER RIP

900 | Router Information Protocol (RIP)

 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

router rip
ces Enter the ROUTER RIP mode to configure and enable RIP.

Syntax router rip

To disable RIP, enter no router rip.

Defaults Disabled.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage To enable RIP, you must assign a network address using the network command.
Information

Example Figure 35-1. router rip Command Example

FTOS(conf)#router rip
FTOS(conf-router_rip)#

Related
network Enable RIP.
Commands
exit Return to the CONFIGURATION mode.

show config
ces Display the changes you made to the RIP configuration. Default values are not shown.

Syntax show config

Command Modes ROUTER RIP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Router Information Protocol (RIP) | 901

 Example Figure 35-2. show config Command Example in ROUTER RIP Mode
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS(conf-router_rip)#show config
!
router rip
network 172.31.0.0
passive-interface GigabitEthernet 0/1
FTOS(conf-router_rip)#

show ip rip database

ces Display the routes learned by RIP. If the switch learned no RIP routes, no output is generated.

Syntax show ip rip database [ip-address mask]

Parameters
ip-address (OPTIONAL) Specify an IP address in dotted decimal format to view RIP information on
that network only.
If you enter an IP address, you must also enter a mask for that IP address.
mask (OPTIONAL) Specify a mask, in /network format, for the IP address.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 35-3. show ip rip database Command Example (partial)

FTOS#show ip rip database
Total number of routes in RIP database: 1624
204.250.54.0/24
[50/1] via 192.14.1.3, 00:00:12, GigabitEthernet 9/15
204.250.54.0/24 auto-summary
203.250.49.0/24
[50/1] via 192.13.1.3, 00:00:12, GigabitEthernet 9/14
203.250.49.0/24 auto-summary
210.250.40.0/24
[50/2] via 1.1.18.2, 00:00:14, Vlan 18
[50/2] via 1.1.130.2, 00:00:12, Port-channel 30
210.250.40.0/24 auto-summary
207.250.53.0/24
[50/2] via 1.1.120.2, 00:00:55, Port-channel 20
[50/2] via 1.1.130.2, 00:00:12, Port-channel 30
[50/2] via 1.1.10.2, 00:00:18, Vlan 10
207.250.53.0/24 auto-summary
208.250.42.0/24
[50/2] via 1.1.120.2, 00:00:55, Port-channel 20
[50/2] via 1.1.130.2, 00:00:12, Port-channel 30
[50/2] via 1.1.10.2, 00:00:18, Vlan 10
208.250.42.0/24 auto-summary

902 | Router Information Protocol (RIP)

 Table 35-1. Fields in show ip rip database Command Output

Field Description
Total number of routes in RIP Displays the number of RIP routes stored in the RIP database.
database
100.10.10.0/24 directly Lists the route(s) directly connected.
connected
150.100.0.0 redistributed Lists the routes learned through redistribution.
209.9.16.0/24... Lists the routes and the sources advertising those routes.

show running-config rip

ces Use this feature to display the current RIP configuration.

Syntax show running-config rip

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Example Figure 35-4. show running-config rip Command Example

show running-config rip
!
router rip
distribute-list Test1 in
distribute-list Test21 out
network 10.0.0.0
passive-interface GigabitEthernet 2/0
neighbor 20.20.20.20
redistribute ospf 999
version 2

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

timers basic
ces Manipulate the RIP timers for routing updates, invalid, holddown times and flush time.

Syntax timers basic update invalid holddown flush

To return to the default settings, enter no timers basic.

Router Information Protocol (RIP) | 903

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

update Enter the number of seconds to specify the rate at which RIP routing updates are sent.
Range: zero (0) to 4294967295.
Default: 30 seconds.
invalid Enter the number of seconds to specify the time interval before routing updates are
declared invalid or expired. The invalid value should be at least three times the update
timer value.
Range: zero (0) to 4294967295.
Default: 180 seconds.
holddown Enter the number of seconds to specify a time interval during which the route is marked as
unreachable but still sending RIP packets. The holddown value should be at least three
times the update timer value.
Range: zero (0) to 4294967295.
Default: 180 seconds.
flush Enter the number of seconds to specify the time interval during which the route is
advertised as unreachable. When this interval expires, the route is flushed from the routing
table. The flush value should be greater than the update value.
Range: zero (0) to 4294967295.
Default is 240 seconds.

Defaults update = 30 seconds; invalid = 180 seconds; holddown = 180 seconds; flush = 240 seconds.

Command Modes ROUTER RIP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage If the timers on one router are changed, the timers on all routers in the RIP domain must also be
Information synchronized.

version
ces Specify either RIP version 1 or RIP version 2.

Syntax version {1 | 2}
To return to the default version setting, enter no version.

Parameters
1 Enter the keyword 1 to specify RIP version 1.
2 Enter the keyword 2 to specify RIP version 2.

Default The FTOS sends RIPv1 and receives RIPv1 and RIPv2.

Command Modes ROUTER RIP

904 | Router Information Protocol (RIP)

 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Related
ip rip receive version Set the RIP version to be received on the interface.
Commands
ip rip send version Set the RIP version to be sent out the interface.

Router Information Protocol (RIP) | 905

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

906 | Router Information Protocol (RIP)

 36
Remote Monitoring (RMON)

Overview
FTOS RMON is implemented on all Dell Networking switching platforms (C-Series, E-Series, and
S-Series), as indicated by the characters that appear below each command heading:
• C-Series: c
• E-Series: e
• S-Series: s
FTOS RMON is based on IEEE standards, providing both 32-bit and 64-bit monitoring, and long-term
statistics collection. FTOS RMON supports the following RMON groups, as defined in RFC-2819,
RFC-3273, and RFC-3434:
• Ethernet Statistics Table RFC-2819
• Ethernet Statistics High-Capacity Table RFC-3273, 64bits
• Ethernet History Control Table RFC-2819
• Ethernet History Table RFC-2819
• Ethernet History High-Capacity Table RFC-3273, 64bits
• Alarm Table RFC-2819
• High-Capacity Alarm Table (64bits) RFC-3434, 64bits
• Event Table RFC-2819
• Log Table RFC-2819
FTOS RMON does not support the following statistics:
• etherStatsCollisions
• etherHistoryCollisions
• etherHistoryUtilization
Note: Only SNMP GET/GETNEXT access is supported. Configure RMON using the RMON
commands. Collected data is lost during a chassis reboot.

Commands
The FTOS Remote Network Monitoring RMON commands are:

• rmon alarm
• rmon collection history
• rmon collection statistics
• rmon event

Remote Monitoring (RMON) | 907

 • rmon hc-alarm
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

• show rmon
• show rmon alarms
• show rmon events
• show rmon hc-alarm
• show rmon history
• show rmon log
• show rmon statistics

rmon alarm
ces Set an alarm on any MIB object.

Syntax rmon alarm number variable interval {delta | absolute} rising-threshold value event-number
falling-threshold value event-number [owner string]
To disable the alarm, use the no rmon alarm number command.

Parameters
number Enter the alarm integer number from 1 to 65535. The value must be unique
in the RMON Alarm Table.
variable The MIB object to monitor. The variable must be in the SNMP OID format,
for example, 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 The object type must be a 32 bit integer.
interval Time, in seconds, the alarm monitors the MIB variables; this is the
alarmSampleType in the RMON Alarm table.
Range: 5 to 3600 seconds
delta Enter the keyword delta to test the change between MIB variables. This is
the alarmSampleType in the RMON Alarm table.
absolute Enter the keyword absolute to test each MIB variable directly. This is the
alarmSampleType in the RMON Alarm table.
rising-threshold value Enter the keyword rising-threshold followed by the value (32bit) the
event-number rising-threshold alarm is either triggered or reset. Then enter the
event-number to trigger when the rising threshold exceeds its limit.
This value is the same as the alarmRisingEventIndex or alarmTable
of the RMON MIB. If there is no corresponding rising-threshold event,
the value is zero.
falling-threshold value Enter the keyword falling-threshold followed by the value (32bit) the
event-number falling-threshold alarm is either triggered or reset. Then enter the
event-number to trigger when the falling threshold exceeds its limit.
This value is the same as the alarmFallingEventIndex or the
alarmTable of the RMON MIB. If there is no corresponding
falling-threshold event, the value is zero.
owner string (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword owner followed by the owner name to
specify an owner for the alarm. This is the alarmOwner object in the
alarmTable of the RMON MIB.

Default owner

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

908 | Remote Monitoring (RMON)

 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

rmon collection history

ces Enable the RMON MIB history group of statistics collection on an interface.

Syntax rmon collection history {controlEntry integer} [owner name] [buckets number] [interval
seconds]
To remove a specified RMON history group of statistics collection, use the no rmon collection
history {controlEntry integer} command.

Parameters
controlEntry integer Enter the keyword controlEntry to specify the RMON group of statistics
using a value. Then enter an integer value from 1 to 65535 that identifies the
RMON group of statistics. The integer value must be a unique index in the
RMON History Table.
owner name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword owner followed by the owner name to
record the owner of the RMON group of statistics.
buckets number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword buckets followed the number of buckets
for the RMON collection history group of statistics.
Bucket Range: 1 to 1000
Default: 50
interval seconds (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed the number of seconds
in each polling cycle.
Range: 5 to 3600 seconds
Default: 1800 seconds

Defaults No default behavior

Command Modes CONFIGURATION INTERFACE (config-if)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

rmon collection statistics

ces Enable RMON MIB statistics collection on an interface.

Syntax rmon collection statistics {controlEntry integer} [owner name]

To remove RMON MIB statistics collection on an interface, use the no rmon collection statistics
{controlEntry integer} command.

Remote Monitoring (RMON) | 909

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

controlEntry integer Enter the keyword controlEntry to specify the RMON group of statistics
using a value. Then enter an integer value from 1 to 65535 that identifies the
RMON Statistic Table. The integer value must be a unique in the RMON
Statistic Table.
owner name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword owner followed by the owner name to
record the owner of the RMON group of statistics.

Defaults No default behavior

Command Modes CONFIGURATION INTERFACE (config-if)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

rmon event
ces Add an event in the RMON event table.

Syntax rmon event number [log] [trap community] [description string] [ownername]
To disable RMON on an interface, use the no rmon event number [log] [trap community]
[description string] command.

Parameters
number Assign an event number in integer format from 1 to 65535. The number
value must be unique in the RMON Event Table.
log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to generate an RMON log entry. The
log entry is triggered and sets the eventType in the RMON MIB to log or
log-and-trap.
Default: No log
trap community (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword trap followed by an SNMP community
string to configure the eventType setting in the RMON MIB. This sets either
snmp-trap or log-and-trap.
Default: public
description string (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword description followed by a string
describing the event.
owner name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword owner followed by the name of the
owner of this event.

Defaults as described above

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

910 | Remote Monitoring (RMON)

rmon hc-alarm
ces Set an alarm on any MIB object.

Syntax rmon hc-alarm number variable interval {delta | absolute} rising-threshold value
event-number falling-threshold value event-number [owner string]
To disable the alarm, use the no rmon hc-alarm number command.

Parameters
number Enter the alarm integer number from 1 to 65535. The value must be unique
in the RMON Alarm Table.
variable The MIB object to monitor. The variable must be in the SNMP OID format,
for example, 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 The object type must be a 64 bit integer.
interval Time, in seconds, the alarm monitors the MIB variables; this is the
alarmSampleType in the RMON Alarm table.
Range: 5 to 3600 seconds
delta Enter the keyword delta to test the change between MIB variables. This is
the alarmSampleType in the RMON Alarm table.
absolute Enter the keyword absolute to test each MIB variable directly. This is the
alarmSampleType in the RMON Alarm table.
rising-threshold value Enter the keyword rising-threshold followed by the value (64 bit) the
event-number rising-threshold alarm is either triggered or reset. Then enter the
event-number to trigger when the rising threshold exceeds its limit.
This value is the same as the alarmRisingEventIndex or alarmTable
of the RMON MIB. If there is no corresponding rising-threshold event,
the value is zero.
falling-threshold value Enter the keyword falling-threshold followed by the value (64 bit) the
event-number falling-threshold alarm is either triggered or reset. Then enter the
event-number to trigger when the falling threshold exceeds its limit.
This value is the same as the alarmFallingEventIndex or the
alarmTable of the RMON MIB. If there is no corresponding
falling-threshold event, the value is zero.
owner string (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword owner followed the owner name to
specify an owner for the alarm. This is the alarmOwner object in the
alarmTable of the RMON MIB.

Defaults owner

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

show rmon
ces Display the RMON running status including the memory usage.

Syntax show rmon

Remote Monitoring (RMON) | 911

 Defaults No default behavior
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Command Modes EXEC

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 36-1. show rmon Command Example

FTOS# show rmon
RMON status
total memory used 218840 bytes.
ether statistics table: 8 entries, 4608 bytes
ether history table: 8 entries, 6000 bytes
alarm table: 390 entries, 102960 bytes
high-capacity alarm table: 5 entries, 1680 bytes
event table: 500 entries, 206000 bytes
log table: 2 entries, 552 bytes
FTOS#

show rmon alarms

ces Display the contents of the RMON Alarm Table.

Syntax show rmon alarms [index] [brief]

Parameters
index (OPTIONAL) Enter the table index number to display just that entry.
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON Alarm Table
in an easy-to-read format.

Defaults No default behavior

Command Modes EXEC

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example 1 Figure 36-2. show rmon alarms index Command Example

FTOS#show rmon alarm 1
RMON alarm entry 1
sample Interval: 5
object: 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
sample type: absolute value.
value: 255161
alarm type: rising or falling alarm.
rising threshold: 1, RMON event index: 1
falling threshold: 501, RMON event index: 501
alarm owner: 1
alarm status: OK
FTOS#

912 | Remote Monitoring (RMON)

 Example 2 Figure 36-3. show rmon alarms brief Command Example
FTOS#show rmon alarm br
index SNMP OID
--------------------------------------------------------------------
-
1 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
2 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
4 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
5 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
6 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
7 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
8 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
9 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
10 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
11 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
12 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
13 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
14 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
15 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
16 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
17 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
18 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
19 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
20 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
21 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
22 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
FTOS#

show rmon events

ces Display the contents of RMON Event Table.

Syntax show rmon events [index] [brief]

Parameters
index (OPTIONAL) Enter the table index number to display just that entry.
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON Event Table in
an easy-to-read format.

Defaults No default behavior

Command Modes EXEC

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example 1 Figure 36-4. show rmon event index Command Example

FTOS#show rmon event 1
RMON event entry 1
description: 1
event type: LOG and SNMP TRAP.
event community: public
event last time sent: none
event owner: 1
event status: OK
FTOS#

Remote Monitoring (RMON) | 913

 Example 2 Figure 36-5. show rmon event brief Command Example
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show rmon event br

index description
--------------------------------------------------------------------
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 18
19 19
20 20
21 21
22 22
FTOS#

show rmon hc-alarm

ces Display the contents of RMON High-Capacity Alarm Table.

Syntax show rmon hc-alarm [index] [brief]

Parameters
index (OPTIONAL) Enter the table index number to display just that entry.
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON
High-Capacity Alarm Table in an easy-to-read format.

Defaults No default behavior

Command Modes EXEC

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example 1 Figure 36-6. show rmon hc-alarm brief Command Example

FTOS#show rmon hc-alarm brief
index SNMP OID
--------------------------------------------------------------------
1 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
2 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
4 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
5 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
FTOS#

914 | Remote Monitoring (RMON)

 Example 2 Figure 36-7. show rmon hc-alarm index Command Example
FTOS#show rmon hc-alarm 1
RMON high-capacity alarm entry 1
object: 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
sample interval: 5
sample type: absolute value.
value: 185638
alarm type: rising or falling alarm.
alarm rising threshold value: positive.
rising threshold: 1001, RMON event index: 1
alarm falling threshold value: positive.
falling threshold: 999, RMON event index: 6
alarm sampling failed 0 times.
alarm owner: 1
alarm storage type: non-volatile.
alarm status: OK
FTOS#

show rmon history

ces Display the contents of the RMON Ethernet History table.

Syntax show rmon history [index] [brief]

Parameters
index (OPTIONAL) Enter the table index number to display just that entry.
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON Ethernet
History table in an easy-to-read format.

Defaults No default behavior

Command Modes EXEC

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example 1 Figure 36-8. show rmon history index Command Example

FTOS#show rmon history 6001
RMON history control entry 6001
interface: ifIndex.100974631 GigabitEthernet 2/0
bucket requested: 1
bucket granted: 1
sampling interval: 5 sec
owner: 1
status: OK
FTOS#

Remote Monitoring (RMON) | 915

 Example 2 Figure 36-9. show rmon history brief Command Example
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show rmon history brief

index ifIndex interface
--------------------------------------------------------------------
-
6001 100974631 GigabitEthernet 2/0
6002 100974631 GigabitEthernet 2/0
6003 101236775 GigabitEthernet 2/1
6004 101236775 GigabitEthernet 2/1
9001 134529054 GigabitEthernet 3/0
9002 134529054 GigabitEthernet 3/0
9003 134791198 GigabitEthernet 3/1
9004 134791198 GigabitEthernet 3/1
FTOS#

show rmon log

ces Display the contents of RMON Log Table.

Syntax show rmon log [index] [brief]

Parameters
index (OPTIONAL) Enter the log index number to display just that entry.
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON Log Table in
an easy-to-read format.

Defaults No default behavior

Command Modes EXEC

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example 1 Figure 36-10. show rmon log index Command Example

FTOS#show rmon log 2
RMON log entry, alarm table index 2, log index 1
log time: 14638 (THU AUG 12 22:10:40 2004)
description: 2
FTOS#

Example 2 Figure 36-11. show rmon log brief Command Example

FTOS#show rmon log br
eventIndex description
--------------------------------------------------------------------
-
2 2
4 4
FTOS#

Usage The log table has a maximum of 500 entries. If the log exceeds that maximum, the oldest log entry is
Information purged to allow room for the new entry.

916 | Remote Monitoring (RMON)

show rmon statistics
ces Display the contents of RMON Ethernet Statistics table.

Syntax show rmon statistics [index] [brief]

Parameters
index (OPTIONAL) Enter the index number to display just that entry.
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON Ethernet
Statistics table in an easy-to-read format.

Defaults No default behavior

Command Modes EXEC

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example 1 Figure 36-12. show rmon statistics index Command Example

FTOS#show rmon statistics 6001
RMON statistics entry 6001
interface: ifIndex.100974631 GigabitEthernet 2/0
packets dropped: 0
bytes received: 0
packets received: 0
broadcast packets: 0
multicast packets: 0
CRC error: 0
under-size packets: 0
over-size packets: 0
fragment errors: 0
jabber errors: 0
collision: 0
64bytes packets: 0
65-127 bytes packets: 0
128-255 bytes packets: 0
256-511 bytes packets: 0
512-1023 bytes packets: 0
1024-1518 bytes packets: 0
owner: 1
status: OK
<high-capacity data>
HC packets received overflow: 0
HC packets received: 0
HC bytes received overflow: 0
HC bytes received: 0
HC 64bytes packets overflow: 0
HC 64bytes packets: 0
HC 65-127 bytes packets overflow: 0
HC 65-127 bytes packets: 0
HC 128-255 bytes packets overflow: 0
HC 128-255 bytes packets: 0
HC 256-511 bytes packets overflow: 0
HC 256-511 bytes packets: 0
HC 512-1023 bytes packets overflow: 0
HC 512-1023 bytes packets: 0
HC 1024-1518 bytes packets overflow: 0
HC 1024-1518 bytes packets: 0
FTOS#

Remote Monitoring (RMON) | 917

 Example 2 Figure 36-13. show rmon statistics brief Command Example
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show rmon statistics br

index ifIndex interface
--------------------------------------------------------------------
6001 100974631 GigabitEthernet 2/0
6002 100974631 GigabitEthernet 2/0
6003 101236775 GigabitEthernet 2/1
6004 101236775 GigabitEthernet 2/1
9001 134529054 GigabitEthernet 3/0
9002 134529054 GigabitEthernet 3/0
9003 134791198 GigabitEthernet 3/1
9004 134791198 GigabitEthernet 3/1
FTOS#

918 | Remote Monitoring (RMON)

 37
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)

Overview
The FTOS implementation of RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol) is based on the IEEE 802.1w
standard spanning-tree protocol. The RSTP algorithm configures connectivity throughout a bridged
LAN that is comprised of LANs interconnected by bridges.

RSTP is supported by FTOS on all Dell Networking systems, as indicated by the characters that
appear below each command heading:

• C-Series: c
• E-Series: e
• S-Series: s

Commands
The FTOS RSTP commands are:

• bridge-priority
• debug spanning-tree rstp
• description
• description
• forward-delay
• hello-time
• max-age
• protocol spanning-tree rstp
• show config
• show spanning-tree rstp
• spanning-tree rstp
• tc-flush-standard

bridge-priority
ces Set the bridge priority for RSTP.

Syntax bridge-priority priority-value

To return to the default value, enter no bridge-priority.

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) | 919

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

priority-value Enter a number as the bridge priority value in increments of 4096.

Range: 0 to 61440.
Default: 32768

Defaults 32768

Command Modes CONFIGURATION RSTP (conf-rstp)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced for E-Series

Related
protocol spanning-tree rstp Enter the Rapid Spanning Tree mode
Commands

debug spanning-tree rstp

ces Enable debugging of RSTP and view information on the protocol.

Syntax debug spanning-tree rstp [all | bpdu interface {in | out} | events]

To disable debugging, enter no debug spanning-tree rstp.

Parameters
all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to debug all spanning tree operations.
bpdu interface {in | (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bpdu to debug Bridge Protocol Data Units.
out} (OPTIONAL) Enter the interface keyword along with the type slot/port of the interface
you want displayed. Type slot/port options are the following:
• For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword FastEthernet followed by the
slot/port information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For Port Channel groups, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a
number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1-255 for TeraScale
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
Optionally, enter an in or out parameter in conjunction with the optional interface:
• For Receive, enter in
• For Transmit, enter out
events (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword events to debug RSTP events.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
History

920 | Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)

 Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 37-1. debug spanning-tree rstp bpdu Command Example

FTOS#debug spanning-tree rstp bpdu gigabitethernet 2/0 ?
in Receive (in)
out Transmit (out)

description
ces Enter a description of the Rapid Spanning Tree

Syntax description {description}

To remove the description, use the no description {description} command.

Parameters
description Enter a description to identify the Rapid Spanning Tree (80 characters maximum).

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes SPANNING TREE (The prompt is “config-rstp”.)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
pre-7.7.1.0 Introduced

Related
protocol spanning-tree rstp Enter SPANNING TREE mode on the switch.
Commands

disable
ces Disable RSTP globally on the system.

Syntax disable

To enable Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol, enter no disable.

Defaults RSTP is disabled

Command Modes CONFIGURATION RSTP (conf-rstp)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced for E-Series

Related
protocol spanning-tree rstp Enter the Rapid Spanning Tree mode
Commands

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) | 921

 forward-delay
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Configure the amount of time the interface waits in the Listening State and the Learning State before
transitioning to the Forwarding State.

Syntax forward-delay seconds

To return to the default setting, enter no forward-delay.

Parameters
seconds Enter the number of seconds that FTOS waits before transitioning RSTP to the forwarding
state.
Range: 4 to 30
Default: 15 seconds

Defaults 15 seconds

Command Modes CONFIGURATION RSTP (conf-rstp)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced for E-Series

Related
hello-time Change the time interval between BPDUs.
Commands
max-age Change the wait time before RSTP refreshes protocol configuration information.

hello-time
ces Set the time interval between generation of RSTP Data Units (BPDUs).

Syntax hello-time [milli-second] seconds

To return to the default value, enter no hello-time.

Parameters
seconds Enter a number as the time interval between transmission of BPDUs.
Range: 1 to 10 seconds
Default: 2 seconds.
milli-second Enter this keyword to configure a hello time on the order of milliseconds.
Range: 50 - 950 milliseconds

Defaults 2 seconds

Command Modes CONFIGURATION RSTP (conf-rstp)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Added milli-second to S-Series.
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series

922 | Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)

 Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced for E-Series

Usage The hello time is encoded in BPDUs in increments of 1/256ths of a second. The standard minimum
Information hello time in seconds is 1 second, which is encoded as 256. Millisecond hello times are encoded using
values less than 256; the millisecond hello time equals (x/1000)*256.

When millisecond hellos are configured, the default hello interval of 2 seconds is still used for edge
ports; the millisecond hello interval is not used.

Related
forward-delay Change the wait time before RSTP transitions to the Forwarding state.
Commands
max-age Change the wait time before RSTP refreshes protocol configuration information.

max-age
ces Set the time interval for the RSTP bridge to maintain configuration information before refreshing that
information.

Syntax max-age seconds

To return to the default values, enter no max-age.

Parameters
max-age Enter a number of seconds the FTOS waits before refreshing configuration information.
Range: 6 to 40 seconds
Default: 20 seconds

Defaults 20 seconds

Command Modes CONFIGURATION RSTP (conf-rstp)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced for E-Series

Related
max-age Change the wait time before RSTP transitions to the Forwarding state.
Commands
hello-time Change the time interval between BPDUs.

protocol spanning-tree rstp

ces Enter the RSTP mode to configure RSTP.

Syntax protocol spanning-tree rstp

To exit the RSTP mode, enter exit

Defaults Not configured

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) | 923

 Command Modes CONFIGURATION RSTP (conf-rstp)
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 37-2. protocol spanning-tree rstp Command

FTOS(conf)#protocol spanning-tree rstp
FTOS(config-rstp)##no disable

Usage RSTP is not enabled when you enter the RSTP mode. To enable RSTP globally on the system, enter no
Information description from the RSTP mode.

Related
Commands
description Disable RSTP globally on the system.

show config
ces View the current configuration for the mode. Only non-default values are displayed.

Syntax show config

Command Modes CONFIGURATION RSTP (conf-rstp)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 37-3. show config Command for the RSTP Mode
FTOS(conf-rstp)#show config
!
protocol spanning-tree rstp
no disable
bridge-priority 16384
FTOS(conf-rstp)#

show spanning-tree rstp

ces Display the RSTP configuration.

Syntax show spanning-tree rstp [brief]

Parameters
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to view a synopsis of the RSTP
configuration information.

924 | Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)

Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 6.4.1.0 Expanded to display port error disable state (EDS) caused by loopback BPDU
inconsistency
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced for E-Series

Example 1 Figure 37-4. show spanning-tree rstp brief Command

FTOS#show spanning-tree rstp brief
Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol
Root ID Priority 8192, Address 0001.e805.e306
Root Bridge hello time 4, max age 20, forward delay 15
Bridge ID Priority 16384, Address 0001.e801.6aa8
Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15

Interface Designated
Name PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Bridge ID PortID
---------- -------- ---- ------- --- ------- -------------------- --------
Gi 4/0 128.418 128 20000 FWD 20000 16384 0001.e801.6aa8 128.418
Gi 4/1 128.419 128 20000 FWD 20000 16384 0001.e801.6aa8 128.419
Gi 4/8 128.426 128 20000 FWD 20000 8192 0001.e805.e306 128.130
Gi 4/9 128.427 128 20000 BLK 20000 8192 0001.e805.e306 128.131

Interface
Name Role PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Link-type Edge
---------- ------ -------- ---- ------- --- ------- --------- ----
Gi 4/0 Desg 128.418 128 20000 FWD 20000 P2P Yes
Gi 4/1 Desg 128.419 128 20000 FWD 20000 P2P Yes
Gi 4/8 Root 128.426 128 20000 FWD 20000 P2P No
Gi 4/9 Altr 128.427 128 20000 BLK 20000 P2P No
FTOS#

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) | 925

 Example 2 Figure 37-5. show spanning-tree rstp with EDS and LBK
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show spanning-tree rstp br

Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol
Root ID Priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.6aa8
Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15
Bridge ID Priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.6aa8
We are the root
Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15

Interface Designated
Name PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Bridge ID PortID
---------- -------- ---- ------- --- ------- -------------------- --------
Gi 0/0 128.257 128 20000 EDS 0 32768 0001.e801.6aa8 128.257

Interface
Name Role PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Link-type Edge
---------- ------ -------- ---- ------- --- ------- --------- ----
Gi 0/0 ErrDis 128.257 128 20000 EDS 0 P2P No

FTOS#show spanning-tree rstp

Root Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.6aa8
Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15, max hops 0
Bridge Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.6aa8
Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15, max hops 0
We are the root
Current root has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.6aa8
Number of topology changes 1, last change occurred 00:00:31 ago on Gi 0/0
Port 257 (GigabitEthernet 0/0) is LBK_INC Discarding LBK_INC means
Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.257 Loopback BPDU
Designated root has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.6aa8 Inconsistency
Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.6aa8
Designated port id is 128.257, designated path cost 0
Number of transitions to forwarding state 1
BPDU : sent 27, received 9
The port is not in the Edge port mode

FTOS#

spanning-tree rstp
ces Configure Port cost, Edge port with optional Bridge Port Data Unit (BPDU) guard, or Port priority on
the RSTP.

Syntax spanning-tree rstp {cost Port cost | edge-port [bpduguard [shutdown-on-violation]] |

priority priority}

To remove the port cost, edge port with optional BPDU, or port priority, use the no spanning-tree
rstp {cost Port cost | edge-port [bpduguard] | priority priority} command.

926 | Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)

 Parameters
cost Port cost (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword cost followed by the port cost value.
Range: 1 to 200000
Defaults:
100 Mb/s Ethernet interface = 200000
1-Gigabit Ethernet interface = 20000
10-Gigabit Ethernet interface = 2000
Port Channel interface with one 100 Mb/s Ethernet = 200000
Port Channel interface with one 1-Gigabit Ethernet = 20000
Port Channel interface with one 10-Gigabit Ethernet = 2000
Port Channel with two 1-Gigabit Ethernet = 18000
Port Channel with two 10-Gigabit Ethernet = 1800
Port Channel with two 100-Mbps Ethernet = 180000
edge-port Enter the keyword edge-port to configure the interface as a Rapid Spanning Tree
edge port.
bpduguard (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword portfast to enable Portfast to move the interface
into forwarding mode immediately after the root fails.
Enter the keyword bpduguard to disable the port when it receives a BPDU.
shutdown-on-v (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword shutdown-on-violation to hardware disable
iolation an interface when a BPDU is received and the port is disabled.
priority priority (OPTIONAL) Enter keyword priority followed by a value in increments of 16 as
the priority.
Range: 0 to 240.
Default: 128

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced hardware shutdown-on-violation options
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Added the optional Bridge Port Data Unit (BPDU) guard.
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced for E-Series

Usage The BPDU guard option prevents the port from participating in an active STP topology in case a
Information BPDU appears on a port unintentionally, or is misconfigured, or is subject to a DOS attack. This option
places the port into an error disable state if a BPDU appears, and a message is logged so that the
administrator can take corrective action.

Note: A port configured as an edge port, on an RSTP switch, will immediately transition to
the forwarding state. Only ports connected to end-hosts should be configured as edge ports.
Consider an edge port similar to a port with a spanning-tree portfast enabled.

If shutdown-on-violation is not enabled, BPDUs will still be sent to the RPM CPU.

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) | 927

 Example Figure 37-6. spanning-tree rstp edge-port Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS(conf)#interface gigabitethernet 4/0

FTOS(conf-if-gi-4/0)#spanning-tree rstp edge-port
FTOS(conf-if-gi-4/0)#show config
!
interface GigabitEthernet 4/0
no ip address
switchport
spanning-tree rstp edge-port
no shutdown
FTOS#

tc-flush-standard
ces Enable the MAC address flushing upon receiving every topology change notification.

Syntax tc-flush-standard
To disable, use the no tc-flush-standard command.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 6.5.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage By default FTOS implements an optimized flush mechanism for RSTP. This helps in flushing MAC
Information addresses only when necessary (and less often), allowing for faster convergence during topology
changes. However, if a standards-based flush mechanism is needed, this knob command can be turned
on to enable flushing MAC addresses upon receiving every topology change notification.

928 | Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)

 38
Security

Overview
Except for the Trace List feature (E-Series only), most of the commands in this chapter are available on
all three Dell Networking platforms — C-Series, E-Series, and S-Series (the S-Series models that run
FTOS), as noted by the following icons that appear under each command icon: c e s

Commands
This chapter contains various types of security commands in FTOS, in the following sections:
• AAA Accounting Commands
• Authorization and Privilege Commands
• Authentication and Password Commands
• RADIUS Commands
• TACACS+ Commands
• Port Authentication (802.1X) Commands
• SSH Server and SCP Commands
• Secure DHCP Commands
For configuration details, see the Security chapter in the FTOS Configuration Guide.

Note: Starting with FTOS v7.2.1.0, LEAP with MSCHAP v2 supplicant is implemented.

AAA Accounting Commands

AAA Accounting enables tracking of services that users are accessing and the amount of network
resources being consumed by those services.When AAA Accounting is enabled, the network server
reports user activity to the TACACS+ security server in the form of accounting records. Each
accounting record is comprised of accounting AV pairs and is stored on the access control server.

As with authentication and authorization, you must configure AAA Accounting by defining named list
of accounting methods, and then apply that list to various interfaces. The commands are:
• aaa accounting
• aaa accounting suppress
• accounting
• show accounting

Security | 929
 aaa accounting
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Enable AAA Accounting and create a record for monitoring the accounting function.

Syntax aaa accounting {system | exec | commands level} {name | default}{start-stop | wait-start |
stop-only} {tacacs+}
To disable AAA Accounting, use the no aaa accounting {system | exec | command level} {name
| default}{start-stop | wait-start | stop-only} {tacacs+} command.

Parameters
system Enter the keyword system to send accounting information of any other AAA
configuration.
exec Enter the keyword exec to send accounting information when a user has logged in
to the EXEC mode.
commands level Enter the keyword command followed by a privilege level for accounting of
commands executed at that privilege level.
name | default Enter one of the following:
• For name, a user-defined name of a list of accounting methods
• default for the default accounting methods
start-stop Enter the keyword start-stop to send a tart accounting” notice at the beginning of
the requested event and a “stop accounting” notice at the end of the event.
wait-start Enter the keyword wait-start to ensure that the TACACS+ security server
acknowledges the start notice before granting the user’s process request.
stop-only Enter the keyword stop-only to instruct the TACACS+ security server to send a
“stop record accounting” notice at the end of the requested user process.
tacacs+ Enter the keyword tacacs+ to use TACACS+ data for accounting. FTOS currently
only supports TACACS+ accounting.

Defaults No default configuration or behavior

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
Version 6.3.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 38-1. aaa accounting Command Examples

FTOS(conf)# aaa accounting exec default start-stop tacacs+
FTOS(conf)# aaa accounting command 15 default start-stop tacacs+
FTOS (config)#

Usage In the example above, TACACS+ accounting is used to track all usage of EXEC command and
Information commands on privilege level 15.

Privilege level 15 is the default. If you want to track usage at privilege level 1, for example, use aaa
accounting command 1.

930 | Security
 Related
enable password Change the password for the enable command.
Commands
login authentication Enable AAA login authentication on terminal lines.
password Create a password.
tacacs-server host Specify a TACACS+ server host.

aaa accounting suppress

ces Prevent the generation of accounting records of users with user name value of NULL.

Syntax aaa accounting suppress null-username

To permit accounting records to users with user name value of NULL, use the no aaa accounting
suppress null-username command

Defaults Accounting records are recorded for all users.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
Version 6.3.1.0 Introduced

Usage FTOS issues accounting records for all users on the system, including users whose username string,
Information due to protocol translation, is NULL. For example, a user who comes on line with the aaa
authentication login method-list none command is applied. Use aaa accounting suppress
command to prevent accounting records from being generated for sessions that do not have user names
associated to them.

accounting
ces Apply an accounting method list to terminal lines.

Syntax accounting {exec | commands level} method-list

Parameters
exec Enter this keyword to apply an EXEC level accounting method list.
commands level Enter this keyword to apply an EXEC and CONFIGURATION level
accounting method list.
method-list Enter a method list that you defined using the command aaa accounting
exec or aaa accounting commands.

Defaults None

Command Modes LINE

Security | 931
 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60

History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
Version 6.3.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Usage
aaa accounting Enable AAA Accounting and create a record for monitoring the accounting function.
Information

show accounting
ces Display the active accounting sessions for each online user.

Syntax show accounting

Defaults No default configuration or behavior

Command Modes EXEC

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
Version 6.3.1.0 Introduced

Example Figure 38-2. show accounting Command Example

FTOS#show accounting
Active accounted actions on tty2, User admin Priv 1
Task ID 1, EXEC Accounting record, 00:00:39 Elapsed, service=shell
Active accounted actions on tty3, User admin Priv 1
Task ID 2, EXEC Accounting record, 00:00:26 Elapsed, service=shell
FTOS#

Usage This command steps through all active sessions and then displays the accounting records for the active
Information account functions.

Authorization and Privilege Commands

Set command line authorization and privilege levels with the following commands:
• authorization
• aaa authorization commands
• aaa authorization config-commands
• aaa authorization exec
• privilege level (CONFIGURATION mode)
• privilege level (LINE mode)

932 | Security
authorization
ces Apply an authorization method list to terminal lines.

Syntax authorization {exec | commands level} method-list

Parameters
exec Enter this keyword to apply an EXEC level authorization method list.
commands level Enter this keyword to apply an EXEC and CONFIGURATION level
authorization method list.
method-list Enter a method list that you defined using the command aaa
authorization exec or aaa authorization commands.

Defaults None

Command Modes LINE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
Version 6.3.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Usage
aaa authorization commands Set parameters that restrict (or permit) a user’s access to EXEC and
Information
CONFIGURATION level commands
aaa authorization exec Set parameters that restrict (or permit) a user’s access to EXEC level
commands.

aaa authorization commands

ces Set parameters that restrict (or permit) a user’s access to EXEC and CONFIGURATION level
commands

Syntax aaa authorization commands level {name | default} {local || tacacs+ || none}

Undo a configuration with the no aaa authorization commands level {name | default} {local ||
tacacs+ || none} command syntax.

Parameters
commands level Enter the keyword commands followed by the command privilege
level for command level authorization.
name Define a name for the list of authorization methods.
default Define the default list of authorization methods.
local Use the authorization parameters on the system to perform authorization.
tacacs+ Use the TACACS+ protocol to perform authorization.
none Enter this keyword to apply no authorization.

Defaults None

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Security | 933
 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60

History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
Version 6.1.1.0 Added support for RADIUS

aaa authorization config-commands

e Set parameters that restrict (or permit) a user’s access to EXEC level commands.

Syntax aaa authorization config-commands

Disable authorization checking for CONFIGURATION level commands using the command no aaa
authorization config-commands.

Defaults Enabled when you configure aaa authorization commands

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for E-Series
History

Usage By default, the command aaa authorization commands configures the system to check both EXEC
Information level and CONFIGURATION level commands. Use the command no aaa authorization
config-commands to enable only EXEC-level command checking.

aaa authorization exec

ces Set parameters that restrict (or permit) a user’s access to EXEC-level commands.

Syntax aaa authorization exec {name | default} {local || tacacs+ || if-authenticated || none}

Disable authorization checking for EXEC level commands using the command no aaa authorization
exec.

Parameters
name Define a name for the list of authorization methods.
default Define the default list of authorization methods.
local Use the authorization parameters on the system to perform authorization.
tacacs+ Use the TACACS+ protocol to perform authorization.
none Enter this keyword to apply no authorization.

Defaults None

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series

934 | Security
 Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
Version 6.1.1.0 Added support for RADIUS

privilege level (CONFIGURATION mode)

ces Change the access or privilege level of one or more commands.

Syntax privilege mode {level level command | reset command}

To delete access to a level and command, use the no privilege mode level level command command.

Parameters
mode Enter one of the following keywords as the mode for which you are controlling access:
• configure for the CONFIGURATION mode
• exec for the EXEC mode
• interface for the INTERFACE modes
• line for the LINE mode
• route-map for the ROUTE-MAP
• router for the ROUTER OSPF, ROUTER RIP, ROUTER ISIS and ROUTER BGP
modes.
level level Enter the keyword level followed by a number for the access level.
Range: 0 to 15.
Level 1 is the EXEC mode and Level 15 allows access to all CLI modes and commands.
reset Enter the keyword reset to return the security level to the default setting.
command Enter the command’s keywords to assign the command to a certain access level. You can
enter one or all of the keywords

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage Use the enable password command to define a password for the level to which you are assigning
Information privilege or access.

privilege level (LINE mode)

ces Change the access level for users on the terminal lines.

Syntax privilege level level

To delete access to a terminal line, use the no privilege level level command.

Security | 935
 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

level level Enter the keyword level followed by a number for the access level.
Range: 0 to 15.
Level 1 is the EXEC mode and Level 15 allows access to all CLI modes.

Defaults level = 15

Command Modes LINE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Authentication and Password Commands

This section contains the following commands controlling management access to the system:
• aaa authentication enable
• aaa authentication login
• access-class
• enable password
• enable restricted
• enable secret
• login authentication
• password
• password-attributes
• privilege level (CONFIGURATION mode)
• privilege level (LINE mode)
• service password-encryption
• show privilege
• show users
• timeout login response
• username

aaa authentication enable

ces Configure AAA Authentication method lists for user access to the EXEC privilege mode (the “Enable”
access).

Syntax aaa authentication enable {default | method-list-name} method [... method2]

To return to the default setting, use the no aaa authentication enable {default | method-list-name}
method [... method2] command.

936 | Security
 Parameters
default Enter the keyword default followed by the authentication methods to use as
the default sequence of methods to be used for the Enable log-in.
Default: default enable
method-list-name Enter a text string (up to 16 characters long) to name the list of enabled
authentication methods activated at log in.
method Enter one of the following methods:
• enable - use the password defined by the enable password command in
the CONFIGURATION mode.
• line - use the password defined by the password command in the LINE
mode.
• none - no authentication.
• radius - use the RADIUS server(s) configured with the radius-server host
command.
• tacacs+ - use the TACACS+ server(s) configured with the tacacs-server
host command.
... method2 (OPTIONAL) In the event of a “no response” from the first method, FTOS
applies the next configured method.

Defaults Use the enable password.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced

Usage By default, the Enable password is used. If aaa authentication enable default is configured, FTOS
Information will use the methods defined for Enable access instead.

Methods configured with the aaa authentication enable command are evaluated in the order they
are configured. If authentication fails using the primary method, FTOS employs the second method (or
third method, if necessary) automatically. For example, if the TACACS+ server is reachable, but the
server key is invalid, FTOS proceeds to the next authentication method. The TACACS+ is incorrect,
but the user is still authenticated by the secondary method.

Related
enable password Change the password for the enable command.
Commands
login authentication Enable AAA login authentication on terminal lines.
password Create a password.
radius-server host Specify a RADIUS server host.
tacacs-server host Specify a TACACS+ server host.

Security | 937
 aaa authentication login
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Configure AAA Authentication method lists for user access to the EXEC mode (Enable log-in).

Syntax aaa authentication login {method-list-name | default} method [... method4]

To return to the default setting, use the no aaa authentication login {method-list-name | default}
command.

Parameters
method-list-name Enter a text string (up to 16 characters long) as the name of a user-configured
method list that can be applied to different lines.
default Enter the keyword default to specify that the method list specified is the default
method for all terminal lines.
method Enter one of the following methods:
• enable - use the password defined by the enable password command in the
CONFIGURATION mode.
• line - use the password defined by the password command in the LINE
mode.
• local - use the user name/password defined by the in the local configuration.
• none - no authentication.
• radius - use the RADIUS server(s) configured with the radius-server host
command.
• tacacs+ - use the TACACS+ server(s) configured with the tacacs-server
host command.
... method4 (OPTIONAL) Enter up to four additional methods. In the event of a “no
response” from the first method, FTOS applies the next configured method (up
to four configured methods).

Default Not configured (that is, no authentication is performed)

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Usage By default, the locally configured username password will be used. If aaa authentication login
Information default is configured, FTOS will use the methods defined by this command for login instead.

Methods configured with the aaa authentication login command are evaluated in the order they are
configured. If users encounter an error with the first method listed, FTOS applies the next method
configured. If users fail the first method listed, no other methods are applied. The only exception is the
local method. If the user’s name is not listed in the local database, the next method is applied. If the
correct user name/password combination are not entered, the user is not allowed access to the switch.

Note: If authentication fails using the primary method, FTOS employs the second method (or
third method, if necessary) automatically. For example, if the TACACS+ server is reachable,
but the server key is invalid, FTOS proceeds to the next authentication method. The
TACACS+ is incorrect, but the user is still authenticated by the secondary method.

938 | Security
 After configuring the aaa authentication login command, configure the login authentication command
to enable the authentication scheme on terminal lines.

Connections to the SSH server will work with the following login mechanisms: local, radius and
tacacs.

Related
login authentication Apply an authentication method list to designated terminal lines.
Commands
password Create a password.
radius-server host Specify a RADIUS server host.
tacacs-server host Specify a TACACS+ server host.

access-class
ces Restrict incoming connections to a particular IP address in a defined IP access control list (ACL).

Syntax access-class access-list-name

To delete a setting, use the no access-class command.

Parameters
access-list-name Enter the name of an established IP Standard ACL.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes LINE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Related
line Apply an authentication method list to designated terminal lines.
Commands
ip access-list standard Name (or select) a standard access list to filter based on IP address.
ip access-list extended Name (or select) an extended access list based on IP addresses or protocols.

enable password
ces Change the password for the enable command.

Syntax enable password [level level] [encryption-type] password

To delete a password, use the no enable password [encryption-type] password [level level]
command.

Security | 939
 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

level level (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword level followed by a number as the level of
access.
Range: 1 to 15
encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter the number 7 or 0 as the encryption type.
Enter a 7 followed by a text string as the hidden password. The text string must
be a password that was already encrypted by a Dell Force10 router.
Use this parameter only with a password that you copied from the show
running-config file of another Dell Networking router.
password Enter a text string, up to 32 characters long, as the clear text password.

Defaults No password is configured. level = 15

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage Use this command to define a password for a level and use the privilege level (CONFIGURATION
Information mode) command to control access to command modes.

Passwords must meet the following criteria:

• Start with a letter, not a number.

• Passwords can have a regular expression as the password. To create a password with a regular
expression in it, you must use CNTL + v prior to entering regular expression. For example, to
create the password abcd]e, you type “abcd CNTL v ]e”. When the password is created, you
do not use the CNTL + v key combination and enter “abcd]e”.

Note: The question mark (?) and the tilde (~) are not supported characters.

Related
show running-config View the current configuration.
Commands
privilege level (CONFIGURATION mode) Control access to command modes within the switch.

enable restricted
ces Allows Dell Networking technical support to access restricted commands.

Syntax enable restricted [encryption-type] password

To disallow access to restricted commands, enter no enable restricted.

940 | Security
 Parameters
encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter the number 7 as the encryption type.
Enter 7 followed a text string as the hidden password. The text string must be a
password that was already encrypted by a Dell Networking router.
Use this parameter only with a password that you copied from the show
running-config file of another Dell Networking router.
password Enter a text string, up to 32 characters long, as the clear text password.

Command Modes Not configured.

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage Only Dell Networking Technical Support staff use this command.
Information

enable secret
ces Change the password for the enable command.

Syntax enable secret [level level] [encryption-type] password

To delete a password, use the no enable secret [encryption-type] password [level level] command.

Parameters
level level (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword level followed by a number as the level of
access.
Range: 1 to 15
encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter the number 5 or 0 as the encryption type.
Enter a 5 followed a text string as the hidden password. The text string must be
a password that was already encrypted by a Dell Networking router.
Use this parameter only with a password that you copied from the show
running-config file of another Dell Networking router.
password Enter a text string, up to 32 characters long, as the clear text password.

Defaults No password is configured. level = 15

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage Use this command to define a password for a level and use the privilege level (CONFIGURATION
Information mode) command to control access to command modes.

Security | 941
 Passwords must meet the following criteria:
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

• Start with a letter, not a number.

• Passwords can have a regular expression as the password. To create a password with a regular
expression in it, you must use CNTL + v prior to entering regular expression. For example, to
create the password abcd]e, you type abcd CNTL v]e and when the password is created, you
do not use the CNTL + v key combination and enter abcd]e.
Note: The question mark (?) and the tilde (~) are not supported characters.

Related
show running-config View the current configuration.
Commands
privilege level (CONFIGURATION mode) Control access to command modes within the E-Series.

login authentication
ces Apply an authentication method list to designated terminal lines.

Syntax login authentication {method-list-name | default}

To use the local user/password database for login authentication, enter no login authentication.

Parameters
method-list-name Enter the method-list-name to specify that method list, created in the aaa
authentication login command, to be applied to the designated terminal line.
default Enter the keyword default to specify that the default method list, created in the
aaa authentication login command, is applied to the terminal line.

Defaults No authentication is performed on the console lines, and local authentication is performed on the
virtual terminal and auxiliary lines.

Command Modes LINE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Usage If you configure the aaa authentication login default command, then the login authentication default
Information command automatically is applied to all terminal lines.

Related
aaa authentication login Select login authentication methods.
Commands

password
ces Specify a password for users on terminal lines.

Syntax password [encryption-type] password

To delete a password, use the no password password command.

942 | Security
 Parameters
encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter either zero (0) or 7 as the encryption type for the password
entered. The options are:
• 0 is the default and means the password is not encrypted and stored as clear text.
• 7 means that the password is encrypted and hidden.
password Enter a text string up to 32 characters long. The first character of the password
must be a letter.
You cannot use spaces in the password.

Defaults No password is configured.

Command Modes LINE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage FTOS prompts users for these passwords when the method for authentication or authorization used is
Information “line”.

Related
enable password Set the password for the enable command.
Commands
login authentication Configure an authentication method to log in to the switch.
service Encrypt all passwords configured in FTOS.
password-encryption
radius-server key Configure a key for all RADIUS communications between the switch and the
RADIUS host server.
tacacs-server key Configure a key for communication between a TACACS+ server and client.
username Establish an authentication system based on user names.

password-attributes
ces Configure the password attributes (strong password).

Syntax password-attributes [min-length number] [max-retry number] [character-restriction [upper

number] [lower number] [numeric number] [special-char number]]
To return to the default, use the no password-attributes [min-length number] [max-retry number]
[character-restriction [upper number] [lower number] [numeric number] [special-char
number]] command.

Parameters
min-length number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword min-length followed by the number of
characters.
Range: 0 - 32 characters
max-retry number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword max-retry followed by the number of
maximum password retries.
Range: 0 - 16
character-restriction (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword character-restriction to indicate a
character restriction for the password.

Security | 943
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

upper number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword upper followed the upper number.
Range: 0 - 31
lower number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword lower followed the lower number.
Range: 0 - 31
numeric number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword numeric followed the numeric number.
Range: 0 - 31
special-char number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword special-char followed the number of
special characters permitted.
Range: 0 - 31

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced

Related
password Specify a password for users on terminal lines.
Commands

service password-encryption
ces Encrypt all passwords configured in FTOS.

Syntax service password-encryption

To store new passwords as clear text, enter no service password-encryption.

Defaults Enabled.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Caution: Encrypting passwords with this command does not provide a high level of
security. When the passwords are encrypted, you cannot return them to plain text unless you
re-configure them. To remove an encrypted password, use the no password password
command.

Usage To keep unauthorized people from viewing passwords in the switch configuration file, use the service
Information password-encryption command. This command encrypts the clear-text passwords created for user
name passwords, authentication key passwords, the privileged command password, and console and
virtual terminal line access passwords.

944 | Security
 To view passwords, use the show running-config command.

show privilege
ces View your access level.

Syntax show privilege

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 38-3. show privilege Command Output

FTOS#show privilege
Current privilege level is 15
FTOS#

Related
privilege level (CONFIGURATION mode) Assign access control to different command modes.
Commands

show users
ces View information on all users logged into the switch.

Syntax show users [all]

Parameters
all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to view all terminal lines in the switch.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 38-4. show users Command Example

FTOS#show user
Line User Host(s) Location
0 console 0 admin idle
* 3 vty 1 admin idle 172.31.1.4
FTOS#

Security | 945
 Table 1 describes the information in the show users command example.
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Table 1 show users Command Example Fields

Field Description
(untitled) Indicates with a * which terminal line you are using.
Line Displays the terminal lines currently in use.
User Displays the user name of all users logged in.
Host(s) Displays the terminal line status.
Location Displays the IP address of the user.

Related
username Enable a user.
Commands

timeout login response

ces Specify how long the software will wait for login input (for example, user name and password) before
timing out.

Syntax timeout login response seconds

To return to the default values, enter no timeout login response.

Parameters
seconds Enter a number of seconds the software will wait before logging you out.
Range: 1 to 300.
Default: 300 seconds.

Defaults seconds = 300 seconds

Command Modes LINE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage The software measures the period of inactivity defined in this command as the period between
Information consecutive keystrokes. For example, if your password is “password” you can enter “p” and wait 29
seconds to enter the next letter.

946 | Security
username
ces Establish an authentication system based on user names.

Syntax username name [access-class access-list-name] [nopassword | {password | secret}

[encryption-type] password] [privilege level]
If you do not want a specific user to enter a password, use the nopassword option.
To delete authentication for a user, use the no username name command.

Parameters
name Enter a text string for the name of the user up to 63 characters.

Note: If the entered username is longer than 16 characters, the BSD

username and password are not created. This is a BSD limitation, not
an FTOS limitation. FTOS supports up to 63 characters for the
username and password.
access-class Enter the keyword access-class followed by the name of a configured access
access-list-name control list (either a IP access control list or MAC access control list).
nopassword Enter the keyword nopassword to specify that the user should not enter a
password.
password Enter the keyword password followed by the encryption-type or the password.
secret Enter the keyword secret followed by the encryption-type or the password.
encryption-type Enter an encryption type for the password that you will enter.
• 0 directs FTOS to store the password as clear text. It is the default encryption
type when using the password option.
• 7 to indicate that a password ecrypted using a DES hashing algorithm will
follow. This encryption type is available with the password option only.
• 5 to indicate that a password ecrypted using an MD5 hashing algorithm will
follow. This encryption type is available with the secret option only, and is the
default encryption type for this option.
password Enter a string up to 32 characters long.
privilege level Enter the keyword privilege followed by a number from zero (0) to 15.
secret Enter the keyword secret followed by the encryption type.

Defaults The default encryption type for the password option is 0. The default encryption type for the secret
option is 5.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.4 Enhanced BSD encryption
History
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
Added BSD encryption to MD5 passwords
Version 7.7.1.0 Added support for secret option and MD5 password encryption. Extended name
from 25 characters to 63.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
E-Series original Command

Usage To view the defined user names, use the show running-config user command.
Information

Security | 947
 When creating a username and secret password, a new userID is also created: bsd-username. This
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

additional username and password is automatically created on all systems, but is applicable to the
Automations features SmartScripts and HyperLink (still in Beta phase).

When you create a username and secret password (for example, username qsmythe secret q12lmo),
the system creates bsd-username qsmyth secret random-password. The random password is
assigned by the system for BSD shell access for the automation features. When you show your
configuration, both passwords appear.

FTOS#: show run

.
.
.
username <username> secret 5 <password>
bsd-username <username> secret <password>
.
.
FTOS#
When you save the configuration, and reload the system, both new passwords are applied to the
configuration. If you downgrade to a release prior to FTOS 8.3.3.4, the BSD username and password
are removed from the configuration.

The BSD username is created when you enter a new username in the CLI. It is not created from a pre-
existing username. Following an upgrade to FTOS 8.3.3.3, you must enter a new (or re-enter the old)
username and password to get the BSD username.

Note: If the entered username is longer than 16 characters, the BSD username and password
are not created. This is a BSD limitation, not an FTOS limitation. FTOS supports up to 63
characters for the username and password.

Related
password Specify a password for users on terminal lines.
Commands
show running-config View the current configuration.

RADIUS Commands
The RADIUS commands supported by FTOS. are:
• debug radius
• ip radius source-interface
• radius-server deadtime
• radius-server host
• radius-server key
• radius-server retransmit
• radius-server timeout

948 | Security
debug radius
ces View RADIUS transactions to assist with troubleshooting.

Syntax debug radius

To disable debugging of RADIUS, enter no debug radius.

Defaults Disabled.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

ip radius source-interface
ces Specify an interface’s IP address as the source IP address for RADIUS connections.

Syntax ip radius source-interface interface

To delete a source interface, enter no ip radius source-interface.

Parameters
interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For an 100/1000 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed
by the slot/port information.
• For a Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by
the slot/port information.
• For Loopback interfaces, enter the keyword loopback followed by a number from
zero (0) to 16838.
• For the Null interface, enter the keywords null 0.
• For the Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a
number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a Ten Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Mode CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Security | 949
 radius-server deadtime
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Configure a time interval during which non-responsive RADIUS servers to authentication requests are
skipped.

Syntax radius-server deadtime seconds

To disable this function or return to the default value, enter no radius-server deadtime.

Parameters
seconds Enter a number of seconds during which non-responsive RADIUS servers are skipped.
Range: 0 to 2147483647 seconds.
Default: 0 seconds.

Defaults 0 seconds

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

radius-server host
ces Configure a RADIUS server host.

Syntax radius-server host {hostname | ip-address} [auth-port port-number] [retransmit retries]

[timeout seconds] [key [encryption-type] key]

To delete a RADIUS server host or return to the default values, use the no radius-server host
{hostname | ip-address} [auth-port] [retransmit] [timeout] command.

Parameters
hostname Enter the name of the RADIUS server host.
ip-address Enter the IP address, in dotted decimal format, of the RADIUS server
host.
auth-port port-number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword auth-port followed by a number as
the port number.
Range: zero (0) to 65535
The default port-number is 1812.
retransmit retries (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword retransmit followed by a number as
the number of attempts. This parameter overwrites the radius-server
retransmit command.
Range: zero (0) to 100
Default: 3 attempts

950 | Security
 timeout seconds (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword timeout followed by the seconds the
time interval the switch waits for a reply from the RADIUS server. This
parameter overwrites the radius-server timeout command.
Range: 0 to 1000
Default: 5 seconds
key [encryption-type] key (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword key followed by an optional
encryption-type and a string up to 42 characters long as the
authentication key. This authentication key is used by the RADIUS host
server and the RADIUS daemon operating on this switch.
For the encryption-type, enter either zero (0) or 7 as the encryption type
for the key entered. The options are:
• 0 is the default and means the password is not encrypted and stored
as clear text.
• 7 means that the password is encrypted and hidden.
Configure this parameter last because leading spaces are ignored.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Authentication key length increased to 42 characters
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage Configure up to six RADIUS server hosts by using this command for each server host configured.
Information FTOS searches for the RADIUS hosts in the order they are configured in the software.

The global default values for timeout, retransmit, and key optional parameters are applied, unless those
values are specified in the radius-server host or other commands. If you configure timeout, retransmit,
or key values, you must include those keywords when entering the no radius-server host command
syntax to return to the global default values.

Related
login authentication Set the database to be checked when a user logs in.
Commands
radius-server key Set a authentication key for RADIUS communications.
radius-server retransmit Set the number of times the RADIUS server will attempt to send
information.
radius-server timeout Set the time interval before the RADIUS server times out.

radius-server key
ces Configure a key for all RADIUS communications between the switch and the RADIUS host server.

Syntax radius-server key [encryption-type] key

To delete a password, enter no radius-server key.

Security | 951
 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter either zero (0) or 7 as the encryption type for the key entered.
The options are:
• 0 is the default and means the key is not encrypted and stored as clear text.
• 7 means that the key is encrypted and hidden.
key Enter a string that is the key to be exchanged between the switch and RADIUS
servers. It can be up to 42 characters long.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Authentication key length increased to 42 characters
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage The key configured on the switch must match the key configured on the RADIUS server daemon.
Information
If the key parameter in the radius-server host command is configured, the key configured with the
radius-server key command is the default key for all RADIUS communications.

Related
radius-server host Configure a RADIUS host.
Commands

radius-server retransmit
ces Configure the number of times the switch attempts to connect with the configured RADIUS host server
before declaring the RADIUS host server unreachable.

Syntax radius-server retransmit retries

To configure zero retransmit attempts, enter no radius-server retransmit. To return to the default
setting, enter radius-server retransmit 3.

Parameters
retries Enter a number of attempts that FTOS tries to locate a RADIUS server.
Range: zero (0) to 100.
Default: 3 retries.

Defaults 3 retries

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

952 | Security
 Related
radius-server host Configure a RADIUS host.
Commands

radius-server timeout
ces Configure the amount of time the RADIUS client (the switch) waits for a RADIUS host server to reply
to a request.

Syntax radius-server timeout seconds

To return to the default value, enter no radius-server timeout.

Parameters
seconds Enter the number of seconds between an unsuccessful attempt and the FTOS times
out.
Range: zero (0) to 1000 seconds.
Default: 5 seconds.

Defaults 5 seconds

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Related
radius-server host Configure a RADIUS host.
Commands

TACACS+ Commands
FTOS supports TACACS+ as an alternate method for login authentication.
• debug tacacs+
• ip tacacs source-interface
• tacacs-server host
• tacacs-server key

debug tacacs+
ces View TACACS+ transactions to assist with troubleshooting.

Syntax debug tacacs+

To disable debugging of TACACS+, enter no debug tacacs+.

Defaults Disabled.

Security | 953
 Command Modes EXEC Privilege
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

ip tacacs source-interface
ces Specify an interface’s IP address as the source IP address for TACACS+ connections.

Syntax ip tacacs source-interface interface

To delete a source interface, enter no ip tacacs source-interface.

Parameters
interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For an 100/1000 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed
by the slot/port information.
• For Loopback interfaces, enter the keyword loopback followed by a number
from zero (0) to 16838.
• For the Null interface, enter the keywords null 0.
• For the Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a
number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a Ten Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to
4094.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Mode CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

954 | Security
tacacs-server host
ces Specify a TACACS+ host.

Syntax tacacs-server host {hostname | ip-address} [port number] [timeout seconds] [key key]
To remove a TACACS+ server host, use the no tacacs-server host {hostname | ip-address}
command.

Parameters
hostname Enter the name of the TACACS+ server host.
ip-address Enter the IP address, in dotted decimal format, of the TACACS+ server host.
port number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword port followed by a number as the port to be
used by the TACACS+ server.
Range: zero (0) to 65535
Default: 49
timeout seconds (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword timeout followed by the number of seconds
the switch waits for a reply from the TACACS+ server.
Range: 0 to 1000
Default: 10 seconds
key key (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword key followed by a string up to 42 characters
long as the authentication key. This authentication key must match the key
specified in the tacacs-server key for the TACACS+ daemon.
Configure this parameter last because leading spaces are ignored.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Authentication key length increased to 42 characters
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage To list multiple TACACS+ servers to be used by the aaa authentication login command, configure this
Information command multiple times.

If you are not configuring the switch as a TACACS+ server, you do not need to configure the port,
timeout and key optional parameters. If you do not configure a key, the key assigned in the
tacacs-server key command is used.

Related
aaa authentication login Specify the login authentication method.
Commands
tacacs-server key Configure a TACACS+ key for the TACACS server.

Security | 955
 tacacs-server key
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Configure a key for communication between a TACACS+ server and client.

Syntax tacacs-server key [encryption-type] key

To delete a key, use the no tacacs-server key key

Parameters
encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter either zero (0) or 7 as the encryption type for the key entered.
The options are:
• 0 is the default and means the key is not encrypted and stored as clear text.
• 7 means that the key is encrypted and hidden.
key Enter a text string, up to 42 characters long, as the clear text password.
Leading spaces are ignored.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Authentication key length increased to 42 characters
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage The key configured with this command must match the key configured on the TACACS+ daemon.
Information

Port Authentication (802.1X) Commands

The 802.1X Port Authentication commands are:
• dot1x authentication (Configuration)
• dot1x authentication (Interface)
• dot1x auth-fail-vlan
• dot1x auth-server
• dot1x guest-vlan
• dot1x max-eap-req
• dot1x port-control
• dot1x quiet-period
• dot1x reauthentication
• dot1x reauth-max
• dot1x server-timeout
• dot1x supplicant-timeout
• dot1x tx-period
• show dot1x interface

956 | Security
 An authentication server must authenticate a client connected to an 802.1X switch port. Until the
authentication, only EAPOL (Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN) traffic is allowed through
the port to which a client is connected. Once authentication is successful, normal traffic passes through
the port.

FTOS supports RADIUS and Active Directory environments using 802.1X Port Authentication.

Important Points to Remember

FTOS limits network access for certain users by using VLAN assignments. 802.1X with VLAN
assignment has these characteristics when configured on the switch and the RADIUS server.
• 802.1X is supported on C-Series, E-Series, and S-Series.
• 802.1X is not supported on the LAG or the channel members of a LAG.
• If no VLAN is supplied by the RADIUS server or if 802.1X authorization is disabled, the port is
configured in its access VLAN after successful authentication.
• If 802.1X authorization is enabled but the VLAN information from the RADIUS server is not
valid, the port returns to the unauthorized state and remains in the configured access VLAN. This
prevents ports from appearing unexpectedly in an inappropriate VLAN due to a configuration
error. Configuration errors create an entry in Syslog.
• If 802.1X authorization is enabled and all information from the RADIUS server is valid, the port is
placed in the specified VLAN after authentication.
• If port security is enabled on an 802.1X port with VLAN assignment, the port is placed in the
RADIUS server assigned VLAN.
• If 802.1X is disabled on the port, it is returned to the configured access VLAN.
• When the port is in the force authorized, force unauthorized, or shutdown state, it is placed in the
configured access VLAN.
• If an 802.1X port is authenticated and put in the RADIUS server assigned VLAN, any change to
the port access VLAN configuration will not take effect.
• The 802.1X with VLAN assignment feature is not supported on trunk ports, dynamic ports, or
with dynamic-access port assignment through a VLAN membership.

dot1x authentication (Configuration)

ces Enable dot1x globally; dot1x must be enabled both globally and at the interface level.

Syntax dot1x authentication

To disable dot1x on an globally, use the no dot1x authentication command.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Related
dot1x authentication (Interface) Enable dot1x on an interface
Commands

Security | 957
 dot1x authentication (Interface)
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Enable dot1x on an interface; dot1x must be enabled both globally and at the interface level.

Syntax dot1x authentication

To disable dot1x on an interface, use the no dot1x authentication command.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Related
dot1x authentication (Configuration) Enable dot1x globally
Commands

dot1x auth-fail-vlan
ces Configure a authentication failure VLAN for users and devices that fail 802.1X authentication.

Syntax dot1x auth-fail-vlan vlan-id [max-attempts number]

To delete the authentication failure VLAN, use the no dot1x auth-fail-vlan vlan-id [max-attempts
number] command.

Parameters
vlan-id Enter the VLAN Identifier.
Range: 1 to 4094
max-attempts number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword max-attempts followed number of
attempts desired before authentication fails.
Range: 1 to 5
Default: 3

Defaults 3 attempts

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-if-interface-slot/port)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series, E-Series and S-Series

Usage If the host responds to 802.1X with an incorrect login/password, the login fails. The switch will
Information attempt to authenticate again until the maximum attempts configured is reached. If the authentication
fails after all allowed attempts, the interface is moved to the authentication failed VLAN.

Once the authentication VLAN is assigned, the port-state must be toggled to restart authentication.
Authentication will occur at the next re-authentication interval (dot1x reauthentication).

Related
dot1x port-control Enable port-control on an interface
Commands

958 | Security
 dot1x guest-vlan Configure a guest VLAN for non-dot1x devices
show dot1x interface Display the 802.1X information on an interface

dot1x auth-server
ces Configure the authentication server to RADIUS.

Syntax dot1x auth-server radius

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

dot1x guest-vlan
ces Configure a guest VLAN for limited access users or for devices that are not 802.1X capable.

Syntax dot1x guest-vlan vlan-id

To disable the guest VLAN, use the no dot1x guest-vlan vlan-id command.

Parameters
vlan-id Enter the VLAN Identifier.
Range: 1 to 4094

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-if-interface-slot/port)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series, E-Series, and S-Series

Usage 802.1X authentication is enabled when an interface is connected to the switch. If the host fails to
Information respond within a designated amount of time, the authenticator places the port in the guest VLAN.

If a device does not respond within 30 seconds, it is assumed that the device is not 802.1X capable.
Therefore, a guest VLAN is allocated to the interface and authentication, for the device, will occur at
the next re-authentication interval (dot1x reauthentication).

If the host fails authentication for the designated amount of times, the authenticator places the port in
authentication failed VLAN (dot1x auth-fail-vlan).

Note: Layer 3 portion of guest VLAN and authentication fail VLANs can be created
regardless if the VLAN is assigned to an interface or not. Once an interface is assigned a guest
VLAN (which has an IP address), then routing through the guest VLAN is the same as any
other traffic. However, interface may join/leave a VLAN dynamically.

Security | 959
 Related
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Commands dot1x auth-fail-vlan Configure a VLAN for authentication failures

dot1x reauthentication Enable periodic re-authentication
show dot1x interface Display the 802.1X information on an interface

dot1x max-eap-req
ces Configure the maximum number of times an EAP (Extensive Authentication Protocol) request is
transmitted before the session times out.

Syntax dot1x max-eap-req number

To return to the default, use the no dot1x max-eap-req command.

Parameters
number Enter the number of times an EAP request is transmitted before a session time-out.
Range: 1 to 10
Default: 2

Defaults 2

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Related
interface range Configure a range of interfaces
Commands

dot1x port-control
ces Enable port control on an interface.

Syntax dot1x port-control {force-authorized | auto | force-unauthorized}

Parameters
force-authorized Enter the keyword force-authorized to forcibly authorize a port.
auto Enter the keyword auto to authorize a port based on the 802.1X operation
result.
force-unauthorized Enter the keyword force-unauthorized to forcibly de-authorize a port.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

960 | Security
 Usage The authenticator performs authentication only when port-control is set to auto.
Information

dot1x quiet-period
ces Set the number of seconds that the authenticator remains quiet after a failed authentication with a
client.

Syntax dot1x quiet-period seconds

To disable quiet time, use the no dot1x quiet-time command.

Parameters
seconds Enter the number of seconds.
Range: 1 to 65535
Default: 30

Defaults 30 seconds

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

dot1x reauthentication
ces Enable periodic re-authentication of the client.

Syntax dot1x reauthentication [interval seconds]

To disable periodic re-authentication, use the no dot1x reauthentication command.

Parameters
interval seconds (Optional) Enter the keyword interval followed by the interval time, in seconds,
after which re-authentication will be initiated.
Range: 1 to 31536000 (1 year)
Default: 3600 (1 hour)

Defaults 3600 seconds (1 hour)

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Related
interface range Configure a range of interfaces
Commands

Security | 961
 dot1x reauth-max
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Configure the maximum number of times a port can re-authenticate before the port becomes
unauthorized.

Syntax dot1x reauth-max number

To return to the default, use the no dot1x reauth-max command.

Parameters
number Enter the permitted number of re-authentications.
Range: 1 - 10
Default: 2

Defaults 2

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
History
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

dot1x server-timeout
ces Configure the amount of time after which exchanges with the server time out.

Syntax dot1x server-timeout seconds

To return to the default, use the no dot1x server-timeout command.

Parameters
seconds Enter a time-out value in seconds.
Range: 1 to 300, where 300 is implementation dependant.
Default: 30

Defaults 30 seconds

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

dot1x supplicant-timeout
ces Configure the amount of time after which exchanges with the supplicant time out.

Syntax dot1x supplicant-timeout seconds

To return to the default, use the no dot1x supplicant-timeout command.

962 | Security
 Parameters
seconds Enter a time-out value in seconds.
Range: 1 to 300, where 300 is implementation dependant.
Default: 30

Defaults 30 seconds

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

dot1x tx-period
ces Configure the intervals at which EAPOL PDUs are transmitted by the Authenticator PAE.

Syntax dot1x tx-period seconds

To return to the default, use the no dot1x tx-period command.

Parameters
seconds Enter the interval time, in seconds, that EAPOL PDUs are transmitted.
Range: 1 to 31536000 (1 year)
Default: 30

Defaults 30 seconds

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

show dot1x interface

ces Display the 802.1X information on an interface.

Syntax show dot1x interface interface

Parameters
interface Enter one of the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword FastEthernet followed by the slot/
port information.
• For a Ten Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Security | 963
 Command Modes EXEC
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series, E-Series, and S-Series

Example Figure 38-5. show dot1x interface command Example

FTOS#show dot1x int Gi 2/32

802.1x information on Gi 2/32:

-----------------------------
Dot1x Status: Enable
Port Control: AUTO
Port Auth Status: UNAUTHORIZED
Re-Authentication: Disable
Untagged VLAN id: None
Guest VLAN: Enable
Guest VLAN id: 10
Auth-Fail VLAN: Enable
Auth-Fail VLAN id: 11
Auth-Fail Max-Attempts: 3
Tx Period: 30 seconds
Quiet Period: 60 seconds
ReAuth Max: 2
Supplicant Timeout: 30 seconds
Server Timeout: 30 seconds
Re-Auth Interval: 3600 seconds
Max-EAP-Req: 2
Auth Type: SINGLE_HOST

Auth PAE State: Initialize

Backend State: Initialize

FTOS#

SSH Server and SCP Commands

FTOS supports SSH Protocol versions 1.5 and 2.0. Secure Shell (SSH) is a protocol for secure remote
login over an insecure network. SSH sessions are encrypted and use authentication.

• crypto key generate

• debug ip ssh
• ip scp topdir
• ip ssh authentication-retries
• ip ssh connection-rate-limit
• ip ssh hostbased-authentication
• ip ssh key-size
• ip ssh password-authentication
• ip ssh pub-key-file
• ip ssh rhostsfile
• ip ssh rsa-authentication (Config)
• ip ssh rsa-authentication (EXEC)
• ip ssh server
• show crypto
• show ip ssh

964 | Security
 • show ip ssh client-pub-keys
• show ip ssh rsa-authentication
• ssh

crypto key generate

ces Generate keys for the SSH server.

Syntax crypto key generate {rsa | rsa1}

Parameters
rsa Enter the keyword rsa followed by the key size to generate a SSHv2 RSA
host keys.
Range: 1024 to 2048
Default: 1024
rsa1 Enter the keyword rsa1 followed by the key size to generate a SSHv1 RSA
host keys.
Range: 1024 to 2048
Default: 1024

Defaults Key size 1024

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 38-6. crypto key generate rsa1 command example

FTOS#conf
FTOS(conf)#crypto key generate rsa1
Enter key size <1024-2048>. Default<1024>: 1024

Host key already exists. Do you want to replace. [y/n] :y

FTOS(conf)#

Usage The host keys are required for key-exchange by the SSH server. If the keys are not found when the
Information server is enabled (ip ssh server enable), the keys are automatically generated.

This command requires user interaction and will generate a prompt prior to overwriting any existing
host keys.

Note: Only a user with superuser permissions should generate host-keys.

Related
ip ssh server Enable the SSH server.
Commands
show crypto Display SSH host public keys

Security | 965
 debug ip ssh
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Enables collecting SSH debug information.

Syntax debug ip ssh {client | server}

To disable debugging, use the no debug ip ssh {client | server} command.

Parameters
client Enter the keyword client to enable collecting debug information on the
client.
server Enter the keyword server to enable collecting debug information on the
server.

Defaults Disabled on both client and server

Command Modes EXEC

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage Debug information includes details for key-exchange, authentication, and established session for each
Information connection.

ip scp topdir
ces Identify a location for files used in secure copy transfer.

Syntax ip scp topdir directory

To return to the default setting, enter no ip scp topdir command.

Parameters
directory Enter a directory name.

Defaults The internal flash (flash:) is the default directory.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage To configure the switch as a SCP server, use the ip ssh server command.
Information

Related
ip ssh server Enable SSH and SCP server on the switch.
Commands

966 | Security
ip ssh authentication-retries
ces Configure the maximum number of attempts that should be used to authenticate a user.

Syntax ip ssh authentication-retries 1-10

Parameters
1-10 Enter the number of maximum retries to authenticate a user.
Range: 1 to 10
Default: 3

Defaults 3

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage This command specifies the maximum number of attempts to authenticate a user on a SSH connection
Information with the remote host for password authentication. SSH will disconnect when the number of password
failures exceeds authentication-retries.

ip ssh connection-rate-limit
ces Configure the maximum number of incoming SSH connections per minute.

Syntax ip ssh connection-rate-limit 1-10

Parameters
1-10 Enter the number of maximum number of incoming SSH connections allowed per
minute.
Range: 1 to 10 per minute
Default: 10 per minute

Defaults 10 per minute

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Security | 967
 ip ssh hostbased-authentication
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Enable hostbased-authentication for the SSHv2 server.

Syntax ip ssh hostbased-authentication enable

To disable hostbased-authentication for SSHv2 server, use the no ip ssh hostbased-authentication
enable command.

Parameters
enable Enter the keyword enable to enable hostbased-authentication for SSHv2 server.

Defaults Disable by default

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage If this command is enabled, clients can login without a password prompt. This provides two levels of
Information authentication:
• rhost-authentication is done with the file specified in the ip ssh rhostfile command
• checking client host-keys is done with the file specified in the ip ssh pub-key-file command
If no ip ssh rsa-authentication enable is executed, host-based authentication is disabled.

Note: Administrators must specify the two files (rhosts and pub-key-file) to configure
host-based authentication.

Related
ip ssh pub-key-file Public keys of trusted hosts from a file.
Commands
ip ssh rhostsfile Trusted hosts and users for rhost authentication.

ip ssh key-size
ces Configure the size of the server-generated RSA SSHv1 key.

Syntax ip ssh key-size 512-869

Parameters
512-869 Enter the key-size number for the server-generated RSA SSHv1 key.
Range: 512 to 869
Default: 768

Defaults Key size 768

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series

968 | Security
 Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage The server-generated key is used for SSHv1 key-exchange.

Information

ip ssh password-authentication
ces Enable password authentication for the SSH server.

Syntax ip ssh password-authentication enable

To disable password-authentication, use the no ip ssh password-authentication enable.

Parameters
enable Enter the keyword enable to enable password-authentication for the SSH server.

Defaults enabled

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage With password authentication enabled, users can authenticate using local, RADIUS, or TACACS+
Information password fallback order as configured.

ip ssh pub-key-file
ces Specify the file to be used for host-based authentication.

Syntax ip ssh pub-key-file {WORD}

Parameters
WORD Enter the file name for the host-based authentication.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Security | 969
 Example Figure 38-7. ip ssh pub-key-file Command Example
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#conf
FTOS(conf)# ip ssh pub-key-file flash://knownhosts
FTOS(conf)#

Usage This command specifies the file to be used for the host-based authentication. The file creates/
Information overwrites the file flash://ADMIN_DIR/ssh/knownhosts and deletes the user specified file. Even
though this is a global configuration command, it will not appear in the running configuration since
this command needs to be run just once.

The file contains the OpenSSH compatible public keys of the host for which host-based authentication
is allowed. An example known host file format:

poclab4,123.12.1.123 ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAIEAox/

QQp8xYhzOxn07yh4VGPAoUfgKoieTHO9G4sNV+ui+DWEc3cgYAcU5Lai1MU2ODrzhCwyDNp05tKBU3t
ReG1o8AxLi6+S4hyEMqHzkzBFNVqHzpQc+Rs4p2urzV0F4pRKnaXdHf3Lk4D460HZRhhVrxqeNxPDpEn
WIMPJi0ds= ashwani@poclab4

Note: For rhostfile and pub-key-file, the administrator must FTP the file to the chassis.

Related
show ip ssh client-pub-keys Display the client-public keys used for the host-based authentication.
Commands

ip ssh rhostsfile
ces Specify the rhost file to be used for host-based authorization.

Syntax ip ssh rhostsfile {WORD}

Parameters
WORD Enter the rhost file name for the host-based authentication.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 38-8. ip ssh rhostsfile Command Example

FTOS#conf
FTOS(conf)# ip ssh rhostsfile flash://shosts
FTOS(conf)#

Usage This command specifies the rhost file to be used for host-based authentication. This file creates/
Information overwrites the file flash:/ADMIN_DIR/ssh/shosts and deletes the user specified file. Even though this
is a global configuration command, it will not appear in the running configuration since this command
needs to be run just once.

970 | Security
 This file contains hostnames and usernames, for which hosts and users, rhost-authentication can be
allowed.

Note: For rhostfile and pub-key-file, the administrator must FTP the file to the switch.

ip ssh rsa-authentication (Config)

ces Enable RSA authentication for the SSHv2 server.

Syntax ip ssh rsa-authentication enable

To disable RSA authentication, use the no ip ssh rsa-authentication enable command.

Parameters
enable Enter the keyword enable to enable RSA authentication for the SSHv2 server.

Defaults RSA authentication is disabled by default

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage Enabling RSA authentication allows the user to login without being prompted for a password. In
Information addition, the OpenSSH compatible SSHv2 RSA public key must be added to the list of authorized keys
(ip ssh rsa-authentication my-authorized-keys device://filename command).

Related
ip ssh rsa-authentication (EXEC) Add keys for RSA authentication.
Commands

ip ssh rsa-authentication (EXEC)

ces Add keys for the RSA authentication.

Syntax ip ssh rsa-authentication {my-authorized-keys WORD}

To delete the authorized keys, use the no ip ssh rsa-authentication {my-authorized-keys}

command.

Parameters
my-authorized-keys WORD Enter the keyword my-authorized-keys followed by the file
name of the RSA authorized-keys.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes EXEC

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series

Security | 971
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series

pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage If you want to log in without being prompted for a password, log in through RSA authentication. To do
Information that, you must first add the SSHv2 RSA public keys to the list of authorized keys. This command adds
the specified RSA keys to the following file:
flash://ADMIN_DIR/ssh/authorized-keys-username (where username is the user associated with
this terminal).

Note: The no form of this command deletes the file flash://ADMIN_DIR/ssh/

authorized-keys-username

Related
show ip ssh rsa-authentication Display RSA authorized keys.
Commands
ip ssh rsa-authentication (Config) Enable RSA authentication.

ip ssh server
ces Configure an SSH server.

Syntax ip ssh server {enable | port port-number} [version {1 | 2}]

To disable SSH server functions, enter no ip ssh server enable command.

Parameters
enable Enter the key word enable to start the SSH server.
port port-number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword port followed by the port number of the
listening port of the SSH server.
Range: 1 to 65535
Default: 22
[version {1 | 2}] (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword version followed by the SSH version 1
or 2 to specify only SSHv1 or SSHv2.

Defaults Default listening port is 22

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Expanded to include specifying SSHv1 or SSHv2; Introduced for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage This command enables the SSH server and begins listening on a port. If a port is not specified, listening
Information is on SSH default port 22.

Example Figure 38-9. ip ssh server port Command Example

FTOS# conf
FTOS(conf)# ip ssh server port 45
FTOS(conf)# ip ssh server enable
FTOS#

972 | Security
 Related
show ip ssh Display the ssh information
Commands

show crypto
ces Display the public part of the SSH host-keys.

Syntax show crypto key mypubkey {rsa | rsa1}

Parameters
Key Enter the keyword key to display the host public key.
mypubkey Enter the keyword mypubkey to display the host public key.
rsa Enter the keyword rsa to display the host SSHv2 RSA public key.
rsa1 Enter the keyword rsa1 to display the host SSHv1 RSA public key.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes EXEC

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 38-10. show crypto Command Examples

FTOS#show crypto key mypubkey rsa
ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAIEAtzkZME/
e8V8smnXR22EJGQhCMkEOkuisa+OILVoMYU1ZKGfj0W5BPCSvF/
x5ifqYFFwUzJNOcsJK7vjSsnmMhChF2YSvXlvTJ6h971FJAQlOsgd0ycpocsF+DNLKfJnx7SAjhakFQMwG
g/g78ZkDT3Ydr8KKjfSI4Bg/WS8B740=

FTOS#show crypto key mypubkey rsa1

1024 35
1310600154808733989532575153972496578500722064442949636740809356830889610203172266
7988956754966765265006379622189779927609278523638839223055081819166009928132616408
6643457746022192295189039929663345791173742247431553750501676929660273790601494434
050000015179864425629613385774919236081771341059533760063913083
FTOS#

Usage This command is useful if the remote SSH client implements Strict Host Key Checking. You can copy
Information the host key to your list of known hosts.

Related
crypto key generate Generate SSH keys.
Commands

show ip ssh
ces Display information about established SSH sessions.

Syntax show ip ssh

Security | 973
 Command Modes EXEC
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

EXEC Privilege

Example Figure 38-11. show ip ssh Command Example

FTOS#show ip ssh
SSH server : enabled.
SSH server version : v1 and v2.
Password Authentication : enabled.
Hostbased Authentication : disabled.
RSA Authentication : disabled.
Vty Encryption Remote IP
0 3DES 172.16.1.162
1 3DES 172.16.1.162
2 3DES 172.16.1.162
FTOS

Related
ip ssh server Configure an SSH server.
Commands
show ip ssh client-pub-keys Display the client-public keys.

show ip ssh client-pub-keys

ces Display the client public keys used in host-based authentication.

Syntax show ip ssh client-pub-keys

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes EXEC

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 38-12. show ip ssh client-pub-keys Command Example

FTOS#show ip ssh client-pub-keys

poclab4,123.12.1.123 ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAIEAox/

QQp8xYhzOxn07yh4VGPAoUfgKoieTHO9G4sNV+ui+DWEc3cgYAcU5Lai1MU2ODrzhCwyDNp05tKBU3tReG1
o8AxLi6+S4hyEMqHzkzBFNVqHzpQc+Rs4p2urzV0F4pRKnaXdHf3Lk4D460HZRhhVrxqeNxPDpEnWIMPJi0
ds= ashwani@poclab4

FTOS#

Usage This command displays the contents of the file flash://ADMIN_DIRssh/knownhosts

Information

Related
ip ssh pub-key-file Configure the file name for the host-based authentication
Commands

974 | Security
show ip ssh rsa-authentication
ces Display the authorized-keys for the RSA authentication.

Syntax show ip ssh rsa-authentication {my-authorized-keys}

Parameters
my-authorized-keys Display the RSA authorized keys.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes EXEC

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 38-13. show ip ssh rsa-authentication Command Example

FTOS#show ip ssh rsa-authentication my-authorized-keys
ssh-rsa
AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAIEAyB17l4gFp4r2DRHIvMc1VZd0Sg5GQxRV1y1X1JOMeO6Nd0WuYyzrQMM
4qJAoBwtneOXfLBcHF3V2hcMIqaZN+CRCnw/
zCMlnCf0+qVTd1oofsea5r09kS0xTp0CNfHXZ3NuGCq9Ov33m9+U9tMwhS8vy8AVxdH4x4km3c3t5Jvc=
freedom@poclab4

FTOS#

Usage This command displays the contents of the file flash:/ADMIN_DIR/ssh/authorized-keys.username.

Information

Related
ip ssh rsa-authentication (Config) Configure the RSA authorized keys.
Commands

ssh
ces Open an SSH connection specifying the hostname, username, port number and version of the SSH
client.

Syntax ssh {hostname | ipv4 address | ipv6 address} [-l username | -p port-number | -v {1 | 2}]

Parameters
hostname (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address or the hostname of the remote device.
vrf instance (OPTIONAL) E-Series Only: Enter the keyword vrf following by the VRF
Instance name to open a SSH connection to that instance.
ipv4 address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format A.B.C.D.
ipv6-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the
prefix-length prefix length in the /x format.
Range: /0 to /128
Note: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros
-l username (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword -l followed by the user name used in this SSH
session.
Default: The user name of the user associated with the terminal.

Security | 975
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

-p port-number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword -p followed by the port number.

Range: 1 to 65536
Default: 22
-v {1 | 2} (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword -v followed by the SSH version 1 or 2.
Default: The version from the protocol negotiation

Defaults As above.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.9.1.0 Introduced VRF
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Added IPv6 support; Introduced for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 38-14. ssh Command Example

FTOS#ssh 123.12.1.123 -l ashwani -p 5005 -v 2

Secure DHCP Commands

DHCP as defined by RFC 2131 provides no authentication or security mechanisms. Secure DHCP is a
suite of features that protects networks that use dynamic address allocation from spoofing and attacks.

• clear ip dhcp snooping

• ip dhcp relay
• ip dhcp snooping
• ip dhcp snooping database
• ip dhcp snooping binding
• ip dhcp snooping database renew
• ip dhcp snooping trust
• ip dhcp source-address-validation
• ip dhcp snooping vlan
• show ip dhcp snooping

clear ip dhcp snooping

cs Clear the DHCP binding table.

Syntax clear ip dhcp snooping binding

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Default None

976 | Security
 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series

Related
show ip dhcp snooping Display the contents of the DHCP binding table.
Commands

ip dhcp relay
cs Enable Option 82.

Syntax ip dhcp relay information-option [trust-downstream]

Parameters
trust-downstream Configure the system to trust Option 82 when it is received from the
previous-hop router.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Default Disabled

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series

ip dhcp snooping
cs Enable DHCP Snooping globally.

Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Default Disabled

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series

Usage When enabled, no learning takes place until snooping is enabled on a VLAN. Upon disabling DHCP
Information Snooping the binding table is deleted, and Option 82, IP Source Guard, and Dynamic ARP Inspection
are disabled.

Related
ip dhcp snooping vlan Enable DHCP Snooping on one or more VLANs.
Commands

ip dhcp snooping database

cs Delay writing the binding table for a specified time.

Syntax ip dhcp snooping database write-delay minutes

Security | 977
 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

minutes Range: 5-21600

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Default None

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series

ip dhcp snooping binding

cs Create a static entry in the DHCP binding table.

Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping binding mac address vlan-id vlan-id ip ip-address interface type slot/
port lease number

Parameters
mac address Enter the keyword mac followed by the MAC address of the host to which the
server is leasing the IP address.
vlan-id vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan-id followed by the VLAN to which the host belongs.
Range: 2-4094
ip ip-address Enter the keyword ip followed by the IP address that the server is leasing.
interface type Enter the keyword interface followed by the type of interface to which the host is
connected.
• For an 10/100 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fastethernet.
• For a Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword gigabitethernet.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet.
• For a Ten Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
tengigabitethernet.
slot/port Enter the slot and port number of the interface.
lease time Enter the keyword lease followed by the amount of time the IP address will be
leased.
Range: 1-4294967295

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Default None

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series

Related
show ip dhcp snooping Display the contents of the DHCP binding table.
Commands

978 | Security
ip dhcp snooping database renew
cs Renew the binding table.

Syntax ip dhcp snooping database renew

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Default None

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series

ip dhcp snooping trust

cs Configure an interface as trusted.

Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping trust

Command Modes INTERFACE

Default Untrusted

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series

ip dhcp source-address-validation
cs Enable IP Source Guard.

Syntax [no] ip dhcp source-address-validation

Command Modes INTERFACE

Default Disabled

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series

ip dhcp snooping vlan

cs Enable DHCP Snooping on one or more VLANs.

Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping vlan name

Security | 979
 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

name Enter the name of a VLAN on which to enable DHCP Snooping.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Default Disabled

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series

Usage When enabled the system begins creating entries in the binding table for the specified VLAN(s). Note
Information that learning only happens if there is a trusted port in the VLAN.

Related
Commands
ip dhcp snooping trust Configure an interface as trusted.

show ip dhcp snooping

cs Display the contents of the DHCP binding table.

Syntax show ip dhcp snooping binding

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Default None

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series

Related
clear ip dhcp snooping Clear the contents of the DHCP binding table.
Commands

980 | Security
 39
Service Provider Bridging

Overview
Service Provider Bridging is composed of VLAN Stacking, Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling, and Provider
Backbone Bridging as described in the FTOS Configuration Guide Service Provider Bridging chapter.

This chapter includes CLI information for FTOS Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling (L2PT). L2PT enables
protocols to tunnel through an 802.1q tunnel. L2PT is available in FTOS for the C-Series c, E-Series
e, and S-Series s.

L2PT is supported on E-Series ExaScale ex with FTOS 8.2.1.0. and later.

Refer to Chapter 48, VLAN Stacking or Chapter 44, Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) and Chapter 15,
GARP VLAN Registration (GVRP) for further information related to those features.

Commands
The L2PT commands are:
• debug protocol-tunnel
• protocol-tunnel
• protocol-tunnel destination-mac
• protocol-tunnel enable
• protocol-tunnel rate-limit
• show protocol-tunnel

Important Points to Remember

• L2PT is enabled at the interface VLAN-Stack VLAN level. For details on Stackable VLAN
(VLAN-Stacking) commands, see Chapter 48, VLAN Stacking.
• The default behavior is to disable protocol packet tunneling through the 802.1q tunnel.
• Rate-limiting is required to protect against BPDU attacks.
• A port channel (including through LACP) can be configured as a VLAN-Stack access or trunk
port.
• ARP packets work as expected across the tunnel.
• FEFD works the same as with Layer 2 links.
• Protocols that use Multicast MAC addresses (OSPF for example) work as expected and carry over
to the other end of the VLAN-Stack VLAN.

Service Provider Bridging | 981

 debug protocol-tunnel
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Enable debugging to ensure incoming packets are received and rewritten to a new MAC address.

Syntax debug protocol-tunnel interface {in | out | both} [vlan vlan-id] [count value]
To disable debugging, use the no debug protocol-tunnel interface {in | out | both} [vlan vlan-id]
[count value] command.

Parameters
interface Enter one of the following interfaces and slot/port information:
• For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword FastEthernet followed by the
slot/port information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For Port Channel interface types, enter the keyword port-channel followed by
a number from 1 to 255 for TeraScale and ExaScale.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
in | out | both Enter the keyword in, out, or both to debug incoming interfaces, outgoing
interfaces, or both incoming and outgoing interfaces.
vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID.
Range: 1 to 4094
count value Enter the keyword count followed by the number of debug outputs.
Range: 1 to 100

Defaults Debug Disabled

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series, E-Series and E-Series ExaScale.
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced

protocol-tunnel
ces Enable protocol tunneling per VLAN-Stack VLAN.

Syntax protocol-tunnel stp

To disable protocol tunneling, use the no protocol-tunnel stp command.

Parameters
stp Enter the keyword stp to enable protocol tunneling on a spanning tree, including STP, MSTP, RSTP,
and PVST.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes CONF-IF-VLAN

982 | Service Provider Bridging

 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series, E-Series and E-Series ExaScale.
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced

Example Figure 39-1. Protocol-tunneling Command Example

FTOS#conf
FTOS(conf)#interface vlan 2
FTOS(conf-if-vl-2)#vlan-stack compatible
FTOS(conf-if-vl-2)#member Gi1/2-3
FTOS(conf-if-vl-2)#protocol-tunnel stp
FTOS(conf-if-vl-2)#

Usage
Information Note: When VLAN-Stacking is enabled, no protocol packets are tunneled.

Related
show protocol-tunnel Display tunneling information for all VLANs
Commands

protocol-tunnel destination-mac
ces Overwrite the BPDU destination MAC address with a specific value.

Syntax protocol-tunnel destination-mac xstp address

Parameters
stp Change the default destination MAC address used for L2PT to another value.

Defaults The default destination MAC is 01:01:e8:00:00:00.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series.
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced

Usage When VLAN-Stacking is enabled, no protocol packets are tunneled.

Information

Related
show protocol-tunnel Display tunneling information for all VLANs
Commands

protocol-tunnel enable
ces Enable protocol tunneling globally on the system.

Syntax protocol-tunnel enable

To disable protocol tunneling, use the no protocol-tunnel enable command.

Defaults Disabled

Service Provider Bridging | 983

 Command Modes CONFIGURATION
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced

Usage FTOS must have the default CAM profile with the default microcode before you enable L2PT.
Information

protocol-tunnel rate-limit
ces Enable traffic rate limiting per box.

Syntax protocol-tunnel rate-limit rate

To reset the rate limit to the default, use the no protocol-tunnel rate-limit rate command.

Parameters
rate Enter the rate in frames per second.
Range: 75 to 3000
Default: 75

Defaults 75 Frames per second

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series, E-Series Terascale, and E-Series ExaScale. Maximum rate
limit on E-Series reduced from 4000 to 3000.
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced

Example Figure 39-2. protocol-tunnel rate-limit Command Example

FTOS#
FTOS#conf
FTOS(conf)#protocol-tunnel rate-limit 1000
FTOS(conf)#

Related
show protocol-tunnel Display tunneling information for all VLANs
Commands
show running-config Display the current configuration.

show protocol-tunnel
ces Display protocol tunnel information for all or a specified VLAN-Stack VLAN.

Syntax show protocol-tunnel [vlan vlan-id]

Parameters
vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID to display information
for the one VLAN.
Range: 1 to 4094

984 | Service Provider Bridging

 Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series, E-Series and E-Series ExaScale.
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced

Example Figure 39-3. show protocol-tunnel Command Example

FTOS#show protocol-tunnel
System Rate-Limit: 1000 Frames/second
Interface Vlan Protocol(s)
Gi1/2 2 STP, PVST
Gi1/3 3 STP, PVST
Po35 4 STP, PVST
FTOS#

Example Figure 39-4. show protocol-tunnel command example for a specific VLAN
FTOS#show protocol-tunnel vlan 2
System Rate-Limit: 1000 Frames/second
Interface Vlan Protocol(s)
Gi1/2 2 STP, PVST
FTOS#

Related
show running-config Display the current configuration.
Commands

Service Provider Bridging | 985

 www.dell.com | dell.com/support

986
|
Service Provider Bridging
 40
sFlow

Overview
sFlow commands are supported on these platforms: c e s.

FTOS sFlow monitoring system includes an sFlow Agent and an sFlow Collector. The sFlow Agent
combines the flow samples and interface counters into sFlow datagrams and forwards them to the
sFlow Collector. The sFlow Collector analyses the sFlow Datagrams received from the different
devices and produces a network-wide view of traffic flows.

Important Points to Remember

• Dell Networking recommends that the sFlow Collector be connected to the Dell Networking
chassis through a line card port rather than the RPM Management Ethernet port.
• FTOS exports all sFlow packets to the sFlow Collector. A small sampling rate can equate to a large
number of exported packets. A backoff mechanism will automatically be applied to reduce this
amount. Some sampled packets may be dropped when the exported packet rate is high and the
backoff mechanism is about to or is starting to take effect. The dropEvent counter, in the sFlow
packet, will always be zero.
• sFlow sampling is done on a per-port basis.
• Community list and local preference fields are not filled up in the extended gateway element in the
sFlow datagram.
• The 802.1P source priority field is not filled up in the extended switch element in the sFlow
datagram.
• Only Destination and Destination Peer AS numbers are packed in the dst-as-path field in the
extended gateway element.
• If the packet being sampled is redirected using PBR (Policy-Based Routing), the sFlow datagram
may contain incorrect extended gateway/router information.
• sFlow does not support packing extended information for IPv6 packets. Only the first 128 bytes of
the IPv6 packet is shipped in the datagram.
• The source VLAN field in the extended switch element will not be packed in case of a routed
packet.
• The destination VLAN field in the extended switch element will not be packed in case of a
multicast packet.
• The maximum number of packets that can be sampled and processed per second is:
— 7500 packets when no extended information packing is enabled
— 7500 packets when only extended-switch information packing is enabled (see sflow
extended-switch enable)
— 1600 packets when extended-router and/or extended-gateway information packing is enabled
(see Figure and sflow extended-gateway enable)
• There is no limit on the number of interfaces where sFlow can be enabled.

sFlow | 987
 Commands
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

The sFlow commands are:

• sflow collector
• sflow enable (Global)
• sflow enable (Interface)
• sflow extended-gateway enable
• sflow extended-router enable
• sflow extended-switch enable
• sflow polling-interval (Global)
• sflow polling-interval (Interface)
• sflow sample-rate (Global)
• sflow sample-rate (Interface)
• show sflow
• show sflow linecard

sflow collector
ces Specify a collector(s) to which sFlow datagrams are forwarded.

Syntax sflow collector ip-address agent-addr ip-address [number [max-datagram-size number]] |

[max-datagram-size number]
To delete the specified collector(s), use the no sflow collector ip-address agent-addr ip-address
[number [max-datagram-size number]] | [max-datagram-size number] command

Parameters
ip-address Enter the ip address of the collector in dotted decimal format.
agent-addr ip-address Enter the keyword agent-addr followed by the sFlow agent IP
address in dotted decimal format.
number (OPTIONAL) Enter the udp port number (User Datagram
Protocol).
Range: 0 to 65535
Default: 6343
max-datagram-size number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword max-datagram-size
followed by the size number in bytes.
Range: 400 to 1500
Default: 1400

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduces on S-Series Stacking
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series

988 | sFlow
 Version 6.5.1.0 Expanded the no form of the command to mirror the syntax used to configure
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage You can specify up to 2 sFlow collectors. If 2 collectors are specified, the samples are sent to both.
Information
As part of the sFlow-MIB, if the SNMP request originates from a configured collector, FTOS will
return the corresponding configured agent IP in MIB requests. FTOS checks to ensure that two entries
are not configured for the same collector IP with a different agent IP. Should that happen, FTOS
generates the following error:

%Error: Different agent-addr attempted for an existing collector

sflow enable (Global)

ces Enable sFlow globally.

Syntax sflow enable

To disable sFlow, use the no sflow enable command.

Defaults sFlow is disabled by default

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduces on S-Series Stacking
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage sFlow is disabled by default. In addition to this command, sFlow needs to be enable on individual
Information interfaces where sFlow sampling is desired.

Related
sflow enable (Interface) Enable sFlow on Interfaces.
Commands

sflow enable (Interface)

ces Enable sFlow on Interfaces.

Syntax sflow enable

To disable sFlow, use the no sflow enable command.

Defaults sFlow is disabled by default on all interfaces

Command Modes INTERFACE

sFlow | 989
 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60

History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduces on S-Series Stacking
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage When sFlow is enable on an interface, flow sampling is done on any traffic going out of the interface.
Information

Note: Once a physical port is a member of a LAG, it will inherit the sFlow configuration
from the LAG port.

Related
sflow enable (Global) Turn sFlow on globally
Commands

sflow extended-gateway enable

e Enable packing information on an extended gateway.

Syntax sflow extended-gateway [extended-router] [extended-switch] enable

To disable packing information, use the no sflow extended-gateway [extended-router]
[extended-switch] enable command.

Parameters
extended-router Enter the keyword extended-router to collect extended router
information.
extended-switch Enter the keyword extended-switch to collect extended switch
information.
enable Enter the keyword enable to enable global extended information.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Usage The show sflow command displays the configured global extended information.
Information
FTOS 7.8.1.0 and later enhances the sFlow implementation for real time traffic analysis on the
E-Series to provide extended gateway information in cases where the destination IP addresses are
learned by different routing protocols, and for cases where the destination is reachable over ECMP.

990 | sFlow
 Example Figure 40-1. show sflow Command Output
FTOS#show sflow
sFlow services are enabled
Global default sampling rate: 64
Global default counter polling interval: 1000
Global extended information enabled: gateway, router, switch
1 collectors configured
Collector IP addr: 20.20.20.2, Agent IP addr: 10.11.201.7, UDP port: 6343
1732336 UDP packets exported
0 UDP packets dropped
12510225 sFlow samples collected
0 sFlow samples dropped due to sub-sampling
FTOS#

Related
show sflow Display the sFlow configuration
Commands

sflow extended-router enable

e Enable packing information on a router and switch.

Syntax sflow extended-router [extended-switch] enable

To disable packing information, use the no sflow extended-router [extended-switch] enable
command.

Parameters
extended-switch Enter the keyword extended-switch to collect extended switch information.
enable Enter the keyword enable to enable global extended information.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Usage FTOS 7.8.1.0 and later enhances the sFlow implementation for real time traffic analysis on the
Information E-Series to provide extended gateway information in cases where the destination IP addresses are
learned by different routing protocols, and for cases where the destination is reachable over ECMP.

Related
sflow extended-gateway enable Enable packing information on an extended gateway
Commands
sflow extended-switch enable Enable packing information on a switch.
show sflow Display the sFlow configuration

sflow extended-switch enable

ces Enable packing information on a switch only.

Syntax sflow extended-switch enable

To disable packing information, use the no sflow extended-switch [enable] command.

sFlow | 991
 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

enable Enter the keyword enable to enable global extended information.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduces on S-Series Stacking
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Usage FTOS 7.8.1.0 and later enhances the sFlow implementation for real time traffic analysis on the
Information E-Series to provide extended gateway information in cases where the destination IP addresses are
learned by different routing protocols, and for cases where the destination is reachable over ECMP.

Related
sflow extended-gateway enable Enable packing information on an extended gateway.
Commands
sflow extended-router enable Enable packing information on a router.
show sflow Display the sFlow configuration

sflow polling-interval (Global)

ces Set the sFlow polling interval at a global level.

Syntax sflow polling-interval interval value

To return to the default, use the no sflow polling-interval interval command.

Parameters
interval value Enter the interval value in seconds.
Range: 15 to 86400 seconds
Default: 20 seconds

Defaults 20 seconds

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduces on S-Series Stacking
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage The polling interval for an interface is the maximum number of seconds between successive samples of
Information counters to be sent to the collector. This command changes the global default counter polling (20 seconds)
interval. You can configure an interface to use a different polling interval.

992 | sFlow
 Related
sflow polling-interval (Interface) Set the polling interval for an interface
Commands

sflow polling-interval (Interface)

ces Set the sFlow polling interval at an interface (overrides the global-level setting.)

Syntax sflow polling-interval interval value

To return to the default, use the no sflow polling-interval interval command.

Parameters
interval value Enter the interval value in seconds.
Range: 15 to 86400 seconds
Default: The global counter polling interval

Defaults The same value as the current global default counter polling interval

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduces on S-Series Stacking
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage This command sets the counter polling interval for an interface.
Information

Related
sflow polling-interval (Global) Globally set the polling interval
Commands

sflow sample-rate (Global)

ces Change the global default sampling rate.

Syntax sflow sample-rate value

To return to the default sampling rate, enter the no sflow sample-rate.

Parameters
value Enter the sampling rate value.
Range: C-Series and S-Series: 256 to 8388608 packets
E-Series TeraScale and ExaScale: 2 to 8388608

Enter values in powers of 2 only, for example 4096, 8192, 16384 etc.
Default: 32768 packets

Defaults 32768

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

sFlow | 993
 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60

History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduces on S-Series Stacking
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage Sample-rate is the average number of packets skipped before the sample is taken. This command
Information changes the global default sampling rate. You can configure an interface to use a different sampling
rate than the global sampling rate. If the value entered is not a correct power of 2, the command
generates an error message with the previous and next power of 2 value. Select one of these two packet
numbers and re-enter the command.

Related
sflow sample-rate (Interface) Change the Interface sampling rate.
Commands

sflow sample-rate (Interface)

ces Change the Interface default sampling rate.

Syntax sflow sample-rate value

To return to the default sampling rate, enter the no sflow sample-rate.

Parameters
value Enter the sampling rate value.
Range: C-Series and S-Series: 256 to 8388608 packets
E-Series TeraScale and ExaScale: 2 to 8388608 packets

Enter values in powers of 2 only, for example 4096, 8192, 16384 etc.
Default: 32768 packets

Defaults The Global default sampling

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduces on S-Series Stacking
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage This command changes the sampling rate for an Interface. By default, the sampling rate of an interface
Information is set to the same value as the current global default sampling rate. If the value entered is not a correct
power of 2, the command generates an error message with the previous and next power-of-2 value.
Select one of these two number and re-enter the command.

Related
sflow sample-rate (Global) Change the sampling rate globally.
Commands

994 | sFlow
show sflow
ces Display the current sFlow configuration

Syntax show sflow [interface]

Parameters
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For an 100/1000 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by
the slot/port information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by
the slot/port information.
• For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback followed by a number from 0
to 16383.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduces on S-Series Stacking
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 40-2. show sflow Command Example

FTOS#show sflow
sFlow services are enabled
Global default sampling rate: 32768
Global default counter polling interval: 20
1 collectors configured
Collector IP addr: 133.33.33.53, Agent IP addr: 133.33.33.116, UDP port: 6343
0 UDP packets exported
0 UDP packets dropped
165 sFlow samples collected
0 sFlow samples dropped due to sub-sampling This count is always zero (0)

Linecard 1 Port set 0 H/W sampling rate 8192

Gi 1/16: configured rate 8192, actual rate 8192, sub-sampling rate 1
Gi 1/17: configured rate 16384, actual rate 16384, sub-sampling rate 2

Linecard 3 Port set 1 H/W sampling rate 16384

Gi 3/40: configured rate 16384, actual rate 16384, sub-sampling rate 1
FTOS#

Usage The dropEvent counter (sFlow samples dropped due to sub-sampling) shown in the figure above will
Information always display a value of zero.

sFlow | 995
 show sflow linecard
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Display the sFlow information on a line card.

Syntax show sflow linecard {slot number}

Parameters
slot number (OPTIONAL) Enter a slot number to view information on the line card in that slot.
Range: 0 to 13 on a E1200, 0 to 6 on a E600/E600i, and 0 to 5 on a E300.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduces on S-Series Stacking
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 40-3. show sflow linecard Command Example

FTOS#show sflow linecard 1
Linecard 1
Samples rcvd from h/w :165
Samples dropped for sub-sampling :0
Total UDP packets exported :0
UDP packets exported via RPM :77
UDP packets dropped :
FTOS#

996 | sFlow
 41
SNMP and Syslog

Overview
This chapter contains commands to configure and monitor SNMP v1/v2/v3 and Syslog. Both features
are supported on the C-Series, E-Series, and S-Series platforms, as indicated by the following symbols
under each of the command headings: c e s

The chapter contains the following sections:

• SNMP Commands
• Syslog Commands

SNMP Commands
The SNMP commands available in FTOS are:
• show snmp
• show snmp engineID
• show snmp group
• show snmp user
• snmp ifmib ifalias long
• snmp-server community
• snmp-server contact
• snmp-server enable traps
• snmp-server engineID
• snmp-server group
• snmp-server host
• snmp-server location
• snmp-server packetsize
• snmp-server trap-source
• snmp-server user
• snmp-server view
• snmp trap link-status
The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is used to communicate management information
between the network management stations and the agents in the network elements. FTOS supports
SNMP versions 1, 2c, and 3, supporting both read-only and read-write modes. FTOS sends SNMP
traps, which are messages informing an SNMP management system about the network. FTOS supports
up to 16 SNMP trap receivers.

SNMP and Syslog | 997

 Important Points to Remember
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

• Typically, 5-second timeout and 3-second retry values on an SNMP server are sufficient for both
LAN and WAN applications. If you experience a timeout with these values, the recommended best
practice on Dell Networking switches (to accommodate their high port density) is to increase the
timeout and retry values on your SNMP server to the following:
— SNMP Timeout—greater than 3 seconds
— SNMP Retry count—greater than 2 seconds
• If you want to query an E-Series switch using SNMP v1/v2/v3 with an IPv6 address, configure the
IPv6 address on a non-management port on the switch.
• If you want to send SNMP v1/v2/v3 traps from an E-Series using an IPv6 address, use a
non-management port.
• SNMP v3 informs are not currently supported with IPv6 addresses.
• If you are using ACLs in SNMP v3 configuration, group ACL overrides user ACL if the user is
part of that group.
• SNMP operations are not supported on a VLAN.

show snmp
ces Display the status of SNMP network elements.

Syntax show snmp

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Example Figure 41-1. show snmp Command Example

FTOS#show snmp
32685 SNMP packets input
0 Bad SNMP version errors
0 Unknown community name
0 Illegal operation for community name supplied
0 Encoding errors
96988 Number of requested variables
0 Number of altered variables
31681 Get-request PDUs
968 Get-next PDUs
0 Set-request PDUs
61727 SNMP packets output
0 Too big errors (Maximum packet size 1500)
9 No such name errors
0 Bad values errors
0 General errors
32649 Response PDUs
29078 Trap PDUs
FTOS#

Related
snmp-server community Enable SNMP and set community string.
Commands

998 | SNMP and Syslog

show snmp engineID
ces Display the identification of the local SNMP engine and all remote engines that are configured on the
router.

Syntax show snmp engineID

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Example Figure 41-2. show snmp engineID Command

FTOS#show snmp engineID
Local SNMP engineID: 0000178B02000001E80214A8
Remote Engine ID IP-addr Port
80001F88043132333435 172.31.1.3 5009
80001F88043938373635 172.31.1.3 5008

FTOS#

Related
snmp-server engineID Configure local and remote SNMP engines on the router
Commands

show snmp group

ces Display the group name, security model, status, and storage type of each group.

Syntax show snmp group

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Usage The following example displays a group named ngroup. The ngroup has a security model of version 3
Information (v3) with authentication (auth), the read and notify name is nview with no write view name specified,
and finally the row status is active.

SNMP and Syslog | 999

 Example Figure 41-3. show snmp group Command Example
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show snmp group

groupname: ngroup security model: v3 auth

readview : nview writeview: no write view specified
notifyview: nview
row status: active

FTOS#

Related
snmp-server group Configure an SNMP server group
Commands

show snmp user

ces Display the information configured on each SNMP user name.

Syntax show snmp user

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Example Figure 41-4. show snmp user Command Example

FTOS#show snmp user
User name: v1v2creadu
Engine ID: 0000178B02000001E80214A8
storage-type: nonvolatile active
Authentication Protocol: None
Privacy Protocol: None

FTOS#

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
E-Series legacy command

snmp ifmib ifalias long

ces Display the entire description string through the Interface MIB, which would be truncated otherwise to
63 characters.

Syntax snmp ifmib ifalias long

Defaults Interface description truncated beyond 63 characters

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series

1000 | SNMP and Syslog

 Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
unknown Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 41-5. snmp ifmib ifalias long Command Example

!------command run on host connected to switch: --------------!
> snmpwalk -c public 10.10.10.130 .1.3.6.1.2.1.31 | grep -i alias | more
IF-MIB::ifAlias.134530304 = STRING: This is a port connected to Router2. This is a
port connected to
IF-MIB::ifAlias.134792448 = STRING:

!------command run on FTOS switch: --------------!

FTOS#snmp ifmib ifalias long

!------command run on server connected to switch: --------------!

> snmpwalk -c public 10.10.10.130 .1.3.6.1.2.1.31 | grep -i alias | more
IF-MIB::ifAlias.134530304 = STRING: This is a port connected to Router2. This is a
port connected to Router2. This is a port connected to Router2. This is a port
connected to Router2. This is a port connected to Router2.
IF-MIB::ifAlias.134792448 = STRING:

snmp-server community
ces Configure a new community string access for SNMPv1, v2, and v3.

Syntax snmp-server community community-name {ro | rw} [ipv6 ipv6-access-list-name [ipv6

ipv6-access-list-name | access-list-name | security-name name] | security-name name [ipv6
ipv6-access-list-name | access-list-name | security-name name] | access-list-name [ipv6
ipv6-access-list-name | access-list-name | security-name name]]]
To remove access to a community, use the no snmp-server community community-string {ro | rw}
[security-name name [access-list-name | ipv6 access-list-name | access-list-name ipv6
access-list-name]] command.

Parameters
community-name Enter a text string (up to 20 characters long) to act as a password for SNMP.
ro Enter the keyword ro to specify read-only permission.
rw Enter the keyword rw to specify read-write permission.
ipv6 access-list-name (Optional) Enter the keyword ipv6 followed by a an IPv6 ACL name (a
string up to 16 characters long).
security-name name (Optional) Enter the keyword security-name followed by the security
name as defined by the community MIB.
access-list-name (Optional) Enter a standard IPv4 access list name (a string up to 16
characters long).

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Ver. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

SNMP and Syslog | 1001

 Usage The example below configures a community named public that is mapped to the security named
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Information guestuser with Read Only (ro) permissions.

Example Figure 41-6. snmp-server community Command Example

FTOS#config
FTOS(conf)# snmp-server community public ro
FTOS(conf)# snmp-server community guest ro security-name guestuser
FTOS(conf)#

The security-name parameter maps the community string to an SNMPv3 user/security name as
defined by the community MIB.

If a community string is configured without a security-name (for example, snmp-server

community public ro), the community is mapped to a default security-name/group:
• v1v2creadu / v1v2creadg — maps to a community with ro permissions
• v1v2cwriteu/ v1v2cwriteg — maps to a community with rw permissions

This command is indexed by the community-name parameter.

If the snmp-server community command is not configured, you cannot query SNMP data. Only
Standard IPv4 ACL and IPv6 ACL is supported in the optional access-list-name.

The command options ipv6, security-name, and access-list-name are recursive. In other words,
each option can, in turn, accept any of the three options as a sub-option, and each of those sub-options
can accept any of the three sub-options as a sub-option, and so forth. The following example
demonstrates the creation of a standard IPv4 ACL called “snmp-ro-acl” and then assigning it to the
SNMP community “guest”:

Example Figure 41-7. snmp-server community Command Example

FTOS(conf)# ip access-list standard snmp-ro-acl
FTOS(config-std-nacl)#seq 5 permit host 10.10.10.224
FTOS(config-std-nacl)#seq 10 deny any count
!

FTOS(conf)#snmp-server community guest ro snmp-ro-acl

FTOS(conf)#

Note: For IPv6 ACLs, only IPv6 and UDP types are valid for SNMP; TCP, ICMP rules are
not valid for SNMP. In IPv6 ACLs port rules are not valid for SNMP.

Related
ip access-list standard Name (or select) a standard access list to filter based on IP address.
Commands
ipv6 access-list Configure an access list based on IPv6 addresses or protocols.
show running-config snmp Display the current SNMP configuration and defaults.

snmp-server contact
ces Configure contact information for troubleshooting this SNMP node.

Syntax snmp-server contact text

To delete the SNMP server contact information, use the no snmp-server contact command.

1002 | SNMP and Syslog

 Parameters
text Enter an alphanumeric text string, up to 55 characters long.

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
E-Series legacy command

snmp-server enable traps

ces Enable and configure SNMP traps.

Syntax snmp-server enable traps [notification-type] [notification-option]

To disable traps, use the no snmp-server enable traps [notification-type] [notification-option]
command.

Parameters
notification-type Enter the type of notification from the list below:
• bgp—for notification of changes in BGP process
• envmon—for Dell Networking device notifications when an
environmental threshold is exceeded
• snmp—for notification of the RFC 1157 traps.
• stp - Allow Spanning Tree protocol notification (RFC 1493)
• xstp - Allow MSTP (802.1s), RSTP (802.1w), and PVST+ state change
traps
notification-option For the envmon notification-type, enter one of the following optional
parameters:
• fan
• supply
• temperature
For the snmp notification-type, enter one of the following optional parameters:
• authentication
• coldstart
• linkdown
• linkup

Defaults Not enabled.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series; Added support for STP and xSTP notification types.
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
E-Series legacy command

SNMP and Syslog | 1003

 Usage FTOS supports up to 16 SNMP trap receivers.
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Information
If this command is not configured, no traps controlled by this command are sent. If you do not specify
a notification-type and notification-option, all traps are enabled.

Related
snmp-server community Enable SNMP and set the community string.
Commands

snmp-server engineID
ces Configure name for both the local and remote SNMP engines on the router.

Syntax snmp-server engineID [local engineID] [remote ip-address udp-port port-number engineID]
To return to the default, use the no snmp-server engineID [local engineID] [remote ip-address
udp-port port-number engineID] command

Parameters
local engineID Enter the keyword local followed by the engine ID number that identifies
the copy of the SNMP on the local device.
Format (as specified in RFC 3411): 12 octets.
• The first 4 octets are set to the private enterprise number.
• The remaining 8 octets are the MAC address of the chassis.
remote ip-address Enter the keyword remote followed by the IP address that identifies the
copy of the SNMP on the remote device.
udp-port port-number Enter the keyword udp-port followed by the UDP (User Datagram
engineID Protocol) port number on the remote device.
Range: 0 to 65535
Default: 162

Defaults As above

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Usage Changing the value of the SNMP Engine ID has important side effects. A user's password (entered on
Information the command line) is converted to an MD5 (Message Digest Algorithm) or SHA (Secure Hash
Algorithm) security digest. This digest is based on both the password and the local Engine ID. The
command line password is then destroyed, as required by RFC 2274. Because of this deletion, if the
local value of the Engine ID changes, the security digests of SNMPv3 users will be invalid, and the
users will have to be reconfigured.

For the remote Engine ID, the host IP and UDP port are the indexes to the command that are matched
to either overwrite or remove the configuration.

1004 | SNMP and Syslog

 Related
Display SNMP engine and all remote engines that are configured on the
Commands show snmp engineID
router
show running-config snmp Display the SNMP running configuration

snmp-server group
ces Configure a new SNMP group or a table that maps SNMP users to SNMP views.

Syntax snmp-server group [group_name {1 | 2c | 3 {auth | noauth | priv}}] [read name] [write name]
[notify name] [access-list-name | ipv6 access-list-name | access-list-name ipv6
access-list-name]]

To remove a specified group, use the no snmp-server group [group_name {v1 | v2c | v3 {auth |
noauth | priv}}] [read name] [write name] [notify name] [access-list-name | ipv6
access-list-name | access-list-name ipv6 access-list-name]] command.

Parameters
group_name Enter a text string (up to 20 characters long) as the name of the group.
Defaults: The following groups are created for mapping to read/write
community/security-names.
• v1v2creadg — maps to a community/security-name with ro
permissions
• 1v2cwriteg — maps to a community/security-name rw
permissions
1 | 2c | 3 (OPTIONAL) Enter the security model version number (1, 2c, or 3).
• 1 is the least secure version
• 3 is the most secure of the security modes.
• 2c allows transmission of informs and counter 64, which allows for
integers twice the width of what is normally allowed.
Default: 1
auth (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword auth to specify authentication of a packet
without encryption.
noauth (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword noauth to specify no authentication of a
packet.
priv (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword priv to specify both authentication and
then scrambling of the packet.
read name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword read followed by a name (a string of up to
20 characters long) as the read view name.
Default: GlobalView is set by default and is assumed to be every object
belonging to the Internet (1.3.6.1) OID space.
write name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword write followed by a name (a string of up
to 20 characters long) as the write view name.
notify name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword notify followed by a name (a string of up
to 20 characters long) as the notify view name.
access-list-name (Optional) Enter the standard IPv4 access list name (a string up to 16
characters long).
ipv6 access-list-name (Optional) Enter the keyword ipv6 followed by the IPv6 access list name (a
string up to 16 characters long)
access-list-name ipv6 (Optional) Enter both an IPv4 and IPv6 access list name.
access-list-name

SNMP and Syslog | 1005

 Defaults As defined above
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Usage The following example specifies the group named harig as a version 3 user requiring both
Information authentication and encryption and read access limited to the read named rview.

Note: For IPv6 ACLs, only IPv6 and UDP types are valid for SNMP; TCP, ICMP rules are
not valid for SNMP. In IPv6 ACLs port rules are not valid for SNMP.

Example Figure 41-8. snmp-server group Command Example

FTOS#conf
FTOS(conf)# snmp-server group harig 3 priv read rview
FTOS#

Note: The number of configurable groups is limited to 16 groups.

Related
Display the group name, security model, view status, and storage type of
Commands show snmp group
each group.
show running-config snmp Display the SNMP running configuration

snmp-server host
ces Configure the recipient of an SNMP trap operation.

Syntax snmp-server host ip-address | ipv6-address [traps | informs] [version 1 | 2c | 3] [auth | no

auth | priv] [community-string] [udp-port port-number] [notification-type]
To remove the SNMP host, use the no snmp-server host ip-address [traps | informs] [version 1
| 2c | 3] [auth | noauth | priv] [community-string] [udp-port number] [notification-type] command.

Parameters
ip-address Enter the keyword host followed by the IP address of the host (configurable
hosts is limited to 16).
ipv6-address Enter the keyword host followed by the IPv6 address of the host in the
x:x:x:x::x format.
The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero
traps (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword traps to send trap notifications to the
specified host.
Default: traps
informs (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword informs to send inform notifications to the
specified host.
Default: traps

1006 | SNMP and Syslog

 version 1 | 2c | 3 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword version to specify the security model
followed by the security model version number 1, 2c, or 3.
• Version 1 is the least secure version
• version 3 is the most secure of the security modes.
• Version 2c allows transmission of informs and counter 64, which allows for
integers twice the width of what is normally allowed.
Default: Version 1
auth (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword auth to specify authentication of a packet
without encryption.
noauth (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword noauth to specify no authentication of a
packet.
priv (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword priv to specify both authentication and then
scrambling of the packet.
community-string Enter a text string (up to 20 characters long) as the name of the SNMP
community.
Note: For version 1 and version 2c security models, this string
represents the name of the SNMP community. The string can be set
using this command, however it is recommended that you set the
community string using the snmp-server community command
before executing this command. For version 3 security model, this string
is the USM user security name.
udp-port port-number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords udp-port followed by the port number of
the remote host to use.
Range: 0 to 65535.
Default: 162
notification-type (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following keywords as the type of trap to be sent
to the host:
• bgp - allow BGP state change traps
• envmon - allows environment monitor traps
• snmp - Allows SNMP-type notification (RFC 1157) traps.
• stp - Allow Spanning Tree protocol notification (RFC 1493)
• xstp - Allow MSTP (802.1s), RSTP (802.1w), and PVST+ state change
traps
Default: All trap types are sent to host

Defaults As shown

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series; Added support for STP and xSTP notification types.
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Usage In order to configure the router to send SNMP notifications, you must enter at least one snmp-server
Information host command. If you enter the command with no keywords, all trap types are enabled for the host. If
you do not enter an snmp-server host command, no notifications are sent.

In order to enable multiple hosts, you must issue a separate snmp-server host command for each
host. You can specify multiple notification types in the command for each host.

SNMP and Syslog | 1007

 When multiple snmp-server host commands are given for the same host and type of notification
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

(trap or inform), each succeeding command overwrites the previous command. Only the last
snmp-server host command will be in effect. For example, if you enter an snmp-server host
inform command for a host and then enter another snmp-server host inform command for the same
host, the second command will replace the first.

The snmp-server host command is used in conjunction with the snmp-server enable command.
Use the snmp-server enable command to specify which SNMP notifications are sent globally. For a
host to receive most notifications, at least one snmp-server enable command and the snmp-server
host command for that host must be enabled.

Note: For v1 / v2c trap configuration, if the community-string is not defined using the
snmp-server community command prior to using this command, the default form of the
snmp-server community command will automatically be configured, with the
community-name the same as specified in the snmp-server host command.

Configuring Informs
To send an inform, follow the step below.
1. Configure a remote engine ID.
2. Configure a remote user.
3. Configure a group for this user with access rights.
4. Enable traps.
5. Configure a host to receive informs.

Related
snmp-server enable traps Enable SNMP traps.
Commands
snmp-server community Configure a new community SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c

snmp-server location
ces Configure the location of the SNMP server.

Syntax snmp-server location text

To delete the SNMP location, enter no snmp-server location.

Parameters
text Enter an alpha-numeric text string, up to 55 characters long.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
E-Series legacy command

1008 | SNMP and Syslog

snmp-server packetsize
ces Set the largest SNMP packet size permitted when the SNMP server is receiving a request or generating
a reply, use the snmp-server packetsize global configuration command.

Syntax snmp-server packetsize byte-count

Parameters
byte-count Enter one of the following values 8, 16, 24 or 32. Packet sizes are 8000 bytes, 16000 bytes,
32000 bytes, and 64000 bytes.

Defaults 8

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
E-Series legacy command

snmp-server trap-source
ces Configure a specific interface as the source for SNMP traffic.

Syntax snmp-server trap-source interface

To disable sending traps out a specific interface, enter no snmp trap-source.

Parameter
interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For an 100/1000 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback followed by a
number from 0 to 16383.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.

Defaults The IP address assigned to the management interface is the default.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Usage For this snmp-server trap-source command to be enabled, you must configure an IP address on the
Information interface and enable the interface configured as an SNMP trap source.

SNMP and Syslog | 1009

 Related
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

snmp-server community Set the community string.

Commands

snmp-server user
ces Configure a new user to an SNMP group.

Syntax snmp-server user name {group_name remote ip-address udp-port port-number} [1 | 2c | 3]

[encrypted] [auth {md5 | sha} auth-password] [priv des56 priv password] [access-list-name |
ipv6 access-list-name | access-list-name ipv6 access-list-name]
To remove a user from the SNMP group, use the no snmp-server user name {group_name remote
ip-address udp-port port-number} [1 | 2c | 3] [encrypted] [auth {md5 | sha} auth-password]
[priv des56 priv password] [access-list-name | ipv6 access-list-name | access-list-name ipv6
access-list-name] command.

Parameters
name Enter the name of the user (not to exceed 20 characters), on the host, that
connects to the agent.
group_name Enter a text string (up to 20 characters long) as the name of the group.
Defaults: The following groups are created for mapping to read/write
community/security-names.
• v1v2creadu — maps to a community with ro permissions
• 1v2cwriteu — maps to a community rw permissions
remote ip-address Enter the keyword remote followed by the IP address that identifies the copy of
the SNMP on the remote device.
udp-port port-number Enter the keyword udp-port followed by the UDP (User Datagram Protocol)
port number on the remote device.
Range: 0 to 65535.
Default: 162
1 | 2c | 3 (OPTIONAL) Enter the security model version number (1, 2c, or 3).
• 1 is the least secure version
• 3 is the most secure of the security modes.
• 2c allows transmission of informs and counter 64, which allows for integers
twice the width of what is normally allowed.
Default: 1
encrypted (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword encrypted to specify the password appear in
encrypted format (a series of digits, masking the true characters of the string).
auth (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword auth to specify authentication of a packet
without encryption.
md5 | sha (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword md5 or sha to designate the authentication
level.
md5 — Message Digest Algorithm
sha — Secure Hash Algorithm
auth-password (OPTIONAL) Enter a text string (up to 20 characters long) password that will
enable the agent to receive packets from the host.
Minimum: 8 characters long
priv des56 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword priv des56 to initiate a privacy
authentication level setting using the CBC-DES privacy authentication algorithm
(des56).

1010 | SNMP and Syslog

 priv password (OPTIONAL) Enter a text string (up to 20 characters long) password that will
enables the host to encrypt the contents of the message it sends to the agent.
Minimum: 8 characters long
access-list-name (Optional) Enter the standard IPv4 access list name (a string up to 16 characters
long).
ipv6 access-list-name (Optional) Enter the keyword ipv6 followed by the IPv6 access list name (a
string up to 16 characters long)
access-list-name ipv6 (Optional) Enter both an IPv4 and IPv6 access list name.
access-list-name

Defaults As above

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Usage
Information Note: For IPv6 ACLs, only IPv6 and UDP types are valid for SNMP; TCP, ICMP rules are
not valid for SNMP. In IPv6 ACLs port rules are not valid for SNMP.

No default values exist for authentication or privacy algorithms and no default password exist. If you
forget a password, you cannot recover it; the user must be reconfigured. You can specify either a
plain-text password or an encrypted cypher-text password. In either case, the password will be stored
in the configuration in an encrypted form and displayed as encrypted in the show running-config
command.
If you have an encrypted password, you can specify the encrypted string instead of the plain-text
password. The following command is an example of how to specify the command with an encrypted
string:

Examples Figure 41-9. snmp-server user Command Example

FTOS# snmp-server user privuser v3group v3 encrypted auth md5
9fc53d9d908118b2804fe80e3ba8763d priv des56 d0452401a8c3ce42804fe80e3ba8763d

The following command is an example of how to enter a plain-text password as the string
authpasswd for user authuser of group v3group.

FTOS#conf
FTOS(conf)# snmp-server user authuser v3group v3 auth md5 authpasswd

The following command configures a remote user named n3user with a v3 security model and a
security level of authNOPriv.

FTOS#conf
FTOS(conf)# snmp-server user n3user ngroup remote 172.31.1.3 udp-port 5009 3 auth
md5 authpasswd

SNMP and Syslog | 1011

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Note: The number of configurable users is limited to 16.

Related
Commands
show snmp user Display the information configured on each SNMP user name.

snmp-server view
ces Configure an SNMPv3 view.

Syntax snmp-server view view-name oid-tree {included | excluded}

To remove an SNMPv3 view, use the no snmp-server view view-name oid-tree {included |
excluded} command.

Parameters
view-name Enter the name of the view (not to exceed 20 characters).
oid-tree Enter the OID sub tree for the view (not to exceed 20 characters).
included (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword included to include the MIB family in
the view.
excluded (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword excluded to exclude the MIB family in
the view.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Usage The oid-tree variable is a full sub-tree starting from 1.3.6 and can not specify the name of a sub-tree or
Information a MIB. The following example configures a view named rview that allows access to all objects under
1.3.6.1:

Example Figure 41-10. snmp-server view Command Example

FTOS# conf
FTOS#(conf) snmp-server view rview 1.3.6.1 included

Related
show running-config snmp Display the SNMP running configuration
Commands

snmp trap link-status

ces Enable the interface to send SNMP link traps, which indicate whether the interface is up or down.

Syntax snmp trap link-status

To disable sending link trap messages, enter no snmp trap link-status.

1012 | SNMP and Syslog

 Defaults Enabled.

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Usage If the interface is expected to flap during normal usage, you could disable this command.
Information

Syslog Commands
The following commands allow you to configure logging functions on all Dell Networking switches:
• clear logging
• default logging buffered
• default logging console
• default logging monitor
• default logging trap
• logging
• logging buffered
• logging console
• logging facility
• logging history
• logging history size
• logging monitor
• logging on
• logging source-interface
• logging synchronous
• logging trap
• show logging
• show logging driverlog stack-unit (S-Series)
• terminal monitor

clear logging
ces Clear the messages in the logging buffer.

Syntax clear logging

Defaults None.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

SNMP and Syslog | 1013

 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60

History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Related
show logging Display logging settings and system messages in the internal buffer.
Commands

default logging buffered

ces Return to the default setting for messages logged to the internal buffer.

Syntax default logging buffered

Defaults size = 40960; level = 7 or debugging

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Related
logging buffered Set the logging buffered parameters.
Commands

default logging console

ces Return the default settings for messages logged to the console.

Syntax default logging console

Defaults level = 7 or debugging

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Related
logging console Set the logging console parameters.
Commands

1014 | SNMP and Syslog

default logging monitor
ces Return to the default settings for messages logged to the terminal.

Syntax default logging monitor

Defaults level = 7 or debugging

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Related
logging monitor Set the logging monitor parameters.
Commands
terminal monitor Send system messages to the terminal/monitor.

default logging trap

ces Return to the default settings for logging messages to the Syslog servers.

Syntax default logging trap

Defaults level = 6 or informational

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Related
logging trap Limit messages logged to the Syslog servers based on severity.
Commands

logging
ces Configure an IP address or host name of a Syslog server where logging messages will be sent.

Syntax logging {ip-address | hostname}

To disable logging, enter no logging.

Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format.
hostname Enter the name of a host already configured and recognized by the switch.

Defaults Disabled

SNMP and Syslog | 1015

 Command Modes CONFIGURATION
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Related
logging on Enables the logging asynchronously to logging buffer, console, Syslog server, and
Commands
terminal lines.
logging trap Enables logging to the Syslog server based on severity.

logging buffered
ces Enable logging and specify which messages are logged to an internal buffer. By default, all messages
are logged to the internal buffer.

Syntax logging buffered [level] [size]

To return to the default values, enter default logging buffered. To disable logging stored to an
internal buffer, enter no logging buffered.

Parameters
level (OPTIONAL) Indicate a value from 0 to 7 or enter one of the following
equivalent words: emergencies, alerts, critical, errors, warnings, notifications,
informational, or debugging.
Default: 7 or debugging.
size (OPTIONAL) Indicate the size, in bytes, of the logging buffer. The number of
messages buffered depends on the size of each message.
Range: 40960 to 524288.
Default: 40960 bytes.

Defaults level = 7; size = 40960 bytes

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Usage When you decrease the buffer size, all messages stored in the buffer are lost. Increasing the buffer size
Information does not affect messages stored in the buffer.

Related
clear logging Clear the logging buffer.
Commands
default logging buffered Returns the logging buffered parameters to the default setting.
show logging Display the logging setting and system messages in the internal buffer.

1016 | SNMP and Syslog

logging console
ces Specify which messages are logged to the console.

Syntax logging console [level]

To return to the default values, enter default logging console. To disable logging to the console, enter
no logging console.

Parameters
level (OPTIONAL) Indicate a value from 0 to 7 or enter one of the following parameters: emergencies,
alerts, critical, errors, warnings, notifications, informational, or debugging.
Default: 7 or debugging.

Defaults 7 or debugging

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Related
clear logging Clear logging buffer.
Commands
default logging console Returns the logging console parameters to the default setting.
show logging Display logging settings and system messages in the internal buffer.

logging facility
ces Configure the Syslog facility, used for error messages sent to Syslog servers.

Syntax logging facility [facility-type]

To return to the default values, enter no logging facility.

SNMP and Syslog | 1017

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

facility-type (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following parameters.

• auth (authorization system)
• cron (Cron/at facility)
• deamon (system deamons)
• kern (kernel)
• local0 (local use)
• local1 (local use)
• local2 (local use)
• local3 (local use)
• local4 (local use)
• local5 (local use)
• local6 (local use)
• local7 (local use)
• lpr (line printer system)
• mail (mail system)
• news (USENET news)
• sys9 (system use)
• sys10 (system use)
• sys11 (system use)
• sys12 (system use)
• sys13 (system use)
• sys14 (system use)
• syslog (Syslog process)
• user (user process)
• uucp (Unix to Unix copy process)
The default is local7.

Defaults local7

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Related
logging Enable logging to a Syslog server.
Commands
logging on Enables logging.

logging history
ces Specify which messages are logged to the history table of the switch and the SNMP network
management station (if configured).

Syntax logging history level

To return to the default values, enter no logging history.

1018 | SNMP and Syslog

 Parameters
level Indicate a value from 0 to 7 or enter one of the following equivalent words:
emergencies, alerts, critical, errors, warnings, notifications, informational, or
debugging.
The default is 4.

Defaults 4 or warnings

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Usage When you configure the snmp-server trap-source command, the system messages logged to the history
Information table are also sent to the SNMP network management station.

Related
show logging history Display information logged to the history buffer.
Commands

logging history size

ces Specify the number of messages stored in the FTOS logging history table.

Syntax logging history size size

To return to the default values, enter no logging history size.

Parameters
size Indicate a value as the number of messages to be stored.
Range: 0 to 500.
Default: 1 message.

Defaults 1 message

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Usage When the number of messages reaches the limit you set with the logging history size command, older
Information messages are deleted as newer ones are added to the table.

Related
show logging history Display information logged to the history buffer.
Commands

SNMP and Syslog | 1019

 logging monitor
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Specify which messages are logged to Telnet applications.

Syntax logging monitor [level]

To disable logging to terminal connections, enter no logging monitor.

Parameters
level Indicate a value from 0 to 7 or enter one of the following parameters: emergencies, alerts,
critical, errors, warnings, notifications, informational, or debugging.
The default is 7 or debugging.

Defaults 7 or debugging

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Related
default logging monitor Returns the logging monitor parameters to the default setting.
Commands

logging on
ces Specify that debug or error messages are asynchronously logged to multiple destinations, such as
logging buffer, Syslog server, or terminal lines.

Syntax logging on
To disable logging to logging buffer, Syslog server and terminal lines, enter no logging on.

Defaults Enabled

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Usage When you enter no logging on, messages are logged only to the console.
Information

Related
logging Enable logging to Syslog server.
Commands
logging buffered Set the logging buffered parameters.
logging console Set the logging console parameters.
logging monitor Set the logging parameters for the terminal connections.

1020 | SNMP and Syslog

logging source-interface
ces Specify that the IP address of an interface is the source IP address of Syslog packets sent to the Syslog
server.

Syntax logging source-interface interface

To disable this command and return to the default setting, enter no logging source-interface.

Parameters
interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For an 100/1000 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed
by the slot/port information.
• For a Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by
the slot/port information.
• For Loopback interfaces, enter the keyword loopback followed by a number from
zero (0) to 16383.
• For the management interface on the RPM, enter the keyword
ManagementEthernet followed by the slot/port information. The slot range is 0-1
and the port range is 0.
• For a Port Channel, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1-255 for TeraScale,
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a Ten Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Usage Syslog messages contain the IP address of the interface used to egress the router. By configuring the
Information logging source-interface command, the Syslog packets contain the IP address of the interface
configured.

Related
logging Enable the logging to another device.
Commands

logging synchronous
ces Synchronize unsolicited messages and FTOS output.

Syntax logging synchronous [level level | all] [limit number-of-buffers]

To disable message synchronization, use the no logging synchronous [level level | all] [limit
number-of-buffers] command.

SNMP and Syslog | 1021

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

all Enter the keyword all to ensure that all levels are printed asynchronously.
level level Enter the keyword level followed by a number as the severity level. A
high number indicates a low severity level and visa versa.
Range: 0 to 7.
Default: 2
all Enter the keyword all to turn off all
limit number-of-buffers Enter the keyword limit followed by the number of buffers to be queued
for the terminal after which new messages are dropped
Range: 20 to 300
Default: 20

Defaults Disabled. If enabled without level or number-of-buffers options specified, level = 2 and
number-of-buffers = 20 are the defaults.

Command Modes LINE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Usage When logging synchronous is enabled, unsolicited messages appear between software prompts and
Information outputs. Only the messages with a severity at or below the set level are sent to the console.

If the message queue limit is reached on a terminal line and messages are discarded, a system message
appears on that terminal line. Messages may continue to appear on other terminal lines.

Related
logging on Enables logging.
Commands

logging trap
ces Specify which messages are logged to the Syslog server based the message severity.

Syntax logging trap [level]

To return to the default values, enter default logging trap. To disable logging, enter no logging
trap.

Parameters
level Indicate a value from 0 to 7 or enter one of the following parameters: emergencies, alerts,
critical, errors, warnings, notifications, informational, or debugging.
The default is 6.

Defaults 6 or informational

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series

1022 | SNMP and Syslog

 Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Related
logging Enable the logging to another device.
Commands
logging on Enables logging.

show logging
ces Display the logging settings and system messages logged to the internal buffer of the switch.

Syntax show logging [number | history [reverse][number] | reverse [number] | summary]

Parameters
number (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of message to be displayed on the output.
Range: 1 to 65535
history (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword history to view only information in the Syslog history
table.
reverse (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword reverse to view the Syslog messages in FIFO (first in,
first out) order.
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view a table showing the number of
messages per type and per slot.
Slots *7* and *8* represent RPMs.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
E-Series legacy command

SNMP and Syslog | 1023

 Figure 41-11. show logging Command Example (Partial)
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show logging
Syslog logging: enabled
Console logging: level debugging
Monitor logging: level debugging
Buffer logging: level debugging, 5604 Messages Logged, Size (524288 bytes)
Trap logging: level informational
Oct 8 09:25:37: %RPM1:RP1 %BGP-5-ADJCHANGE: Connection with neighbor 223.80.255.254 closed. Hold time
expired
Oct 8 09:25:38: %RPM1:RP1 %BGP-5-ADJCHANGE: Neighbor 192.200.13.2 Up
Oct 8 09:25:38: %RPM1:RP1 %BGP-5-ADJCHANGE: Neighbor 192.1.1.13 Up
Oct 8 09:25:38: %RPM1:RP1 %BGP-5-ADJCHANGE: Neighbor 1.1.14.2 Up
Oct 8 09:25:38: %RPM1:RP1 %BGP-5-ADJCHANGE: Neighbor 192.1.1.14 Up
Oct 8 09:25:38: %RPM1:RP1 %BGP-5-ADJCHANGE: Neighbor 1.1.11.2 Up
Oct 8 09:25:38: %RPM1:RP1 %BGP-5-ADJCHANGE: Neighbor 192.1.1.5 Up
Oct 8 09:25:38: %RPM1:RP1 %BGP-5-ADJCHANGE: Neighbor 192.4.1.3 Up
Oct 8 09:25:38: %RPM1:RP1 %BGP-5-ADJCHANGE: Neighbor 192.1.1.4 Up
Oct 8 09:25:38: %RPM1:RP1 %BGP-5-ADJCHANGE: Neighbor 192.1.1.6 Up
Oct 8 09:25:38: %RPM1:RP1 %BGP-5-ADJCHANGE: Neighbor 192.1.1.12 Up
Oct 8 09:25:38: %RPM1:RP1 %BGP-5-ADJCHANGE: Neighbor 192.1.1.15 Up
Oct 8 09:25:38: %RPM1:RP1 %BGP-5-ADJCHANGE: Neighbor 192.1.1.3 Up
Oct 8 09:25:38: %RPM1:RP1 %BGP-5-ADJCHANGE: Neighbor 192.200.12.2 Up
Oct 8 09:25:38: %RPM1:RP1 %BGP-5-ADJCHANGE: Neighbor 1.1.10.2 Up
Oct 8 09:25:38: %RPM1:RP1 %BGP-5-ADJCHANGE: Session closed by neighbor 1.1.10.2 (Hold time expired)
Oct 8 09:25:38: %RPM1:RP1 %BGP-5-ADJCHANGE: Neighbor 192.200.14.7 Up
Oct 8 09:26:25: %RPM1:RP1 %BGP-5-ADJCHANGE: Connection with neighbor 1.1.11.2 closed. Neighbor recycled
Oct 8 09:26:25: %RPM1:RP1 %BGP-5-ADJCHANGE: Connection with neighbor 1.1.14.2 closed. Neighbor recycled
--More--

Figure 41-12. show logging history Command Example

FTOS#show logging history
Syslog History Table: 1 maximum table entries,
saving level Warnings or higher
SNMP notifications not Enabled
%RPM:0:0 %CHMGR-2-LINECARDDOWN - Line card 3 down - IPC timeout
FTOS#

show logging driverlog stack-unit (S-Series)

s Display the driver log for the specified stack member.

Syntax show logging driverlog stack-unit unit#

Parameters
stack-unit unit# Enter the keyword stack-unit followed by the stack member ID of the switch for
which you want to display the driver log.
Unit ID range:
S60: 0-11
all other S-Series: 0-7

Defaults No default values or behavior

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

1024 | SNMP and Syslog

 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series

Usage This command displays internal software driver information, which may be useful during
Information troubleshooting switch initialization errors, such as a downed Port-Pipe.

terminal monitor
ces Configure the FTOS to display messages on the monitor/terminal.

Syntax terminal monitor

To return to default settings, enter terminal no monitor.

Defaults Disabled.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
E-Series legacy command

Related
logging monitor Set the logging parameters on the monitor/terminal.
Commands

SNMP and Syslog | 1025

 www.dell.com | dell.com/support

1026
|
SNMP and Syslog
 42
S-Series Stacking Commands

Overview
All commands in this chapter are specific to the S-Series platform, as indicated by the s character
that appears below each command heading. The commands are always available and operational,
whether or not the S-Series has a stacking module inserted. You can use the commands to
pre-configure a switch, so that the configuration settings are invoked when the switch is attached to
other S-Series units.

For details on using the S-Series stacking feature, see the chapter “Stacking S-Series Switches” in the
FTOS Configuration Guide.

The S60 supports stacking with FTOS version 8.3.3.4 and later.

Commands
The commands in this chapter are used for managing the stacking of S-Series systems:

• power-cycle
• redundancy disable-auto-reboot
• redundancy force-failover stack-unit
• reset stack-unit
• show redundancy
• show system stack-ports
• stack-unit priority
• stack-unit provision
• stack-unit renumber
• upgrade system stack-unit (S-Series stack member)

power-cycle
Power-cycle the unit.

Syntax power-cycle [stack-unit | all]

Parameters
stack-unit Enter the stack member unit identifier of the stack member to reset.
S60 range: 0 - 11

S-Series Stacking Commands | 1027

 Defaults None
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.4 Introduced on S60
History

Usage This command applies to the S60 only.

Information

redundancy disable-auto-reboot
s Prevent the S-Series stack management unit and standby unit from rebooting if they fails.

Syntax redundancy disable-auto-reboot [stack-unit | all]

To return to the default, enter no redundancy disable-auto-reboot stack-unit.

Parameters
stack-unit Enter the stack member unit identifier of the stack member to reset.
S60/S55 range: 0 - 11
S50/S25 range: 0 - 7
S4810 range: 0-5

Defaults Disabled (the failed switch is automatically rebooted).

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.4 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Added the all option
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Usage Enabling this command keeps the failed switch in the failed state. It will not reboot until it is manually
Information rebooted. When enabled, it is not displayed in the running-config. When disabled, it is displayed in the
running-config.

Related
show redundancy Display the current redundancy status.
Commands

redundancy force-failover stack-unit

s Force the backup unit in the stack to become the management unit.

Syntax redundancy force-failover stack-unit

Defaults Not enabled

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

1028 | S-Series Stacking Commands

reset stack-unit
s Reset any designated stack member except the management unit (master unit).

Syntax reset stack-unit stack-unit hard

Parameters
stack-unit Enter the stack member unit identifier of the stack member to reset.
S60/S55 range: 0 - 11
S50/S25 range: 0 - 7
S4810 range: 0-5
hard Reset the stack unit if the unit is in a problem state.

Default none

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.4 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Added hard reset option.
Version 7.8.1.0 Augmented to run on the standby unit in order to reset the standby unit directly.
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Usage Resetting the management unit is not allowed, and an error message will be displayed if you try to do
Information so. Resetting is a soft reboot, including flushing the forwarding tables.

Starting with FTOS 7.8.1.0, you can run this command directly on the stack standby unit (standby
master) to reset the standby. You cannot reset any other unit from the standby unit.

Example Figure 42-1. Using the reset stack-unit Command on the Stack Standby Unit
FTOS#show system brief

Stack MAC : 00:01:e8:51:4e:f8

-- Stack Info --
Unit UnitType Status ReqTyp CurTyp Version Ports
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 Member online S50N S50N 4.7.7.117 52
1 Member online S50N S50N 4.7.7.117 52
2 Member online S50N S50N 4.7.7.117 52
3 Member online S50N S50N 4.7.7.117 52
4 Standby online S50N S50N 4.7.7.117 52
5 Member online S50N S50N 4.7.7.117 52
6 Mgmt online S50N S50N 4.7.7.117 52
7 Member online S50N S50N 4.7.7.117 52

FTOS(standby)#reset ? <<Standby management unit

stack-unit Unit number
FTOS(standby)#reset stack-unit ?
<0-7> Unit number id
FTOS(standby)#reset stack-unit 6
% Error: Reset of master unit is not allowed. <<Resetting master not allowed
FTOS(standby)#reset stack-unit 0
% Error: Reset of stack units from standby is not allowed.<<no reset of other member
FTOS(standby)#
FTOS(standby)#reset stack-unit 4 <<Resetting standby unit success!
00:02:50: %STKUNIT4-S:CP %CHMGR-5-STACKUNIT_RESET: Stack unit 4 being reset
00:02:50: %STKUNIT4-S:CP %CHMGR-2-STACKUNIT_DOWN: Stack unit 4 down - reset
00:02:50: %STKUNIT4-S:CP %IFMGR-1-DEL_PORT: Removed port: Gi 4/1-48
FTOS(standby)#rebooting

U-Boot 1.1.4 (Mar 6 2008 - 00:00:04)

S-Series Stacking Commands | 1029

 Related
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

reload Reboot FTOS.

Commands
upgrade (S-Series management unit) Reset the designated S-Series stack member.

show redundancy
s Display the current redundancy configuration (status of automatic reboot configuration on stack
management unit).

Syntax show redundancy

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.4 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Example Figure 42-2. show redundancy Command Output

FTOS#show redundancy

-- SSeries Redundancy Configuration --

------------------------------------------------
Auto reboot : Enabled

-- Stack-unit Status --
------------------------------------------------
Mgmt ID: 0
Stack-unit ID: 0
Stack-unit Redundancy Role: Primary
Stack-unit State: Active
Stack-unit SW Version: 7.7.1.0
Link to Peer: Up

-- PEER Stack-unit Status --

------------------------------------------------
Stack-unit State: Standby
Peer stack-unit ID: 1
Stack-unit SW Version: 7.7.1.0

-- Stack-unit Redundancy Configuration --

------------------------------------------------
Primary Stack-unit: mgmt-id 0
Auto Data Sync: Full
Failover Type: Hot Failover
Auto reboot Stack-unit: Enabled
Auto failover limit: 3 times in 60 minutes

-- Stack-unit Failover Record --

------------------------------------------------
Failover Count: 0
Last failover timestamp: None
Last failover Reason: None
Last failover type: None

-- Last Data Block Sync Record: --

------------------------------------------------
Line Card Config: succeeded Mar 07 1996 00:27:39
Start-up Config: succeeded Mar 07 1996 00:27:39
Runtime Event Log: succeeded Mar 07 1996 00:27:39
Running Config: succeeded Mar 07 1996 00:27:39
ACL Mgr: succeeded Mar 07 1996 00:27:39

1030 | S-Series Stacking Commands

 Related
redundancy disable-auto-reboot Prevent the system from auto-rebooting if it fails.
Commands

show system stack-ports

s Display information about the stacking ports on all switches in the S-Series stack.

Syntax show system stack-ports [status | topology]

Parameters
status (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword status to display the command output without the
Connection field.
topology (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword topology to limit the table to just the Interface and
Connection fields.

Defaults No default behavior

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.4 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Example Figure 42-3. show system stack-ports Command Example

FTOS# show system stack-ports
Topology: Ring

Interface Connection
Link Speed Admin Link
(Gb/s) Status Status
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
0/49 1/49 12 up up
0/50 12 up down
0/51 2/49 24 up up
1/49 0/49 12 up up
1/50 2/51 12 up up
2/49 0/51 24 up up
2/51 1/50 12 up up
2/52 12 up down
FTOS#

Example Figure 42-4. show system stack-ports status Command Example

FTOS# show system stack-ports status
Topology: Ring

Interface Link Speed Admin Link

(Gb/s) Status Status
-------------------------------------------------
0/49 12 up up
0/50 12 up down
0/51 24 up up
1/49 12 up up
1/50 12 up up
2/49 24 up up
2/51 12 up up
2/52 12 up down
FTOS#

S-Series Stacking Commands | 1031

 Example Figure 42-5. show system stack-ports topology Command Example
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS# show system stack-ports topology

Topology: Ring

Interface Connection

----------------------
0/49 1/49
0/50
0/51 2/49
1/49 0/49
1/50 2/51
2/49 0/51
2/51 1/50
2/52
FTOS#

Table 42-1. show interfaces description Command Example Fields

Field Description
Topology Lists the topology of stack ports connected: Ring, Daisy chain, or Standalone
Interface The unit/port ID of the connected stack port on this unit
Link Speed Link Speed of the stack port (12 or 24) in Gb/s
Admin The only currently listed status is Up.
Status
Connection The stack port ID to which this unit’s stack port is connected

Related
reset stack-unit Reset the designated S-Series stack member.
Commands
show hardware stack-unit Display the data plane or management plane input and output statistics of the
designated component of the designated stack member.
show system (S-Series) Display the current status of all stack members or a specific member.
upgrade (S-Series Upgrade the bootflash image or system image of the S-Series management
management unit) unit.

stack-unit priority
s Configure the ability of an S-Series switch to become the management unit of a stack.

Syntax stack-unit stack-unit priority preference

Parameters
stack-unit Enter the stack member unit identifier of the stack member to reset.
S60/S55 range: 0 - 11
S50/S25 range: 0 - 7
S4810 range: 0-5
preference This preference parameter allows you to specify the management priority of one backup
switch over another,
Range 0-14, with 0 the lowest priority and 14 the highest.
The switch with the highest priority value will be chosen to become the management unit if
the active management unit fails or on the next reload.

Defaults 1

1032 | S-Series Stacking Commands

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
History Version 8.3.3.4 Introduced on S60
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Related
reload Reboot FTOS.
Commands
show system (S-Series) Display the current status of all stack members or a specific member.

stack-unit provision
s Pre-configure a logical stacking ID of a switch that will join the stack. This is an optional command
that is executed on the management unit.

Syntax stack-unit stack-unit provision {S25N|S25P|S25V|S50N|S50V |S60}

Parameters
stack-unit Enter the stack member unit identifier of the stack member to reset.
S60/S55 range: 0 - 11
S50/S25 range: 0 - 7
S4810 range: 0-5
S25N|S25P|S25V|| Enter the S-Series model identifier of the switch to be added as a stack member. This
S50N|S50V|S60 identifier is also referred to as the provision type.

Defaults When this value is not set, a switch joining the stack is given the next available sequential stack
member identifier.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.4 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Related
reload Reboot FTOS.
Commands
show system (S-Series) Display the current status of all stack members or a specific member.

stack-unit renumber
s Change the stack member ID of any stack member or a stand-alone S-Series.

Syntax stack-unit stack-unit renumber stack-unit

Parameters
stack-unit Enter the stack member unit identifier of the stack member to reset.
S60/S55 range: 0 - 11
S50/S25 range: 0 - 7
S4810 range: 0-5
The first instance of this value is the stack member unit identifier, from 0 to 7, of the
switch that you want add to the stack.
The second instance of this value is the desired new unit identifier number.

S-Series Stacking Commands | 1033

 Defaults none
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.4 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Usage You can renumber any switch, including the management unit or a stand-alone unit.
Information
You cannot renumber a unit to a number of an active member in the stack.

When executing this command on the master, the stack reloads. When the members are renumbered,
only that specific unit will reset and come up with the new unit number.

Example Figure 42-6. stack-unit renumber Command Example

S50V_7.7#stack-unit 0 renumber 2

Renumbering master unit will reload the stack. Proceed to renumber [confirm yes/
no]:

Related
reload Reboot FTOS.
Commands
reset stack-unit Reset the designated S-Series stack member.
show system (S-Series) Display the current status of all stack members or a specific member.

upgrade system stack-unit (S-Series stack member)

s Copy the boot image or FTOS from the management unit to one or more stack members.

Syntax upgrade {boot | system} stack-unit {all | stack-unit}

Parameters
boot Enter this keyword to copy the boot image from the management unit to the
designated stack members.
system Enter this keyword to copy the FTOS image from the management unit to the
designated stack members.
all Enter this keyword to copy the designated image to all stack members.
stack-unit Enter the stack member unit identifier of the stack member to reset.
S60/S55 range: 0 - 11
S50/S25 range: 0 - 7
S4810 range: 0-5

Defaults No configuration or default values

Command Modes EXEC

Command
Version 8.3.3.4 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

1034 | S-Series Stacking Commands

 Usage You must reload FTOS after using the upgrade command.
Information

Related
reload Reboot FTOS.
Commands
reset stack-unit Reset the designated S-Series stack member.
show system (S-Series) Display the current status of all stack members or a specific member.
show version Display the current FTOS version information on the system.
upgrade (S-Series management Upgrade the bootflash image or system image of the S-Series management
unit) unit.

S-Series Stacking Commands | 1035

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

1036 | S-Series Stacking Commands

 43
Storm Control

Overview
The FTOS Storm Control feature allows users to limit or suppress traffic during a traffic storm
(Broadcast/Unknown Unicast Rate Limiting, or Multicast on the C-Series and S-Series).
Support for particular Dell Networking platforms (C-Series, E-Series, or S-Series) is indicated by the
characters that appear below each command heading:
• C-Series: c
• E-Series: e
• S-Series: s

Commands
The Storm Control commands are:
• show storm-control broadcast
• show storm-control multicast
• show storm-control unknown-unicast
• storm-control broadcast (Configuration)
• storm-control broadcast (Interface)
• storm-control multicast (Configuration)
• storm-control multicast (Interface)
• storm-control unknown-unicast (Configuration)
• storm-control unknown-unicast (Interface)

Important Points to Remember

• Interface commands can only be applied on physical interfaces (VLANs and LAG interfaces are
not supported).
• An INTERFACE-level command only support storm control configuration on ingress.
• An INTERFACE-level command overrides any CONFIGURATION-level ingress command for
that physical interface, if both are configured.
• The CONFIGURATION-level storm control commands can be applied at ingress or egress and are
supported on all physical interfaces.
• When storm control is applied on an interface, the percentage of storm control applied is
calculated based on the advertised rate of the line card. It is not based on the speed setting for the
line card.

Storm Control | 1037

 • Do not apply per-VLAN QoS on an interface that has storm control enabled (either on an interface
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

or globally).
• When broadcast storm control is enabled on an interface or globally on ingress, and DSCP
marking for a DSCP value 1 is configured for the data traffic, the traffic will go to queue 1 instead
of queue 0.
• Similarly, if unicast storm control is enabled on an interface or globally on ingress, and DSCP
marking for a DSCP value 2 is configured for the data traffic, the traffic will go to queue 2 instead
of queue 0.

Note: Bi-directional traffic (unknown unicast and broadcast), along with egress storm
control, causes the configured traffic rates to be split between the involved ports. The
percentage of traffic that each port receives after the split is not predictable. These ports can
be in the same/different port pipes, or the same/different line cards.

show storm-control broadcast

ces Display the storm control broadcast configuration.

Syntax show storm-control broadcast [interface]

Parameters
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following interfaces to display the interface specific storm
control configuration.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by the
slot/port information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet followed
by the slot/port information.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port information.
• Fast Ethernet is not supported.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.5.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 43-1. show storm-control broadcast Command Example (E-Series)

FTOS#show storm-control broadcast gigabitethernet 11/11

Broadcast storm control configuration

Interface Direction Percentage Wred Profile

--------------------------------------------------------------
Gi 11/11 Ingress 5.6

Gi 11/11 Egress 5.6 -

FTOS#

1038 | Storm Control

 Example Figure 43-2. show storm-control broadcast Command Example (C-Series)
FTOS#show storm-control broadcast gigabitethernet 3/24

Broadcast storm control configuration

Interface Direction Packets/Second

-----------------------------------------------
Gi 3/24 Ingress 1000

FTOS#

show storm-control multicast

cs Display the storm control multicast configuration.

Syntax show storm-control multicast [interface]

Parameters
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following interfaces to display the interface specific storm
control configuration.
• For Fast Ethernet, enter the keyword Fastethernet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by the
slot/port information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet followed
by the slot/port information.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series

Example Figure 43-3. show storm-control multicast Command Example

FTOS#show storm-control multicast gigabitethernet 1/0

Multicast storm control configuration

Interface Direction Packets/Second

-----------------------------------------------
Gi 1/0 Ingress 5

FTOS#

Storm Control | 1039

 show storm-control unknown-unicast
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Display the storm control unknown-unicast configuration

Syntax show storm-control unknown-unicast [interface]

Parameters
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following interfaces to display the interface specific storm
control configuration.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by the
slot/port information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet followed
by the slot/port information.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port information.
• Fast Ethernet is not supported.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.10 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.5.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 43-4. show storm-control unknown-unicast Command Example (E-Series)

E-Series
FTOS#show storm-control unknown-unicast gigabitethernet 11/1

Unknown-unicast storm control configuration

Interface Direction Percentage Wred Profile

--------------------------------------------------------------
Gi 11/1 Ingress 5.9 -

Gi 11/1 Egress 5.7 w8

FTOS#

Example Figure 43-5. show storm-control unknown-unicast Command Example (C-Series)

C-Series
FTOS#show storm-control unknown-unicast gigabitethernet 3/0

Unknown-unicast storm control configuration

Interface Direction Packets/Second

-----------------------------------------------
Gi 3/0 Ingress 1000

FTOS#

1040 | Storm Control

storm-control broadcast (Configuration)
ces Configure the percentage of broadcast traffic allowed in or out of the network.

Syntax storm-control broadcast [percentage decimal_value in | out] | [wred-profile name]]

[packets_per_second in]
To disable broadcast rate-limiting, use the storm-control broadcast [percentage decimal_value in
| out] | [wred-profile name]] [packets_per_second in] command.

Parameters
percentage E-Series Only: Enter the percentage of broadcast traffic allowed in or out of the
decimal_value in | out network. Optionally, you can designate a decimal value percentage, for example,
55.5%.
Percentage: 0 to 100
0 % blocks all related traffic
100% allows all traffic into the interface
Decimal Range: .1 to .9
wred-profile name E-Series Only: (Optionally) Enter the keyword wred-profile followed by the
profile name to designate a wred-profile.
packets_per_second C-Series and S-Series Only: Enter the packets per second of broadcast traffic
in allowed into the network.
C-Series and S-Series Range: 0 to 33554431
S60 Range: 0 to 33554368

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 E-Series Only: Added percentage decimal value option
Version 6.5.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Usage Broadcast storm control is valid on Layer 2/Layer 3 interfaces only. Layer 2 broadcast traffic is treated
Information as unknown-unicast traffic.

storm-control broadcast (Interface)

ces Configure the percentage of broadcast traffic allowed on an interface (ingress only).

Syntax storm-control broadcast [percentage decimal_value in] |[wred-profile name]]

[packets_per_second in]
To disable broadcast storm control on the interface, use the no storm-control broadcast
[percentage {decimal_value} in] |[wred-profile name]] [packets_per_second in] command.

Storm Control | 1041

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

percentage E-Series Only: Enter the percentage of broadcast traffic allowed in to the
decimal_value in network. Optionally, you can designate a decimal value percentage, for example,
55.5%.
Percentage: 0 to 100
0 % blocks all related traffic
100% allows all traffic into the interface
Decimal Range: .1 to .9
wred-profile name E-Series Only: (Optionally) Enter the keyword wred-profile followed by the
profile name to designate a wred-profile.
packets_per_second C-Series and S-Series Only: Enter the packets per second of broadcast traffic
in allowed into the network.
C-Series and S-Series Range: 0 to 33554431
S60 Range: 0 to 33554368
The minimum number of PPS limited on the S60 is 2.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-slot/port)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 E-Series Only: Added percentage decimal value option
Version 6.5.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

storm-control multicast (Configuration)

cs Configure the packets per second (pps) of multicast traffic allowed in to the C-Series and S-Series
networks only.

Syntax storm-control multicast packets_per_second in

To disable storm-control for multicast traffic into the network, use the no storm-control multicast
packets_per_second in command.

Parameters
packets_per_second C-Series and S-Series Only: Enter the packets per second of multicast traffic
in allowed into the network followed by the keyword in.
C-Series and S-Series Range: 0 to 33554431
S60 Range: 0 to 33554368
The minimum number of PPS limited on the S60 is 2

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series only

1042 | Storm Control

 Usage Broadcast traffic (all 0xFs) should be counted against broadcast storm control meter, not against the
Information multicast storm control meter. It is possible, however, that some multicast control traffic may get
dropped when storm control thresholds are exceeded.

storm-control multicast (Interface)

cs Configure the percentage of multicast traffic allowed on an C-Series or S-Series interface (ingress
only) network only.

Syntax storm-control multicast packets_per_second in

To disable multicast storm control on the interface, use the no storm-control multicast
packets_per_second in command.

Parameters
packets_per_second C-Series and S-Series Only: Enter the packets per second of broadcast traffic
in allowed into the network.
C-Series and S-Series Range: 0 to 33554431
S60 Range: 0 to 33554368
The minimum number of PPS limited on the S60 is 2

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-slot/port)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series

storm-control unknown-unicast (Configuration)

ces Configure the percentage of unknown-unicast traffic allowed in or out of the network.

Syntax storm-control unknown-unicast [percentage decimal_value [in | out]] | [wred-profile name]]

[packets_per_second in]
To disable storm control for unknown-unicast traffic, use the no storm-control unknown-unicast
[percentage decimal_value [in | out] | [wred-profile name]] [packets_per_second in] command.

Parameters
percentage E-Series Only: Enter the percentage of broadcast traffic allowed in or out of the
decimal_value [in | network. Optionally, you can designate a decimal value percentage, for
out] example, 55.5%.
Percentage: 0 to 100
0 % blocks all related traffic
100% allows all traffic into the interface
Decimal Range: .1 to .9

Storm Control | 1043

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

wred-profile name E-Series Only: (Optionally) Enter the keyword wred-profile followed by the
profile name to designate a wred-profile.
packets_per_second C-Series and S-Series Only: Enter the packets per second of broadcast traffic
in allowed into the network.
Range: 0 to 33554431
The minimum number of PPS limited on the S60 is 2

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 E-Series Only: Added percentage decimal value option
Version 6.5.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Usage Unknown Unicast Storm-Control is valid for Layer 2 and Layer 2/Layer 3 interfaces.
Information

storm-control unknown-unicast (Interface)

ces Configure percentage of unknown-unicast traffic allowed on an interface (ingress only).

Syntax storm-control unknown-unicast [percentage decimal_value in] | [wred-profile name]]

[packets_per_second in]
To disable unknown-unicast storm control on the interface, use the no storm-control
unknown-unicast [percentage decimal_value in] | [wred-profile name]] [packets_per_second
in] command.

Parameters
percentage E-Series Only: Enter the percentage of broadcast traffic allowed in to the
decimal_value in network. Optionally, you can designate a decimal value percentage, for example,
55.5%.
Percentage: 0 to 100
0 % blocks all related traffic
100% allows all traffic into the interface
Decimal Range: .1 to .9
wred-profile name E-Series Only: (Optionally) Enter the keyword wred-profile followed by the
profile name to designate a wred-profile.
packets_per_second C-Series and S-Series Only: Enter the packets per second of broadcast traffic
in allowed into the network.
C-Series and S-Series Range: 0 to 33554431
S60 Range: 0 to 33554368
The minimum number of PPS limited on the S60 is 2

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-slot/port)

1044 | Storm Control

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 E-Series Only: Added percentage decimal value option
Version 6.5.1.0 Introduced on E-Series

Storm Control | 1045

 www.dell.com | dell.com/support

1046
|
Storm Control
 44
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)

Overview
The commands in this chapter configure and monitor the IEEE 802.1d Spanning Tree protocol (STP)
and are supported on all three Dell Networking switch/routing platforms, as indicated by the c, e,
and s characters under the command headings:

Commands
• bridge-priority
• bpdu-destination-mac-address
• debug spanning-tree
• description
• disable
• forward-delay
• hello-time
• max-age
• protocol spanning-tree
• show config
• show spanning-tree 0
• spanning-tree

bridge-priority
ces Set the bridge priority of the switch in an IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree.

Syntax bridge-priority {priority-value | primary | secondary}

To return to the default value, enter no bridge-priority.

Parameters
priority-value Enter a number as the bridge priority value.
Range: 0 to 65535.
Default: 32768.
primary Enter the keyword primary to designate the bridge as the root bridge.
secondary Enter the keyword secondary to designate the bridge as a secondary root
bridge.

Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) | 1047

 Defaults priority-value = 32768
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Command Modes SPANNING TREE (The prompt is “config-stp”.)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

bpdu-destination-mac-address
cs Use the Provider Bridge Group address in Spanning Tree or GVRP PDUs.

Syntax bpdu-destination-mac-address [stp | gvrp] provider-bridge-group

Parameters
xstp Force STP, RSTP, and MSTP to use the Provider Bridge Group address as the
destination MAC address in its BPDUs.
gvrp Forces GVRP to use the Provider Bridge GVRP Address as the destination
MAC address in its PDUs.

Defaults The destination MAC address for BPDUs is the Bridge Group Address.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series.

debug spanning-tree
ces Enable debugging of Spanning Tree Protocol and view information on the protocol.

Syntax debug spanning-tree {stp-id [all | bpdu | config | events | exceptions | general | root] |
protocol}
To disable debugging, enter no debug spanning-tree.

Parameters
stp-id Enter zero (0). The switch supports one Spanning Tree group with a group ID of 0.
protocol Enter the keyword for the type of STP to debug, either mstp, pvst, or rstp.
all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to debug all spanning tree operations.
bpdu (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bpdu to debug Bridge Protocol Data Units.
config (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword config to debug configuration information.
events (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword events to debug STP events.
general (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword general to debug general STP operations.
root (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword root to debug STP root transactions.

1048 | Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage When you enable debug spanning-tree bpdu for multiple interfaces, the software only sends
Information information on BPDUs for the last interface specified.

Related
protocol spanning-tree Enter SPANNING TREE mode on the switch.
Commands

description
ces Enter a description of the Spanning Tree

Syntax description {description}

To remove the description from the Spanning Tree, use the no description {description} command.

Parameters
description Enter a description to identify the Spanning Tree (80 characters maximum).

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes SPANNING TREE (The prompt is “config-stp”.)

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
pre-7.7.1.0 Introduced

Related
protocol spanning-tree Enter SPANNING TREE mode on the switch.
Commands

disable
ces Disable Spanning Tree Protocol globally on the switch.

Syntax disable
To enable Spanning Tree Protocol, enter no disable.

Defaults Enabled (that is, Spanning Tree Protocol is disabled.)

Command Modes SPANNING TREE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) | 1049

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series

pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Related
protocol spanning-tree Enter SPANNING TREE mode.
Commands

forward-delay
ces The amount of time the interface waits in the Listening State and the Learning State before
transitioning to the Forwarding State.

Syntax forward-delay seconds

To return to the default setting, enter no forward-delay.

Parameters
seconds Enter the number of seconds the FTOS waits before transitioning STP to the
forwarding state.
Range: 4 to 30
Default: 15 seconds.

Defaults 15 seconds

Command Modes SPANNING TREE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Related
max-age Change the wait time before STP refreshes protocol configuration information.
Commands
hello-time Change the time interval between BPDUs.

hello-time
ces Set the time interval between generation of Spanning Tree Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs).

Syntax hello-time seconds

To return to the default value, enter no hello-time.

Parameters
seconds Enter a number as the time interval between transmission of BPDUs.
Range: 1 to 10.
Default: 2 seconds.

Defaults 2 seconds

Command Modes SPANNING TREE

1050 | Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)

 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Related
forward-delay Change the wait time before STP transitions to the Forwarding state.
Commands
max-age Change the wait time before STP refreshes protocol configuration information.

max-age
ces Set the time interval for the Spanning Tree bridge to maintain configuration information before
refreshing that information.

Syntax max-age seconds

To return to the default values, enter no max-age.

Parameters
seconds Enter a number of seconds the FTOS waits before refreshing configuration
information.
Range: 6 to 40
Default: 20 seconds.

Defaults 20 seconds

Command Modes SPANNING TREE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Related
forward-delay Change the wait time before STP transitions to the Forwarding state.
Commands
hello-time Change the time interval between BPDUs.

protocol spanning-tree
ces Enter the SPANNING TREE mode to enable and configure the Spanning Tree group.

Syntax protocol spanning-tree stp-id

To disable the Spanning Tree group, enter no protocol spanning-tree stp-id command.

Parameters
stp-id Enter zero (0). FTOS supports one Spanning Tree group, group 0.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) | 1051

 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60

History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 44-1. protocol spanning-tree Command Example

FTOS(conf)#protocol spanning-tree 0
FTOS(config-stp)#

Usage STP is not enabled when you enter the SPANNING TREE mode. To enable STP globally on the
Information switch, enter no disable from the SPANNING TREE mode.

Related
Commands
disable Disable Spanning Tree group 0. To enable Spanning Tree group 0, enter no disable.

show config
ces Display the current configuration for the mode. Only non-default values are displayed.

Syntax show config

Command Modes SPANNING TREE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 44-2. show config Command for the SPANNING TREE Mode
FTOS(config-stp)#show config
protocol spanning-tree 0
no disable
FTOS(config-stp)#

show spanning-tree 0
ces Display the Spanning Tree group configuration and status of interfaces in the Spanning Tree group.

Syntax show spanning-tree 0 [active | brief | interface interface | root | summary]

Parameters
0 Enter 0 (zero) to display information about that specific Spanning Tree group.
active (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword active to display only active interfaces in Spanning
Tree group 0.
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display a synopsis of the Spanning Tree group
configuration information.

1052 | Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)

 interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interface and the type slot/port of the interface you
interface want displayed. Type slot/port options are the following:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by
the slot/port information.
• For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For Port Channel groups, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1-255 for TeraScale
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
root (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword root to display configuration information on the
Spanning Tree group root.
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to only the number of ports in the Spanning
Tree group and their state.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) | 1053

 Example Figure 44-3. show spanning-tree Command Example
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show spann 0
Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol
Bridge Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e800.0a56
Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15
We are the root of the spanning tree
Current root has priority 32768 address 0001.e800.0a56
Topology change flag set, detected flag set
Number of topology changes 1 last change occurred 0:00:05 ago
from GigabitEthernet 1/3
Timers: hold 1, topology change 35
hello 2, max age 20, forward_delay 15
Times: hello 1, topology change 1, notification 0, aging 2

Port 26 (GigabitEthernet 1/1) is Forwarding

Port path cost 4, Port priority 8, Port Identifier 8.26
Designated root has priority 32768, address 0001.e800.0a56
Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e800.0a56
Designated port id is 8.26, designated path cost 0
Timers: message age 0, forward_delay 0, hold 0
Number of transitions to forwarding state 1
BPDU: sent:18, received 0
The port is not in the portfast mode

Port 27 (GigabitEthernet 1/2) is Forwarding

Port path cost 4, Port priority 8, Port Identifier 8.27
Designated root has priority 32768, address 0001.e800.0a56
Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e800.0a56
Designated port id is 8.27, designated path cost 0
Timers: message age 0, forward_delay 0, hold 0
Number of transitions to forwarding state 1
BPDU: sent:18, received 0
The port is not in the portfast mode

Port 28 (GigabitEthernet 1/3) is Forwarding

Port path cost 4, Port priority 8, Port Identifier 8.28
Designated root has priority 32768, address 0001.e800.0a56
Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e800.0a56
Designated port id is 8.28, designated path cost 0
Timers: message age 0, forward_delay 0, hold 0
Number of transitions to forwarding state 1
BPDU: sent:31, received 0
The port is not in the portfast mode

FTOS#

Table 44-1. show spanning-tree Command Example Information

Field Description
“Bridge Identifier.” Lists the bridge priority and the MAC address for this STP
bridge.
“Configured hello...” Displays the settings for hello time, max age, and forward
delay.
“We are...” States whether this bridge is the root bridge for the STG.
“Current root...” Lists the bridge priority and MAC address for the root
bridge.
“Topology flag.” States whether the topology flag and the detected flag were
set.
“Number of...” Displays the number of topology changes, the time of the
last topology change, and on what interface the topology
change occurred.

1054 | Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)

 Table 44-1. show spanning-tree Command Example Information (continued)

Field Description
“Timers” Lists the values for the following bridge timers:
• hold time
• topology change
• hello time
• max age
• forward delay
“Times” List the number of seconds since the last:
• hello time
• topology change
• notification
• aging
“Port 1...” Displays the Interface type slot/port information and the
status of the interface (Disabled or Enabled).
“Port path...” Displays the path cost, priority, and identifier for the
interface.
“Designated root...” Displays the priority and MAC address of the root bridge of
the STG that the interface belongs.
“Designated port...” Displays the designated port ID

Figure 44-4. show spanning-tree brief Command Example

FTOS#show span 0 brief
Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol
Root ID Priority 32768
Address 0001.e800.0a56
Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15
Bridge ID Priority 32768,
Address 0001.e800.0a56
Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15
Interface Designated
Name PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Bridge ID PortID
-------------- ------ ---- ---- --- ----- ----------------- ------
Gi 1/1 8.26 8 4 FWD 0 32768 0001.e800.0a56 8.26
Gi 1/2 8.27 8 4 FWD 0 32768 0001.e800.0a56 8.27
Gi 1/3 8.28 8 4 FWD 0 32768 0001.e800.0a56 8.28
FTOS#

Usage You must enable Spanning Tree group 0 prior to using this command.
Information

spanning-tree
ces Configure Spanning Tree group id, cost, priority, and Portfast for an interface.

Syntax spanning-tree stp-id [cost cost] [portfast [bpduguard]] [priority priority]

To disable Spanning Tree group on an interface, use the no spanning-tree stp-id [cost cost]
[portfast [bpduguard] [shutdown-on-violation]] [priority priority] command.

Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) | 1055

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

stp-id Enter the Spanning Tree Protocol group ID.

Range: 0
cost cost (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword cost followed by a number as the cost.
Range: 1 to 65535
Defaults:
100 Mb/s Ethernet interface = 19
1-Gigabit Ethernet interface = 4
10-Gigabit Ethernet interface = 2
Port Channel interface with 100 Mb/s Ethernet = 18
Port Channel interface with 1-Gigabit Ethernet = 3
Port Channel interface with 10-Gigabit Ethernet = 1
priority priority (OPTIONAL) Enter keyword priority followed by a number as the priority.
Range: zero (0) to 15.
Default: 8
portfast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword portfast to enable Portfast to move the interface into
[bpduguard] forwarding mode immediately after the root fails.
Enter the keyword bpduguard to disable the port when it receives a BPDU.
shutdown-on-v (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword shutdown-on-violation to hardware disable an
iolation interface when a BPDU is received and the port is disabled.

Defaults cost = depends on the interface type; priority = 8

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced hardware shutdown-on-violation option
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced

Usage If you enable portfast bpduguard on an interface and the interface receives a BPDU, the software
Information disables the interface and sends a message stating that fact. The port is in ERR_DISABLE mode, yet
appears in the show interface commands as enabled.

If shutdown-on-violation is not enabled, BPDUs will still be sent to the RPM CPU.

1056 | Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)

 45
Time and Network Time Protocol (NTP)

Overview
The commands in this chapter configure time values on the system, either using FTOS, or the
hardware, or using the Network Time Protocol (NTP). With NTP, the switch can act only as a client to
an NTP clock host. For details, see the “Network Time Protocol” section of the Management chapter in
the FTOS Configuration Guide.

The commands in this chapter are generally supported on the C-Series, E-Series, and S-Series, with
some exceptions, as noted in the Command History fields and by these symbols under the command
headings: c e s

Commands
• calendar set
• clock read-calendar
• clock set
• clock summer-time date
• clock summer-time recurring
• clock timezone
• clock update-calendar
• debug ntp
• ntp authenticate
• ntp authentication-key
• ntp broadcast client
• ntp disable
• ntp multicast client
• ntp server
• ntp source
• ntp trusted-key
• ntp update-calendar
• show calendar
• show clock
• show ntp associations
• show ntp status

Time and Network Time Protocol (NTP) | 1057

 calendar set
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Set the time and date for the switch hardware clock.

Syntax calendar set time month day year

Parameters
time Enter the time in hours:minutes:seconds. For the hour variable, use the 24-hour format, for
example, 17:15:00 is 5:15 pm.
month Enter the name of one of the 12 months in English.
You can enter the name of a day to change the order of the display to time day month
year.
day Enter the number of the day.
Range: 1 to 31.
You can enter the name of a month to change the order of the display to time day month
year.
year Enter a four-digit number as the year.
Range: 1993 to 2035.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 45-1. calendar set Command Example

FTOS#calendar set 08:55:00 june 18 2006
FTOS#

Usage You can change the order of the month and day parameters to enter the time and date as time day
Information month year.

In the switch, the hardware clock is separate from the software and is called the calendar. This
hardware clock runs continuously. After the hardware clock (the calendar) is set, the FTOS
automatically updates the software clock after system bootup.You cannot delete the hardware clock
(calendar).

To manually update the software with the hardware clock, use the command clock read-calendar.

Related
clock read-calendar Set the software clock based on the hardware clock.
Commands
clock set Set the software clock.
clock update-calendar Set the hardware clock based on the software clock.
show clock Display clock settings.

1058 | Time and Network Time Protocol (NTP)

clock read-calendar
ces Set the software clock on the switch from the information set in hardware clock (calendar).

Syntax clock read-calendar

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage In the switch, the hardware clock is separate from the software and is called the calendar. This
Information hardware clock runs continuously. After the hardware clock (the calendar) is set, the FTOS
automatically updates the software clock after system bootup.

You cannot delete this command (that is, there is not a “no” version of this command).

clock set
ces Set the software clock in the switch.

Syntax clock set time month day year

Parameters
time Enter the time in hours:minutes:seconds. For the hour variable, use the 24-hour format, example,
17:15:00 is 5:15 pm.
month Enter the name of one of the 12 months, in English.
You can enter the number of a day and change the order of the display to time day month year.
day Enter the number of the day.
Range: 1 to 31.
You can enter the name of a month to change the order of the display to time month day year.
year Enter a four-digit number as the year.
Range: 1993 to 2035.

Defaults Not configured

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Time and Network Time Protocol (NTP) | 1059

 Example Figure 45-2. clock set Command Example
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#clock set 16:20:00 19 may 2001

FTOS#

Usage You can change the order of the month and day parameters to enter the time and date as time day
Information month year. You cannot delete the software clock.

The software clock runs only when the software is up. The clock restarts, based on the hardware clock,
when the switch reboots.

Dell Networking recommends that you use an outside time source, such as NTP, to ensure accurate
time on the switch.

Related
ntp update-calendar Set the switch using the NTP settings.
Commands

clock summer-time date

ces Set a date (and time zone) on which to convert the switch to daylight savings time on a one-time basis.

Syntax clock summer-time time-zone date start-month start-day start-year start-time end-month end-day
end-year end-time [offset]

To delete a daylight savings time zone configuration, enter no clock summer-time.

Parameters
time-zone Enter the three-letter name for the time zone. This name is displayed in the show clock
output.
start-month Enter the name of one of the 12 months in English.
You can enter the name of a day to change the order of the display to time day month
year.
start-day Enter the number of the day.
Range: 1 to 31.
You can enter the name of a month to change the order of the display to time day month
year.
start-year Enter a four-digit number as the year.
Range: 1993 to 2035.
start-time Enter the time in hours:minutes. For the hour variable, use the 24-hour format, example,
17:15 is 5:15 pm.
end-day Enter the number of the day.
Range: 1 to 31.
You can enter the name of a month to change the order of the display to time day month
year.
end-month Enter the name of one of the 12 months in English.
You can enter the name of a day to change the order of the display to time day month
year.
end-time Enter the time in hours:minutes. For the hour variable, use the 24-hour format, example,
17:15 is 5:15 pm.

1060 | Time and Network Time Protocol (NTP)

 end-year Enter a four-digit number as the year.
Range: 1993 to 2035.
offset (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of minutes to add during the summer-time period.
Range: 1 to1440.
Default: 60 minutes

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Related
calendar set Set the hardware clock.
Commands
clock summer-time recurring Set a date (and time zone) on which to convert the switch to daylight savings
time each year.
show clock Display the current clock settings.

clock summer-time recurring

ces Set the software clock to convert to daylight savings time on a specific day each year.

Syntax clock summer-time time-zone recurring [start-week start-day start-month start-time end-week
end-day end-month end-time [offset]]
To delete a daylight savings time zone configuration, enter no clock summer-time.

Parameters
time-zone Enter the three-letter name for the time zone. This name is displayed in the show clock
output.
You can enter up to eight characters.
start-week (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following as the week that daylight savings begins and then
enter values for start-day through end-time:
• week-number: Enter a number from 1-4 as the number of the week in the month to
start daylight savings time.
• first: Enter this keyword to start daylight savings time in the first week of the month.
• last: Enter this keyword to start daylight savings time in the last week of the month.
start-day Enter the name of the day that you want daylight saving time to begin. Use English three
letter abbreviations, for example, Sun, Sat, Mon, etc.
Range: Sun – Sat
start-month Enter the name of one of the 12 months in English.
start-time Enter the time in hours:minutes. For the hour variable, use the 24-hour format, example,
17:15 is 5:15 pm.

Time and Network Time Protocol (NTP) | 1061

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

end-week Enter the one of the following as the week that daylight savings ends:
• week-number: enter a number from 1-4 as the number of the week to end daylight
savings time.
• first: enter the keyword first to end daylight savings time in the first week of the
month.
• last: enter the keyword last to end daylight savings time in the last week of the month.
end-day Enter the weekday name that you want daylight saving time to end. Enter the weekdays
using the three letter abbreviations, for example Sun, Sat, Mon etc.
Range: Sun to Sat
end-month Enter the name of one of the 12 months in English.
end-time Enter the time in hours:minutes:seconds. For the hour variable, use the 24-hour format,
example, 17:15:00 is 5:15 pm.
offset (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of minutes to add during the summer-time period.
Range: 1 to 1440.
Default: 60 minutes.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Updated the start-day and end-day options to allow for using the three-letter
abbreviation of the weekday name.
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Related
calendar set Set the hardware clock.
Commands
clock summer-time date Set a date (and time zone) on which to convert the switch to daylight savings
time on a one-time basis.
show clock Display the current clock settings.

clock timezone
ces Configure a timezone for the switch.

Syntax clock timezone timezone-name offset

To delete a timezone configuration, enter no clock timezone.

Parameters
timezone-name Enter the name of the timezone. You cannot use spaces.
offset Enter one of the following:
• a number from 1 to 23 as the number of hours in addition to UTC for the
timezone.
• a minus sign (-) followed by a number from 1 to 23 as the number of hours

Default Not configured.

1062 | Time and Network Time Protocol (NTP)

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) is the time standard based on the International Atomic Time
Information standard, commonly known as Greenwich Mean time. When determining system time, you must
include the differentiator between UTC and your local timezone. For example, San Jose, CA is the
Pacific Timezone with a UTC offset of -8.

clock update-calendar
ces Set the switch hardware clock based on the software clock.

Syntax clock update-calendar

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage Use this command only if you are sure that the hardware clock is inaccurate and the software clock is
Information correct. You cannot delete this command (that is, there is not a “no” form of this command).

Related
calendar set Set the hardware clock.
Commands

debug ntp
ces Display Network Time Protocol (NTP) transactions and protocol messages for troubleshooting.

Syntax debug ntp {adjust | all | authentication | events | loopfilter | packets | select | sync}
To disable debugging of NTP transactions, use the no debug ntp {adjust | all | authentication |
events | loopfilter | packets | select | sync} command.

Parameters
adjust Enter the keyword adjust to display information on NTP clock adjustments.
all Enter the keyword all to display information on all NTP transactions.
authentication Enter the keyword authentication to display information on NTP authentication
transactions.
events Enter the keyword events to display information on NTP events.
loopfilter Enter the keyword loopfilter to display information on NTP local clock frequency.

Time and Network Time Protocol (NTP) | 1063

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

packets Enter the keyword packets to display information on NTP packets.

select Enter the keyword select to display information on the NTP clock selection.
sync Enter the keyword sync to display information on the NTP clock synchronization.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

ntp authenticate
ces Enable authentication of NTP traffic between the switch and the NTP time serving hosts.

Syntax ntp authenticate

To disable NTP authentication, enter no ntp authentication.

Defaults Not enabled.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage You also must configure an authentication key for NTP traffic using the ntp authentication-key
Information command.

Related
ntp authentication-key Configure authentication key for NTP traffic.
Commands
ntp trusted-key Configure a key to authenticate

ntp authentication-key
ces Specify a key for authenticating the NTP server.

Syntax ntp authentication-key number md5 [0 | 7] key

Parameters
number Specify a number for the authentication key.
Range: 1 to 4294967295.
This number must be the same as the number parameter configured in the ntp trusted-key
command.
md5 Specify that the authentication key will be encrypted using MD5 encryption algorithm.
0 Specify that authentication key will be entered in an unencrypted format (default).

1064 | Time and Network Time Protocol (NTP)

 7 Specify that the authentication key will be entered in DES encrypted format.
key Enter the authentication key in the previously specified format.

Defaults NTP authentication is not configured by default. If you do not specify the option [0 | 7], 0 is selected by
default.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Added options [0 | 7] for entering authentication key.
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage After configuring the ntp authentication-key command, configure the ntp trusted-key command to
Information complete NTP authentication.

FTOS versions 8.2.1.0 and later use an encryption algorithm to store the authentication key that is
different from previous FTOS versions; beginning in version 8.2.1.0, FTOS uses DES encryption to
store the key in the startup-config when you enter the command ntp authentication-key. Therefore,
if your system boots with a startup-configuration from an FTOS versions prior to 8.2.1.0 in which you
have configured ntp authentication-key, the system cannot correctly decrypt the key, and cannot
authenticate NTP packets. In this case you must re-enter this command and save the running-config to
the startup-config.

Related
ntp authenticate Enables NTP authentication.
Commands
ntp trusted-key Configure a trusted key.

ntp broadcast client

ces Set up the interface to receive NTP broadcasts from a Dell Networking switch/router acting as an NTP
server.

Syntax ntp broadcast client

To disable broadcast, enter no ntp broadcast client.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Time and Network Time Protocol (NTP) | 1065

 ntp disable
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Prevent an interface from receiving NTP packets.

Syntax ntp disable

To re-enable NTP on an interface, enter no ntp disable.

Default Disabled (that is, if an NTP host is configured, all interfaces receive NTP packets)

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

ntp multicast client

e Configure the switch to receive NTP information from the network via multicast.

Syntax ntp multicast client [multicast-address]

To disable multicast reception, use the no ntp multicast client [multicast-address] command.

Parameters
multicast-address (OPTIONAL) Enter a multicast address. If you do not enter a multicast address,
the address 224.0.1.1 is configured.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series
History

ntp server
ces Configure an NTP time-serving host.

Syntax ntp server address [key keyid] [prefer] [version number]

To delete an NTP server configuration, use the no ntp server ip-address command.

Parameters
address Enter either an IP address, in dotted decimal format, of the NTP time server, or enter the
name of the server associated with the IP address.
key keyid (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword key and a number as the NTP peer key.
Range: 1 to 4294967295

1066 | Time and Network Time Protocol (NTP)

 prefer (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword prefer to indicate that this peer has priority over other
servers.
version (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword version and a number to correspond to the NTP
number version used on the server.
Range: 1 to 3

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage You can configure multiple time serving hosts (up to 250). From these time serving hosts, the FTOS
Information will choose one NTP host with which to synchronize. Use the show ntp associations to determine
which server was selected.

Since a large number of polls to NTP hosts can impact network performance, Dell Networking
recommends that you limit the number of hosts configured.

Related
show ntp associations Displays NTP servers configured and their status.
Commands

ntp source
ces Specify an interface’s IP address to be included in the NTP packets.

Syntax ntp source interface

To delete the configuration, enter no ntp source.

Parameters
interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For an 100/1000 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by
the slot/port information.
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by
the slot/port information.
• For Loopback interfaces, enter the keyword loopback followed by a number from
zero (0) to 16383.
• For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword lag followed by a number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale
• For SONET interface types, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.

Defaults Not configured.

Time and Network Time Protocol (NTP) | 1067

 Command Modes CONFIGURATION
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

ntp trusted-key
ces Set a key to authenticate the system to which NTP will synchronize.

Syntax ntp trusted-key number

To delete the key, use the no ntp trusted-key number command.

Parameters
number Enter a number as the trusted key ID.
Range: 1 to 4294967295.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Usage The number parameter in the ntp trusted-key command must be the same number as the number
Information parameter in the ntp authentication-key command. If you change the ntp authentication-key command,
you must also change the ntp trusted-key command.

Related
ntp authentication-key Set an authentication key for NTP.
Commands
ntp authenticate Enable the NTP authentication parameters you set.

ntp update-calendar
ces Configure the FTOS to update the calendar (the hardware clock) with the NTP-derived time.

Syntax ntp update-calendar [minutes]

To return to default setting, enter no ntp update-calendar.

Parameters
minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of minutes between updates from NTP to the hardware
clock.
Range: 1 to 1440.
Default: 60 minutes.

Defaults Not enabled.

1068 | Time and Network Time Protocol (NTP)

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

show calendar
ces Display the current date and time based on the switch hardware clock.

Syntax show calendar

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 45-3. show calendar Command Example

FTOS#show calendar
16:33:30 UTC Tue Jun 26 2001
FTOS#

Related
show clock Display the time and date from the switch software clock.
Commands

show clock
ces Display the current clock settings.

Syntax show clock [detail]

Parameters
detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to view the source information of the clock.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Time and Network Time Protocol (NTP) | 1069

 Example Figure 45-4. show clock Command Example
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show clock
11:05:56.949 UTC Thu Oct 25 2001
FTOS#

Example Figure 45-5. show clock detail Command Example

FTOS#show clock detail
12:18:10.691 UTC Wed Jan 7 2009
Time source is RTC hardware
Summer time starts 02:00:00 UTC Sun Mar 8 2009
Summer time ends 02:00:00 ABC Sun Nov 1 2009
FTOS#

Related
clock summer-time recurring Display the time and date from the switch hardware clock.
Commands
show calendar Display the time and date from the switch hardware clock.

show ntp associations

ces Display the NTP master and peers.

Syntax show ntp associations

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 45-6. show ntp associations Command Example

FTOS#show ntp associations
remote ref clock st when poll reach delay offset disp
==========================================================================
10.10.120.5 0.0.0.0 16 - 256 0 0.00 0.000 16000.0
*172.16.1.33 127.127.1.0 11 6 16 377 -0.08 -1499.9 104.16
172.31.1.33 0.0.0.0 16 - 256 0 0.00 0.000 16000.0
192.200.0.2 0.0.0.0 16 - 256 0 0.00 0.000 16000.0
* master (synced), # master (unsynced), + selected, - candidate
FTOS#

1070 | Time and Network Time Protocol (NTP)

 Table 45-1. show ntp associations Command Fields

Field Description
(none) One or more of the following symbols could be displayed:
• * means synchronized to this peer
• # means almost synchronized to this peer
• + means the peer was selected for possible synchronization
• - means the peer is a candidate for selection
• ~ means the peer is statically configured
remote Displays the remote IP address of the NTP peer.
ref clock Displays the IP address of the remote peer’s reference clock.
st Displays the peer’s stratum, that is, the number of hops away from the external time source. A
16 in this column means the NTP peer cannot reach the time source.
when Displays the last time the switch received an NTP packet.
poll Displays the polling interval (in seconds).
reach Displays the reachability to the peer (in octal bitstream).
delay Displays the time interval or delay for a packet to complete a round-trip to the NTP time source
(in milliseconds).
offset Displays the relative time of the NTP peer’s clock to the switch clock (in milliseconds).
disp Displays the dispersion.

Related
show ntp status Display current NTP status.
Commands

show ntp status

ces Display the current NTP status.

Syntax show ntp status

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 45-7. show ntp status Command Example

FTOS#show ntp status
Clock is synchronized, stratum 2, reference is 100.10.10.10
frequency is -32.000 ppm, stability is 15.156 ppm, precision is 4294967290
reference time is BC242FD5.C7C5C000 (10:15:49.780 UTC Mon Jan 10 2000)
clock offset is clock offset msec, root delay is 0.01656 sec
root dispersion is 0.39694 sec, peer dispersion is peer dispersion msec
peer mode is client
FTOS#

Time and Network Time Protocol (NTP) | 1071

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Table 45-2. show ntp status Command Example Information

Field Description
“Clock is...” States whether or not the switch clock is synchronized,
which NTP stratum the system is assigned and the IP
address of the NTP peer.
“frequency is...” Displays the frequency (in ppm), stability (in ppm) and
precision (in Hertz) of the clock in this system.
“reference time is...” Displays the reference time stamp.
“clock offset is...” Displays the system offset to the synchronized peer and
the time delay on the path to the NTP root clock.
“root dispersion is...” Displays the root and path dispersion.
“peer mode is...” State what NTP mode the switch is. This should be
client mode.

Related
show ntp associations Display information on NTP master and peer configurations.
Commands

1072 | Time and Network Time Protocol (NTP)

 46
S60 u-Boot

Overview
All commands in this chapter are in u-Boot. These commands are supported on the only.
To access this mode, hit any key when the following line appears on the console during a system boot:
Hit any key to stop autoboot:
You enter u-Boot immediately, as indicated by the => prompt.

Note: This chapter discusses only a few commands available in uBoot. The commands
included here are those that are comparable to those found in the Boot User mode on other
S-Series systems.

Commands
• printenv
• reset
• save
• setenv

Note: You cannot use the Tab key to complete commands in this mode.

printenv
Display the current system boot variable and other system settings.

Syntax printenv

Command Modes uBoot

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History

S60 u-Boot | 1073

 Example => printenv
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

baudrate=9600
uboot_filesize=0x80000
bootfile=FTOS-SC-1.2.0.0E3.bin
bootcmd=echo Booting primary bootline....;$primary_boot;boot;echo
Failed;echo Booting secondary bootline....;$secondary_boot;boot;echo
Failed;echo Booting default bootline....;$default_boot;boot;echo Failed;echo
Rebooting...;reset
bootdelay=5
loads_echo=1
rootpath=/opt/nfsroot
hostname=unknown
loadaddr=640000
ftpuser=FTOS
ftppasswd=FTOS
uboot=u-boot.bin
tftpflash=tftpboot $loadaddr $uboot; protect off 0xfff80000 +$filesize;
erase 0x
fff80000 +$filesize; cp.b $loadaddr 0xfff80000 $filesize; protect on
0xfff80000
+$filesize; cmp.b $loadaddr 0xfff80000 $filesize
ethact=eTSEC1
ethaddr=00:01:E8:82:09:B2
serverip=10.11.9.4

primary_boot=f10boot tftp://10.11.9.2/si-s60-40g
secondary_boot=f10boot flash0 MAC Address
default_boot=f10boot tftp://192.168.128.1/FTOS-SC-1.2.0.0E3.bin

gatewayip=10.11.192.254

ipaddr=10.11.198.114 Boot
Variables
netmask=255.255.0.0
mgmtautoneg=true Default Gateway Address
mgmtspeed100=true
mgmtfullduplex=true Management IP Address
stdin=serial
stdout=serial
stderr=serial
Environment size: 1002/8188 bytes
=>

reset
Reload the S60 system.

Syntax reset

Command Modes uBoot

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History

1074 | S60 u-Boot

 Usage You must save your changes before resetting the system, or all changes will be lost.
Information

save
Save configurations created in uBoot.

Syntax save

Command Modes uBoot

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History

Usage You must save your changes before resetting the system, or all changes will be lost.
Information

setenv
Configure system settings.

Syntax setenv [gatewayip address | primary_image f10boot location | secondary_image f10boot

location | default_image f10boot location | ipaddr address | ethaddr address |
enablepwdignore | stconfigignore]

Parameters
gatewayip address Enter the IP address for the default gateway.
primary_image Enter the keywords primary_image to configure the boot parameters
used in the first attempt to boot FTOS.
secondary_image Enter the keywords secondary_image to configure boot parameters
used if the primary operating system boot selection is not available.
default_image Enter the keywords default_image to configure boot parameters used if
the secondary operating system boot parameter selection is not available.
The default location should always be the internal flash device (flash:), and
a verified image should be stored there.
location Enter the location of the image file to be loaded. The keyword f10boot must
precede the location when using this command. For example,
primary_image f10boot tftp://10.10.10.10/server
ipaddr Enter the keyword ipaddr to configure the system management IP
address.
ethaddr Enter the keyword ethaddr to configure system management MAC
address.
address Enter the IP address in standard IPv4 format and the MAC address in
standard MAC format.
enablepwdignore Enter the keywords enablepwdignore true to reload the system
software without the enable password configured.
stconfigignore Enter the keywords stconfigignore true ignore the startup
configuration file when reloading the system.

S60 u-Boot | 1075

 Command Modes uBoot
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History

1076 | S60 u-Boot

 47
Uplink Failure Detection (UFD)

Overview
Uplink Failure Detection (UFD) provides detection of the loss of upstream connectivity and, if used
with NIC teaming, automatic recovery from a failed link.

Uplink Failure Detection is supported on the following platforms: s (S50), , and

Commands
• clear ufd-disable
• debug uplink-state-group
• description
• downstream
• downstream auto-recover
• downstream disable links
• enable
• show running-config uplink-state-group
• show uplink-state-group
• uplink-state-group
• upstream

clear ufd-disable
s (S50) Re-enable one or more downstream interfaces on the switch/router that are in a UFD-disabled error
state so that an interface can send and receive traffic.

Syntax clear ufd-disable {interface interface | uplink-state-group group-id}

Uplink Failure Detection (UFD) | 1077

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

interface interface Specifies one or more downstream interfaces.

For interface, enter one of the following interface types:
• Fast Ethernet: fastethernet {slot/port | slot/port-range}
• 1-Gigabit Ethernet: gigabitethernet {slot/port |slot/port-range}
• 10-Gigabit Ethernet: tengigabitethernet {slot/port |slot/port-range}
• Port channel: port-channel {1-512 | port-channel-range}
Where port-range and port-channel-range specify a range of ports
separated by a dash (-) and/or individual ports/port channels in any
order; for example:
gigabitethernet 1/1-2,5,9,11-12
port-channel 1-3,5
A comma is required to separate each port and port-range entry.
uplink-state-group Re-enables all UFD-disabled downstream interfaces in the group. Valid
group-id group-id values are 1 to 16.

Defaults A downstream interface in an uplink-state group that has been disabled by UFD is disabled and in a
UFD-disabled error state.

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.12.0 Introduced on S4810
History
Version 8.4.2.3 Introduced on the S-Series S50.

Related
downstream Assign a port or port-channel to the uplink-state group as a downstream
Commands
interface.
uplink-state-group Create an uplink-state group and enabling the tracking of upstream links.

debug uplink-state-group
s (S50) Enable debug messages for events related to a specified uplink-state group or all groups.

Syntax debug uplink-state-group [group-id]

Parameters
group-id Enables debugging on the specified uplink-state group. Valid group-id values are 1 to
16.

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.12.0 Introduced on S4810
History
Version 8.4.2.3 Introduced on the S-Series S50.

Usage To turn off debugging event messages, enter the no debug uplink-state-group [group-id] command.
Information

1078 | Uplink Failure Detection (UFD)

 Related
clear ufd-disable Re-enable downstream interfaces that are in a UFD-disabled error state.
Commands

description
s (S50) Enter a text description of an uplink-state group.

Syntax description text

Parameters
text Text description of the uplink-state group.
Maximum length: 80 alphanumeric characters.

Defaults None

Command Modes UPLINK-STATE-GROUP

Command
Version 8.3.12.0 Introduced on S4810
History
Version 8.4.2.3 Introduced on the S-Series S50.

Related
uplink-state-group Create an uplink-state group and enabling the tracking of upstream links.
Commands

Example FTOS(conf-uplink-state-group-16)# description test

FTOS(conf-uplink-state-group-16)#

downstream
s (S50) Assign a port or port-channel to the uplink-state group as a downstream interface.

Syntax downstream interface

Parameters
interface Enter one of the following interface types:
• Fast Ethernet: fastethernet {slot/port | slot/port-range}
• 1-Gigabit Ethernet: gigabitethernet {slot/port | slot/port-range}
• 10-Gigabit Ethernet: tengigabitethernet {slot/port |slot/port-range}
• Port channel: port-channel {1-512 | port-channel-range}
Where port-range and port-channel-range specify a range of ports separated by a
dash (-) and/or individual ports/port channels in any order; for example:
gigabitethernet 1/1-2,5,9,11-12
port-channel 1-3,5
A comma is required to separate each port and port-range entry.

Defaults None

Uplink Failure Detection (UFD) | 1079

 Command Modes UPLINK-STATE-GROUP
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Command
Version 8.3.12.0 Introduced on S4810
History
Version 8.4.2.3 Introduced on the S-Series S50.

Usage You can assign physical port or port-channel interfaces to an uplink-state group.
Information
You can assign an interface to only one uplink-state group. Each interface assigned to an uplink-state
group must be configured as either an upstream or downstream interface, but not both.

You can assign individual member ports of a port channel to the group. An uplink-state group can
contain either the member ports of a port channel or the port channel itself, but not both.

To delete an uplink-state group, enter the no downstream interface command.

Related
upstream Assign a port or port-channel to the uplink-state group as an upstream interface.
Commands
uplink-state-group Create an uplink-state group and enabling the tracking of upstream links.

downstream auto-recover
s (S50) Enable auto-recovery so that UFD-disabled downstream ports in an uplink-state group automatically
come up when a disabled upstream port in the group comes back up.

Syntax downstream auto-recover

Defaults The auto-recovery of UFD-disabled downstream ports is enabled.

Command Modes UPLINK-STATE-GROUP

Command
Version 8.3.12.0 Introduced on S4810
History
Version 8.4.2.3 Introduced on the S-Series S50.

Usage To disable auto-recovery on downstream links, enter the no downstream auto-recover command.
Information

Related
downstream Assign a port or port-channel to the uplink-state group as a downstream
Commands
interface.
uplink-state-group Create an uplink-state group and enabling the tracking of upstream links.

downstream disable links

s (S50) Configure the number of downstream links in the uplink-state group that will be disabled if one
upstream link in an uplink-state group goes down.

1080 | Uplink Failure Detection (UFD)

 Syntax downstream disable links {number |all}

Parameters
number Enter the number of downstream links to be brought down by UFD.
Range: 1 to 1024.
all Brings down all downstream links in the group.

Defaults No downstream links are disabled when an upstream link in an uplink-state group goes down.

Command Modes UPLINK-STATE-GROUP

Command
Version 8.3.12.0 Introduced on S4810
History
Version 8.4.2.3 Introduced on the S-Series S50.

Usage A user-configurable number of downstream interfaces in an uplink-state group are put into a link-down
Information state with an UFD-Disabled error message when one upstream interface in an uplink-state group goes
down.

If all upstream interfaces in an uplink-state group go down, all downstream interfaces in the same
uplink-state group are put into a link-down state.

To revert to the default setting, enter the no downstream disable links command.

Related
downstream Assign a port or port-channel to the uplink-state group as a downstream
Commands
interface.
uplink-state-group Create an uplink-state group and enabling the tracking of upstream links.

enable
s (S50) Enable uplink state group tracking for a specific Uplink Failure Detection (UFD) group.

Syntax enable

Defaults Upstream-link tracking is automatically enabled in an uplink-state group.

Command Modes UPLINK-STATE-GROUP

Command
Version 8.3.12.0 Introduced on S4810
History
Version 8.4.2.3 Introduced on the S-Series S50.

Usage To disable upstream-link tracking without deleting the uplink-state group, enter the no enable
Information command.

Related
uplink-state-group Create an uplink-state group and enabling the tracking of upstream links.
Commands

Uplink Failure Detection (UFD) | 1081

 show running-config uplink-state-group
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

s (S50) Display the current configuration of one or more uplink-state groups.

Syntax show running-config uplink-state-group [group-id]

Parameters
group-id Displays the current configuration of all uplink-state groups or a specified
group. Valid group-id values are 1 to 16.

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.12.0 Introduced on S4810
History
Version 8.4.2.3 Introduced on the S-Series S50.

Example FTOS#show running-config uplink-state-group

!
no enable
uplink state track 1
downstream GigabitEthernet 0/2,4,6,11-19
upstream TengigabitEthernet 0/48, 52
upstream PortChannel 1
!
uplink state track 2
downstream GigabitEthernet 0/1,3,5,7-10
upstream TengigabitEthernet 0/56,60

Related
show uplink-state-group Display status information on a specified uplink-state group or all groups.
Commands
uplink-state-group Create an uplink-state group and enabling the tracking of upstream links.

show uplink-state-group
s (S50) Display status information on a specified uplink-state group or all groups.

Syntax show uplink-state-group [group-id] [detail]

Parameters
group-id Displays status information on a specified uplink-state group or all groups.
Valid group-id values are 1 to 16.
detail Displays additional status information on the upstream and downstream
interfaces in each group

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC

1082 | Uplink Failure Detection (UFD)

 EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.12.0 Introduced on S4810
History
Version 8.4.2.3 Introduced on the S-Series S50.

Example FTOS# show uplink-state-group

Uplink State Group: 1 Status: Enabled, Up

Uplink State Group: 3 Status: Enabled, Up
Uplink State Group: 5 Status: Enabled, Down
Uplink State Group: 6 Status: Enabled, Up
Uplink State Group: 7 Status: Enabled, Up
Uplink State Group: 16 Status: Disabled, Up

FTOS# show uplink-state-group 16

Uplink State Group: 16 Status: Disabled, Up

FTOS#show uplink-state-group detail

(Up): Interface up (Dwn): Interface down (Dis): Interface disabled

Uplink State Group : 1 Status: Enabled, Up

Upstream Interfaces :
Downstream Interfaces :

Uplink State Group : 3 Status: Enabled, Up

Upstream Interfaces : Gi 0/46(Up) Gi 0/47(Up)
Downstream Interfaces : Te 13/0(Up) Te 13/1(Up) Te 13/3(Up) Te 13/5(Up) Te 13/6(Up)

Uplink State Group : 5 Status: Enabled, Down

Upstream Interfaces : Gi 0/0(Dwn) Gi 0/3(Dwn) Gi 0/5(Dwn)
Downstream Interfaces : Te 13/2(Dis) Te 13/4(Dis) Te 13/11(Dis) Te 13/12(Dis) Te 13/13(Dis) Te 13/14(Dis) Te 13/15(Dis)

Uplink State Group : 6 Status: Enabled, Up

Upstream Interfaces :
Downstream Interfaces :

Uplink State Group : 7 Status: Enabled, Up

Upstream Interfaces :
Downstream Interfaces :

Uplink State Group : 16 Status: Disabled, Up

Upstream Interfaces : Gi 0/41(Dwn) Po 8(Dwn)
Downstream Interfaces : Gi 0/40(Dwn)

Related
show running-config Display the current configuration of one or more uplink-state groups.
Commands
uplink-state-group
uplink-state-group Create an uplink-state group and enabling the tracking of upstream links.

uplink-state-group
s (S50) Create an uplink-state group and enabling the tracking of upstream links on a switch/router.

Syntax uplink-state-group group-id

Parameters
group-id Enter the ID number of an uplink-state group. Range: 1-16.

Defaults None

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Uplink Failure Detection (UFD) | 1083

 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.12.0 Introduced on S4810

History
Version 8.4.2.3 Introduced on the S-Series S50.

Usage After you enter the command, you enter uplink-state-group configuration mode to assign upstream and
Information downstream interfaces to the group.

An uplink-state group is considered to be operationally up if at least one upstream interface in the

group is in the link-up state.

An uplink-state group is considered to be operationally down if no upstream interfaces in the group are
in the link-up state. No uplink-state tracking is performed when a group is disabled or in an
operationally down state.

To delete an uplink-state group, enter the no uplink-state-group group-id command.

To disable upstream-link tracking without deleting the uplink-state group, enter the no enable
command in uplink-state-group configuration mode.

Related
show running-config Display the current configuration of one or more uplink-state groups.
Commands
uplink-state-group
show uplink-state-group Display status information on a specified uplink-state group or all groups.

Example FTOS(conf)#uplink-state-group 16
FTOS(conf)#
02:23:17: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-ASTATE_UP: Changed uplink state group Admin state to up: Group 16

upstream
s (S50) Assign a port or port-channel to the uplink-state group as an upstream interface.

Syntax upstream interface

Parameters
interface Enter one of the following interface types:
• Fast Ethernet: fastethernet {slot/port | slot/port-range}
• 1-Gigabit Ethernet: gigabitethernet {slot/port | slot/port-range}
• 10-Gigabit Ethernet: tengigabitethernet {slot/port | slot/port-range}
• 40-Gigabit Ethernet: fortyGigE {slot/port | slot/port-range}
• Port channel: port-channel {1-512 | port-channel-range}
Where port-range and port-channel-range specify a range of ports separated by a
dash (-) and/or individual ports/port channels in any order; for example:
gigabitethernet 1/1-2,5,9,11-12
port-channel 1-3,5
A comma is required to separate each port and port-range entry.

Defaults None

Command Modes UPLINK-STATE-GROUP

1084 | Uplink Failure Detection (UFD)

 Command
Version 8.3.12.0 Introduced on S4810
History
Version 8.4.2.3 Introduced on the S-Series S50.

Usage You can assign physical port or port-channel interfaces to an uplink-state group.
Information
You can assign an interface to only one uplink-state group. Each interface assigned to an uplink-state
group must be configured as either an upstream or downstream interface, but not both.

You can assign individual member ports of a port channel to the group. An uplink-state group can
contain either the member ports of a port channel or the port channel itself, but not both.

To delete an uplink-state group, enter the no upstream interface command.

Related
downstream Assign a port or port-channel to the uplink-state group as a downstream
Commands
interface.
uplink-state-group Create an uplink-state group and enabling the tracking of upstream links.

Example FTOS(conf-uplink-state-group-16)# upstream gigabitethernet 1/10-15

FTOS(conf-uplink-state-group-16)#

Uplink Failure Detection (UFD) | 1085

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

1086 | Uplink Failure Detection (UFD)

 48
VLAN Stacking

Overview
With the VLAN-Stacking feature (also called Stackable VLANs and QinQ), available on all Dell
Networking platforms (C-Series c, E-Series e, and S-Series s) that are supported by this version
of FTOS, you can “stack” VLANs into one tunnel and switch them through the network transparently.

Commands
The commands included are:
• dei enable
• dei honor
• dei mark
• member
• show interface dei-honor
• show interface dei-mark
• vlan-stack access
• vlan-stack compatible
• vlan-stack dot1p-mapping
• vlan-stack protocol-type
• vlan-stack trunk
For information on basic VLAN commands, see Virtual LAN (VLAN) Commands in the chapter
Layer 2.

Important Points to Remember

• If Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) is not enabled across the Stackable VLAN network, STP BPDUs
from the customer’s networks are tunneled across the Stackable VLAN network.
• If STP is enabled across the Stackable VLAN network, STP BPDUs from the customer’s networks
are consumed and not tunneled across the Stackable VLAN network unless protocol tunneling is
enabled.
Note: For details on protocol tunneling on the E-Series, see Chapter 39, Service Provider Bridging.
• Layer 3 protocols are not supported on a Stackable VLAN network.

VLAN Stacking | 1087

 • Assigning an IP address to a Stackable VLAN is supported when all the members are only
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Stackable VLAN trunk ports. IP addresses on a Stackable VLAN-enabled VLAN is not supported
if the VLAN contains Stackable VLAN access ports. This facility is provided for SNMP
management over a Stackable VLAN enabled VLAN containing only Stackable VLAN trunk
interfaces. Layer 3 routing protocols on such a VLAN are not supported.
• It is recommended that you do not use the same MAC address, on different customer VLANs, on
the same Stackable VLAN.
• Interfaces configured using Stackable VLAN access or Stackable VLAN trunk commands will not
switch traffic for the default VLAN. These interfaces will switch traffic only when they are added
to a non-default VLAN.
• Starting with FTOS 7.8.1 for C-Series and S-Series (FTOS 7.7.1 for E-Series, 8.2.1.0 for E-Series
ExaScale), a vlan-stack trunk port is also allowed to be configured as a tagged port and as an
untagged port for single-tagged VLANs. When the vlan-stack trunk port is also a member of an
untagged vlan, the port should be in hybrid mode. See portmode hybrid.

dei enable
cs Make packets eligible for dropping based on their DEI value.

Syntax dei enable

Defaults Packets are colored green; no packets are dropped.

Command Mode CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series.

dei honor
cs Honor the incoming DEI value by mapping it to an FTOS drop precedence. You may enter the
command once for 0 and once for 1.

Syntax dei honor {0 | 1} {green | red | yellow}

Parameters
0|1 Enter the bit value you want to map to a color.
green | Choose a color:
red | • Green: High priority packets that are the least preferred to be dropped.
yellow • Yellow: Lower priority packets that are treated as best-effort.
• Red: Lowest priority packets that are always dropped (regardless of congestion
status).

Defaults Disabled; Packets with an unmapped DEI value are colored green.

Command Mode INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series.

1088 | VLAN Stacking

 Usage You must first enable DEI for this configuration to take effect.
Information

Related
dei enable
Commands

dei mark
cs Set the DEI value on egress according to the color currently assigned to the packet.

Syntax dei mark {green | yellow} {0 | 1}

Parameters
0|1 Enter the bit value you want to map to a color.
green | Choose a color:
yellow • Green: High priority packets that are the least preferred to be dropped.
• Yellow: Lower priority packets that are treated as best-effort.

Defaults All the packets on egress will be marked with DEI 0.

Command Mode INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series.

Usage You must first enable DEI for this configuration to take effect.
Information

Related
dei enable
Commands

member
ces Assign a Stackable VLAN access or trunk port to a VLAN. The VLAN must contain the vlan-stack
compatible command in its configuration.

Syntax member interface

To remove an interface from a Stackable VLAN, use the no member interface command.

Parameters
interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by the
slot/port information.
• For a Port Channel, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a number from 1 to
255 for TeraScale and ExaScale; 1 to 128 for C-Series and S-Series.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet followed
by the slot/port information.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Mode CONF-IF-VLAN

VLAN Stacking | 1089

 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60

History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for C-Series and S-Series
E-Series original Command

Usage You must enable the Stackable VLAN (using the vlan-stack compatible command) on the VLAN prior
Information to adding a member to the VLAN.

Related
vlan-stack compatible Enable Stackable VLAN on a VLAN.
Commands

show interface dei-honor

cs Display the dei honor configuration.

Syntax show interface dei-honor [interface slot/port | linecard number port-set number]

Parameters
interface slot/port Enter the interface type followed by the line card slot and port
number.
linecard number port-set Enter linecard followed by the line card slot number, then enter port-set
number followed by the port-pipe number.

Command Mode EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series.

Example FTOS#show interface dei-honor

Default Drop precedence: Green

Interface CFI/DEI Drop precedence
-------------------------------------------------------------
Gi 0/1 0 Green
Gi 0/1 1 Yellow
Gi 8/9 1 Red
Gi 8/40 0 Yellow

Related
dei honor
Commands

show interface dei-mark

cs Display the dei mark configuration.

Syntax show interface dei-mark [interface slot/port | linecard number port-set number]

Parameters
interface slot/port Enter the interface type followed by the line card slot and port
number.
linecard number port-set Enter linecard followed by the line card slot number, then enter port-set
number followed by the port-pipe number.

1090 | VLAN Stacking

Command Mode EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series.

Example FTOS#show interface dei-mark

Default CFI/DEI Marking: 0

Interface Drop precedence CFI/DEI
------------------------------------------------
Gi 0/1 Green 0
Gi 0/1 Yellow 1
Gi 8/9 Yellow 0
Gi 8/40 Yellow 0

Related
dei mark
Commands

vlan-stack access
ces Specify a Layer 2 port or port channel as an access port to the Stackable VLAN network.

Syntax vlan-stack access

To remove access port designation, enter no vlan-stack access.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for C-Series and S-Series
E-Series original Command

Usage Prior to enabling this command, you must enter the switchport command to place the interface in
Information Layer 2 mode.

To remove the access port designation, the port must be removed (using the no member interface
command) from all Stackable VLAN enabled VLANs.

vlan-stack compatible
ces Enable the Stackable VLAN feature on a VLAN.

Syntax vlan-stack compatible

To disable the Stackable VLAN feature on a VLAN, enter no vlan-stack compatible.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes CONF-IF-VLAN

VLAN Stacking | 1091

 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60

History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for C-Series and S-Series
E-Series original Command

Usage You must remove the members prior to disabling the Stackable VLAN feature.
Information
To view the Stackable VLANs, use the show vlan command in the EXEC Privilege mode. Stackable
VLANs contain members, designated by the M in the Q column of the command output.

Figure 48-1. show vlan Command Example with Stackable VLANs

FTOS#show vlan

Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs

NUM Status Q Ports

* 1 Inactive
2 Active M Gi 13/13
M Gi 13/0-2
3 Active M Po1(Gi 13/14-15)
M Gi 13/18
M Gi 13/3
4 Active M Po1(Gi 13/14-15)
M Gi 13/18
M Gi 13/4
5 Active M Po1(Gi 13/14-15)
M Gi 13/18
M Gi 13/5
FTOS#

vlan-stack dot1p-mapping
cs Map C-Tag dot1p values to a S-Tag dot1p value. C-Tag values may be separated by commas, and
dashed ranges are permitted. Dynamic Mode CoS overrides any Layer 2 QoS configuration in case of
conflicts.

Syntax vlan-stack dot1p-mapping c-tag-dot1p values sp-tag-dot1p value

Parameters
c-tag-dot1p value Enter the keyword followed by the customer dot1p value that will be mapped to
a service provider do1p value.
Range: 0-7
sp-tag-dot1p value Enter the keyword followed by the service provider dot1p value.
Range: 0-7

Defaults None

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series.

1092 | VLAN Stacking

vlan-stack protocol-type
ces Define the Stackable VLAN Tag Protocol Identifier (TPID) for the outer VLAN tag (also called the
VMAN tag). If you do not configure this command, FTOS assigns the value 0x9100.

Syntax vlan-stack protocol-type number

Parameters
number Enter the hexadecimal number as the Stackable VLAN tag.
On the E-Series: FTOS accepts the Most Significant Byte (MSB) and then appends zeros for
the Least Significant Byte (LSB).
On the C-Series and S-Series: You may specify both bytes of the 2-byte S-Tag TPID.
E-Series Range: 0-FF
C-Series and S-Series Range: 0-FFFF
Default: 9100

Defaults 0x9100

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series ExaScale. C-Series and S-Series accept both bytes of the
2-byte S-Tag TPID.
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for C-Series and S-Series
E-Series original Command

Usage See the FTOS Configuration Guide for specific interoperability limitations regarding the S-Tag TPID.
Information
On E-Series TeraScale, the two characters you enter in the CLI for number become the MSB, as shown
in Table 48-1.

Table 48-1. Configuring a TPID on the E-Series TeraScale

number Resulting TPID

1 0x0100
10 0x1000
More than two characters. Configuration rejected.

On E-Series ExaScale, C-Series, and S-Series, four characters you enter in the CLI for number are
interpreted as follows:

Table 48-2. Configuring a TPID on the E-Series TeraScale

number Resulting TPID

1 0x0001
10 0x0010
81 0x0081
8100 0x8100

VLAN Stacking | 1093

 Related
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

portmode hybrid Set a port (physical ports only) to accept both tagged and untagged frames. A port
Commands
configured this way is identified as a hybrid port in report displays.
vlan-stack trunk Specify a Layer 2 port or port channel as a trunk port to the Stackable VLAN network.

vlan-stack trunk
ces Specify a Layer 2 port or port channel as a trunk port to the Stackable VLAN network.

Syntax vlan-stack trunk

To remove a trunk port designation from the selected interface, enter no vlan-stack trunk.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Functionality augmented for C-Series and S-Series to enable multi-purpose use of the
port. See Usage Information, below.
Version 7.7.1.0 Functionality augmented for E-Series to enable multi-purpose use of the port. See
Usage Information, below.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for C-Series and S-Series
E-Series original Command

Usage Prior to using this command, you must execute the switchport command to place the interface in
Information Layer 2 mode.

To remove the trunk port designation, the port must first be removed (using the no member interface
command) from all Stackable VLAN-enabled VLANs.

Starting with FTOS 7.7.1.0 for E-Series, the VLAN-Stack trunk port can transparently tunnel, in a
service provider environment, customer-originated xSTP control protocol PDUs. See Chapter 39,
Service Provider Bridging.
Starting with FTOS 7.8.1.0 for C-Series and S-Series (FTOS 7.7.1 for E-Series), a VLAN-Stack trunk
port is also allowed to be configured as a tagged port and as an untagged port for single-tagged
VLANs. When the VLAN-Stack trunk port is also a member of an untagged VLAN, the port should be
in hybrid mode. See portmode hybrid.
In Example 1 below.a VLAN-Stack trunk port is configured and then also made part of a single-tagged
VLAN.

In Example 2 below, the Tag Protocol Identifier (TPID) is set to 8848. The “Gi 3/10” port is configured
to act as a VLAN-Stack access port, while the “TenGi 8/0” port will act as a VLAN-Stack trunk port,
switching Stackable VLAN traffic for VLAN 10, while also switching untagged traffic for VLAN 30
and tagged traffic for VLAN 40. (To allow VLAN 30 traffic, the native VLAN feature is required, by
executing the portmode hybrid command. See portmode hybrid in Interfaces.

1094 | VLAN Stacking

Example 1 Figure 48-2. Adding a Stackable VLAN Trunk Port to a Tagged VLAN
FTOS(conf-if-gi-0/42)#switchport
FTOS(conf-if-gi-0/42)#vlan-stack trunk
FTOS(conf-if-gi-0/42)#show config
!
interface GigabitEthernet 0/42
no ip address
switchport
vlan-stack trunk
no shutdown
FTOS(conf-if-gi-0/42)#interface vlan 100
FTOS(conf-if-vl-100)#vlan-stack compatible
FTOS(conf-if-vl-100-stack)#member gigabitethernet 0/42
FTOS(conf-if-vl-100-stack)#show config
!
interface Vlan 100
no ip address
vlan-stack compatible
member GigabitEthernet 0/42
shutdown
FTOS(conf-if-vl-100-stack)#interface vlan 20
FTOS(conf-if-vl-20)#tagged gigabitethernet 0/42
FTOS(conf-if-vl-20)#show config
!
interface Vlan 20
no ip address
tagged GigabitEthernet 0/42
shutdown
FTOS(conf-if-vl-20)#do show vlan

Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs

Q: U - Untagged, T - Tagged
x - Dot1x untagged, X - Dot1x tagged
G - GVRP tagged, M - Vlan-stack

NUM Status Description Q Ports

* 1 Inactive
20 Active T Gi 0/42
100 Active M Gi 0/42
FTOS(conf-if-vl-20)#

Example 2 Figure 48-3. Adding a Stackable VLAN Trunk Port to Tagged and Untagged VLANs
FTOS(config)#vlan-stack protocol-type 88A8
FTOS(config)#interface gigabitethernet 3/10
FTOS(conf-if-gi-3/10)#no shutdown
FTOS(conf-if-gi-3/10)#switchport
FTOS(conf-if-gi-3/10)#vlan-stack access
FTOS(conf-if-gi-3/10)#exit

FTOS(config)#interface tenGigabitethernet 8/0

FTOS(conf-if-te-10/0)#no shutdown
FTOS(conf-if-te-10/0)#portmode hybrid
FTOS(conf-if-te-10/0)#switchport
FTOS(conf-if-te-10/0)#vlan-stack trunk
FTOS(conf-if-te-10/0)#exit

FTOS(config)#interface vlan 10
FTOS(conf-if-vlan)#vlan-stack compatible
FTOS(conf-if-vlan)#member Gi 7/0, Gi 3/10, TenGi 8/0
FTOS(conf-if-vlan)#exit

FTOS(config)#interface vlan 30
FTOS(conf-if-vlan)#untagged TenGi 8/0
FTOS(conf-if-vlan)#exit
FTOS(config)#

FTOS(config)#interface vlan 40
FTOS(conf-if-vlan)#tagged TenGi 8/0
FTOS(conf-if-vlan)#exit
FTOS(config)#

VLAN Stacking | 1095

 www.dell.com | dell.com/support

1096
|
VLAN Stacking
 49
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP)

Overview
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) commands are supported on all platforms:
c, e, and s.

To enter the VRRP mode on an interface, use the vrrp-group command at the INTERFACE mode. The
interface must be in Layer 3 mode. You can configure up to 12 VRRP groups on one interface.

For configuration details, see the VRRP chapter in the FTOS Configuration Guide.

Commands
The commands are:

• advertise-interval
• authentication-type
• clear counters vrrp
• debug vrrp
• description
• disable
• hold-time
• preempt
• priority
• show config
• show vrrp
• track
• virtual-address
• vrrp-group

advertise-interval
ces Set the time interval between VRRP advertisements.

Syntax advertise-interval seconds

To return to the default settings, enter no advertise-interval.

Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) | 1097

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

seconds Enter a number of seconds.

Range: 1 to 255.
Default: 1 second.

Defaults 1 second.

Command Modes INTERFACE-VRRP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage Dell Networking recommends that you keep the default setting for this command. If you do change the
Information time interval between VRRP advertisements on one router, you must change it on all routers.

authentication-type
ces Enable authentication of VRRP data exchanges.

Syntax authentication-type simple [encryption-type] password

To delete an authentication type and password, enter no authentication-type.

Parameters
simple Enter the keyword simple to specify simple authentication.
encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following numbers:
• 0 (zero) for an unencrypted (clear text) password
• 7 (seven) for hidden text password.
password Enter a character string up to 8 characters long as a password. If you do not enter an
encryption-type, the password is stored as clear text.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes VRRP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage The password is displayed in the show config output if the encryption-type is unencrypted or clear text.
Information If you choose to encrypt the password, the show config displays an encrypted text string.

1098 | Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP)

clear counters vrrp
ces Clear the counters maintained on VRRP operations.

Syntax clear counters vrrp [vrrp-id]

Parameters
vrrp-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of the VRRP group ID.
Range: 1 to 255

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

debug vrrp
ce Allows you to enable debugging of VRRP.

Syntax debug vrrp interface [vrrp-id] {all | packets | state | timer}

To disable debugging, use the no debug vrrp interface [vrrp-id] {all | packets | state | timer}
command.

Parameters
interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by
the slot/port information.
• For Port Channel interface types, enter the keyword port-channel followed by the
number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID. The VLAN
ID range is from 1 to 4094.
vrrp-id (OPTIONAL) Enter a number from 1 to 255 as the VRRP group ID.
all Enter the keyword all to enable debugging of all VRRP groups.
bfd Enter the keyword bfd to enable debugging of all VFFP BFD interactions
packets Enter the keyword packets to enable debugging of VRRP control packets.
state Enter the keyword state to enable debugging of VRRP state changes.
timer Enter the keyword timer to enable debugging of the VRRP timer.

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
History
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) | 1099

 Usage If no options are specified, debug is active on all interfaces and all VRRP groups.
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Information

description
ces Configure a short text string describing the VRRP group.

Syntax description text

To delete a VRRP group description, enter no description.

Parameters
text Enter a text string up to 80 characters long.

Defaults Not enabled.

Command Modes VRRP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

disable
ces Disable a VRRP group.

Syntax disable

To re-enable a disabled VRRP group, enter no disable.

Defaults C and S-Series default: VRRP is enabled.

E-Series default: VRRP is disabled.

Command Modes VRRP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage To enable VRRP traffic, assign an IP address to the VRRP group using the virtual-address command
Information and enter no disable.

Related
virtual-address Specify the IP address of the Virtual Router.
Commands

1100 | Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP)

hold-time
ces Specify a delay (in seconds) before a switch becomes the MASTER virtual router. By delaying the
initialization of the VRRP MASTER, the new switch can stabilize its routing tables.

Syntax hold-time seconds

To return to the default value, enter no hold-time.

Parameters
seconds Enter a number of seconds.
Range: 0 to 65535.
Default: zero (0) seconds.

Defaults zero (0) seconds

Command Modes VRRP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage If a switch is a MASTER and you change the hold timer, you must disable and re-enable VRRP for the
Information new hold timer value to take effect.

Related
disable Disable a VRRP group.
Commands

preempt
ces Permit a BACKUP router with a higher priority value to preempt or become the MASTER router.

Syntax preempt
To prohibit preemption, enter no preempt.

Defaults Enabled (that is, a BACKUP router can preempt the MASTER router).

Command Modes VRRP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) | 1101

 priority
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

ces Specify a VRRP priority value for the VRRP group. This value is used by the VRRP protocol during
the MASTER election process.

Syntax priority priority

To return to the default value, enter no priority.

Parameters
priority Enter a number as the priority. Enter 255 only if the router’s virtual address is the same as
the interface’s primary IP address (that is, the router is the OWNER).
Range: 1 to 255.
Default: 100.

Defaults 100

Command Modes VRRP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage To guarantee that a VRRP group becomes MASTER, configure the VRRP group’s virtual address with
Information same IP address as the interface’s primary IP address and change the priority of the VRRP group to
255.

If you set the priority to 255 and the virtual-address is not equal to the interface’s primary IP address,
an error message appears.

show config
ces View the non-default VRRP configuration.

Syntax show config [verbose]

Parameters
verbose (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword verbose to view all VRRP group configuration
information, including defaults.

Command Modes VRRP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

1102 | Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP)

 Example Figure 49-1. Command Example: show config
FTOS(conf-if-vrid-4)#show con
vrrp-group 4
virtual-address 119.192.182.124
!

show vrrp
ces View the VRRP groups that are active. If no VRRP groups are active, the FTOS returns No Active
VRRP group.”

Syntax show vrrp [vrrp-id] [interface] [brief]

Parameters
vrrp-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the Virtual Router Identifier for the VRRP group to view only that
group.
Range: 1 to 255.
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by
the slot/port information.
• For Port Channel interface types, enter the keyword port-channel followed by the
number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale
• For SONET interfaces, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID. The VLAN
ID range is from 1 to 4094.
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to view a table of information on the VRRP
groups on the E-Series.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Example Figure 49-2. show vrrp brief Command Example

FTOS>Interface Grp Pri Pre State Master addr Virtual addr(s)

Description------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Gi 10/37 1 100 Y Master 200.200.200.200 200.200.200.201
Gi 10/37 2 100 Y Master 200.200.200.200 200.200.200.202 200.200.200.203 Description
Gi 10/37 3 100 Y Master 1.1.1.1 1.1.1.2
Gi 10/37 4 100 Y Master 200.200.200.200 200.200.200.206 200.200.200.207 ... short desc
Gi 10/37 254 254 Y Master 200.200.200.200 200.200.200.204 200.200.200.205
FTOS>

Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) | 1103

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Table 49-1. Command Example Descriptions: show vrrp brief

Item Description
Interface Lists the interface type, slot and port on which the VRRP group is
configured.
Grp Displays the VRRP group ID.
Pri Displays the priority value assigned to the interface.
If the track command is configured to track that interface and the interface
is disabled, the cost is subtracted from the priority value assigned to the
interface.
Pre States whether preempt is enabled on the interface.
• Y = Preempt is enabled.
• N = Preempt is not enabled.
State Displays the operational state of the interface by using one of the
following:
• NA/IF (the interface is not available).
• MASTER (the interface associated with the MASTER router).
• BACKUP (the interface associated with the BACKUP router).
Master addr Displays the IP address of the MASTER router.
Virtual addr(s) Displays the virtual IP addresses of the VRRP routers associated with the
interface.

Figure 49-3. Command Example: show vrrp

FTOS>show vrrp
------------------
GigabitEthernet 12/3, VRID: 1, Net: 10.1.1.253
State: Master, Priority: 105, Master: 10.1.1.253 (local)
Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec
Adv rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 1862, Gratuitous ARP sent: 0
Virtual MAC address:
00:00:5e:00:01:01
Virtual IP address:
10.1.1.252
Authentication: (none)
Tracking states for 1 interfaces:
Up GigabitEthernet 12/17 priority-cost 10
------------------
GigabitEthernet 12/4, VRID: 2, Net: 10.1.2.253
State: Master, Priority: 110, Master: 10.1.2.253 (local)
Hold Down: 10 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec
Adv rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 1862, Gratuitous ARP sent: 0
Virtual MAC address:
00:00:5e:00:01:02
Virtual IP address:
10.1.2.252
Authentication: (none)
Tracking states for 2 interfaces:
Up GigabitEthernet 2/1 priority-cost 10
Up GigabitEthernet 12/17 priority-cost 10
FTOS>

1104 | Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP)

 Table 49-2. Command Example Description: show vrrp

Line Beginning with Description

GigabitEthernet 12/3... Displays the Interface, the VRRP group ID, and the network address.
If the interface is no sending VRRP packets, 0.0.0.0 appears as the network
address.
State: master... Displays the interface’s state:
• Na/If (not available),
• master (MASTER virtual router)
• backup (BACKUP virtual router)
the interface’s priority and the IP address of the MASTER.
Hold Down:... This line displays additional VRRP configuration information:
• Hold Down displays the hold down timer interval in seconds.
• Preempt displays TRUE if preempt is configured and FALSE if preempt is not
configured.
• AdvInt displays the Advertise Interval in seconds.
Adv rcvd:... This line displays counters for the following:
• Adv rcvd displays the number of VRRP advertisements received on the
interface.
• Adv sent displays the number of VRRP advertisements sent on the interface.
• Gratuitous ARP sent displays the number of gratuitous ARPs sent.
Virtual MAC address Displays the virtual MAC address of the VRRP group.
Virtual IP address Displays the virtual IP address of the VRRP router to which the interface is connected.
Authentication:... States whether authentication is configured for the VRRP group. If it is, the
authentication type and the password are listed.
Tracking states... This line is displayed if the track command is configured on an interface. Below this
line, the following information on the tracked interface is displayed:
• Dn or Up states whether the interface is down or up.
• the interface type slot/port information

track
ces Monitor an interface and lower the priority value of the VRRP group on that interface if it is disabled.

Syntax track interface [priority-cost cost]

To disable monitoring, use the no track interface command.

Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) | 1105

 Parameters
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:

• For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by
the slot/port information.
• For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback followed by a number from 0
to 16383.
• For Port Channel interface types, enter the keyword port-channel followed by the
number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale
• For SONET interfaces, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
• For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.
cost (OPTIONAL) Enter a number as the amount to be subtracted from the priority value.
Range: 1 to 254.
Default: 10.

Defaults cost = 10

Command Modes VRRP

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage If the interface is disabled, the cost value is subtracted from the priority value and forces a new
Information MASTER election if the priority value is lower than the priority value in the BACKUP virtual routers.

virtual-address
ces Configure up to 12 IP addresses of virtual routers in the VRRP group. You must set at least one virtual
address for the VRRP group to start sending VRRP packets.

Syntax virtual-address ip-address1 [... ip-address12]

To delete one or more virtual IP addresses, use the no virtual-address ip-address1 [...
ip-address12] command.

Parameters
ip-address1 Enter an IP address of the virtual router in dotted decimal format.
The IP address must be on the same subnet as the interface’s primary IP address.
... ip-address12 (OPTIONAL) Enter up 11 additional IP addresses of virtual routers in dotted decimal
format. Separate the IP addresses with a space.
The IP addresses must be on the same subnet as the interface’s primary IP address.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes VRRP

1106 | Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP)

 Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced support for telnetting to the VRRP group IP address assigned using this
command
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage The VRRP group only becomes active and sends VRRP packets when a virtual IP address is
Information configured. When you delete the virtual address, the VRRP group stops sending VRRP packets.

A system message appears after you enter or delete the virtual-address command.

To guarantee that a VRRP group becomes MASTER, configure the VRRP group’s virtual address with
the same IP address as the interface’s primary IP address and change the priority of the VRRP group to
255.

You can ping the virtual addresses configured in all VRRP groups.

vrrp-group
ces Assign a VRRP ID to an interface. You can configure up to 12 VRRP groups per interface.

Syntax vrrp-group vrrp-id

Parameters
vrrp-id Enter a number as the group ID.
Range: 1 to 255.

Defaults Not configured.

Command Modes INTERFACE

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series

Usage The VRRP group only becomes active and sends VRRP packets when a virtual IP address is
Information configured. When you delete the virtual address, the VRRP group stops sending VRRP packets.

Related
virtual-address Assign up to 12 virtual IP addresses per VRRP group.
Commands

Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) | 1107

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

1108 | Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP)

 50
S-Series Debugging and Diagnostics
This chapter contains three sections:
• Diagnostics and Monitoring Commands
• Offline Diagnostic Commands
• Buffer Tuning Commands
• Hardware Commands

Diagnostics and Monitoring Commands

For similar commands, see also Chapter 6, Control and Monitoring.

logging coredump server

s Enable the S-Series to send application core dumps to an FTP server.

Syntax logging coredump server server username username password [type] password
To disable core dump logging, use the no logging coredump server server username username
password password

Parameters
server Enter the hostname or IP address of the FTP server where FTOS sends
application core dumps.
username Enter the username to access the FTP server.
type Enter the password type. Enter 0 to specify that an unencrypted password will
follow, or 7 to specify that a Type 7 encrypted password will follow.
password Enter the password to access the FTP server.

Defaults Disabled

Command Modes CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on S60
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Usage You must use this command to enable core dump logging before a software exception occurs. If the
Information FTP server is unreachable, FTOS aborts the application core dump.

S-Series Debugging and Diagnostics | 1109

 Offline Diagnostic Commands
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

The offline diagnostics test suite is useful for isolating faults and debugging hardware. While tests are
running, FTOS results are saved as a text file (TestReport-SU-X.txt) in the flash directory. This show
file command is available only on master and standby.

Important Points to Remember

• Offline diagnostics can only be run when the unit is offline.
• You can only run offline diagnostics on a unit to which you are connected via console.
In other words, you cannot run diagnostics on a unit to which you are connected via a stacking
link.
• Diagnostic results are printed to the screen. FTOS does not write them to memory.
• Diagnostics only test connectivity, not the entire data path.
The offline diagnostics commands are:
• diag stack-unit
• offline stack-unit
• online stack-unit

diag stack-unit
s Run offline diagnostics on a stack unit.

Syntax diag stack-unit number [alllevels | level0 | level1 | level2]

Parameters
number Enter the stack-unit number.
Unit ID range:
S60: 0-11
all other S-Series: 0-7
alllevels Enter the keyword alllevels to run the complete set of offline diagnostic tests.
level0 Enter the keyword level0 to run Level 0 diagnostics. Level 0 diagnostics check for the
presence of various components and perform essential path verifications. In addition, they
verify the identification registers of the components on the board.
level1 Enter the keyword Level1 to run Level 1 diagnostics. Level 1 diagnostics is a smaller set of
diagnostic tests with support for automatic partitioning. They perform status/self test for all the
components on the board and test their registers for appropriate values. In addition, they
perform extensive tests on memory devices (e.g., SDRAM, flash, NVRAM, EEPROM, and
CPLD) wherever possible. There are no tests on 10G links. At this level, stack ports are shut
down automatically.
level2 Enter the keyword level2 to run Level 2 diagnostics. Level 2 diagnostics is a full set of
diagnostic tests with no support for automatic partitioning. Level 2 diagnostics are used
primarily for on-board loopback tests and more extensive component diagnostics. Various
components on the board are put into loop back mode, and test packets are transmitted through
those components. These diagnostics also perform snake tests using VLAN configurations. You
must physically remove the unit from the stack to test 10G links.

Defaults None

1110 | S-Series Debugging and Diagnostics

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

offline stack-unit
s Place a stack unit in the offline state.

Syntax offline stack-unit number

Parameters
number Enter the stack unit number.
Unit ID range:
S60: 0-11
all other S-Series: 0-7

Defaults None

Command Mode EXEC Privilege

Command
H

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.

History
Version 8.2.1.0 Added warning message to off-line diagnostic
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Related
H

show environment (S-Series) View S-Series system component status (for example, temperature, voltage).
Commands

Usage You cannot enter this command on a Master or Standby unit.

Information
The system reboots when the off-line diagnostics complete. This is an automatic process. A warning
message appears when the offline stack-unit command is implemented.

Warning - Diagnostic execution will cause stack-unit to reboot after

completion of diags.
Proceed with Offline-Diags [confirm yes/no]:y

online stack-unit
s Place a stack unit in the online state.

Syntax online stack-unit number

Parameters
number Enter the stack unit number.
Unit ID range:
S60: 0-11
all other S-Series: 0-7

Defaults None

S-Series Debugging and Diagnostics | 1111

 Command Mode EXEC Privilege
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Command
H

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.

History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Related
show environment (S-Series) View S-Series system component status (for example, temperature, voltage).
Commands

Buffer Tuning Commands

The buffer tuning commands are:

• buffer (Buffer Profile)

• buffer (Configuration)
• buffer-profile (Configuration)
• buffer-profile (Interface)
• show buffer-profile
• show buffer-profile interface

Warning: Altering the buffer allocations is a sensitive operation. Do not use any
buffer tuning commands without first contacting the Dell Networking Technical
Assistance Center.

buffer (Buffer Profile)

cs Allocate an amount of dedicated buffer space, dynamic buffer space, or packet pointers to queues 0
to 3.

Syntax buffer [dedicated | dynamic | packets-pointers] queue0 number queue1 number queue2
number queue3 number

Parameters
dedicated Enter this keyword to configure the amount of dedicated buffer space per
queue.
dynamic Enter this keyword to configure the amount of dynamic buffer space per
Field Processor.
packets-pointers Enter this keyword to configure the number of packet pointers per queue.
queue0 number Enter this keyword to allocate an amount of buffer space or packet pointers
to Queue 0.
Dedicated Buffer Range: 0-2013
Dynamic Buffer Range:
FP: 0-2013
CSF: 0-131200 (in multiples of 80)
Packet Pointer Range: 0-2047

1112 | S-Series Debugging and Diagnostics

 queue1 number Enter this keyword to allocate an amount of buffer space or packet pointers
to Queue 1.
Dedicated Buffer Range: 0-2013
Dynamic Buffer Range:
FP: 0-2013
CSF: 0-131200 (in multiples of 80)
Packet Pointer Range: 0-2047
queue2 number Enter this keyword to allocate an amount of buffer space or packet pointers
to Queue 2.
Dedicated Buffer Range: 0-2013
Dynamic Buffer Range:
FP: 0-2013
CSF: 0-131200 (in multiples of 80)
Packet Pointer Range: 0-2047
queue3 number Enter this keyword to allocate an amount of buffer space or packet pointers
to Queue 3.
Dedicated Buffer Range: 0-2013
Dynamic Buffer Range:
FP: 0-2013
CSF: 0-131200 (in multiples of 80)
Packet Pointer Range: 0-2047

Defaults None

Command Mode BUFFER PROFILE

Command
H

Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series

Related
buffer-profile (Configuration) Create a buffer profile that can be applied to an interface.
Commands

buffer (Configuration)
cs Apply a buffer profile to all Field or Switch Fabric processors in a port-pipe.

buffer [csf | fp-uplink] linecard slot port-set port-pipe buffer-policy buffer-profile

Parameters
csf Enter this keyword to apply a buffer profile to all Switch Fabric processors
in a port-pipe.
fp-uplink Enter this keyword to apply a buffer profile to all Field Processors in a a
port-pipe.
linecard slot Enter the keyword linecard followed by the line card slot number.
port-set port-pipe Enter the keyword port-set followed by the port-pipe number.
Range: 0-3 on C-Series, 0-1 on S-Series
buffer-policy Enter the keyword buffer-policy followed by the name of a buffer profile
buffer-profile you created.

None

S-Series Debugging and Diagnostics | 1113

 Command Mode BUFFER PROFILE
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Usage If you attempt to apply a buffer profile to a non-existent port-pipe, FTOS displays the following
Information message. However, the configuration still appears in the running-config.

%DIFFSERV-2-DSA_BUFF_CARVING_INVALID_PORT_SET: Invalid FP port-set 2 for linecard 2.

Valid range of port-set is <0-1>

Usage When you remove a buffer-profile using the command no buffer-profile [fp | csf] from
Information CONFIGURATION mode, the buffer-profile name still appears in the output of show buffer-profile
[detail | summary]. After a line card reset, the buffer profile correctly returns to the default values,
but the profile name remains. Remove it from the show buffer-profile [detail | summary] command
output by entering no buffer [fp-uplink | csf] linecard port-set buffer-policy from
CONFIGURATION mode and no buffer-policy from INTERFACE mode.

Command
H

Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series

Related
buffer-profile (Configuration) Create a buffer profile that can be applied to an interface.
Commands

buffer-profile (Configuration)
cs Create a buffer profile that can be applied to an interface.

Syntax buffer-profile {{fp | csf} profile-name | global {1Q|4Q}

Parameters
fp Enter this keyword to create a buffer profile for the Field Processor.
csf Enter this keyword to create a buffer profile for the Switch Fabric Processor.
profile-name Create a name for the buffer profile.
global Apply one of two pre-defined buffer profiles to all of the port-pipes in the
system.
1Q Enter this keyword to choose a pre-defined buffer profile for single queue
(i.e non-QoS) applications.
4Q Enter this keyword to choose a pre-defined buffer profile for four queue (i.e
QoS) applications.

Defaults global 4Q

Command Mode CONFIGURATION

Command
H

History
Version 7.8.1.0 Added global keyword.
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series

Related
Commands
buffer (Buffer Profile) Allocate an amount of dedicated buffer space, dynamic buffer space,
or packet pointers to queues 0 to 3.

1114 | S-Series Debugging and Diagnostics

 Usage The buffer-profile global command fails if you have already applied a custom buffer-profile on an
Information interface. Similarly, when buffer-profile global is configured, you cannot not apply buffer-profile on
any interface.

If the default buffer-profile (4Q) is active, FTOS displays an error message instructing you to remove
the default configuration using the command no buffer-profile global.

You must reload the system for the global buffer-profile to take effect.

buffer-profile (Interface)
cs Apply a buffer profile to an interface.

Syntax buffer-profile profile-name

Parameters
profile-name Enter the name of the buffer profile you want to apply to the interface.

Defaults None

Command Mode INTERFACE

Command
H

Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series

Related
Commands
buffer-profile (Configuration) Create a buffer profile that can be applied to an interface.

show buffer-profile
cs Display the buffer profile that is applied to an interface.

Syntax show buffer-profile {detail | summary} {csf | fp-uplink}

Parameters
detail Display the buffer allocations of the applied buffer profiles.
summary Display the buffer-profiles that are applied to line card port-pipes in the
system.
csf Display the Switch Fabric Processor buffer profiles that you have applied to
line card port-pipes in the system.
fp-uplink Display the Field Processor buffer profiles that you have applied to line card
port-pipes in the system.

Defaults None

Command Mode INTERFACE

Command
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series

S-Series Debugging and Diagnostics | 1115

 Example Figure 50-1. show buffer-profile Command Example
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show buffer-profile summary fp-uplink

Linecard Port-set Buffer-profile
0 0 test1
4 0 test2
FTOS#

Related
Commands
buffer-profile (Configuration) Create a buffer profile that can be applied to an interface.

show buffer-profile interface

cs Display the buffer profile that is applied to an interface.

Syntax show buffer-profile {detail | summary} interface interface slot/port

Parameters
detail Display the buffer allocations of a buffer profile.
summary Display the Field Processors and Switch Fabric Processors that are applied
to line card port-pipes in the system.
interface interface Enter the keyword interface followed by the interface type, either
gigabitethernet or tengigabitethernet.
slot/port Enter the slot and port number of the interface.

Defaults None

Command Mode INTERFACE

Command
H

Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series

Example Figure 50-2. show buffer-profile interface Command Example

FTOS#show buffer-profile detail csf linecard 4 port-set 0
Linecard 4 Port-set 0
Buffer-profile test
Queue# Dedicated Buffer Buffer Packets
(Bytes)
0 36960 718
1 18560 358
2 18560 358
3 18560 358
4 9600 64
5 9600 64
6 9600 64
7 9600 63
FTOS#

Related
Commands
buffer-profile (Configuration) Create a buffer profile that can be applied to an interface.

1116 | S-Series Debugging and Diagnostics

Hardware Commands
These commands display information from a hardware sub-component or ASIC.

The commands are:

• clear hardware system-flow
• clear hardware system-flow
• hardware watchdog
• show hardware layer2 acl
• show hardware layer3
• show hardware stack-unit
• show hardware stack-unit buffering-unit
• show hardware system-flow

clear hardware stack-unit

s Clear statistics from selected hardware components.

Syntax clear hardware stack-unit id {counters | unit 0–1 counters | cpu data-plane statistics | cpu
party-bus statistics | stack-port 0–52}

Parameters
stack-unit id Enter the keyword stack-unit to select a particular stack member and
then enter one of the following command options to clear a specific
collection of data.
Unit ID range:
S60: 0-11
all other S-Series: 0-7
counters Enter the keyword counters to clear the counters on the selected stack
member.
unit 0–1 counters Enter the keyword unit along with a port-pipe number, from 0 to 1,
followed by the keyword counters to clear the counters on the selected
port-pipe.
Note: S25 models (S25N, S25P, S25V, etc.) have only port-pipe 0.
cpu data-plane Enter the keywords cpu data-plane statistics to clear the data plane
statistics statistics.
cpu party-bus statistics Enter the keywords cpu party-bus statistics to clear the management
statistics.
stack-port 0–52 Enter the keyword stack-port followed by the port number of the stacking
port to clear the statistics of the particular stacking port.
Range: 0 to 52
Note: You can identify stack port numbers by physical inspection of
the rear modules. The numbering is the same as for the 10G ports.
You can also inspect the output of the show system stack-ports
command.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

S-Series Debugging and Diagnostics | 1117

 Command
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.

History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Related
show hardware stack-unit Display the data plane or management plane input and output statistics of the
Commands
designated component of the designated stack member.

clear hardware system-flow

s Clear system-flow statistics from selected hardware components.

Syntax clear hardware system-flow layer2 stack-unit id port-set 0-1 counters

Parameters
stack-unit id Enter the keyword stack-unit to select a particular stack member and
then enter one of the following command options to clear a specific
collection of data.
Unit ID range:
S60: 0-11
all other S-Series: 0-7
port-set 0–1 counters Enter the keyword port-set along with a port-pipe number, from 0 to 1,
followed by the keyword counters to clear the system-flow counters on
the selected port-pipe.
Note: S25 models (S25N, S25P, S25V, etc.) have only port-pipe 0.

Defaults No default behavior or values

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Related
show hardware stack-unit Display the data plane or management plane input and output statistics of the
Commands
designated component of the designated stack member.

hardware watchdog
s Set the watchdog timer to trigger a reboot and restart the system.

Syntax hardware watchdog

Defaults Enabled

Command Mode CONFIGURATION

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced

1118 | S-Series Debugging and Diagnostics

 Usage This command enables a hardware watchdog mechanism that automatically reboots an FTOS switch/
Information router with a single unresponsive unit. This is a last resort mechanism intended to prevent a manual
power cycle.

show hardware layer2 acl

s Display Layer 2 ACL data for the selected stack member and stack member port-pipe.

Syntax show hardware layer2 acl stack-unit id port-set 0-1

Parameters
stack-unit id Enter the keyword stack-unit to select a stack ID.
Unit ID range:
S60: 0-11
all other S-Series: 0-7
port-set 0-1 Enter the keyword port-set with a port-pipe number — 0 or 1. The S25 models of
the S-Series have only port-pipe 0.

Defaults No default behavior

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

show hardware layer3

s Display Layer 3 ACL or QoS data for the selected stack member and stack member port-pipe.

Syntax show hardware layer3 {acl | qos} stack-unit id port-set 0-1

Parameters
acl | qos Enter either the keyword acl or the keyword qos to select between
ACL or QoS data.
stack-unit id Enter the keyword stack-unit to select a stack ID.
Unit ID range:
S60: 0-11
all other S-Series: 0-7
port-set 0-1 Enter the keyword port-set with a port-pipe number — 0 or 1. The S25
models of the S-Series have only port-pipe 0.

Defaults No default behavior

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

S-Series Debugging and Diagnostics | 1119

 show hardware stack-unit
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Display the data plane or management plane input and output statistics of the designated component of
the designated stack member.

Syntax show hardware stack-unit stack-unit {cpu data-plane statistics [stack-port 0-52] | cpu
party-bus statistics | drops [unit number [port 0-27]] | stack-port 0-52 | ti-monitor | unit 0-1
{counters | details | port-stats [detail] | register}}

Parameters
stack-unit stack-unit Enter the keyword stack-unit to select a particular stack member and
{command-option} then enter one of the following command options to display a
collection of data based on the option entered.
Unit ID range:
S60/S55 range: 0 - 11
S50/S25 range: 0 - 7
S4810 range: 0-5
cpu data-plane Enter the keywords cpu data-plane statistics, optionally followed by
statistics the keywords stack port and its number — 0 to 52 — to display the data
plane statistics, which shows the Higig port raw input/output counter
statistics to which the stacking module is connected.
cpu party-bus statistics Enter the keywords cpu party-bus statistics, to display the
Management plane input/output counter statistics of the pseudo party bus
interface.
drops [unit 0-1 [port Enter the drops keyword to display internal drops on the selected
0-27]] stack member. Optionally, use the unit keyword with 0 or 1 to select
port-pipe 0 or 1, and then use port 0-27 to select a port on that
port-pipe.
stack-port 0-52 Enter this keyword and a stacking port number to select a stacking
port for which to display statistics. Identify the stack port number as
you would to identify a 10G port that was in the same place in one of
the rear modules.
Note: You can identify stack port numbers by physical inspection of
the rear modules. The numbering is the same as for the 10G ports.
You can also inspect the output of the show system stack-ports
command.
unit 0-1 {counters | Enter the unit keyword followed by 0 or 1 for port-pipe 0 or 1, and
details | port-stats then enter one of the following keywords to troubleshoot errors on
[detail] | register} the selected port-pipe and to give status on why a port is not coming
up to register level: counters, details, port-stats [detail], or
register
TI monitor Enter the unit keyword to show information regarding the TI
register. S60 only

Defaults No default behavior

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.4 Added ti-monitor information for the S60.
History
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.

1120 | S-Series Debugging and Diagnostics

 Version 7.8.1.0 Modified: stack-port keyword range expanded from 49-52 to 0-52; output modified
for the cpu data-plane statistics option; the following options were added: drops
[unit 0-1 [port 0-27]] ; unit 0-1 {counters | details | port-stats [detail] |
register}
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Example 1 Figure 50-3. show hardware stack-unit cpu data-plane statistics Command Example
FTOS#show hardware stack-unit 0 cpu data-plane statistics stack-port 49
Input Statistics:
1856 packets, 338262 bytes
141 64-byte pkts, 1248 over 64-byte pkts, 11 over 127-byte pkts
222 over 255-byte pkts, 236 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts
919 Multicasts, 430 Broadcasts
0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles
0 CRC, 0 overrun, 0 discarded
Output Statistics:
325 packets, 27629 bytes, 0 underruns
9 64-byte pkts, 310 over 64-byte pkts, 1 over 127-byte pkts
1 over 255-byte pkts, 2 over 511-byte pkts, 2 over 1023-byte pkts
0 Multicasts, 3 Broadcasts, 322 Unicasts
0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions
Rate info (interval 299 seconds):
Input 00.00 Mbits/sec
Output 00.00 Mbits/sec
FTOS#

Example 2 Figure 50-4. show hardware stack-unit cpu party-bus statistics Command Example
FTOS#show hardware stack-unit 0 cpu party-bus statistics
Input Statistics:
8189 packets, 8076608 bytes
0 dropped, 0 errors
Output Statistics:
366 packets, 133100 bytes
0 errors
FTOS#

Example 3 Figure 50-5. show hardware stack-unit drops Command Example

FTOS#show hardware stack-unit 0 drops unit 1 port 27
--- Ingress Drops ---
Ingress Drops : 0
IBP CBP Full Drops : 0
PortSTPnotFwd Drops : 0
IPv4 L3 Discards : 0
Policy Discards : 0
Packets dropped by FP : 0
(L2+L3) Drops : 0
Port bitmap zero Drops : 0
Rx VLAN Drops : 0
--- Ingress MAC counters---
Ingress FCSDrops : 0
Ingress MTUExceeds : 0
--- MMU Drops ---
HOL DROPS : 0
TxPurge CellErr : 0
Aged Drops : 0
--- Egress MAC counters---
Egress FCS Drops : 0
--- Egress FORWARD PROCESSOR Drops ---
IPv4 L3UC Aged & Drops : 0
TTL Threshold Drops : 0
INVALID VLAN CNTR Drops : 0
L2MC Drops : 0
PKT Drops of ANY Conditions : 0
Hg MacUnderflow : 0
TX Err PKT Counter : 0 25
FTOS#

S-Series Debugging and Diagnostics | 1121

 Example 4 Figure 50-6. show hardware stack-unit port-stats Command Example
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#show hardware stack-unit 0 unit 0 port-stats

ena/ speed/ link auto STP lrn inter max loop
port link duplex scan neg? state pause discrd ops face frame back
ge0 down - SW Yes Block Untag FA SGMII 1554
ge1 !ena - SW Yes Block Tag FA SGMII 1554
ge2 !ena - SW Yes Block Tag FA SGMII 1554
ge3 !ena - SW Yes Block Tag FA SGMII 1554
ge4 !ena - SW Yes Forward Tag F SGMII 1554
ge5 !ena - SW Yes Forward Tag F SGMII 1554
ge6 !ena - SW Yes Forward Tag F SGMII 1554
ge7 !ena - SW Yes Forward Tag F SGMII 1554
ge8 !ena - SW Yes Forward Tag F SGMII 1554
ge9 !ena - SW Yes Forward Tag F SGMII 1554
ge10 !ena - SW Yes Forward Tag F SGMII 9252
ge11 !ena - SW Yes Forward Tag F SGMII 9252
ge12 !ena - SW Yes Forward Tag F SGMII 1554
ge13 !ena - SW Yes Forward Tag F SGMII 1554
ge14 !ena - SW Yes Forward Tag F SGMII 1554
ge15 !ena - SW Yes Forward Tag F SGMII 1554
ge16 !ena - SW Yes Forward Tag F SGMII 1554
ge17 !ena - SW Yes Forward Tag F SGMII 1554
ge18 !ena - SW Yes Forward Tag F SGMII 1554
ge19 !ena - SW Yes Forward Tag F SGMII 1554
ge20 !ena - SW Yes Forward Tag F SGMII 1554
ge21 !ena - SW Yes Forward Tag F SGMII 1554
ge22 !ena - SW Yes Forward Tag F SGMII 1554
ge23 !ena - SW Yes Forward Tag F SGMII 1554
hg0 up 12G FD SW No Forward None F XGMII 16360
hg1 up 12G FD SW No Forward None F XGMII 16360
hg2 down 10G FD SW No Forward None F XGMII 16360
hg3 down 10G FD SW No Forward None F XGMII 16360
0
FTOS#

1122 | S-Series Debugging and Diagnostics

Example 5 Figure 50-7. show hardware stack-unit unit 1 register Command Example
FTOS#show hardware stack-unit 0 unit 1 register
0x0068003c AGINGCTRMEMDEBUG.mmu0 = 0x00000000
0x0068003d AGINGEXPMEMDEBUG.mmu0 = 0x00000000
0x00680017 ASFCONFIG.mmu0 = 0x0000000e
0x0060004c ASFPORTSPEED.ge0 = 0x00000000
0x0060104c ASFPORTSPEED.ge1 = 0x00000000
0x0060204c ASFPORTSPEED.ge2 = 0x00000000
0x0060304c ASFPORTSPEED.ge3 = 0x00000000
0x0060404c ASFPORTSPEED.ge4 = 0x00000000
0x0060504c ASFPORTSPEED.ge5 = 0x00000000
0x0060604c ASFPORTSPEED.ge6 = 0x00000000
0x0060704c ASFPORTSPEED.ge7 = 0x00000000
0x0060804c ASFPORTSPEED.ge8 = 0x00000000
0x0060904c ASFPORTSPEED.ge9 = 0x00000000
0x0060a04c ASFPORTSPEED.ge10 = 0x00000000
0x0060b04c ASFPORTSPEED.ge11 = 0x00000000
0x0060c04c ASFPORTSPEED.ge12 = 0x00000000
0x0060d04c ASFPORTSPEED.ge13 = 0x00000000
0x0060e04c ASFPORTSPEED.ge14 = 0x00000000
0x0060f04c ASFPORTSPEED.ge15 = 0x00000000
0x0061004c ASFPORTSPEED.ge16 = 0x00000000
0x0061104c ASFPORTSPEED.ge17 = 0x00000000
0x0061204c ASFPORTSPEED.ge18 = 0x00000000
0x0061304c ASFPORTSPEED.ge19 = 0x00000000
0x0061404c ASFPORTSPEED.ge20 = 0x00000000
0x0061504c ASFPORTSPEED.ge21 = 0x00000000
0x0061604c ASFPORTSPEED.ge22 = 0x00000000
0x0061704c ASFPORTSPEED.ge23 = 0x00000005
0x0061804c ASFPORTSPEED.hg0 = 0x00000007
0x0061904c ASFPORTSPEED.hg1 = 0x00000007
0x0061a04c ASFPORTSPEED.hg2 = 0x00000000
0x0061b04c ASFPORTSPEED.hg3 = 0x00000000
0x0061c04c ASFPORTSPEED.cpu0 = 0x00000000
0x00780000 AUX_ARB_CONTROL.ipipe0 = 0x0000001c
0x0e700102 BCAST_BLOCK_MASK.ge0 = 0x00000000
0x0e701102 BCAST_BLOCK_MASK.ge1 = 0x00000000
0x0e702102 BCAST_BLOCK_MASK.ge2 = 0x00000000
0x0e703102 BCAST_BLOCK_MASK.ge3 = 0x00000000
0x0e704102 BCAST_BLOCK_MASK.ge4 = 0x00000000
0x0e705102 BCAST_BLOCK_MASK.ge5 = 0x00000000
0x0e706102 BCAST_BLOCK_MASK.ge6 = 0x00000000
0x0e707102 BCAST_BLOCK_MASK.ge7 = 0x00000000
0x0e708102 BCAST_BLOCK_MASK.ge8 = 0x00000000
0x0e709102 BCAST_BLOCK_MASK.ge9 = 0x00000000
0x0e70a102 BCAST_BLOCK_MASK.ge10 = 0x00000000
0x0e70b102 BCAST_BLOCK_MASK.ge11 = 0x00000000
0x0e70c102 BCAST_BLOCK_MASK.ge12 = 0x00000000
0x0e70d102 BCAST_BLOCK_MASK.ge13 = 0x00000000
0x0e70e102 BCAST_BLOCK_MASK.ge14 = 0x00000000
0x0e70f102 BCAST_BLOCK_MASK.ge15 = 0x00000000
0x0e710102 BCAST_BLOCK_MASK.ge16 = 0x00000000
0x0e711102 BCAST_BLOCK_MASK.ge17 = 0x00000000
0x0e712102 BCAST_BLOCK_MASK.ge18 = 0x00000000
0x0e713102 BCAST_BLOCK_MASK.ge19 = 0x00000000
0x0e714102 BCAST_BLOCK_MASK.ge20 = 0x00000000
0x0e715102 BCAST_BLOCK_MASK.ge21 = 0x00000000
0x0e716102 BCAST_BLOCK_MASK.ge22 = 0x00000000
0x0e717102 BCAST_BLOCK_MASK.ge23 = 0x00000000
0x0e718102 BCAST_BLOCK_MASK.hg0 = 0x00000000
0x0e719102 BCAST_BLOCK_MASK.hg1 = 0x00000000
0x0e71a102 BCAST_BLOCK_MASK.hg2 = 0x00000000
0x0e71b102 BCAST_BLOCK_MASK.hg3 = 0x00000000
0x0e71c102 BCAST_BLOCK_MASK.cpu0 = 0x00000000
0x0b700001 BCAST_STORM_CONTROL.ge0 = 0x00000000
0x0b701001 BCAST_STORM_CONTROL.ge1 = 0x00000000
0x0b702001 BCAST_STORM_CONTROL.ge2 = 0x00000000
0x0b703001 BCAST_STORM_CONTROL.ge3 = 0x00000000
0x0b704001 BCAST_STORM_CONTROL.ge4 = 0x00000000
0x0b705001 BCAST_STORM_CONTROL.ge5 = 0x00000000
0x0b706001 BCAST_STORM_CONTROL.ge6 = 0x00000000
0x0b707001 BCAST_STORM_CONTROL.ge7 = 0x00000000
0x0b708001 BCAST_STORM_CONTROL.ge8 = 0x00000000
0x0b709001 BCAST_STORM_CONTROL.ge9 = 0x00000000
0x0b70a001 BCAST_STORM_CONTROL.ge10 = 0x00000000
!------------------ output truncated ---------------!

S-Series Debugging and Diagnostics | 1123

 Example 4 Figure 50-8. show hardware stack-unit unit 1 details Command Example
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

FTOS#
show hardware stack-unit 0 unit 1 details

******************************************************

The total no of FP & CSF Devices in the Card is 2

The total no of FP Devices in the Card is 2
The total no of CSF Devices in the Card is 0
The number of ports in device 0 is - 24
The number of Hg ports in devices 0 is - 4
The CPU Port of the device is 28
The number of ports in device 1 is - 24
The number of Hg ports in devices 1 is - 4
The CPU Port of the device is 28
The staring unit no the SWF in the device is 0
******************************************************

The Current Link Status Is

Front End Link Status 0x000000000000400000000000

Front End Port Present Status 0x000000000000000000000000
Back Plane Link Status 0x00000000

******************************************************

Link Status of all the ports in the Device - 1

The linkStatus of Front End Port 0 is FALSE

The linkStatus of Front End Port 1 is FALSE
The linkStatus of Front End Port 2 is FALSE
The linkStatus of Front End Port 3 is FALSE
The linkStatus of Front End Port 4 is FALSE
The linkStatus of Front End Port 5 is FALSE
The linkStatus of Front End Port 6 is FALSE
The linkStatus of Front End Port 7 is FALSE
The linkStatus of Front End Port 8 is FALSE
The linkStatus of Front End Port 9 is FALSE
The linkStatus of Front End Port 10 is FALSE
The linkStatus of Front End Port 11 is FALSE
The linkStatus of Front End Port 12 is FALSE
The linkStatus of Front End Port 13 is FALSE
The linkStatus of Front End Port 14 is FALSE
The linkStatus of Front End Port 15 is FALSE
The linkStatus of Front End Port 16 is FALSE
The linkStatus of Front End Port 17 is FALSE
The linkStatus of Front End Port 18 is FALSE
The linkStatus of Front End Port 19 is FALSE
The linkStatus of Front End Port 20 is FALSE
The linkStatus of Front End Port 21 is FALSE
The linkStatus of Front End Port 22 is FALSE
The linkStatus of Front End Port 23 is TRUE
The linkStatus of Hg Port 24 is TRUE
The linkStatus of Hg Port 25 is TRUE
The linkStatus of Hg Port 26 is FALSE
The linkStatus of Hg Port 27 is FALSE
!------------------ output truncated ---------------!

1124 | S-Series Debugging and Diagnostics

show hardware stack-unit buffering-unit
Display the multicast buffering information for a standalone switch.

Syntax show hardware stack-unit stack-unit buffering unit {[execute-shell-cmd command name |
no-more] [queue-stats multicast cos-queue queue number]

Parameters
stack-unit stack-unit Enter the keyword stack-unit to select a particular stack member and
{command-option} then enter one of the following command options to display a
collection of data based on the option entered.
Unit ID range:
S60 range: 0 - 11
buffering unit Select the stack member to be the buffering unit.
S60 range: 0 - 11
execute-shell-cmd Enter the keyword execute-shell-cmd to execute a shell commands:
command name
no-more Enter this command to stop collecting the buffer usage information for
multicast traffic enabled by the shell command.
queue-stats multicast Enter the keyword queue-stats multicast cos-queue to collect the
cos-queue queue number multicast cos values for each of the 8 virtual queues.

Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.8 Introduced on the S60.
History

Related
Commands
queue backplane multicast Enable buffering for all multicast traffic on the buffering unit.

show hardware system-flow

s Display Layer 3 ACL or QoS data for the selected stack member and stack member port-pipe.

Syntax show hardware system-flow layer2 stack-unit idport-set 0-1 [counters]

Parameters
acl | qos For the selected stack member and stack member port-pipe, display which
system flow entry the packet hits and what queue the packet takes as it dumps
the raw system flow tables.
stack-unit id Enter the keyword stack-unit to select a stack member ID.
Unit ID range:
S60: 0-11
all other S-Series: 0-7
port-set 0-1 Enter the keyword port-set with a port-pipe number — 0 or 1. The S25 models of
[counters] the S-Series have only port-pipe 0.
(OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword counters to display hit counters for the selected
ACL or QoS option.

Defaults No default behavior

S-Series Debugging and Diagnostics | 1125

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Command Modes EXEC Privilege

Command
Version 8.3.3.1 Introduced on the S60.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S-Series

Example 1 Figure 50-9. show hardware system-flow layer2 counters Command Example
FTOS#show hardware system-flow layer2 stack-unit 0 port-set 0 counters
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
EntryId Description #HITS
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
2048 STP BPDU Redirects 0
2047 LLDP BPDU Redirects 0
2045 LACP traffic Redirects 0
2044 GVRP traffic Redirects 0
2043 ARP Reply Redirects 0
2042 802.1x frames Redirects 0
2041 VRRP frames Redirects 0
2040 GRAT ARP 0
2039 DROP Cases 0
2038 OSPF1 STUB 0
2037 OSPF2 STUB 0
2036 VRRP STUB 0
2035 L2_DST_HIT+BC MAC+VLAN 4095 0
2034 L2_DST_HIT+BC MAC 0
2033 Catch all 0
384 OSPF[224.0.0.5] Packets 0
383 OSPF[224.0.0.6] Packets 0
382 VRRP Packets 0
380 BCast L2_DST_HIT on VLAN 4095 0
379 BCAST L2_DST_HIT Packets 0
4 Unknown L2MC Packets 0
3 L2DLF Packets 0
2 L2UCAST Packets 0
1 L2BCASTPackets 0
25
FTOS#

1126 | S-Series Debugging and Diagnostics

Example 2 Figure 50-10. show hardware system-flow layer2 (non-counters) Command Example
FTOS#show hardware system-flow layer2 stack-unit 0 port-set 0

############## FP Entry for redirecting STP BPDU to CPU Port ################

EID 2048: gid=1,
slice=15, slice_idx=0x00, prio=0x800, flags=0x82, Installed
tcam: color_indep=0, higig=0, higig_mask=0,
KEY=0x00000000 00000000 00000000 0180c200 00000000 00000000 00000000
, FPF4=0x00
MASK=0x00000000 00000000 00000000 ffffffff ffff0000 00000000 00000000
, 0x00
action={act=Drop, param0=0(0x00), param1=0(0x00)},
action={act=CosQCpuNew, param0=7(0x07), param1=0(0x00)},
action={act=CopyToCpu, param0=0(0x00), param1=0(0x00)},
action={act=UpdateCounter, param0=1(0x01), param1=0(0x00)},
meter=NULL,
counter={idx=0, mode=0x01, entries=1}

################ FP Entry for redirecting LLDP BPDU to RSM ################

EID 2047: gid=1,
slice=15, slice_idx=0x01, prio=0x7ff, flags=0x82, Installed
tcam: color_indep=0, higig=0, higig_mask=0,
KEY=0x00000000 00000000 00000000 0180c200 000e0000 00000000 00000000
, FPF4=0x00
MASK=0x00000000 00000000 00000000 ffffffff ffff0000 00000000 00000000
, 0x00
action={act=Drop, param0=0(0x00), param1=0(0x00)},
action={act=CosQCpuNew, param0=7(0x07), param1=0(0x00)},
action={act=CopyToCpu, param0=0(0x00), param1=0(0x00)},
action={act=UpdateCounter, param0=1(0x01), param1=0(0x00)},
meter=NULL,
counter={idx=1, mode=0x01, entries=1}

############## FP Entry for redirecting LACP traffic to CPU Port ############

EID 2045: gid=1,
slice=15, slice_idx=0x02, prio=0x7fd, flags=0x82, Installed
tcam: color_indep=0, higig=0, higig_mask=0,
KEY=0x00000000 00000000 00000000 0180c200 00020000 00000000 00000000
, FPF4=0x00
MASK=0x00000000 00000000 00000000 ffffffff ffff0000 00000000 00000000
, 0x00
action={act=Drop, param0=0(0x00), param1=0(0x00)},
action={act=CosQCpuNew, param0=7(0x07), param1=0(0x00)},
action={act=CopyToCpu, param0=0(0x00), param1=0(0x00)},
action={act=UpdateCounter, param0=1(0x01), param1=0(0x00)},
meter=NULL,
counter={idx=2, mode=0x01, entries=1}

################# FP Entry for redirecting GVRP traffic to RSM ###########

EID 2044: gid=1,
slice=15, slice_idx=0x03, prio=0x7fc, flags=0x82, Installed
tcam: color_indep=0, higig=0, higig_mask=0,
KEY=0x00000000 00000000 00000000 0180c200 00210000 00000000 00000000
, FPF4=0x00
MASK=0x00000000 00000000 00000000 ffffffff ffff0000 00000000 00000000
, 0x00
action={act=Drop, param0=0(0x00), param1=0(0x00)},
action={act=CosQCpuNew, param0=7(0x07), param1=0(0x00)},
action={act=CopyToCpu, param0=0(0x00), param1=0(0x00)},
action={act=UpdateCounter, param0=1(0x01), param1=0(0x00)},
meter=NULL,
counter={idx=3, mode=0x01, entries=1}

################# FP Entry for redirecting ARP Replies to RSM #############

EID 2043: gid=1,
slice=15, slice_idx=0x04, prio=0x7fb, flags=0x82, Installed
tcam: color_indep=0, higig=0, higig_mask=0,
KEY=0x00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000806 00001600
, FPF4=0x00
MASK=0x00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 0000ffff 00001600
, 0x00
action={act=Drop, param0=0(0x00), param1=0(0x00)},
action={act=CosQCpuNew, param0=6(0x06), param1=0(0x00)},
action={act=CopyToCpu, param0=0(0x00), param1=0(0x00)},
action={act=UpdateCounter, param0=1(0x01), param1=0(0x00)},
!--------- output truncated -----------------!

S-Series Debugging and Diagnostics | 1127

www.dell.com | dell.com/support

1128 | S-Series Debugging and Diagnostics

 A
SNMP Traps
This chapter lists the traps sent by FTOS. Each trap is listed by the fields Message ID, Trap Type, and
Trap Option, and the next is the message(s) associated with the trap.

Table 51-1. SNMP Traps and Error Messages

Message ID Trap Type Trap Option

COLD_START SNMP COLDSTART
%SNMP-5-SNMP_COLD_START: SNMP COLD_START trap sent.
WARM_START SNMP WARMSTART

COPY_CONFIG_COMPLETE SNMP NONE

SNMP Copy Config Command Completed
LINK_DOWN SNMP LINKDOWN
%IFA-1-PORT_LINKDN: changed interface state to down:%d
LINK_UP SNMP LINKUP
%IFA-1-PORT_LINKUP: changed interface state to up:%d
AUTHENTICATION_FAIL SNMP AUTH
%SNMP-3-SNMP_AUTH_FAIL: SNMP Authentication failed.Request with invalid community string.
EGP_NEIGHBOR_LOSS SNMP NONE

OSTATE_DOWN SNMP LINKDOWN

%IFM-1-OSTATE_DN: changed interface state to down:%s
%IFM-5-CSTATE_DN:Changed interface Physical state to down: %s
OSTATE_UP SNMP LINKUP
%IFM-1-OSTATE_UP: changed interface state to up:%s
%IFM-5-CSTATE_UP: Changed interface Physical state to up: %s
RMON_RISING_THRESHOLD SNMP NONE
%RPM0-P:CP %SNMP-4-RMON_RISING_THRESHOLD: RMON rising threshold alarm from SNMP OID <oid>
RMON_FALLING_THRESHOLD SNMP NONE
%RPM0-P:CP %SNMP-4-RMON_FALLING_THRESHOLD: RMON falling threshold alarm from SNMP OID <oid>
RMON_HC_RISHING_THRESHOLD SNMP NONE
%RPM0-P:CP %SNMP-4-RMON_HC_RISING_THRESHOLD: RMON high-capacity rising threshold alarm from SNMP OID <oid>
RMON_HC_FALLING_THRESHOLD SNMP NONE
%RPM0-P:CP %SNMP-4-RMON_HC_FALLING_THRESHOLD: RMON high-capacity falling threshold alarm from SNMP OID <oid>
RESV NONE NONE
N/A

SNMP Traps | 1129

 Table 51-1. SNMP Traps and Error Messages (continued)
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Message ID Trap Type Trap Option

CHM_CARD_DOWN ENVMON NONE
%CHMGR-1-CARD_SHUTDOWN: %sLine card %d down - %s
%CHMGR-2-CARD_DOWN: %sLine card %d down - %s
CHM_CARD_UP ENVMON NONE
%CHMGR-5-LINECARDUP: %sLine card %d is up
CHM_CARD_MISMATCH ENVMON NONE
%CHMGR-3-CARD_MISMATCH: Mismatch: line card %d is type %s - type %s required.
CHM_CARD_PROBLEM ENVMON NONE

CHM_ALARM_CUTOFF ENVMON NONE

CHM_SFM_UP ENVMON NONE

CHM_SFM_DOWN ENVMON NONE

CHM_RPM_UP ENVMON NONE

%RAM-6-RPM_STATE: RPM1 is in Active State
%RAM-6-RPM_STATE: RPM0 is in Standby State
CHM_RPM_DOWN ENVMON NONE
%CHMGR-2-RPM_DOWN: RPM 0 down - hard reset
%CHMGR-2-RPM_DOWN: RPM 0 down - card removed
CHM_RPM_PRIMARY ENVMON NONE
%RAM-5-COLD_FAILOVER: RPM Failover Completed
%RAM-5-HOT_FAILOVER: RPM Failover Completed
%RAM-5-FAST_FAILOVER: RPM Failover Completed
CHM_SFM_ADD ENVMON NONE
%TSM-5-SFM_DISCOVERY: Found SFM 1
CHM_SFM_REMOVE ENVMON NONE
%TSM-5-SFM_REMOVE: Removed SFM 1
CHM_MAJ_SFM_DOWN ENVMON NONE
%CHMGR-0-MAJOR_SFM: Major alarm: Switch fabric down
CHM_MAJ_SFM_DOWN_CLR ENVMON NONE
%CHMGR-5-MAJOR_SFM_CLR: Major alarm cleared: Switch fabric up
CHM_MIN_SFM_DOWN ENVMON NONE
%CHMGR-2-MINOR_SFM: MInor alarm: No working standby SFM
CHM_MIN_SFM_DOWN_CLR ENVMON NONE
%CHMGR-5-MINOR_SFM_CLR: Minor alarm cleared: Working standby SFM present
CHM_PWRSRC_DOWN ENVMON SUPPLY
%CHMGR-2-PEM_PRBLM: Major alarm: problem with power entry module %s

1130 | SNMP Traps

Table 51-1. SNMP Traps and Error Messages (continued)

Message ID Trap Type Trap Option

CHM_PWRSRC_CLR ENVMON SUPPLY
%CHMGR-5-PEM_OK: Major alarm cleared: power entry module %s is good
CHM_MAJ_ALARM_PS ENVMON SUPPLY
%CHMGR-0-MAJOR_PS: Major alarm: insufficient power %s
CHM_MAJ_ALARM_PS_CLR ENVMON SUPPLY
%CHMGR-5-MAJOR_PS_CLR: major alarm cleared: sufficient power
CHM_MIN_ALARM_PS ENVMON SUPPLY
%CHMGR-1-MINOR_PS: Minor alarm: power supply non-redundant
CHM_MIN_ALARM_PS_CLR ENVMON SUPPLY
%CHMGR-5-MINOR_PS_CLR: Minor alarm cleared: power supply redundant
CHM_MIN_ALRM_TEMP ENVMON TEMP
%CHMGR-2-MINOR_TEMP: Minor alarm: chassis temperature
CHM_MIN_ALRM_TEMP_CLR ENVMON TEMP
%CHMRG-5-MINOR_TEMP_CLR: Minor alarm cleared: chassis temperature normal (%s %d temperature is within threshold of %dC)
CHM_MAJ_ALRM_TEMP ENVMON TEMP
%CHMGR-2-MAJOR_TEMP: Major alarm: chassis temperature high (%s temperature reaches or exceeds threshold of %dC)
CHM_MAJ_ALRM_TEMP_CLR ENVMON TEMP
%CHMGR-2-MAJOR_TEMP_CLR: Major alarm cleared: chassis temperature lower (%s %d temperature is within threshold of %dC)
CHM_FANTRAY_BAD ENVMON FAN
For E1200: %CHMGR-2-FAN_TRAY_BAD: Major alarm: fan tray %d is missing or down
%CHMGR-2-ALL_FAN_BAD: Major alarm: all fans in fan tray %d are down.
For E600 and E300: %CHMGR-2-FANTRAYBAD: Major alarm: fan tray is missing
%CHMGR-2-FANSBAD: Major alarm: most or all fans in fan tray are down
CHM_FANTRAY_BAD_CLR ENVMON FAN
For the E1200: %CHMGR-5-FAN_TRAY_OK: Major alarm cleared: fan tray %d present
For the E600 and E300: %CHMGR-5-FANTRAYOK: Major alarm cleared: fan tray present
CHM_MIN_FANBAD ENVMON FAN
For the E1200: %CHMGR-2-FAN_BAD: Minor alarm: some fans in fan tray %d are down
For the E600 and E300: %CHMGR- 2-1FANBAD: Minor alarm: fan in fan tray is down
CHM_MIN_FANBAD_CLR ENVMON FAN
For E1200: %CHMGR-2-FAN_OK: Minor alarm cleared: all fans in fan tray %d are good
For E600 and E300: %CHMGR-5-FANOK: Minor alarm cleared: all fans in fan tray are good
TME_TASK_SUSPEND ENVMON NONE
%TME-2-TASK SUSPENDED: SUSPENDED - svce:%d - inst:%d - task:%s
TME_TASK_TERM ENVMON NONE
%TME-2-ABNORMAL_TASK_TERMINATION: CRASH - task:%s %s
CHM_CPU_THRESHOLD ENVMON NONE
%CHMGR-5-CPU_THRESHOLD: Cpu %s usage above threshold. Cpu5SecUsage (%d)
CHM_CPU_THRESHOLD_CLR ENVMON NONE

SNMP Traps | 1131

 Table 51-1. SNMP Traps and Error Messages (continued)
www.dell.com | dell.com/support

Message ID Trap Type Trap Option

%CHMGR-5-CPU_THRESHOLD_CLR: Cpu %s usage drops below threshold. Cpu5SecUsage (%d)
CHM_MEM_THRESHOLD ENVMON NONE
%CHMGR-5-MEM_THRESHOLD: Memory %s usage above threshold. MemUsage (%d)
CHM_MEM_THRESHOLD_CLR ENVMON NONE
%CHMGR-5-MEM_THRESHOLD_CLR: Memory %s usage drops below threshold. MemUsage (%d)
MACMGR_STN_MOVE ENVMON NONE
%MACMGR-5-DETECT_STN_MOVE: Station Move threshold exceeded for Mac %s in vlan %d
VRRP_BADAUTH PROTO NONE
%RPM1-P:RP2 %VRRP-3-VRRP_BAD_AUTH: vrid-1 on Gi 11/12 rcvd pkt with authentication type mismatch.
%RPM1-P:RP2 %VRRP-3-VRRP_BAD_AUTH: vrid-1 on Gi 11/12 rcvd pkt with authentication failure.
VRRP_GO_MASTER PROTO NONE
%VRRP-6-VRRP_MASTER: vrid-%d on %s entering MASTER
BGP4_ESTABLISHED PROTO NONE
%TRAP-5-PEER_ESTABLISHED: Neighbor %a, state %s
BGP4_BACKW_XSITION PROTO NONE
%TRAP-5-BACKWARD_STATE_TRANS: Neighbor %a, state %s

1132 | SNMP Traps